CellAdvisorTM

JD700B Series
User’s Guide
CellAdvisorTM
JD700B Series

User’s Guide

JD785B/JD745B Base Station Analyzer

JD786B/JD746B RF Analyzer

JD788B/JD748B Signal Analyzer

Viavi Solutions
1-844-GO-VIAVI
www.viavisolutions.com
Notice
Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was accurate at
the time of release. However, information is subject to change without notice, and Viavi
Solutions reserves the right to provide an addendum to this document with information
not available at the time that this document was created.

Copyright/Trademarks
© Copyright 2015 Viavi Solutions Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this guide may be
reproduced or transmitted, electronically or otherwise, without written permission of the
publisher. Viavi Solutions, the Viavi logo, CellAdvisor, RANAdvisor TrueSite, StrataSync,
and EZ-Cal are trademarks of Viavi Solutions Inc. (“Viavi”). All trademarks and
registered trademarks are the property of their respective companies.

Google Maps and Google Earth are either trademarks or registered trademarks of
Google in the United States and/or other countries.

Bluetooth is a trademark or a registered trademark of Bluetooth Special Interest Group

(SIG) Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.

Android is a trademark or a registered trademark of Google in the United States and/or

other countries.

iOS is a trademark or a registered trademark of Apple Inc. in the United States and/or
other countries.

Windows and Windows 7 are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Copyright release
Reproduction and distribution of this guide is authorized for US Government purposes
only.

Ordering information
This document is a product of Viavi’s Technical Publications Department, issued as part
of the JD700B Series. The catalog number for a published manual is JD700B362 -
printed. The catalog number for an electronic manual on CD-ROM is JD700B361 -
electronic.

Open source disclaimer – IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY

The JD700B Series includes third party software licensed under the terms of separate
open source software licenses. By using this software, you agree to comply with the
terms and conditions of the applicable open source software licenses. Software
originated by Viavi is not subject to third party licenses. Terms of the Viavi Software
License different from applicable third party licenses are offered by Viavi alone.

This product incorporates open source software entitled “zlib”. The zlib is the
compression library written by Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler, who granted permission
to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 3

 This product includes open source software developed by the Apache Software
Foundation (http://www.apache.org/).

This product used free library for JPEG image compression written and distributed by
Independent JPEG Group or IJG (http://www.ijg.org/).

This product used free, open-source JavaScript library entitled “jQuery”. It is licensed
under the MIT License (http://jquery.org/license/).

See “Viewing OSS license” on page 41 for more information.

Terms and conditions

Specifications, terms, and conditions are subject to change without notice. The provision
of hardware, services, and/or software is subject to Viavi’s standard terms and
conditions, available at www.viavisolutions.com/en/terms-and-conditions.

NRTL compliance
This product was tested according to UL 61010-1:2012 and CAN/CSA C22.2
No. 61010-1-12. Conformity with these requirements is based upon compliance with the
standard IEC 61010-1. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity is provided upon your
request.

Ce produit a été testé selon la norme UL 61010-1 : 2012 et CAN / CSA C22.2
No. 61010-1-12. La conformité à ces exigences est fondée sur la conformité à la norme CEI
61010-1. Une copie de la déclaration de conformité est disponible sur demande.

EMC directive compliance

This product was tested and conforms to the EMC Directive, 2004/108/EC and its
amending directives for electromagnetic compatibility. Conformity with this directive is
based upon compliance with the harmonized European standards: EN61326-1 and
CISPR11. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity is provided upon your request.

Low voltage directive compliance

This product was tested and conforms to the Low Voltage Directive, 2006/95/EC and its
amending directives. Conformity with this directive is based upon compliance with the
harmonized European standard EN61010-1. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity is
provided upon your request.

WEEE and battery directive compliance

Viavi has established processes in compliance with the Waste Electrical and Electronic
Equipment (WEEE) Directive, 2002/96/EC, and the Battery Directive, 2006/66/EC.

This product, and the batteries used to power the product, should not be disposed of as
unsorted municipal waste and should be collected separately and disposed of according
to your national regulations. In the European Union, all equipment and batteries
purchased from Viavi after 2005-08-13 can be returned for disposal at the end of its
useful life. Viavi will ensure that all waste equipment and batteries returned are reused,

4 JD700B Series User’s Guide

recycled, or disposed of in an environmentally friendly manner, and in compliance with
all applicable national and international waste legislation.

It is the responsibility of the equipment owner to return equipment and batteries to Viavi
for appropriate disposal. If the equipment or battery was imported by a reseller whose
name or logo is marked on the equipment or battery, then the owner should return the
equipment or battery directly to the reseller.
Instructions for returning waste equipment and batteries to Viavi can be found in the
Environmental section of Viavi’s web site at www.viavisolutions.com. If you have
questions concerning disposal of your equipment or batteries, contact Viavi’s WEEE
Program Management team.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 5

Contents
About This Guide .................................................................................................................................. 19
Purpose and scope ......................................................................................................................................................... 20
Assumptions ................................................................................................................................................................... 20
Safety and compliance information.................................................................................................................................. 20
Conventions .................................................................................................................................................................... 21
Technical assistance ....................................................................................................................................................... 22

Chapter 1 JD700B Series Overview .............................................................................................. 23

About the JD700B series................................................................................................................................................. 24
Features and capabilities ................................................................................................................................................ 24
Options ........................................................................................................................................................................... 25
Specifications .................................................................................................................................................................. 25
AC power ............................................................................................................................................................... 25
Physical specifications............................................................................................................................................ 25

Chapter 2 Getting Started .............................................................................................................. 26

Unpacking the JD700B series ......................................................................................................................................... 27
Exploring the JD700B series ........................................................................................................................................... 27
Front panel ............................................................................................................................................................. 28
Top panel................................................................................................................................................................ 29
Installing battery pack...................................................................................................................................................... 32
Starting up the JD700B series ......................................................................................................................................... 32
Managing files ................................................................................................................................................................. 33
Using save ............................................................................................................................................................. 33
Using load .............................................................................................................................................................. 35
Using file manager ................................................................................................................................................. 36
Configuring system ......................................................................................................................................................... 36
Setting frequency reference.................................................................................................................................... 36
Setting date and time.............................................................................................................................................. 36
Setting language .................................................................................................................................................... 37
Setting power on .................................................................................................................................................... 37
Changing display mode .......................................................................................................................................... 37
Setting sleep time ................................................................................................................................................... 38
Adjusting LCD brightness ....................................................................................................................................... 38
Adjusting volume .................................................................................................................................................... 38
Upgrading firmware ......................................................................................................................................................... 38
Checking installed firmware version........................................................................................................................ 39
Installing new firmware ........................................................................................................................................... 39
Managing licenses .......................................................................................................................................................... 40
Checking installed or installable options ................................................................................................................. 40
Installing purchased options ................................................................................................................................... 40
Loading temporary license...................................................................................................................................... 41
Viewing OSS license .............................................................................................................................................. 41
Performing service diagnostic ......................................................................................................................................... 41
Viewing system log ................................................................................................................................................. 41
Running self-test .................................................................................................................................................... 42
Performing factory reset ......................................................................................................................................... 42
Re-aligning touch screen ........................................................................................................................................ 42
Using system administration............................................................................................................................................ 42
Logging in............................................................................................................................................................... 43
Changing password ................................................................................................................................................ 43
Locking limit key ..................................................................................................................................................... 43
Running IP test................................................................................................................................................................ 43
Activating StrataSync ...................................................................................................................................................... 44
Setting up Internet connection ................................................................................................................................ 44

JD700B Series User’s Guide 6

 Establishing a connection to StrataSync ................................................................................................................. 45
StrataSync status indicators ................................................................................................................................... 46
Setting communication .................................................................................................................................................... 46
Configuring Ethernet............................................................................................................................................... 46
Setting for JDViewer and JDRemote ...................................................................................................................... 47
Setting USBTMC mode .......................................................................................................................................... 48
Setting SCPI mode ................................................................................................................................................. 48
Configuring LMF setting ......................................................................................................................................... 48
Enabling Bluetooth connection ............................................................................................................................... 48
Enabling Wi-Fi connection ...................................................................................................................................... 49
Enabling Web-based remote control ....................................................................................................................... 50

Chapter 3 Analyzing Measurement Results ................................................................................... 52

Using marker................................................................................................................................................................... 53
Using peak search .......................................................................................................................................................... 54

Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer .............................................................................................. 55

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................................... 56
Display overview ............................................................................................................................................................. 56
Connecting a cable ......................................................................................................................................................... 57
Selecting measurement mode ......................................................................................................................................... 58
Configuring test parameters ............................................................................................................................................ 58
Setting frequency ................................................................................................................................................... 58
Setting amplitude.................................................................................................................................................... 60
Setting bandwidth ................................................................................................................................................... 62
Setting average ...................................................................................................................................................... 62
Setting sweep ......................................................................................................................................................... 63
Using signal generator (RF source) ........................................................................................................................ 64
Conducting spectrum measurements .............................................................................................................................. 65
Setting trace ........................................................................................................................................................... 66
Setting limit............................................................................................................................................................. 67
Setting frequency offset .......................................................................................................................................... 68
Conducting RF measurements ........................................................................................................................................ 68
Channel power ....................................................................................................................................................... 68
Occupied bandwidth ............................................................................................................................................... 69
Spectrum emission mask (SEM)............................................................................................................................. 71
Adjacent channel power (ACP) ............................................................................................................................... 72
Multi-ACP ............................................................................................................................................................... 74
Spurious emissions ................................................................................................................................................ 76
AM/FM audio demodulation .................................................................................................................................... 77
Field strength meter................................................................................................................................................ 79
Route map.............................................................................................................................................................. 81
Dual spectrum ........................................................................................................................................................ 85
PIM detection (single and multiple carriers) ............................................................................................................ 86

Chapter 5 Using Interference Analyzer .......................................................................................... 88

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................................... 89
Display overview ............................................................................................................................................................. 89
Connecting a cable ......................................................................................................................................................... 90
Using an Omni or Yagi antenna .............................................................................................................................. 90
Using an AntennaAdvisor handle ............................................................................................................................ 91
Selecting measurement mode ......................................................................................................................................... 91
Configuring test parameters ............................................................................................................................................ 92
Setting frequency ................................................................................................................................................... 92
Setting amplitude.................................................................................................................................................... 93
Setting bandwidth ................................................................................................................................................... 95
Setting average ...................................................................................................................................................... 95
Setting sweep ......................................................................................................................................................... 96
Conducting spectrum measurements .............................................................................................................................. 97
Setting trace ........................................................................................................................................................... 97
Sound indicator ...................................................................................................................................................... 98
AM/FM audio demodulation .................................................................................................................................... 99
Interference ID........................................................................................................................................................ 99
Conducting interference measurements ........................................................................................................................ 100
Spectrogram ......................................................................................................................................................... 100
Dual spectrogram ................................................................................................................................................. 101
RSSI..................................................................................................................................................................... 102

JD700B Series User’s Guide 7

 Interference finder ................................................................................................................................................ 104
Spectrum Replayer ............................................................................................................................................... 108
Radar Chart .......................................................................................................................................................... 109
Setting limit for interference analyzer..............................................................................................................................114
Setting a single limit line ........................................................................................................................................114
Setting a multi-segment line ..................................................................................................................................114
Defining a channel limit .........................................................................................................................................115

Chapter 6 Using GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer................................................................... 116

Introduction ....................................................................................................................................................................117
Display overview ............................................................................................................................................................117
Connecting a cable ........................................................................................................................................................118
Direct connection...................................................................................................................................................118
Indirect connection ................................................................................................................................................118
Over the air (OTA) .................................................................................................................................................119
Selecting measurement mode ....................................................................................................................................... 120
Configuring test parameters .......................................................................................................................................... 120
Setting frequency ................................................................................................................................................. 120
Setting amplitude.................................................................................................................................................. 121
Setting average .................................................................................................................................................... 123
Setting sweep mode ............................................................................................................................................. 123
Setting trigger source ........................................................................................................................................... 123
Conducting spectrum measurements ............................................................................................................................ 124
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 124
Setting trace ......................................................................................................................................................... 124
Conducting RF measurements ...................................................................................................................................... 125
Channel power ..................................................................................................................................................... 125
Occupied bandwidth ............................................................................................................................................. 126
Spectrum emission mask (SEM)........................................................................................................................... 127
Output RF spectrum ............................................................................................................................................. 128
Spurious emissions .............................................................................................................................................. 129
Setting limit for RF tests ....................................................................................................................................... 131
Conducting power vs. time measurements .................................................................................................................... 131
Power vs. time (slot) ............................................................................................................................................. 131
Power vs. time (frame) ......................................................................................................................................... 133
Conducting constellation measurements ....................................................................................................................... 134
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 134
Setting limit for constellation ................................................................................................................................. 135
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 136
Performing auto measurements .................................................................................................................................... 136
Setting limit for auto measure ............................................................................................................................... 137
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 137
Setting display ...................................................................................................................................................... 138
Conducting GSM OTA measurements ........................................................................................................................... 138
Channel scanner .................................................................................................................................................. 138
Frequency scanner ............................................................................................................................................... 140
Multipath profile .................................................................................................................................................... 141
Modulation analyzer ............................................................................................................................................. 142

Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer...................................................................... 144

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................... 145
Display overview ........................................................................................................................................................... 145
Connecting a cable ....................................................................................................................................................... 146
Direct connection.................................................................................................................................................. 146
Indirect connection ............................................................................................................................................... 146
Over the air (OTA) ................................................................................................................................................ 147
Selecting measurement mode ....................................................................................................................................... 148
Configuring test parameters .......................................................................................................................................... 148
Setting frequency ................................................................................................................................................. 148
Setting amplitude.................................................................................................................................................. 149
Setting average .................................................................................................................................................... 151
Setting sweep mode ............................................................................................................................................. 151
Setting trigger source ........................................................................................................................................... 151
Setting external clock ........................................................................................................................................... 151
Conducting spectrum measurements ............................................................................................................................ 153
Setting trace ......................................................................................................................................................... 153
Conducting RF measurements ...................................................................................................................................... 154

8 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Channel power ..................................................................................................................................................... 154
Occupied bandwidth ............................................................................................................................................. 155
Spectrum emission mask (SEM)........................................................................................................................... 156
ACLR ................................................................................................................................................................... 157
Multi-ACLR ........................................................................................................................................................... 158
Spurious emissions .............................................................................................................................................. 159
Setting limit for RF tests ....................................................................................................................................... 160
Conducting modulation measurements ......................................................................................................................... 161
Constellation ........................................................................................................................................................ 161
Code domain power ............................................................................................................................................. 162
Relative code domain power ................................................................................................................................ 165
Codogram ............................................................................................................................................................ 167
RCSI .................................................................................................................................................................... 169
CDP Table ............................................................................................................................................................ 171
Setting limit for modulation tests ........................................................................................................................... 172
Performing auto measurements .................................................................................................................................... 173
Setting limit for auto measure ............................................................................................................................... 173
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 173
Setting display ...................................................................................................................................................... 174
Performing power statistics CCDF measurement .......................................................................................................... 174
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 175
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 175
Conducting WCDMA/HSPA+ OTA measurements ......................................................................................................... 175
Channel scanner .................................................................................................................................................. 176
Scramble scanner ................................................................................................................................................ 177
Multipath profile .................................................................................................................................................... 178
Code domain power ............................................................................................................................................. 178
Route map............................................................................................................................................................ 180

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer ................................................................................. 185

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................... 186
Display overview ........................................................................................................................................................... 187
Connecting a cable ....................................................................................................................................................... 187
Direct connection.................................................................................................................................................. 187
Indirect connection ............................................................................................................................................... 188
Over the air (OTA) ................................................................................................................................................ 188
Selecting measurement mode ....................................................................................................................................... 189
Configuring test parameters .......................................................................................................................................... 190
Setting frequency ................................................................................................................................................. 190
Setting amplitude.................................................................................................................................................. 190
Setting average .................................................................................................................................................... 192
Setting sweep mode ............................................................................................................................................. 192
Setting trigger source ........................................................................................................................................... 193
Setting external clock ........................................................................................................................................... 193
Conducting spectrum measurements ............................................................................................................................ 194
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 194
Setting trace ......................................................................................................................................................... 194
Conducting RF measurements ...................................................................................................................................... 195
Channel power ..................................................................................................................................................... 195
Occupied bandwidth ............................................................................................................................................. 196
Spectrum emission mask (SEM)........................................................................................................................... 197
ACLR ................................................................................................................................................................... 198
Multi-ACLR ........................................................................................................................................................... 199
Spurious emissions .............................................................................................................................................. 200
Setting limit for RF tests ....................................................................................................................................... 202
Conducting power vs. time (frame) measurements ........................................................................................................ 202
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 202
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 203
Conducting modulation measurements ......................................................................................................................... 203
Constellation ........................................................................................................................................................ 203
Data channel ........................................................................................................................................................ 205
Control channel .................................................................................................................................................... 208
Subframe...............................................................................................................................................................211
Frame................................................................................................................................................................... 214
Time alignment error ............................................................................................................................................ 216
Data allocation map .............................................................................................................................................. 217
Setting limit for modulation tests ........................................................................................................................... 220

JD700B Series User’s Guide 9

 Performing auto measurements .................................................................................................................................... 221
Conformance test ................................................................................................................................................. 221
Maintenance test .................................................................................................................................................. 222
Signal performance test ........................................................................................................................................ 224
DAS test ............................................................................................................................................................... 225
Performing power statistics CCDF measurements ........................................................................................................ 227
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 227
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 228
Performing carrier aggregation measurements .............................................................................................................. 228
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 228
Setting display ...................................................................................................................................................... 229
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 230
Using marker ........................................................................................................................................................ 230
Conducting LTE-FDD OTA measurements .................................................................................................................... 231
Channel scanner .................................................................................................................................................. 231
ID scanner ............................................................................................................................................................ 232
Multipath profile .................................................................................................................................................... 234
Control channel .................................................................................................................................................... 235
Datagram ............................................................................................................................................................. 237
Route map............................................................................................................................................................ 238
Performing RAN performance testing ............................................................................................................................ 245
Preparing your smartphone for remote control via Bluetooth ................................................................................ 245
Setting parameters on RANAdvisor TrueSiteTM ..................................................................................................... 246
Performing RAN performance testing ................................................................................................................... 246
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 247
Setting performance score level ........................................................................................................................... 247

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer ................................................................................. 249

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................... 250
Display overview ........................................................................................................................................................... 251
Connecting a cable ....................................................................................................................................................... 251
Direct connection.................................................................................................................................................. 251
Indirect connection ............................................................................................................................................... 252
Over the air (OTA) ................................................................................................................................................ 252
Selecting measurement mode ....................................................................................................................................... 253
Configuring test parameters .......................................................................................................................................... 254
Setting frequency ................................................................................................................................................. 254
Setting amplitude.................................................................................................................................................. 254
Setting average .................................................................................................................................................... 256
Setting sweep mode ............................................................................................................................................. 256
Setting trigger source ........................................................................................................................................... 257
Setting external clock ........................................................................................................................................... 257
Conducting spectrum measurements ............................................................................................................................ 258
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 258
Setting trace ......................................................................................................................................................... 259
Conducting RF measurements ...................................................................................................................................... 260
Channel power ..................................................................................................................................................... 260
Occupied bandwidth ............................................................................................................................................. 261
Spectrum emission mask (SEM)........................................................................................................................... 262
ACLR ................................................................................................................................................................... 263
Multi-ACLR ........................................................................................................................................................... 264
Spurious emissions .............................................................................................................................................. 266
Setting limit for RF tests ....................................................................................................................................... 267
Conducting power vs. time measurements .................................................................................................................... 268
Power vs. time (slot) ............................................................................................................................................. 268
Power vs. time (frame) ......................................................................................................................................... 270
Conducting modulation measurements ......................................................................................................................... 271
Constellation ........................................................................................................................................................ 271
Data channel ........................................................................................................................................................ 274
Control channel .................................................................................................................................................... 276
Subframe.............................................................................................................................................................. 279
Time alignment error ............................................................................................................................................ 283
Data allocation map .............................................................................................................................................. 284
Setting limit for modulation tests ........................................................................................................................... 287
Performing auto measurements .................................................................................................................................... 288
Conformance test ................................................................................................................................................. 288
Maintenance test .................................................................................................................................................. 290

10 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Signal performance test ........................................................................................................................................ 292
DAS test ............................................................................................................................................................... 293
Performing power statistics CCDF measurements ........................................................................................................ 294
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 294
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 295
Performing carrier aggregation measurements .............................................................................................................. 295
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 295
Setting display ...................................................................................................................................................... 296
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 297
Using marker ........................................................................................................................................................ 297
Conducting LTE-TDD OTA measurements .................................................................................................................... 298
Channel scanner .................................................................................................................................................. 298
ID scanner ............................................................................................................................................................ 299
Multipath profile .................................................................................................................................................... 301
Control channel .................................................................................................................................................... 302
Datagram ............................................................................................................................................................. 304
Route map............................................................................................................................................................ 305
Performing RAN performance testing ............................................................................................................................ 312
Preparing your smartphone for remote control via Bluetooth ................................................................................ 312
Setting parameters on RANAdvisor TrueSiteTM ..................................................................................................... 313
Performing RAN performance testing ................................................................................................................... 313
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 314
Setting performance score level ........................................................................................................................... 314

Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer ...................................................................................... 316

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................... 317
Display overview ........................................................................................................................................................... 318
Connecting a cable ....................................................................................................................................................... 318
Direct connection.................................................................................................................................................. 318
Indirect connection ............................................................................................................................................... 319
Over the air (OTA) ................................................................................................................................................ 319
Selecting measurement mode ....................................................................................................................................... 320
Configuring test parameters .......................................................................................................................................... 320
Setting frequency ................................................................................................................................................. 320
Setting amplitude.................................................................................................................................................. 321
Setting average .................................................................................................................................................... 323
Setting sweep mode ............................................................................................................................................. 323
Setting trigger source ........................................................................................................................................... 324
Setting external clock ........................................................................................................................................... 324
Conducting spectrum measurements ............................................................................................................................ 325
Setting trace ......................................................................................................................................................... 325
Conducting RF measurements ...................................................................................................................................... 326
Channel power ..................................................................................................................................................... 326
Occupied bandwidth ............................................................................................................................................. 327
Spectrum emission mask (SEM)........................................................................................................................... 328
ACPR ................................................................................................................................................................... 329
Multi-ACPR .......................................................................................................................................................... 330
Spurious emissions .............................................................................................................................................. 331
Setting limit for RF tests ....................................................................................................................................... 332
Conducting modulation measurements ......................................................................................................................... 333
Constellation ........................................................................................................................................................ 333
Code domain power ............................................................................................................................................. 334
Codogram ............................................................................................................................................................ 335
RCSI .................................................................................................................................................................... 337
CDP Table ............................................................................................................................................................ 339
Setting limit for modulation tests ........................................................................................................................... 340
Performing auto measurements .................................................................................................................................... 341
Setting limit for auto measure ............................................................................................................................... 341
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 341
Setting display ...................................................................................................................................................... 342
Performing power statistics CCDF measurements ........................................................................................................ 343
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 343
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 343
Conducting CDMA OTA measurements ......................................................................................................................... 344
Channel scanner .................................................................................................................................................. 344
PN scanner .......................................................................................................................................................... 346
Multipath profile .................................................................................................................................................... 347

JD700B Series User’s Guide 11

 Code domain power ............................................................................................................................................. 348
Route map............................................................................................................................................................ 350

Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer ..................................................................................... 354

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................... 355
Display overview ........................................................................................................................................................... 355
Connecting a cable ....................................................................................................................................................... 356
Direct connection.................................................................................................................................................. 356
Indirect connection ............................................................................................................................................... 356
Over the air (OTA) ................................................................................................................................................ 357
Selecting measurement mode ....................................................................................................................................... 358
Configuring test parameters .......................................................................................................................................... 358
Setting frequency ................................................................................................................................................. 358
Setting amplitude.................................................................................................................................................. 359
Setting average .................................................................................................................................................... 361
Setting sweep mode ............................................................................................................................................. 361
Setting trigger source ........................................................................................................................................... 361
Setting external clock ........................................................................................................................................... 362
Conducting spectrum measurements ............................................................................................................................ 363
Setting trace ......................................................................................................................................................... 363
Conducting RF measurements ...................................................................................................................................... 364
Channel power ..................................................................................................................................................... 364
Occupied bandwidth ............................................................................................................................................. 365
Spectrum emission mask (SEM)........................................................................................................................... 366
ACPR ................................................................................................................................................................... 366
Multi-ACPR .......................................................................................................................................................... 367
Spurious emissions .............................................................................................................................................. 368
Setting limit for RF tests ....................................................................................................................................... 370
Conducting power vs. time measurements .................................................................................................................... 370
Power vs. time (idle slot)....................................................................................................................................... 370
Power vs. time (active slot) ................................................................................................................................... 371
Setting limit for power vs. time tests...................................................................................................................... 372
Conducting modulation measurements ......................................................................................................................... 372
Constellation ........................................................................................................................................................ 372
Code domain power ............................................................................................................................................. 375
MAC Codogram.................................................................................................................................................... 377
RCSI .................................................................................................................................................................... 378
MAC CDP Table ................................................................................................................................................... 380
Setting limit for modulation tests ........................................................................................................................... 381
Performing auto measurements .................................................................................................................................... 382
Setting limit for auto measure ............................................................................................................................... 382
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 382
Setting display ...................................................................................................................................................... 383
Performing power statistics CCDF measurements ........................................................................................................ 384
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 384
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 384
Conducting EV-DO OTA measurements ........................................................................................................................ 384
Channel scanner .................................................................................................................................................. 385
PN scanner .......................................................................................................................................................... 386
Multipath profile .................................................................................................................................................... 387
Code domain power ............................................................................................................................................. 388
Route map............................................................................................................................................................ 390

Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer ............................................................................. 394

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................... 395
Display overview ........................................................................................................................................................... 396
Connecting a cable ....................................................................................................................................................... 396
Direct connection.................................................................................................................................................. 396
Indirect connection ............................................................................................................................................... 397
Over the air (OTA) ................................................................................................................................................ 397
Selecting measurement mode ....................................................................................................................................... 398
Configuring test parameters .......................................................................................................................................... 398
Setting frequency ................................................................................................................................................. 398
Setting amplitude.................................................................................................................................................. 399
Setting average .................................................................................................................................................... 401
Setting sweep mode ............................................................................................................................................. 401
Setting trigger source ........................................................................................................................................... 401

12 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Setting external clock ........................................................................................................................................... 402
Conducting spectrum measurements ............................................................................................................................ 402
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 402
Setting trace ......................................................................................................................................................... 403
Conducting RF measurements ...................................................................................................................................... 404
Channel power ..................................................................................................................................................... 404
Occupied bandwidth ............................................................................................................................................. 405
Spectrum emission mask (SEM)........................................................................................................................... 406
ACLR ................................................................................................................................................................... 407
Multi-ACLR ........................................................................................................................................................... 408
Spurious emissions .............................................................................................................................................. 409
Setting limit for RF tests ........................................................................................................................................411
Conducting power vs. time measurements .....................................................................................................................411
Power vs. time (slot) ..............................................................................................................................................411
Power vs. time (frame) ......................................................................................................................................... 413
Power vs. time (mask) .......................................................................................................................................... 414
Timogram ............................................................................................................................................................. 415
Setting limit for power vs. time tests...................................................................................................................... 417
Conducting modulation measurements ......................................................................................................................... 417
Constellation ........................................................................................................................................................ 418
Midamble power ................................................................................................................................................... 419
Code power .......................................................................................................................................................... 420
Code error ............................................................................................................................................................ 422
Setting limit for modulation tests ........................................................................................................................... 423
Performing auto measurements .................................................................................................................................... 424
Setting limit........................................................................................................................................................... 424
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 424
Setting display ...................................................................................................................................................... 425
Conducting TD-SCDMA OTA measurements................................................................................................................. 426
Sync-DL ID scanner ............................................................................................................................................. 426
Sync-DL ID vs. Tau ............................................................................................................................................... 426
Sync-DL ID multipath ............................................................................................................................................ 427
Sync-DL ID analyzer ............................................................................................................................................. 428
Route map............................................................................................................................................................ 429

Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer ......................................................................... 433

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................... 434
Display overview ........................................................................................................................................................... 434
Connecting a cable ....................................................................................................................................................... 435
Direct connection.................................................................................................................................................. 435
Indirect connection ............................................................................................................................................... 435
Over the air (OTA) ................................................................................................................................................ 436
Selecting measurement mode ....................................................................................................................................... 437
Configuring test parameters .......................................................................................................................................... 437
Setting frequency ................................................................................................................................................. 437
Setting amplitude.................................................................................................................................................. 438
Setting average .................................................................................................................................................... 440
Setting sweep mode ............................................................................................................................................. 440
Setting trigger source ........................................................................................................................................... 440
Setting external clock ........................................................................................................................................... 440
Conducting spectrum measurements ............................................................................................................................ 441
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 441
Setting trace ......................................................................................................................................................... 442
Conducting RF measurements ...................................................................................................................................... 443
Channel power ..................................................................................................................................................... 443
Occupied bandwidth ............................................................................................................................................. 445
Spectrum emission mask (SEM)........................................................................................................................... 446
Spurious emissions .............................................................................................................................................. 447
Setting limit for RF tests ....................................................................................................................................... 449
Conducting power vs. time (frame) measurements ........................................................................................................ 449
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 449
Setting limit for power vs. time tests...................................................................................................................... 450
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 451
Conducting modulation measurements ......................................................................................................................... 451
Constellation ........................................................................................................................................................ 451
Spectral flatness ................................................................................................................................................... 453
EVM vs. subcarrier ............................................................................................................................................... 454

JD700B Series User’s Guide 13

 EVM vs. symbol.................................................................................................................................................... 456
Setting limit for modulation tests ........................................................................................................................... 457
Performing auto measurements .................................................................................................................................... 458
Performing power statistics CCDF measurements ........................................................................................................ 459
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 460
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 460
Conducting Mobile WiMAX OTA measurements ............................................................................................................ 460
Preamble scanner ................................................................................................................................................ 460
Multipath profile .................................................................................................................................................... 462
Preamble power trend .......................................................................................................................................... 463
Route map............................................................................................................................................................ 464

Chapter 14 Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer ............................................................................. 468

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................... 469
Display overview ........................................................................................................................................................... 469
Selecting measurement mode ....................................................................................................................................... 470
Configuring test parameters .......................................................................................................................................... 470
Setting frequency ................................................................................................................................................. 470
Setting distance .................................................................................................................................................... 471
Adjusting scale ..................................................................................................................................................... 471
Setting sweep mode ............................................................................................................................................. 472
Performing calibration ................................................................................................................................................... 472
1-port calibration................................................................................................................................................... 473
2-port calibration................................................................................................................................................... 475
Calibration status indicators.................................................................................................................................. 477
Connecting a cable ....................................................................................................................................................... 477
Connecting a cable for reflection, DTF, 1-port phase, and Smith Chart measurements ......................................... 477
Connecting a cable for cable loss (1 port) measurements..................................................................................... 478
Connecting a cable for 2-port vector measurements ............................................................................................. 478
Connecting a cable for 2-port scalar measurements ............................................................................................. 479
Performing reflection measurements ............................................................................................................................. 480
Making a measurement ........................................................................................................................................ 480
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 481
Performing DTF measurements .................................................................................................................................... 481
Making a measurement ........................................................................................................................................ 481
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 483
Performing reflection-DTF measurements ..................................................................................................................... 483
Making a measurement ........................................................................................................................................ 484
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 484
Performing cable loss (1 port) measurements ............................................................................................................... 485
Making a measurement ........................................................................................................................................ 485
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 486
Performing 1-port phase measurements ....................................................................................................................... 487
Making a measurement ........................................................................................................................................ 487
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 487
Performing Smith chart measurements ......................................................................................................................... 488
Making a measurement ........................................................................................................................................ 488
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 489
Performing 2-port vector measurements ....................................................................................................................... 489
Making a measurement ........................................................................................................................................ 489
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 490
Performing 2-port scalar measurements........................................................................................................................ 490
Making a measurement ........................................................................................................................................ 491
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 491
Analyzing measurements .............................................................................................................................................. 492
Setting trace and display ...................................................................................................................................... 492
Setting zoom zones .............................................................................................................................................. 492
Setting alternate sweep ........................................................................................................................................ 493
Setting limit for cable and antenna analyzer ......................................................................................................... 493

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing ...................................................................................... 495

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................... 496
Display overview ........................................................................................................................................................... 497
Selecting measurement mode ....................................................................................................................................... 497
Performing layer 2 monitoring ....................................................................................................................................... 498
Connecting cables ................................................................................................................................................ 498
Selecting measurement mode .............................................................................................................................. 498

14 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 498
Setting Rx optic limit ............................................................................................................................................. 499
Conducting layer 2 monitoring .............................................................................................................................. 499
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 500
Performing layer 2 term testing ..................................................................................................................................... 500
Selecting measurement mode .............................................................................................................................. 500
Connecting cables ................................................................................................................................................ 500
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 501
Setting Rx optic limit ............................................................................................................................................. 501
Conducting layer 2 term test ................................................................................................................................. 501
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 503
Performing interference analysis ................................................................................................................................... 503
Connecting cables ................................................................................................................................................ 503
Selecting measurement mode .............................................................................................................................. 504
Configuring test parameters ................................................................................................................................. 504
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 509
Configuring CPRI parameters ............................................................................................................................... 510
Conducting spectrum measurement ......................................................................................................................511
Conducting dual spectrum measurement.............................................................................................................. 513
Conducting spectrogram....................................................................................................................................... 515
Conducting dual spectrogram ............................................................................................................................... 516
Conducting RSSI .................................................................................................................................................. 517
Performing spectrum replayer............................................................................................................................... 518
Setting limit for interference analysis .................................................................................................................... 519
Performing PIM detection (single and multiple carriers) ................................................................................................. 520
Connecting cables ................................................................................................................................................ 520
Selecting measurement mode .............................................................................................................................. 521
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 521
Configuring CPRI parameters ............................................................................................................................... 522
Calculating possible PIM ...................................................................................................................................... 523
Detecting PIM (single and multiple carriers).......................................................................................................... 524
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 525
Performing LTE-FDD downlink signal analysis .............................................................................................................. 525
Connecting cables ................................................................................................................................................ 525
Selecting measurement mode .............................................................................................................................. 526
Configuring test parameters ................................................................................................................................. 526
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 528
Configuring CPRI parameters ............................................................................................................................... 529
Viewing decoded MIB and SIB1/2 information ...................................................................................................... 530
Conducting spectrum measurement ..................................................................................................................... 531
Conducting channel power measurement ............................................................................................................. 533
Occupied bandwidth ............................................................................................................................................. 534
Conducting power vs. time (frame) measurement ................................................................................................. 535
Conducting constellation measurement ................................................................................................................ 536
Conducting data channel measurement ............................................................................................................... 538
Conducting control channel measurement ............................................................................................................ 540
Conducting subframe measurement ..................................................................................................................... 542
Conducting frame measurement........................................................................................................................... 545
Conducting time alignment error measurement .................................................................................................... 547
Conducting data allocation map measurement ..................................................................................................... 548
Performing power statistics CCDF measurement ................................................................................................. 550
Setting limit for RFoCPRI signal analysis .............................................................................................................. 551
Performing LTE-TDD downlink signal analysis .............................................................................................................. 552
Connecting cables ................................................................................................................................................ 553
Selecting measurement mode .............................................................................................................................. 553
Configuring test parameters ................................................................................................................................. 554
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 556
Configuring CPRI parameters ............................................................................................................................... 556
Conducting spectrum measurement ..................................................................................................................... 558
Conducting channel power measurement ............................................................................................................. 559
Occupied bandwidth ............................................................................................................................................. 560
Conducting power vs. time (frame) measurement ................................................................................................. 561
Conducting constellation measurement ................................................................................................................ 562
Conducting data channel measurement ............................................................................................................... 564
Conducting control channel measurement ............................................................................................................ 566
Conducting subframe measurement ..................................................................................................................... 568
Conducting time alignment error measurement .................................................................................................... 571
Conducting data allocation map measurement ..................................................................................................... 572

JD700B Series User’s Guide 15

 Performing power statistics CCDF measurement ................................................................................................. 574
Setting limit for RFoCPRI signal analysis .............................................................................................................. 575
Using signal generator .................................................................................................................................................. 576
Using RF source in RFoCPRI testing.................................................................................................................... 576
Using CPRI source ............................................................................................................................................... 577

Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing.................................................................................... 579

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................... 580
Display overview ........................................................................................................................................................... 580
Selecting measurement mode ....................................................................................................................................... 581
Performing layer 2 monitoring ....................................................................................................................................... 581
Connecting cables ................................................................................................................................................ 581
Selecting measurement mode .............................................................................................................................. 582
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 582
Setting Rx optic limit ............................................................................................................................................. 582
Conducting layer 2 monitoring .............................................................................................................................. 583
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 584
Performing layer 2 term testing ..................................................................................................................................... 584
Connecting cables ................................................................................................................................................ 584
Selecting measurement mode .............................................................................................................................. 585
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 585
Setting Rx optic limit ............................................................................................................................................. 585
Conducting layer 2 term test ................................................................................................................................. 585
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 587
Performing interference analysis ................................................................................................................................... 587
Connecting cables ................................................................................................................................................ 587
Selecting measurement mode .............................................................................................................................. 588
Configuring test parameters ................................................................................................................................. 588
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 592
Conducting spectrum measurement ..................................................................................................................... 593
Conducting spectrogram....................................................................................................................................... 594
Conducting RSSI .................................................................................................................................................. 595
Performing spectrum replayer............................................................................................................................... 597
Setting limit for interference analysis .................................................................................................................... 598
Performing PIM detection (single and multiple carriers) ................................................................................................. 599
Connecting cables ................................................................................................................................................ 599
Selecting measurement mode .............................................................................................................................. 599
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 599
Calculating possible PIM ...................................................................................................................................... 601
Detecting PIM (single and multiple carriers).......................................................................................................... 601
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 602
Performing LTE-FDD downlink signal analysis .............................................................................................................. 602
Connecting cables ................................................................................................................................................ 603
Selecting measurement mode .............................................................................................................................. 603
Configuring test parameters ................................................................................................................................. 603
Setting measure setup.......................................................................................................................................... 605
Conducting spectrum measurement ..................................................................................................................... 606
Conducting channel power measurement ............................................................................................................. 608
Occupied bandwidth ............................................................................................................................................. 609
Conducting power vs. time (frame) measurement ................................................................................................. 610
Conducting constellation measurement .................................................................................................................611
Conducting data channel measurement ............................................................................................................... 613
Conducting control channel measurement ............................................................................................................ 615
Conducting subframe measurement ..................................................................................................................... 617
Conducting frame measurement........................................................................................................................... 620
Conducting time alignment error measurement .................................................................................................... 622
Conducting data allocation map measurement ..................................................................................................... 623
Performing power statistics CCDF measurement ................................................................................................. 625
Setting limit for RFoOBSAI signal analysis ........................................................................................................... 626
Using signal generator .................................................................................................................................................. 627
Using RF source in RFoOBSAI testing ................................................................................................................. 627

Chapter 17 Using Channel Scanner .............................................................................................. 629

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................... 630
Display overview ........................................................................................................................................................... 630
Connecting a cable ....................................................................................................................................................... 630
Direct connection.................................................................................................................................................. 630

16 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Indirect connection ............................................................................................................................................... 631
Over the air (OTA) ................................................................................................................................................ 631
Selecting measurement mode ....................................................................................................................................... 632
Configuring test parameters .......................................................................................................................................... 632
Setting frequency ................................................................................................................................................. 632
Setting amplitude.................................................................................................................................................. 632
Setting average .................................................................................................................................................... 634
Setting sweep mode ............................................................................................................................................. 634
Making channel scanner measurements ....................................................................................................................... 635
Setting channel..................................................................................................................................................... 635
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 635
Making frequency scanner measurements .................................................................................................................... 636
Setting frequency ................................................................................................................................................. 636
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 637
Making custom scanner measurements ........................................................................................................................ 637
Setting channel/frequency .................................................................................................................................... 637
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 638
Analyzing measurements .............................................................................................................................................. 639
Setting limit for channel scanner ........................................................................................................................... 639

Chapter 18 Using Power Meter ...................................................................................................... 640

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................... 641
Display overview ........................................................................................................................................................... 641
Performing internal RF power measurements ............................................................................................................... 641
Connecting a cable............................................................................................................................................... 642
Selecting measurement mode .............................................................................................................................. 642
Setting frequency ................................................................................................................................................. 643
Setting amplitude.................................................................................................................................................. 644
Setting sweep mode ............................................................................................................................................. 644
Making a measurement ........................................................................................................................................ 645
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 645
Performing external RF power measurements............................................................................................................... 646
Connecting a cable............................................................................................................................................... 646
Selecting measurement mode .............................................................................................................................. 647
Setting frequency ................................................................................................................................................. 647
Setting amplitude.................................................................................................................................................. 647
Making a measurement ........................................................................................................................................ 648
Measurement example ......................................................................................................................................... 648
Performing optical power measurements ...................................................................................................................... 649
Connecting a power meter.................................................................................................................................... 649
Selecting measurement mode .............................................................................................................................. 650
Setting measurement parameters ......................................................................................................................... 650
Making a power measurement.............................................................................................................................. 650
Reading a relative power ...................................................................................................................................... 651
Holding a measurement ....................................................................................................................................... 651

Chapter 19 Performing Fiber Inspection ........................................................................................ 652

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................... 653
Display overview ........................................................................................................................................................... 653
Connecting a fiber microscope ...................................................................................................................................... 653
Selecting measurement mode ....................................................................................................................................... 654
Configuring test parameters .......................................................................................................................................... 654
Selecting profile and tip ........................................................................................................................................ 654
Setting preferences .............................................................................................................................................. 654
Performing fiber inspection ............................................................................................................................................ 655
Capturing fiber image ........................................................................................................................................... 655
Testing a fiber ....................................................................................................................................................... 656

Appendix............................................................................................................................................. 658
Appendix A – Product general information ..................................................................................................................... 659
JD780B series ...................................................................................................................................................... 659
JD740B series ...................................................................................................................................................... 661
Appendix B – Cable list ................................................................................................................................................. 663
Appendix C – Band, frequency & channel standard....................................................................................................... 664
Appendix D – VSWR-Return loss conversion table ....................................................................................................... 667
Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table .................................................................................................................................... 668
Appendix F – Motorola CDMA/EV-DO LMF ................................................................................................................... 669

JD700B Series User’s Guide 17

 Using JD700B series LMF interface...................................................................................................................... 669
Setting up for a LMF test ...................................................................................................................................... 669
Performing a LMF test .......................................................................................................................................... 670
Appendix G – Bluetooth connection .............................................................................................................................. 671
Installing and setting up Bluetooth software .......................................................................................................... 671
Making Bluetooth connection................................................................................................................................ 671
Setting up communication in application ............................................................................................................... 672
Turning Bluetooth mode on/off manually ............................................................................................................... 673
Appendix H – Device driver installation ......................................................................................................................... 674
Appendix I – Ordering information ................................................................................................................................. 675
JD785B Base Station Analyzer ............................................................................................................................. 675
JD786B RF Analyzer ............................................................................................................................................ 676
JD788B Signal Analyzer ....................................................................................................................................... 677
JD745B Base Station Analyzer ............................................................................................................................. 678
JD746B RF Analyzer ............................................................................................................................................ 679
JD748B Signal Analyzer ....................................................................................................................................... 680
JD700B Series Common Options ......................................................................................................................... 682
Appendix J – RoHS information..................................................................................................................................... 684
JD780B series ...................................................................................................................................................... 684
JD740B series ...................................................................................................................................................... 685
Appendix K – On-screen keyboard ................................................................................................................................ 686
Adding or deleting letters ...................................................................................................................................... 686
Editing or adding a custom keyword ..................................................................................................................... 686
Appending a keyword ........................................................................................................................................... 687
Appendix L – Supported map display parameters.......................................................................................................... 689

18 JD700B Series User’s Guide

About This Guide
Topics discussed in this chapter include the following:

n Purpose and scope ................................................................................................................... 20

n Assumptions .............................................................................................................................. 20
n Safety and compliance information ........................................................................................... 20
n Conventions .............................................................................................................................. 21
n Technical assistance ................................................................................................................. 22

Sections “Safety and compliance information” and “Conventions” in this chapter contain information in
French as well.
About This Guide

Purpose and scope

The purpose of this guide is to help you successfully operate the JD700B series (firmware version 3.055 and
later) and use its features and capabilities. This document includes instructions that describe how to operate,
set up, configure, and use the JD700B series, consisting of JD785B/JD745B Base Station Analyzer,
JD786B/JD746B RF Analyzer, and JD788B/JD748B Signal Analyzer.

Objectif et champ d'application

Le but de ce guide est de vous aider à utiliser avec succès la série JD700B (version du firmware 3.055 et plus tard) et à
utiliser ses fonctions et capacités. Ce document contient des instructions qui décrivent comment utiliser, créer,
configurer et utiliser la série JD700B, composé de JD785B/JD745B Base Station Analyzer, JD786B/JD746B RF
Analyzer, et JD788B/JD748B Signal Analyzer.

Assumptions
This guide is intended for novice, intermediate, and experienced users who want to use the JD700B series
effectively and efficiently. We are assuming that you have basic operation experience and are familiar with
basic mobile communication concepts and terminology.

Hypothèses
Ce guide est destiné aux débutants, intermédiaires et les utilisateurs avancés qui veulent utiliser série JD700B efficace
et efficiente. Nous supposons que vous avez une expérience de base du fonctionnement et êtes familier avec les
concepts de communication mobile et de la terminologie.

Safety and compliance information

It is mandatory to permanently connect this product to the protective earth.

When supplying power to this device, always use an AC power cable that includes an earth (safety) ground
connection.

Informations de sécurité et de conformité

Il est obligatoire de se connecter en permanence ce produit à la protecteur terre. Lorsque alimenter en énergie cet
appareil, utilisez toujours un câble d'alimentation secteur qui comprend une terre de sécurité.

WARNING
Do not attempt to service this product yourself, as opening or removing covers may
expose you to dangerous voltage and other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified
service personnel.

AVERTISSEMENT
Ne pas tenter de réparer ce produit vous-même, car l'ouverture ou le retrait des capots peut vous
exposer à des tensions dangereuses et autres risques. Confiez toute réparation à un personnel
qualifié de service Viavi.

CAUTION
This equipment contains parts and assemblies sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD).
Use ESD precautionary procedures when touching, removing, or inserting ESD sensitive
parts and assemblies, or damage to components could result.

An electrostatic-sensitive device can only withstand voltage spikes of 10 to 100 volts. Any
discharge greater than this can damage or effectively destroy such a device while going
unnoticed by a technician. Common plastics (synthetic insulating materials), clothing, and
paper or cardboard are the most common source of static charges.

MISE EN GARDE

20 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 About This Guide

Cet équipement contient des pièces et des assemblages sensibles aux décharges électrostatiques
(ESD). Utilisez ESD procédures de précaution en cas de contact, la suppression ou l'insertion de
pièces de l'EDD et des assemblages sensibles, ou des dommages aux composants pourraient en
résulter.

Un dispositif électrostatique sensible ne peut supporter des pointes de tension de 10 à 100 volts.
Toute décharge supérieur à ce qui peut endommager ou détruire efficacement un tel dispositif alors
passer inaperçu par un technicien. Matières plastiques (matériaux synthétiques isolants), les
vêtements et le papier ou le carton sont la source la plus fréquente de charges statiques.

CAUTION
This instrument uses a Lithium Ion battery that, if not connected correctly, may lead to
explosion. In case the battery needs to be exchanged, it must be the same kind as or
compatible with the one shipped with your instrument.

The battery must not be disposed of in a landfill site or as municipal waste, and should be
disposed of according to your national regulations.

MISE EN GARDE
Cet instrument utilise une batterie lithium-ion qui, s'il n'est pas connecté correctement, peut conduire
à une explosion. Dans le cas où la batterie a besoin d'être remplacé, il doit être du même type ou
compatible avec celui fourni avec votre instrument.

La batterie ne doit pas être éliminé dans un site d'enfouissement ou les déchets municipaux, et doit
être éliminé conformément à la réglementation nationales.

Conventions
This guide uses typographical and symbols conventions as described in the following tables.

Conventions
Ce guide utilise les conventions typographiques et les symboles tels que décrits dans les tableaux suivants.

Table 1 Text formatting and other typographical conventions

Item Text formatting/symbols used Example(s)

Buttons or hard keys that Bold, all caps, default font Press the ON button.
the user presses on a Press the MODE hard key.
physical device Press the MARKER hard key.

Hot keys that the user Bold, all caps, italics, default font Press the SYSTEM hot key.
presses on a physical Press the MEASURE hot key.
device

Soft keys or toggle keys Bold, default font Press the Span soft key.
that the user presses on a Press the Channel Power soft key.
physical device to select
corresponding menus

Soft key option separators Denoted by a vertical bar | that Press the Zone [1|2|3] soft key.
means “or”, only one option can be
selected with a single press

File type Courier New In .tra file type.

Required arguments (text Denoted by slanted brackets < >. Enter <password>
variables in code)

Table 2 Symbol conventions

This symbol indicates a note that includes important supplemental information or tips related to
the main text.

Ce symbole indique une note qui inclut des importante supplémentaire informations ou des pointes relatifs au
texte principal.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 21

About This Guide

This symbol represents a general hazard. It may be associated with either a DANGER,
WARNING, or CAUTION message.

Ce symbole signale la présence d'un danger général.

This symbol represents hazardous voltages. It may be associated with either a DANGER,
WARNING, or CAUTION message.

Ce symbole signale la présence d'un risque d'électrocution.

This symbol represents a risk of explosion. It may be associated with either a DANGER,
WARNING, or CAUTION message.

Ce symbole signale la présence d'un risque d'explosion.

This symbol, located on the equipment, battery, or the packaging indicates that the equipment or
battery must not be disposed of in a landfill site or as municipal waste, and should be disposed of
according to your national regulations.

Ce symbole, situé sur l'équipement, la batterie ou l'emballage indique que l'équipement ou de la batterie ne
doivent pas être jetés dans un site d'enfouissement ou les déchets municipaux, et doivent être éliminés
conformément à la réglementation nationales.

Table 3 Safety definitions

DANGER Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury. It may be associated with either a general hazard, high voltage, or risk of
explosion symbol.

DANGER Indique une situation potentiellement dangereuse qui, si elle n'est pas évitée, entraînera la mort
ou des blessures graves.

WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury. It may be associated with either a general hazard, high voltage, or risk of
explosion symbol.

AVERTISSEMENT Indique une situation de danger potentiel qui, si elle n'est pas évitée, peut entraîner la mort ou des
dommages corporels graves.

CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury and/or damage to equipment. It may be associated with either a
general hazard, high voltage, or risk of explosion symbol.

When applied to software actions, indicates a situation that, if not avoided, could result
in loss of data or a disruption of software operation.

MISE EN GARDE Indique une situation de danger potentiel qui, si elle n'est pas évitée, peut entraîner des
dommages corporels légers ou modérés.

Technical assistance
If you require technical assistance, call 1-844-GO-VIAVI or send an email to [email protected]. For
the latest TAC information, go to http://www.viavisolutions.com/en/services-and-support/support/technical-
assistance.

22 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 1

Chapter 1 JD700B Series Overview

This chapter provides a general description of the JD700B series. Topics discussed in this chapter include
the following:

n About the JD700B series........................................................................................................... 24

n Features and capabilities .......................................................................................................... 24
n Options ...................................................................................................................................... 25
n Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 25
Chapter 1 JD700B Series Overview

About the JD700B series

Viavi wireless RF and fiber test solutions for the field include base station analyzers, cable and antenna
analyzers, and signaling analyzers for the installation and maintenance of modern wireless communication
systems. RF and fiber test is critical for wireless operators facing challenges of signal quality and signaling
interference, and maintaining quality high-bandwidth services.

The JD700B series addresses spectrum analysis, interference analysis, and cable, antenna and modulation
analysis, covering current wideband technologies such as WiMAX and LTE/LTE-Advanced.

Base station analyzer JD785B and JD745B

The Base Station Analyzer contains all the features and capabilities required to perform field testing of cell
sites of all wireless technologies, from 2G to 4G.

RF analyzer JD786B and JD746B

The RF Analyzer provides multi-purpose solution for the analysis of RF systems covering all physical
aspects of transmission, reception, and interference of RF systems up to 8 GHz and 4 GHz, respectively.

Signal analyzer JD788B and JD748B

The Signal Analyzer contains all the features and capabilities required to perform cell site field testing for all
wireless technologies from 2G to 4G.

Features and capabilities

The JD700B series is the optimal test solution for installation and maintenance of cellular base stations and
cell sites, running with external AC power or battery for the field.

The user interface has been specifically designed with customized menus and simple calibration procedures,
providing service providers with accurate and reliable measurement results.

Applicable Systems
n cdmaOne/cdma2000
n EV-DO
n WCDMA/HSPA+
n GSM/GPRS/EDGE
n TD-SCDMA
n WiMAX
n LTE/LTE-Advanced (FDD and TDD)
n RF over Fiber (RFoFiber – RFoCPRI and RFoOBSAI)

24 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 1 JD700B Series Overview

Key Features
Table 4 Key functions available in product models

Functionality JD785B/JD745B JD786B/JD746B JD788B/JD748B

Spectrum Analyzer n n n

Cable and Antenna Analyzer n n

RF Power Meter n n n

Optical Power Meter n n n

Fiber Inspection n n n

Signal Analyzers (optional) n n

RFoFiber (optional) n n n

Interference Analyzer (optional) n n n

Channel Scanner (optional) n n n

OTA Measurement (optional) n n

Options
This instrument is provided with various options/features that are available to be ordered. See “Appendix I –
Ordering information” on page 675 for more information.

Specifications
AC power
Input voltage is automatically selected within the instrument’s tolerable input line voltage from 100 to 240
VAC. This instrument does not have a separate line protection fuse.

Table 5 AC power requirements

Item JD780B Specification JD740B Specification

AC Power 100 to 240 V AC, 50-60 Hz 100 to 240 V AC, 50-60 Hz

Power Consumption 42 W in operation 42 W in operation

54 W with battery charging 54 W with battery charging

Physical specifications
Table 6 shows weight with standard configurations and the battery pack installed.

Table 6 Physical specifications

Model Dimension (H x W x D)

JD785B/JD786B/JD788B 7.7” x 11.6” x 3.2” (195 mm x 295 mm x 82 mm)

JD745B/JD746B/JD748B 7.7” x 11.6” x 3.2” (195 mm x 295 mm x 82 mm)

JD700B Series User’s Guide 25

 2

Chapter 2 Getting Started

This chapter provides general guides of how to get started with your JD700B series instrument. Topics
discussed in this chapter are as follows:

n Unpacking the JD700B series ................................................................................................... 27

n Exploring the JD700B series ..................................................................................................... 27
n Installing battery pack................................................................................................................ 32
n Starting up the JD700B series .................................................................................................. 32
n Managing files ........................................................................................................................... 33
n Configuring system .................................................................................................................... 36
n Upgrading firmware ................................................................................................................... 38
n Managing licenses ..................................................................................................................... 40
n Performing service diagnostic ................................................................................................... 41
n Using system administration ..................................................................................................... 42
n Running IP test .......................................................................................................................... 43
n Activating StrataSync ................................................................................................................ 44
n Setting communication .............................................................................................................. 46
 Chapter 2 Getting Started

Unpacking the JD700B series

Unpack and inspect the shipping package thoroughly to ensure that nothing was damaged during the
shipment. Also, check that your delivered package includes all of your ordered items in the shipment. If
contents in the package are damaged or defective or if there are any missing items, keep the shipping list
and materials for carrier’s inspection and contact your nearest Viavi's authorized sales and service office.

A basic test set of JD700B series would include the following items in the package. For more options, see
“Appendix I – Ordering information” on page 675.

Table 7 Items included in a basic test set shipment

Item Quantity

JD700B series instrument 1

(JD785B, JD786B, JD788B, JD745B, JD746B, or JD748B)

AC/DC power adapter and power cord 1

1.5 meter cross LAN cable 1

1.8 meter USB A-to-B cable 1

> 1 GB USB memory 1

Rechargeable Lithium Ion battery pack 1

12 V DC automotive adapter 1

Stylus pen 1

User’s guide and application software CD 1

Exploring the JD700B series

Figure 1 JD785B front panel view

JD700B Series User’s Guide 27

Chapter 2 Getting Started

Front panel
The JD700B series analyzers have the same front panel look as like Figure 1, except for the bumpers in
different colors.

Power on/off button

Key Description

POWER ON/OFF – You can turn your instrument on or off. Two LEDs indicate power
source and status. See “Starting up the JD700B series” on page 32.

Function hard keys

You can use these hard keys to activate specified functions as labeled on each key.

Key Description

MODE – You can select an analyzer mode from all the standard and optional modes
available to your instrument.

FREQ/DIST – You can configure frequency or distance settings.

AMP/SCALE – You can configure amplitude and scale settings.

BW/AVG – You can configure bandwidth and average settings.

TRACE/DISPLAY – You can set up trace and display parameters.

MARKER – You can analyze measurements with markers.

PEAK SEARCH – You can set up peak search parameters.

Hot keys
When the user input field on the screen is inactive, you can use these hot keys to activate specific functions
instead of numbers. When you see the user input field activated or highlighted, press the ESC hard key to
use these hot keys.

Key Description

MEASURE – You can select measurements available for your selected analyzer mode.

MEASURE SETUP – You can set measurement parameters available for your selected
measurement mode.

SAVE/LOAD – You can save or load your current screen, result, setup, or limit into or
from the internal memory or an external USB memory drive.

SWEEP – You can configure sweep parameters.

TRIGGER – You can select trigger options such as internal, external, and GPS.

SYSTEM – You can configure your system settings or view your current system
information.

28 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 2 Getting Started

PRESET – You can use this key to return to a known state and make measurements.

HOLD – You can change the sweep mode: Continue or Single.

LIMIT – You can set limit settings such as display line, multi segment line, save limits,
recall limits, or test specification limits.

BACKLIGHT – You can turn the key backlight feature on or off.

HELP – You can have the online help screen on if available.

Soft keys
You can use not only the touchscreen keys but also these physical keys placed along the right side of the
display to start a specific function associated with each soft key, invoke other screen keys, or select a unit.
The More screen menu indicates that there are more than seven screen menus for the level. The small
arrowhead symbol in the screen menu indicates that there are screen menus under the screen menu.

Data entry and other keys

Key Description

ROTARY KNOB WITH ENTER KEY – You can change a value with predefined
increments or move marker position. Rotating this knob clockwise increases value or
moves a marker to the right and rotating counter clockwise does vice versa. This knob
works as the ENTER hard key as well.

ARROW KEYS – You can increase or decrease value or move your selection up, down,
to the left, or to the right.

NUMERIC KEYS – You can manually enter a value for measurement parameters.

DEL – You can delete data entry. After pressing the ENTER key or selecting a unit soft
key, you cannot delete or remove data entered.

ENTER – You can save and confirm data entry.

ESC – You can cancel any input in the user input field or dismiss a pop-up window on the
screen.

PREV – You can go back to the previous menu without changing current setup.

Top panel
The JD700B series products have the same top view as Figure 2 and Figure 3.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 29

Chapter 2 Getting Started

Figure 2 Top view of JD785B with optical hardware option

Figure 3 Top view of JD785B without optical hardware option

Reflection/RF Out (Cable and Antenna Analyzer)

The Reflection/RF Out port of the Cable and Antenna Analyzer is a precise 50 Ω N-type female connector
that is used as the output signal port for the Cable and Antenna Analyzer mode.

CAUTION
Do not apply or connect power exceeding +25 dBm to this Reflection/RF Out port. If such
power is applied, it will degrade the product’s performance and can cause damage to the
product in worst case.

RF In (Cable and Antenna Analyzer)

The RF In port is a precise 50 Ω N-type female connector that is used as the input signal port for
2-port vector measurements in the Cable and Antenna Analyzer mode.

CAUTION
The maximum power allowed to the RF In port is +25 dBm. If the input power exceeds
the limit, it may degrade the product performance or cause damage to the instrument in a
worst case. Do not connect any power feed exceeding 1 W directly to this port.

DC 18 V
The input power to this port shall be 18 V DC.

30 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 2 Getting Started

RF In (Spectrum Analyzer)
The RF In port is a precise 50 Ω N-type female connector that is used as the input signal port for spectrum
analysis, signal analysis, and RF power measurement.

CAUTION
The maximum power allowed to the RF In port is +25 dBm for JD780B series and +20
dBm for JD740B series. If the input power exceeds the limit, it may degrade the product
performance or cause damage to the instrument in a worst case.

Audio jack
The audio jack is labeled with a headphones icon. Plugging in headphones or earphones turns the speaker
off.

USB
n CLIENT: This is a communication port that you can connect your instrument and your PC with
application software JDViewer, JDRemote, or JDMapCreator. You must install driver software for the
instrument on to the computer. See “Appendix H – Device driver installation” on page 674 for more
information.
n HOST: You can use this port to plug in an external USB memory to extend storage capacity or to
upgrade the instrument’s firmware. It supports most USB memory devices with 32-bit file system.
You can also use this port to connect an external power sensor, Bluetooth USB adapter, or P5000i
fiber microscope. See “Appendix G – Bluetooth connection” on page 671 on how to set up and use
the Bluetooth connection.

LAN
You can use this Ethernet communication port to connect your instrument and your PC using the application
software JDViewer or Motorola WinLMF, if necessary. Two LEDs indicate data transfer activity and link
status.
n ACTIVITY: The yellow LED is illuminated during data transfer.
n LINK: The green LED is illuminated when there is a valid communication connection.

SFP/SFP+
The optical hardware option board for RFoCPRI and RFoOBSAI supports all types of MSA (Multi-Source
Agreement) compliant SFP transceivers. You can use these SFP/SFP+ ports to connect SFP modules to
test CPRI/OBSAI protocols, detect an error or alarm, perform interference analysis, and transmit test pattern
over fiber link.

External In
n GPS: You can plug in a GPS antenna to this SMA type female connector in order to get location
information and highly accurate reference.
n TRIGGER: You can use this SMA type female connector to receive PP2S clock or 10 ms
synchronization signals from an external timing reference.
n REF: You can use this SMA type female connector to receive 10 MHz, 13 MHz, or 15 MHz reference
clock signals from an external frequency source.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 31

Chapter 2 Getting Started

Installing battery pack

You need to install the Lithium Ion battery pack provided with your instrument. Follow the instruction to install
or remove the battery pack as needed.

Procedure

To install the battery pack:

1 Loosen the latching screw of the battery cover by turning counter clockwise.
2 Slide out the battery cover to open.
3 Insert the battery pack with the connector terminal side up and push in until it stops.
4 Slide in the battery cover to close.
5 Tighten the latching screw of the battery cover
by turning clockwise.

To remove the battery pack:

1 Loosen the latching screw of the battery cover
by turning counter clockwise.
2 Slide out the battery cover.
3 Hold the battery strap and pull it out.

CAUTION
The battery pack that came with your instrument is Lithium Ion and it may, if not
connected correctly, lead to explosion. In case you need to replace the battery, you must
use one of the same kinds or compatible ones. You must dispose a battery according to
your local safety and environmental regulations.

NOTE
It is recommended that you turn off the instrument to replace the battery. However, if you
do not want to interrupt the current test, you can leave the module turned on with the AC
power adapter plugged in.

Starting up the JD700B series

Use the power button to turn your JD700B series on or off. When external power is supplied via the AC/DC
adapter, the upper orange LED is illuminated.

Procedure

To turn on:
1 Press and hold the POWER button for a few seconds until the lower green LED indicator is
illuminated.
2 Release the button and wait for a few seconds while booting up.

To turn off:
1 Press and hold the POWER button for a few seconds until the lower green LED indicator
goes out.
2 Release the button.

32 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 2 Getting Started

Managing files
The JD700B series lets you save and load screen, result, setup, limit, logging data, or Fail events depending
on your selected measurement mode and option.

NOTE
If you see greyed-out menus as you change measurement modes, this indicates that the
menu(s) are not available to be used.

Using save
You can save your current screen, result, setup, and limit into the internal memory or your external USB
memory drive.

Procedure

1 Press the SAVE/LOAD hot key. The Save/Load screen menu bar appears.
2 Press the Save soft key.
3 Select the save option, from the following choices:

To save Select File type

Current screen Save Screen > Screen .png

Measurement result in a report Save Screen > Report .pdf

format with comments

Measurement result Save Result .tra

.gom
.grr
.jdt

Measurement result (.csv) Save Result as CSV Format .csv

Setup and test configuration Save Setup .sta

Limit setting Save Limit .jml

Logging data Save Logging Data .grr

.gsr
.csv

Automatically screen or results Save On Event .png

that falls outside the defined .tra
limit settings (Failed event) .csv

The on-screen keyboard appears.

NOTE
Save Setup saves a test configuration only, not a measurement limit setting. You must
use Save Limit to save your limit settings.

An RFoCPRI/RFoOBSAI spectrum can be saved as a file, but the difference in its data
point does not allow the saved RFoCPRI/RFoOBSAI spectrum to be overlaid on a
standard spectrum.

4 Type the name of the file in the File Name field with or without using a keyword.
5 Optional.
– To create or edit keywords, touch the Edit Keywords button, select your desired keyword
button in the upper screen, type a keyword, and then tap the Save button on the keyboard.
See “Editing or adding a custom keyword” on page 686 for more information.
– To include a keyword in the file name, touch the Append Keywords button, select your

JD700B Series User’s Guide 33

Chapter 2 Getting Started

desired keyword, and then tap the Keyboard button. See “Appending a keyword” on page
687 for more information.
– To change the file location in the internal memory or to your USB memory drive, tap the
Location button, select your desired file path using the touch screen or the rotary knob,
and then press the Apply soft key.
– To create a folder, press the Create Folder soft key, type a directory name, and then press
the Apply soft key.
6 Press the Save soft key.

Saving fail events

Depending on the measurement mode, you can let the instrument automatically save measurement screen
or result that falls outside the defined limit settings or the Fail indicator is on. You can also set to save the
first event and hold the measurement or to save all the events continuously.

Procedure

1 Press the SAVE/LOAD hot key. The Save/Load screen menu bar appears.
2 Press the Save soft key.
3 Press the Save On Event soft key.
4 Press the Save Type soft key, and then select the save option from the choices: Screen, Result,
and Result as CSV Format.
5 Optional. Toggle the Save Then Stop soft key and select On in order to save the first event that
falls outside the limit(s) and to hold the measurement. Otherwise, leave this feature off to save
events continuously.
6 Press the Start soft key to start saving. The on-screen keyboard appears.
7 Type the name of the file in the File Name field with or without using a keyword.
8 Optional.
– To create or edit keywords, touch the Edit Keywords button, select your desired keyword
button in the upper screen, type a keyword, and then tap the Save button on the keyboard.
See “Editing or adding a custom keyword” on page 686 for more information.
– To include a keyword in the file name, touch the Append Keywords button, select your
desired keyword, and then tap the Keyboard button. See “Appending a keyword” on page
687 for more information.
– To change the file location in the internal memory or to your USB memory drive, touch the
Location button, select your desired file path using the touch screen or the rotary knob,
and then press the Apply soft key.
– To create a folder, press the Create Folder soft key, type a directory name, and then press
the Apply soft key.
9 Press the Done soft key.
The “Event Save” appears on the screen and the Start screen menu changes to Stop.
10 Press the Stop soft key to end the event saving.

Saving logging data

You can save logging data if the measurement mode supports the feature and has the activated Save
Logging Data soft key.

Procedure

1 Press the SAVE/LOAD hot key. The Save/Load screen menu bar appears.
2 Press the Save soft key.
3 Press the Save Logging Data soft key. The on-screen keyboard appears.

34 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 2 Getting Started

4 Type the name of the file in the File Name field with or without using a keyword.
5 Optional.
– To create or edit keywords, touch the Edit Keywords button, select your desired keyword
button in the upper screen, type a keyword, and then tap the Save button on the keyboard.
See “Editing or adding a custom keyword” on page 686 for more information.
– To include a keyword in the file name, touch the Append Keywords button, select your
desired keyword, and then tap the Keyboard button. See “Appending a keyword” on page
687 for more information.
– To create a folder, press the Create Folder soft key, type a directory name, and then press
the Apply soft key.
– To change the file location in the internal memory or to your USB memory drive, touch the
Location button, select your desired file path using the touch screen or the rotary knob,
and then press the Apply soft key.
NOTE
In is recommended that you use an external USB memory drive to save logging data in
the Auto Measure mode in order to have enough free space.

6 Optional only in the Auto Measure mode.

Toggle the Save Screen soft key and select All to save all the Auto Measure screens or Fail to
save only the ones with the Fail on.
7 Press the Save soft key to start logging.
The “Recording” appears on the screen.
8 Press the ESC hard key to stop logging data and complete saving.

Using load
You can load your saved screen, result, setup, and limit from the internal memory or your external USB
memory drive.

Procedure

1 Press the SAVE/LOAD hot key. The Save/Load screen menu bar appears.
2 Press the Load soft key. The Load screen menu bar appears.
3 Select the load option, from the following choices:

To load Select

Saved screen or report Load Screen

Measurement result Load Result

Setup and test configuration Load Setup

Limit setting Load Limit

Logging data Load Logging Data

Map file Load Map

Scenario Load Scenario

The file manager window appears.

NOTE
An RFoCPRI/RFoOBSAI spectrum can be recorded and replayed in the RFoCPRI/
RFoOBSAI Interference Analyzer (IA) mode only. It is not compatible with a standard
spectrum logging file in the Interference Analyzer mode.

4 Select the name of the file to be loaded from the internal memory or from your USB drive.
Information of your selected file appears in the File Information pane.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 35

Chapter 2 Getting Started

5 Press the Load soft key.

Using file manager

The File Manager lets you copy, cut, paste, and delete data files saved in the internal memory or in your
USB memory drive.

Procedure

1 Press the SAVE/LOAD hot key. The Save/Load screen menu bar appears.
2 Press the File Manager soft key. The file manager window appears.
3 To copy, cut, and paste, complete the following steps:
a Select a file or folder by using the touch screen or the rotary knob.
b Select the Copy or Cut soft key.
c Select the location to which the file or folder to be pasted.
d Press the Paste soft key.
4 To delete, complete the following steps:
a Select a file or folder by using the touch screen or the rotary knob.
b Press the Delete soft key.
The confirmation dialog box appears.
Once the file or folder is deleted, you cannot recover it.
c Select OK to delete.
5 Press the Exit soft key or the ESC hard key to close the file manager window.

Configuring system
Setting frequency reference
You can improve measurement accuracy by setting frequency reference.

Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

2 Press the Freq Reference soft key.
3 Select the frequency reference option: Internal, External 10 MHz, External 13 MHz,
External 15 MHz, and GPS.

Setting date and time

You can set the instrument’ system clock to your region.

Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

2 Select System Configuration > Date/Time. The current time zone information box appears.
3 To change the standard time zone, complete the following steps:
a Press the Std Time Zone soft key.
b Select your time zone by using the rotary knob or arrow keys. You can also use the
Top/Bottom or Page Up/Down soft keys.

36 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 2 Getting Started

c Press the ENTER hard key to save your change. You can also press the rotary knob.
4 To change the date format, complete the following steps:
a Press the Date Format soft key.
b Select YYMMDD, MMDDYY, or DDMMYY as needed.
5 To set the date and time manually, complete the following steps:
a Select Year, Month, Day, Hour, or Minute soft key as needed.
b Enter a value by using numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key to save your change.
6 Press the Apply screen key to save and exit.

Setting language
You can change the system language for the menus, messages, and information on screen.

Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

2 Select System Configuration > Language.
3 Select the language option from the choices available.

Setting power on
Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

2 Press the Power On soft key.
3 Select the power-on option, from the following choices:
– Last: Boots up with the last state of the instrument before power-off or shut-down.
– Preset: Boots up with the default settings preset in the factory.
– User: Boots up with the user-defined setup.
When the User is selected, the User Setup menu under System becomes activated.
4 Optional. If you have selected User in step 3, complete the following steps to specify a user
setup file to be used:
a Press the User Setup soft key.
b Select the name of the user setup file.
c Press the Done soft key.

NOTE
The Preset is to revert to original factory settings. It is recommended that you use this
option when you have experienced badly misadjusted settings.

Changing display mode

You can change the instrument’s display mode as needed.

Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

2 Select System Configuration > Display Mode.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 37

Chapter 2 Getting Started

3 Select a display mode from the choices: Indoor, Outdoor, and Night.
4 The instrument optimizes screen colors to each choice.

Setting sleep time

You can set the amount of time up to 255 minutes to let the instrument automatically turn the backlight off
and enter into power saving mode after no actions or data entries. Default setting is zero, which indicates
that the sleep mode is turned off and screen backlight is always on.

Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

2 Select System Configuration > Sleep Time.
3 Enter the amount of minutes by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
4 Press the Enter soft key.

Adjusting LCD brightness

You can adjust display brightness from one to ten as needed. The larger number you set, the brighter the
display becomes.

Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

2 Select System Configuration > LCD Brightness.
3 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
4 Press the Enter soft key.

Adjusting volume
You can turn the sound on or off or adjust the volume from one to ten as needed.

Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

2 Select the sound option, from the following choices:
– To turn the sound or alarm off, toggle the Sound soft key and select Off.
– To turn the sound or alarm on, toggle the Sound soft key and select On.
– To adjust the volume, complete the following steps:
a Press the Sound soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.

Upgrading firmware
It is recommended that you maintain your instrument up-to-date with its latest firmware in order to achieve
the instrument’s optimal performance.

38 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 2 Getting Started

Checking installed firmware version

Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

2 Press the HW/FW Info soft key.
3 Find the installed version number in the Firmware field.
4 From a computer with Internet access, visit Viavi’s Software Updates website and check if your
installed firmware is the latest one. Do the steps 5-6 if you want to update your firmware with
using your USB memory drive.
5 Download a latest firmware file from the website to the root directory of your USB memory drive.
NOTE
It is recommended that you format your memory drive to have enough space to download
the file.
6 Unzip the download file into the root directory of your USB memory stick.
A firmware file (*.fw) and a firmware release note (*.pdf) are extracted.

Installing new firmware

To update your firmware, you can choose either way of using your USB memory drive or accessing the FTP
server over the network.

Upgrading from USB memory drive

Procedure

1 Power your instrument via the AC-DC adapter to prevent any severe damage to your instrument
caused by a power-off in the middle of the upgrade, which may require a repair in the factory.
2 Plug in the USB memory drive to the USB Host port of your instrument.
3 Press the SYSTEM hot key.
4 Select More (1/2) > Upgrade > USB.
The file manager window appears.
5 Highlight the firmware file (.fw) saved in the root directory of your USB drive.
6 Press the Select soft key.
The Update Firmware dialog box appears.
7 Press the OK button to start to install the new firmware.
The Upgrade Status bar appears.
NOTE
Firmware upgrade will be done within 30 minutes or so in most cases, but depending on
the number of files to be reconfigured, it may take longer than that.
8 After you have restarted the instrument, check the installed firmware version and DSP versions
in the System settings. Refer to the firmware release note to find correct DSP version and
compatible application software versions.

WARNING
Do not remove the USB drive while upgrading the firmware.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 39

Chapter 2 Getting Started

Upgrading from FTP server

Procedure

1 Power your instrument via the AC-DC adapter to prevent any severe damage to your instrument
caused by a power-off in the middle of the upgrade, which may require a repair in the factory.
2 Press the SYSTEM hot key.
3 Select More (1/2) > Upgrade > FTP Server.
The upgrade server dialog box appears.
NOTE
Older version of firmware does not have the FTP Server option. It is recommended that
you update your firmware with the USB option first.
4 Enter ftp2.jdsu.com in the server address field.
5 Enter your proxy server address in the proxy server field, if necessary.
Contact your system administrator for your proxy server information.
6 Tap the Check button to check if the installed firmware version is the latest one.
7 Do one of the following:
– If you view the latest firmware version information, tap the Install button to continue.
– If the message “Your firmware is up to date.” is displayed, tap the Cancel button.
NOTE
Firmware upgrade will be done within 30 minutes or so in most cases, but depending on
the number of files to be reconfigured, it may take longer than that.
8 After you have started the instrument, check the installed firmware version and DSP versions in
the System settings. Refer to the firmware release note to find correct DSP version and
compatible application software versions.

Managing licenses
The License Manager lets you view installed options, install additional ones, and load evaluation licenses.

Checking installed or installable options

Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

2 Select More (1/2) > License Manager. The License Manager menu bar appears.
3 Select the menu, from the following choices:
– To view the installed options, select the Installed Options soft key.
The list of options appears. The “(T)” indicates temporary licenses.
– To view the installable options, select the Installable Options soft key.

Installing purchased options

Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

2 Select More (1/2) > License Manager.
The License Manager menu bar appears.
3 Select the Install an Option soft key. The Installable Options window appears.
4 Highlight the name of the option from the list by using the rotary knob.

40 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 2 Getting Started

5 Press the ENTER hard key. You can also press the rotary knob.
The License Code bar appears.
6 Enter the number of the license to activate by using the numeric keys.
7 Press the ENTER hard key. You can also select the Enter soft key.

Loading temporary license

The temporary license that you received from Viavi is intended for your evaluation only and it expires after its
specified time limit.

Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

2 Select More (1/2) > License Manager.
The License Manager menu bar appears.
3 Select the Load Temp License soft key. The file manager window appears.
4 Select the name of the license file.
5 Press the Load soft key.
6 Optional. You can check the loaded license using the Installed Options menu.

Viewing OSS license

The JD700B series incorporates software that is covered by either the GNU General Public license or GNU
Lesser General Public License. Check the OSS license notification for more details.

Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

2 Select More (1/2) > License Manager.
The License Manager menu bar appears.
3 Select the OSS License soft key.
The Open Source Code Notification & Distribution screen appears.

Performing service diagnostic

The Service Diagnostic lets you view system log, perform self test, revert the instrument settings to its
factory settings, or perform touch alignment.

Viewing system log

Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

2 Select More (1/2) > Svc Diagnostic > System Logging.
3 Optional. Press the Save soft key to save the system log as a .log file type.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 41

Chapter 2 Getting Started

Running self-test
You can run a self-test on your instrument boards and modules.

Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

2 Select More (1/2) > Svc Diagnostic > Self Test.
The on-screen instruction appears.
3 Connect a test cable between the Reflection/RF Out port for Cable and Antenna Analyzer and
the RF In port for Spectrum Analyzer.
4 Press the Start soft key.
The test result window appears.
5 Optional. Press the Save Screen soft key to save the self-test results.

Performing factory reset

The Factory Reset is used only when you want to purge all the user settings and data stored in the system
and return to the instrument’s factory state.

Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

2 Select More (1/2) > Svc Diagnostic > Factory Reset.
The confirmation dialog box appears.
3 Press the Yes soft key to continue. Otherwise, select No.

NOTE
It is recommended that you copy your setup or result data to an external USB memory
drive so that you can restore them later.

Re-aligning touch screen

When you consistently experience of the instrument responding improperly to your touch on the screen, you
may need to perform this touch-screen alignment.

Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

2 Select More (1/2) > Svc Diagnostic > Touch Alignment.
The white screen with a plus sign (+) in the upper-left corner appears.
3 Touch the plus sign and repeat until the previous screen is back on.

Using system administration

The Administration is used to disable editing limits, enable modifying online help, or change administration
password.

42 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 2 Getting Started

Logging in
You need to log in first to access the administration menus.

Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

2 Select More (1/2) > Administration. The password box appears.
3 Enter <password> by using the numeric keys.
Default password is “0000”. To change the password, see “Changing password” on page 43.
4 Press the Apply soft key.

Changing password
Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

2 Select More (1/2) > Administration, and then enter your password.
3 Press the Change Password soft key.
The new password box appears.
4 Enter a new password up to eight digits by using the numeric keys.
5 Press the Apply soft key.
The reconfirmation box appears.
6 Enter the new password again by using the numeric keys.
7 Press the Apply soft key to complete changing password.

Locking limit key

You can lock the LIMIT hot key and disable editing predefined limit settings to prevent any unintentional
changes, which could result in incorrect measurements.

Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

2 Select More (1/2) > Administration, and then enter your password.
3 Toggle the Edit Limit soft key and select Disable to lock the LIMIT hot key or Enable to unlock
the key.

NOTE
Disabling the Edit Limit limits the access to the LIMIT hot key only. The Limit features
including displaying limit line(s) and Pass/Fail result function properly as predefined.

Running IP test
You can test an Internet Protocol (IP) configuration of the cell site’s backhaul.

Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 43

Chapter 2 Getting Started

2 Select More (1/2) > Utility > IP Test.

3 Select the command option, from the following choices:
– To display the route and measure transit delays of packets, toggle the Commands soft key
and select Traceroute.
– To display the reachability and measure the round-trip time, toggle the Commands soft key
and select Ping.
4 To set the destination IP address to be tested, complete the following steps:
a Press the Destination IP soft key.
b Press the First Octal soft key.
c Enter a value, and then press the Enter soft key.
d Press the Second Octal soft key and repeat step c.
e Press the Third Octal soft key and repeat step c.
f Press the Fourth Octal soft key and repeat step c.
5 Press the Execute soft key and select Start to start testing.
Test result is displayed on the screen as the test is progressing.
6 Press the Execute soft key and select Stop to stop testing.
7 Optional. Press the Save soft key to save the test result as a .txt file type.

Activating StrataSync
StrataSync is a cloud-based solution that provides asset, configuration, and test data management for Viavi
instruments. StrataSync manages and tracks test instruments, collects and analyzes results from the entire
network, and informs and trains the workforce.

The JD700B series is compatible with the Viavi StrataSync cloud. This optional capability allows you to
manage your instrument inventory ensuring you know where all your valuable equipment is and which
engineer is using it. In addition, it allows you to keep your instruments current through the remote upgrade
capability that ensures all instruments have the latest firmware. It also enables the centralized distribution of
configuration settings to ensure all your engineers use the same instrument settings resulting in consistent
measurements.

Once testing is completed, the trace files can be uploaded onto StrataSync for secure storage and sharing.
This sharing capability allows engineers who have a problem they cannot resolve to request help from an
expert who can analyze the trace file via StrataSync using applications such as JDViewer, JDFileViewer,
JDPowerMeter, etc. from anywhere without having to be at the instrument, helping resolve problems even
faster.

Setting up Internet connection

Your JD700B series instrument must have Internet access to be able to connect to the StrataSync. You can
set up for wireline or wireless Ethernet network connection. You can also use your mobile device’s data
network such as the Bluetooth tethering on an Android-based smartphone and the Personal Hotspot on an
iOS-based smartphone. If you want to share your mobile’s data network, you need to connect your
instrument to your mobile device.

Procedure

1 Connect one of the Parani-UD100 Bluetooth adapters to the USB port of your JD780B or
JD740B series.
2 Turn on Bluetooth on your mobile device, and then activate its tethering or hotspot.

44 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 2 Getting Started

– On Android mobile devices:

a Go to Settings > Connections > Bluetooth.
b Check the box for Visible to all nearby Bluetooth devices to make your mobile
device discoverable by your instrument.
c Go to Settings > More networks > Tethering and portable hotspot.
d Check the box for Bluetooth tethering to enable sharing your mobile device’s Internet
connection with your instrument.
– On iOS mobile devices:
a Go to Settings > Bluetooth.
b Turn on Bluetooth.
c Go to Settings > Personal Hotspot.
d Turn on Personal Hotspot to make your mobile device discoverable by your
instrument and enable sharing your mobile device’s Internet connection with your
instrument.
3 On your JD780B or JD740B series instrument, press the SYSTEM hot key.
4 Select System Configuration > Remote Interface > Bluetooth > Connect.
5 Press the Scan soft key to discover your mobile device.
You will find your mobile device from the list on the screen.
6 Highlight your mobile device name from the list, and then press the Select soft key.
A dialog box appears.
7 Tap the Connect button to pair and connect.
8 On your mobile device, enter 0000 in the PIN field, and then tap the OK button or Pair.
If the connection is successful, “(Paired & Connected)” appears next to the name of your mobile
device on your instrument. If the connection is unsuccessful, repeat steps 6 and 7.
9 Press the PREV hard key to return to the Bluetooth Information screen that displays the paired
device and connected service including your CellAdvisor’s IP Address.

NOTE
If you want to use the Web-based remote control described on page 50 using this
Bluetooth tethering, record the IP address assigned to your JD700B series to have
access to the instrument on your smartphone’s Web browser.

Establishing a connection to StrataSync

Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

2 Select More (1/2) > Utility > StrataSync.
The StrataSync setting window appears as shown in Figure 4.
3 Enter <server address> in the Server Address field for StrataSync.
The server address at the time of this document production is “stratasync.viavisolutions.com”,
which may change.
NOTE
Viavi provides you with the information required to access StrataSync at your
purchase of StrataSync, including the Server Address, Account ID, and Port
number. See “JD700B Series Common Options” on page 682 for more information
on available options.
4 Enter <account number> in the Account ID field.
5 Enter <technician number> in the Technician ID field.
6 To set the port number and proxy server address, complete the following steps:
a Tap the Detail Settings button.
The input dialog box appears.
b Enter <port number> in the Port field.
c Enter <proxy server address> in the Proxy Server address, if necessary.
Contact your system administrator for your proxy server information.
d Tap the Apply button to save and exit.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 45

Chapter 2 Getting Started

7 Tap the Start Sync button.

Once successfully synchronized, the text “Successfully synchronized with server” appears and
the StrataSync status icon changes accordingly.
8 Tap the Apply button to exit.

Figure 4 StrataSync setting window

StrataSync status indicators

The StrataSync indication icons provide you with the connection and activity status.

Indicator Description

Indicates that your instrument is idle to be connected and synchronized with the
StrataSync server.

Indicates that your instrument is acquiring an authentication, synchronizing with the

server, and sharing data.

Indicates that your instrument is synchronized successfully.

Indicates that your instrument failed to synchronize with the StrataSync server or
encountered an error.

Setting communication
JD700B series provides several methods for you to connect your instrument with application software or
other instruments and devices.

Configuring Ethernet
You can configure a network to connect your JD700B series to a computer installed with Viavi software
applications such as JDViewer or JDRemote via Ethernet. JD700B series supports both IPv4 and IPv6
protocols.

46 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 2 Getting Started

Setting for IPv4 protocol

Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

2 Select System Configuration > Ethernet Config > IPv4.
The Ethernet Configuration box appears.
3 Do one of the following:
– To enable automatic IP addressing, toggle the Mode soft key and select DHCP.
– To manually assign fixed IP addresses, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Mode soft key and select Static.
b Press the IP Address soft key.
c Enter an address including dots in the user input field.
d Press the ENTER hard key or Enter soft key.
e Press the Subnet Mask soft key and repeat steps c-d.
f Press the Gateway soft key and repeat steps c-d.
g Press the DNS soft key and repeat steps c-d.
4 Press the Apply soft key to apply and complete the network configuration.
The message “Applying Network Info…” appears.

Setting for IPv6 protocol

Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

2 Select System Configuration > Ethernet Config > IPv6.
3 Do one of the following:
– To enable automatic IP addressing, toggle the Mode soft key and select Auto.
– To manually assign fixed IP addresses, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Mode soft key and select Static.
The Ethernet Configuration box appears.
b Press the IP Address soft key.
c Type in an address including colons using the on-screen keyboard.
d Press the Apply soft key to complete the input.
e Press the Subnet Prefix Length soft key.
f Enter a length value using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
g Press the Gateway soft key and repeat steps c-d.
h Press the DNS soft key and repeat steps c-d.
4 Press the ESC hard key, and then make sure to press the Apply soft key in the IPv6 menu bar in
order to apply and complete the network configuration.
The message “Applying Network Info…” appears.

Setting for JDViewer and JDRemote

The App SW is set by default to make it easy to connect your instrument to JDViewer, JDRemote,
JDMapCreator, and other applications. After using other remote interfaces such as SCPI, LMF, and
USBTMC, it is recommended that you set the LAN and USB settings back to App SW.

Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 47

Chapter 2 Getting Started

2 Press the System Configuration soft key.

3 Press the Remote Interface soft key and then do the following:
– Select the LAN soft key and then press the App SW soft key.
– Select the USB soft key and then press the App SW soft key.

Setting USBTMC mode

The USB Test & Measurement Class (USBTMC) is a standard for programmatic control of USB-based test
instruments that defines protocols used to send and receive messages. If you want to use the USBTMC
protocol to communicate with the instrument remotely, you can turn this TMC Mode on.

Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

2 Select System Configuration > Remote Interface > USB.
3 Press the USBTMC soft key.
The confirmation dialog box appears.
4 Press the USBTMC soft key again to confirm the mode change and reboot the instrument.

NOTE
After using the USBTMC mode, you may want to set this setting back to App SW if you
use JDViewer mainly for remote controlling your JD700B series.

Setting SCPI mode

You can use SCPI commands to control your JD700B series remotely.

Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

2 Select System Configuration > Remote Interface > LAN.
3 Press the SCPI soft key.

NOTE
After using the SCPI mode, you may want to set this setting back to App SW if you use
JDViewer or JDRemote mainly.

Configuring LMF setting

The Local Maintenance Facility (LMF) setting is used in order to perform TX Calibration and TX Audit on
Motorola's CDMA/EV-DO BTS in the RF Power Meter mode. See “Appendix F – Motorola CDMA/EV-DO
LMF” on page 669 for more information.

Enabling Bluetooth connection

If your JD700B series has the Bluetooth Connectivity option installed with a license, you can use the
Bluetooth mode to enable communicate between your instrument and your computer with application
software such as JDRemote and JDViewer or to transfer files to a Bluetooth storage device. See “Appendix
G – Bluetooth connection” on page 671 for more information.

48 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 2 Getting Started

Enabling Wi-Fi connection

Wi-Fi Connectivity is an optional feature that you can activate by installing a purchased license on your
JD700B series. After plugging a USB Wi-Fi LAN card using Realtek NICs into the instrument, you can join a
wireless network from the instrument so that you can have access to StrataSync or control the instrument
from the Web-based remote control on a computer.

Procedure

1 Plug in your USB Wi-Fi LAN card to the USB Host port of the JD700B series.
The Wi-Fi LAN card is detected and the white Wi-Fi indicator appears on the screen to indicate it.
NOTE
CellAdvisor JD700B series is compatible only with a USB LAN card that uses Realtek
NICs (RTL8188eu, RTL8192cu, and RTL8812au).
2 Press the SYSTEM hot key.
3 Select System Configuration > Remote Interface > Wi-Fi.
The Wi-Fi mode is turned on automatically. After searching nearby networks, the instrument
displays a list of networks.
4 To select a network to join, complete the following steps:
a To refresh the networks list, press the Scan soft key.
The instrument displays all detected networks as Detected and previously connected ones
as Saved.
b Highlight a network to join by using the arrow keys or rotary knob.
c Press the Select soft key.
The Wi-Fi Connection Info window appears for entries. Figure 5 is an example.
5 To enter a user identity and a password for the network, complete the following steps:
a Tap on the input box for Identity, if required.
The on-screen keyboard appears.
b Type your identity, and then press the Apply soft key.
c Tap on the input box for Password, if required.
The on-screen keyboard appears.
d Type a correct password that must be at least eight characters long.
e Press the Apply soft key.
f To view the password exactly as entered, tap the checkbox for Show Password to enable it.
6 To configure IP network settings, complete the following steps:
a Select the TCP/IP protocol option from the choices: IPv4 and IPv6.
Sub-selection options change according to your selection. If the selected network supports
IPv6, you can configure IP settings for it.
b Do one of the following:
– To enable automatic IP addressing, select DHCP for IPv4 or Auto for IPv6.
It is recommended that you select DHCP unless otherwise you know static IP
addresses.
– To manually assign fixed IP addresses, select Static, and then enter addresses as
required for IPv4 or IPv6. If you do not have required information, contact your
network administrator.
– To disable the IPv6 protocol, select Off.
7 Press the Connect soft key.
Once connected, the Wi-Fi indicator turns to green and the Wi-Fi Connection Info window is
updated with information about the connected network including SSID, status, authentication
type, encryption method, BSSID, and assigned IP address(es). If you have selected Auto for
IPv6 in step 6, you will have Link-Local, Stateless, and Stateful instead of IP Address. If you see
the green Wi-Fi indication with a red exclamation mark in the center, it means that an IP address
has not been assigned.
NOTE
It is important to record the IP address(es) if you want to use the Web Remote on your
computer.
8 To disconnect the currently connected network, select the network and then press the

JD700B Series User’s Guide 49

Chapter 2 Getting Started

Disconnect soft key.

9 To forget the selected network and delete it permanently from the list, press the Remove soft key.

Figure 5 Example of Wi-Fi connection information window

Enabling Web-based remote control

If your JD700B series has the Wi-Fi Connectivity option installed with a license, you can enable this Web
Remote feature to control your instrument from most of Web browsers including Windows Internet Explorer
(IE) 6 and later, Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Android native browser in an accessible network. You can also
use this feature to allow other users to access your instrument remotely and share the live screen
concurrently with up to 10 clients in the network.

Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

2 To get the IP address assigned to your instrument, do one of the following:
– For wireline LAN connection:
a Select System Configuration > Ethernet Config > IPv4 or IPv6.
b Toggle the Mode soft key and select DHCP or Auto for automatic IP addressing.
c Press the Apply soft key.
The Ethernet Configuration box is updated with assigned IP address(es). For IPv6
Auto, you will see Link-Local, Stateless, and Stateful instead of IP Address.
d Record the IP address(es).
NOTE
If your network does not support the automatic IP addressing, contact your network
administrator to get a fixed IP address assigned to your instrument.
– For wireless LAN connection:
a Select System Configuration > Remote Interface > Wi-Fi.
b Select the currently connected network from the list, and then press the Select soft key.
c Record the IP address displayed at the bottom.
– For Bluetooth tethering on an Android-based smartphone or Personal Hotspot on an
iOS-based smartphone:
a Select System Configuration > Remote Interface > Bluetooth.

50 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 2 Getting Started

b Record the IP address assigned to your instrument under Connected Service.

3 Press the SYSTEM hot key again.
4 Select System Configuration > Remote Interface.
5 Toggle the Web Remote soft key and select On to enable it.
6 Open a Web browser on your computer or mobile device, and then enter the IP address you
have obtained in step 2, depending on the TCP/IP protocol. Examples are the following:
– IPv4: 10.82.26.254 (put the entire address including dots in the URL bar)
– IPv6: [fe80::21b:22ff:fea1:924a] (make sure to add the brackets “[” and “]” and put the
entire address including colons in the URL bar)
Your instrument’s live screen appears on the Web browser as shown like Figure 6 or Figure 7.
NOTE
The IPv6 protocol is supported on the operation system “Windows Vista” and later.

Figure 6 Example of Web remote on iPhone

Figure 7 Example of Web remote on Chrome

JD700B Series User’s Guide 51

 3

Chapter 3 Analyzing Measurement Results

This chapter provides instructions on how to use JD700B series’ capabilities for measurement analysis.
Topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

n Using marker ............................................................................................................................. 53

n Using peak search..................................................................................................................... 54
 Chapter 3 Analyzing Measurement Results

Using marker
Marker
Marker is used to get the information about a specific trace. Six markers can be set on the display and each
marker can be used independently. The X and Y coordinates of the trace are displayed when the marker is
placed on any position of the trace. The position displaying the marker’s X and Y coordinates may be slightly
different for each measurement mode and refer to the description of each measurement. There are three
different marker types available: Normal, Delta, and Delta pair. Marker position can be set manually by
entering numeric values (frequency) when one of the marker types is selected.
n Select Marker: Selects an active marker whose position can be changed with the rotary knob or the
arrow keys. The assigned number of the active marker is displayed in the Select Marker menu box
and the active marker number is also displayed right next to the active marker on the trace when the
Marker View is set to On.
n Marker View: Displays the selected marker on the screen or hides it. When the Marker View is
turned off and then on again in the same measurement mode, markers appear at the previous
positions. If a measurement mode is changed, markers are not restored to their previous positions.
n Normal: This Normal marker type provides the reading of a marker position on the trace along with
the marker number between one and six.
n Delta: This Delta marker type is associated with a Normal marker. A Normal marker must be set
before a Delta marker is set. When the Delta marker is set, the position set by the Delta marker
becomes the reference position of the Normal marker and the marker’s X and Y values displays the
difference compared with the Delta marker.
n Delta Pair: This Delta Pair marker type is associated with a Normal marker. A Normal marker must
be set before a Delta Pair marker is set. When the Delta Pair marker is set, the position set by the
Delta Pair marker becomes the reference position of the Normal marker and the marker’s X and Y
values displays the difference compared with the Delta Pair marker. The reference position will be
varied in accordance with trace change.
n Marker All Off: Turns all the markers the screen off. When the Marker View is selected for those
markers, the instrument displays those markers back at the previous position. If a measurement
mode is changed, current settings are not restored.
n Marker à: Sets the X coordinate of the active marker as selected.
- MarkeràCenter: Sets the frequency of the active marker to the center frequency of spectrum
analyzer.
- MarkeràStart: Sets the frequency of the active marker to the start frequency of spectrum
analyzer.
- MarkeràStop: Sets the frequency of the active marker to the stop frequency of spectrum
analyzer.
n Frequency Count: This Frequency Count is used when a highly accurate reading of the frequency
is needed for the active marker on the signal. The measurement sweeps get significantly slower
because the instrument runs the measurement of the signal peak with 1 Hz resolution in background.
Toggle this key between On and Off to enable or disable the frequency count function for the
selected marker.
n Noise Marker: This Noise Marker is used to measure a noise adjacent to a signal by averaging
several data points to calculate the readout for the Noise Marker as if making a measurement using
a 1 Hz bandwidth. Toggle this key between On and Off to enable or disable the noise marker
function for the selected active marker.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 53

Chapter 3 Analyzing Measurement Results

NOTE
Frequency Count and Noise Marker functions are used only in the Spectrum Analyzer
mode.

Using peak search

Peak search
Each time the Peak Search soft key is pressed, the active marker is positioned at the highest peak of the
trace.
n Peak Search: Moves the active marker to the highest peak of the trace.
n Next Peak: Moves the active marker to the second highest peak of the trace.
n Next Peak Right: Moves the active marker to the highest peak to the right of its current position.
n Next Peak Left: Moves the active marker to the highest peak to the left of its current position.
n Min Search: Moves the active marker to the lowest peak of the trace.
n Always Peak: When the Always Peak is set to On, the instrument moves the active marker
automatically to the highest peak of the trace every time the trace is refreshed.

54 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 4

Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

This chapter provides instructions for using the Spectrum Analyzer function. Topics discussed in this chapter
are as follows:

n Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 56
n Display overview ....................................................................................................................... 56
n Connecting a cable.................................................................................................................... 57
n Selecting measurement mode .................................................................................................. 58
n Conducting spectrum measurements ....................................................................................... 65
n Conducting RF measurements ................................................................................................. 68
Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

Introduction
The advantage of using the Spectrum Analyzer is easy to verify the presence of unwanted signals such as
spurious and harmonics, which are normally very hard to identify in time domain analysis.

Performance assurance in wireless communication systems includes the observation of the out-of-band
signal characteristics in order to identify the presence of harmonic signals. Harmonic signals of a carrier may
interfere with other signals far out of the transmission band, or harmonic signals from other transmitter may
interfere with in band signals affecting the spectral integrity.

In these days when wide variety of wireless communication services are provided in frequency bands
assigned very closely to each other, it is critical to ensure that each communication service is carried out
within their assigned frequency band minimizing interference with adjacent frequency bands. The Adjacent
Channel Power Ratio (ACPR) characteristic of a power amplifier or other RF components is an important
factor in evaluating the system performance.

The JD700B series is the optimal solution to perform following measurements:

n Spectrum Analysis
- Spectrum
n RF Analysis
- Channel Power
- Occupied Bandwidth
- Spectrum Emission Mask
- Adjacent Channel Power (ACP)
- Multi-ACP
- Spurious Emissions
- AM/FM Audio Demodulation
- Field Strength
- Route Map
- Dual Spectrum
- PIM Detection (Single and Multiple Carriers)

Display overview
Figure 8 provides overview of each segment of the measurement screen.

56 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

Figure 8 Spectrum measurement screen

Connecting a cable
There are two ways that you can make a connection of your instrument and the base station to be tested:
direct or indirect.

Procedure

To make a direct connection:

1 Connect the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B series and the PA output port of BTS
as shown in Figure 9.

To make an indirect connection:

1 Connect the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B series and the monitor (test) port of
BTS as shown in Figure 10.

Figure 9 Direct connection

JD785B/JD786B/JD745B/JD746B JD788B/JD748B

JD700B Series User’s Guide 57

Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

Figure 10 Indirect connection

JD785B/JD786B/JD745B/JD746B JD788B/JD748B

CAUTION
The maximum power for the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port is +25 dBm (0.316 W) for
JD780B series and +20 dBm (0.1 W) for JD740B series. If the level of the input signal to
be measured is greater than this, use a High Power Attenuator to prevent damage
when you directly connect the signal to the instrument or connect the signal from the
coupling port of a directional coupler.

Selecting measurement mode

Procedure

1 Press the MODE hard key.

2 Press the Spectrum Analyzer soft key. The Measure Off mode is selected by default.
3 Press the MEASURE hot key, and then select the measurement mode from the following
choices:
– Channel Power
– Occupied BW
– Spectrum Emission Mask
– Adjacent Channel Power
– Multi-ACP
– Spurious Emissions
– AM/FM Audio Demod
– Field Strength
– Route Map
– Dual Spectrum
– PIM Detection > Single Carrier and Multiple Carriers

Configuring test parameters

Setting frequency
You need to set the frequency range to be measured with either the center frequency/span or the start/stop
frequencies. You can also set the frequency with the channel number and span.

58 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

Procedure

To set the center frequency and span:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
3 Press the Center Frequency soft key.
4 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob or the arrow keys.
5 Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
6 Press the Span soft key, and then do one of the following:
– To set the span manually, select Span, enter a value, and then select the unit.
– To set the span automatically, select Full Span, Zero Span, or Last Span as needed.
NOTE
The Zero Span option is available only in the Spectrum mode. If you have selected Zero
Span, select TRIGGER > Free Run, External, GPS, Video, or Display Position.

To set the start and stop frequencies:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
3 Press the Start Frequency soft key.
4 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob or the arrow keys.
5 Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
6 Press the Stop Frequency soft key.
7 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob or the arrow keys.
8 Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.

To set the channel number and span:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Channel.
3 To select the standard channel, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Std soft key. The standard channel window appears.
See “Appendix C – Band, frequency & channel standard” on page 664 for more information.
b Highlight the band to be measured by using the rotary knob, the arrow keys, or the
Page Up/Page Down soft keys.
c Press the Select soft key or the rotary knob to confirm the selection.
4 Toggle the Link soft key to select the sweep direction and select Fwd (forward) or Rev (reverse).
5 To set the channel number, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Number soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key or ENTER hard key to complete the entry.
The instrument automatically displays the corresponding center frequency value for the
selected channel number.
6 To set the span, complete the following steps:
a Press the Span soft key.
b Select the span option, from the following choices:
– To set the span manually, select Span, enter a value, and then select the unit.
– To set the span automatically, select Full Span, Zero Span, or Last Span as needed.
NOTE
The Zero Span option is available only in the Spectrum mode. If you have selected Zero
Span, select TRIGGER > Free Run, External, GPS, Video, or Display Position.

Optional. To define the amount of frequency increment for the rotary knob:
1 Press the Frequency Step soft key, if the Freq is selected.
2 Enter a value by using the numeric keys.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 59

Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

3 Press the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.

Optional. To define the amount of channel increment for the rotary knob:
1 Press the Channel Step soft key, if the Channel is selected.
2 Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
3 Press the Enter soft key.

NOTE
This setting is not used in the Spurious Emissions mode.

Setting amplitude
Reference level and attenuation
You can set the reference and attenuation levels automatically or manually to optimize the display of the
traces measured, as you desire.

Procedure

To automatically set the reference and attenuation level:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Press the Auto Scale soft key.
Each time you press this key, both of the Y-axis scale and input attenuation level change to be
optimized with some margin.

To set the reference or attenuation level manually:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 To set the maximum reference level on the Y-axis manually, complete the following steps:
a Press the Reference Level soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys or the rotary knob with 10 dB increments.
c Press the unit soft key or the ENTER hard key.
This unit key name changes according to the setting in the Units menu.
3 To set the attenuation option, select one from the following choices:
– To set the input attenuator’s level automatically, select Attenuation > Auto.

NOTE
It is recommended that you set the Attenuation to Auto in most situations so that the
level of the input attenuator can be set automatically according to your input signal level.

– To set the input attenuation manually up to 55 dB for JD780B series or 50 dB for JD740B
series to optimize S/N, complete the following steps:
a Select Attenuation > Manual.
b Press the Attenuation Value soft key to set the level.
c Enter a value in fives by using the numeric keys.
d Press the dB soft key or the ENTER hard key.
– To couple the input attenuator’s level with your reference level setting, select Attenuation >
Couple.
As you increase the reference setting, the attenuation level also increases acoordingly.

Optional. To change the scale unit:

1 Select More (1/2) > Units.
2 Select the unit of the display scale: dBm, dBV, dBmV, dBµV, V, or W.
The scale unit on the screen changes accordingly.

60 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

NOTE
For the Field Strength mode, the units change to dBµV/m, dBmV/m, dBV/m, Volt/m,
Watt/m^2, and dBm/m^2.

Pre-amplifier
You can turn the internal pre-amplifier on to correct and compensate for the gain of the preamplifier so that
amplitude readings show the value at the input connector.

Procedure

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Toggle the Preamp soft key and select On or Off as needed.

NOTE
You can turn the Preamp on when the input attenuation range is from 0 dB to 10 dB. If
the attenuation value is manually set to greater than 10 dB, the instrument will
automatically turn off the pre-amplifier to display low-level signal properly on the chart.

External offset
You can turn the External Offset on and manually set the external offset value. An offset consists of a cable
loss and a user offset and the measurement result shows the value reflecting both offset values. When the
external offset value is set at 40 dB in the Spectrum mode, the measurement result compensates 40 dB at
both the Spectrum Analyzer and Signal Analyzer modes.

Procedure

To set the external offset:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On.
3 Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.

To turn the external offset off:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Toggle the External Offset soft key and select Off.

NOTE
This setting is not used in the Field Strength mode.

Scale per division

You can use the Scale/Div feature available for the spectrum measurement screen. It represents the value
of one division on the horizontal scale. The default setting is 10 dB per division and the maximum value can
be set up to 20 dB.

Procedure

To set the scale per division:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Select More (1/2) > Scale/Div.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 61

Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

3 Enter a value between 1 and 20 by using the numeric keys.

4 Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.

Setting bandwidth
You can manually set the Resolution Bandwidth (RBW), Video Bandwidth (VBW), and the proportional VBW
based on the designated RBW. Selecting Auto changes the value to correspond to your frequency span
setting for RBW and to the current RBW and VBW/RBW settings for VBW.

Procedure

To automatically set the RBW and VBW to your selected VBW/RBW ratio:
1 Press the BW/AVG hard key.
2 Press the VBW/RBW soft key to set the proportional VBW based on the designated RBW.
Table 9 shows the ratio example for 30 kHz RBW.
3 Select the ratio: 1, 0.3, 0.1, 0.03, 0.01, or 0.003.
4 Toggle the RBW soft key and select Auto.
5 Toggle the VBW soft key and select Auto.
The RBW or VBW value on the screen changes accordingly based on the span.

To manually set the RBW or VBW to your selected VBW/RBW ratio:

1 Press the BW/AVG hard key.
2 Press the RBW soft key.
3 Enter a value between 1 Hz to 3 MHz in 1-3 sequence by using the numeric keys.
4 Select the unit: MHz, kHz, or Hz.
The RBW setting automatically changes to Manual.
5 Press the VBW soft key.
6 Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
7 Select the unit: MHz, kHz, or Hz.
The VBW setting automatically changes to Manual.
The RBW or VBW value on the screen changes accordingly.

NOTE
This setting is not used in the Spurious Emissions mode.

Table 8 VBW/RBW ratio example

RBW Ratio (VBW/RBW) VBW

30 kHz 1:1 30 kHz

1:0.3 10 kHz

1:0.1 3 kHz

1:0.03 1 kHz

1:0.01 300 Hz

1:0.003 100 Hz

Setting average
You can set the number of measurements to be averaged for the trace presentation. A maximum of 100
times of averaging can be set. When the averaging reaches to your setting, a new measurement value
replaces the measurement value in sequence from the earliest.

62 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the BW/AVG hard key.

2 Press the Average soft key.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 100 as needed by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the Enter soft key.

Setting sweep
The SWEEP hot key is used to set and control the sweep time, sweep mode, gated sweep settings, and
gated sweep on or off.

Sweep time
You can set the sweep time automatically or manually. Manual setting allows you to set the sweep time
beyond an automatic setting.

Procedure

1 Press the SWEEP hot key.

2 Select the sweep time option, from the following choices:
– To automatically set, toggle the Sweep Time soft key and select Auto.
– To manually set, complete the following steps:
a Press the Sweep Time soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Select the unit: Sec, mSec, or µSec.
The sweep time mode automatically changes to Manual.

NOTE
This setting is not used in the Spurious Emissions mode.

Sweep mode
The default settings of the sweep mode are Continue and Normal to sweep continuously at a normal speed
for most on-going measurements. If you want to hold the measurement or get a single sweep, you can
change the sweep mode.

Procedure

To select the single sweep mode:

1 Press the SWEEP hot key.
2 Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Single. You can also use the HOLD hot key.
The letter HOLD in red appears and the sweeping is paused.
3 Optional. Press the Sweep Once soft key to get a new measurement.
4 Optional. To speed up sweeping, press the Sweep Mode soft key and then select Fast.
NOTE
Selecting Sweep Mode > Fast may reduce the measurement accuracy, but it is useful to
identify the existence of interfering signals.

To return to the continuous sweep mode:

1 Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Continue. You can also use the HOLD hot key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 63

Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

The letter HOLD in red disappears and the sweeping resumes.

NOTE
This setting is not used in the in the Field Strength mode, the AM/FM Audio Demodulation
mode, and the Route Map mode.

Gated sweep
You can configure the gated sweep settings with an internal or external trigger source. If you select Gated
Sweep Settings, you can view the signal in time domain.

Procedure

1 Press the SWEEP hot key.

2 Press the Gated Sweep Settings soft key.
3 Optional. Adjust sweep time to allow enough time for a cycle by completing the following steps:
a Press the Zero Span Time soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Select the unit: Sec, mSec, or µSec.
4 Set the period, if using the internal trigger source, by doing one of the following:
– To select the preset period, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Period soft key and select StdSignal.
b Press the StdSignal soft key, and then select the period from the choices:
GSM (4.615 ms), WCDMA (10 ms), LTE (10 ms), EV-DO (5 ms), TD-SCDMA (5 ms),
and WiMAX (10 ms).
– To manually set the period, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Period soft key and select Manual.
b Press the Period soft key to enter the amount of time.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
d Select the unit: Sec, mSec, or µSec.
5 Press the TRIGGER hot key, and then do one of the following:
– Select External for an external trigger source.
– Select Video or Display Position for the internal trigger source.
6 Press the PREV hard key to continue setting the gated sweep.
7 Set the gate delay by completing the following steps:
a Press the Gate Delay soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Select the unit: Sec, mSec, or µSec.
8 Set the gate length by completing the following steps:
a Press the Gate Length soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Select the unit: Sec, mSec, or µSec.
9 Press the PREV hard key to enable gated sweeping.
10 Toggle the Gated Sweep soft key and select On.

NOTE
This setting is not used in the in the Spurious Emissions mode, the Field Strength mode,
and the Route Map mode.

Using signal generator (RF source)

You can turn on the RF Source feature to generate a CW signal of different output power levels.

64 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the RF Source soft key.
3 To set the frequency of the CW signal to be injected, complete the following steps:
a Press the Frequency soft key.
b Enter a value within the frequency range of your instrument.
– JD740B series: 25 MHz to 4 GHz
– JD780B series: 5 MHz to 6 GHz
c Select the unit option from the choices: GHz, MHz, kHz, and Hz.
4 To set the output level of the CW signal to be injected, complete following steps:
a Press the Power Level soft key.
b Enter a value within the output range for the frequency you have set.
– JD740B series: -80 dBm to -30 dBm, 0 dBm
– JD780B series: -60 dBm to 10 dBm
c Press the Enter soft key.
5 To start to inject the set signal, toggle the RF Source soft key and select On.
6 To stop injecting the signal, toggle the RF Source soft key and select Off.

Conducting spectrum measurements

If you have configured test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 58, your
measurement is displayed on the screen as like the following example, Figure 11.

Figure 11 Spectrum measurement with spectrum analyzer

JD700B Series User’s Guide 65

Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

Figure 12 Gate sweep measurement with spectrum analyzer

Setting trace
You can display up to six traces on the measurement chart simultaneously.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Select Trace soft key, and then select the trace number: T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, or T6.
The legend shape of the selected trace changes from square to round to indicate that the trace is
the active one now.
3 Do one of the following:
To Select Trace Legend

Clear current data and display with new Clear Write W

measurements

Display the input signal’s maximum response only Max Hold M

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

Display the input signal’s minimum response only Min Hold m

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

Capture the selected trace and compare traces Capture C

Load a saved trace More (1/2) > Load L

Hide the displayed trace Trace View > Off F

Remove all the traces and initialize the trace More (1/2) > Trace
settings Clear All

NOTE
For the Max Hold and Min Hold, your instrument compares newly acquired data with the
active trace and displays larger maximum values or smaller minimum values on the
screen. You can set it to Unlimited to hold and view maximum or minimum data or
specify a certain amount of time up to 60 seconds by using numeric keys or rotary knob.

4 To select the detection option, select More (1/2) > Detectors, and then do one of the following:

66 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

To display Select

Random noise better than the peak without missing signals Normal

The highest value in each data point Peak

The root mean squared average power across the spectrum RMS

The lowest value in each data point Negative Peak

The center value in each data point Sample

5 Optional. Select More (1/2) > Trace Info, and then select the trace number to view the trace’s
parameter setting information stored at the time of the measurement or None to hide the
information display.
6 Optional. If you have the two traces T1 and T2, you can perform trace math. To view the power
difference between the traces, press the T1 – T2 -> T5 or T2 – T1 -> T6 soft key.
The result is overlaid on the screen along with the second Y-axis.

NOTE
To be able to load a trace, the trace to be overlaid must be saved in the same
measurement mode and frequency setting as the current measurement.

Setting limit
Procedure

To use the display line:

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.
2 Press the Display Line soft key for a reference line.
3 Enter a value, and then press the dBm unit soft key.
4 Toggle the Display Line soft key between On and Off to display and dismiss the reference line.
The straight line appears across the screen to be used as a visual reference only.

To display the multiple segment line:

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.
2 Press the Multi Segment Line soft key for Pass/Fail indication.
3 Toggle the Limit soft key between Upper and Lower to select the one to be displayed.
4 Set the number of segments for the selected upper or lower limit line, up to 50 segments.
a Press the # of Line soft key.
b Enter a value between 1 and 50 by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
5 Press the Autoset soft key to let the instrument set the limit for each segment and display the line.
6 Optional. To move the limit line, complete the following steps:
a Select Limit Up/Down or Limit Left/Right.
b Turn the rotary knob to move the line as desired. You can also manually enter a value.
7 Optional. To edit the segment properties, complete the following steps:
a Press the Edit Limit soft key.
b Press the Move soft key and then turn the rotary knob to select the segment to edit.
c Select the menu option, from the following choices:
– To hide the line for the selected segment, toggle the Line soft key and select Off.
– To add a new point, press the Add Point soft key.
– To delete the selected point, press the Delete Point soft key.
– To change the position, press the Frequency or Amplitude soft key, and then turn the
rotary knob to change the value as desired.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 67

Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

8 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting frequency offset

If you want to check how much the actual frequency has been drifted from the input center frequency on
your spectrum, you can set the center frequency as a frequency reference or an offset to view the drifted
amount in frequency easily.

Procedure

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.

2 Press the Frequency Offset soft key.
3 Enter a value using the numeric keys. You can also turn the rotary knob to change the value.
For example, if you have set the center frequency as 89.1 MHz and want to set it as a frequency
reference, you need to enter “-89.1” in the user input field to view the center frequency as “0”.
4 Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
All frequency information on the display changes accordingly.

Conducting RF measurements
Channel power
The Channel Power measurement is a common test used in the wireless industry to measure the total
transmitted power of a radio within a defined frequency channel. It acquires a number of points representing
the input signal in the time domain, transforms this information into the frequency domain using Fast Fourier
Transform (FFT), and then calculates the channel power. The effective resolution bandwidth of the frequency
domain trace is proportional to the number of points acquired for the FFT.

The channel power measurement identifies the total RF power, power spectral density, and Peak to Average
Ratio (PAR) of the signal within the channel bandwidth.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters, you can set the measure setup to continue your measurement. The
measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also use JDViewer, PC application
software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to the instrument.

Procedure

1 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 58.
2 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
3 Set the channel power measurement bandwidth to be measured:
a Press the Integrated BW soft key.
b Enter a bandwidth by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
4 Set the frequency range over which the instrument will sweep:
a Press the Span soft key.
b Enter a span frequency value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.

68 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

5 Set the number of measurements to be averaged:

a Press the Average soft key.
b Enter a value between 1 and 100.
c Press the Enter soft key.

Setting limit

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Channel Power soft key to set the limit parameters.
3 Toggle the Test Limits soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the Pass/Fail indication.
4 Set the upper threshold:
a Press the High Limit soft key.
b Enter a value for the upper limit, and then press the dBm unit soft key.
5 Set the lower threshold:
a Press the Low Limit soft key.
b Enter a value for the lower limit, and then press the dBm unit soft key.
6 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 13 Channel power measurement with spectrum analyzer

Channel power measurement result shows channel power and spectrum density in a user specified channel
bandwidth. The peak to average ratio (PAR) is shown at the bottom of the screen as well. The shaded area
on the display indicates the channel bandwidth.

Occupied bandwidth
The Occupied Bandwidth measures the percentage of the transmitted power within a specified bandwidth.
The percentage is typically 99%.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 69

Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters, you can set the measure setup to continue your measurement. The
measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also use JDViewer, PC application
software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to the instrument.

Procedure

1 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 58.
2 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
3 Set the percentage of power within the bandwidth to be measured:
a Press the Occupied BW % Power soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 Set the frequency range over which the instrument will sweep:
a Press the Span soft key.
b Enter a span frequency value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
5 Set the number of measurements to be averaged:
a Press the Average soft key.
b Enter a value between 1 and 100.
c Press the Enter soft key.

Setting limit

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Occupied BW soft key to set the limit parameters.
3 Toggle the Test Limits soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the Pass/Fail indication.
4 Set the upper threshold:
a Press the High Limit soft key.
b Enter a value for the upper limit, and then select the unit: MHz, kHz, or Hz.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
The Occupied Bandwidth measurement shows both of power across the band and power bandwidth in a
user specified percentage to determine the amount of spectrum used by a modulated signal. Occupied
bandwidth is typically calculated as the bandwidth containing 99% of the transmitted power.

70 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

Figure 14 Occupied bandwidth measurement with spectrum analyzer

Spectrum emission mask (SEM)

The Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurement is to identify and determine the power level of out-of-
band spurious emission outside the necessary channel bandwidth and modulated signal. It measures the
power ratio between in-band and adjacent channels. The JD700B series indicates either Pass or Fail based
on the specified limit of the signal.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters, you can set the measure setup to continue your measurement. The
measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also use JDViewer, PC application
software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to the instrument.

Procedure

1 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 58.
2 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
3 Set the main channel bandwidth to be measured:
a Press the Main Channel BW soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: MHz, kHz, or Hz.
4 Set the frequency range over which the instrument will sweep:
a Press the Span soft key.
b Enter a span frequency value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
5 Set the number of measurements to be averaged:
a Press the Average soft key.
b Enter a value between 1 and 100, and then press the Enter soft key.
6 To configure an offset, up to five, complete the following steps:
a Press the Offset/Limit soft key.
The Offset/Limit screen menu bar appears.
b Press the Offset soft key, and then select the number for the active offset to configure.
c Toggle the Offset soft key and select On to display or Off to hide the active offset.
d Press the Offset Frequency soft key to set the center frequency of the offset.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 71

Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

f Select the unit: MHz, kHz, or Hz.

g Press the Measurement Bandwidth soft key to set the bandwidth for the selected offset.
h Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
i Select the unit: MHz, kHz, or Hz.
j Toggle the Reference soft key between Relative and Absolute and select Relative or
Absolute depending on how to use the reference.
7 To define the selected offset’s limits for Pass/Fail indication, complete the following steps:
a Press the Start Offset Limit soft key to set the threshold for the power difference between
the main channel bandwidth and the selected offset bandwidth on the left.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the dB soft key.
d Press the Stop Offset Limit soft key to set the threshold for the power difference between
the main channel bandwidth and the selected offset bandwidth on the right.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
f Select the dB soft key.

Setting limit

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Spectrum Emission Mask soft key.
3 Toggle the Test Limits soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the Pass/Fail indication.
4 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 15 Spectrum emission mask measurement with spectrum analyzer

Adjacent channel power (ACP)

The Adjacent Channel Power (ACP) is the power contained in a specified frequency channel bandwidth
relative to the total carrier power. It may also be expressed as a ratio of power spectral densities between
the carrier and the specified offset frequency band.

72 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters, you can set the measure setup to continue your measurement. The
measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also use JDViewer, PC application
software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to the instrument.

Procedure

1 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 58.
2 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
3 Set the main channel bandwidth to be measured:
a Press the Main Channel BW soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: MHz, kHz, or Hz.
4 Set the frequency range over which the instrument will sweep:
a Press the Span soft key.
b Enter a span frequency value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
5 Set the number of measurements to be averaged:
a Press the Average soft key.
b Enter a value between 1 and 100, and then press the Enter soft key.
6 To configure an offset, up to five, complete the following steps:
a Press the Offset/Limit soft key.
The Offset/Limit screen menu bar appears.
b Press the Offset soft key, and then select the number for the active offset to configure.
c Toggle the Offset soft key and select On to display or Off to hide the active offset.
d Press the Offset Frequency soft key to set the center frequency of the offset.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
f Select the unit: MHz, kHz, or Hz.
g Press the Integration Bandwidth soft key to set the bandwidth for the selected offset.
h Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
i Select the unit: MHz, kHz, or Hz.
7 To define the selected offset’s limits for Pass/Fail indication, complete the following steps:
a Press the Lower soft key to set the threshold for the power difference between the main
channel bandwidth and the selected offset bandwidth on the left.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the dBc soft key.
d Press the Upper soft key to set the threshold for the power difference between the main
channel bandwidth and the selected offset bandwidth on the right.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
f Select the dBc soft key.

Setting limit

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the ACP soft key.
3 Toggle the Test Limits soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the Pass/Fail indication.
4 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 73

Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 16 Adjacent channel power measurement with spectrum analyzer

Multi-ACP
The Multi-ACP measurement is used to do multi-channel ACP testing. It helps you to measure ACP in multi-
channel transmitting base station environment.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in “Configuring test parameters” on page 58, you can set the
measure setup to continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a
file. You can also use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and
load the file on to the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq or Channel.
– For the frequency setting, complete the following steps:
a Press the Lowest Frequency soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
d Press the Highest Frequency soft key.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
f Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
– For the channel setting, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Std soft key. The standard channel window appears.
b Select the band to be measured by using the rotary knob or the Page p/Page Down
soft keys.
c Press the Select soft key or the rotary knob to confirm the selection.
d Toggle the Link soft key to select the sweep direction and select Fwd (forward) or Rev
(reverse) as needed.

74 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

e Press the Lowest Channel soft key.

f Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
g Press the Enter soft key or ENTER hard key to complete the entry.
The instrument automatically displays the corresponding center frequency value for the
selected channel number.
h Press the Highest Channel soft key.
i Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
j Press the Enter soft key or ENTER hard key to complete the entry.
The instrument automatically displays the corresponding center frequency value for the
selected channel number.
3 To set up ACP setting, press the ACP Settings soft key and then complete the following steps:
a Press the Main Channel BW soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: MHz, kHz, or Hz.
d Press the Span soft key to set the frequency range over which the instrument will sweep.
e Enter a span frequency value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
f Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
g Press the Average soft key to set the number of measurement to be averaged:
h Enter a value between 1 and 100.
i Press the Enter soft key.
4 To configure an offset, up to five, complete the following steps:
a Press the Offset/Limit soft key. The Offset/Limit screen menu bar appears.
b Press the Offset soft key, and then select the number for the active offset to configure.
c Toggle the Offset soft key and select On to display or Off to hide the active offset.
d Press the Offset Frequency soft key to set the offset frequency.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
f Select the unit: MHz, kHz, or Hz.
g Press the Integration Bandwidth soft key.
h Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
i Select the unit: MHz, kHz, or Hz.
5 To define the selected offset’s limits for Pass/Fail indication, complete the following steps:
a Press the Lower soft key to set the threshold for the power difference between the main
channel bandwidth and the selected offset bandwidth on the left.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the dBc soft key.
d Press the Upper soft key to set the threshold for the power difference between the main
channel bandwidth and the selected offset bandwidth on the right.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
f Select the dBc soft key.

Setting limit

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Multi-ACP soft key.
3 Toggle the Test Limits soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the Pass/Fail indication.
4 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 75

Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 17 Multi-ACP measurement with spectrum analyzer

Spurious emissions
The Spurious Emissions measurement is to identify or determine the power level of in-band or out-of-band
spurious emissions within the necessary channel bandwidth and modulated signal. The JD700B series
indicates either Pass or Fail based on the specified limit of the signal.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 58, you can set
the measure setup to continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as
a file. You can also use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and
load the file on to the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set up the range table and parameters, press the Range Table soft key and then complete
the following steps:
a Press the Range soft key, and then select the range number between 1 and 20 to add
as a new or change the existing settings.
b Do the following as desired:
– Select Start Frequency, and then specify the start frequency for the selected range.
– Select Stop Frequency, and then specify the stop frequency for the selected range.
– Select Start Limit, and then specify the lower limit for Pass/Fail indication.
– Select Stop Limit, and then specify the upper limit for Pass/Fail indication.
– Select More (1/2) > Attenuation, and then specify an value in the multiple of five.
– Select More (1/2) > RBW, and then specify a RBW value.
– Select More (1/2) > VBW, and then specify a VBW value.
c Press the PREV hard key.
d Toggle the Range soft key and select On to display the selected range in the result table or
Off to hide it from the table.

76 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

3 Toggle the Measure Type soft key between Examine and Full to select the measurement type.
NOTE
The Examine mode displays only the selected range while the Full mode lets the
instrument automatically changes the selected range from one another.

4 To set the number of measurements to be averaged, complete the following steps:

a Press the Average soft key.
b Enter a value between 1 and 100.
c Press the Enter soft key.
5 To move the highlighted bar in the result table to other range, complete the following steps:
a Press the Range soft key in the Measure Setup menu bar.
b Enter a value between 1 and 20.
c Press the Enter soft key.

Setting limit

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Spurious Emissions soft key.
3 Toggle the Test Limits soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the Pass/Fail indication.
4 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 18 Spurious emissions measurement with spectrum analyzer

AM/FM audio demodulation

The AM/FM Audio Demodulator operates using the power received from radio waves and it serves as an
alternative to identify interfering signals easily. The instrument sounds demodulated signals that can be
heard through the built-in speaker or plugged-in headphones. You can hear the sound and identify
interfering signals easily.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 77

Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 58, you can set
the measure setup to continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as
a file. You can also use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and
load the file on to the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Toggle the Audio Demod soft key between On and Off to turn the AM/FM audio demodulation
on and off.
3 Press the Demod at soft key, and then select the marker number for the frequency to be
demodulated.
NOTE
You must set the marker(s) first by using the MARKER hard key as the AM/FM
demodulator uses the marker position to demodulate. See “Using marker” on page 53 for
more information.
4 Press the Demod Mode soft key, and then select the demodulation mode: AM, FM and CW.
5 Press the Dwell Time soft key, and then turn the rotary knob to set the demodulation interval
between 1 and 20.
6 Press the Volume soft key, and then turn the rotary knob to set the speaker volume.
7 Toggle the Auto Gain soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the automatic gain
feature to adjust the interval gain of the demodulator.
8 Optional. You can use the Save On Event soft key to let the instrument automatically save
measurement screen or result that falls outside the defined limit settings or the Fail indicator is
on. You can also set to save the first event and hold the measurement or to save all the events
continuously. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting limit
You can show or hide the display line on the screen that is used as a visual reference only.

Procedure

To view the display line:

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.
2 Press the Display Line soft key.
3 Enter a value, and then press the dBm unit soft key.
4 Toggle the Display Line On/Off soft key and select On.
The straight line appears on the screen.

To dismiss the display line:

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.
2 Toggle the Display Line On/Off soft key and select Off.

You can use the multiple segment limit line to set up different limits for different frequency ranges for
Pass/Fail indication.

Procedure

To display the multiple segment line:

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.
2 Press the Multi Segment Line soft key.
3 Toggle the Limit soft key between Upper and Lower to select the one to be displayed.

78 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

4 Set the number of segments for the selected upper or lower limit line, up to 50 segments.
a Press the # of Line soft key.
b Enter a value between 1 and 50 by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
5 Press the Autoset soft key to let the instrument set the limit for each segment and display the line.
6 Optional. To move the limit line, complete the following steps:
a Select Limit Up/Down or Limit Left/Right.
b Turn the rotary knob to move the line as desired. You can also manually enter a value.
7 Optional. To edit the segment properties, complete the following steps:
a Press the Edit Limit soft key.
b Press the Move soft key and then turn the rotary knob to select the segment to edit.
c Select the menu option, from the following choices:
– To hide the line for the selected segment, toggle the Line soft key and select Off.
– To add a new point, press the Add Point soft key.
– To delete the selected point, press the Delete Point soft key.
– To change the position, press the Frequency or Amplitude soft key, and then turn the
rotary knob to change the value as desired.
8 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 19 AM/FM audio demodulation with spectrum analyzer

Field strength meter

The Field Strength Meter measures the field strength over the frequency range of a connected antenna,
which is known with its specific bandwidth and gain characteristics. A standard or user-defined antenna can
be selected from the antenna list in the JD700B series.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 79

Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 Connect an antenna to be used with your instrument.

2 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 58.
3 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key, and then do one of the following:
– To select the connected antenna from the list stored in the instrument:
a Press the Antenna List soft key to view the standard and custom antennas.
The antenna list window appears.
b Select an antenna to be used for the field strength measurement by using the rotary
knob, the arrow keys, or Page Up/Page Down soft keys.
c Press the Select soft key.
NOTE
You can use the JDViewer to edit or define a custom antenna and add to this list.
– To edit the properties of the connected antenna:
a Press the Antenna Start Frequency soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or
Hz. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Antenna Stop Frequency soft key.
d Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or
Hz. You can also use the rotary knob.
e Press the Gain soft key to enter the gain information for the antenna.
f Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then select the Enter soft key.

Setting limit
You can show or hide the display line on the screen that is used as a visual reference only.

Procedure

To view the display line:

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.
2 Press the Display Line soft key.
3 Enter a value, and then press the dBm unit soft key.
4 Toggle the Display Line On/Off soft key and select On.
The straight line appears on the screen.

To dismiss the display line:

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.
2 Toggle the Display Line On/Off soft key and select Off.

You can use the multiple segment limit line to set up different limits for different frequency ranges for
Pass/Fail indication.

Procedure

To display the multiple segment line:

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.
2 Press the Multi Segment Line soft key.
3 Toggle the Limit soft key between Upper and Lower to select the one to be displayed.
4 Set the number of segments for the selected upper or lower limit line, up to 50 segments.
a Press the # of Line soft key.

80 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

b Enter a value between 1 and 50 by using the numeric keys.

c Press the Enter soft key.
5 Press the Autoset soft key to set and display the limit line for each segment automatically.
6 Optional. To move the limit line, complete the following steps:
a Select Limit Up/Down or Limit Left/Right.
b Turn the rotary knob to move the line as desired. You can also manually enter a value.
7 Optional. To edit the segment properties, complete the following steps:
a Press the Edit Limit soft key.
b Press the Move soft key and then turn the rotary knob to select the segment to edit.
c Select the menu option, from the following choices:
– To hide the line for the selected segment, toggle the Line soft key and select Off.
– To add a new point, press the Add Point soft key.
– To delete the selected point, press the Delete Point soft key.
– To change the position, press the Frequency or Amplitude soft key, and then turn the
rotary knob to change the value as desired.
8 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 20 Field strength measurement with spectrum analyzer

Route map
The JD700B Series provides the Route Map function that allows you to collect data of points in an indoor or
outdoor environment and track the received signals and coverage of RF transmitters by plotting data real
time directly on top of a loaded floor plan or a map.

The JD700B Series also supports the RAN-IL (Interference Location) feature that enables you to overlay
user experience data obtained through Viavi’s ariesoGEO on your base map to help you troubleshoot
problems easily and quickly using your instrument. You can generate raster data files on the ariesoGEO
application and load them on your instrument.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 81

Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 If required, connect a GPS receiver to your JD700B series for outdoor mapping.
Indoor mapping does not necessarily need a GPS antenna.
2 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 58.
3 To load your map file, complete the following steps:
a Plug in your USB drive that has a floor map or .mcf file type created in JDMapCreator. If
the JDMapCreator application on your computer is connected to the instrument via USB or
LAN, you can send a map file with a single layer to the instrument directly by using the
Send to EQP menu in JDMapCreator.
NOTE
The JDMapCreator converts and resizes any scanned floor plan or layout to fit onto your
instrument’s display. JDMapCreator 1.2.0 or later can save a multiple-layered map,
providing x1, x2, and x4 views, as a sizable map file so that you can zoom in and out
after loading it.
b Press SAVE/LOAD hot key, and then select Load > Load Map. See “Using load” on page
35 for more information.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
5 Press the Plot Point soft key, and then select the plot point option from the following choices:
– To collect data/plot points automatically as you move around in a vehicle or outside, select
GPS and then toggle the Screen Mode soft key between Map and Full.
NOTE
With the Map setting, you can view only the collected points that can be seen within the
boundary of the loaded map. If a point is off the map, the instrument displays an arrow to
indicate the direction of the current location on the map and the distance from the center
to the location at the top of the screen.

With the Full setting, you can view all the collected points of the route without the loaded
map.
– To collect data/plot points manually without a GPS antenna, select Position.
– To collect data/plot points based on time, select Time.
You do not need a GPS antenna as you would usually use this option indoor.
6 Press the Plot Item soft key, and then select the measurement option: RSSI or ACP.
7 Optional. If ACP is selected, set the Main Channel BW and Offset/Limit :
a Press the Main Channel BW soft key.
b Enter a value, and then select the unit from the choices: MHz, kHz, and Hz.
c Press the Offset/Limit soft key.
d Toggle the Offset soft key and select On to display or Off to hide the offset.
e Press the Integration Bandwidth soft key.
f Enter a value, and then select the unit from the choices: MHz, kHz, and Hz.
g Press the Offset Frequency soft key to set the offset frequency.
h Enter a value, and then select the unit from the choices: MHz, kHz, and Hz.
i Press the Offset Limit soft key to set the offset limit.
j Enter a value, and then select the dB soft key.
8 Toggle the Plot soft key and select Start.
9 Touch directly on the screen or press the ENTER hard key to collect data and plot points on the
loaded map for the Position or Time setting.
NOTE
For the Position setting, you can change the direction of the route with screen touch or
the arrow keys and the distance with the rotary knob. For the Time setting, the instrument
interpolates points in between two enters on a straight dotted line. You can change the
direction of the route with the arrow keys and the distance with the rotary knob.
10 Toggle the Plot soft key and select Stop to stop plotting.
11 Press the SAVE/LOAD hot key to save the result. See “Using save” on page 33 for more

82 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

information.
NOTE
The instrument does not automatically save the collected data. It is recommended that
you save the result. Otherwise, you will lose all the collected data.

Setting limit
You can set the thresholds for the four different color indicators.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Excellent soft key to set its threshold.
3 Enter a value, and then press the dBm soft key. You can also use the rotary knob.
4 Press the Very Good soft key to set its threshold.
5 Enter a value, and then press the dBm soft key. You can also use the rotary knob.
6 Press the Good soft key to set its threshold.
7 Enter a value, and then press the dBm soft key. You can also use the rotary knob.
8 Press the Poor soft key to set its threshold.
9 Enter a value, and then press the dBm soft key. You can also use the rotary knob.
10 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 21 Route map measurement screen with GPS

Controlling a map
If you have loaded a sizable map that was created in JDMapCreator 1.2.0 or later, you can use the Map
Control feature that enables you to zoom into the map and view a specific area of interest in detail.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 83

Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Map Control soft key. This key is active only when you have loaded a sizable map.
3 To zoom in or zoom out, do one of the following:
– To zoom into an area of interest directly, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Zoom to soft key and select Area.
The black rectangle appears on the map.
b Press the Zoom In and Zoom Out soft keys, as you need, to decrease and increase
the selected area.
c Move the rectangle by using the four arrow keys, as you need, to place it in a specific
area of interest.
d Press the center of the rotary knob to zoom into the selected area. You can also press
the Zoom to soft key again to zoom into the selected area.
– To zoom into the center or zoom out from the center, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Zoom to soft key and select Center.
b Press the Zoom In and Zoom Out soft keys, as you need, to zoom in and zoom out.
c Move the zoomed-in area by using the four arrow keys, as you need.
4 To set the location mode, toggle the Location Mode soft key between Auto and Manual and
select the one you desire.
– Auto: The instrument compares the coordinates of the displayed map with recevied GPS
information. If your current location goes out of the displayed area and enters into the next
zoomed-in section within the base map, the map display changes automatically to the next
section in which your current position is.
– Manual: The map display of the zoomed-in area remains unchanged even if your current
location goes out of the displayed area. You can change the displayed area manually by
using the arrow keys.

Loading and displaying raster data

If you have a set of raster data files generated through the ariesoGEO application, you can load and overlay
the data on your base map to help you check the signal quality and the strength of interferences while
driving toward the area of interest.

Procedure

1 Copy a set of raster data files into your USB memory drive, including the following:
– ASCII: .tab, .asc, and .clr files
– BIL: .tab,.hdr, .bil, and .clr files
NOTE
The .tab file type is a geospatial vector data format used in many geographic
information systems. The color file (.clr) is an optional file, but the image will be
displayed as a grayscale image without it. The size of the raster map must be
1024 x 1024 or smaller.
2 Plug in the USB memory drive to your instrument.
3 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.
4 Press the Load Raster Map soft key.
The file explorer window appears.
5 Navigate to the raster file (.tab) you want to open, and then press the Load soft key.
The raster image appears on top of your base map as shown in Figure 22.
NOTE
If the area of the loaded raster data is not within the boundary of the base map, you will
not see the raster image on the screen.
6 To select the display option, complete the following steps:

84 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

a Press the Display Options soft key.

b Select the option you desire from the choices: On, Off, and Blink.
7 To adjust the transparency level of the image, complete the following steps:
a Press the Transparency soft key.
b Enter a value between 0 for opaque and 100 for clear.
c Press the Enter soft key.

Figure 22 Raster image overlaid on the base map

Dual spectrum
The Dual Spectrum feature lets you view two spectrum measurements, both the Uplink and Downlink
spectrum, simultaneously eliminating the need to swap between two screens back and forth.

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 58.
2 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
3 Toggle the Active Window soft key between Top and Bottom to select the measurement
window to configure or work on.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 85

Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 23 Dual spectrum measurement with spectrum analyzer

PIM detection (single and multiple carriers)

The Passive Intermodulation (PIM) Detection allows you to detect Uplink PIM across the full spectrum for
any technology. When PIM is detected, the normal repair mode is to replace the offending cable and what
you need to do is replacing the whole cable irrespective of the location of the fault.

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Connect cables as instructed on the screen.
3 Optional. To check any possibility of PIM existence in red color by calculation, complete the
following steps:
a Press the Calculated PIM soft key.
b Press the Radio Band soft key for single carrier.
There are Radio 1 Band and Radio 2 Band soft keys for multiple carriers.
c Highlight a desired band and then press the Select soft key.
d Press the Return soft key.
4 To set the uplink frequency to be measured, do one of the following:
– To set the center frequency and span, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
b Press the Uplink Center Frequency soft key.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
e Press the Uplink Span soft key.
f Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
g Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
– To set the channel number and span, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Unit soft key and select Channel.
b Press the Channel Std soft key and select a desired band.

86 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer

c Press the Channel Number soft key.

d Enter a value by using the numeric keys and then press the Enter soft key.
The instrument automatically displays the corresponding center frequency value for the
selected channel number.
e Press the Uplink Span soft key.
f Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
g Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
5 Press the Continue soft key and follow the instructions on the screen.

Measurement example
Figure 24 PIM detection for single carrier

Figure 25 PIM detection for multiple carriers

JD700B Series User’s Guide 87

 5

Chapter 5 Using Interference Analyzer

This chapter provides instructions for using the Interference Analyzer function (option 011). Topics discussed
in this chapter are as follows:

n Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 89
n Display overview ....................................................................................................................... 89
n Connecting a cable.................................................................................................................... 90
n Selecting measurement mode .................................................................................................. 91
n Configuring test parameters ...................................................................................................... 91
n Conducting spectrum measurements ....................................................................................... 97
n Conducting interference measurements ................................................................................. 100
n Setting limit for interference analyzer ...................................................................................... 114
 Chapter 5 Using Interference Analyzer

Introduction
Interference is becoming more prevalent in the wireless community with the increasing number of
transmitters coming on the air. Wireless service providers have traditionally used spectrum analyzers to
monitor service channels, frequencies, and adjacent spectrum and to locate sources of interference. A
spectrum analyzer can only show you an interfering signal and you require determining the source of the
interference. To solve interference problems, you must understand the RF environment, know adjacent
operating transmitters, and identify any new or unlicensed emitters.

Once a potential interfering signal is identified in the Spectrum Analyzer mode, you can monitor the signal
further in the Interference Analyzer mode. JD700B series provides two different methodologies to identify
and determine interference signals: Spectrogram and Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI). Locating
the source of interference signal can be done with geographical information received from the built-in GPS
receiver.

The JD700B series is extremely effective for locating and identifying periodic or intermittent RF interference.
Interference signals derive from several kinds of licensed or unlicensed transmitters that cause dropped
calls and poor service quality.

The JD700B series provides following measurements for interference analysis:

n Spectrum
n Spectrogram
n Dual Spectrogram
n RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator)
n Interference Finder
n Spectrum Replayer
n Radar Chart

Using a set of the AntennaAdvisor Handle that holds a broadband directional antenna is mandatory in the
Rader Chart mode and its built-in compass, GPS antenna, gyro sensor, and low-noise amplifier (LNA)
benefits you to determine the direction of the interference.

Display overview
Figure 26 provides descriptions for each segment of the measurement screen.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 89

Chapter 5 Using Interference Analyzer

Figure 26 Interference measurement screen

Connecting a cable
Using an Omni or Yagi antenna
Procedure

1 Connect an Omni/directional RF antenna to the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B

series.
2 Connect a GPS antenna to the GPS port of the JD700B series.

Figure 27 Interference measurement connection

JD785B/JD786B/JD745B/JD746B JD788B/JD748B

90 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 5 Using Interference Analyzer

CAUTION
If the input signal level to be measured is less than 0 dBm, set it to 0 dB attenuation or
turn on the preamp to have better dynamic range for the testing.

Using an AntennaAdvisor handle

In the Interference Finder mode and the Radar Chart mode, you can perform interference hunting using the
AntennaAdvisor Handle after attaching a broadband directional antenna to it. The handle is a device that
has a built-in GPS antenna and LNA.

Procedure

1 Mount a broadband antenna to your AntennaAdvisor Handle according to the quick start guide of
the AntennaAdvisor Handle.
2 Connect the RF Type-N jack of the handle to the RF In port of the instrument.
3 Connect the GPS SMA jack of the handle to the GPS port of the instrument.
The GPS status indicator appears on the instrument screen. If GPS is locked, the indicator turns
green.
4 Connect the USB plug of the handle to the USB Host port of the JD700B series.
The device icon appears in the system status bar on the screen.

Figure 28 Connection using AntennaAdvisor handle and log-periodic antenna

Selecting measurement mode

Procedure

1 Press the MODE hard key.

2 Press the Interference Analyzer soft key. The Spectrum mode is selected by default.
3 To change the mode, press the MEASURE hot key and then select the measurement mode:
Spectrogram, Dual Spectrogram, RSSI, Interference Finder, or Spectrum Replayer.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 91

Chapter 5 Using Interference Analyzer

NOTE
If the Dual Spectrogram is selected, you can select the left or right measurement pane
in MEASURE SETUP to configure measurement parameters for the selected
spectrogram.

Configuring test parameters

Setting frequency
You need to set the frequency range to be measured with either the center frequency/span or the start/stop
frequencies. You can also set the frequency with the channel number and span.

Procedure

To set the center frequency and span:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
3 Press the Center Frequency soft key.
4 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob or the arrow keys.
5 Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
6 Press the Span soft key, and then do one of the following:
– To set the span manually, select Span, enter a value, and then select the unit.
– To set the span automatically, select Full Span, Zero Span, or Last Span as needed.
NOTE
The Zero Span option is available only in the Spectrum mode. If you have selected Zero
Span, select TRIGGER > Free Run, External, GPS, Video, or Display Position.

To set the start and stop frequencies:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
3 Press the Start Frequency soft key.
4 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob or the arrow keys.
5 Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
6 Press the Stop Frequency soft key.
7 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob or the arrow keys.
8 Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.

To set the channel number and span:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Channel.
3 To select the standard channel, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Std soft key. The standard channel window appears.
See “Appendix C – Band, frequency & channel standard” on page 664 for more information.
b Highlight the band to be measured by using the rotary knob, the arrow keys, or the Page
Up/Page Down soft keys.
c Press the Select soft key or the rotary knob to confirm the selection.
4 Toggle the Link soft key to select the sweep direction and select Fwd (forward) or Rev (reverse).
5 To set the channel number, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Number soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key or ENTER hard key to complete the entry.
The instrument automatically displays the corresponding center frequency value for the

92 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 5 Using Interference Analyzer

selected channel number.

6 To set the span, complete the following steps:
a Press the Span soft key.
b Select the span option, from the following choices:
– To set the span manually, select Span, enter a value, and then select the unit.
– To set the span automatically, select Full Span, Zero Span, or Last Span as needed.
NOTE
The Zero Span option is available only in the Spectrum mode. If you have selected Zero
Span, select TRIGGER > Free Run, External, GPS, Video, or Display Position.

Optional. To define the amount of frequency increment for the rotary knob:
1 Press the Frequency Step soft key, if the Freq is selected.
2 Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
3 Press the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.

Optional. To define the amount of channel increment for the rotary knob:
1 Press the Channel Step soft key, if the Channel is selected.
2 Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
3 Press the Enter soft key.

Setting amplitude
Reference level and attenuation
You can set the reference and attenuation levels automatically or manually to optimize the display of the
traces measured, as you desire.

Procedure

To automatically set the reference and attenuation level:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Press the Auto Scale soft key.
Each time you press this key, both of the Y-axis scale and input attenuation level change to be
optimized with some margin.

To set the reference or attenuation level manually:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 To set the maximum reference value on the Y-axis manually, complete the following steps:
a Press the Reference Level soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys or the rotary knob with 10 dB increments.
c Press the unit soft key or the ENTER hard key.
This unit key name changes according to the setting in the Units menu.
3 To set the attenuation option, select one from the following choices:
– To set the input attenuator’s level automatically, select Attenuation > Auto.
NOTE
It is recommended that you set the Attenuation to Auto in most situations so that the
level of the input attenuator can be set automatically according to your input signal level.
– To set the input attenuation manually up to 55 dB for JD780B series or 50 dB for JD740B
series to optimize S/N, complete the following steps:
a Select Attenuation > Manual.
b Press the Attenuation Value soft key to set the level.
c Enter a value in fives by using the numeric keys.
d Press the dB soft key or the ENTER hard key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 93

Chapter 5 Using Interference Analyzer

– To couple the input attenuator’s level with your reference level setting, select Attenuation >
Couple.
As you increase the reference setting, the attenuation level also increases acoordingly.

Optional. To change the scale unit:

1 Select More (1/2) > Units.
2 Select the unit of the display scale: dBm, dBV, dBmV, dBµV, V, or W.
The scale unit on the screen changes accordingly.

Scale per division

You can use the Scale/Div feature available for the spectrum measurement screen. It represents the value
of one division on the horizontal scale. The default setting is 10 dB per division and the maximum value can
be set up to 20 dB.

Procedure

To set the scale per division:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Select More (1/2) > Scale/Div.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 20 by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.

Pre-amplifier
You can turn the internal pre-amplifier on to correct and compensate for the gain of the preamp so that
amplitude readings show the value at the input connector.

Procedure

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Toggle the Preamp soft key and select On or Off as needed.

NOTE
You can turn the Preamp on when the input attenuation range is from 0 dB to 10 dB. If
the attenuation value is manually set to greater than 10 dB, the instrument will
automatically turn off the pre-amplifier to display low-level signal properly on the chart.

External offset
You can turn the External Offset on and manually set the external offset value. An offset consists of a cable
loss and a user offset and the measurement result shows the value reflecting both offset values. When the
external offset value is set at 40 dB in the Spectrum mode, the measurement result compensates 40 dB at
both the Spectrum Analyzer and Signal Analyzer modes.

Procedure

To set the external offset:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On.
3 Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.

94 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 5 Using Interference Analyzer

To turn the external offset off:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Toggle the External Offset soft key and select Off.

Setting bandwidth
VBW based on the designated RBW. Selecting Auto changes the value to correspond to your frequency
span setting for RBW and to the current RBW and VBW/RBW settings for VBW.

Procedure

To automatically set the RBW and VBW to your selected VBW/RBW ratio:
1 Press the BW/AVG hard key.
2 Press the VBW/RBW soft key to set the proportional VBW based on the designated RBW.
Table 9 shows the ratio example for 30 kHz RBW.
3 Select the ratio: 1, 0.3, 0.1, 0.03, 0.01, or 0.003.
4 Toggle the RBW soft key and select Auto.
5 Toggle the VBW soft key and select Auto.
The RBW or VBW value on the screen changes accordingly based on the span.

To manually set the RBW or VBW to your selected VBW/RBW ratio:

1 Press the BW/AVG hard key.
2 Press the RBW soft key.
3 Enter a value between 1 Hz to 3 MHz in 1-3 sequence by using the numeric keys.
4 Select the unit: MHz, kHz, or Hz.
The RBW setting automatically changes to Manual.
5 Press the VBW soft key.
6 Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
7 Select the unit: MHz, kHz, or Hz.
The VBW setting automatically changes to Manual.
The RBW or VBW value on the screen changes accordingly.

Table 9 VBW/RBW ratio example

RBW Ratio (VBW/RBW) VBW

30 kHz 1:1 30 kHz

1:0.3 10 kHz

1:0.1 3 kHz

1:0.03 1 kHz

1:0.01 300 Hz

1:0.003 100 Hz

Setting average
You can set the number of measurements to be averaged for the trace presentation. A maximum of 100
times of averaging can be set. When the averaging reaches to your setting, a new measurement value
replaces the measurement value in sequence from the earliest.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 95

Chapter 5 Using Interference Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the BW/AVG hard key.

2 Press the Average soft key.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 100 as needed by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the Enter soft key.

Setting sweep
The SWEEP hot key is used to set and control the sweep time, sweep mode, gated sweep settings, and
gated sweep on or off. This key is not available in the Dual Spectrum mode.

Sweep time
You can set the sweep time automatically or manually. Manual setting allows you to set the sweep time
beyond an automatic setting.

Procedure

1 Press the SWEEP hot key.

2 Select the sweep time option, from the following choices:
– To automatically set, toggle the Sweep Time soft key and select Auto.
– To manually set, complete the following steps:
a Press the Sweep Time soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Select the unit: Sec, mSec, or µSec.
The sweep time mode automatically changes to Manual.

Sweep mode
The default settings of the sweep mode are Continue and Normal to sweep continuously at a normal speed
for most on-going measurements. If you want to hold the measurement or get a single sweep, you can
change the sweep mode.

Procedure

To select the single sweep mode:

1 Press the SWEEP hot key.
2 Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Single. You can also use the HOLD hot key.
The letter HOLD in red appears and the sweeping is paused.
3 Optional. Press the Sweep Once soft key to get a new measurement.

To return to the continuous sweep mode:

1 Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Continue. You can also use the HOLD hot key.
The letter HOLD in red disappears and the sweeping resumes.

NOTE
Selecting Sweep Mode > Fast may reduce the measurement accuracy, but you can use
this fast sweep mode to identify the existence of interfering signals.

96 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 5 Using Interference Analyzer

Gated sweep
You can configure the gated sweep settings with an internal or external trigger source. If you select Gated
Sweep Settings, you can view the signal in time domain.

Procedure

1 Press the SWEEP hot key.

2 Press the Gated Sweep Settings soft key.
3 Optional. Adjust sweep time to allow enough time for a cycle by completing the following steps:
a Press the Zero Span Time soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Select the unit: Sec, mSec, or µSec.
4 Set the period, if using the internal trigger source, by doing one of the following:
– To select the preset period, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Period soft key and select StdSignal.
b Press the StdSignal soft key, and then select the period from the choices:
GSM (4.615 ms), WCDMA (10 ms), LTE (10 ms), EV-DO (5 ms), TD-SCDMA (5 ms),
and WiMAX (10 ms).
– To manually set the period, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Period soft key and select Manual.
b Press the Period soft key to enter the amount of time.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
d Select the unit: Sec, mSec, or µSec.
5 Press the TRIGGER hot key, and then do one of the following:
– Select External for an external trigger source.
– Select Video or Display Position for the internal trigger source.
6 Press the PREV hard key to continue setting the gated sweep.
7 Set the gate delay by completing the following steps:
a Press the Gate Delay soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Select the unit: Sec, mSec, or µSec.
8 Set the gate length by completing the following steps:
a Press the Gate Length soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Select the unit: Sec, mSec, or µSec.
9 Press the PREV hard key to enable gated sweeping.
10 Toggle the Gated Sweep soft key and select On.

NOTE
This setting is not used in the Spectrum Replayer mode.

Conducting spectrum measurements

The spectrum measurement with an audible indicator is especially useful for locating interferer sources with
a directional antenna.

Setting trace
You can display up to six traces on the measurement chart simultaneously.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 97

Chapter 5 Using Interference Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Select Trace soft key, and then select the trace number: T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, or T6.
The legend shape of the selected trace changes from square to round to indicate that the trace is
the active one now.
3 Do one of the following:
To Select Trace Legend

Clear current data and display with new Clear Write W

measurements

Display the input signal’s maximum response only Max Hold M

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

Display the input signal’s minimum response only Min Hold m

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

Capture the selected trace and compare traces Capture C

Load a saved trace More (1/2) > Load L

Hide the displayed trace Trace View > Off F

Remove all the traces and initialize the trace More (1/2) > Trace
settings Clear All

NOTE
For the Max Hold and Min Hold, your instrument compares newly acquired data with the
active trace and displays larger maximum values or smaller minimum values on the
screen. You can set it to Unlimited to hold and view maximum or minimum data or
specify a certain amount of time up to 60 seconds by using numeric keys or rotary knob.

4 To select the detection option, select More (1/2) > Detectors, and then do one of the following:

To display Select

Random noise better than the peak without missing signals Normal

The highest value in each data point Peak

The root mean squared average power across the spectrum RMS

The lowest value in each data point Negative Peak

The center value in each data point Sample

5 Optional. Select More (1/2) > Trace Info, and then select the trace number to view the trace’s
parameter setting information stored at the time of the measurement or None to hide the
information display.
6 Optional. If you have the two traces T1 and T2, you can perform trace math. To view the power
difference between the traces, press the T1 – T2 -> T5 or T2 – T1 -> T6 soft key.
The result is overlaid on the screen along with the second Y-axis.

NOTE
To be able to load a trace, the trace to be overlaid must be saved in the same
measurement mode and frequency setting as the current measurement.

Sound indicator
You can use the Sound Indicator to help you identify interfering signals by sounding an alarm.

98 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 5 Using Interference Analyzer

Procedure

1 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 92.
2 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
3 Press the Sound Indicator soft key.
4 Toggle the Sound soft key between On and Off to enable and disable the alarm sound.
5 Select the alarm reference option from the following choices:
– To set the active marker position as the alarm reference, toggle the Alarm Reference soft
key and select Marker.
– To set the limit as the alarm reference, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Alarm Reference soft key and select Line.
The Limit Line menu becomes activated to be set.
b Press the Limit Line soft key to define a threshold for the limit line.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Press the dBm soft key.
6 Optional. To adjust the volume for alarm sound, press the Volume soft key and then turn the
rotary knob clockwise or counter clockwise.
7 Optional. You can save logging data automatically so that you can load the measurement data
and replay in the Spectrum Replayer mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

AM/FM audio demodulation

th
You can use the AM/FM Audio Demodulation to identify if the interfering signal is n harmonics of AM/FM
audio. The instrument sounds demodulated signals that you can hear through the speaker or headphones.

Procedure

1 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 92.
2 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
3 Toggle the Audio Demod soft key between On and Off to turn the AM/FM audio demodulation
on and off.
4 Press the Demod at soft key, and then select the marker number for the frequency to be
demodulated.
NOTE
You must set the marker(s) first by using the MARKER hard key as the AM/FM
demodulator uses the marker position to demodulate. See “Using marker” on page 53 for
more information.
5 Press the Demod Mode soft key, and then select the demodulation mode: AM, FM and CW.
6 Press the Dwell Time soft key, and then turn the rotary knob to set the demodulation interval
between 1 and 20.
7 Press the Volume soft key, and then turn the rotary knob to set the speaker volume.
8 Toggle the Auto Gain soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the automatic gain
feature to adjust the interval gain of the demodulator.
9 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Interference ID
The Interference ID automatically classifies interfering signals over a designated spectrum and displays the
list of possible signal types corresponding to the selected signal.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 99

Chapter 5 Using Interference Analyzer

Procedure

1 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 92.
2 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
3 Toggle the Interference ID soft key between On and Off to turn the Interference ID on and off.
4 To set the threshold level manually, complete the following steps:
a Press the Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the dBm soft key.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the display line, multi-
segment line, and channel limit. See “Setting limit for interference analyzer” on page 109
for more information.

Conducting interference measurements

Spectrogram
The Spectrogram is particularly useful when attempting to identify periodic or intermittent signals as it
captures spectrum activity over time and uses various colors to differentiate spectrum power levels. When
the directional antenna is used to receive the signal, you will see a change in the amplitude of the tracked
signal as you change the direction of the antenna and see a change in the Spectrogram colors. The source
of the signal is located in the direction that results in the highest signal strength.

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 92.
2 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
3 To set the amount of time between each trace measurement:
a Press the Time Interval soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Sec soft key.
4 To set the time cursor on a specific trace position, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Time Cursor soft key and select On.
b Turn the rotary knob to move the time cursor. You can also enter a value and then press the
Enter soft key.
NOTE
Enabling the time cursor puts the measurement on hold and you can make post-
processing analysis for each measurement over time using the time cursor.

5 To start a new measurement, press the Reset/Restart soft key.

6 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
The spectrogram shows a vertical line on the chart when the marker is enabled on the screen.

100 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 5 Using Interference Analyzer

Figure 29 Interference measurement in spectrogram

n The horizontal line or X-axis of the spectrogram is frequency.

n The vertical line or Y-axis is time.
n The color identification (Spectrogram) indicates power level of the tracked signal. As the signal
strength increases, the color on the spectrogram changes accordingly.

Figure 30 Interference measurement in spectrogram with gated sweep on

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the display line, multi-
segment line, and channel limit. See “Setting limit for interference analyzer” on page 109
for more information.

Dual spectrogram
The Dual Spectrogram mode is useful to compare two spectrograms displayed simultaneously on the screen.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 101

Chapter 5 Using Interference Analyzer

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 92.
2 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
3 Toggle the Active Window soft key and select Left or Right spectrogram to be set up.
4 To set the amount of time between each trace measurement:
a Press the Time Interval soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Sec soft key.
5 To set the time cursor on a specific trace position, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Time Cursor soft key and select On.
b Turn the rotary knob to move the time cursor. You can also enter a value and then press the
Enter soft key.

NOTE
Enabling the time cursor puts the measurement on hold and you can make post-
processing analysis for each measurement over time using the time cursor.

6 To start a new measurement, press the Reset/Restart soft key.

7 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 31 Interference measurement in dual spectrogram view

RSSI
The Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) is a multi-signal tracking metric that is particularly useful for
measuring power-level variations over time. The RSSI measurement lets you assign power limit line for
audible alarms and increase alarm counters every time a signal exceeds a defined limit line. For long-term
analysis, the spectrogram and RSSI measurements can be automatically saved into an external USB
memory. Post-analysis can be performed with JDViewer application software.

102 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 5 Using Interference Analyzer

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 92.
2 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
3 To set up the alarm parameters, complete the following steps:
a Press the Alarm soft key.
b Press the Alarm at soft key and select the marker number: M1 to M6.
c Press the Limit Line soft key to set a threshold for the alarm.
d Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
e Press the dBm soft key.
f Toggle the Alarm soft key between On and Off to turn the alarm feature on or off.
g Optional. Press the Volume soft key and adjust the volume.
4 To set up the AM/FM audio demodulation, complete the following steps:
a Press the AM/FM Audio Demod soft key.
b Toggle the Audio Demod soft key between On and Off to turn the AM/FM audio
demodulation on or off.
c Press the Demod at soft key, and then select the marker number for the frequency to be
demodulated.

NOTE
For the alarm and AM/FM audio demodulation, you must set the marker(s) first by using
the MARKER hard key as these features use the marker position to sound alarm or
demodulate. See “Using marker” on page 53 for more information.

d Press the Demod Mode soft key, and then select the demodulation mode: AM, FM, and CW.
e Press the Dwell Time soft key, and then turn the rotary knob to set the demodulation
interval between 1 and 20.
f Toggle the Auto Gain soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the automatic gain
feature to adjust the interval gain of the demodulator.
g Optional. Press the Volume soft key and adjust the volume.
5 To start a new measurement, press the Reset/Restart soft key.
6 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 103

Chapter 5 Using Interference Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 32 Interference measurement in RSSI

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the display line, multi-
segment line, and channel limit. See “Setting limit for interference analyzer” on page 109
for more information.

Interference finder
The Interference Finder is an automatic triangulation algorithm that uses GPS coordinates to locate possible
interference sources based on three measurements. The interference finder calculates possible interference
locations using its inscribed circle or circumscribed circle based on measured intersection points. You can
plot up to seven measurement points and select three that are more representative for triangulation. JD700B
series automatically logs measurement positions not to lose them while changing measurement modes.

The JD700B Series also supports the RAN-IL (Interference Location) feature that enables you to overlay
user experience data obtained through Viavi’s ariesoGEO on your base map to help you troubleshoot
problems easily and quickly using your instrument. You can generate raster data files on the ariesoGEO
application and load them on your instrument.

Loading a map
After you have made connections as described in the “Using an Omni or Yagi antenna” on page 90 and
configured test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 92, you need to load a
map of the area where you want to go out and do interference hunting.

Procedure

1 Plug in your USB drive that has a map file in .mcf file type created in JDMapCreator. If the
JDMapCreator application on your computer is connected to the instrument via USB or LAN,
you can send a map file with a single layer to the instrument directly by using the Send to EQP
menu in JDMapCreator.
NOTE
The JDMapCreator converts and resizes any scanned floor plan or layout to fit onto your
instrument’s display. JDMapCreator 1.2.0 or later can save a multiple-layered map,
providing x1, x2, and x4 views, as a sizable map file so that you can zoom in and out

104 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 5 Using Interference Analyzer

after loading it.

2 Press SAVE/LOAD hot key, and then select Load > Load Map.
3 Navigate to a map file you want to open.
The File Information pane displays file properties including file name, map type, and address. If
you see “Sizable Map” for Map Type, you can zoom in and out the base map after loading.
4 Press the Load soft key. The loaded map appears.

Initializing AntennaAdvisor
If you have connected the AntennaAdvisor Handle to your instrument, you need to initialize it so that you get
azimuth data as accurately as possible.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

A message appears at the bottom of the screen to alert you if you have not performed
initialization of your connected the antenna handle set.
2 To adjust the integration bandwidth based on the center frequency of the interfering signal that
you have identified in the Spectrum view, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit option from the choices: GHz, MHz, kHz, and Hz.
3 Initialize the antenna handle to calibrate the built-in compass by completing the following steps:
a Hold your antenna handle horizontally in its upright position.
b Point the antenna to the north, and then press the Initialize AntennaAdvisor soft key.

Setting location
As the Interference Finder uses triangulation to provide a circle of possible source of the interference, you
must set three location points so that the straight lines started from the point can create three intersections.
If you have the AntennaAdvisor Handle, it makes it easy to determine these points using its built-in compass
and GPS antenna while measure power level of the received signal.

Procedure

1 Press the Location Setup soft key in the Measure Setup menu bar.
2 Press the Location soft key to set three location points.
3 Press the Point [1|2|3] soft key to set the first location point, and then do one of the following:
– To automatically get the selected point’s positioning information with GPS locked, press the
Get GPS Position. The instrument displays the latitude and longitude information of the
signal received by either the GPS antenna or AntennaAdvisor Handle.
– To manually define a position for the selected point, complete the following steps:
a Press the Latitude soft key, and then set the properties: North/South, Degree,
Minute, and Second.
b Press the Longitude soft key, and then set the properties: East/West, Degree,
Minute, and Second.
4 To set an azimuth, do one of the following:
– Using the AntennaAdvisor Handle, complete the following steps:
a Press and hold the TRIGGER button on the handle and pan the antenna handle to scan
through until you find the strongest RSSI value.
RSSI, polarization, elevation and azimuth readings are continuously updated on the
screen while pressing the physical button.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 105

Chapter 5 Using Interference Analyzer

b Release the TRIGGER button to stop scanning.

– Using a compass, complete the following steps:
a Press the Azimuth soft key.
b Pan your Yagi antenna to find a signal with highest RSSI value, and then measure an
azimuth of the interfering signal.
c Enter the measured angle using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
– Using your instrument without a compass, complete the following steps:
a Press the Azimuth soft key.
b Pan your Yagi antenna to find a signal with highest RSSI value.
c Turn the rotary knob to align the straight line on the base map with the direction of the
interfering signal. The azimuth calculated by the instrument appears on the screen.
NOTE
The AntennaAdvisor Handle has a built-in low-noise amplifier (LNA) and you can turn it
on and off using the physical On/Off button located on the rear side of the handle unit.
For example, if the received signal is weak, you can turn on the switch to improve S/N.
5 To save the defined position, press the Save Position soft key and then select one of the soft
keys to which you want to save the position information. The instrument stores the saved location
points in the internal memory so that you can load them by using the Load Position soft key.
6 Press the Location soft key, and then repeat steps 3-5 to set the second location point.
7 Press the Location soft key, and then repeat steps 3-5 to set the third location point.
The circumscribed circle appears when the lines from three location points create three
intersections or vertices.

Setting display mode

When the triangulation is done with three location points and azimuth for each point, you can view a
circumscribed circle by default. You can change the display mode to inscribed circle or double circles to view
a narrower area. The center of the green-shaded circle is determined to be where the source of the
interfering signal resides.

Procedure

1 Press the Display Setup soft key in the Measure Setup menu bar.
2 Press the Display Mode soft key, and then select the option from the following choices:
Circum: It displays a Inscribed: It displays an Double: It displays both
circumscribed circle that meets inscribed circle that meets the circumscribed and inscribed
three vertices of the triangle. three sides of the triangle. circles.

3 Toggle the Screen Mode soft key to select Map or Full as needed.
– Map: This option displays what are inside the base map with the map image.

106 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 5 Using Interference Analyzer

– Full: This option displays three location points and defined circle without the map image.

Controlling a map
If you have loaded a sizable map that was created in JDMapCreator 1.2.0 or later, you can use the Map
Control feature that enables you to zoom into the green-shaded area on the map and view the location of
the interference source in detail.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Map Control soft key. This key is active only when you have loaded a sizable map.
3 Do one of the following:
– To zoom into an area of interest directly, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Zoom to soft key and select Area.
The black rectangle appears on the map.
b Press the Zoom In and Zoom Out soft keys, as you need, to decrease and increase
the selected area.
c Move the rectangle by using the four arrow keys, as you need, to place it in a specific
area of interest.
d Press the center of the rotary knob to zoom into the selected area. You can also press
the Zoom to soft key again to zoom into the selected area.
– To zoom into the center or zoom out from the center, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Zoom to soft key and select Center.
b Press the Zoom In and Zoom Out soft keys, as you need, to zoom in and zoom out.
c Move the zoomed-in area by using the four arrow keys, as you need.

Measurement example
Figure 33 Interference finder measurement in map view

Loading and displaying raster data

If you have a set of raster data files generated through the ariesoGEO application, you can load and overlay
the data on your base map to help you assume suspicious points of interference easily and pinpoint the

JD700B Series User’s Guide 107

Chapter 5 Using Interference Analyzer

source of the interference quickly.

Procedure

1 Copy a set of raster data files into your USB memory drive, including the following:
– ASCII: .tab, .asc, and .clr files
– BIL: .tab,.hdr, .bil, and .clr files
NOTE
The .tab file type is a geospatial vector data format used in many geographic
information systems. The color file (.clr) is an optional file, but the image will be
displayed as a grayscale image without it. The size of the raster map must be
1024 x 1024 or smaller.
2 Plug in the USB memory drive to your instrument.
3 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.
4 Press the Load Raster Map soft key.
The file explorer window appears.
5 Navigate to the raster file (.tab) you want to open, and then press the Load soft key.
The raster image appears on top of your base map as shown in Figure 34.
NOTE
If the area of the loaded raster data is not within the boundary of the base map, you will
not see the raster image on the screen.
6 To select the display option, complete the following steps:
a Press the Display Options soft key.
b Select the option you desire from the choices: On, Off, and Blink.
7 To adjust the transparency level of the image, complete the following steps:
a Press the Transparency soft key.
b Enter a value between 0 for opaque and 100 for clear.
c Press the Enter soft key.

Figure 34 Raster image overlaid on the map in interference finder

Spectrum Replayer
The Spectrum Replayer lets you retrieve and replay recorded spectrum analyzer traces in interference
analysis mode. These traces can be played back in the spectrogram or RSSI. You can configure the limit line
to create failure points when signals exceed it. The failure points are clearly displayed on the trace timeline

108 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 5 Using Interference Analyzer

for quick access during playback.

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key.

2 Press the Spectrum Replayer soft key.
The file manager window appears.
3 Select a file to be loaded, and then press the Load soft key.
The Measure Setup screen menus appear.
4 Toggle the Replay Direction soft key between FWD and REV to change play direction to forward
or reverse.
5 Press the Replay Speed soft key, and then select the speed option: x1, x2, x3, and x4.
6 Press the Play soft key to start playing.
7 Press the Pause soft key to pause or stop playing data.
8 To move to a particular failure position directly and play from there, complete the following steps:
a Press the Jump to Fail Index soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
9 Optional. Toggle the Time Cursor soft key between On and Off to display or hide the time cursor
on the screen. This key becomes activated when you play logged data in the Spectrogram mode.

NOTE
If you connected a USB drive, do not remove it while playing. Doing so may freeze the
USB port, which will require you to restart the instrument to get a USB drive recognized
again.

Setting display
You can select the display option.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Select the display option: Spectrum, Spectrogram, or RSSI.

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the display line, multi-
segment line, and channel limit. See “Setting limit for interference analyzer” on page 109
for more information.

Radar Chart
If you have identified an interfering signal on your spectrum view, you can move to the Radar Chart mode
and measure RSSI power level through 360 degrees at a location received by the connected broadband
directional antenna so that you can determine the direction of the source of the interference. A set of the
AntennaAdvisor Handle with the antenna is mandatory to perform measurements in this mode.

If you have obtained user experience data through Viavi’s ariesoGEO and generated raster data files from
the application, you can load them onto your base map to help you troubleshoot problems easily and quickly.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 109

Chapter 5 Using Interference Analyzer

Loading a map
After you have connected your AntennaAdvisor Handle set to the JD700B series as described in the “Using
an AntennaAdvisor handle” on page 91 and configured test parameters as described in the “Configuring test
parameters” on page 92, you need to load a map of the area where you want to go out and do interference
hunting activities.

Procedure

1 Plug in your USB drive that has a map file in .mcf file type created in JDMapCreator. If the
JDMapCreator application on your computer is connected to the instrument via USB or LAN,
you can send a map file with a single layer to the instrument directly by using the Send to EQP
menu in JDMapCreator.
NOTE
The JDMapCreator converts and resizes any scanned floor plan or layout to fit onto your
instrument’s display. JDMapCreator 1.2.0 or later can save a multiple-layered map,
providing x1, x2, and x4 views, as a sizable map file so that you can zoom in and out
after loading it.
2 Press SAVE/LOAD hot key, and then select Load > Load Map.
3 Navigate to a map file you want to open.
The File Information pane displays file properties including file name, map type, and address. If
you see “Sizable Map” for Map Type, you can zoom in and out the base map after loading.
4 Press the Load soft key.
The loaded map appears. Before pressing the Get GPS Position soft key, you should not
interpret the center of the radar chart as your current geographical location on the map.

Controlling a map
If you have loaded a sizable map that was created in JDMapCreator 1.2.0 or later, you can use the Map
Control feature that enables you to zoom into the map and view a specific area of interest in detail.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Map Control soft key. This key is active only when you have loaded a sizable map.
3 Do one of the following:
– To zoom into an area of interest directly, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Zoom to soft key and select Area.
The black rectangle appears on the map.
b Press the Zoom In and Zoom Out soft keys, as you need, to decrease and increase
the selected area.
c Move the rectangle by using the four arrow keys, as you need, to place it in a specific
area of interest.
d Press the center of the rotary knob to zoom into the selected area. You can also press
the Zoom to soft key again to zoom into the selected area.
– To zoom into the center or zoom out from the center, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Zoom to soft key and select Center.
b Press the Zoom In and Zoom Out soft keys, as you need, to zoom in and zoom out.
c Move the zoomed-in area by using the four arrow keys, as you need.

Initializing AntennaAdvisor
After you have loaded a map for the area of interest, you need to initialize the AntennaAdvisor Handle to
calibrate its built-in compass in order to obtain more accurate azimuth information.

110 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 5 Using Interference Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

A message appears at the bottom of the screen to alert you if you have not performed
initialization of your connected the antenna handle set.
2 To adjust the integration bandwidth based on the center frequency of the interfering signal that
you have identified in the Spectrum view, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit option from the choices: GHz, MHz, kHz, and Hz.
3 Initialize the antenna handle to calibrate the built-in compass by completing the following steps:
a Hold your antenna handle horizontally in its upright position. To avoid unnecessary impact
of external magnetic field, position yourself at the location where the value of magnetic field
strength displayed on the instrument is green.
b Point the antenna to the north, and then press the Initialize AntennaAdvisor soft key.
The message disappears and the red line for the current antenna direction moves to the
0-degree line and overlaps to let you know that the initialization is done successfully.

NOTE
If is recommended that you re-initialize the AntennaAdvisor Handle after measurements
to re-calibrate the compass when you notice that the red line on the radar chart is not
aligned with the north on the map even though you are pointing the antenna to the north.

Obtaining RSSI data

After you have connected your antenna handle set and done necessary setups, you can monitor the power
level of the received signal, the amount of polarization, and elevation level real time. Using the Trigger
button on the antenna handle set, you can plot the RSSI level through 360 degrees at your location.

Procedure

1 When you have the green GPS indicator, press the Get GPS Position soft key in the Measure
Setup menu bar to set your current location with GPS locked as the center of the radar chart.
The latitude and longitude information at the bottom of the display changes from ‘Unknown
Position’ to the obtained position information.
2 Optional. To save a position to recall for triangulation in the Interference Finder mode, press the
Save Position soft key and then select one of the soft keys to which you want to save.
3 Monitor the RSSI reading of the received signal. If the signal is weak, turn on the LNA switch on
the antenna handle set to improve S/N.
NOTE
The AntennaAdvisor Handle has a built-in low-noise amplifier (LNA) and you can turn it
on and off by toggling the physical On/Off switch located on the rear side of the handle
unit.
4 Hold the antenna handle set horizontally and then make the following measurement:
– To obtain a RSSI value, complete the following steps:
a Press the TRIGGER button located on the antenna handle.
Every time you press the physical button on the handle, a beep is sounded and a power
level of the received signal is plotted as a blue dot on the radar chart. Depending on the
strength of the measured value, you may hear different tones of beeping.
b With panning the antenna horizontally to vary the angle of the direction, repeat
pressing the TRIGGER button to obtain at least five points if you want to do the
localization.
– To obtain RSSI values continuously, complete the following steps:
a Press and hold the TRIGGER button located on the antenna handle to start a
continuous measurement.
b Pan the antenna handle horizontally through the angle of 360 degrees you desire.
A beep is sounded repeatedly to let you know that the measurement is continuing and

JD700B Series User’s Guide 111

Chapter 5 Using Interference Analyzer

measured values are plotted on the radar chart. See Figure 35 for an example.
c Release the TRIGGER button to stop the continuous measurement.

NOTE
The maximum number you can plot on the radar chart is 500 points both in the single
and continuous measurements. If your measurement reached to 500 points, you need to
reset the measurement by pressing the Localization soft key twice or performing the
initialization of the AntennaAdvisor Handle.

Concentric circles indicate different levels of RSSI. The outer circle, the higher power
level is. You can use the AMP/SCALE hard to adjust the amplitude scale of the chart.

5 To change the display mode, toggle the Screen Mode soft key and select Map or Full as
needed.
– Map: It displays measured points inside the base map image. If you are in the area outside
the base map and continue your measurement with the Trigger button, the instrument
continue obtaining data even though the radar chart disappears from the screen. You can
view obtained data when you change this display option to Full.
– Full: It displays measured points without the base map image. In case that you made
measurements in the area outside the map image, selecting this option moves your
measured data to the center of the display so that you can view the result.

Localizing RSSI data

The Localization feature lets you view averaged and smoothed measurement data with a bold green line on
the radar chart that helps you determine the direction of the highest RSSI value. When you have five or
more data points plotted on the radar chart, you can perform this localization.

Procedure

1 Press the Localization soft key in the Measure Setup menu bar.
All the measured points turn to green color and you can view the bold green line that indicates
the possible direction of the interference source. See Figure 36 for an example.
2 To clear all the data plots on the radar chart, press the Localization soft key again.

112 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 5 Using Interference Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 35 RSSI data plotted on the radar chart

Figure 36 Localized RSSI data on the radar chart

Loading and displaying raster data

If you have a set of raster data files generated through the ariesoGEO application, you can load and overlay
the data on your background map to help you view suspicious points of interference easily and pinpoint the
source of the interference quickly.

Procedure

1 Copy a set of raster data files into your USB memory drive, including the following:
– ASCII: .tab, .asc, and .clr files
– BIL: .tab,.hdr, .bil, and .clr files

JD700B Series User’s Guide 113

Chapter 5 Using Interference Analyzer

NOTE
The .tab file type is a geospatial vector data format used in many geographic
information systems. The color file (.clr) is an optional file, but the image will be
displayed as a grayscale image without it. The size of the raster map must be
1024 x 1024 or smaller.
2 Plug in the USB memory drive to your instrument.
3 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.
4 Press the Load Raster Map soft key.
The file explorer window appears.
5 Navigate to the raster file (.tab) you want to open, and then press the Load soft key.
The raster image appears on top of your base map.
NOTE
If the area of the loaded raster data is not within the boundary of the base map, you will
not see the raster image on the screen.
6 To select the display option, complete the following steps:
a Press the Display Options soft key.
b Select the option you desire from the choices: On, Off, and Blink.
7 To adjust the transparency level of the image, complete the following steps:
a Press the Transparency soft key.
b Enter a value between 0 for opaque and 100 for clear.
c Press the Enter soft key.

Setting limit for interference analyzer

The Interference Analyzer function provides you with limit setting options for you to select, as you desire.
They are a single line limit, a multi-segment line limit, and a channel limit.

Setting a single limit line

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Display Line soft key for a reference line.
3 Enter a value, and then press the dBm unit soft key.
4 Toggle the Display Line soft key between On and Off to display and dismiss the reference line.
The straight line appears across the screen to be used as a visual reference only.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting a multi-segment line

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Multi Segment Line soft key for Pass/Fail indication.
3 Toggle the Limit soft key between Upper and Lower to select the one to be displayed.
4 Set the number of segments for the selected upper or lower limit, up to 50 segments.
a Press the # of Line soft key.
b Enter a value between 1 and 50 by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.

114 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 5 Using Interference Analyzer

5 Press the Autoset soft key to automatically set the limit for each segment and display the line.
6 To move the limit line, complete the following steps:
a Select Limit Up/Down or Limit Left/Right.
b Turn the rotary knob to move the line as desired. You can also manually enter a value.
7 To edit the segment properties, complete the following steps:
a Press the Edit Limit soft key.
b Press the Move soft key and then turn the rotary knob to select the segment to edit.
c Select the menu option, from the following choices:
– To hide the line for the selected segment, toggle the Line soft key and select Off.
– To add a new point, press the Add Point soft key.
– To delete the selected point, press the Delete Point soft key.
– To change the position, press the Frequency or Amplitude soft key, and then turn the
rotary knob to change the value as desired.
8 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Defining a channel limit

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Channel Limit soft key.
3 To define the index table, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Table soft key between On and Off to display and hide the channel index table
on the screen.
b Press the Index soft key.
c Enter an index number to be set between 1 and 10 by using the numeric keys, and then
press the Enter soft key.
d Press the Start Frequency or Center Frequency soft key depending on your prior
frequency setting.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then select the unit from the choices: GHz,
MHz, kHz, and Hz. You can also use the rotary knob or the arrow keys.
f Press the Stop Frequency or Span Width soft key depending on your prior frequency
setting.
g Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then select the unit from the choices: GHz,
MHz, kHz, and Hz. You can also use the rotary knob or the arrow keys.
4 To set the limits for Pass/Fail indication, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Limit soft key between On and Off to enable and disable the limit.
b Press the High Limit soft key.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob or the arrow
keys, and then press the dBm soft key.
d Press the Low Limit soft key.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob or the arrow
keys, and then press the dBm soft key.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 115

 6

Chapter 6 Using GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal

Analyzer
This chapter provides instructions for using the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer function (option 022)
with GSM//GPRS/EDGE OTA Analyzer function (option 042). Topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

n Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 117

n Display overview ..................................................................................................................... 117
n Connecting a cable.................................................................................................................. 118
n Selecting measurement mode ................................................................................................ 120
n Configuring test parameters .................................................................................................... 120
n Conducting spectrum measurements ..................................................................................... 124
n Conducting RF measurements ............................................................................................... 125
n Conducting power vs. time measurements ............................................................................. 131
n Conducting constellation measurements ................................................................................ 134
n Performing auto measurements .............................................................................................. 136
n Conducting GSM OTA measurements .................................................................................... 138
 Chapter 6 Using GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer

Introduction
The Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) is a digital cellular standard that uses Time Division
Multiple Access (TDMA) multiplexing scheme and Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying (GMSK) modulation. The
Enhanced Data Rates for GSM Evolution (EDGE) is an enhancement to GSM that promises to deliver
multimedia and other broadband applications. It uses TDMA and 3 /8 8PSK (phase shift keying) modulation.

This instrument performs measurements using the methods and limits as defined in the 3GPP TS 51.021
Base Station System (BSS) equipment specification: Radio Aspects V8.9.0 (2003-06) and 3GPP TS 45.005
Radio Transmission and Reception (version 12.5.0, release 12). The Pass/Fail indictor helps you to
determine base station performance easily.

This instrument provides the following measurement tools for GSM/GPRS/EDGE system:

n Spectrum Analysis
n RF Analysis
- Channel Power
- Occupied Bandwidth
- Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM)
- Output RF Spectrum
- Spurious Emissions
n Power vs. Time
- Power vs. Time (Slot)
- Power vs. Time (Frame)
n Modulation Analysis
- Constellation
n Auto Measure
n Over The Air (OTA)
- Channel Scanner
- Frequency Scanner
- Multipath Profile
- Modulation Analyzer

Display overview
Figure 37 provides descriptions for each segment of the measurement screen.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 117

Chapter 6 Using GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer

Figure 37 GSM signal analyzer measurement screen

Connecting a cable
Direct connection
Procedure

1 Connect the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B series and the power amplifier output
port of BTS.

Figure 38 Direct connection

JD785B/JD745B JD788B/JD748B

Indirect connection
Procedure

1 Connect the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B series and the monitor (test) port of

118 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 6 Using GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer

BTS.

Figure 39 Indirect connection

JD785B/JD745B JD788B/JD748B

CAUTION
The maximum power for the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port is +25 dBm (0.316 W) for
JD780B series and +20 dBm (0.1 W) for JD740B series. If the level of the input signal to
be measured is greater than this, use a High Power Attenuator to prevent damage
when you directly connect the signal to the instrument or connect the signal from the
coupling port of a directional coupler.

Over the air (OTA)

Procedure

1 Connect an Omni/directional RF antenna to the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B

series.
2 Connect a GPS antenna to the GPS port of the JD700B series.

Figure 40 OTA connection

JD785B/JD745B JD788B/JD748B

CAUTION
If the input signal level to be measured is less than 0 dBm, set 0 dB attenuation or turn on
the preamp to have better dynamic range for the OTA testing.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 119

Chapter 6 Using GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer

Selecting measurement mode

Procedure

1 Press the MODE hard key.

2 Press the Signal Analyzer soft key.
3 Press the GSM soft key. The Spectrum mode is set by default.
4 Press the MEASURE hot key, and then select the measurement mode option from the following
choices:
– Spectrum
– RF Analysis > Channel Power, Occupied BW, Spectrum Emission Mask,
Output RF Spectrum, or Spurious Emissions
– Power vs Time > Power vs Time (Slot) or Power vs Time (Frame)
– Constellation
– Auto Measure
– OTA > Channel Scanner, Frequency Scanner, Multipath Profile, or
Modulation Analyzer

Configuring test parameters

Setting frequency
You can set the frequency with either frequency or channel number. If a frequency to be set matches to the
frequency corresponding to the selected channel standard, the instrument calculates its channel number
and updates the screen with it automatically.

Procedure

To set the center frequency:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
3 Press the Center Frequency soft key.
4 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
5 Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
6 Optional. To define the amount of frequency increment for the rotary knob, complete the following
steps:
a Press the Frequency Step soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.

To set the channel number:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Channel.
3 To select the standard channel, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Std soft key. The standard channel window appears.
See “Appendix C – Band, frequency & channel standard” on page 664 for more information.
b Highlight the band to be measured by using the rotary knob, the arrow keys, or the Page
Up/Page Down soft keys.
c Press the Select soft key or the rotary knob to confirm the selection.
4 Press the Channel Number soft key.

120 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 6 Using GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer

5 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
6 Press the Enter soft key.
7 The instrument automatically displays the corresponding center frequency value for the selected
channel number.
8 Optional. To define the amount of channel increment for the rotary knob, complete the following
steps:
a Press the Channel Step soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.

NOTE
This frequency setting is not used in the Spurious Emissions mode.

Setting amplitude
Reference level and attenuation
You can set the reference and attenuation levels automatically or manually to optimize the display of the
traces measured, as you desire.

Procedure

To automatically set the reference and attenuation level:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Press the Auto Scale soft key.
Each time you press this key, both of the Y-axis scale and input attenuation level change to be
optimized with some margin.

To set the reference or attenuation level manually:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 To set the maximum reference value on the Y-axis manually, complete the following steps:
a Press the Reference Level soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys or the rotary knob with 10 dB increments.
c Press the unit soft key or the ENTER hard key.
This unit key name changes according to the setting in the Units menu.
3 To set the attenuation option, select one from the following choices:
– To set the input attenuator’s level automatically, select Attenuation > Auto.

NOTE
It is recommended that you set the Attenuation to Auto in most situations so that the
level of the input attenuator can be set automatically according to your input signal level.

– To set the input attenuation manually up to 55 dB for JD780B series or 50 dB for JD740B
series to optimize S/N, complete the following steps:
a Select Attenuation > Manual.
b Press the Attenuation Value soft key to set the level.
c Enter a value in fives by using the numeric keys.
d Press the dB soft key or the ENTER hard key.
– To couple the input attenuator’s level with your reference level setting, select Attenuation >
Couple.
As you increase the reference setting, the attenuation level also increases acoordingly.

Optional. To change the scale unit:

1 Select More (1/2) > Units.
2 Select the unit of the display scale: dBm, dBV, dBmV, dBµV, V, or W.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 121

Chapter 6 Using GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer

The scale unit on the screen changes accordingly.

NOTE
This Units menu is available in the Spectrum and RF Analysis modes.

Scale per division

You can use the Scale/Div feature available for the spectrum and RF analysis. It represents the value of one
division on the horizontal scale. The default setting is 10 dB per division and the maximum value can be set
up to 20 dB.

Procedure

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Select More (1/2) > Scale/Div.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 20 by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.

Pre-amplifier
You can turn the internal pre-amplifier on to correct and compensate for the gain of the preamp so that
amplitude readings show the value at the input connector.

Procedure

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Toggle the Preamp soft key and select On or Off as needed.

NOTE
You can turn the Preamp on when the input attenuation range is from 0 dB to 10 dB. If
the attenuation value is manually set to greater than 10 dB, the instrument will
automatically turn off the pre-amplifier to display low-level signal properly on the chart.

External offset
You can turn the External Offset on and manually set the external offset value. An offset consists of a cable
loss and a user offset and the measurement result shows the value reflecting both offset values. When the
external offset value is set at 40 dB in the Spectrum mode, the measurement result compensates 40 dB at
both the Spectrum Analyzer and Signal Analyzer modes.

Procedure

To set the external offset:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On.
3 Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.

To turn the external offset off:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Toggle the External Offset soft key and select Off.

122 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 6 Using GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer

Setting average
You can set the number of measurements to be averaged for the trace presentation. A maximum of 100
times of averaging can be set. When the averaging reaches to your setting, a new measurement value
replaces the measurement value in sequence from the earliest.

Procedure

1 Press the BW/AVG hard key.

2 Press the Average soft key.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 100 as needed by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the Enter soft key.

Setting sweep mode

The default setting is Continue to sweep continuously for most on-going measurements. If you want to hold
the measurement or get a single sweep, you can change the sweep mode.

Procedure

To select the single sweep mode:

1 Press the SWEEP hot key.
2 Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Single. You can also use the HOLD hot key.
The letter HOLD in red appears and the sweeping is paused.
3 Optional. Press the Sweep Once soft key to get a new measurement.

To return to the continuous sweep mode:

1 Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Continue. You can also use the HOLD hot key.
The letter HOLD in red disappears and the sweeping resumes.

Setting trigger source

You can set the trigger source option for your measurements.

Procedure

1 Press the TRIGGER hot key.

2 Select the trigger source option from the following choices:

To set the trigger level Select

When using the RF burst (wideband) trigger RF Burst

To free burst if there is a frequency burst signal Internal FB

To training sequence code RF Burst & TS

To external trigger reference External

To the free trigger Free

To the locked GPS GPS

JD700B Series User’s Guide 123

Chapter 6 Using GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer

Conducting spectrum measurements

If you have configured test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 120, your
measurement result is displayed on the screen as like the following example, Figure 41.

Figure 41 Spectrum measurement screen with GSM signal analyzer

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Time Slot soft key to assign a time slot with which performs RF measurements, and
then select your desired time slot number from 0 to 7.
3 Optional. To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Miscellaneous soft key.
b Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Press the µs soft key.

NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

Setting trace
You can display up to six traces on the measurement chart simultaneously.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Select Trace soft key, and then select the trace number: T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, or T6.
The legend shape of the selected trace changes from square to round to indicate that the trace is
the active one now.
3 Do one of the following:

124 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 6 Using GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer

To Select Trace Legend

Clear current data and display with new Clear Write W

measurements

Display the input signal’s maximum response only Max Hold M

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

Display the input signal’s minimum response only Min Hold m

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

Capture the selected trace and compare traces Capture C

Load a saved trace More (1/2) > Load L

Hide the displayed trace Trace View > Off F

Remove all the traces and initialize the trace More (1/2) > Trace
settings Clear All

NOTE
For the Max Hold and Min Hold, your instrument compares newly acquired data with the
active trace and displays larger maximum values or smaller minimum values on the
screen. You can set it to Unlimited to hold and view maximum or minimum data or
specify a certain amount of time up to 60 seconds by using numeric keys or rotary knob.
4 Optional. Select More (1/2) > Trace Info, and then select the trace number to view the trace’s
parameter setting information stored at the time of the measurement or None to hide the
information display.
5 Optional. If you have the two traces T1 and T2, you can perform trace math. To view the power
difference between the traces, press the T1 – T2 -> T5 or T2 – T1 -> T6 soft key.
The result is overlaid on the screen along with the second Y-axis.

Conducting RF measurements
Channel power
The Channel Power measures in-channel power for GSM/GPRS and EDGE systems, which use dynamic
power control to ensure that each link is maintained with minimum power. It gives two fundamental benefits
of keeping overall system interference to a minimum level and of maximizing battery life in the case of
mobile stations. It determines the power delivered to the antenna system on the RF channel under test. The
instrument acquires a GSM/GPRS or EDGE signal in the time domain. The average power level above the
threshold is then computed and displayed.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 120, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Time Slot soft key to assign a time slot with which performs measurements, and then
select your desired time slot number from 0 to 7.
3 Optional. To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Miscellaneous soft key.
b Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 125

Chapter 6 Using GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer

c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Press the µs soft key.

NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

Measurement example
Figure 42 Channel power measurement with GSM signal analyzer

Channel power measurement result shows channel power and spectrum density in a user specified channel
bandwidth. The peak to average ratio (PAR) is shown at the bottom of the screen as well. The shaded area
on the display indicates the channel bandwidth.

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 131 for more
information.

Occupied bandwidth
The Occupied Bandwidth measures the spectrum shape of the carrier. It is defined as the bandwidth, which
includes 99% of the transmitted power among total transmitted power.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 120, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Time Slot soft key to assign a time slot with which performs measurements, and then
select your desired time slot number from 0 to 7.
3 Optional. To set the delay, complete the following steps:

126 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 6 Using GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer

a Press the Miscellaneous soft key.

b Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Press the µs soft key.

NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

Measurement example
The Occupied Bandwidth measurement shows both of power across the band and power bandwidth in a
user specified percentage to determine the amount of spectrum used by a modulated signal. Occupied
bandwidth is typically calculated as the bandwidth containing 99% of the transmitted power.

Figure 43 Occupied bandwidth measurement with GSM signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 131 for more
information.

Spectrum emission mask (SEM)

The Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurement is to identify and determine the power level of out-of-
band spurious emission outside the necessary channel bandwidth and modulated signal. It measures the
power ratio between in-band and adjacent channels. The JD700B series indicates either Pass or Fail based
on the specified limit of the signal.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 120, you can
continue your measurement.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 127

Chapter 6 Using GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Time Slot soft key to assign a time slot with which performs measurements, and then
select your desired time slot number from 0 to 7.
3 Optional. To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Miscellaneous soft key.
b Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Press the µs soft key.

NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

Measurement example
Figure 44 SEM measurement with GSM signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 131 for more
information.

Output RF spectrum
The Output RF Spectrum measures power of the output RF modulation spectrum of the carrier at different
frequency offsets in different measurement bandwidths. It is used to determine if the output spectrum due to
modulation and wideband noise for all supported RF channels meets the requirements specified in 3GPP TS
45.005 and conforms to the specification.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 120, you can
continue your measurement.

128 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 6 Using GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Time Slot soft key to assign a time slot with which performs measurements, and then
select your desired time slot number from 0 to 7.
3 Optional. To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Miscellaneous soft key.
b Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Press the µs soft key.

NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

Measurement example
Figure 45 Output RF spectrum measurement with GSM signal analyzer

NOTE
A set of limit values are applied according to the current channel power and automatically
displayed in the result table. You can use the LIMIT hot key to enable or disable the
Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 131 for more information.

Spurious emissions
Out-of-band emissions are unwanted emissions immediately outside the channel bandwidth resulting from
the modulation process and non-linearity in the transmitter but excluding spurious emissions. The Spurious
Emissions measurement is to identify and determine the power level of out-of-band spurious emission within
the necessary channel bandwidth and modulated signal measured at the RF port of the Base Station.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 120, you can
continue your measurement.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 129

Chapter 6 Using GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set up the range table and parameters, press the Range Table soft key and then complete
the following steps:
a Press the Range soft key, and then select the range number between 1 and 20 to add
as a new or change the existing settings.
b Do the following as desired:
– Select Start Frequency, and then specify the start frequency for the selected range.
– Select Stop Frequency, and then specify the stop frequency for the selected range.
– Select Start Limit, and then specify the lower limit for Pass/Fail indication.
– Select Stop Limit, and then specify the upper limit for Pass/Fail indication.
– Select More (1/2) > Attenuation, and then specify an value in the multiple of five.
– Select More (1/2) > RBW, and then specify a RBW value.
– Select More (1/2) > VBW, and then specify a VBW value.
c Press the PREV hard key.
d Toggle the Range soft key and select On to display the selected range in the result table or
Off to hide it from the table.
3 Toggle the Measure Type soft key between Examine and Full to select the measurement type.
NOTE
The Examine mode displays only the selected range while the Full mode lets the
instrument automatically changes the selected range from one another.

4 To set the number of measurements to be averaged, complete the following steps:

a Press the Average soft key.
b Enter a value between 1 and 100.
c Press the Enter soft key.
5 To move the highlighted bar in the result table to other range, complete the following steps:
a Press the Range soft key in the Measure Setup menu bar.
b Enter a value between 1 and 20.
c Press the Enter soft key.

Measurement example
Figure 46 Spurious emissions measurement with GSM signal analyzer

130 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 6 Using GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 131 for more
information.

Setting limit for RF tests

By default, test limits specified in the standard are set for you. You can change thresholds if you desire.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the RF Test Limits soft key.
3 Select the test item(s) and set the limit(s) depending on your selected measurement mode:
To set the limit for Select Set

Channel power Channel Power High Limit, Low Limit

Occupied bandwidth Occupied BW High Limit

Spectrum emission mask Spectrum Emission Mask (On/Off only)

Output RF spectrum Output RF Spectrum (On/Off only)

Spurious emissions Spurious Emissions (On/Off only)

4 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Conducting power vs. time measurements

The Power vs. Time measurement measures the mean transmission power during the useful part of GSM
bursts and verifies that the power ramp fits within the defined mask. It also lets you view the rise, fall, and
useful part of the GSM burst.

This measurement provides masks for both of Base Transceiver Station (BTS) and Mobile Station (MS). The
timing masks are referenced to the transition from the bit 13 to the bit 14 of the mid-amble training sequence.
For GMSK measurements, the 0 dB reference is determined by measuring the mean transmitted power
during the useful part of the burst.

Power vs. time (slot)

Setting measure setup
After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 120, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Time Slot soft key to assign a time slot with which performs measurements, and then
select your desired time slot number from 0 to 7.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 131

Chapter 6 Using GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer

3 Press the Detect Mode soft key, and then select the signal standard option: Auto, GSM, or EDGE.
Auto is set by default. The instrument applies a mask automatically based on the selected mode.
4 Optional. To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Miscellaneous soft key.
b Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Press the µs soft key.

NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

Setting limit for burst power

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the PvsT Test Limits soft key.
3 Press the Burst Power soft key to set the limit in the Power vs. Time (Slot) measurement.
4 Toggle the Test Limits soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the Pass/Fail indication.
5 Set the upper threshold:
a Press the High Limit soft key.
b Enter a value for the upper limit, and then press the dBm unit soft key.
6 Set the lower threshold:
a Press the Low Limit soft key.
b Enter a value for the lower limit, and then press the dBm unit soft key.
7 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
8 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 47 Power vs. time (slot) measurement with GSM signal analyzer

132 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 6 Using GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer

Figure 48 Power vs. time (slot) measurement with GSM signal analyzer

Power vs. time (frame)

Setting measure setup
After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 120, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Detect Mode soft key, and then select the signal standard option: Auto, GSM, or EDGE.
Auto is set by default. The instrument applies a mask automatically based on the selected mode.
3 Optional. To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Miscellaneous soft key.
b Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Press the µs soft key.

NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

Setting limit for frame average power

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the PvsT Test Limits soft key.
3 Press the Frame Avg Power soft key to set the limit in the Power vs. Time (Frame)
measurement.
4 Toggle the Test Limits soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the Pass/Fail indication.
5 Set the upper threshold:
a Press the High Limit soft key.
b Enter a value for the upper limit.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 133

Chapter 6 Using GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer

c Press the dBm unit soft key.

6 Set the lower threshold:
a Press the Low Limit soft key.
b Enter a value for the lower limit.
c Press the dBm unit soft key.
7 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
8 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 49 Power vs. time (frame) measurement with GSM signal analyzer

Conducting constellation measurements

The Constellation is used to observe some aspects of modulation accuracy and can reveal certain fault
mechanisms such as I/Q amplitude imbalance or quadrature imbalance. It displays constellation diagram by
modulation types.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 120, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Time Slot soft key to assign a time slot with which performs measurements, and then
select your desired time slot number from 0 to 7.
3 Press the Detect Mode soft key, and then select the signal standard option: Auto, GSM, or EDGE.
Auto is set by default. The instrument applies a mask automatically based on the selected mode.
4 Toggle the PSK Constellation soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the PSK

134 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 6 Using GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer

constellation observation.
NOTE
The PSK constellation must be turned on to analyze EDGE signals.

5 Optional. To set the delay, complete the following steps:

a Press the Miscellaneous soft key.
b Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Press the µs soft key.

NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

Setting limit for constellation

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Modulation Test Limits soft key to set the limits in the Constellation measurement.
3 Select the test item(s) and set the limit(s) depending on your selected measurement mode:
To set the limit for Select Set

Frequency error Frequency Error High Limit, Low Limit

Phase error rms Phase Error RMS High Limit, Low Limit

Phase error peak Phase Error Peak High Limit, Low Limit

Error vector magnitude rms EVM RMS High Limit

Error vector magnitude peak EVM Peak High Limit

I/Q origin offset of the I and Q error IQ Origin Offset High Limit
(magnitude squared) offset from the origin

Carrier to interference (C/I) ratio C/I Low Limit

4 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 135

Chapter 6 Using GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 50 Constellation measurement (PSK off) with GSM signal analyzer

Figure 51 Constellation measurement (PSK on) with GSM signal analyzer

NOTE
th
Measurement items such as IQ Origin Offset, C/I, EVM RMS/Peak and EVM 95
are applicable only to EDGE signal measurements.

Performing auto measurements

The Auto Measure function of the JD700B series allows a complete signal profiling covering RF
characterization and modulation quality parameters of up to 10 different carriers, particularly useful on an
overlay architecture where base stations are transmitting in different frequencies.

The Auto Measure can be easily executed either by selecting a menu in the instrument or by running a

136 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 6 Using GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer

programmed scenario in the PC-based application so that the instrument automatically configure and
perform tests on every aspect of all the carriers.

Setting limit for auto measure

You can set test limits for test item(s) in the auto measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the RF Test Limits soft key, and then enable test limits as desired.
3 Press the PvsT Test Limits soft key, and then enable test limits as desired.
4 Press the Modulation Test Limits soft key, and then enable test limits as desired.
5 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
6 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 120, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Toggle the Configuration soft key and select the configuration option:
– Current: Lets the instrument use current frequency (single carrier) and determine pass or
fail based on the instrument’s limit settings in Auto Measure.
– Scenario: Runs a test with a programmed scenario in JDViewer.
The Scenario menu becomes activated.
3 To load a scenario, press the Scenario soft key, and then select a scenario file to load.
4 Toggle the Test Time soft key and select the test time option:
– Now: Lets the instrument run a test only once.
– Schedule: Lets the instrument repeat tests as defined in the Set Timing.
The Set Timing menu becomes activated.
5 To define a schedule for an auto measurement, complete the following steps:
a Press the Set Timing soft key.
b Press the Start Time (HH:MM) soft key.
c Enter the time in the HH:MM format, and then press the Enter soft key.
d Press the Stop Time (HH:MM) soft key.
e Enter the time in the HH:MM format, and then press the Enter soft key.
f Press the Time Interval soft key.
g Enter the amount of time in minutes, and then press the Enter soft key.
6 To select the type of the measurement data to be taken for the determination of the results,
press the Data Type soft key and then select the data type option from the following choices:
– Sample: The Auto Measure takes the last measurement data only.
– RMS: The Auto Measure takes data from all 20 measurements and averages them.
– Peak: The Auto Measure takes only the highest peak of all 20 measurements.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 137

Chapter 6 Using GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer

– Negative Peak: The Auto Measure takes only the lowest peak of all 20 measurements.
7 To set external offset, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the dB soft key.
8 To save your settings and results, go to SAVE/LOAD > Save and then perform functions as you
desire. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.
9 Press the Run Test soft key to start to run a test.
The Auto Measure Results window appears at the end of the test.
10 To stop running the test, press the Abort soft key.
11 To change the view on the screen during the test, press the Display and then select the view
option from the following choices:
– Screen: You can view each measurement screen as the test progresses.
– Results: You can view a measurement result table as the test progresses.
– Settings: You can view a measurement setting table as the test progresses.

Setting display
After completion of the auto measurement, the screen menu changes to Trace/Display so that you can view
the results in different forms.

Procedure

1 Toggle the Display soft key and select the display option:
– Result: You can view the result table. The Display Result menu becomes activated.
– Settings: You can view the measurement settings for the auto measurement.
2 Toggle the Display Result soft key and select the display result option:
– Full: You can view detailed measurement readings with the pass/fail indication.
– Quick: You can view only the Pass/Fail results.
3 To view the measurement results for a different carrier, press the View Carrier soft key and then
select the carrier number to view.

Conducting GSM OTA measurements

This Over-The-Air (OTA) measurement has channel scanner, frequency scanner, multipath profile, and
modulation analyzer screens. The GSM OTA has a function to display channel power and related
information up to 128 GSM down link signals. This channel scanner can quickly identifies improper power
levels that affect network performance. The transmitter performance can be made on a base station from the
convenience of your vehicle without taking the base station out of service. It helps you to determine testing
area's RF environmental condition with the multipath profile.

Channel scanner
Setting channel

Procedure

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.

2 To select the standard channel, complete the following steps:

138 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 6 Using GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer

a Press the Channel Std soft key. The standard channel window appears.
See “Appendix C – Band, frequency & channel standard” on page 664 for more information.
b Highlight the band to be measured by using the rotary knob, the arrow keys, or the
Page Up/Page Down soft keys.
c Press the Select soft key or the rotary knob to confirm the selection.
3 To set the starting channel to be scanned, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Number soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 To set the amount of channel increment in scanning channels, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Step soft key.
b Enter a value by suing the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.
5 To set the number of channels to be displayed, complete the following steps:
a Press the # of Channels soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.

Setting zoom position

You can set the starting channel for the Zoom In Window.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Zoom Position soft key.
3 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
4 Press the Enter soft key.

Setting limit for OTA channel scanner

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Limit Line soft key to set a threshold for the limit line and Pass/Fail indication.
3 Enter a value, and then press the dBm unit soft key.
4 Toggle the Limit Line soft key between On and Off to display or dismiss the limit line.
5 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
6 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 139

Chapter 6 Using GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 52 Channel scanner measurement with GSM OTA signal analyzer

Frequency scanner
Setting frequency

Procedure

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.

2 To set the starting frequency to be scanned, complete the following steps:
a Press the Start Frequency soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
3 To set the amount of frequency increment in scanning frequencies, complete the following steps:
a Press the Frequency Step soft key.
b Enter a value by suing the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
4 To set the number of frequencies to be displayed, complete the following steps:
a Press the # of Frequencies soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.

Setting zoom position

You can set the starting channel for the Zoom Window.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Zoom Position soft key.
3 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
4 Press the Enter soft key.

140 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 6 Using GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer

Setting limit for OTA frequency scanner

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Limit Line soft key to set a threshold for the limit line and Pass/Fail indication.
3 Enter a value, and then press the dBm unit soft key.
4 Toggle the Limit Line soft key between On and Off to display or dismiss the limit line.
5 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
6 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 53 Frequency scanner measurement with GSM OTA signal analyzer

Multipath profile
The Multipath Profile let you determine RF environmental conditions of testing area. The multipath profile is
the result of portions of the original broadcast signal arriving at the receiving antenna out of phase. This can
be caused by the signal being reflected off objects such as buildings, or being refracted through the
atmosphere differently from the main signal.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 120, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Detect Mode soft key, and then select the signal standard option: Auto, GSM, or EDGE.
Auto is set by default. The instrument applies a mask automatically based on the selected mode.
3 Optional. To set the delay, complete the following steps:

JD700B Series User’s Guide 141

Chapter 6 Using GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer

a Press the Miscellaneous soft key.

b Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Press the µs soft key.
4 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

Measurement example
Figure 54 Multipath profile measurement with GSM OTA signal analyzer

Modulation analyzer
Setting measure setup
After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 120, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Detect Mode soft key, and then select the signal standard option: Auto, GSM, or EDGE.
Auto is set by default. The instrument applies a mask automatically based on the selected mode.
3 Optional. To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Miscellaneous soft key.
b Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Press the µs soft key.
4 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

142 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 6 Using GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer

Setting limit for modulation analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Select the test item(s) and set the limit(s):
To set the limit for Select Set

Frame average power Frame Average Power High Limit, Low Limit

Frequency error Frequency Error High Limit, Low Limit

Burst power Burst Power High Limit, Low Limit

ACLR ACLR (On/Off only)

Multi-ACLR Multi-ACLR (On/Off only)

Spurious emissions Spurious Emissions (On/Off only)

3 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
4 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 55 Modulation analyzer measurement with GSM OTA signal analyzer

JD700B Series User’s Guide 143

 7

Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal

Analyzer
This chapter provides instructions for using the WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer function (option 023) with
the WCDMA/HSPA+ OTA Analyzer function (option 043). Topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

n Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 145

n Display overview ..................................................................................................................... 145
n Connecting a cable.................................................................................................................. 146
n Selecting measurement mode ................................................................................................ 148
n Configuring test parameters .................................................................................................... 148
n Conducting spectrum measurements ..................................................................................... 153
n Conducting RF measurements ............................................................................................... 154
n Conducting modulation measurements................................................................................... 161
n Performing auto measurements .............................................................................................. 173
n Performing power statistics CCDF measurement ................................................................... 174
n Conducting WCDMA/HSPA+ OTA measurements ................................................................. 175
 Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

Introduction
This WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer can be used to test a WCDMA transmitter including HSDPA/HSPA+
signals to check the base station’s compliance with following standards documentation.

n 3GPP TS 25.104 Base Station radio transmission and reception

n 3GPP TS 25.141 Base Station (BS) conformance test
n 3GPP TS 25.211 Physical channel and mapping of transport channels onto physical channels
n 3GPP TS 25.212 Multiplexing and channel coding
n 3GPP TS 25.213 Spreading and modulation

The instrument automatically makes standard defined measurements using the measurement methods and
limits as defined in the standards. Detailed measurement results allow you to analyze WCDMA and HSPA+
system performance. You may alter the measurement parameters for specialized analysis. Pass/Fail testing
with standard defined or user defined upper and lower limits and the Pass/Fail indictor help you to determine
base station performance easily.

This instrument provides the following measurement tools for WCDMA/HSPA+ system:

n Spectrum Analysis
n RF Analysis
- Channel Power
- Occupied Bandwidth
- Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM)
- Adjacent Channel Leakage power Ratio (ACLR)
- Multi-ACLR
- Spurious Emissions
n Modulation Analysis
- Constellation
- Code Domain Power
- Relative Code Domain Error
- Codogram
- Received Code Strength Indicator (RCSI)
- CDP Table
n Auto Measure
n Power Statistics CCDF
n Over The Air (OTA)
- Channel Scanner
- Scramble Scanner
- Multipath Profile
- Code Domain Power
- Route Map

Display overview
Figure 56 provides descriptions for each segment of the measurement screen.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 145

Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

Figure 56 WCDMA/HSPA+ signal analyzer measurement screen

Connecting a cable
Direct connection
Procedure

1 Connect the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B series and the power amplifier output
port of BTS.

Figure 57 Direct connection

JD785B/JD745B JD788B/JD748B

Indirect connection
Procedure

1 Connect the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B series and the monitor (test) port of

146 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

BTS.

Figure 58 Indirect connection

JD785B/JD745B JD788B/JD748B

CAUTION
The maximum power for the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port is +25 dBm (0.316 W) for
JD780B series and +20 dBm (0.1 W) for JD740B series. If the level of the input signal to
be measured is greater than this, use a High Power Attenuator to prevent damage
when you directly connect the signal to the instrument or connect the signal from the
coupling port of a directional coupler.

Over the air (OTA)

Procedure

1 Connect an Omni/directional RF antenna to the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B

series.
2 Connect a GPS antenna to the GPS port of the JD700B series.

Figure 59 OTA connection

JD785B/JD745B JD788B/JD748B

CAUTION
If the input signal level to be measured is less than 0 dBm, set 0 dB attenuation or turn on
the preamp to have better dynamic range for the OTA testing.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 147

Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

Selecting measurement mode

Procedure

1 Press the MODE hard key.

2 Press the Signal Analyzer soft key.
3 Press the WCDMA soft key. The Spectrum mode is set by default.
4 Press the MEASURE hot key, and then select the measurement mode option from the following
choices:
– Spectrum
– RF Analysis > Channel Power, Occupied BW, Spectrum Emission Mask, ACLR,
Multi-ACLR, or Spurious Emissions
– Modulation > Constellation, Code Domain Power, Relative Code Domain Error,
Codogram, RCSI, or CDP Table
– Auto Measure
– Power Statistics CCDF
– OTA > Channel Scanner, Scramble Scanner, Multipath Profile, Code Domain Power,
or Route Map

Configuring test parameters

Setting frequency
You can set the frequency with either frequency or channel number. If a frequency to be set matches to the
frequency corresponding to the selected channel standard, the instrument calculates its channel number
and updates the screen with it automatically.

Procedure

To set the center frequency:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
3 Press the Center Frequency soft key.
4 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
5 Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
6 Optional. To define the amount of frequency increment for the rotary knob, complete the following
steps:
a Press the Frequency Step soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.

To set the channel number:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Channel.
3 To select the standard channel, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Std soft key. The standard channel window appears.
See “Appendix C – Band, frequency & channel standard” on page 664 for more information.
b Highlight the band to be measured by using the rotary knob, the arrow keys, or the Page
Up/Page Down soft keys.
c Press the Select soft key or the rotary knob to confirm the selection.

148 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

4 Press the Channel Number soft key.

5 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
6 Press the Enter soft key.
7 The instrument automatically displays the corresponding center frequency value for the selected
channel number.
8 Optional. To define the amount of channel increment for the rotary knob, complete the following
steps:
a Press the Channel Step soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.

NOTE
This frequency setting is not used in the Multi-ACLR and Spurious Emissions modes.

Setting amplitude
Reference level and attenuation
You can set the reference and attenuation levels automatically or manually to optimize the display of the
traces measured, as you desire.

Procedure

To automatically set the reference and attenuation level:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Press the Auto Scale soft key.
Each time you press this key, both of the Y-axis scale and input attenuation level change to be
optimized with some margin.

To set the reference or attenuation level manually:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 To set the maximum reference value on the Y-axis manually, complete the following steps:
a Press the Reference Level soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys or the rotary knob with 10 dB increments.
c Press the unit soft key or the ENTER hard key.
This unit key name changes according to the setting in the Units menu.
NOTE
In the measurements such as Code Domain Power, Codogram, and RCSI, you may
need to select the reference option between Relative and Absolute before setting the
reference level.
3 To set the attenuation option, select one from the following choices:
– To set the input attenuator’s level automatically, select Attenuation > Auto.

NOTE
It is recommended that you set the Attenuation to Auto in most situations so that the
level of the input attenuator can be set automatically according to your input signal level.
– To set the input attenuation manually up to 55 dB for JD780B series or 50 dB for JD740B
series to optimize S/N, complete the following steps:
a Select Attenuation > Manual.
b Press the Attenuation Value soft key to set the level.
c Enter a value in fives by using the numeric keys.
d Press the dB soft key or the ENTER hard key.
– To couple the input attenuator’s level with your reference level setting, select Attenuation >
Couple.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 149

Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

As you increase the reference setting, the attenuation level also increases acoordingly.

Optional. To change the scale unit:

1 Select More (1/2) > Units.
2 Select the unit of the display scale: dBm, dBV, dBmV, dBµV, V, or W.
The scale unit on the screen changes accordingly.

NOTE
This Units menu is available in the Spectrum and RF Analysis modes.

Scale per division

You can use the Scale/Div feature available for the spectrum and RF analysis. It represents the value of one
division on the horizontal scale. The default setting is 10 dB per division and the maximum value can be set
up to 20 dB.

Procedure

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Select More (1/2) > Scale/Div.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 20 by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.

Pre-amplifier
You can turn the internal pre-amplifier on to correct and compensate for the gain of the preamp so that
amplitude readings show the value at the input connector.

Procedure

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Toggle the Preamp soft key and select On or Off as needed.

NOTE
You can turn the Preamp on when the input attenuation range is from 0 dB to 10 dB. If
the attenuation value is manually set to greater than 10 dB, the instrument will
automatically turn off the pre-amplifier to display low-level signal properly on the chart.

External offset
You can turn the External Offset on and manually set the external offset value. An offset consists of a cable
loss and a user offset and the measurement result shows the value reflecting both offset values. When the
external offset value is set at 40 dB in the Spectrum mode, the measurement result compensates 40 dB at
both the Spectrum Analyzer and Signal Analyzer modes.

Procedure

To set the external offset:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On.
3 Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.

150 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

To turn the external offset off:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Toggle the External Offset soft key and select Off.

Setting average
You can set the number of measurements to be averaged for the trace presentation. A maximum of 100
times of averaging can be set. When the averaging reaches to your setting, a new measurement value
replaces the measurement value in sequence from the earliest.

Procedure

1 Press the BW/AVG hard key.

2 Press the Average soft key.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 100 as needed by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the Enter soft key.

Setting sweep mode

The default setting is Continue to sweep continuously for most on-going measurements. If you want to hold
the measurement or get a single sweep, you can change the sweep mode.

Procedure

To select the single sweep mode:

1 Press the SWEEP hot key.
2 Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Single. You can also use the HOLD hot key.
The letter HOLD in red appears and the sweeping is paused.
3 Optional. Press the Sweep Once soft key to get a new measurement.

To return to the continuous sweep mode:

1 Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Continue. You can also use the HOLD hot key.
The letter HOLD in red disappears and the sweeping resumes.

Setting trigger source

You can set the trigger source option for your measurements.

Procedure

1 Press the TRIGGER hot key.

2 Select the trigger source option from the choices: Internal, External, and GPS.

Setting external clock

To enhance the reliability of modulation analysis measurements the JD700B series must be synchronized
with a base station. When an external clock is not supplied, the instrument works with its built-in internal
high-accuracy time base and some measurement results may exhibit inaccurate values. Therefore, it is
highly recommended that you use the same reference clock as the signal source. You can use the

JD700B Series User’s Guide 151

Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

TRIGGER hot key to set the external clock.

Table 10 Standards of external clock operation

Clock Type Reference Port Switching Standard

External Internal Internal 10 MHz Default

Reference

External External Ref Clock Ext Ref (SMA) Manual switching

(Input signal level >-3 dBm)

GPS GPS Clock GPS (SMA) Automatic switching

(GPS signal received)

Trigger Internal Internal Trigger Default

External External Trigger Trigger (SMA) Manual switching

GPS GPS GPS (SMA) Manual switching

Figure 60 Connection ports for external reference clock

Procedure

1 Connect an external reference or a GPS antenna to the JD700B series.

2 Press the SYSTEM hot key.
3 Press the Freq Reference soft key, and then select the reference option from the choices:
Internal, External 10 MHz, External 13 MHz, External 15 MHz, and GPS.

NOTE
When a GPS antenna is connected and locked, GPS coordinates (longitude and latitude)
are displayed on the screen and frequency reference is automatically set to GPS in the
System > Freq Reference.

Table 11 External reference indicators

Type Indicator Description

Internal (green) The green INT icon indicates that the instrument uses the built-in
internal time base.

External (green) The green EXT icon indicates that an external reference is connected
and locked and that the instrument uses the same reference clock as
the signal source.

External (red) The red EXT icon indicates that an external reference is connect but not
locked.

GPS (green) The green GPS antenna icon indicates that a GPS antenna is
connected and locked.

GPS (yellow) The yellow GPS antenna icon indicates that a GPS antenna is

152 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

connected and locking is in progress.

GPS (grey) The grey GPS antenna icon indicates that a GPS antenna is not
connected, failed, or unable to be locked.

Conducting spectrum measurements

If you have configured test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 148, your
measurement result is displayed on the screen as like the following example, Figure 61.

Figure 61 Spectrum measurement screen with WCDMA signal analyzer

Setting trace
You can display up to six traces on the measurement chart simultaneously.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Select Trace soft key, and then select the trace number: T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, or T6.
The legend shape of the selected trace changes from square to round to indicate that the trace is
the active one now.
3 Do one of the following:
To Select Trace Legend

Clear current data and display with new Clear Write W

measurements

Display the input signal’s maximum response only Max Hold M

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

Display the input signal’s minimum response only Min Hold m

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

Capture the selected trace and compare traces Capture C

Load a saved trace More (1/2) > Load L

JD700B Series User’s Guide 153

Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

Hide the displayed trace Trace View > Off F

Remove all the traces and initialize the trace More (1/2) > Trace
settings Clear All

NOTE
For the Max Hold and Min Hold, your instrument compares newly acquired data with the
active trace and displays larger maximum values or smaller minimum values on the
screen. You can set it to Unlimited to hold and view maximum or minimum data or
specify a certain amount of time up to 60 seconds by using numeric keys or rotary knob.

4 To select the detection option, select More (1/2) > Detectors, and then do one of the following:

To display Select

Random noise better than the peak without missing signals Normal

The highest value in each data point Peak

The root mean squared average power across the spectrum RMS

The lowest value in each data point Negative Peak

The center value in each data point Sample

5 Optional. Select More (1/2) > Trace Info, and then select the trace number to view the trace’s
parameter setting information stored at the time of the measurement or None to hide the
information display.
6 Optional. If you have the two traces T1 and T2, you can perform trace math. To view the power
difference between the traces, press the T1 – T2 -> T5 or T2 – T1 -> T6 soft key.
The result is overlaid on the screen along with the second Y-axis.

Conducting RF measurements
Channel power
The Channel Power measurement is a common test used in the wireless industry to measure the total
transmitted power of a radio within a defined frequency channel. This procedure measures the total power
within the defined channel for WCDMA. This measurement is applied to design, characterize, evaluate, and
verify transmitters and their components or devices for base stations and mobile stations.

The channel power measurement identifies the channel power within a specified bandwidth (default is 5
MHz, as per the 3GPP WCDMA technical specifications) and the power spectral density (PSD) in dBm/Hz.

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 148, your
measurement result is displayed on the screen as like the following example, Figure 62.

154 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

Figure 62 Channel power measurement with WCDMA/HSPA+ signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 160 for more
information.

Occupied bandwidth
The 3GPP specifications require the occupied bandwidth (OBW) of a transmitted WCDMA signal to be less
than 5 MHz, where occupied bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth containing 99% of the total channel
power. In this measurement, the total power of the displayed span is measured. Then the power is
measured inward from the right and left extremes until 0.5% of the power is accounted for each of the upper
and lower part of the span and the calculated difference is the occupied bandwidth.

The spectrum shape of a WCDMA signal can give a useful qualitative insight into the transmitter’s operation.
Any distortion to the spectrum shape might be an indication of degradation of the transmitter's performance.

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 148, your
measurement result is displayed on the screen as like the following example, Figure 63.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 155

Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

Figure 63 Occupied bandwidth measurement with WCDMA/HSPA+ signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 160 for more
information.

Spectrum emission mask (SEM)

The Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurement required by 3GPP specifications encompasses different
power limits and different measurement bandwidths (resolution bandwidths) at various frequency offsets. It
may be expressed as a ratio of power spectral densities between the carrier and the specified offset
frequency band. It provides useful figures-of-merit for the spectral re-growth and emissions produced by
components and circuit blocks, without the rigor of performing a full SEM measurement.

The SEM measures spurious signal levels in up to five pairs of offset or region frequencies and relates them
to the carrier power.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 148, you can set
the mask type according to the output power of the base station be tested. Your measurement result is
displayed on the screen as like the following example, Figure 64.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Mask Type soft key.
3 Select the mask type option: – 31 dBm, 31 – 39 dBm, 39 – 43 dBm, or 49 dBm –.

156 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

Figure 64 SEM measurement with WCDMA/HSPA+ signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 160 for more
information.

ACLR
The Adjacent Channel Power Ratio (ACPR), designated by the 3GPP WCDMA specifications as the
Adjacent Channel Leakage power Ratio (ACLR), is the power contained in a specified frequency channel
bandwidth relative to the total carrier power. It may also be expressed as a ratio of power spectral densities
between the carrier and the specified offset frequency band.

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 148, your
measurement result is displayed on the screen as like the following example, Figure 65.

Figure 65 ACLR measurement with WCDMA/HSPA+ signal analyzer

JD700B Series User’s Guide 157

Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 160 for more
information.

Multi-ACLR
The Multi-ACLR measurement is used to perform multi-channel ACLR measurements with as many
channels as possible. It helps you to measure ACLR in multi-channel transmitting Base Station environment.

Setting frequency for Multi-ACLR

You can set the frequency with either frequency or channel number.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the frequency, do one of the following:
– To set the center frequency, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
b Press the Lowest Frequency soft key to set the starting center frequency.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
e Press the Highest Frequency soft key to set the stopping center frequency.
f Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
g Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
– To set the channel number, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Unit soft key and select Channel.
b To select the standard channel, press the Channel Std soft key and then select the
band to be measured.
c Press the Lowest Channel soft key to set the starting channel.
d Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
e Press the Enter soft key.
f Press the Highest Channel soft key to set the stopping channel.
g Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
h Press the Enter soft key.

After configuring test parameters, your measurement result is displayed on the screen as like the following
example, Figure 66.

158 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

Figure 66 Multi-ACLR measurement with WCDMA/HSPA+ signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 160 for more
information.

Spurious emissions
Out-of-band emissions are unwanted emissions immediately outside the channel bandwidth resulting from
the modulation process and non-linearity in the transmitter but excluding spurious emissions. The Spurious
Emissions measurement is to identify and determine the power level of out-of-band spurious emission within
the necessary channel bandwidth and modulated signal measured at the RF port of the Base Station.

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set up the range table and parameters, press the Range Table soft key and then complete
the following steps:
a Press the Range soft key, and then select the range number between 1 and 20 to add
as a new or change the existing settings.
b Do the following as desired:
– Select Start Frequency, and then specify the start frequency for the selected range.
– Select Stop Frequency, and then specify the stop frequency for the selected range.
– Select Start Limit, and then specify the lower limit for Pass/Fail indication.
– Select Stop Limit, and then specify the upper limit for Pass/Fail indication.
– Select More (1/2) > Attenuation, and then specify an value in the multiple of five.
– Select More (1/2) > RBW, and then specify a RBW value.
– Select More (1/2) > VBW, and then specify a VBW value.
c Press the PREV hard key.
d Toggle the Range soft key and select On to display the selected range in the result table or
Off to hide it from the table.
3 Toggle the Measure Type soft key between Examine and Full to select the measurement type.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 159

Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

NOTE
The Examine mode displays only the selected range while the Full mode lets the
instrument automatically changes the selected range from one another.

4 To set the number of measurements to be averaged, complete the following steps:

a Press the Average soft key.
b Enter a value between 1 and 100.
c Press the Enter soft key.
5 To move the highlighted bar in the result table to other range, complete the following steps:
a Press the Range soft key in the Measure Setup menu bar.
b Enter a value between 1 and 20.
c Press the Enter soft key.

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 148, your
measurement result is displayed on the screen as like the following example, Figure 67.

Figure 67 Spurious emissions measurement with WCDMA/HSPA+ signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 160 for more
information.

Setting limit for RF tests

By default, test limits specified in the standard are set for you. You can change thresholds if you desire.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the RF Test Limits soft key.
3 Select the test item(s) and set the limit(s) depending on your selected measurement mode:
To set the limit for Select Set

Channel power Channel Power High Limit, Low Limit

Occupied bandwidth Occupied BW High Limit

160 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

Spectrum emission mask Spectrum Emission Mask (On/Off only)

ACLR ACLR (On/Off only)

Multi-ACLR Multi-ACLR (On/Off only)

Spurious emissions Spurious Emissions (On/Off only)

4 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Conducting modulation measurements

Constellation
The Constellation is used to observe some aspects of modulation accuracy and can reveal certain fault
mechanisms such as I/Q amplitude imbalance or quadrature imbalance. It displays constellation diagram by
modulation types.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 148, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the scramble code, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Scramble soft key between Auto and Manual.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys to set manually.
c Press the Enter soft key.
3 Press the Detect Mode soft key, and then select the signal standard option: WCDMA, HSDPA,
or HSPA+. HSDPA is set by default.
4 To set the threshold, complete the following steps:
a Press the Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 161

Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 68 Constellation measurement with WCDMA/HSPA+ signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for modulation tests” on page 172 for
more information.

Code domain power

The Code Domain Power (CDP) measures the distribution of power across the set of code channels,
normalized to the total power. It helps to verify that each code channel is operating at its proper level and to
identify problems throughout the transmitter design from coding to the RF section. System imperfections
such as amplifier non-linearity will present themselves as an undesired distribution of power in the code
domain.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 148, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Optional. To set the scramble code, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Scramble soft key between Auto and Manual.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys to set manually.
c Press the Enter soft key.
3 Optional. Press the Detect Mode soft key, and then select the signal standard option: WCDMA,
HSDPA, or HSPA+. HSDPA is set by default.
4 To set the S-CCPCH information of the system to be tested, complete the following steps:
a Press the S-CCPCH soft key.
b Toggle the S-CCPCH soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the S-CCPCH.
c Press the Spread Factor soft key, and then select the spread factor option: 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,

162 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

128, or 256.
d Press the Spread Code soft key to set the spread code.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
f Press the Enter soft key.
5 To set the PICH information of the system to be tested, complete the following steps:
a Press the PICH soft key.
b Toggle the PICH soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the PICH.
c Press the Spread Factor soft key, and then select the spread factor option: 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,
128, or 256.
d Press the Spread Code soft key to set the spread code.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
f Press the Enter soft key.
6 Optional. To set the threshold, complete the following steps:
a Press the Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.

Measurement example
Figure 69 Code domain power measurement with WCDMA/HSPA+ signal analyzer

1) Full screen

JD700B Series User’s Guide 163

Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

2) Full screen with constellation

3) Zoomed screen (Width 64)

4) Zoomed screen with constellation (Width 64)

164 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for modulation tests” on page 172 for
more information.

Setting display
You can view your measurement results in a different view option.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Toggle the View soft key and select the display option:
– Zoom: You can view the result in detail with zoom-in window.
The Position and Width menus become activated.
– Full: You can view the full measurement result.
3 To define the zoom start position and width, complete the following steps:
a Press the Position soft key.
b Enter a value of the position by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
d Press the Width soft key, and then select the Walsh code option: 32, 64, 128, or 256.
4 Toggle the Constellation soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the constellation
chart on the Code Domain Power screen.
5 Toggle the Control Channel soft key and select the control channel mode option:
– Normal: You can view the relative ratio of each control channel vs. total power.
– Delta: You can view the relative ratio of each control channel vs. CPICH channel.

Relative code domain power

The Relative Code Domain Error (RCDE) measurement provides relative code domain error analysis that is
particularly required by HSPA+.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 148, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Optional. To set the scramble code, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Scramble soft key between Auto and Manual.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys to set manually.
c Press the Enter soft key.
3 Optional. Press the Detect Mode soft key, and then select the signal standard option: WCDMA,
HSDPA, or HSPA+. HSDPA is set by default.
NOTE
It is recommended that you select HSPA+ for RCDE testing.
4 To set the S-CCPCH information of the system to be tested, complete the following steps:
a Press the S-CCPCH soft key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 165

Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

b Toggle the S-CCPCH soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the S-CCPCH.
c Press the Spread Factor soft key, and then select the spread factor option: 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,
128, or 256.
d Press the Spread Code soft key to set the spread code.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
f Press the Enter soft key.
5 To set the PICH information of the system to be tested, complete the following steps:
a Press the PICH soft key.
b Toggle the PICH soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the PICH.
c Press the Spread Factor soft key, and then select the spread factor option: 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,
128, or 256.
d Press the Spread Code soft key to set the spread code.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
f Press the Enter soft key.
6 Optional. To set the threshold, complete the following steps:
a Press the Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
7 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 70 Relative code domain error with WCDMA/HSPA+ signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for modulation tests” on page 172 for
more information.

Setting display
You can view your measurement results in a different view option.

166 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Toggle the View soft key and select the display option:
– Zoom: You can view the result in detail with zoom-in window.
The Position and Width menus become activated.
– Full: You can view the full measurement result.
3 To define the zoom start position and width, complete the following steps:
a Press the Position soft key.
b Enter a value of the position by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
d Press the Width soft key, and then select the Walsh code option: 32, 64, 128, or 256.
4 Toggle the Constellation soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the constellation
chart on the Code Domain Power screen.
5 Toggle the Control Channel soft key and select the control channel mode option:
– Normal: You can view the relative ratio of each control channel vs. total power.
– Delta: You can view the relative ratio of each control channel vs. CPICH channel.

Codogram
The Codogram displays how the code level is changing over time and makes it easier for you to view traffic
channels as they initiate and terminate and to track traffic channels call levels over time. The Codogram
measurements can be saved into an external USB memory so that a post-analysis can be done with the
application software JDViewer.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 148, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Optional. To set the scramble code, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Scramble soft key between Auto and Manual.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys to set manually.
c Press the Enter soft key.
3 Optional. Press the Detect Mode soft key, and then select the signal standard option: WCDMA,
HSDPA, or HSPA+. HSDPA is set by default.
4 To set the S-CCPCH information of the system to be tested, complete the following steps:
a Press the S-CCPCH soft key.
b Toggle the S-CCPCH soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the S-CCPCH.
c Press the Spread Factor soft key, and then select the spread factor option: 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,
128, or 256.
d Press the Spread Code soft key to set the spread code.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
f Press the Enter soft key.
5 To set the PICH information of the system to be tested, complete the following steps:
a Press the PICH soft key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 167

Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

b Toggle the PICH soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the PICH.
c Press the Spread Factor soft key, and then select the spread factor option: 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,
128, or 256.
d Press the Spread Code soft key to set the spread code.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
f Press the Enter soft key.
6 Optional. To set the threshold, complete the following steps:
a Press the Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
7 To set the time interval, complete the following steps:
a Press the Time Interval soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
8 To place the time cursor to analyze your measurements, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Time Cursor soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the time cursor.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
NOTE
When the time cursor is enabled, the measurement is put on hold and information about
the time cursor is displayed.
9 To start a new measurement, press the Reset/Restart soft key.
10 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 71 Codogram in full view with WCDMA/HSPA+ signal analyzer

Setting display
You can view your measurement results in a different view option.

168 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Toggle the View soft key and select the display option:
– Zoom: You can view the result in detail with zoom-in window.
The Position and Width menus become activated.
– Full: You can view the full measurement result.
3 To define the zoom start position and width, complete the following steps:
a Press the Position soft key.
b Enter a value of the position by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 Press the Width soft key, and then select the Walsh code option: 32, 64, 128, or 256.

RCSI
The Received Code Strength indicator (RCSI) is used to track the code channels such as CPICH, P-CCPCH,
S-CCPCH, PICH, P-SCH, and S-SCH. It is particularly useful to observe signal fluctuations of the dedicated
control channels over the time. The RCSI measurements can be saved into an external USB memory so that
a post-analysis can be done with the application software JDViewer.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 148, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Optional. To set the scramble code, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Scramble soft key between Auto and Manual.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys to set manually.
c Press the Enter soft key.
3 Optional. Press the Detect Mode soft key, and then select the signal standard option: WCDMA,
HSDPA, or HSPA+. HSDPA is set by default.
4 To set the S-CCPCH information of the system to be tested, complete the following steps:
a Press the S-CCPCH soft key.
b Toggle the S-CCPCH soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the S-CCPCH.
Setting this on makes the S-CCPCH in the Alarm Code menu activated.
c Press the Spread Factor soft key, and then select the spread factor option: 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,
128, or 256.
d Press the Spread Code soft key to set the spread code.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
f Press the Enter soft key.
5 To set the PICH information of the system to be tested, complete the following steps:
a Press the PICH soft key.
b Toggle the PICH soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the PICH.
Setting this on makes the PICH in the Alarm Code menu activated.
c Press the Spread Factor soft key, and then select the spread factor option: 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,
128, or 256.
d Press the Spread Code soft key to set the spread code.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 169

Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

e Enter a value by using the numeric keys.

f Press the Enter soft key.
6 Optional. To set the threshold, complete the following steps:
a Press the Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
7 Press the Alarm Code soft key, and then select the alarm code option: None, CPICH, P-
CCPCH, S-CCPCH, PICH, P-SCH, or S-SCH.

NOTE
The alarm codes S-CCPCH and PICH become activated in case that you have enabled
the S-CCPCH and PICH respectively.

8 To set the alarm mask, complete the following steps:

a Press the Set Mask soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
9 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 72 RCSI measurement with WCDMA/HSPA+ signal analyzer

Setting display
You can view your measurement results in a different view option.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Toggle the View soft key and select the display option:
– Zoom: You can view the result in detail with zoom-in window.
The Position and Width menus become activated.
– Full: You can view the full measurement result.
3 To define the zoom start position and width, complete the following steps:

170 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

a Press the Position soft key.

b Enter a value of the position by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
d Press the Width soft key, and then select the Walsh code option: 32, 64, 128, or 256.

CDP Table
The CDP Table is used to look at a numeric and textual description of all the active code channels in the
signal.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 148, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Optional. To set the scramble code, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Scramble soft key between Auto and Manual.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys to set manually.
c Press the Enter soft key.
3 Optional. Press the Detect Mode soft key, and then select the signal standard option: WCDMA,
HSDPA, or HSPA+. HSDPA is set by default.
4 To set the S-CCPCH information of the system to be tested, complete the following steps:
a Press the S-CCPCH soft key.
b Toggle the S-CCPCH soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the S-CCPCH.
c Press the Spread Factor soft key, and then select the spread factor option: 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,
128, or 256.
d Press the Spread Code soft key to set the spread code.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
f Press the Enter soft key.
5 To set the PICH information of the system to be tested, complete the following steps:
a Press the PICH soft key.
b Toggle the PICH soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the PICH.
c Press the Spread Factor soft key, and then select the spread factor option: 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,
128, or 256.
d Press the Spread Code soft key to set the spread code.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
f Press the Enter soft key.
6 Optional. To set the threshold, complete the following steps:
a Press the Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 171

Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 73 CDP Table measurement with WCDMA/HSPA+ signal analyzer

Setting display
If the CDP table spans over to the next page(s), you can change pages up and down to view your
measurement results.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Select Page Up or Page Down as needed.

Setting limit for modulation tests

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Modulation Test Limits soft key to set the limits.
3 Select the test item(s) and set the limit(s) depending on your selected measurement mode:
To set the limit for Select Set

Frequency error Frequency Error High Limit, Low Limit

Error vector magnitude EVM High Limit

Peak code domain error PCDE High Limit

Carrier feed through Carrier Feed Through High Limit

Correlated power in coded channel CPICH High Limit [Abs|Rel]

Low Limit [Abs|Rel]

Highest level among inactive channels Max Inactive High Limit

Relative code domain error RCDE High Limit (QPSK)

High Limit (16 QAM)
High Limit (64 QAM)

172 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

4 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

NOTE
The Carrier Feed Through is a result of the RF carrier signal feeding through the I/Q
modulator and riding on the output circuitry without being modulated.

Performing auto measurements

The Auto Measure function of the JD700B series allows a complete signal profiling covering RF
characterization and modulation quality parameters of up to 10 different carriers, particularly useful on an
overlay architecture where base stations are transmitting in different frequencies.

The Auto Measure can be easily executed either by selecting a menu in the instrument or by running a
programmed scenario in the PC-based application so that the instrument automatically configure and
perform tests on every aspect of all the carriers.

Setting limit for auto measure

You can set test limits for test item(s) in the auto measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the RF Test Limits soft key, and then enable test limits as desired.
3 Press the Modulation Test Limits soft key, and then enable test limits as desired.
4 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 148, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Toggle the Configuration soft key and select the configuration option:
– Current: Lets the instrument use current frequency (single carrier) and determine pass or
fail based on the instrument s limit settings in Auto Measure.
– Scenario: Runs a test with a programmed scenario in JDViewer.
The Scenario menu becomes activated.
3 To load a scenario, press the Scenario soft key, and then select a scenario file to load.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 173

Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

4 Toggle the Test Time soft key and select the test time option:
– Now: Lets the instrument run a test only once.
– Schedule: Lets the instrument repeat tests as defined in the Set Timing.
The Set Timing menu becomes activated.
5 To define a schedule for an auto measurement, complete the following steps:
a Press the Set Timing soft key.
b Press the Start Time (HH:MM) soft key.
c Enter the time in the HH:MM format, and then press the Enter soft key.
d Press the Stop Time (HH:MM) soft key.
e Enter the time in the HH:MM format, and then press the Enter soft key.
f Press the Time Interval soft key.
g Enter the amount of time in minutes, and then press the Enter soft key.
6 To set external offset, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the dB soft key.
7 To save your settings and results, go to SAVE/LOAD > Save and then perform functions as you
desire. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.
8 Press the Run Test soft key to start to run a test.
The Auto Measure Results window appears at the end of the test.
9 To stop running the test, press the Abort soft key.
10 To change the view on the screen during the test, press the Display and then select the view
option from the following choices:
– Screen: You can view each measurement screen as the test progresses.
– Results: You can view a measurement result table as the test progresses.
– Settings: You can view a measurement setting table as the test progresses.

Setting display
After completion of the auto measurement, the screen menu changes to Trace/Display so that you can view
the results in different forms.

Procedure

1 Toggle the Display soft key and select the display option:
– Result: You can view the result table.
The Display Result menu becomes activated.
– Settings: You can view the measurement settings for the auto measurement.
2 Toggle the Display Result soft key and select the display result option:
– Full: You can view detailed measurement readings with the pass/fail indication.
– Quick: You can view only the Pass/Fail results.
3 To view the measurement results for a different carrier, press the View Carrier soft key and then
select the carrier number to view.

Performing power statistics CCDF measurement

The Power Statistics Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function (CCDF) measurement characterizes
the power statistics of the input signal. It provides PAR (Peak to Average power Ratio) versus different
probabilities.

174 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 148, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the CCDF Length soft key to set the length of the CCDF.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 100 by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
4 Press the Enter soft key.

Measurement example
Figure 74 CCDF measurement with WCDMA/HSPA+ signal analyzer

Conducting WCDMA/HSPA+ OTA measurements

This Over The Air (OTA) measurement has channel scanner, scramble scanner, multipath profile, code
domain power, and route map screens. Scramble scanner displays six scrambling codes and powers to
inform neighbor cells existence and its power. The multipath profile graph helps you to determine testing
area's RF environmental condition. The code domain power shows not only modulation performance metric
but also amplifier capacity and code utilization metric. The amplifier capacity (code utilization) measurement
is an estimate of the amount of power amplifier capacity (code utilization) that is being used expressed in
percent of maximum.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 175

Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

Channel scanner
Setting channel/frequency

Procedure

To set the channels to be scanned:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Channel.
3 Press the Index soft key, and then enter an index number by turning the rotary knob or using the
numeric keys.
4 To select the standard channel, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Std soft key. The standard channel window appears.
See “Appendix C – Band, frequency & channel standard” on page 664 for more information.
b Highlight the band to be measured by using the rotary knob, the arrow keys, or the
Page Up/Page Down soft keys.
c Press the Select soft key or the rotary knob to confirm the selection.
5 To set the channel number for the selected index, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Number soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 The instrument displays a corresponding center frequency for the channel number.
7 To set the integration bandwidth for the selected index, complete the following steps:
a Press the Integration Bandwidth soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
8 To add more channels to be scanned, repeat steps 3-6.
9 Press the ESC hard key to dismiss the channel list window and view the scanning result.

To set the frequencies to be scanned:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
3 Press the Index soft key, and then enter an index number by turning the rotary knob or using the
numeric keys.
4 To set the center frequency for the selected index, complete the following steps:
a Press the Center Frequency soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
5 To set the integration bandwidth for the selected index, complete the following steps:
a Press the Integration Bandwidth soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
6 To add more channels to be scanned, repeat steps 3-5.
7 Press the ESC hard key to dismiss the channel list window and view the scanning result.

Setting limit for OTA channel scanner

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Limit Line soft key to set a threshold for the limit line and Pass/Fail indication.
3 Enter a value, and then press the dBm unit soft key.
4 Toggle the Limit Line soft key between On and Off to display or dismiss the limit line.

176 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

5 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
6 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 75 Channel scanner measurement with WCDMA/HSPA+ OTA signal analyzer

Scramble scanner
The WCDMA/HSPA+ mobile receives signals from multiple base stations that all of these signals share the
same spectrum and are present at the same time. Each base station has a unique scrambling code assigned
to the particular base station and it differentiates its signal from other base stations in the area.

Measurement example
Figure 76 Scramble scanner measurement with WCDMA/HSPA+ OTA signal analyzer

JD700B Series User’s Guide 177

Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

Multipath profile
The Multipath Profile enables you to determine RF environmental conditions of testing area. It indicates the
amount of power of the dominant pilot signal that is dispersed outside the main correlation peak due to
multipath echoes that are expressed in dB. This value should be very small ideally.

The multipath profile is the result of portions of the original broadcast signal arriving at the receiving antenna
out of phase. This can be caused by the signal being reflected off objects such as buildings, or being
refracted through the atmosphere differently from the main signal.

Measurement example
Figure 77 Multipath profile measurement with WCDMA/HSPA+ OTA signal analyzer

Code domain power

Channels with high correlation factors are determined to be active channels and are indicated as such on
the display. Once the channels are decoded, the analyzer determines the power of each channel relative to
the total signal power.

This measurement helps to verify that each code channel is operating at its proper level and helps to identify
problems throughout the transmitter design from the coding to the RF section. System imperfections, such
as the non-linearity of amplifiers, will present themselves as an undesired distribution of power in the code
domain.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters, you can set the measure setup to continue your measurement. The
measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also use JDViewer, PC application
software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the scramble code, complete the following steps:

178 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

a Toggle the Scramble soft key between Auto and Manual.

b Enter a value by using the numeric keys to set manually.
c Press the Enter soft key.
3 Press the Detect Mode soft key, and then select the signal standard option: WCDMA, HSDPA,
or HSPA+. HSDPA is set by default.
4 To set the threshold, complete the following steps:
a Press the Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
5 To set the S-CCPCH information of the system to be tested, complete the following steps:
a Press the S-CCPCH soft key.
b Toggle the S-CCPCH soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the S-CCPCH.
c Press the Spread Factor soft key, and then select the spread factor option: 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,
128, or 256.
d Press the Spread Code soft key to set the spread code.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
f Press the Enter soft key.
6 To set the PICH information of the system to be tested, complete the following steps:
a Press the PICH soft key.
b Toggle the PICH soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the PICH.
c Press the Spread Factor soft key, and then select the spread factor option: 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,
128, or 256.
d Press the Spread Code soft key to set the spread code.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
f Press the Enter soft key.
7 To set the maximum amplifier power, complete the following steps:
a Press the Max Amplifier Power soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the dBm soft key.
8 To set the CPICH power, complete the following steps:
a Press the More (1/2) soft key.
b Press the CPICH soft key.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
d Press the dBm soft key.
9 To set the threshold for CPICH dominance, complete the following steps:
a Press the CPICH Dominance > soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
NOTE
Recommended value is 10. Color of the CPICH Dominance indicator on the screen
bases on this setting.
10 To set the threshold for multipath power, complete the following steps:
a Press the Multipath Power < soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
NOTE
Recommended value is one. Color of the multipath power indicator on the screen bases
on this setting.
11 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 179

Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 78 Code domain power measurement with WCDMA/HSPA+ OTA signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication.

Route map
The JD700B Series provides the Route Map function that allows you to collect data of points in an indoor or
outdoor environment and track the received signals and coverage of RF transmitters by plotting data real
time directly on top of a loaded floor plan or a map.

The JD700B Series also supports the RAN-IL (Interference Location) feature that enables you to overlay
user experience data obtained through Viavi’s ariesoGEO on your base map to help you troubleshoot
problems easily and quickly using your instrument. You can generate raster data files on the ariesoGEO
application and load them on your instrument.

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 If required, connect a GPS receiver to your JD700B series for outdoor mapping.
Indoor mapping does not necessarily need a GPS antenna.
2 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 148.
3 To load your map file, complete the following steps:
a Plug in your USB drive that has a floor map or .mcf file type created in JDMapCreator. If
the JDMapCreator application on your computer is connected to the instrument via USB or
LAN, you can send a map file with a single layer to the instrument directly by using the
Send to EQP menu in JDMapCreator.
NOTE
The JDMapCreator converts and resizes any scanned floor plan or layout to fit onto your
instrument’s display. JDMapCreator 1.2.0 or later can save a multiple-layered map,
providing x1, x2, and x4 views, as a sizable map file so that you can zoom in and out
after loading it.
b Press SAVE/LOAD hot key, and then select Load > Load Map. See “Using load” on page

180 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

35 for more information.

4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
5 Press the Plot Point soft key, and then select the plot point option from the following choices:
– To collect data/plot points automatically as you move around in a vehicle or outside, press
the GPS soft key and then toggle the Screen Mode soft key between Map and Full.
NOTE
With the Map setting, you can view only the collected points that can be seen within the
boundary of the loaded map. If a point is off the map, the instrument displays an arrow to
indicate the direction of the current location on the map and the distance from the center
to the location at the top of the screen.

With the Full setting, you can view all the collected points of the route without the loaded
map.
– To collect data/plot points manually without a GPS antenna in an indoor environment, press
the Position soft key.
6 Press the Plot Item soft key, and then select the measurement option: CPICH Power or Ec/Io.
7 Toggle the Plot soft key and select Start.
8 Touch directly on the screen or press the ENTER hard key to collect data and plot points on the
loaded map for the Position setting.
NOTE
For the Position setting, you can change the direction of the route with the arrow keys
and the distance with the rotary knob.
9 Toggle the Plot soft key and select Stop to stop plotting.
10 Press the SAVE/LOAD hot key to save the result.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.
NOTE
The instrument does not automatically save the collected data. It is recommended that
you save the result. Otherwise, you will lose all the collected data.

Setting limit
You can set the thresholds for the four different color indicators for CPICH power or Ec/Io.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Select the plot items and set the limits as needed:

To set the limit for Select Set

CPICH Power CPICH Power Excellent, Very Good, Good, Fair, Poor (dBm)

CPICH Ec/Io Ec/Io Good, Fair, Poor (dB)

3 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 181

Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 79 Route map measurement (CPICH Power) with WCDMA/HSPA+ OTA signal analyzer

Figure 80 Route map measurement (CPICH Ec/Io) with WCDMA/HSPA+ OTA signal analyzer

Controlling a map
If you have loaded a sizable map that was created in JDMapCreator 1.2.0 or later, you can use the Map
Control feature that enables you to zoom into the map and view a specific area of interest in detail.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Map Control soft key. This key is active only when you have loaded a sizable map.
3 Do one of the following:
– To zoom into an area of interest directly, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Zoom to soft key and select Area.

182 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

The black rectangle appears on the map.

b Press the Zoom In and Zoom Out soft keys, as you need, to decrease and increase
the selected area.
c Move the rectangle by using the four arrow keys, as you need, to place it in a specific
area of interest.
d Press the center of the rotary knob to zoom into the selected area. You can also press
the Zoom to soft key again to zoom into the selected area.
– To zoom into the center or zoom out from the center, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Zoom to soft key and select Center.
b Press the Zoom In and Zoom Out soft keys, as you need, to zoom in and zoom out.
c Move the zoomed-in area by using the four arrow keys, as you need.
4 To set the location mode, toggle the Location Mode soft key between Auto and Manual and
select the one you desire.
– Auto: The instrument compares the coordinates of the displayed map with recevied GPS
information. If your current location goes out of the displayed area and enters into the next
zoomed-in section within the base map, the map display changes automatically to the next
section in which your current position is.
– Manual: The map display of the zoomed-in area remains unchanged even if your current
location goes out of the displayed area. You can change the displayed area manually by
using the arrow keys.

Loading and displaying raster data

If you have a set of raster data files generated through the ariesoGEO application, you can load and overlay
the data on your base map to help you check the signal quality and the strength of interferences while
driving toward the area of interest.

Procedure

1 Copy a set of raster data files into your USB memory drive, including the following:
– ASCII: .tab, .asc, and .clr files
– BIL: .tab,.hdr, .bil, and .clr files
NOTE
The .tab file type is a geospatial vector data format used in many geographic
information systems. The color file (.clr) is an optional file, but the image will be
displayed as a grayscale image without it. The size of the raster map must be
1024 x 1024 or smaller.
2 Plug in the USB memory drive to your instrument.
3 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.
4 Press the Load Raster Map soft key.
The file explorer window appears.
5 Navigate to the raster file (.tab) you want to open, and then press the Load soft key.
The raster image appears on top of your base map as shown in Figure 81.
NOTE
If the area of the loaded raster data is not within the boundary of the base map, you will
not see the raster image on the screen.
6 To select the display option, complete the following steps:
a Press the Display Options soft key.
b Select the option you desire from the choices: On, Off, and Blink.
7 To adjust the transparency level of the image, complete the following steps:
a Press the Transparency soft key.
b Enter a value between 0 for opaque and 100 for clear.
c Press the Enter soft key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 183

Chapter 7 Using WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer

Figure 81 Raster image overlaid on the base map in WCDMA/HSPA+ OTA signal analyzer

184 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 8

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

This chapter provides instructions for using the LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer (option 028) and LTE-Advanced
FDD Analyzer (option 030) with the LTE-FDD OTA Analyzer (option 048) and the LTE-FDD RAN
Performance Indicator (option 014). Topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

n Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 186

n Display overview ..................................................................................................................... 187
n Connecting a cable.................................................................................................................. 187
n Selecting measurement mode ................................................................................................ 189
n Configuring test parameters .................................................................................................... 189
n Conducting spectrum measurements ..................................................................................... 194
n Conducting RF measurements ............................................................................................... 195
n Conducting power vs. time (frame) measurements ................................................................ 202
n Conducting modulation measurements................................................................................... 203
n Performing auto measurements .............................................................................................. 221
n Performing power statistics CCDF measurements ................................................................. 227
n Performing carrier aggregation measurements ...................................................................... 228
n Conducting LTE-FDD OTA measurements ............................................................................. 231
n Performing RAN performance testing ..................................................................................... 245
Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Introduction
The LTE (Long-Term Evolution) Signal Analyzer of the JD700B series performs power and spectrum
measurements as well as modulation analysis to test the proper transmitter performance of FDD LTE
systems. It performs conformance testing according to the following standards providing a simple Pass/Fail
indication on each test.

n 3GPP TS 36.104. Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Base Station (BS) Radio
Transmission and Reception
n 3GPP TS 36.141. Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Base Station (BS)
Conformance Testing
n 3GPP TS 36.211. Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical Channels and
Modulation
n 3GPP TS 36.212. Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Multiplexing and Channel
Coding
n 3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0. Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical Layer
Procedures

This instrument provides the following measurement tools for FDD LTE system:

n Spectrum Analysis
n RF Analysis
- Channel Power
- Occupied Bandwidth
- Spectrum Emission Mask
- Adjacent Channel Leakage power Ratio (ACLR)
- Multi-ACLR
- Spurious Emissions
n Power vs. Time (Frame)
n Modulation Analysis
- Constellation
- Data Channel
- Control Channel
- Subframe
- Frame
- Time Alignment Error
- Data Allocation Map
n Auto Measure:
- Conformance Test
- Maintenance Test
- Signal Performance Test
- DAS Test

186 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

n Power Statistics CCDF

n Carrier Aggregation
n Over The Air (OTA)
- Channel Scanner
- ID Scanner
- Multipath Profile
- Control Channel
- Datagram
- Route Map
n RAN Performance Indicator

Display overview
Figure 82 provides descriptions for each segment of the measurement screen.

Figure 82 LTE-FDD signal analyzer measurement screen

Connecting a cable
Direct connection
Procedure

1 Connect the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B series and the Power amplifier output
port of BTS.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 187

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Figure 83 Direct connection

JD785B/JD745B JD788B/JD748B

Indirect connection
Procedure

1 Connect the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B series and the monitor (test) port of
BTS.

Figure 84 Indirect connection

JD785B/JD745B JD788B/JD748B

CAUTION
The maximum power for the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port is +25 dBm (0.316 W) for
JD780B series and +20 dBm (0.1 W) for JD740B series. If the level of the input signal to
be measured is greater than this, use a High Power Attenuator to prevent damage
when you directly connect the signal to the instrument or connect the signal from the
coupling port of a directional coupler.

Over the air (OTA)

Procedure

1 Connect an Omni/directional RF antenna to the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B

series.
2 Connect a GPS antenna to the GPS port of the JD700B series.

188 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Figure 85 OTA connection

JD785B/JD745B JD788B/JD748B

CAUTION
If the input signal level to be measured is less than 0 dBm, set 0 dB attenuation or turn on
the preamp to have better dynamic range for the OTA testing.

Selecting measurement mode

Procedure

1 Press the MODE hard key.

2 Press the Signal Analyzer soft key.
3 Press the LTE - FDD soft key. The Spectrum mode is set by default.
4 Press the MEASURE hot key, and then select the measurement mode option from the following
choices:
– Spectrum
– RF Analysis > Channel Power, Occupied BW, Spectrum Emission Mask, ACLR,
Multi-ACLR, or Spurious Emissions
– Power vs Time (Frame)
– Modulation Analysis > Constellation, Data Channel, Control Channel, Subframe,
Frame, Time Alignement Error, or Data Allocation Map
– Auto Measure > Conformance Test, Maintenance Test, Signal Perfomance,
or DAS Test
– Power Statistics CCDF
– More (1/2) > Carrier Aggregation
– More (1/2) > OTA > Channel Scanner, ID Scanner, Multipath Profile, Control Channel,
Datagram, or Route Map
– More (1/2) > RAN Performance Indicator

NOTE
The Carrier Aggregation soft key is activated if the license for the option 030 LTE-
Advanced FDD is installed and so does the RAN Performance Indicator for the option
014 LTE-FDD RAN Performance Indicator.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 189

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Configuring test parameters

Setting frequency
You can set the frequency with either frequency or channel number. If a frequency to be set matches to the
frequency corresponding to the selected channel standard, the instrument calculates its channel number
and updates the screen with it automatically.

Procedure

To set the center frequency:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
3 Press the Center Frequency soft key.
4 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
5 Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
6 Optional. To define the amount of frequency increment for the rotary knob, complete the following
steps:
a Press the Frequency Step soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.

To set the channel number:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Channel.
NOTE
Selecting Channel sets the standard channel to Band Global automatically so that you
can set the Channel Number without choosing a standard channel band from the list.
3 Press the Channel Number soft key.
4 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
5 Press the Enter soft key.
The instrument automatically displays the corresponding center frequency value for the selected
channel number.
6 Optional. To define the amount of channel increment for the rotary knob, complete the following
steps:
a Press the Channel Step soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.

NOTE
This frequency setting is not used in the Multi-ACLR and Spurious Emissions modes.

Setting amplitude
Reference level and attenuation
You can set the reference and attenuation levels automatically or manually to optimize the display of the
traces measured, as you desire.

Procedure

To automatically set the reference and attenuation level:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Press the Auto Scale soft key.

190 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Each time you press this key, both of the Y-axis scale and input attenuation level change to be
optimized with some margin.

To set the reference or attenuation level manually:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 To set the maximum reference value on the Y-axis manually, complete the following steps:
a Press the Reference Level soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys or the rotary knob with 10 dB increments.
c Press the unit soft key or the ENTER hard key.
NOTE
In the measurements such as Control Channel, Subframe, and Frame, you can select
the reference option between Relative and Absolute instead.
3 To set the attenuation option, select one from the following choices:
– To set the input attenuator’s level automatically, select Attenuation > Auto.
NOTE
It is recommended that you set the Attenuation to Auto in most situations so that the
level of the input attenuator can be set automatically according to your input signal level.
– To set the input attenuation manually up to 55 dB for JD780B series or 50 dB for JD740B
series to optimize S/N, complete the following steps:
a Select Attenuation > Manual.
b Press the Attenuation Value soft key to set the level.
c Enter a value in fives by using the numeric keys.
d Press the dB soft key or the ENTER hard key.
– To couple the input attenuator’s level with your reference level setting, select Attenuation >
Couple. As you increase the reference setting, the attenuation level also increases
acoordingly.

Optional. To change the scale unit:

1 Select More (1/2) > Units.
2 Select the unit of the display scale: dBm, dBV, dBmV, dBµV, V, or W.
The scale unit on the screen changes accordingly.
NOTE
This Units menu is available in the Spectrum and RF Analysis modes.

Scale per division

You can use the Scale/Div feature available for the spectrum and RF analysis. It represents the value of one
division on the horizontal scale. The default setting is 10 dB per division and the maximum value can be set
up to 20 dB.

Procedure

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Select More (1/2) > Scale/Div.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 20 by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.

Pre-amplifier
You can turn the internal pre-amplifier on to correct and compensate for the gain of the preamp so that
amplitude readings show the value at the input connector.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 191

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Toggle the Preamp soft key and select On or Off as needed.

NOTE
You can turn the Preamp on when the input attenuation range is from 0 dB to 10 dB. If
the attenuation value is manually set to greater than 10 dB, the instrument will
automatically turn off the pre-amplifier to display low-level signal properly on the chart.

External offset
You can turn the External Offset on and manually set the external offset value. An offset consists of a cable
loss and a user offset and the measurement result shows the value reflecting both offset values. When the
external offset value is set at 40 dB in the Spectrum mode, the measurement result compensates 40 dB at
both the Spectrum Analyzer and Signal Analyzer modes.

Procedure

To set the external offset:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On.
3 Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.

To turn the external offset off:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Toggle the External Offset soft key and select Off.

Setting average
You can set the number of measurements to be averaged for the trace presentation. A maximum of 100
times of averaging can be set. When the averaging reaches to your setting, a new measurement value
replaces the measurement value in sequence from the earliest.

Procedure

1 Press the BW/AVG hard key.

2 Press the Average soft key.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 100 as needed by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the Enter soft key.

Setting sweep mode

The default setting is Continue to sweep continuously for most on-going measurements. If you want to hold
the measurement or get a single sweep, you can change the sweep mode.

Procedure

To select the single sweep mode:

1 Press the SWEEP hot key.
2 Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Single. You can also use the HOLD hot key.

192 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

The letter HOLD in red appears and the sweeping is paused.

3 Optional. Press the Sweep Once soft key to get a new measurement.

To return to the continuous sweep mode:

1 Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Continue. You can also use the HOLD hot key.
The letter HOLD in red disappears and the sweeping resumes.

Setting trigger source

You can set the trigger source option for your measurements.

Procedure

1 Press the TRIGGER hot key.

2 Select the trigger source option from the choices: Internal, External, and GPS.

Setting external clock

To enhance the reliability of modulation analysis measurements the JD700B series must be synchronized
with a base station. When an external clock is not supplied, the instrument works with its built-in internal
high-accuracy time base and some measurement results may exhibit inaccurate values. Therefore, it is
highly recommended that you use the same reference clock as the signal source. You can use the
TRIGGER hot key to set the external clock.

Figure 86 Connection ports for external reference clock

Procedure

1 Connect an external reference or a GPS antenna to the JD700B series.

2 Press the SYSTEM hot key.
3 Press the Freq Reference soft key, and then select the reference option from the choices:
Internal, External 10 MHz, External 13 MHz, External 15 MHz, and GPS.

Table 12 External reference indicators

Type Indicator Description

Internal (green) The green INT icon indicates that the instrument uses the built-in
internal time base.

External (green) The green EXT icon indicates that an external reference is connected
and locked and that the instrument uses the same reference clock as
the signal source.

External (red) The red EXT icon indicates that an external reference is connect but not

JD700B Series User’s Guide 193

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

locked.

GPS (green) The green GPS antenna icon indicates that a GPS antenna is
connected and locked.

GPS (yellow) The yellow GPS antenna icon indicates that a GPS antenna is
connected and locking is in progress.

GPS (grey) The grey GPS antenna icon indicates that a GPS antenna is not
connected, failed, or unable to be locked.

Conducting spectrum measurements

Setting measure setup
After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 189, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Bandwidth soft key.
3 Select the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz,
5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz.

Your measurement result is displayed on the screen as like the following example, Figure 87.

Figure 87 Spectrum measurement screen with LTE-FDD signal analyzer

Setting trace
You can display up to six traces on the measurement chart simultaneously.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Select Trace soft key, and then select the trace number: T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, or T6.

194 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

The legend shape of the selected trace changes from square to round to indicate that the trace is
the active one now.
3 Do one of the following:

To Select Trace Legend

Clear current data and display with new Clear Write W

measurements

Display the input signal’s maximum response only Max Hold M

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

Display the input signal’s minimum response only Min Hold m

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

Capture the selected trace and compare traces Capture C

Load a saved trace More (1/2) > Load L

Hide the displayed trace Trace View > Off F

Remove all the traces and initialize the trace More (1/2) > Trace
settings Clear All

NOTE
For the Max Hold and Min Hold, your instrument compares newly acquired data with the
active trace and displays larger maximum values or smaller minimum values on the
screen. You can set it to Unlimited to hold and view maximum or minimum data or
specify a certain amount of time up to 60 seconds by using numeric keys or rotary knob.
4 Optional. Select More (1/2) > Trace Info, and then select the trace number to view the trace’s
parameter setting information stored at the time of the measurement or None to hide the
information display.
5 Optional. If you have the two traces T1 and T2, you can perform trace math. To view the power
difference between the traces, press the T1 – T2 -> T5 or T2 – T1 -> T6 soft key.
The result is overlaid on the screen along with the second Y-axis.

Conducting RF measurements
Channel power
The Channel Power measurement is a common test used in the wireless industry to measure the total
transmitted power of a radio within a defined frequency channel. It acquires a number of points representing
the input signal in the time domain, transforms this information into the frequency domain using Fast Fourier
Transform (FFT), and then calculates the channel power. The effective resolution bandwidth of the frequency
domain trace is proportional to the number of points acquired for the FFT.

The channel power measurement identifies the total RF power and power spectral density (PSD) of the
signal in the LTE channel bandwidth.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 189, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Bandwidth soft key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 195

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

3 Select the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz,
5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz.

Measurement example
Figure 88 Channel power measurement with LTE-FDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 202 for more
information.

Occupied bandwidth
The Occupied Bandwidth measures the spectrum shape of the carrier. It is defined as the bandwidth, which
includes 99% of the transmitted power among total transmitted power.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 189, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Bandwidth soft key.
3 Select the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz,
5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz.

196 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 89 Occupied bandwidth measurement with LTE-FDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 202 for more
information.

Spectrum emission mask (SEM)

The Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurement required by 3GPP specifications encompasses different
power limits and different measurement bandwidths (resolution bandwidths) at various frequency offsets. It
may be expressed as a ratio of power spectral densities between the carrier and the specified offset
frequency band. It provides useful figures-of-merit for the spectral re-growth and emissions produced by
components and circuit blocks, without the rigor of performing a full SEM measurement.

The SEM measures spurious signal levels in up to five pairs of offset or region frequencies and relates them
to the carrier power.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 189, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 To select the mask type, complete the following steps:
a Press the Mask Type soft key.
b Select the mask type option, from the following choices:
– Wide Area BS Category A

JD700B Series User’s Guide 197

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

– Wide Area BS Category B

– Local Area BS
– Home BS

Measurement example
Figure 90 SEM measurement with LTE-FDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 202 for more
information.

ACLR
The Adjacent Channel Leakage power Ratio (ACLR) measures the amount of interference or power in an
adjacent frequency channel according to the standards.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 189, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Bandwidth soft key.
3 Select the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, from the following choices: 1.4 MHz,
3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz.

198 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 91 ACLR measurement with LTE-FDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 202 for more
information.

Multi-ACLR
The Multi-ACLR measurement is used to perform multi-channel ACLR measurements with as many
channels as possible. It helps you to measure ACLR in multi-channel transmitting Base Station environment.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 189, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 To set the frequency, do one of the following:
– To set the center frequency, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
b Press the Lowest Frequency soft key to set the starting center frequency.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
e Press the Highest Frequency soft key to set the stopping center frequency.
f Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
g Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
– To set the channel number, complete the following steps:

JD700B Series User’s Guide 199

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

a Toggle the Unit soft key and select Channel.

NOTE
Selecting Channel sets the standard channel to Band Global automatically so that you
can set the Channel Number without choosing a standard channel band from the list.
b Press the Lowest Channel soft key to set the starting channel.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Press the Enter soft key.
e Press the Highest Channel soft key to set the stopping channel.
f Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
g Press the Enter soft key.

Measurement example
Figure 92 Multi-ACLR measurement with LTE-FDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 202 for more
information.

Spurious emissions
Out-of-band emissions are unwanted emissions immediately outside the channel bandwidth resulting from
the modulation process and non-linearity in the transmitter but excluding spurious emissions. The Spurious
Emissions measurement is to identify and determine the power level of out-of-band spurious emission within
the necessary channel bandwidth and modulated signal measured at the RF port of the Base Station.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 189, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

200 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

2 To set up the range table and parameters, press the Range Table soft key and then complete
the following steps:
a Press the Range soft key, and then select the range number between 1 and 20 to add
as a new or change the existing settings.
b Do the following as desired:
– Select Start Frequency, and then specify the start frequency for the selected range.
– Select Stop Frequency, and then specify the stop frequency for the selected range.
– Select Start Limit, and then specify the lower limit for Pass/Fail indication.
– Select Stop Limit, and then specify the upper limit for Pass/Fail indication.
– Select More (1/2) > Attenuation, and then specify an value in the multiple of five.
– Select More (1/2) > RBW, and then specify a RBW value.
– Select More (1/2) > VBW, and then specify a VBW value.
c Press the PREV hard key.
d Toggle the Range soft key and select On to display the selected range in the result table or
Off to hide it from the table.
3 Toggle the Measure Type soft key between Examine and Full to select the measurement type.
NOTE
The Examine mode displays only the selected range while the Full mode lets the
instrument automatically changes the selected range from one another.

4 To set the number of measurements to be averaged, complete the following steps:

a Press the Average soft key.
b Enter a value between 1 and 100, and then press the Enter soft key.
5 To move the highlighted bar in the result table to other range, complete the following steps:
a Press the Range soft key in the Measure Setup menu bar.
b Enter a value between 1 and 20, and then press the Enter soft key.

Measurement example
Figure 93 Spurious emissions measurement with LTE-FDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 202 for more
information.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 201

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Setting limit for RF tests

By default, test limits specified in the standard are set for you. You can change thresholds if you desire.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the RF Test Limits soft key.
3 Select the test item(s) and set the limit(s) depending on your selected measurement mode:

To set the limit for Select Set

Channel power Channel Power High Limit

Low Limit

Occupied bandwidth Occupied BW High Limit

Spectrum emission mask Spectrum Emission Mask (On/Off only)

ACLR ACLR (On/Off only)

Multi-ACLR Multi-ACLR (On/Off only)

Spurious emissions Spurious Emissions (On/Off only)

4 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Conducting power vs. time (frame) measurements

The Power vs. Time (Frame) measures the modulation envelope in the time domain, showing the power of
each time slot in an LTE signal.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 189, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the

202 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

synchronization with a BTS.

5 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select the number of antenna ports, toggle the MIMO soft key and select 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 030 LTE-
Advanced FDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to
2x2 by default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO
channels.
– To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft
key and select the option: Auto, 0, 1, 2, and 3. If the option 030 LTE-Advanced FDD is not
installed or if the MIMO is set to 2x2, the antenna ports 2 and 3 are disabled.
– To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or
Extended. See “Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details
by different bandwidth.

Measurement example
Figure 94 Power vs. time (frame) measurement with LTE – FDD signal analyzer

Conducting modulation measurements

Constellation
The Constellation is used to observe some aspects of modulation accuracy and can reveal certain fault
mechanisms such as I/Q amplitude imbalance or quadrature imbalance. It displays constellation diagram by
modulation types.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 189, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 203

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
NOTE
For MBMS testing, this subframe number must be neither 0 nor 5 as these subframes 0
and 5 are not available for MBMS and it must be set to the MBMS transmitted channel’s
subframe number.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 Optional. Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.
5 Optional. Toggle the CFI soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument set the number of OFDM symbols used for transmitting PDCCHs
in a subframe.
– Manual: Sets the number of OFDM symbols manually. The set of OFDM symbols that can
be used for PDCCH in a subframe is given by 0, 2, 3 or 4 in 1.4 MHz bandwidth and 1, 2, or
3 in other bandwidths.
6 Optional. Press the PHICH Ng soft key, and then select the option for the number of PHICH
groups (Ng): 1/6, 1/2, 1, 2, E-1/6, E-1/2, E-1, or E-2.
7 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select the number of antenna ports, toggle the MIMO soft key and select 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 030 LTE-
Advanced FDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to
2x2 by default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO
channels.
– To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft
key and select the option: Auto, 0, 1, 2, and 3. If the option 030 LTE-Advanced FDD is not
installed or if the MIMO is set to 2x2, the antenna ports 2 and 3 are disabled.
– To turn the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature on or off, toggle the
MBMS soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the
Subframe No with the same PMCH subframe number. If this setting is on, either PMCH or
PDSCH appears on the screen depending on the detected channel.
– To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically
or manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
– To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or
Extended. See “Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details
by different bandwidth.
– Press the PDSCH Modulation Type soft key, and then select the modulation type option:
Auto, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, E-TM3.3, E-TM3.2, E-TM3.1, E-TM2, E-TM1.2, and
E-TM1.1. If two or more modulation types are used in a frame, select Auto. If the PDSCH
uses the same modulation type in a frame or in a subframe, select a specific modulation
type to get more accurate EVM.
– To set the threshold for PDSCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDSCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.

204 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

c Press the dB soft key.

– Toggle the PDSCH Precoding soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the
PDSCH precoding.

Measurement example
Figure 95 Constellation measurement with LTE-FDD signal analyzer

Figure 96 Constellation measurement with LTE-FDD signal analyzer (MBMS On)

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for modulation tests” on page 220 for
more information.

Data channel
The Data Channel measures the constellation for the specified resource block as well as the modulation

JD700B Series User’s Guide 205

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

accuracy of each PDSCH at the specified subframe.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 189, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
NOTE
For MBMS testing, this subframe number must be neither 0 nor 5 as these subframes 0
and 5 are not available for MBMS and it must be set to the MBMS transmitted channel’s
subframe number.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 Optional. Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.
5 Optional. Toggle the CFI soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument set the number of OFDM symbols used for transmitting PDCCHs
in a subframe.
– Manual: Sets the number of OFDM symbols manually. The set of OFDM symbols that can
be used for PDCCH in a subframe is given by 0, 2, 3 or 4 in 1.4 MHz bandwidth and 1, 2, or
3 in other bandwidths.
6 Optional. Press the PHICH Ng soft key, and then select the option for the number of PHICH
groups (Ng): 1/6, 1/2, 1, 2, E-1/6, E-1/2, E-1, or E-2.
7 Toggle the Event Hold soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the event hold feature.
When enabled, the display line for the PDSCH threshold appears.
When an event occurs, the measurement is put on hold until you press the HOLD hot key.
8 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select the number of antenna ports, toggle the MIMO soft key and select 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 030 LTE-
Advanced FDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to
2x2 by default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO
channels.
– To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft
key and select the option: Auto, 0, 1, 2, and 3. If the option 030 LTE-Advanced FDD is not
installed or if the MIMO is set to 2x2, the antenna ports 2 and 3 are disabled.
– To turn the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature on or off, toggle the
MBMS soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the
Subframe No with the same PMCH subframe number. If this setting is on, either PMCH or
PDSCH appears on the screen depending on the detected channel.
– To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically
or manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
– To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or

206 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Extended. See “Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details
by different bandwidth.
– Press the PDSCH Modulation Type soft key, and then select the modulation type option:
Auto, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, E-TM3.3, E-TM3.2, E-TM3.1, E-TM2, E-TM1.2, and
E-TM1.1. If two or more modulation types are used in a frame, select Auto. If the PDSCH
uses the same modulation type in a frame or in a subframe, select a specific modulation
type to get more accurate EVM.
– To set the threshold for PDSCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDSCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the dB soft key.
– Toggle the PDSCH Precoding soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the
PDSCH precoding.

Measurement example
Figure 97 Data channel measurement with LTE-FDD signal analyzer

JD700B Series User’s Guide 207

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Figure 98 Data channel measurement with LTE-FDD signal analyzer (MBMS On)

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for modulation tests” on page 220 for
more information.

Using marker
You can use the MARKER hard key to place a marker on a resource block and display the IQ diagram for
the selected resource block.

Procedure

1 Press the MARKER hard key.

2 Press the RB Number soft key to select the resource block to be marked.
3 Enter the resource block number by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the Enter soft key.
The marker appears on the selected resource block.
5 Toggle the Marker View soft key between On and Off to display or dismiss the result of the
selected resource block.

Control channel
The Control Channel measures the constellation for the specified control channel as well as modulation
accuracy of the control channel at the specified subframe.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 189, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

208 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
NOTE
For MBMS testing, this subframe number must be neither 0 nor 5 as these subframes 0
and 5 are not available for MBMS and it must be set to the MBMS transmitted channel’s
subframe number.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 Optional. Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.
5 Optional. Toggle the CFI soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument set the number of OFDM symbols used for transmitting PDCCHs
in a subframe.
– Manual: Sets the number of OFDM symbols manually. The set of OFDM symbols that can
be used for PDCCH in a subframe is given by 0, 2, 3 or 4 in 1.4 MHz bandwidth and 1, 2, or
3 in other bandwidths.
6 Optional. Press the PHICH Ng soft key, and then select the option for the number of PHICH
groups (Ng): 1/6, 1/2, 1, 2, E-1/6, E-1/2, E-1, or E-2.
7 Toggle the EVM Detection Mode soft key and select Single or Combine as desired:
– Single: Testing on one single antenna connected to your JD700B series with a cable.
– Combine: Testing on multiple antennas connected to your JD700B series with a 2x1 or 4x1
combiner or an antenna.
8 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select the number of antenna ports, toggle the MIMO soft key and select 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 030 LTE-
Advanced FDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to
2x2 by default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO
channels.
– To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft
key and select the option: Auto, 0, 1, 2, and 3. If the option 030 LTE-Advanced FDD is not
installed or if the MIMO is set to 2x2, the antenna ports 2 and 3 are disabled.
– To turn the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature on or off, toggle the
MBMS soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the
Subframe No with the same PMCH subframe number. If this setting is on, the
measurement item “MBSFN RS” appears in the result table.
– To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically
or manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
– To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or
Extended. See “Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details
by different bandwidth.
– To set the threshold for PDCCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDCCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the dB soft key.
– Toggle the PDCCH Mode soft key and select REG to calculate EVM based on Resource
Element Group or Avg to calculate EVM after adding all the PDCCH signals from one

JD700B Series User’s Guide 209

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

subframe.

Measurement example
Figure 99 Control channel measurement with LTE-FDD signal analyzer

Figure 100 Control channel measurement with LTE-FDD signal analyzer (MBMS On)

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for modulation tests” on page 220 for
more information.

Using marker
You can use the MARKER hard key to place a marker on a control channel and display the IQ diagram for
the selected channel.

210 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the MARKER hard key.

2 Press the Channel soft key to select the channel to be displayed in the IQ diagram.
The channel P-SS is selected by default.
3 Turn the rotary knob to move the highlight from one to another in the channel summary table.
4 Toggle the Marker View soft key between On and Off to display or hide the result of the selected
channel.

Subframe
The Subframe measures the modulation accuracy of all the data and control channels at the specified
subframe (1 ms).

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 189, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
NOTE
For MBMS testing, this subframe number must be neither 0 nor 5 as these subframes 0
and 5 are not available for MBMS and it must be set to the MBMS transmitted channel’s
subframe number.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 Optional. Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.
5 Optional. Toggle the CFI soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument set the number of OFDM symbols used for transmitting PDCCHs
in a subframe.
– Manual: Sets the number of OFDM symbols manually. The set of OFDM symbols that can
be used for PDCCH in a subframe is given by 0, 2, 3 or 4 in 1.4 MHz bandwidth and 1, 2, or
3 in other bandwidths.
6 Optional. Press the PHICH Ng soft key, and then select the option for the number of PHICH
groups (Ng): 1/6, 1/2, 1, 2, E-1/6, E-1/2, E-1, or E-2.
7 Toggle the EVM Detection Mode soft key and select Single or Combine as desired:
– Single: Testing on one single antenna connected to your JD700B series with a cable.
– Combine: Testing on multiple antennas connected to your JD700B series with a 2x1 or 4x1
combiner or an antenna.
8 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select the number of antenna ports, toggle the MIMO soft key and select 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 030 LTE-

JD700B Series User’s Guide 211

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Advanced FDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to
2x2 by default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO channels.
– To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft
key and select the option: Auto, 0, 1, 2, and 3. If the option 030 LTE-Advanced FDD is not
installed or if the MIMO is set to 2x2, the antenna ports 2 and 3 are disabled.
– To turn the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature on or off, toggle the
MBMS soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the
Subframe No with the same PMCH subframe number. If this setting is on, the
measurement item “MBSFN RS” appears in the result table and either PMCH or PDSCH
appears as well depending on the detected channel.
– To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically
or manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
– To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or
Extended. See “Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details
by different bandwidth.
– Press the PDSCH Modulation Type soft key, and then select the modulation type option:
Auto, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, E-TM3.3, E-TM3.2, E-TM3.1, E-TM2, E-TM1.2, and
E-TM1.1. If two or more modulation types are used in a frame, select Auto. If the PDSCH
uses the same modulation type in a frame or in a subframe, select a specific modulation
type to get more accurate EVM.
– To set the threshold for PDSCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDSCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the dB soft key.
– To set the threshold for PDCCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDCCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the dB soft key.
– Toggle the PDCCH Mode soft key and select REG to calculate EVM based on Resource
Element Group or Avg to calculate EVM after adding all PDCCH signals from one subframe.
– Toggle the PDSCH Precoding soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the
PDSCH precoding.

Measurement example
Figure 101 Subframe measurement with LTE-FDD signal analyzer

212 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Figure 102 Subframe measurement with LTE-FDD signal analyzer (Chart On)

Figure 103 Subframe measurement with LTE-FDD signal analyzer (MBMS On)

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for modulation tests” on page 220 for
more information.

Setting display
You can use the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key to view the RE and RS power at the symbol.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Toggle the Chart soft key between On and Off to display or dismiss the chart.
If this setting is on, the MARKER hard key is activated.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 213

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Using marker
If you turn the Chart view on, you can use the MARKER hard key to place the marker at a specific symbol.

Procedure

1 Press the MARKER hard key.

2 Toggle the Marker View soft key between On and Off to display or dismiss the marker on the
chart.
3 Press the Symbol soft key to select the symbol number, to which the marker is placed.
4 Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
5 Press the Enter soft key.

Frame
The Frame measures the modulation accuracy of all the data and control channels at the frame (10 ms).

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 189, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 Optional. Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.
4 Optional. Toggle the CFI soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument set the number of OFDM symbols used for transmitting PDCCHs
in a subframe.
– Manual: Sets the number of OFDM symbols manually. The set of OFDM symbols that can
be used for PDCCH in a subframe is given by 0, 2, 3 or 4 in 1.4 MHz bandwidth and 1, 2, or
3 in other bandwidths.
5 Optional. Press the PHICH Ng soft key, and then select the option for the number of PHICH
groups (Ng): 1/6, 1/2, 1, 2, E-1/6, E-1/2, E-1, or E-2.
6 Toggle the EVM Detection Mode soft key and select Single or Combine as desired:
– Single: Testing on one single antenna connected to your JD700B series with a cable.
– Combine: Testing on multiple antennas connected to your JD700B series with a 2x1 or 4x1
combiner or an antenna.
7 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select the number of antenna ports, toggle the MIMO soft key and select 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 030 LTE-
Advanced FDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to
2x2 by default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO
channels.
– To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft

214 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

key and select the option: Auto, 0, 1, 2, and 3. If the option 030 LTE-Advanced FDD is not
installed or if the MIMO is set to 2x2, the antenna ports 2 and 3 are disabled.
– To turn the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature on or off, toggle the
MBMS soft key and select On or Off. If this setting is on, the measurement items MBSFN
RS, PMCH QPSK, PMCH 16 QAM, and PMCH 64 QAM appear in the result table.
– To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically
or manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
– To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or
Extended. See “Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details
by different bandwidth.
– Press the PDSCH Modulation Type soft key, and then select the modulation type option:
Auto, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, E-TM3.3, E-TM3.2, E-TM3.1, E-TM2, E-TM1.2, and
E-TM1.1. If two or more modulation types are used in a frame, select Auto. If the PDSCH
uses the same modulation type in a frame or in a subframe, select a specific modulation
type to get more accurate EVM.
– To set the threshold for PDSCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDSCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the dB soft key.
– To set the threshold for PDCCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDCCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the dB soft key.
– Toggle the PDCCH Mode soft key and select REG to calculate EVM based on Resource
Element Group or Avg to calculate EVM after adding up all the PDCCH signals from one
subframe.
– Toggle the PDSCH Precoding soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the
PDSCH precoding.

Measurement example
Figure 104 Frame measurement with LTE-FDD signal analyzer

JD700B Series User’s Guide 215

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Figure 105 Frame measurement with LTE-FDD signal analyzer (MBMS On)

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for modulation tests” on page 220 for
more information.

Time alignment error

In eNode-B supporting Tx Diversity transmission, signals are transmitted from two or more antennas. These
signals shall be aligned. The time alignment error in Tx diversity is specified as the delay between the
signals from two antennas at the antenna ports.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 189, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 Optional. Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.
4 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select the number of antenna ports, toggle the MIMO soft key and select 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 030 LTE-
Advanced FDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to
2x2 by default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO
channels.
– To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft

216 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

key and select the option: Auto, 0, 1, 2, and 3. If the option 030 LTE-Advanced FDD is not
installed or if the MIMO is set to 2x2, the antenna ports 2 and 3 are disabled.
– To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or
Extended. See “Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details
by different bandwidth.

Measurement example
Figure 106 Time alignment error measurement with LTE-FDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for modulation tests” on page 220 for
more information.

Data allocation map

The Data Allocation Map function represents data allocation as a frame.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 189, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 217

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
NOTE
For MBMS testing, this subframe number must be neither 0 nor 5 as these subframes 0
and 5 are not available for MBMS and it must be set to the MBMS transmitted channel’s
subframe number.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 To set the threshold for PDSCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDSCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the dB soft key.
5 Optional. Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.
6 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select the number of antenna ports, toggle the MIMO soft key and select 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 030 LTE-
Advanced FDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to
2x2 by default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO
channels.
– To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft
key and select the option: Auto, 0, 1, 2, and 3. If the option 030 LTE-Advanced FDD is not
installed or if the MIMO is set to 2x2, the antenna ports 2 and 3 are disabled.
– To turn the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature on or off, toggle the
MBMS soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the
Subframe No with the same PMCH subframe number. If this setting is on, either PMCH or
PDSCH appears on the screen depending on the detected channel.
– To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically
or manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
– To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or
Extended. See “Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details
by different bandwidth.

Setting display
You can use the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key to change the display mode to PDSCH, PMCH, or both.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Display Channel soft key.
3 Select the display mode from the choice: PDSCH, PMCH, and Both.

218 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 107 Data allocation map measurement with LTE-FDD signal analyzer

Figure 108 Data allocation map measurement with LTE-FDD signal analyzer (MBMS On)

Using marker
You can use the MARKER hard key to place the marker at a specific resource block and subframe.

Procedure

1 Press the MARKER hard key.

2 Toggle the Marker View soft key between On and Off to display or hide the marker on the chart.
3 To select the resource block number, complete the following steps:
a Press the RB Number soft key.
b Enter the resource block number to select by using the numeric keys. You can also use the
rotary knob to move the marker side by side.
c Press the Enter soft key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 219

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

4 To select the subframe block number, complete the following steps:

a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter the subframe number to select by using the numeric keys. You can also use the
rotary knob to move the marker up and down.
c Press the Enter soft key.

Setting limit for modulation tests

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Modulation Test Limits soft key to set the limits.
3 Select the test item(s) and set the limit(s) depending on your selected measurement mode:
To set the limit for Select Set

Frequency error Frequency Error High Limit, Low Limit

PDSCH error vector EVM > PDSCH EVM High Limit (QPSK)
magnitude if MBMS is off High Limit (16 QAM)
High Limit (64 QAM)

PMCH error vector magnitude EVM > PMCH EVM High Limit (QPSK)
if MBMS is on and a PMCH is High Limit (16 QAM)
detected High Limit (64 QAM)

RMS for data error vector EVM > Data EVM RMS High Limit
magnitude

Peak for data error vector EVM> Data EVM Peak High Limit
magnitude

RS error vector magnitude EVM > RS EVM High Limit

P-SS error vector magnitude EVM > P-SS EVM High Limit

S-SS error vector magnitude EVM > S-SS EVM High Limit

Downlink RS power Power > DL RS Power High Limit, Low Limit

P-SS power Power > P-SS Power High Limit, Low Limit

S-SS power Power > S-SS Power High Limit, Low Limit

PBCH power Power > PBCH Power High Limit, Low Limit

Subframe power Power > Subframe Power High Limit, Low Limit

OFDM symbol power Power > OFDM Symbol Power High Limit, Low Limit

Frame average power Power > Frame Avg Power High Limit, Low Limit

Time alignment error for MIMO Time Alignment Error > MIMO High Limit

Time alignment error for Time Alignment Error > Carrier Intra Cont
aggregation of component Aggregation Intra Non-cont
carriers (intra-band Inter Band
contiguous, intra-band non-
contiguous, and inter-band)

Time error Time Error High Limit, Low Limit

I-Q origin offset IQ Origin Offset High Limit

4 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.

220 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Performing auto measurements

Conformance test
The Conformance Test is to test if eNode-B meets some specified standards that have been developed for
verification. Its test procedure and test setups have been developed by 3GPP. Test results can be saved as
a .csv file type.

Setting limit for conformance test

You can set test limits for test item(s) in the auto measurement. Turning the test limit on for a test item
makes the test item included in the conformance test.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 To set the limit for BTS output power, complete the following steps:
a Press the BTS Output Power soft key.
b Toggle the Test Limits soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the limit.
c Press the High Limit soft key.
d Enter a value for the upper limit, and then press the dBm unit soft key.
e Press the Low Limit soft key.
f Enter a value for the lower limit, and then press the dBm unit soft key.
3 To set the limit for total power dynamic, complete the following steps:
a Press the Total Power Dynamic soft key.
b Toggle the Test Limits soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the limit.
c Press the Low Limit soft key.
d Enter a value for the lower limit, and then press the dBm unit soft key.
4 To verify signal quality, press the Signal Quality soft key, and then do the following as needed:

To set the limit for Select Set

Frequency error Frequency Error > Test Limits[E-TM2| High Limit, Low Limit
E-TM3.1|E-TM3.2|E-TM3.3]

Error vector magnitude EVM > Test Limits [E-TM2|E-TM3.1| High Limit (QPSK)
E-TM3.2|E-TM3.3] High Limit (16 QAM)
High Limit (64 QAM)

Time alignment error Time Alignment Error High Limit

RS power RS Power High Limit, Low Limit

5 To verify unwanted emissions, press the Unwanted Emissions soft key, and then do the
following as needed:
To set the limit for Select Set

Occupied bandwidth Occupied BW High Limit

Adjacent channel power ratio ACLR

Spectrum emission mask SEM Mask Type

JD700B Series User’s Guide 221

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Spurious emissions Spurious Emissions Range Table

6 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
7 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting measure setup

After setting frequency as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 189, you can continue
your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Bandwidth soft key.
3 Select the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz,
5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz.
4 Press the Sector soft key, and then select the sector option: Alpha, Beta, or Gamma.
5 To set external offset, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the dB soft key.
6 To save your settings and results, go to SAVE/LOAD > Save and then perform functions as you
desire. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.
7 Press the Run Test soft key to start to run a test.
The Auto Measure Results window appears at the end of the test.
8 When prompted on the screen, connect the cable from the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the
instrument to either Antenna Port 0 or Antenna Port 1 of the eNode-B, and then change the TM
mode on the eNode-B side.
9 Press the Continue soft key to continue testing.
10 Repeat the steps 8-9 until completion of the test.
A conformance test report appears at the end of the test.
11 Optional. To stop running the test, press the Abort soft key.

Maintenance test
The Auto Measure function of the JD700B series allows a complete signal profiling covering RF
characterization and modulation quality parameters of up to 20 different carriers, particularly useful on an
overlay architecture where base stations are transmitting in different frequencies.

Following settings are required only when you run the Auto Measure Maintenance Test on the instrument
using “Current” configuration setting. Additional settings are not required when you run Auto Measure using
a scenario generated in the PC application software, JDViewer.

Setting limit for maintenance test

You can set test limits for test item(s) in the auto measurement.

222 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the RF Test Limits soft key, and then enable test limits as desired.
3 Press the Modulation Test Limits soft key, and then enable test limits as desired.
4 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

NOTE
You can use the Allowed % Change soft key for each test item to compare two
measurement values displayed in the result table. This requires setting the Display mode
to Compare in advance.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 189, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Toggle the Configuration soft key and select the configuration option:
– Current: Lets the instrument use current frequency (single carrier) and determine pass or
fail based on the instrument s limit settings in Auto Measure.
– Scenario: Runs a test with a programmed scenario in JDViewer.
The Scenario menu becomes activated.
3 To load a scenario, press the Scenario soft key, and then select a scenario file to load.
4 Toggle the Test Time soft key and select the test time option:
– Now: Lets the instrument run a test only once.
– Schedule: Lets the instrument repeat tests as defined in the Set Timing.
The Set Timing menu becomes activated.
5 To define a schedule for an auto measurement, complete the following steps:
a Press the Set Timing soft key.
b Press the Start Time (HH:MM) soft key.
c Enter the time in the HH:MM format, and then press the Enter soft key.
d Press the Stop Time (HH:MM) soft key.
e Enter the time in the HH:MM format, and then press the Enter soft key.
f Press the Time Interval soft key.
g Enter the amount of time in minutes, and then press the Enter soft key.
6 Press the Settings soft key, and then set the following as needed:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key, and then select the nominal channel bandwidth to be
measured, from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz.
b Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.
c Press the MIMO soft key, and then select the antenna number option: 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 030 LTE-
Advanced FDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to

JD700B Series User’s Guide 223

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

2x2 by default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO
channels.
d Press the Antenna Port soft key, and then select the option: Auto, 0, 1, 2, or 3.
If the option 030 LTE-Advanced FDD is not installed or if the MIMO is set to 2x2, the
antenna ports 2 and 3 are disabled.
e Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On.
f Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the dB soft key.
g To turn the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature on or off, toggle the
MBMS soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the
Subframe No with the same PMCH subframe number.
h To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically
or manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
7 To save your settings and results, go to SAVE/LOAD > Save and then perform functions as you
desire. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.
8 Press the Run Test soft key to start to run a test.
The Auto Measure Results window appears at the end of the test.
9 To stop running the test, press the Abort soft key.
10 To change the view on the screen during the test, press the Display and then select the view
option from the following choices:
– Screen: You can view each measurement screen as the test progresses.
– Results: You can view a measurement result table as the test progresses.
– Settings: You can view a measurement setting table as the test progresses.

Setting display
After completion of the auto measurement, the screen menu changes to Trace/Display so that you can view
the results in different forms.

Procedure

1 Toggle the Display soft key and select the display option:
– Result: You can view the result table.
The Display Result menu becomes activated.
– Settings: You can view the measurement settings for the auto measurement.
2 Toggle the Display Result soft key and select the display result option:
– Full: You can view detailed measurement readings with the pass/fail indication.
– Quick: You can view only the Pass/Fail results.
– Compare: You can compare two measurement values for each test time with the
Allowed % Change setting on. You can view results vs. factory-defined or user-defined
references.
3 To view the measurement results for a different carrier, press the View Carrier soft key and then
select the carrier number to view.
4 Press the Replace Reference soft key to replace existing reference values for comparison with
new measurement data.
5 Press the Load From soft key to select the location from which references file to be loaded.

Signal performance test

Unlike the other auto measurement tests, the Signal Performance Test runs measurements continuously.

224 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Setting limit for signal performance test

You can set test limits for test item(s) in the auto measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the RF Test Limits > Channel Power soft key, and then set the limits for the channel
power. Other RF test items are not used in the signal performance test.
3 Press the Modulation Test Limits soft key, and then enable test limits as desired.
4 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 189, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.
3 Press the MIMO soft key, and then select the antenna number option: 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 030 LTE-
Advanced FDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to 2x2 by
default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO channels.
4 Press the Antenna Port soft key, and then select the option: Auto, 0, 1, 2, or 3.
If the option 030 LTE-Advanced FDD is not installed or if the MIMO is set to 2x2, the antenna
ports 2 and 3 are disabled.
5 Press the Bandwidth soft key, and then select the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured,
from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz.
6 Toggle the RF Profile soft key between On and Off to turn on or off the RF profiling such as
channel power and subframe frequency error.
7 Toggle the Modulation Profile soft key between On and Off to turn on or off the modulation
profiling such as P-SS, S-SS, Data - QPSK, Data – 16 QAM, and Data – 64 QAM.
8 Toggle the MIMO Profile soft key between On and Off to turn on or off the MIMO profiling such
as TX1 - RS0, TX2 - RS1, and time alignment error.
9 Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On to set the external offset value.
10 To save your settings and results, go to SAVE/LOAD > Save and then perform functions as you
desire. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

DAS test
The Distributed Antenna System (DAS) testing enables you to check the degradation of performance in the
signal transmission from a radio band to antennas distributed from it. You can save measurement values at
both the radio band and antennas and then compare results with percentage of changes. You can also save
test results in the .csv file format for ease of analysis.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 225

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Settings soft key and then set the following;
a Press the Bandwidth soft key and then select the nominal channel bandwidth to be
measured from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz.
b Press the MIMO soft key, and then select the antenna number option: 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 030 LTE-
Advanced FDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to
2x2 by default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO
channels.
c Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.
d Press the Antenna Port soft key, and then select the option: Auto, 0, 1, 2, or 3.
If the option 030 LTE-Advanced FDD is not installed or if the MIMO is set to 2x2, the
antenna ports 2 and 3 are disabled.
e Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On to set the external offset value.
f To turn the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature on or off, toggle the
MBMS soft key and select On or Off.
g To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically
or manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
3 To save your settings, go to SAVE/LOAD > Save > Save Setup and then perform functions as
you desire. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.
4 Press the Continue soft key to do the reference test first or press the Skip Reference Test soft
key if you already saved test results from the radio band under test.
5 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key and then set the frequency to be measured. See “Setting
frequency” on page 254 for more information.
6 Press the PREV hard key.
7 Press the Limit soft key and then set the limits and allowed percentage change for each test
item. See “Maintenance test” on page 290 for more information on setting limits.
8 Keep pressing the PREV hard key until you see the Run Test soft key.
9 Press the Run Test soft key.
The instrument runs specified tests to gather reference measurement values. The measurement
table appears when the reference test is done.
10 Press the Continue soft key to run the testing on an antenna (Ant 1).
11 Optional. To change the settings such as External Offset, press the Settings and then change
the settings as needed.
12 Press the Continue soft key.
The instrument runs the testing on Ant 1. The Ant 1 tab appears with the updated result table
when the test is done.
13 To run the testing on the next antenna (Ant 2), press the Run Test soft key and then repeat the
steps 11-12. You can do the testing on up to 10 distributed antennas for one radio band.
14 To view test results for each antenna, press the Select Antenna soft key and then select the
antenna tab number to display on the screen.
15 Optional. Press the Delete Test soft key to delete the selected antenna tab.
16 Optional. Press the Retest Reference soft key to obtain reference measurement values again.
17 Optional. To save your measurement results, go to SAVE/LOAD > Save and then perform
functions as you desire. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

226 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Measurement Example
Figure 109 DAS measurement with LTE-FDD signal analyzer

Performing power statistics CCDF measurements

The Power Statistics Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function (CCDF) measurement characterizes
the power statistics of the input signal. It provides PAR (Peak to Average power Ratio) versus different
probabilities.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 189, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the CCDF Length soft key to set the length of the CCDF.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 100 by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
4 Press the Enter soft key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 227

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 110 CCDF measurement with LTE-FDD signal analyzer

Performing carrier aggregation measurements

Carrier aggregation enables a maximum of five multiple LTE carriers to be used together in order to provide
high data rate required for LTE-Advanced. Component carriers to be aggregated can be intra-band
contiguous, intra-band non-contiguous, or inter-band. The JD700B series provides carrier aggregation
measurements supporting for all the different modes with carrier aggregation bands added to the channel
standard. This functionality is activated if the license for the option 030 LTE-Advanced FDD is installed.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 189, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To configure parameters for up to 5 component carriers, complete the following steps:
a Press the CA Configuration soft key.
The component carrier configuration window appears.
b Press the CA Range soft key.
c Enter the number of the component carrier to be set between one and five.
d Press the Enter soft key.
e Toggle the Turn On soft key and select On to set parameters and view the results for the
selected component carrier on the screen or Off to turn it off.
f Set the following parameters as needed:
– Center Frequency, Channel, Bandwidth, Cell ID, CFI, PHICH Ng, Antenna Port,
MBMS On/Off, Cyclic Prefix, and PDSCH Modulation Type
g To set more component carriers, repeat the steps c-f.

228 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

3 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key again

4 Toggle the EVM Detection Mode soft key and select Single or Combine as desired:
– Single: Testing on one single antenna connected to your JD700B series with a cable.
– Combine: Testing on multiple antennas connected to your JD700B series with a 2x1 or 4x1
combiner or an antenna.
5 To select the subframe number to be measured, do one of the following:
– If the EVM Detection Mode is set to Single, press the Subframe No soft key and then set
the subframe number.
NOTE
For MBMS testing, this subframe number must be neither 0 nor 5 as these subframes 0
and 5 are not available for MBMS and it must be set to the MBMS transmitted channel’s
subframe number.
– If the EVM Detection Mode is set to Combine, toggle the Subframe No soft key, and then
select 0 or 5.
6 To set the threshold for PDSCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDSCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the dB soft key.
7 Toggle the PDSCH Precoding soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the PDSCH
precoding.
8 To select the number of antenna ports, toggle the MIMO soft key and select 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 030 LTE-
Advanced FDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to 2x2 by
default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO channels.

Setting display
You can use the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key to select modulation analysis or spectrum analysis.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Toggle the Display soft key and select MA for modulation analysis or SA for spectrum analysis.
The screen changes according to the selected option.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 229

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 111 Carrier aggregation measurement with LTE-FDD signal analyzer (MA)

Figure 112 Carrier aggregation measurement with LTE-FDD signal analyzer (SA)

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for modulation tests” on page 220 for
more information.

Using marker
You can use the MARKER hard key to place the marker at a specific channel.

Procedure

1 Press the MARKER hard key.

2 Toggle the IQ Diagram soft key between On and Off to display or dismiss data on the IQ

230 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

diagram for each component carrier.

3 Press the Channel soft key to select the channel to be displayed on the IQ diagram.
4 Use the rotary knob to move and select an item under EVM.

Conducting LTE-FDD OTA measurements

The FDD LTE Over The Air (OTA) measurement has Channel Scanner, ID Scanner, Multipath Profile,
Datagram, and Control Channel screens. The ID Scanner displays key parameters such as RSRP, RSRQ,
RS-SINR, and S-SS RSSI. The Multipath Profile enables you to determine RF environmental conditions of
testing area. The OTA Control Channel provides summary of all control channels including RS power
variation over time.

Channel scanner
The Channel Scanner is a radio receiver that can automatically tune or scan two or more discrete
frequencies and multi-channels, indicating when it finds a signal on one of them and then continuing
scanning when that frequency goes silent.

Setting channel/frequency

Procedure

To set the channels to be scanned:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Channel.
3 Press the Index soft key, and then enter an index number between one and six by turning the
rotary knob or using the numeric keys.
4 To select the standard channel, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Std soft key. The standard channel window appears.
See “Appendix C – Band, frequency & channel standard” on page 664 for more information.
b Highlight the band to be measured by using the rotary knob, the arrow keys, or the
Page Up/Page Down soft keys.
c Press the Select soft key or the rotary knob to confirm the selection.
5 To set the channel number for the selected index, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Number soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 The instrument displays a corresponding center frequency for the channel number.
7 To set the integration bandwidth for the selected index, complete the following steps:
a Press the Integration Bandwidth soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
8 To add more channels to be scanned, repeat steps 3-6.
9 Press the ESC hard key to dismiss the channel list window and view the scanning result.

To set the frequencies to be scanned:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
3 Press the Index soft key, and then enter an index number between one and six by turning the
rotary knob or using the numeric keys.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 231

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

4 To set the center frequency for the selected index, complete the following steps:
a Press the Center Frequency soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
5 To set the integration bandwidth for the selected index, complete the following steps:
a Press the Integration Bandwidth soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
6 To add more channels to be scanned, repeat steps 3-5.
7 Press the ESC hard key to dismiss the channel list window and view the scanning result.

Setting number of antenna ports

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Toggle the MIMO soft key and select 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 030 LTE-
Advanced FDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to 2x2 by
default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO channels.

Measurement example
Figure 113 Channel scanner measurement with LTE-FDD OTA signal analyzer

ID scanner
The LTE mobile receives signals from multiple base stations that all of these signals share the same
spectrum and are present at the same time. Each base station has unique scrambling code assigned to the
particular base station and it differentiates its signal from other base stations in the area.

The ID Scanner shows key parameters such as RSRP (Reference Signal Received Power) and RSRQ
(Reference Signal Received Quality) that predict the downlink coverage quickly.
n RSRPs from entire cells help to rank between the different cells as input for handover and cell

232 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

reselection decisions.
n RSRQ provides additional information when RSRP is not sufficient to make a reliable handover or
cell reselection decision.

All of the parameters for OTA ID scanner can be plotted on map data such as Google Maps and Google
Earth by using JDViewer.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 189, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select the number of antenna ports, toggle the MIMO soft key and select 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 030 LTE-
Advanced FDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to
2x2 by default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO
channels.
– To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or
Extended. See “Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details
by different bandwidth.
4 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 114 ID scanner measurement with LTE-FDD OTA signal analyzer

JD700B Series User’s Guide 233

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Multipath profile
The Multipath Profile enables you to determine RF environmental conditions of testing area. It indicates the
amount of power of the dominant pilot signal that is dispersed outside the main correlation peak due to
multipath echoes that are expressed in dB. This value should be very small ideally.

The multipath profile is the result of portions of the original broadcast signal arriving at the receiving antenna
out of phase. This can be caused by the signal being reflected off objects such as buildings, or being
refracted through the atmosphere differently from the main signal.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 189, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 Toggle the Display soft key and select RS or Sync.
The RS Window soft key becomes activated if RS is selected.
4 Press the RS Window soft key, if RS is selected, and then select the RS window option: 2 µs,
4 µs, or 8 µs.
5 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select the number of antenna ports, toggle the MIMO soft key and select 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 030 LTE-
Advanced FDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to
2x2 by default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO
channels.
– To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or
Extended. See “Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details
by different bandwidth.
6 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

234 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 115 Multipath profile measurement with LTE-FDD OTA signal analyzer

Control channel
DL RS power is the resource element power of Downlink Reference Symbol. The absolute DL RS power is
indicated on the BCH. The absolute accuracy is defined as the maximum deviation between the DL RS
power indicated on the BCH and the DL RS power at the BS antenna connector.

The OTA Control Channel provides summary of all control channels including RS power trend over time.
GPS coordinates (latitude and longitude) will be displayed on the screen if a GPS antenna is connected and
locked to the GPS satellites.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 189, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
NOTE
For MBMS testing, this subframe number must be neither 0 nor 5 as these subframes 0
and 5 are not available for MBMS and it must be set to the MBMS transmitted channel’s
subframe number.
c Press the Enter soft key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 235

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

4 Optional. Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.
5 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select the number of antenna ports, toggle the MIMO soft key and select 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 030 LTE-
Advanced FDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to
2x2 by default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO
channels.
– To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft
key and select the option: Auto, 0, 1, 2, and 3. If the option 030 LTE-Advanced FDD is not
installed or if the MIMO is set to 2x2, the antenna ports 2 and 3 are disabled.
– To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or
Extended. See “Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details
by different bandwidth.
– To turn the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature on or off, toggle the
MBMS soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the
Subframe No with the same PMCH subframe number. If this setting is on, the
measurement item “MBSFN RS” appears in the result table.
– To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically
or manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
6 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting limit for OTA control channel

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Select the test item(s) and set the limit(s) as needed:
To set the limit for Select Set

P-SS error vector magnitude P-SS EVM High Limit

S-SS error vector magnitude S-SS EVM High Limit

RS error vector magnitude RS EVM > RS0 EVM High Limit

RS EVM > RS1 EVM
RS EVM > RS2 EVM
RS EVM > RS3 EVM

Frequency error Frequency Error High Limit, Low Limit

Time error Time Error High Limit, Low Limit

Time alignment error Time Alignment Error High Limit

3 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting display
You can use the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key to select the display option.

236 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Toggle the Display soft key and select Power or EVM.
The screen changes according to the selected option.

Measurement example
Figure 116 Control channel measurement with LTE-FDD OTA signal analyzer

Datagram
The OTA Datagram is a time-varying spectral representation that shows how the power of a signal varies
with time. The power allocated to the specific resource block will be represented with an amplitude axis (in
dBm) and the waterfall diagram will show the trend of past resource block power over certain period. Using a
marker function facilitates analysis of accumulated resource block power for data utilization.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 189, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 237

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

4 Optional. Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.
5 Optional. To set the threshold for PDSCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDSCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the dB soft key.
6 To set the time cursor at a specific position, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Time Cursor soft key and select On.
b Turn the rotary knob to move the time cursor. You can also enter a value and then press the
Enter soft key.
NOTE
Enabling the time cursor puts the measurement on hold and you can make post-
processing analysis for each measurement over time using the time cursor.
7 To start a new measurement, press the Reset/Restart soft key.
8 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select the number of antenna ports, toggle the MIMO soft key and select 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 030 LTE-
Advanced FDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to
2x2 by default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO
channels.
– To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or
Extended. See “Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details
by different bandwidth.
9 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 117 Datagram measurement with LTE-FDD signal analyzer

Route map
The JD700B Series provides the Route Map function that allows you to collect data of points in an indoor or

238 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

outdoor environment and track the received signals and coverage of RF transmitters by plotting data real
time directly on top of a loaded floor plan or a map.

The JD700B Series also supports the RAN-IL (Interference Location) feature that enables you to overlay
user experience data obtained through Viavi’s ariesoGEO on your base map to help you troubleshoot
problems easily and quickly using your instrument. You can generate raster data files on the ariesoGEO
application and load them on your instrument.

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 If required, connect a GPS receiver to your JD700B series for outdoor mapping.
Indoor mapping does not necessarily need a GPS antenna.
2 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 189.
3 To load your map file, complete the following steps:
a Plug in your USB drive that has a floor map or .mcf file type created in JDMapCreator. If
the JDMapCreator application on your computer is connected to the instrument via USB or
LAN, you can send a map file with a single layer to the instrument directly by using the
Send to EQP menu in JDMapCreator.
NOTE
The JDMapCreator converts and resizes any scanned floor plan or layout to fit onto your
instrument’s display. JDMapCreator 1.2.0 or later can save a multiple-layered map,
providing x1, x2, and x4 views, as a sizable map file so that you can zoom in and out
after loading it.
b Press SAVE/LOAD hot key, and then select Load > Load Map. See “Using load” on page
35 for more information.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
5 Press the Plot Point soft key, and then select the plot point option from the following choices:
– To collect data/plot points automatically as you move around in a vehicle or outside, press
the GPS soft key and then toggle the Screen Mode soft key between Map and Full.
NOTE
With the Map setting, you can view only the collected points that can be seen within the
boundary of the loaded map. If a point is off the map, the instrument displays an arrow to
indicate the direction of the current location on the map and the distance from the center
to the location at the top of the screen.

With the Full setting, you can view all the collected points of the route without the loaded
map.
– To collect data/plot points manually without a GPS antenna in an indoor environment, press
the Position soft key.
6 Press the Plot Item soft key, and then select the measurement option: RSRP, RSRQ, RS-SINR,
S-SS RSSI, P-SS Power, S-SS Power, or S-SS Ec/Io.
NOTE
The instrument collects the strongest Cell ID’s data to plot points.
7 Press the Bandwidth soft key to set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, and then
select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and
20 MHz.
8 Toggle the Plot soft key and select Start to start plotting.
9 Touch directly on the screen or press the ENTER hard key to collect data and plot points on the
loaded map for the Position setting.
NOTE
For the Position setting, you can change the direction of the route with the arrow keys
and the distance with the rotary knob.
10 Toggle the Plot soft key and select Stop to stop plotting.
11 Press the SAVE/LOAD hot key to save the result.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 239

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

NOTE
The instrument does not automatically save the collected data. It is recommended that
you save the result. Otherwise, you will lose all the collected data.

Setting limit for route map

You can set the thresholds for each test item.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Select the plot items and set the limits as needed:
To set the limit for Select Set

RSRP RSRP Excellent, Very Good, Good, Fair, Poor (dBm)

RSRQ RSRQ Good, Fair, Poor (dB)

RS-SINR RS-SINR Good, Fair, Poor (dB)

S-SS RSSI S-SS RSSI Excellent, Very Good, Good, Fair, Poor (dBm)

P-SS Power P-SS Power Excellent, Very Good, Good, Fair, Poor (dBm)

S-SS Power S-SS Power Excellent, Very Good, Good, Fair, Poor (dBm)

S-SS Ec/Io S-SS Ec/Io Good, Fair, Poor (dB)

3 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 118 Route map measurement (RSRP) with LTE-FDD OTA signal analyzer

240 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Figure 119 Route map measurement (RSRQ) with LTE-FDD OTA signal analyzer

Figure 120 Route map measurement (RS-SINR) with LTE-FDD OTA signal analyzer

JD700B Series User’s Guide 241

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Figure 121 Route map measurement (S-SS RSSI) with LTE-FDD OTA signal analyzer

Figure 122 Route map measurement (P-SS Power) with LTE-FDD OTA signal analyzer

242 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Figure 123 Route map measurement (S-SS Power) with LTE-FDD OTA signal analyzer

Figure 124 Route map measurement (S-SS Ec/Io) with LTE-FDD OTA signal analyzer

Controlling a map
If you have loaded a sizable map that was created in JDMapCreator 1.2.0 or later, you can use the Map
Control feature that enables you to zoom into the map and view a specific area of interest in detail.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Map Control soft key. This key is active only when you have loaded a sizable map.
3 Do one of the following:
– To zoom into an area of interest directly, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Zoom to soft key and select Area.
The black rectangle appears on the map.
b Press the Zoom In and Zoom Out soft keys, as you need, to decrease and increase
the selected area.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 243

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

c Move the rectangle by using the four arrow keys, as you need, to place it in a specific
area of interest.
d Press the center of the rotary knob to zoom into the selected area. You can also press
the Zoom to soft key again to zoom into the selected area.
– To zoom into the center or zoom out from the center, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Zoom to soft key and select Center.
b Press the Zoom In and Zoom Out soft keys, as you need, to zoom in and zoom out.
c Move the zoomed-in area by using the four arrow keys, as you need.
4 To set the location mode, toggle the Location Mode soft key between Auto and Manual and
select the one you desire.
– Auto: The instrument compares the coordinates of the displayed map with recevied GPS
information. If your current location goes out of the displayed area and enters into the next
zoomed-in section within the base map, the map display changes automatically to the next
section in which your current position is.
– Manual: The map display of the zoomed-in area remains unchanged even if your current
location goes out of the displayed area. You can change the displayed area manually by
using the arrow keys.

Loading and displaying raster data

If you have a set of raster data files generated through the ariesoGEO application, you can load and overlay
the data on your base map to help you check the signal quality and the strength of interferences while
driving toward the area of interest.

Procedure

1 Copy a set of raster data files into your USB memory drive, including the following:
– ASCII: .tab, .asc, and .clr files
– BIL: .tab,.hdr, .bil, and .clr files
NOTE
The .tab file type is a geospatial vector data format used in many geographic
information systems. The color file (.clr) is an optional file, but the image will be
displayed as a grayscale image without it. The size of the raster map must be
1024 x 1024 or smaller.
2 Plug in the USB memory drive to your instrument.
3 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.
4 Press the Load Raster Map soft key.
The file explorer window appears.
5 Navigate to the raster file (.tab) you want to open, and then press the Load soft key.
The raster image appears on top of your base map as shown in Figure 125.
NOTE
If the area of the loaded raster data is not within the boundary of the base map, you will
not see the raster image on the screen.
6 To select the display option, complete the following steps:
a Press the Display Options soft key.
b Select the option you desire from the choices: On, Off, and Blink.
7 To adjust the transparency level of the image, complete the following steps:
a Press the Transparency soft key.
b Enter a value between 0 for opaque and 100 for clear.
c Press the Enter soft key.

244 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

Figure 125 Raster image overlaid on the base map with LTE-FDD OTA signal analyzer

Performing RAN performance testing

The JD700B series provides the optional feature that lets you conduct correlated uplink and downlink testing
with your instrument connected to your mobile device via Bluetooth. The RANAdvisor TrueSite application
installed on your smartphone collects data and transfers uplink data based on your parameter settings and
then your instrument consolidates the data into the measurement results and displays them as performance
indicators. It helps you troubleshoot a problem and identify the cause of the problem fast.

To perform this testing, you need both of these installed: the license for the option 014 LTE-FDD RAN
Performance Indicator on your instrument and the RANAdvisor TrueSite app with the license on your
smartphone.

Preparing your smartphone for remote control via Bluetooth

To set up a Bluetooth connection and enable data collection with remote control properly, you need to pair
your instrument with your smartphone and set the app’s local Bluetooth control option to Slave once at the
beginning.

Procedure

1 Connect a Bluetooth adapter to the USB Host port and an Omni antenna to the RF In port of your
CellAdvisor instrument.
The instrument detects the adapter and turns on its Bluetooth automatically.
2 Make your smartphone visible to your instrument by doing the following steps:
a On your smartphone, turn on Bluetooth.
b Check the checkbox for Visible to all nearby Bluetooth devices to enable this option.
3 Pair with your smartphone by doing the following steps:
a On your instrument, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
b Press the Bluetooth Connect soft key.
c Press the Scan soft key.
The instrument lists detected Bluetooth devices with their MAC address and status.
d Highlight your mobile device from the list by touching on the screen.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 245

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

e Press the Pair soft key.

The pairing dialog box appears on your smartphone.
f On your smartphone, enter 0000 and then tap the OK button.
If pairing is successful, the status of your device on the list changes to “Paired”.
4 Make sure to set your smartphone as a slave by completing the following steps:
a On your smartphone, open the RANAdvisor TrueSite icon.
b Go to Settings > General.
c Tap the Automation Control Mode menu under Automation Control Options.
d Select the Local Bluetooth Control option.
e Tap Slave.
The application restart dialog box appears.
f Tap Continue.
The application closes itself.
NOTE
It is very important for you to set the local Bluetooth control option to Slave on the
RANAdvisor TrueSite app in order to give your instrument a control to collect necessary
data from the app over Bluetooth successfully.

Setting parameters on RANAdvisor TrueSiteTM

To specify uplink measurement data that will be transferred to your instrument, you need to set map display
parameters of your choice on the RANAdvisor TrueSite application.

Procedure

1 After you have paired and set your smartphone as a slave, open the RANAdvisor TrueSite icon
on your device again.
2 Tap the (+) button at the bottom of the Home screen.
The Main Screen appears.
3 Tap the Customization menu.
The Choose Operation menu box appears.
4 Select Map Display Parameters > LTE Serving and Neighbor Parameters.
5 Make sure to check the checkbox for the following two mandatory parameters:
– Serving E-ARFCN
– Serving Physical Cell-ID
NOTE
It is very important for you to select these two parameters to identify the Uplink Channel
Number, Cell ID, Group ID, and Sector ID.
6 Select other parameters up to six from the list of parameters supported by the CellAdvisor
instrument. See “Appendix L – Supported map display parameters” on page 689 for more
information.
NOTE
As the RANAdvisor TrueSite app can transfer data of up to eight parameters at a time, it
limits you to select eight parameters in total: two compulsories and six electives. After you
have selected all eight parameters, the app blocks any further selection. In this case, you
need to uncheck any selected optional parameters in order to enable other optional
parameters.
7 Tap the OK button and then the Back key to return to the Home Screen.

Performing RAN performance testing

After you have set the local Bluetooth control option and selected desired parameters on the app, you need
to connect your instrument to your smartphone via Bluetooth to enable data collection from RANAdvisor
TrueSite so that you can view consolidated measurement results on your instrument and save results as a

246 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

file.

Procedure

1 Make sure to have the RANAdvisor TrueSite app opened on your device.
2 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key on your instrument.
3 Press the Bluetooth Connect soft key.
4 Highlight your paired smartphone to connect from the list.
5 Press the Connect soft key.
The connected device information appears above the RAN Performance Indicator chart to
indicate a successful connection.
6 The instrument automatically sets the correlated downlink channel number for the received uplink
channel number and displays measurement results as like Figure 126. Observe the consolidated
measurement results on the screen for your troubleshooting.

NOTE
If the Cell ID of the uplink channel is not identical to the one of the downlink channel, the
instrument displays “---“ for the parameters to indicate invalid measurement results.
7 If you want to see measurement results for other parameters, select new parameters on the
TM
RANAdvisor TrueSite app. See “Setting parameters on RANAdvisor TrueSite ” on page 246.
8 Optional. To save your settings and results, go to SAVE/LOAD > Save and then perform
functions as you desire. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 126 RAN performance indicator with LTE-FDD signal analyzer

Setting performance score level

To analyze your measurement data easily with color codes, you can use the limit feature and set a
performance score level for each measurement parameter.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 To analyze the quality of user experience, do the following as needed:

JD700B Series User’s Guide 247

Chapter 8 Using LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer

To set the level for Select Set

Data throughput Data Throughput Good, Bad (kbps)

Channel quality indicator CQI Good, Bad

Modulation type Modulation Type (On/Off only)

3 To check the performance of eNode-B, do the following as needed:

To set the level for Select Set

Reference signal received power RSRP Good, Bad (dBm)

Reference signal received RSRQ Good, Bad (dB)

quality

Signal to interference and noise SINR Good, Bad (dB)

ratio

Error vector magnitude More (1/2) > EVM Good, Bad (%)

Time alignment error More (1/2) > Time Alignment Error Good, Bad (ns)

Frequency error More (1/2) > Frequency Error Good, Bad (ppm)

248 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 9

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

This chapter provides instructions for using the LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer (option 029) and LTE-Advanced
TDD Analyzer (option 031) with the LTE-TDD OTA Analyzer (option 049) and the LTE-TDD RAN
Performance Indicator (option 015). Topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

n Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 250

n Display overview ..................................................................................................................... 251
n Connecting a cable.................................................................................................................. 251
n Selecting measurement mode ................................................................................................ 253
n Configuring test parameters .................................................................................................... 253
n Conducting spectrum measurements ..................................................................................... 258
n Conducting RF measurements ............................................................................................... 260
n Conducting power vs. time measurements ............................................................................. 268
n Conducting modulation measurements................................................................................... 271
n Performing auto measurements .............................................................................................. 288
n Performing power statistics CCDF measurements ................................................................. 294
n Performing carrier aggregation measurements ...................................................................... 295
n Conducting LTE-TDD OTA measurements ............................................................................. 298
n Performing RAN performance testing ..................................................................................... 312
Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Introduction
The LTE (Long-Term Evolution) Signal Analyzer of the JD700B series performs power and spectrum
measurements as well as modulation analysis to test the proper transmitter performance of TDD LTE
systems. It performs conformance testing according to the following standards providing a simple Pass/Fail
indication on each test.

n 3GPP TS 36.104. Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Base Station (BS) Radio
Transmission and Reception
n 3GPP TS 36.141. Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Base Station (BS)
Conformance Testing
n 3GPP TS 36.211. Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical Channels and
Modulation
n 3GPP TS 36.212. Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Multiplexing and Channel
Coding
n 3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0. Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical Layer
Procedures

This instrument provides the following measurement tools for TDD LTE system:

n Spectrum Analysis
n RF Analysis
- Channel Power
- Occupied Bandwidth
- Spectrum Emission Mask
- Adjacent Channel Leakage power Ratio (ACLR)
- Multi-ACLR
- Spurious Emissions
n Power vs. Time: Slot and Frame
n Modulation Analysis
- Constellation
- Data Channel
- Control Channel
- Subframe
- Time Alignment Error
- Data Allocation Map
n Auto Measure
- Conformance Test
- Maintenance Test
- Signal Performance Test
- DAS Test
n Power Statistics CCDF
n Carrier Aggregation
n Over The Air (OTA)

250 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

- Channel Scanner
- ID Scanner
- Multipath Profile
- Control Channel
- Datagram
- Route Map
n RAN Performance Indicator

Display overview
Figure 127 provides descriptions for each segment of the measurement screen.

Figure 127 LTE-TDD signal analyzer measurement screen

Connecting a cable
Direct connection
Procedure

1 Connect the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B series and the Power amplifier output
port of BTS.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 251

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Figure 128 Direct connection

JD785B/JD745B JD788B/JD748B

Indirect connection
Procedure

1 Connect the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B series and the monitor (test) port of
BTS.

Figure 129 Indirect connection

JD785B/JD745B JD788B/JD748B

CAUTION
The maximum power for the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port is +25 dBm (0.316 W) for
JD780B series and +20 dBm (0.1 W) for JD740B series. If the level of the input signal to
be measured is greater than this, use a High Power Attenuator to prevent damage
when you directly connect the signal to the instrument or connect the signal from the
coupling port of a directional coupler.

Over the air (OTA)

Procedure

1 Connect an Omni/directional RF antenna to the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B

series.
2 Connect a GPS antenna to the GPS port of the JD700B series.

252 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Figure 130 OTA connection

JD785B/JD745B JD788B/JD748B

CAUTION
If the input signal level to be measured is less than 0 dBm, set 0 dB attenuation or turn on
the preamp to have better dynamic range for the OTA testing.

Selecting measurement mode

Procedure

1 Press the MODE hard key.

2 Press the Signal Analyzer soft key.
3 Press the LTE - TDD soft key. The Spectrum mode is set by default.
4 Press the MEASURE hot key, and then select the measurement mode option from the following
choices:
– Spectrum
– RF Analysis > Channel Power, Occupied BW, Spectrum Emission Mask, ACLR,
Multi-ACLR, or Spurious Emissions
– Power vs Time > Power vs Time (Slot) or Power vs Time (Frame)
– Modulation Analysis > Constellation, Data Channel, Control Channel, Subframe,
Time Alignement Error, or Data Allocation Map
– Auto Measure > Conformance Test, Maintenance Test, Signal Perfomance,
or DAS Test
– Power Statistics CCDF
– More (1/2) > Carrier Aggregation
– More (1/2) > OTA > Channel Scanner, ID Scanner, Multipath Profile, Control Channel,
Datagram, or Route Map
– More (1/2) > RAN Performance Indicator

NOTE
The Carrier Aggregation soft key is activated if the license for the option 031 LTE-
Advanced TDD is installed and so does the RAN Performance Indicator for the option
015 LTE-TDD RAN Performance Indicator.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 253

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Configuring test parameters

Setting frequency
You can set the frequency with either frequency or channel number. If a frequency to be set matches to the
frequency corresponding to the selected channel standard, the instrument calculates its channel number
and updates the screen with it automatically.

Procedure

To set the center frequency:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
3 Press the Center Frequency soft key.
4 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
5 Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
6 To define the amount of frequency increment for the rotary knob, complete the following steps:
a Press the Frequency Step soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.

To set the channel number:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Channel.

NOTE
Selecting Channel sets the standard channel to Band Global automatically so that you
can set the Channel Number without choosing a standard channel band from the list.
3 Press the Channel Number soft key.
4 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
5 Press the Enter soft key.
The instrument automatically displays the corresponding center frequency value for the selected
channel number.
6 To define the amount of channel increment for the rotary knob, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Step soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.

NOTE
This frequency setting is not used in the Multi-ACLR and Spurious Emissions modes.

Setting amplitude
Reference level and attenuation
You can set the reference and attenuation levels automatically or manually to optimize the display of the
traces measured, as you desire.

Procedure

To automatically set the reference and attenuation level:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Press the Auto Scale soft key.

254 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Each time you press this key, both of the Y-axis scale and input attenuation level change to be
optimized with some margin.

To set the reference or attenuation level manually:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 To set the maximum reference value on the Y-axis manually, complete the following steps:
a Press the Reference Level soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys or the rotary knob with 10 dB increments.
c Press the unit soft key or the ENTER hard key.
This unit key name changes according to the setting in the Units menu.
NOTE
In the measurements such as Control Channel and Subframe, you can select the
reference option between Relative and Absolute instead.
3 To set the attenuation option, select one from the following choices:
– To set the input attenuator’s level automatically, select Attenuation > Auto.
NOTE
It is recommended that you set the Attenuation to Auto in most situations so that the
level of the input attenuator can be set automatically according to your input signal level.
– To set the input attenuation manually up to 55 dB for JD780B series or 50 dB for JD740B
series to optimize S/N, complete the following steps:
a Select Attenuation > Manual.
b Press the Attenuation Value soft key to set the level.
c Enter a value in fives by using the numeric keys.
d Press the dB soft key or the ENTER hard key.
– To couple the input attenuator’s level with your reference level setting, select Attenuation >
Couple.
As you increase the reference setting, the attenuation level also increases acoordingly.

Optional. To change the scale unit:

1 Select More (1/2) > Units.
2 Select the unit of the display scale: dBm, dBV, dBmV, dBµV, V, or W.
The scale unit on the screen changes accordingly.
NOTE
This Units menu is available in the Spectrum and RF Analysis modes.

Scale per division

You can use the Scale/Div feature available for the spectrum and RF analysis. It represents the value of one
division on the horizontal scale. The default setting is 10 dB per division and the maximum value can be set
up to 20 dB.

Procedure

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Select More (1/2) > Scale/Div.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 20 by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.

Pre-amplifier
You can turn the internal pre-amplifier on to correct and compensate for the gain of the preamp so that
amplitude readings show the value at the input connector.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 255

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Toggle the Preamp soft key and select On or Off as needed.

NOTE
You can turn the Preamp on when the input attenuation range is from 0 dB to 10 dB. If
the attenuation value is manually set to greater than 10 dB, the instrument will
automatically turn off the pre-amplifier to display low-level signal properly on the chart.

External offset
You can turn the External Offset on and manually set the external offset value. An offset consists of a cable
loss and a user offset and the measurement result shows the value reflecting both offset values. When the
external offset value is set at 40 dB in the Spectrum mode, the measurement result compensates 40 dB at
both the Spectrum Analyzer and Signal Analyzer modes.

Procedure

To set the external offset:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On.
3 Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.

To turn the external offset off:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Toggle the External Offset soft key and select Off.

Setting average
You can set the number of measurements to be averaged for the trace presentation. A maximum of 100
times of averaging can be set. When the averaging reaches to your setting, a new measurement value
replaces the measurement value in sequence from the earliest.

Procedure

1 Press the BW/AVG hard key.

2 Press the Average soft key.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 100 as needed by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the Enter soft key.

Setting sweep mode

The default setting is Continue to sweep continuously for most on-going measurements. If you want to hold
the measurement or get a single sweep, you can change the sweep mode.

Procedure

To select the single sweep mode:

1 Press the SWEEP hot key.
2 Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Single. You can also use the HOLD hot key.

256 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

The letter HOLD in red appears and the sweeping is paused.

3 Optional. Press the Sweep Once soft key to get a new measurement.

To return to the continuous sweep mode:

1 Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Continue. You can also use the HOLD hot key.
The letter HOLD in red disappears and the sweeping resumes.

Setting trigger source

You can set the trigger source option for your measurements.

Procedure

1 Press the TRIGGER hot key.

2 Select the trigger source option from the choices: Internal, External, and GPS.

Setting external clock

To enhance the reliability of modulation analysis measurements the JD700B series must be synchronized
with a base station. When an external clock is not supplied, the instrument works with its built-in internal
high-accuracy time base and some measurement results may exhibit inaccurate values. Therefore, it is
highly recommended that you use the same reference clock as the signal source. You can use the
TRIGGER hot key to set the external clock.

Figure 131 Connection ports for external reference clock

Procedure

1 Connect an external reference or a GPS antenna to the JD700B series.

2 Press the SYSTEM hot key.
3 Press the Freq Reference soft key, and then select the reference option: Internal, External 10
MHz, External 13 MHz, External 15 MHz, or GPS.

Table 13 External reference indicators

Type Indicator Description

Internal (green) The green INT icon indicates that the instrument uses the built-in internal
time base.

External (green) The green EXT icon indicates that an external reference is connected and
locked and that the instrument uses the same reference clock as the signal
source.

External (red) The red EXT icon indicates that an external reference is connect but not
locked.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 257

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

GPS The green GPS antenna icon indicates that a GPS antenna is connected and
(green) locked.

GPS The yellow GPS antenna icon indicates that a GPS antenna is connected
(yellow) and locking is in progress.

GPS The grey GPS antenna icon indicates that a GPS antenna is not connected,
(grey) failed, or unable to be locked.

Conducting spectrum measurements

Setting measure setup
After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 253, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 If you enable the gated sweep for the guard period, you can easily identify the existence of the
interference in uplink call activities.
a To turn it on, toggle the Guard Period soft key and select Enable.
The Subframe No menu deactivates.
b To turn it off, toggle the Guard Period soft key and select Disable.
NOTE
In LTE-TDD, the guard period is a special subframe, normally Subframe #1 and optionally
Subframe #6, where there happens the switching from DL to UL. You should not see any
data transmission in the guard period spectrum.
5 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.

Your measurement result is displayed on the screen as like the following example, Figure 132.

258 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Figure 132 Spectrum measurement screen with LTE-TDD signal analyzer

Setting trace
You can display up to six traces on the measurement chart simultaneously.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Select Trace soft key, and then select the trace number: T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, or T6.
The legend shape of the selected trace changes from square to round to indicate that the trace is
the active one now.
3 Do one of the following:
To Select Trace Legend

Clear current data and display with new Clear Write W

measurements

Display the input signal’s maximum response only Max Hold M

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

Display the input signal’s minimum response only Min Hold m

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

Capture the selected trace and compare traces Capture C

Load a saved trace More (1/2) > Load L

Hide the displayed trace Trace View > Off F

Remove all the traces and initialize the trace settings More (1/2) >
Trace Clear All

NOTE
For the Max Hold and Min Hold, your instrument compares newly acquired data with the
active trace and displays larger maximum values or smaller minimum values on the
screen. You can set it to Unlimited to hold and view maximum or minimum data or
specify a certain amount of time up to 60 seconds by using numeric keys or rotary knob.
4 Optional. Select More (1/2) > Trace Info, and then select the trace number to view the trace’s
parameter setting information stored at the time of the measurement or None to hide the
information display.
5 Optional. If you have the two traces T1 and T2, you can perform trace math. To view the power

JD700B Series User’s Guide 259

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

difference between the traces, press the T1 – T2 -> T5 or T2 – T1 -> T6 soft key.
The result is overlaid on the screen along with the second Y-axis.

Conducting RF measurements
Channel power
The Channel Power measurement is a common test used in the wireless industry to measure the total
transmitted power of a radio within a defined frequency channel. It acquires a number of points representing
the input signal in the time domain, transforms this information into the frequency domain using Fast Fourier
Transform (FFT), and then calculates the channel power. The effective resolution bandwidth of the frequency
domain trace is proportional to the number of points acquired for the FFT.

The channel power measurement identifies the total RF power and power spectral density (PSD) of the
signal in the LTE channel bandwidth.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 253, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.

260 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 133 Channel power measurement with LTE-TDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 267 for more
information.

Occupied bandwidth
The Occupied Bandwidth measures the spectrum shape of the carrier. It is defined as the bandwidth, which
includes 99% of the transmitted power among total transmitted power.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 253, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 261

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 134 Occupied bandwidth measurement with LTE-TDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 267 for more
information.

Spectrum emission mask (SEM)

The Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurement required by 3GPP specifications encompasses different
power limits and different measurement bandwidths (resolution bandwidths) at various frequency offsets. It
may be expressed as a ratio of power spectral densities between the carrier and the specified offset
frequency band. It provides useful figures-of-merit for the spectral re-growth and emissions produced by
components and circuit blocks, without the rigor of performing a full SEM measurement.

The SEM measures spurious signal levels in up to five pairs of offset or region frequencies and relates them
to the carrier power.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 253, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 To select the mask type, complete the following steps:
a Press the Mask Type soft key.
b Select the mask type option, from the following choices:
– Wide Area BS Category A

262 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

– Wide Area BS Category B

– Local Area BS
– Home BS
4 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.
5 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.

Measurement example
Figure 135 SEM measurement with LTE-TDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 267 for more
information.

ACLR
The Adjacent Channel Leakage power Ratio (ACLR) measures the amount of interference or power in an
adjacent frequency channel according to the standards.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 253, you can
continue your measurement.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 263

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.

Measurement example
Figure 136 ACLR measurement with LTE-TDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 267 for more
information.

Multi-ACLR
The Multi-ACLR measurement is used to perform multi-channel ACLR measurements with as many
channels as possible. It helps you to measure ACLR in multi-channel transmitting Base Station environment.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 253, you can
continue your measurement.

264 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 To set the frequency, do one of the following:
– To set the center frequency, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
b Press the Lowest Frequency soft key to set the starting center frequency.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
e Press the Highest Frequency soft key to set the stopping center frequency.
f Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
g Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
– To set the channel number, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Unit soft key and select Channel.
NOTE
Selecting Channel sets the standard channel to Band Global automatically so that you
can set the Channel Number without choosing a standard channel band from the list.
b Press the Lowest Channel soft key to set the starting channel.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Press the Enter soft key.
e Press the Highest Channel soft key to set the stopping channel.
f Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
g Press the Enter soft key.

Measurement example
Figure 137 Multi-ACLR measurement with LTE-TDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 267 for more
information.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 265

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Spurious emissions
Out-of-band emissions are unwanted emissions immediately outside the channel bandwidth resulting from
the modulation process and non-linearity in the transmitter but excluding spurious emissions. The Spurious
Emissions measurement is to identify and determine the power level of out-of-band spurious emission within
the necessary channel bandwidth and modulated signal measured at the RF port of the Base Station.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 253, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set up the range table and parameters, press the Range Table soft key and then complete
the following steps:
a Press the Range soft key, and then select the range number between 1 and 20 to add
as a new or change the existing settings.
b Do the following as desired:
– Select Start Frequency, and then specify the start frequency for the selected range.
– Select Stop Frequency, and then specify the stop frequency for the selected range.
– Select Start Limit, and then specify the lower limit for Pass/Fail indication.
– Select Stop Limit, and then specify the upper limit for Pass/Fail indication.
– Select More (1/2) > Attenuation, and then specify an value in the multiple of five.
– Select More (1/2) > RBW, and then specify a RBW value.
– Select More (1/2) > VBW, and then specify a VBW value.
c Press the PREV hard key.
d Toggle the Range soft key and select On to display the selected range in the result table or
Off to hide it from the table.
3 Toggle the Measure Type soft key between Examine and Full to select the measurement type.
NOTE
The Examine mode displays only the selected range while the Full mode lets the
instrument automatically changes the selected range from one another.

4 To set the number of measurements to be averaged, complete the following steps:

a Press the Average soft key.
b Enter a value between 1 and 100.
c Press the Enter soft key.
5 To move the highlighted bar in the result table to other range, complete the following steps:
a Press the Range soft key in the Measure Setup menu bar.
b Enter a value between 1 and 20.
c Press the Enter soft key.

266 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 138 Spurious emissions measurement with LTE-TDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 267 for more
information.

Setting limit for RF tests

By default, test limits specified in the standard are set for you. You can change thresholds if you desire.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the RF Test Limits soft key.
3 Select the test item(s) and set the limit(s) depending on your selected measurement mode:

To set the limit for Select Set

Channel power Channel Power High Limit, Low Limit

Occupied bandwidth Occupied BW High Limit

Spectrum emission mask Spectrum Emission Mask (On/Off only)

ACLR ACLR (On/Off only)

Multi-ACLR Multi-ACLR (On/Off only)

Spurious emissions Spurious Emissions (On/Off only)

4 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 267

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Conducting power vs. time measurements

The Power vs. Time measurement measures the modulation envelope in the time domain, showing the
signal rise and fall shape of LTE signal and the power of each time slot in an LTE signal.

Power vs. time (slot)

The Power vs. Time (Slot) in LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer measures the modulation envelope in the time
domain, showing the signal rise and fall shapes of LTE signal.

NOTE
In this measurement, desirable level of the input power is lower than -10 dBm. If the input
power to be measured is -10 dBm or higher, it is highly recommended that you use an
external attenuator.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 253, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 To select the slot number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Slot No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.
5 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select the number of antenna ports, toggle the MIMO soft key and select 2x2 or 4x4. This
MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 031 LTE-
Advanced TDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to
2x2 by default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO channels.
– To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft
key and select the option: Auto, 0, 1, 2, and 3. If the option 031 LTE-Advanced TDD is not
installed or if the MIMO is set to 2x2, the antenna ports 2 and 3 are disabled.
– To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or
Extended. See “Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details
by different bandwidth.
– To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.

NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

268 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Setting limit for power vs. time tests

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the PvsT Test Limits soft key.
3 Select the test item(s) and set the limit(s):
To set the limit for Select Set

Slot average power Slot Avg Power High Limit, Low Limit

Off power Off Power High Limit

Transition period Transition Period High Limit

4 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 139 Power vs. time (slot) measurement with LTE – TDD signal analyzer

1) Off to on

JD700B Series User’s Guide 269

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

2) On to off

Power vs. time (frame)

The Power vs. Time (Frame) measures the modulation envelope in the time domain, showing the power of
each time slot in an LTE signal.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 253, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.
5 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select the number of antenna ports, toggle the MIMO soft key and select 2x2 or 4x4. This
MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 031 LTE-
Advanced TDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to
2x2 by default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO channels.
– To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft
key and select the option: Auto, 0, 1, 2, and 3. If the option 031 LTE-Advanced TDD is not
installed or if the MIMO is set to 2x2, the antenna ports 2 and 3 are disabled.
– To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or

270 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Extended. See “Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details
by different bandwidth.
– To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.

NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

Measurement example
Figure 140 Power vs. time (frame) measurement with LTE – TDD signal analyzer

Conducting modulation measurements

Constellation
The Constellation is used to observe some aspects of modulation accuracy and can reveal certain fault
mechanisms such as I/Q amplitude imbalance or quadrature imbalance. It displays constellation diagram by
modulation types.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 253, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:

JD700B Series User’s Guide 271

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

a Press the Bandwidth soft key.

b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
NOTE
For MBMS testing, this subframe number must be neither 0 nor 5 as these subframes 0
and 5 are not available for MBMS and it must be set to the MBMS transmitted channel’s
subframe number.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 Optional. Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.
5 Optional. Toggle the CFI soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument set the number of OFDM symbols used for transmitting PDCCHs
in a subframe.
– Manual: Sets the number of OFDM symbols manually. The set of OFDM symbols that can
be used for PDCCH in a subframe is given by 0, 2, 3 or 4 in 1.4 MHz bandwidth and 1, 2, or
3 in other bandwidths.
6 Optional. Press the PHICH Ng soft key, and then select the option for the number of PHICH
groups (Ng): 1/6, 1/2, 1, 2, E-1/6, E-1/2, E-1, or E-2.
7 Press the Uplink-Downlink Configuration soft key, and then select the number of
uplink/downlink between one and six.
8 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select the number of antenna ports, toggle the MIMO soft key and select 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 031 LTE-
Advanced TDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to
2x2 by default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO
channels.
– To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft
key and select the option: Auto, 0, 1, 2, and 3. If the option 031 LTE-Advanced TDD is not
installed or if the MIMO is set to 2x2, the antenna ports 2 and 3 are disabled.
– To turn the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature on or off, toggle the
MBMS soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the
Subframe No with the same PMCH subframe number. If this setting is on, either PMCH or
PDSCH appears on the screen depending on the detected channel.
– To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically
or manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
– To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.
NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.
– To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or
Extended. See “Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details
by different bandwidth.
– Press the PDSCH Modulation Type soft key, and then select the modulation type option:
Auto, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, E-TM3.3, E-TM3.2, E-TM3.1, E-TM2, E-TM1.2, and
E-TM1.1. If two or more modulation types are used in a frame, select Auto. If the PDSCH
uses the same modulation type in a frame or in a subframe, select a specific modulation

272 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

type to get more accurate EVM.

– To set the threshold for PDSCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDSCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the dB soft key.
– Toggle the PDSCH Precoding soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the
PDSCH precoding.

Measurement example
Figure 141 Constellation measurement with LTE-TDD signal analyzer

Figure 142 Constellation measurement with LTE-TDD signal analyzer (MBMS On)

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for modulation tests” on page 287 for
more information.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 273

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Data channel
The Data Channel measures the constellation for the specified resource block as well as the modulation
accuracy of each PDSCH at the specified subframe.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 253, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
NOTE
For MBMS testing, this subframe number must be neither 0 nor 5 as these subframes 0
and 5 are not available for MBMS and it must be set to the MBMS transmitted channel’s
subframe number.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 Optional. Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.
5 Optional. Toggle the CFI soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument set the number of OFDM symbols used for transmitting PDCCHs
in a subframe.
– Manual: Sets the number of OFDM symbols manually. The set of OFDM symbols that can
be used for PDCCH in a subframe is given by 0, 2, 3 or 4 in 1.4 MHz bandwidth and 1, 2, or
3 in other bandwidths.
6 Optional. Press the PHICH Ng soft key, and then select the option for the number of PHICH
groups (Ng): 1/6, 1/2, 1, 2, E-1/6, E-1/2, E-1, or E-2.
7 Toggle the Event Hold soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the event hold feature.
When enabled, the display line for the PDSCH threshold appears.
When an event occurs, the measurement is put on hold until you press the HOLD hot key.
NOTE
You can view detailed current resource block on the I-Q diagram, particularly in a
dynamic field environment.
8 Select More (1/2) > Uplink-Downlink Configuration, and then select the number of
uplink/downlink between one and six.
9 Optional. Select More (1/2) > Miscellaneous, and then do the following as needed:
– To select the number of antenna ports, toggle the MIMO soft key and select 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 031 LTE-
Advanced TDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to
2x2 by default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO
channels.
– To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft

274 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

key and select the option: Auto, 0, 1, 2, and 3. If the option 031 LTE-Advanced TDD is not
installed or if the MIMO is set to 2x2, the antenna ports 2 and 3 are disabled.
– To turn the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature on or off, toggle the
MBMS soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the
Subframe No with the same PMCH subframe number. If this setting is on, either PMCH or
PDSCH appears on the screen depending on the detected channel.
– To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically
or manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
– To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.
NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.
– To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or
Extended. See “Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details
by different bandwidth.
– Press the PDSCH Modulation Type soft key, and then select the modulation type option:
Auto, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, E-TM3.3, E-TM3.2, E-TM3.1, E-TM2, E-TM1.2, and
E-TM1.1. If two or more modulation types are used in a frame, select Auto. If the PDSCH
uses the same modulation type in a frame or in a subframe, select a specific modulation
type to get more accurate EVM.
– To set the threshold for PDSCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDSCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the dB soft key.
– Toggle the PDSCH Precoding soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the
PDSCH precoding.

Measurement example
Figure 143 Data channel measurement with LTE-TDD signal analyzer

JD700B Series User’s Guide 275

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Figure 144 Data channel measurement with LTE-TDD signal analyzer (MBMS On)

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for modulation tests” on page 287 for
more information.

Using marker
You can use the MARKER hard key to place a marker on a resource block and display the IQ diagram for
the selected resource block.

Procedure

1 Press the MARKER hard key.

2 Press the RB Number soft key to select the resource block to be marked.
3 Enter the resource block number by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the Enter soft key.
The marker appears on the selected resource block.
5 Toggle the Marker View soft key between On and Off to display or dismiss the result of the
selected resource block.

Control channel
The Control Channel measures the constellation for the specified control channel as well as modulation
accuracy of the control channel at the specified subframe.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 253, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

276 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
NOTE
For MBMS testing, this subframe number must be neither 0 nor 5 as these subframes 0
and 5 are not available for MBMS and it must be set to the MBMS transmitted channel’s
subframe number.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 Optional. Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.
5 Optional. Toggle the CFI soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument set the number of OFDM symbols used for transmitting PDCCHs
in a subframe.
– Manual: Sets the number of OFDM symbols manually. The set of OFDM symbols that can
be used for PDCCH in a subframe is given by 0, 2, 3 or 4 in 1.4 MHz bandwidth and 1, 2, or
3 in other bandwidths.
6 Optional. Press the PHICH Ng soft key, and then select the option for the number of PHICH
groups (Ng): 1/6, 1/2, 1, 2, E-1/6, E-1/2, E-1, or E-2.
7 Toggle the EVM Detection Mode soft key and select Single or Combine as desired:
– Single: Testing on one single antenna connected to your JD700B series with a cable.
– Combine: Testing on multiple antennas connected to your JD700B series with a 2x1 or 4x1
combiner or an antenna.
8 Press the Uplink-Downlink Configuration soft key, and then select the number of
uplink/downlink between one and six.
9 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select the number of antenna ports, toggle the MIMO soft key and select 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 031 LTE-
Advanced TDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to
2x2 by default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO
channels.
– To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft
key and select the option: Auto, 0, 1, 2, and 3. If the option 031 LTE-Advanced TDD is not
installed or if the MIMO is set to 2x2, the antenna ports 2 and 3 are disabled.
– To turn the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature on or off, toggle the
MBMS soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the
Subframe No with the same PMCH subframe number. If this setting is on, the
measurement item “MBSFN RS” appears in the result table.
– To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically
or manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
– To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 277

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.
– To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or
Extended. See “Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details
by different bandwidth.
– To set the threshold for PDCCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDCCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the dB soft key.
– Toggle the PDCCH Mode soft key and select REG to calculate EVM based on Resource
Element Group or Avg to calculate EVM after adding up all the PDCCH signals from one
subframe.

Measurement example
Figure 145 Control channel measurement with LTE-TDD signal analyzer

278 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Figure 146 Control channel measurement with LTE-TDD signal analyzer (MBMS On)

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for modulation tests” on page 287 for
more information.

Using marker
You can use the MARKER hard key to place a marker on a resource block and display the IQ diagram for
the selected resource block.

Procedure

1 Press the MARKER hard key.

2 Press the Channel soft key to select the channel to be displayed in the IQ diagram.
The channel P-SS is selected by default.
3 Turn the rotary knob to move the highlight from one to another in the channel summary table.
4 Toggle the Marker View soft key between On and Off to display or dismiss the result of the
selected channel.

Subframe
The Subframe measures the modulation accuracy of all the data and control channels at the specified
subframe (1 ms).

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 253, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 279

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
NOTE
For MBMS testing, this subframe number must be neither 0 nor 5 as these subframes 0
and 5 are not available for MBMS and it must be set to the MBMS transmitted channel’s
subframe number.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 Optional. Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.
5 Optional. Toggle the CFI soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument set the number of OFDM symbols used for transmitting PDCCHs
in a subframe.
– Manual: Sets the number of OFDM symbols manually. The set of OFDM symbols that can
be used for PDCCH in a subframe is given by 0, 2, 3 or 4 in 1.4 MHz bandwidth and 1, 2, or
3 in other bandwidths.
6 Optional. Press the PHICH Ng soft key, and then select the option for the number of PHICH
groups (Ng): 1/6, 1/2, 1, 2, E-1/6, E-1/2, E-1, or E-2.
7 Toggle the EVM Detection Mode soft key and select Single or Combine as desired:
– Single: Testing on one single antenna connected to your JD700B series with a cable.
– Combine: Testing on multiple antennas connected to your JD700B series with a 2x1 or 4x1
combiner or an antenna.
8 Press the Uplink-Downlink Configuration soft key, and then select the number of
uplink/downlink between one and six.
9 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select the number of antenna ports, toggle the MIMO soft key and select 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 031 LTE-
Advanced TDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to
2x2 by default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO
channels.
– To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft
key and select the option: Auto, 0, 1, 2, and 3. If the option 031 LTE-Advanced TDD is not
installed or if the MIMO is set to 2x2, the antenna ports 2 and 3 are disabled.
– To turn the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature on or off, toggle the
MBMS soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the
Subframe No with the same PMCH subframe number. If this setting is on, the
measurement item “MBSFN RS” appears in the result table and either PMCH or PDSCH
appears as well depending on the detected channel.
– To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically
or manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
– To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.

280 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

c Press the µs soft key.

NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.
– To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or
Extended. See “Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details
by different bandwidth.
– Press the PDSCH Modulation Type soft key, and then select the modulation type option:
Auto, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, E-TM3.3, E-TM3.2, E-TM3.1, E-TM2, E-TM1.2, and
E-TM1.1. If two or more modulation types are used in a frame, select Auto. If the PDSCH
uses the same modulation type in a frame or in a subframe, select a specific modulation
type to get more accurate EVM.
– To set the threshold for PDSCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDSCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the dB soft key.
– To set the threshold for PDCCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDCCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the dB soft key.
– Toggle the PDCCH Mode soft key and select REG to calculate EVM based on Resource
Element Group or Avg to calculate EVM after adding up all the PDCCH signals from one
subframe.
– Toggle the PDSCH Precoding soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the
PDSCH precoding.

Measurement example
Figure 147 Subframe measurement with LTE-TDD signal analyzer

JD700B Series User’s Guide 281

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Figure 148 Subframe measurement with LTE-TDD signal analyzer (Chart On)

Figure 149 Subframe measurement with LTE-TDD signal analyzer (MBMS On)

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for modulation tests” on page 287 for
more information.

Setting display
You can use the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key to view your measurement result with the chart.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Toggle the Chart soft key between On and Off to display or dismiss the chart. If this setting is on,
the MARKER hard key is activated.

282 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Using marker
If you turn the Chart view on, you can use the MARKER hard key to place the marker at a specific symbol.

Procedure

1 Press the MARKER hard key.

2 Toggle the Marker View soft key between On and Off to display or dismiss the marker on the
chart.
3 Press the Symbol soft key to select the symbol number, to which the marker is placed.
4 Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
5 Press the Enter soft key.

Time alignment error

In eNode B supporting Tx Diversity transmission, signals are transmitted from two or more antennas. These
signals shall be aligned. The time alignment error in Tx diversity is specified as the delay between the
signals from two antennas at the antenna ports.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 253, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 Optional. Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.
4 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select the number of antenna ports, toggle the MIMO soft key and select 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 031 LTE-
Advanced TDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to
2x2 by default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO
channels.
– To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft
key and select the option: Auto, 0, 1, 2, and 3. If the option 031 LTE-Advanced TDD is not
installed or if the MIMO is set to 2x2, the antenna ports 2 and 3 are disabled.
– To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.
NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 283

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

– To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or
Extended. See “Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details
by different bandwidth.

Measurement example
Figure 150 Time alignment error measurement with LTE-TDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for modulation tests” on page 287 for
more information.

Data allocation map

The Data Allocation Map function represents data allocation as a mapping.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 253, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.

284 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

NOTE
For MBMS testing, this subframe number must be neither 0 nor 5 as these subframes 0
and 5 are not available for MBMS and it must be set to the MBMS transmitted channel’s
subframe number.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 To set the threshold for PDSCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDSCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the dB soft key.
5 Optional. Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.
6 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select the number of antenna ports, toggle the MIMO soft key and select 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 031 LTE-
Advanced TDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to
2x2 by default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO
channels.
– To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft
key and select the option: Auto, 0, 1, 2, and 3. If the option 031 LTE-Advanced TDD is not
installed or if the MIMO is set to 2x2, the antenna ports 2 and 3 are disabled.
– To turn the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature on or off, toggle the
MBMS soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the
Subframe No with the same PMCH subframe number. If this setting is on, either PMCH or
PDSCH appears on the screen depending on the detected channel.
– To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically
or manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
– To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or
Extended. See “Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details
by different bandwidth.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 285

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 151 Data allocation map measurement with LTE-TDD signal analyzer

Figure 152 Data allocation map measurement with LTE-TDD signal analyzer (MBMS On)

Setting display
You can use the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key to change the display mode to PDSCH, PMCH, or both.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Display Channel soft key.
3 Select the display mode from the choice: PDSCH, PMCH, and Both.

286 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Using marker
You can use the MARKER hard key to place the marker at a specific resource block and subframe.

Procedure

1 Press the MARKER hard key.

2 Toggle the Marker View soft key between On and Off to display or dismiss the marker on the
chart.
3 To select the resource block number, complete the following steps:
a Press the RB Number soft key.
b Enter the resource block number to select by using the numeric keys. You can also use the
rotary knob to move the marker side by side.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 To select the subframe block number, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter the subframe number to select by using the numeric keys. You can also use the
rotary knob to move the marker up and down.
c Press the Enter soft key.

Setting limit for modulation tests

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Modulation Test Limits soft key to set the limits.
3 Select the test item(s) and set the limit(s) depending on your selected measurement mode:

To set the limit for Select Set

Frequency error Frequency Error High Limit, Low Limit

PDSCH error vector EVM > PDSCH EVM High Limit (QPSK)
magnitude if MBMS is off High Limit (16 QAM)
High Limit (64 QAM)

PMCH error vector magnitude EVM > PMCH EVM High Limit (QPSK)
if MBMS is on and a PMCH is High Limit (16 QAM)
detected High Limit (64 QAM)

RMS for data error vector EVM > Data EVM RMS High Limit
magnitude

Peak for data error vector EVM> Data EVM Peak High Limit
magnitude

RS error vector magnitude EVM > RS EVM High Limit

P-SS error vector magnitude EVM > P-SS EVM High Limit

S-SS error vector magnitude EVM > S-SS EVM High Limit

Downlink RS power Power > DL RS Power High Limit, Low Limit

P-SS power Power > P-SS Power High Limit, Low Limit

S-SS power Power > S-SS Power High Limit, Low Limit

PBCH power Power > PBCH Power High Limit, Low Limit

Subframe power Power > Subframe Power High Limit, Low Limit

JD700B Series User’s Guide 287

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

OFDM symbol power Power > OFDM Symbol Power High Limit, Low Limit

Time alignment error for Time Alignment Error > MIMO High Limit
MIMO

Time alignment error for Time Alignment Error > Carrier Intra Cont
aggregation of component Aggregation Intra Non-cont
carriers (intra-band Inter Band
contiguous, intra-band non-
contiguous, and inter-band)

Time error Time Error High Limit, Low Limit

I-Q origin offset IQ Origin Offset High Limit

4 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Performing auto measurements

Conformance test
The Conformance Test is to test if eNode-B meets some specified standards that have been developed for
verification. Its test procedure and test setups have been developed by 3GPP. Test results can be saved as
a .csv file type.

Setting limit for conformance test

You can set test limits for test item(s) in the auto measurement. Turning the test limit on for a test item
makes the test item included in the conformance test.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 To set the limit for BTS output power, complete the following steps:
a Press the BTS Output Power soft key.
b Toggle the Test Limits soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the limit.
c Press the High Limit soft key.
d Enter a value for the upper limit, and then press the dBm unit soft key.
e Press the Low Limit soft key.
f Enter a value for the lower limit, and then press the dBm unit soft key.
3 To set the limit for total power dynamic, complete the following steps:
a Press the Total Power Dynamic soft key.
b Toggle the Test Limits soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the limit.
c Press the Low Limit soft key.
d Enter a value for the lower limit, and then press the dBm unit soft key.
4 To set the limit for on/off power, press the On/Off Power soft key, and then do the following as
needed:

To set the limit for Select Set

Off power Off Power High Limit

288 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Transition period Transition Period High Limit

5 To verify signal quality, press the Signal Quality soft key, and then do the following as needed:

To set the limit for Select Set

Frequency error Frequency Error High Limit, Low Limit

Error vector magnitude EVM High Limit (QPSK)

High Limit (16 QAM)
High Limit (64 QAM)

Time alignment error Time Alignment Error High Limit

RS power RS Power High Limit, Low Limit

6 To verify unwanted emissions, press the Unwanted Emissions soft key, and then do the
following as needed:
To set the limit for Select Set

Occupied bandwidth Occupied BW High Limit

Adjacent channel power ratio ACLR

Spectrum emission mask SEM Mask Type

Spurious emissions Spurious Emissions Range Table

7 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
8 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting measure setup

After setting frequency as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 253, you can continue
your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Bandwidth soft key.
3 Select the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz,
5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz.
4 Press the Sector soft key, and then select the sector option: Alpha, Beta, or Gamma.
5 To set external offset, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the dB soft key.
6 To save your settings and results, go to SAVE/LOAD > Save and then perform functions as you
desire. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.
7 Press the Run Test soft key to start to run a test.
The Auto Measure Results window appears at the end of the test.
8 When prompted on the screen, connect the cable from the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the
instrument to either Antenna Port 0 or Antenna Port 1 of the eNode-B, and then change the TM
mode on the eNode-B side.
9 Press the Continue soft key to continue testing.
10 Repeat the steps 8-9 until completion of the test.
A conformance test report appears at the end of the test.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 289

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

11 Optional. To stop running the test, press the Abort soft key.

Maintenance test
The Auto Measure function of the JD700B series allows a complete signal profiling covering RF
characterization and modulation quality parameters of up to 20 different carriers, particularly useful on an
overlay architecture where base stations are transmitting in different frequencies.

Following settings are required only when you run the Auto Measure Maintenance Test on the instrument
using “Current” configuration setting. Additional settings are not required when you run Auto Measure using
a scenario generated in the PC application software, JDViewer.

Setting limit for maintenance test

You can set test limits for test item(s) in the auto measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the RF Test Limits soft key, and then enable test limits as desired.
3 Press the PvsT Test Limits soft key, and then enable test limits as desired.
4 Press the Modulation Test Limits soft key, and then enable test limits as desired.
5 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
6 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

NOTE
You can use the Allowed % Change soft key for each test item to compare two
measurement values displayed in the result table. This requires setting the Display mode
to Compare in advance.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 253, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Toggle the Configuration soft key and select the configuration option:
– Current: Lets the instrument use current frequency (single carrier) and determine pass or
fail based on the instrument s limit settings in Auto Measure.
– Scenario: Runs a test with a programmed scenario in JDViewer.
The Scenario menu becomes activated.
3 To load a scenario, press the Scenario soft key, and then select a scenario file to load.
4 Toggle the Test Time soft key and select the test time option:
– Now: Lets the instrument run a test only once.
– Schedule: Lets the instrument repeat tests as defined in the Set Timing.

290 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

The Set Timing menu becomes activated.

5 To define a schedule for an auto measurement, complete the following steps:
a Press the Set Timing soft key.
b Press the Start Time (HH:MM) soft key.
c Enter the time in the HH:MM format, and then press the Enter soft key.
d Press the Stop Time (HH:MM) soft key.
e Enter the time in the HH:MM format, and then press the Enter soft key.
f Press the Time Interval soft key.
g Enter the amount of time in minutes, and then press the Enter soft key.
6 Press the Settings soft key, and then set the following:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key, and then select the nominal channel bandwidth to be
measured, from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz.
b Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.
c Press the MIMO soft key, and then select the antenna number option: 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 031 LTE-
Advanced TDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to
2x2 by default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO
channels.
d Press the Antenna Port soft key, and then select the option: Auto, 0, 1, 2, or 3.
If the option 031 LTE-Advanced TDD is not installed or if the MIMO is set to 2x2, the
antenna ports 2 and 3 are disabled.
e Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On.
f Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the dB soft key.
g To turn the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature on or off, toggle the
MBMS soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the
Subframe No with the same PMCH subframe number.
h To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically
or manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
7 To save your settings and results, go to SAVE/LOAD > Save and then perform functions as you
desire. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.
8 Press the Run Test soft key to start to run a test.
The Auto Measure Results window appears at the end of the test.
9 To stop running the test, press the Abort soft key.
10 To change the view on the screen during the test, press the Display and then select the view
option from the following choices:
– Screen: You can view each measurement screen as the test progresses.
– Results: You can view a measurement result table as the test progresses.
– Settings: You can view a measurement setting table as the test progresses.

Setting display
After completion of the auto measurement, the screen menu changes to Trace/Display so that you can view
the results in different forms.

Procedure

1 Toggle the Display soft key and select the display option:
– Result: You can view the result table. The Display Result menu becomes activated.
– Settings: You can view the measurement settings for the auto measurement.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 291

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

2 Toggle the Display Result soft key and select the display result option:
– Full: You can view detailed measurement readings with the pass/fail indication.
– Quick: You can view only the Pass/Fail results.
– Compare: You can compare two measurement values for each test time with the
Allowed % Change setting on. You can view results vs. factory-defined or user-defined
references.
3 To view the measurement results for a different carrier, press the View Carrier soft key and then
select the carrier number to view.
4 Press the Replace Reference soft key to replace existing reference values for comparison with
new measurement data.
5 Press the Load From soft key to select the location from which references file to be loaded.

Signal performance test

Unlike the other auto measurement tests, the Signal Performance Test runs measurements continuously.

Setting limit for signal performance test

You can set test limits for test item(s) in the auto measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the RF Test Limits > Channel Power soft key, and then set the limits for the channel
power. Other RF test items are not used in the signal performance test.
3 Press the Modulation Test Limits soft key, and then enable test limits as desired.
4 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 253, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.
3 Press the MIMO soft key, and then select the antenna number option: 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 031 LTE-
Advanced TDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to 2x2 by
default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO channels.
4 Press the Antenna Port soft key, and then select the option: Auto, 0, 1, 2, or 3.
If the option 031 LTE-Advanced TDD is not installed or if the MIMO is set to 2x2, the antenna
ports 2 and 3 are disabled.

292 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

5 Press the Bandwidth soft key, and then select the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured,
from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz.
6 Toggle the RF Profile soft key between On and Off to turn on or off the RF profiling such as
channel power and subframe frequency error.
7 Toggle the Modulation Profile soft key between On and Off to turn on or off the modulation
profiling such as P-SS, S-SS, Data - QPSK, Data – 16 QAM, and Data – 64 QAM.
8 Toggle the MIMO Profile soft key between On and Off to turn on or off the MIMO profiling such
as TX1 - RS0, TX2 - RS1, and time alignment error.
9 Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On to set the external offset value.
10 To save your settings and results, go to SAVE/LOAD > Save and then perform functions as you
desire. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

DAS test
The Distributed Antenna System (DAS) testing enables you to check the degradation of performance in the
signal transmission from a radio band to antennas distributed from it. You can save measurement values at
both the radio band and antennas and then compare results with percentage of changes. You can also save
test results in the .csv file format for ease of analysis.

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Settings soft key and then set the following;
a Press the Bandwidth soft key and then select the nominal channel bandwidth to be
measured from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz.
b Press the MIMO soft key, and then select the antenna number option: 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 031 LTE-
Advanced TDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to
2x2 by default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO
channels.
c Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.
d Press the Antenna Port soft key, and then select the option: Auto, 0, 1, 2, or 3.
If the option 031 LTE-Advanced TDD is not installed or if the MIMO is set to 2x2, the
antenna ports 2 and 3 are disabled.
e Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On to set the external offset value.
f To turn the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature on or off, toggle the
MBMS soft key and select On or Off.
g To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically
or manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
3 To save your settings, go to SAVE/LOAD > Save > Save Setup and then perform functions as
you desire. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.
4 Press the Continue soft key to do the reference test first or press the Skip Reference Test soft
key if you already saved test results from the radio band under test.
5 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key and then set the frequency to be measured. See “Setting
frequency” on page 254 for more information.
6 Press the PREV hard key.
7 Press the Limit soft key and then set the limits and allowed percentage change for each test
item. See “Maintenance test” on page 290 for more information on setting limits.
8 Keep pressing the PREV hard key until you see the Run Test soft key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 293

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

9 Press the Run Test soft key.

The instrument runs specified tests to gather reference measurement values. The measurement
table appears when the reference test is done.
10 Press the Continue soft key to run the testing on an antenna (Ant 1).
11 Optional. To change the settings such as External Offset, press the Settings and then change
the settings as needed.
12 Press the Continue soft key.
The instrument runs the testing on Ant 1. The Ant 1 tab appears with the updated result table
when the test is done.
13 To run the testing on the next antenna (Ant 2), press the Run Test soft key and then repeat the
steps 11-12. You can do the testing on up to 10 distributed antennas for one radio band.
14 To view test results for each antenna, press the Select Antenna soft key and then select the
antenna tab number to display on the screen.
15 Optional. Press the Delete Test soft key to delete the selected antenna tab.
16 Optional. Press the Retest Reference soft key to obtain reference measurement values again.
17 Optional. To save your measurement results, go to SAVE/LOAD > Save and then perform
functions as you desire. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 153 DAS measurement with LTE-TDD signal analyzer

Performing power statistics CCDF measurements

The Power Statistics Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function (CCDF) measurement characterizes
the power statistics of the input signal. It provides PAR (Peak to Average power Ratio) versus different
probabilities.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 253, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

294 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the CCDF Length soft key to set the length of the CCDF.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 100 by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
4 Press the Enter soft key.

Measurement example
Figure 154 CCDF measurement with LTE-TDD signal analyzer

Performing carrier aggregation measurements

Carrier aggregation enables a maximum of five multiple LTE carriers to be used together in order to provide
high data rate required for LTE-Advanced. Component carriers to be aggregated can be intra-band
contiguous, intra-band non-contiguous, or inter-band. The JD700B series provides carrier aggregation
measurements supporting for all the different modes with carrier aggregation bands added to the channel
standard. This functionality is activated if the license for the option 031 LTE-Advanced TDD is installed.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 253, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To configure parameters for up to 5 component carriers, complete the following steps:
a Press the CA Configuration soft key.
The component carrier configuration window appears.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 295

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

b Press the CA Range soft key.

c Enter the number of the component carrier to be set between one and five.
d Press the Enter soft key.
e Toggle the Turn On soft key, and then select On to set parameters and view the results for
the selected component carrier on the screen or Off to turn it off.
f Set the following parameters as needed:
– Center Frequency, Channel, Bandwidth, Cell ID, CFI, PHICH Ng, Antenna Port,
MBMS On/Off, Cyclic Prefix, and PDSCH Modulation Type
g To set more component carriers, repeat the steps c-f.
3 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key again.
4 Toggle the EVM Detection Mode soft key and select Single or Combine as desired:
– Single: Testing on one single antenna connected to your JD700B series with a cable.
– Combine: Testing on multiple antennas connected to your JD700B series with a 2x1 or 4x1
combiner or an antenna.
5 To select the subframe number to be measured, do one of the following:
– If the EVM Detection Mode is set to Single, press the Subframe No soft key and then set
the subframe number.
NOTE
For MBMS testing, this subframe number must be neither 0 nor 5 as these subframes 0
and 5 are not available for MBMS and it must be set to the MBMS transmitted channel’s
subframe number.
– If the EVM Detection Mode is set to Combine, toggle the Subframe No soft key and then
select 0 or 5.
6 To set the threshold for PDSCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDSCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the dB soft key.
7 Toggle the PDSCH Precoding soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the PDSCH
precoding.
8 To select the number of antenna ports, toggle the MIMO soft key and select 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 031 LTE-
Advanced TDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to 2x2 by
default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO channels.

Setting display
You can use the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key to select modulation analysis or spectrum analysis.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Toggle the Display soft key and select MA for modulation analysis or SA for spectrum analysis.
The screen changes according to the selected option.

296 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 155 Carrier aggregation measurement with LTE-TDD signal analyzer (MA)

Figure 156 Carrier aggregation measurement with LTE-TDD signal analyzer (SA)

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for modulation tests” on page 287 for
more information.

Using marker
You can use the MARKER hard key to place the marker at a specific channel.

Procedure

1 Press the MARKER hard key.

2 Toggle the Marker View soft key between On and Off to display or dismiss the marker.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 297

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

3 Press the Channel soft key to select the channel to be displayed on the IQ diagram.
4 Use the rotary knob to move and select an item under EVM.

Conducting LTE-TDD OTA measurements

The TDD LTE Over The Air (OTA) measurement has Channel Scanner, ID Scanner, Multipath Profile,
Datagram, and Control Channel screens. The ID Scanner displays key parameters such as RSRP, RSRQ,
RS-SINR, and S-SS RSSI. The Multipath Profile enables you to determine RF environmental conditions of
testing area. The OTA Control Channel provides summary of all control channels including RS power
variation over time.

Channel scanner
The Channel Scanner is a radio receiver that can automatically tune or scan two or more discrete
frequencies and multi-channels, indicating when it finds a signal on one of them and then continuing
scanning when that frequency goes silent.

Setting channel/frequency

Procedure

To set the channels to be scanned:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Channel.
3 Press the Index soft key, and then enter an index number between one and six by turning the
rotary knob or using the numeric keys.
4 To select the standard channel, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Std soft key. The standard channel window appears.
See “Appendix C – Band, frequency & channel standard” on page 664 for more information.
b Highlight the band to be measured by using the rotary knob, the arrow keys, or the
Page Up/Page Down soft keys.
c Press the Select soft key or the rotary knob to confirm the selection.
5 To set the channel number for the selected index, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Number soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 The instrument displays a corresponding center frequency for the channel number.
7 To set the integration bandwidth for the selected index, complete the following steps:
a Press the Integration Bandwidth soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
8 To add more channels to be scanned, repeat steps 3-6.
9 Press the ESC hard key to dismiss the channel list window and view the scanning result.

To set the frequencies to be scanned:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
3 Press the Index soft key, and then enter an index number between one and six by turning the
rotary knob or using the numeric keys.
4 To set the center frequency for the selected index, complete the following steps:

298 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

a Press the Center Frequency soft key.

b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
5 To set the integration bandwidth for the selected index, complete the following steps:
a Press the Integration Bandwidth soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
6 To add more channels to be scanned, repeat steps 3-5.
7 Press the ESC hard key to dismiss the channel list window and view the scanning result.

Setting number of antenna ports

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Toggle the MIMO soft key and select 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 031 LTE-
Advanced TDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to 2x2 by
default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO channels.

Measurement example
Figure 157 Channel scanner measurement with LTE-TDD OTA signal analyzer

ID scanner
The LTE mobile receives signals from multiple base stations that all of these signals share the same
spectrum and are present at the same time. Each base station has unique scrambling code assigned to the
particular base station and it differentiates its signal from other base stations in the area.

The ID Scanner shows key parameters such as RSRP (Reference Signal Received Power) and RSRQ
(Reference Signal Received Quality) that predict the downlink coverage quickly.
n RSRPs from entire cells help to rank between the different cells as input for handover and cell
reselection decisions.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 299

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

n RSRQ provides additional information when RSRP is not sufficient to make a reliable handover or
cell reselection decision.

All of the parameters for OTA ID scanner can be plotted on map data such as Google Maps and Google
Earth by using JDViewer.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 253, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select the number of antenna ports, toggle the MIMO soft key and select 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 031 LTE-
Advanced TDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to
2x2 by default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO
channels.
– To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or
Extended. See “Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details
by different bandwidth.
4 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 158 ID scanner measurement with LTE-TDD OTA signal analyzer

300 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Multipath profile
The Multipath Profile enables you to determine RF environmental conditions of testing area. It indicates the
amount of power of the dominant pilot signal that is dispersed outside the main correlation peak due to
multipath echoes that are expressed in dB. This value should be very small ideally.

The multipath profile is the result of portions of the original broadcast signal arriving at the receiving antenna
out of phase. This can be caused by the signal being reflected off objects such as buildings, or being
refracted through the atmosphere differently from the main signal.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 253, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 Toggle the Display soft key and select RS or Sync.
The RS Window soft key becomes activated if RS is selected.
4 Press the RS Window soft key, if RS is selected, and then select the RS window option: 2 µs,
4 µs, or 8 µs.
5 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select the number of antenna ports, toggle the MIMO soft key and select 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 031 LTE-
Advanced TDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to
2x2 by default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO
channels.
– To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or
Extended. See “Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details
by different bandwidth.
6 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 301

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 159 Multipath profile measurement with LTE-TDD OTA signal analyzer

Control channel
DL RS power is the resource element power of Downlink Reference Symbol. The absolute DL RS power is
indicated on the BCH. The absolute accuracy is defined as the maximum deviation between the DL RS
power indicated on the BCH and the DL RS power at the BS antenna connector.

The OTA Control Channel provides summary of all control channels including RS power trend over time.
GPS coordinates (latitude and longitude) will be displayed on the screen if a GPS antenna is connected and
locked to the GPS satellites.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 253, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
NOTE
For MBMS testing, this subframe number must be neither 0 nor 5 as these subframes 0
and 5 are not available for MBMS and it must be set to the MBMS transmitted channel’s
subframe number.

302 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

c Press the Enter soft key.

4 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.
5 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select the number of antenna ports, toggle the MIMO soft key and select 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 031 LTE-
Advanced TDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to
2x2 by default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to test on MIMO channels.
– To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft
key and select the option: Auto, 0, 1, 2, and 3. If the option 031 LTE-Advanced TDD is not
installed or if the MIMO is set to 2x2, the antenna ports 2 and 3 are disabled.
– To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or
Extended. See “Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details
by different bandwidth.
– To turn the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature on or off, toggle the
MBMS soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the
Subframe No with the same PMCH subframe number. If this setting is on, the
measurement item “MBSFN RS” appears in the result table.
– To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically
or manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
6 Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available for your
measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting limit for OTA control channel

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Select the test item(s) and set the limit(s) as needed:
To set the limit for Select Set

P-SS error vector magnitude P-SS EVM High Limit

S-SS error vector magnitude S-SS EVM High Limit

RS error vector magnitude RS EVM > RS0 EVM High Limit

RS EVM > RS1 EVM
RS EVM > RS2 EVM
RS EVM > RS3 EVM

Frequency error Frequency Error High Limit, Low Limit

Time error Time Error High Limit, Low Limit

Time alignment error Time Alignment Error High Limit

3 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting display
You can use the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key to select the display option.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 303

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Toggle the Display soft key and select Power or EVM.
The screen changes according to the selected option.

Measurement example
Figure 160 Control channel measurement with LTE-TDD OTA signal analyzer

Datagram
The OTA Datagram is a time-varying spectral representation that shows how the power of a signal varies
with time. The power allocated to the specific resource block will be represented with an amplitude axis (in
dBm) and the waterfall diagram will show the trend of past resource block power over certain period. Using a
marker function facilitates analysis of accumulated resource block power for data utilization.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 253, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,
and 20 MHz.
3 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.

304 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

4 Optional. Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization with a BTS.
5 Optional. To set the threshold for PDSCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDSCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the dB soft key.
6 To set the time cursor at a specific position, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Time Cursor soft key and select On.
b Turn the rotary knob to move the time cursor. You can also enter a value and then press the
Enter soft key.
NOTE
Enabling the time cursor puts the measurement on hold and you can make post-
processing analysis for each measurement over time using the time cursor.
7 To start a new measurement, press the Reset/Restart soft key.
8 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select the number of antenna ports, toggle the MIMO soft key and select 2x2 or 4x4.
This MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) setting is activated only if the option 031 LTE-
Advanced TDD is installed with a license number. If not, the instrument sets this option to
2x2 by default. A 2x1 or 4x1 RF combiner is also required to able to test on MIMO channels.
– To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or
Extended. See “Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details
by different bandwidth.
9 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 161 Datagram measurement with LTE-TDD signal analyzer

Route map
The JD700B Series provides the Route Map function that allows you to collect data of points in an indoor or
outdoor environment and track the received signals and coverage of RF transmitters by plotting data real

JD700B Series User’s Guide 305

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

time directly on top of a loaded floor plan or a map.

The JD700B Series also supports the RAN-IL (Interference Location) feature that enables you to overlay
user experience data obtained through Viavi’s ariesoGEO on your base map to help you troubleshoot
problems easily and quickly using your instrument. You can generate raster data files on the ariesoGEO
application and load them on your instrument.

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 If required, connect a GPS receiver to your JD700B series for outdoor mapping.
Indoor mapping does not necessarily need a GPS antenna.
2 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 253.
3 To load your map file, complete the following steps:
a Plug in your USB drive that has a floor map or .mcf file type created in JDMapCreator. If
the JDMapCreator application on your computer is connected to the instrument via USB or
LAN, you can send a map file with a single layer to the instrument directly by using the
Send to EQP menu in JDMapCreator.
NOTE
The JDMapCreator converts and resizes any scanned floor plan or layout to fit onto your
instrument’s display. JDMapCreator 1.2.0 or later can save a multiple-layered map,
providing x1, x2, and x4 views, as a sizable map file so that you can zoom in and out
after loading it.
b Press SAVE/LOAD hot key, and then select Load > Load Map. See “Using load” on page
35 for more information.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
5 Press the Plot Point soft key, and then select the plot point option from the following choices:
– To collect data/plot points automatically as you move around in a vehicle or outside, press
the GPS soft key and then toggle the Screen Mode soft key between Map and Full.
NOTE
With the Map setting, you can view only the collected points that can be seen within the
boundary of the loaded map. If a point is off the map, the instrument displays an arrow to
indicate the direction of the current location on the map and the distance from the center
to the location at the top of the screen.

With the Full setting, you can view all the collected points of the route without the loaded
map.
– To collect data/plot points manually without a GPS antenna in an indoor environment, press
the Position soft key.
6 Press the Plot Item soft key, and then select the measurement option: RSRP, RSRQ, RS-SINR,
S-SS RSSI, P-SS Power, S-SS Power, or S-SS Ec/Io.
NOTE
The instrument collects the strongest Cell ID’s data to plot points.
7 Press the Bandwidth soft key to set the nominal channel bandwidth to be measured, and then
select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and
20 MHz.
8 Toggle the Plot soft key and select Start to start plotting.
9 Touch directly on the screen or press the ENTER hard key to collect data and plot points on the
loaded map for the Position setting.

NOTE
For the Position setting, you can change the direction of the route with the arrow keys
and the distance with the rotary knob.
10 Toggle the Plot soft key and select Stop to stop plotting.
11 Press the SAVE/LOAD hot key to save the result.

306 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

NOTE
The instrument does not automatically save the collected data. It is recommended that
you save the result. Otherwise, you will lose all the collected data.

Setting limit for route map

You can set the thresholds for each test item.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Select the plot items and set the limits as needed:

To set the limit for Select Set

RSRP RSRP Excellent, Very Good, Good, Fair, Poor (dBm)

RSRQ RSRQ Good, Fair, Poor (dB)

RS-SINR RS-SINR Good, Fair, Poor (dB)

S-SS RSSI S-SS RSSI Excellent, Very Good, Good, Fair, Poor (dBm)

P-SS Power P-SS Power Excellent, Very Good, Good, Fair, Poor (dBm)

S-SS Power S-SS Power Excellent, Very Good, Good, Fair, Poor (dBm)

S-SS Ec/Io S-SS Ec/Io Good, Fair, Poor (dB)

3 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 162 Route map measurement (RSRP) with LTE-TDD OTA signal analyzer

JD700B Series User’s Guide 307

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Figure 163 Route map measurement (RSRQ) with LTE-TDD OTA signal analyzer

Figure 164 Route map measurement (RS-SINR) with LTE-TDD OTA signal analyzer

308 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Figure 165 Route map measurement (S-SS RSSI) with LTE-TDD OTA signal analyzer

Figure 166 Route map measurement (P-SS Power) with LTE-TDD OTA signal analyzer

JD700B Series User’s Guide 309

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Figure 167 Route map measurement (S-SS Power) with LTE-TDD OTA signal analyzer

Figure 168 Route map measurement (S-SS Ec/Io) with LTE-TDD OTA signal analyzer

Controlling a map
If you have loaded a sizable map that was created in JDMapCreator 1.2.0 or later, you can use the Map
Control feature that enables you to zoom into the map and view a specific area of interest in detail.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Map Control soft key. This key is active only when you have loaded a sizable map.
3 Do one of the following:
– To zoom into an area of interest directly, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Zoom to soft key and select Area.
The black rectangle appears on the map.
b Press the Zoom In and Zoom Out soft keys, as you need, to decrease and increase

310 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

the selected area.

c Move the rectangle by using the four arrow keys, as you need, to place it in a specific
area of interest.
d Press the center of the rotary knob to zoom into the selected area. You can also press
the Zoom to soft key again to zoom into the selected area.
– To zoom into the center or zoom out from the center, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Zoom to soft key and select Center.
b Press the Zoom In and Zoom Out soft keys, as you need, to zoom in and zoom out.
c Move the zoomed-in area by using the four arrow keys, as you need.
4 To set the location mode, toggle the Location Mode soft key between Auto and Manual and
select the one you desire.
– Auto: The instrument compares the coordinates of the displayed map with recevied GPS
information. If your current location goes out of the displayed area and enters into the next
zoomed-in section within the base map, the map display changes automatically to the next
section in which your current position is.
– Manual: The map display of the zoomed-in area remains unchanged even if your current
location goes out of the displayed area. You can change the displayed area manually by
using the arrow keys.

Loading and displaying raster data

If you have a set of raster data files generated through the ariesoGEO application, you can load and overlay
the data on your base map to help you check the signal quality and the strength of interferences while
driving toward the area of interest.

Procedure

1 Copy a set of raster data files into your USB memory drive, including the following:
– ASCII: .tab, .asc, and .clr files
– BIL: .tab,.hdr, .bil, and .clr files
NOTE
The .tab file type is a geospatial vector data format used in many geographic
information systems. The color file (.clr) is an optional file, but the image will be
displayed as a grayscale image without it. The size of the raster map must be
1024 x 1024 or smaller.
2 Plug in the USB memory drive to your instrument.
3 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.
4 Press the Load Raster Map soft key.
The file explorer window appears.
5 Navigate to the raster file (.tab) you want to open, and then press the Load soft key.
The raster image appears on top of your base map as shown in Figure 169.
NOTE
If the area of the loaded raster data is not within the boundary of the base map, you will
not see the raster image on the screen.
6 To select the display option, complete the following steps:
a Press the Display Options soft key.
b Select the option you desire from the choices: On, Off, and Blink.
7 To adjust the transparency level of the image, complete the following steps:
a Press the Transparency soft key.
b Enter a value between 0 for opaque and 100 for clear.
c Press the Enter soft key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 311

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

Figure 169 Raster image overlaid on the base map with LTE-TDD OTA signal analyzer

Performing RAN performance testing

The JD700B series provides the optional feature that lets you conduct correlated uplink and downlink testing
with your instrument connected to your mobile device via Bluetooth. The RANAdvisor TrueSite application
installed on your smartphone collects data and transfers uplink data based on your parameter settings and
then your instrument consolidates the data into the measurement results and displays them as performance
indicators. It helps you troubleshoot a problem and identify the cause of the problem fast.

To perform this testing, you need both of these installed: the license for the option 015 LTE-TDD RAN
Performance Indicator on your instrument and the RANAdvisor TrueSite app with the license on your
smartphone.

Preparing your smartphone for remote control via Bluetooth

To set up a Bluetooth connection and enable data collection with remote control properly, you need to pair
your instrument with your smartphone and set the app’s local Bluetooth control option to Slave once at the
beginning.

Procedure

1 Connect a Bluetooth adapter to the USB Host port and an Omni antenna to the RF In port of your
CellAdvisor instrument.
The instrument detects the adapter and turns on its Bluetooth automatically.
2 Make your smartphone visible to your instrument by doing the following steps:
a On your smartphone, turn on Bluetooth.
b Check the checkbox for Visible to all nearby Bluetooth devices to enable this option.
3 Pair with your smartphone by doing the following steps:
a On your instrument, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
b Press the Bluetooth Connect soft key.
c Press the Scan soft key.
The instrument lists detected Bluetooth devices with their MAC address and status.
d Highlight your mobile device from the list by touching on the screen.

312 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

e Press the Pair soft key.

The pairing dialog box appears on your smartphone.
f On your smartphone, enter 0000 and then tap the OK button.
If pairing is successful, the status of your device on the list changes to “Paired”.
4 Make sure to set your smartphone as a slave by completing the following steps:
a On your smartphone, open the RANAdvisor TrueSite icon.
b Go to Settings > General.
c Tap the Automation Control Mode menu under Automation Control Options.
d Select the Local Bluetooth Control option.
e Tap Slave.
The application restart dialog box appears.
f Tap Continue.
The application closes itself.
NOTE
It is very important for you to set the local Bluetooth control option to Slave on the
RANAdvisor TrueSite app in order to give your instrument a control to collect necessary
data from the app over Bluetooth successfully.

Setting parameters on RANAdvisor TrueSiteTM

To specify uplink measurement data that will be transferred to your instrument, you need to set map display
parameters of your choice on the RANAdvisor TrueSite application.

Procedure

1 After you have paired and set your smartphone as a slave, open the RANAdvisor TrueSite icon
on your device again.
2 Tap the (+) button at the bottom of the Home screen.
The Main Screen appears.
3 Tap the Customization menu.
The Choose Operation menu box appears.
4 Select Map Display Parameters > LTE Serving and Neighbor Parameters.
5 Make sure to check the checkbox for the following two mandatory parameters:
– Serving E-ARFCN
– Serving Physical Cell-ID
NOTE
It is very important for you to select these two parameters to identify the Uplink Channel
Number, Cell ID, Group ID, and Sector ID.
6 Select other parameters up to six from the list of parameters supported by the CellAdvisor
instrument. See “Appendix L – Supported map display parameters” on page 689 for more
information.
NOTE
As the RANAdvisor TrueSite app can transfer data of up to eight parameters at a time, it
limits you to select eight parameters in total: two compulsories and six electives. After you
have selected all eight parameters, the app blocks any further selection. In this case, you
need to uncheck any selected optional parameters in order to enable other optional
parameters.
7 Tap the OK button and then the Back key to return to the Home Screen.

Performing RAN performance testing

After you have set the local Bluetooth control option and selected desired parameters on the app, you need
to connect your instrument to your smartphone via Bluetooth to enable data collection from RANAdvisor
TrueSite so that you can view consolidated measurement results on your instrument and save results as a

JD700B Series User’s Guide 313

Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

file.

Procedure

1 Make sure to have the RANAdvisor TrueSite app opened on your device.
2 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key on your instrument.
3 Press the Bluetooth Connect soft key.
4 Highlight your paired smartphone to connect from the list.
5 Press the Connect soft key.
The connected device information appears above the RAN Performance Indicator chart to
indicate a successful connection.
6 The instrument automatically sets the correlated downlink channel number for the received uplink
channel number and displays measurement results as like Figure 170. Observe the consolidated
measurement results on the screen for your troubleshooting.

NOTE
If the Cell ID of the uplink channel is not identical to the one of the downlink channel, the
instrument displays “---“ for the parameters to indicate invalid measurement results.
7 If you want to see measurement results for other parameters, select new parameters on the
TM
RANAdvisor TrueSite app. See “Setting parameters on RANAdvisor TrueSite ” on page 246.
8 Optional. To save your settings and results, go to SAVE/LOAD > Save and then perform
functions as you desire. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 170 RAN performance indicator with LTE-TDD signal analyzer

Setting performance score level

To analyze your measurement data easily with color codes, you can use the limit feature and set a
performance score level for each measurement parameter.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 To analyze the quality of user experience, do the following as needed:

314 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 9 Using LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

To set the level for Select Set

Data throughput Data Throughput Good, Bad (kbps)

Channel quality indicator CQI Good, Bad

Modulation type Modulation Type (On/Off only)

3 To check the performance of eNode-B, do the following as needed:

To set the level for Select Set

Reference signal received power RSRP Good, Bad (dBm)

Reference signal received RSRQ Good, Bad (dB)

quality

Signal to interference and noise SINR Good, Bad (dB)

ratio

Error vector magnitude More (1/2) > EVM Good, Bad (%)

Time alignment error More (1/2) > Time Alignment Error Good, Bad (ns)

Frequency error More (1/2) > Frequency Error Good, Bad (ppm)

JD700B Series User’s Guide 315

 10

Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

This chapter provides instructions for using the CDMA Signal Analyzer function (option 020) with the CDMA
OTA Analyzer function (option 040). Topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

n Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 317

n Display overview ..................................................................................................................... 318
n Connecting a cable.................................................................................................................. 318
n Selecting measurement mode ................................................................................................ 320
n Configuring test parameters .................................................................................................... 320
n Conducting spectrum measurements ..................................................................................... 325
n Conducting RF measurements ............................................................................................... 326
n Conducting modulation measurements................................................................................... 333
n Performing auto measurements .............................................................................................. 341
n Performing power statistics CCDF measurements ................................................................. 343
n Conducting CDMA OTA measurements .................................................................................. 344
 Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

Introduction
This CDMA Signal Analyzer can be used to test a CDMA transmitter including cdmaOne and cdma2000
signals to check the base station’s compliance with following standards documentation.

n 3GPP2 C.S0002 Physical Layer Standard for cdma2000 Spread Spectrum Systems
n 3GPP2 C.S0010 Recommended Minimum Performance Standards for cdma2000 Spread Spectrum
Base Station

This instrument automatically makes standard defined measurements using the measurement methods and
limits as defined in the standards. Detailed measurement results allow you to analyze cdmaOne and
cdma2000 system performance.

n cdmaOne uses dual BPSK (Binary Phase-Shifting Key) for the forward link and OQPSK (Offset
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) for the reverse link.
n cdma2000 uses QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) modulation for the forward link and QPSK
modulation with HPSK spreading for the reverse link. Both forward and reverse links may have
several channels, and individual characteristics for each channel. The chip rate depends on the
mode selected.

You may alter the measurement parameters for specialized analysis. Pass/Fail testing with standard defined
or user defined upper and lower limits and the Pass/Fail indictor help you to determine base station
performance easily.

This instrument provides the following measurement tools for CDMA system:

n Spectrum Analysis
n RF Analysis
- Channel Power
- Occupied Bandwidth
- Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM)
- Adjacent Channel Power Ratio (ACPR)
- Multi-ACPR
- Spurious Emissions
n Modulation Analysis
- Constellation
- Code Domain Power
- Codogram
- Received Code Strength Indicator (RCSI)
- CDP Table
n Auto Measure
n Power Statistics CCDF
n Over The Air (OTA)
- Channel Scanner
- PN Scanner
- Multipath Profile
- Code Domain Power
- Route Map

JD700B Series User’s Guide 317

Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

Display overview
Figure 171 provides descriptions for each segment of the measurement screen.

Figure 171 CDMA signal analyzer measurement screen

Connecting a cable
Direct connection
Procedure

1 Connect the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B series and the Power amplifier output
port of BTS.

Figure 172 Direct connection

JD785B/JD745B JD788B/JD748B

318 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

Indirect connection
Procedure

1 Connect the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B series and the monitor (test) port of
BTS.

Figure 173 Indirect connection

JD785B/JD745B JD788B/JD748B

CAUTION
The maximum power for the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port is +25 dBm (0.316 W) for
JD780B series and +20 dBm (0.1 W) for JD740B series. If the level of the input signal to
be measured is greater than this, use a High Power Attenuator to prevent damage
when you directly connect the signal to the instrument or connect the signal from the
coupling port of a directional coupler.

NOTE
For accurate PN Offset and Time Offset measurements with the CDMA Signal Analyzer
function, a PP2S should be connected to the External Trigger. Without a GPS connection,
measurement results could be invalid numbers.

Over the air (OTA)

Procedure

1 Connect an Omni/directional RF antenna to the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B

series.
2 Connect a GPS antenna to the GPS port of the JD700B series.

CAUTION
If the input signal level to be measured is less than 0 dBm, set 0 dB attenuation or turn on
the preamp to have better dynamic range for the OTA testing.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 319

Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

Figure 174 OTA connection

JD785B/JD745B JD788B/JD748B

Selecting measurement mode

Procedure

1 Press the MODE hard key.

2 Press the Signal Analyzer soft key.
3 Press the CDMA soft key. The Spectrum mode is set by default.
4 Press the MEASURE hot key, and then select the measurement mode option from the following
choices:
– Spectrum
– RF Analysis > Channel Power, Occupied BW, Spectrum Emission Mask, ACPR,
Multi-ACPR, or Spurious Emissions
– Modulation > Constellation, Code Domain Power, Codogram, RCSI, or CDP Table
– Auto Measure
– Power Statistics CCDF
– OTA > Channel Scanner, PN Scanner, Multipath Profile, Code Domain Power,
or Route Map

Configuring test parameters

Setting frequency
You can set the frequency with either frequency or channel number. If a frequency to be set matches to the
frequency corresponding to the selected channel standard, the instrument calculates its channel number
and updates the screen with it automatically.

Procedure

To set the center frequency:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.

320 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.

3 Press the Center Frequency soft key.
4 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
5 Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
6 Optional. To define the amount of frequency increment for the rotary knob, complete the following
steps:
a Press the Frequency Step soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.

To set the channel number:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Channel.
3 To select the standard channel, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Std soft key. The standard channel window appears.
See “Appendix C – Band, frequency & channel standard”” on page 664 for more
information.
b Highlight the band to be measured by using the rotary knob, the arrow keys, or the Page
Up/Page Down soft keys.
c Press the Select soft key or the rotary knob to confirm the selection.
4 Press the Channel Number soft key.
5 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
6 Press the Enter soft key.
The instrument automatically displays the corresponding center frequency value for the selected
channel number.
7 Optional. To define the amount of channel increment for the rotary knob, complete the following
steps:
a Press the Channel Step soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.

NOTE
This frequency setting is not used in the Multi-ACLR and Spurious Emissions modes.

Setting amplitude
Reference level and attenuation
You can set the reference and attenuation levels automatically or manually to optimize the display of the
traces measured, as you desire.

Procedure

To automatically set the reference and attenuation level:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Press the Auto Scale soft key.
Each time you press this key, both of the Y-axis scale and input attenuation level change to be
optimized with some margin.

To set the reference or attenuation level manually:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 To set the maximum reference value on the Y-axis manually, complete the following steps:
a Press the Reference Level soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys or the rotary knob with 10 dB increments.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 321

Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

c Press the unit soft key or the ENTER hard key.

This unit key name changes according to the setting in the Units menu.
NOTE
In the measurements such as Code Domain Power, Codogram, and RCSI, you may
need to select the reference option between Relative and Absolute before setting the
reference level.

3 To set the attenuation option, select one from the following choices:
– To set the input attenuator’s level automatically, select Attenuation > Auto.
NOTE
It is recommended that you set the Attenuation to Auto in most situations so that the
level of the input attenuator can be set automatically according to your input signal level.
– To set the input attenuation manually up to 55 dB for JD780B series or 50 dB for JD740B
series to optimize S/N, complete the following steps:
a Select Attenuation > Manual.
b Press the Attenuation Value soft key to set the level.
c Enter a value in fives by using the numeric keys.
d Press the dB soft key or the ENTER hard key.
– To couple the input attenuator’s level with your reference level setting, select Attenuation >
Couple.
As you increase the reference setting, the attenuation level also increases acoordingly.

Optional. To change the scale unit:

1 Select More (1/2) > Units.
2 Select the unit of the display scale: dBm, dBV, dBmV, dBµV, V, or W.
The scale unit on the screen changes accordingly.
NOTE
This Units menu is available in the Spectrum and RF Analysis modes.

Scale per division

You can use the Scale/Div feature available for the spectrum and RF analysis. It represents the value of one
division on the horizontal scale. The default setting is 10 dB per division and the maximum value can be set
up to 20 dB.

Procedure

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Select More (1/2) > Scale/Div.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 20 by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.

Pre-amplifier
You can turn the internal pre-amplifier on to correct and compensate for the gain of the preamp so that
amplitude readings show the value at the input connector.

Procedure

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Toggle the Preamp soft key and select On or Off as needed.

322 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

NOTE
You can turn the Preamp on when the input attenuation range is from 0 dB to 10 dB. If
the attenuation value is manually set to greater than 10 dB, the instrument will
automatically turn off the pre-amplifier to display low-level signal properly on the chart.

External offset
You can turn the External Offset on and manually set the external offset value. An offset consists of a cable
loss and a user offset and the measurement result shows the value reflecting both offset values. When the
external offset value is set at 40 dB in the Spectrum mode, the measurement result compensates 40 dB at
both the Spectrum Analyzer and Signal Analyzer modes.

Procedure

To set the external offset:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On.
3 Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.

To turn the external offset off:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Toggle the External Offset soft key and select Off.

Setting average
You can set the number of measurements to be averaged for the trace presentation. A maximum of 100
times of averaging can be set. When the averaging reaches to your setting, a new measurement value
replaces the measurement value in sequence from the earliest.

Procedure

1 Press the BW/AVG hard key.

2 Press the Average soft key.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 100 as needed by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the Enter soft key.

Setting sweep mode

The default setting is Continue to sweep continuously for most on-going measurements. If you want to hold
the measurement or get a single sweep, you can change the sweep mode.

Procedure

To select the single sweep mode:

1 Press the SWEEP hot key.
2 Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Single. You can also use the HOLD hot key.
The letter HOLD in red appears and the sweeping is paused.
3 Optional. Press the Sweep Once soft key to get a new measurement.

To return to the continuous sweep mode:

1 Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Continue. You can also use the HOLD hot key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 323

Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

The letter HOLD in red disappears and the sweeping resumes.

Setting trigger source

You can set the trigger source option for your measurements. Connecting an external trigger is necessary
for accurate modulation measurements on CDMA systems.

Procedure

1 Press the TRIGGER hot key.

2 Select the trigger source option from the choices: Internal, External, and GPS.

Setting external clock

To enhance the reliability of modulation analysis measurements the JD700B series must be synchronized
with a base station. When an external clock is not supplied, the instrument works with its built-in internal
high-accuracy time base and some measurement results may exhibit inaccurate values. Therefore, it is
highly recommended that you use the same reference clock as the signal source. You can use the
TRIGGER hot key to set the external clock.

Table 14 Standards of external clock operation

Clock Type Reference Port Switching Standard

External Reference Internal Internal 10 MHz Default

External External Ref Clock Ext Ref (SMA) Manual switching

(Input signal level >-3 dBm)

GPS GPS Clock GPS (SMA) Automatic switching

(GPS signal received)

Trigger Internal Internal Trigger Default

External External Trigger Trigger (SMA) Manual switching

GPS GPS GPS (SMA) Manual switching

Figure 175 Connection ports for external reference clock

Procedure

1 Connect an external reference or a GPS antenna to the JD700B series.

2 Press the SYSTEM hot key.
3 Press the Freq Reference soft key, and then select the reference option: Internal, External 10
MHz, External 13 MHz, External 15 MHz, or GPS.

324 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

NOTE
When a GPS antenna is connected and locked, GPS coordinates (longitude and latitude)
are displayed on the screen and frequency reference is automatically set to GPS in the
System > Freq Reference.

Table 15 External reference indicators

Type Indicator Description

Internal (green) The green INT icon indicates that the instrument uses the built-in
internal time base.

External (green) The green EXT icon indicates that an external reference is connected
and locked and that the instrument uses the same reference clock as
the signal source.

External (red) The red EXT icon indicates that an external reference is connect but not
locked.

GPS (green) The green GPS antenna icon indicates that a GPS antenna is
connected and locked.

GPS (yellow) The yellow GPS antenna icon indicates that a GPS antenna is
connected and locking is in progress.

GPS (grey) The grey GPS antenna icon indicates that a GPS antenna is not
connected, failed, or unable to be locked.

Conducting spectrum measurements

If you have configured test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 320, your
measurement result is displayed on the screen as like the following example, Figure 176.

Figure 176 Spectrum measurement screen with CDMA signal analyzer

Setting trace
You can display up to six traces on the measurement chart simultaneously.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 325

Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Select Trace soft key, and then select the trace number: T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, or T6.
The legend shape of the selected trace changes from square to round to indicate that the trace is
the active one now.
3 Do one of the following:
To Select Trace Legend

Clear current data and display with new Clear Write W

measurements

Display the input signal’s maximum response only Max Hold M

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

Display the input signal’s minimum response only Min Hold m

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

Capture the selected trace and compare traces Capture C

Load a saved trace More (1/2) > Load L

Hide the displayed trace Trace View > Off F

Remove all the traces and initialize the trace More (1/2) > Trace
settings Clear All

NOTE
For the Max Hold and Min Hold, your instrument compares newly acquired data with the
active trace and displays larger maximum values or smaller minimum values on the
screen. You can set it to Unlimited to hold and view maximum or minimum data or
specify a certain amount of time up to 60 seconds by using numeric keys or rotary knob.
4 To select the detection option, select More (1/2) > Detectors, and then do one of the following:

To display Select

Random noise better than the peak without missing signals Normal

The highest value in each data point Peak

The root mean squared average power across the spectrum RMS

The lowest value in each data point Negative Peak

The center value in each data point Sample

5 Optional. Select More (1/2) > Trace Info, and then select the trace number to view the trace’s
parameter setting information stored at the time of the measurement or None to hide the
information display.
6 Optional. If you have the two traces T1 and T2, you can perform trace math. To view the power
difference between the traces, press the T1 – T2 -> T5 or T2 – T1 -> T6 soft key.
The result is overlaid on the screen along with the second Y-axis.

Conducting RF measurements
Channel power
The Channel Power measurement is a common test used in the wireless industry to measure the total
transmitted power of a radio within a defined frequency channel. It acquires a number of points representing
the input signal in the time domain, transforms this information into the frequency domain using Fast Fourier
Transform (FFT), and then calculates the channel power. The effective resolution bandwidth of the frequency
domain trace is proportional to the number of points acquired for the FFT.

326 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

The channel power measurement identifies the total RF power, power spectral density (PSD) and peak to
average ratio (PAR) of the signal within the channel bandwidth (1.23 MHz for cdmaOne).

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 320, your
measurement result is displayed on the screen as like the following example, Figure 177.

Figure 177 Channel power measurement with CDMA signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 332 for more
information.

Occupied bandwidth
The Occupied Bandwidth measures the spectrum shape of the carrier. It is defined as the bandwidth, which
includes 99% of the transmitted power among total transmitted power.

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 320, your
measurement result is displayed on the screen as like the following example, Figure 178.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 327

Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

Figure 178 Occupied bandwidth measurement with CDMA signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 332 for more
information.

Spectrum emission mask (SEM)

The Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurement required by 3GPP2 specifications encompasses
different power limits and different measurement bandwidths (resolution bandwidths) at various frequency
offsets. It may be expressed as a ratio of power spectral densities between the carrier and the specified
offset frequency band. It provides useful figures-of-merit for the spectral re-growth and emissions produced
by components and circuit blocks, without the rigor of performing a full SEM measurement.

The SEM measures spurious signal levels in up to five pairs of offset or region frequencies and relates them
to the carrier power.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 320, your
measurement result is displayed on the screen as like the following example, Figure 179.

328 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

Figure 179 SEM measurement with CDMA signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 332 for more
information.

ACPR
The Adjacent Channel Power Ratio (ACPR) is defined as the ratio of the average power in the adjacent
frequency channel (or offset) to the average power in the transmitted frequency channel. It may be
expressed as the ratio of the integrated signal power in the adjacent channel to the integrated signal power
in the main channel.

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 320, your
measurement result is displayed on the screen as like the following example, Figure 180.

Figure 180 ACPR measurement with CDMA signal analyzer

JD700B Series User’s Guide 329

Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 332 for more
information.

Multi-ACPR
The Multi-ACPR measurement is used to perform multi-channel ACPR measurements with as many
channels as possible. It helps you to measure ACPR in multi-channel transmitting base station environment.

Setting frequency for Multi-ACPR

You can set the frequency with either frequency or channel number.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the frequency, do one of the following:
– To set the center frequency, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
b Press the Lowest Frequency soft key to set the starting center frequency.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
e Press the Highest Frequency soft key to set the stopping center frequency.
f Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
g Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
– To set the channel number, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Unit soft key and select Channel.
b To select the standard channel, press the Channel Std soft key and then select the
band to be measured.
c Press the Lowest Channel soft key to set the starting channel.
d Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
e Press the Enter soft key.
f Press the Highest Channel soft key to set the stopping channel.
g Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
h Press the Enter soft key.

After configuring test parameters, your measurement result is displayed on the screen as like the following
example, Figure 181.

330 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

Figure 181 Multi-ACPR measurement with CDMA signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 332 for more
information.

Spurious emissions
Out-of-band emissions are unwanted emissions immediately outside the channel bandwidth resulting from
the modulation process and non-linearity in the transmitter but excluding spurious emissions. The Spurious
Emissions measurement is to identify and determine the power level of out-of-band spurious emission within
the necessary channel bandwidth and modulated signal measured at the RF port of the Base Station.

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set up the range table and parameters, press the Range Table soft key and then complete
the following steps:
a Press the Range soft key, and then select the range number between 1 and 20 to add
as a new or change the existing settings.
b Do the following as desired:
– Select Start Frequency, and then specify the start frequency for the selected range.
– Select Stop Frequency, and then specify the stop frequency for the selected range.
– Select Start Limit, and then specify the lower limit for Pass/Fail indication.
– Select Stop Limit, and then specify the upper limit for Pass/Fail indication.
– Select More (1/2) > Attenuation, and then specify an value in the multiple of five.
– Select More (1/2) > RBW, and then specify a RBW value.
– Select More (1/2) > VBW, and then specify a VBW value.
c Press the PREV hard key.
d Toggle the Range soft key and select On to display the selected range in the result table or
Off to hide it from the table.
3 Toggle the Measure Type soft key between Examine and Full to select the measurement type.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 331

Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

NOTE
The Examine mode displays only the selected range while the Full mode lets the
instrument automatically changes the selected range from one another.

4 To set the number of measurements to be averaged, complete the following steps:

a Press the Average soft key.
b Enter a value between 1 and 100.
c Press the Enter soft key.
5 To move the highlighted bar in the result table to other range, complete the following steps:
a Press the Range soft key in the Measure Setup menu bar.
b Enter a value between 1 and 20.
c Press the Enter soft key.

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 320, your
measurement result is displayed on the screen as like the following example, Figure 182.

Figure 182 Spurious emissions measurement with CDMA signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 332 for more
information.

Setting limit for RF tests

By default, test limits specified in the standard are set for you. You can change thresholds if you desire.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the RF Test Limits soft key.
3 Select the test item(s) and set the limit(s) depending on your selected measurement mode:
To set the limit for Select Set

Channel power Channel Power High Limit, Low Limit

Occupied bandwidth Occupied BW High Limit

332 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

Spectrum emission mask Spectrum Emission Mask (On/Off only)

ACPR ACPR (On/Off only)

Multi-ACPR Multi-ACPR (On/Off only)

Spurious emissions Spurious Emissions (On/Off only)

4 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Conducting modulation measurements

In order to make accurate measurements of time offset and PN, you must connect an external trigger before
making a modulation measurement.

Constellation
The Constellation is used to observe some aspects of modulation accuracy and can reveal certain fault
mechanisms such as I/Q amplitude imbalance or quadrature imbalance. It displays constellation diagram by
modulation types.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 320, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the Pseudo-Noise (PN) offset, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the PN Offset soft key between Auto and Manual.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys to set manually.
c Press the Enter soft key.
3 To set the incremental step for the PN offset, complete the following steps:
a Press the PN Increment soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 333

Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 183 Constellation measurement with CDMA signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for modulation tests” on page 340 for
more information.

Code domain power

The Code Domain Power (CDP) measures the distribution of power across the set of code channels,
normalized to the total power. It helps to verify that each code channel is operating at its proper level and to
identify problems throughout the transmitter design from coding to the RF section. System imperfections
such as amplifier non-linearity will present themselves as an undesired distribution of power in the code
domain.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 320, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the Pseudo-Noise (PN) offset, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the PN Offset soft key between Auto and Manual.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys to set manually.
c Press the Enter soft key.
3 To set the incremental step for the PN offset, complete the following steps:
a Press the PN Increment soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 To set the threshold between Auto and Manual, complete the following steps:

334 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

a Press the Threshold soft key. Its default setting is -27 dB.
b Enter a value between -50 and zero by using the numeric keys to change the value in the
Manual mode.
c Press the Enter soft key.
5 Toggle the Q-Paging soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the quick page channel
that indicates the power of Quick Page Walsh code 80.
6 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 184 Code domain power measurement with CDMA signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for modulation tests” on page 340 for
more information.

Setting display
You can view your measurement results in a different view option.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Code Order soft key, and then select the code order option from the following choices:
– Hadamard: To assign the number based on Walsh code order and display the measured
code power according to the assigned number in sequence.
– Bit Reverse: Code number in binary bit is reversed relative to the Hadamard method.
3 Toggle the Base Code Length soft key and select the base Walsh code number: 64 or 128.

Codogram
The Codogram displays how the code level is changing over time and makes it easier for you to view traffic
channels as they initiate and terminate and to track traffic channels call levels over time. The Codogram

JD700B Series User’s Guide 335

Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

measurements can be saved into an external USB memory so that a post-analysis can be done with the
application software JDViewer.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 320, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the Pseudo-Noise (PN) offset, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the PN Offset soft key between Auto and Manual.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys to set manually.
c Press the Enter soft key.
3 To set the incremental step for the PN offset, complete the following steps:
a Press the PN Increment soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 To set the threshold between Auto and Manual, complete the following steps:
a Select More (1/2) > Threshold. Its default setting is -27 dB.
b Enter a value between -50 and zero by using the numeric keys to change the value in the
Manual mode.
c Press the Enter soft key.
5 Toggle the Q-Paging soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the quick page channel
that indicates the power of Quick Page Walsh code 80.
6 To set the time interval, complete the following steps:
a Press the Time Interval soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
7 To place the time cursor to analyze your measurements, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Time Cursor soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the time cursor.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
NOTE
When the time cursor is enabled, the measurement is put on hold and information about
the time cursor is displayed.

8 To start a new measurement, press the Reset/Restart soft key.

9 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

336 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 185 Codogram in full view with CDMA signal analyzer

Setting display
You can view your measurement results in a different view option.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Code Order soft key, and then select the code order option from the following choices:
– Hadamard: To assign the number based on Walsh code order and display the measured
code power according to the assigned number in sequence.
– Bit Reverse: Code number in binary bit is reversed relative to the Hadamard method.
3 Toggle the Base Code Length soft key and select the base Walsh code number: 64 or 128.

RCSI
The Received Code Strength Indicator (RCSI) is used to track the power variation of cdmaOne or cdma2000
control channels such as Pilot, Paging, Sync, and Q-Paging over time. The RCSI measurements can be
saved into an external USB memory so that a post-analysis can be done with the application software
JDViewer.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 320, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 337

Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

2 To set the Pseudo-Noise (PN) offset, complete the following steps:

a Toggle the PN Offset soft key between Auto and Manual.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys to set manually.
c Press the Enter soft key.
3 To set the incremental step for the PN offset, complete the following steps:
a Press the PN Increment soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 To set the threshold between Auto and Manual, complete the following steps:
a Press the Threshold soft key. Its default setting is -27 dB.
b Enter a value between -50 and zero by using the numeric keys to change the value in the
Manual mode.
c Press the Enter soft key.
5 Toggle the Q-Paging soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the quick page channel
that indicates the power of Quick Page Walsh code 80.
6 Press the Alarm Code soft key, and then select the alarm code option: None, Pilot, Page, Sync,
or Quick Page.
7 To set the alarm mask, complete the following steps:
a Press the Set Mask soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the [dB|dBm] soft key.
8 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 186 RCSI measurement with CDMA signal analyzer

Setting display
You can view your measurement results in a different view option.

338 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Code Order soft key, and then select the code order option from the following choices:
– Hadamard: To assign the number based on Walsh code order and display the measured
code power according to the assigned number in sequence.
– Bit Reverse: Code number in binary bit is reversed relative to the Hadamard method.
3 Toggle the Base Code Length soft key and select the base Walsh code number: 64 or 128.

CDP Table
The CDP Table is used to look at a numeric and textual description of all the active code channels in the
signal.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 320, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the Pseudo-Noise (PN) offset, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the PN Offset soft key between Auto and Manual.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys to set manually.
c Press the Enter soft key.
3 To set the incremental step for the PN offset, complete the following steps:
a Press the PN Increment soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 To set the threshold between Auto and Manual, complete the following steps:
a Press the Threshold soft key. Its default setting is -27 dB.
b Enter a value between -50 and zero by using the numeric keys to change the value in the
Manual mode.
c Press the Enter soft key.
5 Toggle the Q-Paging soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the quick page channel
that indicates the power of Quick Page Walsh code 80.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 339

Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 187 CDP Table measurement with CDMA signal analyzer

Setting display
If the CDP table spans over to the next page(s), you can change pages up and down to view your
measurement results.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Code Order soft key, and then select the code order option from the following choices:
– Hadamard: To assign the number based on Walsh code order and display the measured
code power according to the assigned number in sequence.
– Bit Reverse: Code number in binary bit is reversed relative to the Hadamard method.
3 Toggle the Base Code Length soft key and select the base Walsh code number: 64 or 128.
4 Select Page Up or Page Down as needed to scroll the screen up and down.

Setting limit for modulation tests

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Modulation Test Limits soft key.
3 Select the test item(s) and set the limit(s) depending on your selected measurement mode:

To set the limit for Select Set

Frequency error Frequency Error High Limit, Low Limit

Time offset Time Offset High Limit, Low Limit

Waveform quality (Rho) Rho Low Limit

Carrier feed through Carrier Feed Through High Limit

340 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

Pilot power Pilot Power High Limit [Abs|Rel]

Low Limit [Abs|Rel]

Highest level among inactive channels Max Inactive High Limit

4 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

NOTE
The Time Offset compares the PN offset timing with the overall system time and the
instrument checks the start of PN offset in comparison to either the GPS signal or the
even second clock signal.

NOTE
The Rho measures the modulation quality for a CDMA transmitter along with EVM and
Walsh Channel Power. It includes all errors occurred along the transmitter chain such as
base band filtering, abnormality of I/Q modulator and distortion in power amplifier. A
perfect Rho value is 1.0 indicating that all of the power is being transmitted correctly.

NOTE
The Carrier Feed Through is a result of the RF carrier signal feeding through the I/Q
modulator and riding on the output circuitry without being modulated.

Performing auto measurements

The Auto Measure function of the JD700B series allows a complete signal profiling covering RF
characterization and modulation quality parameters of up to 10 different carriers, particularly useful on an
overlay architecture where base stations are transmitting in different frequencies.

The Auto Measure can be easily executed either by selecting a menu in the instrument or by running a
programmed scenario in the PC-based application so that the instrument automatically configure and
perform tests on every aspect of all the carriers.

Setting limit for auto measure

You can set test limits for test item(s) in the auto measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the RF Test Limits soft key, and then enable test limits as desired.
3 Press the Modulation Test Limits soft key, and then enable test limits as desired.
4 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 320, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to

JD700B Series User’s Guide 341

Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Toggle the Configuration soft key and select the configuration option:
– Current: Lets the instrument use current frequency (single carrier) and determine pass or
fail based on the instrument s limit settings in Auto Measure.
– Scenario: Runs a test with a programmed scenario in JDViewer.
The Scenario menu becomes activated.
3 To load a scenario, press the Scenario soft key, and then select a scenario file to load.
4 Toggle the Test Time soft key and select the test time option:
– Now: Lets the instrument run a test only once.
– Schedule: Lets the instrument repeat tests as defined in the Set Timing.
The Set Timing menu becomes activated.
5 To define a schedule for an auto measurement, complete the following steps:
a Press the Set Timing soft key.
b Press the Start Time (HH:MM) soft key.
c Enter the time in the HH:MM format, and then press the Enter soft key.
d Press the Stop Time (HH:MM) soft key.
e Enter the time in the HH:MM format, and then press the Enter soft key.
f Press the Time Interval soft key.
g Enter the amount of time in minutes, and then press the Enter soft key.
6 To set external offset, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the dB soft key.
7 To save your settings and results, go to SAVE/LOAD > Save and then perform functions as you
desire. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.
8 Press the Run Test soft key to start to run a test.
The Auto Measure Results window appears at the end of the test.
9 To stop running the test, press the Abort soft key.
10 To change the view on the screen during the test, press the Display and then select the view
option from the following choices:
– Screen: You can view each measurement screen as the test progresses.
– Results: You can view a measurement result table as the test progresses.
– Settings: You can view a measurement setting table as the test progresses.

Setting display
After completion of the auto measurement, the screen menu changes to Trace/Display so that you can view
the results in different forms.

Procedure

1 Toggle the Display soft key and select the display option:
– Result: You can view the result table.
The Display Result menu becomes activated.
– Settings: You can view the measurement settings for the auto measurement.
2 Toggle the Display Result soft key and select the display result option:
– Full: You can view detailed measurement readings with the pass/fail indication.

342 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

– Quick: You can view only the Pass/Fail results.

3 To view the measurement results for a different carrier, press the View Carrier soft key and then
select the carrier number to view.

Performing power statistics CCDF measurements

The Power Statistics Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function (CCDF) measurement characterizes
the power statistics of the input signal. It provides PAR (Peak to Average power Ratio) versus different
probabilities.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 320, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the CCDF Length soft key to set the length of the CCDF.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 100 by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
4 Press the Enter soft key.

Measurement example
Figure 188 CCDF measurement with CDMA signal analyzer

JD700B Series User’s Guide 343

Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

Conducting CDMA OTA measurements

This Over The Air (OTA) measurement has channel scanner, PN scanner, multipath profile, and Code
Domain power screens. It is used to verify CDMA transmitter performance at any location providing reflective
measurements and identifying signals providing from different sites. The Code Domain power shows not
only modulation performance metric but also amplifier capacity and code utilization metric. The Amplifier
capacity (code utilization) measurement is an estimate of the amount of power amplifier capacity (code
utilization) that is being used expressed in percent of maximum.

Channel scanner
Setting channel/frequency

Procedure

To set the channels to be scanned:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Channel.
3 Press the Index soft key, and then enter an index number between one and six by turning the
rotary knob or using the numeric keys.
4 To select the standard channel, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Std soft key. The standard channel window appears.
See “Appendix C – Band, frequency & channel standard” on page 664 for more information.
b Highlight the band to be measured by using the rotary knob, the arrow keys, or the
Page Up/Page Down soft keys.
c Press the Select soft key or the rotary knob to confirm the selection.
5 To set the channel number for the selected index, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Number soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 The instrument displays a corresponding center frequency for the channel number.
7 To set the integration bandwidth for the selected index, complete the following steps:
a Press the Integration Bandwidth soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
8 To add more channels to be scanned, repeat steps 3-6.
9 Press the ESC hard key to dismiss the channel list window and view the scanning result.

To set the frequencies to be scanned:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
3 Press the Index soft key, and then enter an index number between one and six by turning the
rotary knob or using the numeric keys.
4 To set the center frequency for the selected index, complete the following steps:
a Press the Center Frequency soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
5 To set the integration bandwidth for the selected index, complete the following steps:
a Press the Integration Bandwidth soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
6 To add more channels to be scanned, repeat steps 3-5.

344 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

7 Press the ESC hard key to dismiss the channel list window and view the scanning result.

Setting measure setup

After configuring other test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 320, you
can continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can
also use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on
to the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the incremental step for the PN offset, complete the following steps:
a Press the PN Increment soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
3 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting limit for OTA channel scanner

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Limit Line soft key to set a threshold for the limit line and Pass/Fail indication.
3 Enter a value, and then press the dBm unit soft key.
4 Toggle the Limit Line soft key between On and Off to display or dismiss the limit line.
5 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
6 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 345

Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 189 Channel scanner measurement with CDMA OTA signal analyzer

PN scanner
Each access network sector has a unique PN offset. The PN Scanner is used to identify all the active PNs in
an area.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 320, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the incremental step for the PN offset, complete the following steps:
a Press the PN Increment soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
3 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

346 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 190 PN scanner measurement with CDMA OTA signal analyzer

Multipath profile
The Multipath Profile enables you to determine RF environmental conditions of testing area. It indicates the
amount of power of the dominant pilot signal that is dispersed outside the main correlation peak due to
multipath echoes that are expressed in dB. This value should be very small ideally.

The multipath profile is the result of portions of the original broadcast signal arriving at the receiving antenna
out of phase. This can be caused by the signal being reflected off objects such as buildings, or being
refracted through the atmosphere differently from the main signal.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 320, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the incremental step for the PN offset, complete the following steps:
a Press the PN Increment soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
3 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 347

Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 191 Multipath profile measurement with CDMA OTA signal analyzer

Code domain power

Channels with high correlation factors are determined to be active channels and are indicated as such on
the display. Once the channels are decoded, the analyzer determines the power of each channel relative to
the total signal power.

This measurement helps to verify that each code channel is operating at its proper level and helps to identify
problems throughout the transmitter design from the coding to the RF section. System imperfections, such
as the non-linearity of amplifiers, will present themselves as an undesired distribution of power in the code
domain.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in “Configuring test parameters” on page 320, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the Pseudo-Noise (PN) offset, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the PN Offset soft key between Auto and Manual.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys to set manually.
c Press the Enter soft key.
3 To set the incremental step for the PN offset, complete the following steps:
a Press the PN Increment soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 To set the threshold between Auto and Manual, complete the following steps:
a Press the Threshold soft key. Its default setting is -27 dB.

348 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

b Enter a value between -50 and zero by using the numeric keys to change the value in the
Manual mode.
c Press the Enter soft key.
5 Toggle the Q-Paging soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the quick page channel
that indicates the power of Quick Page Walsh code 80.
6 To set the maximum amplifier power, complete the following steps:
a Press the Max Amplifier Power soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the dBm soft key.
7 To set the pilot power, complete the following steps:
a Press the Pilot Power soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the dBm soft key.
8 To set the threshold for pilot dominance, complete the following steps:
a Select More (1/2) > Pilot Dominance >.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
NOTE
Recommended value is 10. Color of the Pilot Dominance indicator on the screen bases
on this setting.

9 To set the threshold for multipath power, complete the following steps:
a Select More (1/2) > Multipath Power <.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
NOTE
Recommended value is one. Color of the multipath power indicator on the screen bases
on this setting.

10 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 192 Code domain power measurement with CDMA OTA signal analyzer

JD700B Series User’s Guide 349

Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication.

Setting display
You can view your measurement results in a different view option.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Code Order soft key, and then select the code order option from the following choices:
– Hadamard: To assign the number based on Walsh code order and display the measured
code power according to the assigned number in sequence.
– Bit Reverse: Code number in binary bit is reversed relative to the Hadamard method.
3 Toggle the Base Code Length soft key and select the base Walsh code number: 64 or 128.

Route map
The JD700B Series provides the Route Map function that allows you to collect data of points in an indoor or
outdoor environment and track the received signals and coverage of RF transmitters by plotting data real
time directly on top of a loaded floor plan or a map.

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 If required, connect a GPS receiver to your JD700B series for outdoor mapping.
Indoor mapping does not necessarily need a GPS antenna.
2 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 320.
3 To load your map file, complete the following steps:
a Plug in your USB drive that has a floor map or .mcf file type created in JDMapCreator. If
the JDMapCreator application on your computer is connected to the instrument via USB or
LAN, you can send a map file with a single layer to the instrument directly by using the
Send to EQP menu in JDMapCreator.
NOTE
The JDMapCreator converts and resizes any scanned floor plan or layout to fit onto your
instrument’s display. JDMapCreator 1.2.0 or later can save a multiple-layered map,
providing x1, x2, and x4 views, as a sizable map file so that you can zoom in and out
after loading it.
b Press SAVE/LOAD hot key, and then select Load > Load Map. See “Using load” on page
35 for more information.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
5 Press the Plot Point soft key, and then select the plot point option from the following choices:
– To collect data/plot points automatically as you move around in a vehicle or outside, press
the GPS soft key and then toggle the Screen Mode soft key between Map and Full.
NOTE
With the Map setting, you can view only the collected points that can be seen within the
boundary of the loaded map. If a point is off the map, the instrument displays an arrow to
indicate the direction of the current location on the map and the distance from the center
to the location at the top of the screen. With the Full setting, you can view all the
collected points of the route without the loaded map.
– To collect data/plot points manually without a GPS antenna in an indoor environment, press
the Position soft key.

350 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

6 Press the Plot Item soft key, and then select the measurement option: Pilot Power or Ec/Io.
7 To set the incremental step for the PN offset, complete the following steps:
a Press the PN Increment soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
8 Toggle the Plot soft key and select Start.
9 Touch directly on the screen or press the ENTER hard key to collect data and plot points on the
loaded map for the Position setting.
NOTE
For the Position setting, you can change the direction of the route with the arrow keys
and the distance with the rotary knob.
10 Toggle the Plot soft key and select Stop to stop plotting.
11 Press the SAVE/LOAD hot key to save the result.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.
NOTE
The instrument does not automatically save the collected data. It is recommended that
you save the result. Otherwise, you will lose all the collected data.

Setting limit
You can set the thresholds for the four different color indicators for Pilot power or Ec/Io.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 To set the limits for pilot power if you have selected Pilot for the plot item, complete the following
steps:
a Press the Pilot Power soft key.
b Press the Excellent soft key to set its threshold.
c Enter a value, and then press the dBm soft key. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Press the Very Good soft key to set its threshold.
e Enter a value, and then press the dBm soft key. You can also use the rotary knob.
f Press the Good soft key to set its threshold.
g Enter a value, and then press the dBm soft key. You can also use the rotary knob.
h Press the Fair soft key to set its threshold.
i Enter a value, and then press the dBm soft key. You can also use the rotary knob.
j Press the Poor soft key to set its threshold.
k Enter a value, and then press the dBm soft key. You can also use the rotary knob.
3 To set the limits for Ec/Io if you have selected as for the plot item , complete the following steps:
a Press the Ec/Io soft key.
b Press the Good soft key to set its threshold.
c Enter a value, and then press the Enter soft key. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Press the Fair soft key to set its threshold.
e Enter a value, and then press the Enter soft key. You can also use the rotary knob.
f Press the Poor soft key to set its threshold.
g Enter a value, and then press the Enter soft key. You can also use the rotary knob.
4 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 351

Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 193 Route map measurement with CDMA OTA signal analyzer

1) Pilot Power

2) Pilot Ec/Io

Controlling a map
If you have loaded a sizable map that was created in JDMapCreator 1.2.0 or later, you can use the Map
Control feature that enables you to zoom into the map and view a specific area of interest in detail.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Map Control soft key. This key is active only when you have loaded a sizable map.
3 Do one of the following:
– To zoom into an area of interest directly, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Zoom to soft key and select Area.
The black rectangle appears on the map.

352 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 10 Using CDMA Signal Analyzer

b Press the Zoom In and Zoom Out soft keys, as you need, to decrease and increase
the selected area.
c Move the rectangle by using the four arrow keys, as you need, to place it in a specific
area of interest.
d Press the center of the rotary knob to zoom into the selected area. You can also press
the Zoom to soft key again to zoom into the selected area.
– To zoom into the center or zoom out from the center, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Zoom to soft key and select Center.
b Press the Zoom In and Zoom Out soft keys, as you need, to zoom in and zoom out.
c Move the zoomed-in area by using the four arrow keys, as you need.
4 To set the location mode, toggle the Location Mode soft key between Auto and Manual and
select the one you desire.
– Auto: The instrument compares the coordinates of the displayed map with recevied GPS
information. If your current location goes out of the displayed area and enters into the next
zoomed-in section within the base map, the map display changes automatically to the next
section in which your current position is.
– Manual: The map display of the zoomed-in area remains unchanged even if your current
location goes out of the displayed area. You can change the displayed area manually by
using the arrow keys.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 353

 11

Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

This chapter provides instructions for using the EV-DO Signal Analyzer function (option 021) with the EV-DO
OTA Analyzer function (option 041). Topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

n Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 355

n Display overview ..................................................................................................................... 355
n Connecting a cable.................................................................................................................. 356
n Selecting measurement mode ................................................................................................ 358
n Configuring test parameters .................................................................................................... 358
n Conducting spectrum measurements ..................................................................................... 363
n Conducting RF measurements ............................................................................................... 364
n Conducting power vs. time measurements ............................................................................. 370
n Conducting modulation measurements................................................................................... 372
n Performing auto measurements .............................................................................................. 382
n Performing power statistics CCDF measurements ................................................................. 384
n Conducting EV-DO OTA measurements ................................................................................. 384
 Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

Introduction
The EV-DO Signal Analyzer of the JD700B series performs power and spectrum measurements as well as
modulation analysis to test the proper transmitter performance of EV-DO systems. It performs conformance
testing according to the following standards providing a simple Pass/Fail indication on each test.

n 3GPP2 C.S0024-B. cdma2000 High Rate Packet Data Air Interface Specification
n 3GPP2 C.S0032-B. Recommended Minimum Performance Standards for cdma2000 High Rate
Packet Data Access Network

You may alter the measurement parameters for specialized analysis. Pass/Fail testing with standard defined
or user defined upper and lower limits and the Pass/Fail indictor help you to determine base station
performance easily.

This instrument provides the following measurement tools for EV-DO system:

n Spectrum Analysis
n RF Analysis
- Channel Power
- Occupied Bandwidth
- Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM)
- Adjacent Channel Power Ratio (ACLR)
- Multi-ACPR
- Spurious Emissions
n Power vs. Time: Idle Slot and Active Slot
n Modulation Analysis
- Constellation
- Code Domain Power
- MAC Codogram
- Received Code Strength Indicator (RCSI)
- MAC CDP Table
n Auto Measure
n Power Statistics CCDF
n Over The Air (OTA)
- Channel Scanner
- PN Scanner
- Multipath Profile
- Code Domain Power
- Route Map

Display overview
Figure 194 provides descriptions for each segment of the measurement screen.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 355

Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

Figure 194 EV-DO signal analyzer measurement screen

Connecting a cable
Direct connection
Procedure

1 Connect the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B series and the Power amplifier output
port of BTS.

Figure 195 Direct connection

JD785B/JD745B JD788B/JD748B

Indirect connection
Procedure

1 Connect the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B series and the monitor (test) port of

356 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

BTS.

Figure 196 Indirect connection

JD785B/JD745B JD788B/JD748B

CAUTION
The maximum power for the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port is +25 dBm (0.316 W) for
JD780B series and +20 dBm (0.1 W) for JD740B series. If the level of the input signal to
be measured is greater than this, use a High Power Attenuator to prevent damage
when you directly connect the signal to the instrument or connect the signal from the
coupling port of a directional coupler.

Over the air (OTA)

Procedure

1 Connect an Omni/directional RF antenna to the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B

series.
2 Connect a GPS antenna to the GPS port of the JD700B series.

Figure 197 OTA connection

JD785B/JD745B JD788B/JD748B

CAUTION
If the input signal level to be measured is less than 0 dBm, set 0 dB attenuation or turn on
the preamp to have better dynamic range for the OTA testing.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 357

Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

Selecting measurement mode

Procedure

1 Press the MODE hard key.

2 Press the Signal Analyzer soft key.
3 Press the EV-DO soft key. The Spectrum mode is set by default.
4 Press the MEASURE hot key, and then select the measurement mode option from the following
choices:
– Spectrum
– RF Analysis > Channel Power, Occupied BW, Spectrum Emission Mask, ACPR,
Multi-ACPR, or Spurious Emissions
– Power vs Time > Power vs Time (Idle Slot) or Power vs Time (Active Slot)
– Modulation Analysis > Constellation > Composite 64, Composite 128, Pilot, MAC 64,
MAC 128, or Data
– Modulation Analysis > Code Domain Power > Pilot, MAC 64, MAC 128, or Data
– Modulation Analysis > MAC Codogram, RCSI, or MAC CDP Table
– Auto Measure
– Power Statistics CCDF
– OTA > Channel Scanner, PN Scanner, Multipath Profile, Code Domain Power,
or Route Map

Configuring test parameters

Setting frequency
You can set the frequency with either frequency or channel number. If a frequency to be set matches to the
frequency corresponding to the selected channel standard, the instrument calculates its channel number
and updates the screen with it automatically.

Procedure

To set the center frequency:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
3 Press the Center Frequency soft key.
4 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
5 Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
6 Optional. To define the amount of frequency increment for the rotary knob, complete the following
steps:
a Press the Frequency Step soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.

To set the channel number:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Channel.
3 To select the standard channel, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Std soft key. The standard channel window appears.

358 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

See “Appendix C – Band, frequency & channel standard” on page 664 for more information.
b Highlight the band to be measured by using the rotary knob, the arrow keys, or the Page
Up/Page Down soft keys.
c Press the Select soft key or the rotary knob to confirm the selection.
4 Press the Channel Number soft key.
5 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
6 Press the Enter soft key.
The instrument automatically displays the corresponding center frequency value for the selected
channel number.
7 Optional. To define the amount of channel increment for the rotary knob, complete the following
steps:
a Press the Channel Step soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.

NOTE
This frequency setting is not used in the Multi-ACLR and Spurious Emissions modes.

Setting amplitude
Reference level and attenuation
You can set the reference and attenuation levels automatically or manually to optimize the display of the
traces measured, as you desire.

Procedure

To automatically set the reference and attenuation level:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Press the Auto Scale soft key.
Each time you press this key, both of the Y-axis scale and input attenuation level change to be
optimized with some margin.

To set the reference or attenuation level manually:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 To set the maximum reference value on the Y-axis manually, complete the following steps:
a Press the Reference Level soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys or the rotary knob with 10 dB increments.
c Press the unit soft key or the ENTER hard key.
This unit key name changes according to the setting in the Units menu.
NOTE
In the measurements such as Code Domain Power and MAC Codogram, you may
need to select the reference option between Relative and Absolute before setting the
reference level.

3 To set the attenuation option, select one from the following choices:
– To set the input attenuator’s level automatically, select Attenuation > Auto.
NOTE
It is recommended that you set the Attenuation to Auto in most situations so that the
level of the input attenuator can be set automatically according to your input signal level.
– To set the input attenuation manually up to 55 dB for JD780B series or 50 dB for JD740B
series to optimize S/N, complete the following steps:
a Select Attenuation > Manual.
b Press the Attenuation Value soft key to set the level.
c Enter a value in fives by using the numeric keys.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 359

Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

d Press the dB soft key or the ENTER hard key.

– To couple the input attenuator’s level with your reference level setting, select Attenuation >
Couple.
As you increase the reference setting, the attenuation level also increases acoordingly.

Optional. To change the scale unit:

1 Select More (1/2) > Units.
2 Select the unit of the display scale: dBm, dBV, dBmV, dBµV, V, or W.
The scale unit on the screen changes accordingly.
NOTE
This Units menu is available in the Spectrum and RF Analysis modes.

Scale per division

You can use the Scale/Div feature available for the spectrum and RF analysis. It represents the value of one
division on the horizontal scale. The default setting is 10 dB per division and the maximum value can be set
up to 20 dB.

Procedure

To set the scale per division:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Select More (1/2) > Scale/Div.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 20 by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.

Pre-amplifier
You can turn the internal pre-amplifier on to correct and compensate for the gain of the preamp so that
amplitude readings show the value at the input connector.

Procedure

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Toggle the Preamp soft key and select On or Off as needed.

NOTE
You can turn the Preamp on when the input attenuation range is from 0 dB to 10 dB. If
the attenuation value is manually set to greater than 10 dB, the instrument will
automatically turn off the pre-amplifier to display low-level signal properly on the chart.

External offset
You can turn the External Offset on and manually set the external offset value. An offset consists of a cable
loss and a user offset and the measurement result shows the value reflecting both offset values. When the
external offset value is set at 40 dB in the Spectrum mode, the measurement result compensates 40 dB at
both the Spectrum Analyzer and Signal Analyzer modes.

Procedure

To set the external offset:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

360 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

2 Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On.

3 Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.

To turn the external offset off:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Toggle the External Offset soft key and select Off.

Setting average
You can set the number of measurements to be averaged for the trace presentation. A maximum of 100
times of averaging can be set. When the averaging reaches to your setting, a new measurement value
replaces the measurement value in sequence from the earliest.

Procedure

1 Press the BW/AVG hard key.

2 Press the Average soft key.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 100 as needed by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the Enter soft key.

Setting sweep mode

The default setting is Continue to sweep continuously for most on-going measurements. If you want to hold
the measurement or get a single sweep, you can change the sweep mode.

Procedure

To select the single sweep mode:

1 Press the SWEEP hot key.
2 Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Single. You can also use the HOLD hot key.
The letter HOLD in red appears and the sweeping is paused.
3 Optional. Press the Sweep Once soft key to get a new measurement.

To return to the continuous sweep mode:

1 Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Continue. You can also use the HOLD hot key.
The letter HOLD in red disappears and the sweeping resumes.

Setting trigger source

You can set the trigger source option for your measurements. Connecting an external trigger is necessary
for accurate modulation measurements on EV-DO systems.

Procedure

1 Press the TRIGGER hot key.

2 Select the trigger source option from the choices: Internal, External, and GPS.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 361

Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

Setting external clock

To enhance the reliability of modulation analysis measurements the JD700B series must be synchronized
with a base station. When an external clock is not supplied, the instrument works with its built-in internal
high-accuracy time base and some measurement results may exhibit inaccurate values. Therefore, it is
highly recommended that you use the same reference clock as the signal source. You can use the
TRIGGER hot key to set the external clock.

Table 16 Standards of external clock operation

Clock Type Reference Port Switching Standard

External Reference Internal Internal 10 MHz Default

External External Ref Clock Ext Ref (SMA) Manual switching

(Input signal level >-3 dBm)

GPS GPS Clock GPS (SMA) Automatic switching

(GPS signal received)

Trigger Internal Internal Trigger Default

External External Trigger Trigger (SMA) Manual switching

GPS GPS GPS (SMA) Manual switching

Figure 198 Connection ports for external reference clock

Procedure

1 Connect an external reference or a GPS antenna to the JD700B series.

2 Press the SYSTEM hot key.
3 Press the Freq Reference soft key, and then select the reference option: Internal, External 10
MHz, External 13 MHz, External 15 MHz, or GPS.

NOTE
When a GPS antenna is connected and locked, GPS coordinates (longitude and latitude)
are displayed on the screen and frequency reference is automatically set to GPS in the
System > Freq Reference.

Table 17 External reference indicators

Type Indicator Description

Internal (green) The green INT icon indicates that the instrument uses the built-in
internal time base.

External (green) The green EXT icon indicates that an external reference is connected
and locked and that the instrument uses the same reference clock as
the signal source.

362 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

External (red) The red EXT icon indicates that an external reference is connect but not
locked.

GPS (green) The green GPS antenna icon indicates that a GPS antenna is
connected and locked.

GPS (yellow) The yellow GPS antenna icon indicates that a GPS antenna is
connected and locking is in progress.

GPS (grey) The grey GPS antenna icon indicates that a GPS antenna is not
connected, failed, or unable to be locked.

Conducting spectrum measurements

If you have configured test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 358, your
measurement result is displayed on the screen as like the following example, Figure 199.

Figure 199 Spectrum measurement screen with EV-DO signal analyzer

Setting trace
You can display up to six traces on the measurement chart simultaneously.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Select Trace soft key, and then select the trace number: T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, or T6.
The legend shape of the selected trace changes from square to round to indicate that the trace is
the active one now.
3 Do one of the following:
To Select Trace Legend

Clear current data and display with new Clear Write W

measurements

Display the input signal’s maximum response only Max Hold M

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

JD700B Series User’s Guide 363

Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

Display the input signal’s minimum response only Min Hold m

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

Capture the selected trace and compare traces Capture C

Load a saved trace More (1/2) > Load L

Hide the displayed trace Trace View > Off F

Remove all the traces and initialize the trace More (1/2) > Trace
settings Clear All

NOTE
For the Max Hold and Min Hold, your instrument compares newly acquired data with the
active trace and displays larger maximum values or smaller minimum values on the
screen. You can set it to Unlimited to hold and view maximum or minimum data or
specify a certain amount of time up to 60 seconds by using numeric keys or rotary knob.
4 Optional. Select More (1/2) > Trace Info, and then select the trace number to view the trace’s
parameter setting information stored at the time of the measurement or None to hide the
information display.
5 Optional. If you have the two traces T1 and T2, you can perform trace math. To view the power
difference between the traces, press the T1 – T2 -> T5 or T2 – T1 -> T6 soft key.
The result is overlaid on the screen along with the second Y-axis.

Conducting RF measurements
Channel power
The Channel Power measurement is a common test used in the wireless industry to measure the total
transmitted power of a radio within a defined frequency channel. It acquires a number of points representing
the input signal in the time domain, transforms this information into the frequency domain using Fast Fourier
Transform (FFT), and then calculates the channel power. The effective resolution bandwidth of the frequency
domain trace is proportional to the number of points acquired for the FFT.

The channel power measurement identifies the total RF power, power spectral density (PSD) and peak to
average ratio (PAR) of the signal in the EV-DO channel bandwidth (1.23 MHz).

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 358, your
measurement result is displayed on the screen as like the following example, Figure 200.

364 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

Figure 200 Channel power measurement with EV-DO signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 370 for more
information.

Occupied bandwidth
The Occupied Bandwidth measures the spectrum shape of the carrier. It is defined as the bandwidth, which
includes 99% of the transmitted power among total transmitted power.

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 358, your
measurement result is displayed on the screen as like the following example, Figure 201.

Figure 201 Occupied bandwidth measurement with EV-DO signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable

JD700B Series User’s Guide 365

Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 370 for more
information.

Spectrum emission mask (SEM)

The Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurement required by 3GPP2 specifications encompasses
different power limits and different measurement bandwidths (resolution bandwidths) at various frequency
offsets. It may be expressed as a ratio of power spectral densities between the carrier and the specified
offset frequency band. It provides useful figures-of-merit for the spectral re-growth and emissions produced
by components and circuit blocks, without the rigor of performing a full SEM measurement.

The SEM measures spurious signal levels in up to five pairs of offset or region frequencies and relates them
to the carrier power.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 358, your
measurement result is displayed on the screen as like the following example, Figure 202.

Figure 202 SEM measurement with EV-DO signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 370 for more
information.

ACPR
The Adjacent Channel Power Ratio (ACPR) is defined as the ratio of the average power in the adjacent
frequency channel (or offset) to the average power in the transmitted frequency channel. It may be
expressed as the ratio of the integrated signal power in the adjacent channel to the integrated signal power
in the main channel.

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 358, your
measurement result is displayed on the screen as like the following example, Figure 203.

366 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

Figure 203 ACPR measurement with EV-DO signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 370 for more
information.

Multi-ACPR
The Multi-ACPR measurement is used to perform multi-channel ACPR measurements with as many
channels as possible. It helps you to measure ACPR in multi-channel transmitting Base Station environment.

Setting frequency for Multi-ACPR

You can set the frequency with either frequency or channel number.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the frequency, do one of the following:
– To set the center frequency, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
b Press the Lowest Frequency soft key to set the starting center frequency.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
e Press the Highest Frequency soft key to set the stopping center frequency.
f Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
g Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
– To set the channel number, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Unit soft key and select Channel.
b To select the standard channel, press the Channel Std soft key and then select the
band to be measured.
c Press the Lowest Channel soft key to set the starting channel.
d Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
e Press the Enter soft key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 367

Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

f Press the Highest Channel soft key to set the stopping channel.
g Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
h Press the Enter soft key.

After configuring the test parameters, your measurement result is displayed on the screen as like the
following example, Figure 204.

Figure 204 Multi-ACPR measurement with EV-DO signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 370 for more
information.

Spurious emissions
Out-of-band emissions are unwanted emissions immediately outside the channel bandwidth resulting from
the modulation process and non-linearity in the transmitter but excluding spurious emissions. The Spurious
Emissions measurement is to identify and determine the power level of out-of-band spurious emission within
the necessary channel bandwidth and modulated signal measured at the RF port of the Base Station.

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set up the range table and frequency range, press the Range Table soft key and then
complete the following steps:
a Press the Range soft key, and then enter the range number to add a new range or change
an existing one.
b Press the Enter soft key.
c Press the Start Frequency soft key to set up the frequency range.
d Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
e Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
f Press the Stop Frequency soft key to set up the frequency range.

368 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

g Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
h Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
3 Toggle the Range soft key between On and Off to display or hide the selected range.
4 To set up the test limits for Pass/Fail indication, complete the following steps:
a Press the Start Limit soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the dBm soft key.
d Press the Stop Limit soft key.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
f Select the dBm soft key.
5 To set up the other parameters, complete the following steps:
a Select More (1/2) > Attenuation to set up the attenuation value.
a Enter a value in the multiple of five.
b Press the dB soft key or the ENTER hard key.
c Press the RBW soft key.
d Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
e Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
f Press the VBW soft key.
g Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
h Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
6 Press the PREV hard key.
7 Toggle the Measure Type soft key between Examine and Full to select the measurement type.
NOTE
The Examine mode displays only the selected range while the Full mode lets the
instrument automatically changes the selected range from one another.
8 Set the number of measurements to be averaged:
a Press the Average soft key.
b Enter a value between 1 and 100.
c Press the Enter soft key.

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 358, your
measurement result is displayed on the screen as like the following example, Figure 205.

Figure 205 Spurious emissions measurement with EV-DO signal analyzer

JD700B Series User’s Guide 369

Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 370 for more
information.

Setting limit for RF tests

By default, test limits specified in the standard are set for you. You can change thresholds if you desire.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the RF Test Limits soft key.
3 Select the test item(s) and set the limit(s) depending on your selected measurement mode:
To set the limit for Select Set

Channel power Channel Power High Limit, Low Limit

Occupied bandwidth Occupied BW High Limit

Spectrum emission mask Spectrum Emission Mask (On/Off only)

ACPR ACPR (On/Off only)

Multi-ACPR Multi-ACPR (On/Off only)

Spurious emissions Spurious Emissions (On/Off only)

4 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Conducting power vs. time measurements

The Power vs. Time (Idle Slot and Active Slot) in EV-DO Signal Analyzer verifies that the transmitter output
power has correct amplitude, shape, and timing for the EV-DO format.

n Idle Slot: Slot with no data in traffic channel.

n Active Slot: Slot with the loaded data in traffic channel.

Forward link of 1xEV-DO is a frame structure and each frame consists of 16 slots. The frame period for
1xEV-DO is 26.667 ms, which is also the period of one pilot channel. Each frame is divided into 16 slots of
1.666 ms. 1xEV-DO uses CDMA modulation scheme, but unlike its previous systems the Pilot, MAC (Media
Access Control), and Data (Traffic) Channel are not transmitted simultaneously; instead they are transmitted
in TDM (Time Division Multiplex).

Power vs. time (idle slot)

The Power vs. Time (Idle Slot) measurement provides the idle slot that includes the Pilot and MAC channels
with the masks in all regions.

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 358, your
measurement result is displayed on the screen as like the following example, Figure 206.

370 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

Figure 206 Power vs. time (idle slot) measurement with EV-DO signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for power vs. time tests” on page 372 for
more information.

Power vs. time (active slot)

The Power vs. Time (Active Slot) measurement includes the Pilot, MAC, and Data channels with the upper
and lower masks.

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 358, your
measurement result is displayed on the screen as like the following example, Figure 207.

Figure 207 Power vs. time (active slot) measurement with EV-DO signal analyzer

JD700B Series User’s Guide 371

Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for power vs. time tests” on page 372 for
more information.

Setting limit for power vs. time tests

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the PvsT Test Limits soft key.
3 Select the test item(s) and set the limit(s):
To set the limit for Select Set

Pilot power Pilot Power High Limit, Low Limit

Medium access control power MAC Power High Limit, Low Limit

Data power during the data period Data Power High Limit, Low Limit

On/off power ratio of the pilot and MAC On/Off Ratio Low Limit
powers to the data power

4 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Conducting modulation measurements

In order to make accurate measurements of time offset and PN, you must connect an external trigger before
making a modulation measurement.

Constellation
The Constellation is used to observe some aspects of modulation accuracy and can reveal certain fault
mechanisms such as I/Q amplitude imbalance or quadrature imbalance. It displays constellation diagram by
modulation types.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 358, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the Pseudo-Noise (PN) offset, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the PN Offset soft key between Auto and Manual.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys to set manually, and then press the Enter soft key.
3 To set the incremental step for the PN offset, complete the following steps:

372 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

a Press the PN Increment soft key.

b Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
4 Press the Detect Mode soft key, and then select the detection mode option: Auto, QPSK, 8PSK,
16 QAM, or 64 QAM.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for modulation tests” on page 381 for
more information. The Max Inactive is not used in the Constellation mode.

Measurement example
Figure 208 Constellation measurement with EV-DO signal analyzer

1) Composite 64

2) Composite 128

JD700B Series User’s Guide 373

Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

3) Pilot

4) MAC 64

5) MAC 128

374 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

6) Data

Code domain power

The Code Domain Power (CDP) measures the distribution of power across the set of code channels,
normalized to the total EV-DO power. It helps to verify that each code channel is operating at its proper level
and to identify problems throughout the transmitter design from coding to the RF section. System
imperfections such as amplifier non-linearity will present themselves as an undesired distribution of power in
the code domain.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 358, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the Pseudo-Noise (PN) offset, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the PN Offset soft key between Auto and Manual.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys to set manually.
c Press the Enter soft key.
3 To set the incremental step for the PN offset, complete the following steps:
a Press the PN Increment soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 To set the threshold between Auto and Manual, complete the following steps:
a Press the Threshold soft key. Its default setting is -27 dB.
b Enter a value between -50 and zero by using the numeric keys to change the value in the
Manual mode.
c Press the Enter soft key.
5 Press the Detect Mode soft key, and then select the detection mode option: Auto, QPSK, 8PSK,
16 QAM, or 64 QAM.
6 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 375

Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication for the Max Inactive. See “Setting limit for modulation tests”
on page 381 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 209 Code domain power measurement with EV-DO signal analyzer

1) Pilot

2) MAC 64

376 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

3) MAC 128

4) Data

MAC Codogram
The MAC Codogram displays the power variation for every code over time, presenting a clear view of the
traffic load per channels at any given time. The MAC Codogram measurements can be saved into an
external USB memory so that a post-analysis can be done with the application software JDViewer.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 358, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the Pseudo-Noise (PN) offset, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the PN Offset soft key between Auto and Manual.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 377

Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

b Enter a value by using the numeric keys to set manually.

c Press the Enter soft key.
3 To set the incremental step for the PN offset, complete the following steps:
a Press the PN Increment soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 To set the threshold between Auto and Manual, complete the following steps:
a Press the Threshold soft key. Its default setting is -27 dB.
b Enter a value between -50 and zero by using the numeric keys to change the value in the
Manual mode.
c Press the Enter soft key.
5 Toggle the MAC soft key and select the MAC Walsh code option: 64 or 128.
6 To set the time interval, complete the following steps:
a Press the Time Interval soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
7 To place the time cursor to analyze your measurements, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Time Cursor soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the time cursor.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
NOTE
When the time cursor is enabled, the measurement is put on hold and information about
the time cursor is displayed.

8 To start a new measurement, press the Reset/Restart soft key.

9 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 210 MAC Codogram in full view with EV-DO signal analyzer

RCSI
The Received Code Strength Indicator (RCSI) is used to track the power variation over time of EV-DO
channels: Pilot, MAC, Data, and Slot. The RCSI measurements can be saved into an external USB memory
so that a post-analysis can be done with the application software JDViewer.

378 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 358, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the Pseudo-Noise (PN) offset, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the PN Offset soft key between Auto and Manual.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys to set manually.
c Press the Enter soft key.
3 To set the incremental step for the PN offset, complete the following steps:
a Press the PN Increment soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 To set the threshold between Auto and Manual, complete the following steps:
a Press the Threshold soft key. Its default setting is -27 dB.
b Enter a value between -50 and zero by using the numeric keys to change the value in the
Manual mode.
c Press the Enter soft key.
5 Toggle the MAC soft key and select the MAC Walsh code option: 64 or 128.
6 Press the Alarm Code soft key, and then select the alarm code option: None, Pilot, MAC, Data,
or Slot.
7 To set the alarm mask, complete the following steps:
a Press the Set Mask soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the [dB|dBm] soft key.
8 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 379

Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 211 RCSI measurement with EV-DO signal analyzer

MAC CDP Table

The MAC CDP Table is used for the user to look at a numeric and textual description of all the active control
channels in the signal.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 358, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the Pseudo-Noise (PN) offset, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the PN Offset soft key between Auto and Manual.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys to set manually.
c Press the Enter soft key.
3 To set the incremental step for the PN offset, complete the following steps:
a Press the PN Increment soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 To set the threshold between Auto and Manual, complete the following steps:
a Press the Threshold soft key. Its default setting is -27 dB.
b Enter a value between -50 and zero by using the numeric keys to change the value in the
Manual mode.
c Press the Enter soft key.
5 Toggle the MAC soft key and select the MAC Walsh code option: 64 or 128.

380 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 212 MAC CDP Table measurement with EV-DO signal analyzer

Setting display
If the MAC CDP table spans over to the next page(s), you can change pages up and down to view your
measurement results.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Select Page Up or Page Down as needed to scroll the screen up and down.

Setting limit for modulation tests

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Modulation Test Limits soft key.
3 Select the test item(s) and set the limit(s) depending on your selected measurement mode:
To set the limit for Select Set

Frequency error Frequency Error High Limit, Low Limit

Time offset Time Offset High Limit, Low Limit

Carrier feed through Carrier Feed Through High Limit

Highest level among inactive channels Max Inactive High Limit

Waveform quality (Rho) for pilot Pilot Rho Low Limit

Waveform quality (Rho) for MAC MAC Rho Low Limit

Waveform quality (Rho) for data Data Rho Low Limit

4 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 381

Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

NOTE
The Time Offset compares the PN offset timing with the overall system time and the
instrument checks the start of PN offset in comparison to either the GPS signal or the
even second clock signal.

NOTE
The Carrier Feed Through is a result of the RF carrier signal feeding through the I/Q
modulator and riding on the output circuitry without being modulated.

Performing auto measurements

The Auto Measure function of the JD700B series allows a complete signal profiling covering RF
characterization and modulation quality parameters of up to 10 different carriers, particularly useful on an
overlay architecture where base stations are transmitting in different frequencies.

The Auto Measure can be easily executed either by selecting a menu in the instrument or by running a
programmed scenario in the PC-based application so that the instrument automatically configure and
perform tests on every aspect of all the carriers.

Setting limit for auto measure

You can set test limits for test item(s) in the auto measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the RF Test Limits soft key, and then enable test limits as desired.
3 Press the PvsT Test Limits soft key, and then enable test limits as desired.
4 Press the Modulation Test Limits soft key, and then enable test limits as desired.
5 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
6 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 358, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Toggle the Configuration soft key and select the configuration option:
– Current: Lets the instrument use current frequency (single carrier) and determine pass or
fail based on the instrument s limit settings in Auto Measure.
– Scenario: Runs a test with a programmed scenario in JDViewer.

382 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

The Scenario menu becomes activated.

3 To load a scenario, press the Scenario soft key, and then select a scenario file to load.
4 Toggle the Test Time soft key and select the test time option:
– Now: Lets the instrument run a test only once.
– Schedule: Lets the instrument repeat tests as defined in the Set Timing.
The Set Timing menu becomes activated.
5 To define a schedule for an auto measurement, complete the following steps:
a Press the Set Timing soft key.
b Press the Start Time (HH:MM) soft key.
c Enter the time in the HH:MM format, and then press the Enter soft key.
d Press the Stop Time (HH:MM) soft key.
e Enter the time in the HH:MM format, and then press the Enter soft key.
f Press the Time Interval soft key.
g Enter the amount of time in minutes, and then press the Enter soft key.
6 Press the Settings soft key, and then set the following:
a Toggle the MAC soft key and select the MAC Walsh code option: 64 or 128.
b Toggle the PvsT soft key and select the slot option: Idle or Active.
c Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On.
d Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the dB soft key.
7 To save your settings and results, go to SAVE/LOAD > Save and then perform functions as you
desire. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.
8 Press the Run Test soft key to start to run a test.
The Auto Measure Results window appears at the end of the test.
9 To stop running the test, press the Abort soft key.
10 To change the view on the screen during the test, press the Display and then select the view
option from the following choices:
– Screen: You can view each measurement screen as the test progresses.
– Results: You can view a measurement result table as the test progresses.
– Settings: You can view a measurement setting table as the test progresses.

Setting display
After completion of the auto measurement, the screen menu changes to Trace/Display so that you can view
the results in different forms.

Procedure

1 Toggle the Display soft key and select the display option:
– Result: You can view the result table.
The Display Result menu becomes activated.
– Settings: You can view the measurement settings for the auto measurement.
2 Toggle the Display Result soft key and select the display result option:
– Full: You can view detailed measurement readings with the pass/fail indication.
– Quick: You can view only the Pass/Fail results.
3 To view the measurement results for a different carrier, press the View Carrier soft key and then
select the carrier number to view.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 383

Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

Performing power statistics CCDF measurements

The Power Statistics Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function (CCDF) measurement characterizes
the power statistics of the input signal. It provides PAR (Peak to Average power Ratio) versus different
probabilities.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 358, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the CCDF Length soft key to set the length of the CCDF.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 100 by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
4 Press the Enter soft key.

Measurement example
Figure 213 CCDF measurement with EV-DO signal analyzer

Conducting EV-DO OTA measurements

This Over The Air (OTA) measurement has channel scanner, PN scanner, multipath profile, and Code
Domain power screens. It is used to verify EV-DO transmitter performance at any location providing
reflective measurements and identifying signals providing from different sites. The Code Domain power
shows not only modulation performance metric but also amplifier capacity and code utilization metric. The
Amplifier capacity (code utilization) measurement is an estimate of the amount of power amplifier capacity
(code utilization) that is being used expressed in percent of maximum.

384 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

Channel scanner
Setting channel/frequency

Procedure

To set the channels to be scanned:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Channel.
3 Press the Index soft key, and then enter an index number between one and six by turning the
rotary knob or using the numeric keys.
4 To select the standard channel, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Std soft key. The standard channel window appears.
See “Appendix C – Band, frequency & channel standard” on page 664 for more information.
b Highlight the band to be measured by using the rotary knob, the arrow keys, or the
Page Up/Page Down soft keys.
c Press the Select soft key or the rotary knob to confirm the selection.
5 To set the channel number for the selected index, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Number soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 The instrument displays a corresponding center frequency for the channel number.
7 To set the integration bandwidth for the selected index, complete the following steps:
a Press the Integration Bandwidth soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
8 To add more channels to be scanned, repeat steps 3-6.
9 Press the ESC hard key to dismiss the channel list window and view the scanning result.

To set the frequencies to be scanned:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
3 Press the Index soft key, and then enter an index number between one and six by turning the
rotary knob or using the numeric keys.
4 To set the center frequency for the selected index, complete the following steps:
a Press the Center Frequency soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
5 To set the integration bandwidth for the selected index, complete the following steps:
a Press the Integration Bandwidth soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
6 To add more channels to be scanned, repeat steps 3-5.
7 Press the ESC hard key to dismiss the channel list window and view the scanning result.

Setting measure setup

After configuring other test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 358, you
can continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can
also use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on
to the instrument.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 385

Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the incremental step for the PN offset, complete the following steps:
a Press the PN Increment soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
3 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting limit for OTA channel scanner

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Limit Line soft key to set a threshold for the limit line and Pass/Fail indication.
3 Enter a value, and then press the dBm unit soft key.
4 Toggle the Limit Line soft key between On and Off to display or dismiss the limit line.
5 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
6 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 214 Channel scanner measurement with EV-DO OTA signal analyzer

PN scanner
Each access network sector has a unique PN offset. The PN Scanner is used to identify all the active PNs in
an area.

386 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 358, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the incremental step for the PN offset, complete the following steps:
a Press the PN Increment soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
3 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 215 PN scanner measurement with EV-DO OTA signal analyzer

Multipath profile
The Multipath Profile enables you to determine RF environmental conditions of testing area. It indicates the
amount of power of the dominant pilot signal that is dispersed outside the main correlation peak due to
multipath echoes that are expressed in dB. This value should be very small ideally.

The multipath profile is the result of portions of the original broadcast signal arriving at the receiving antenna
out of phase. This can be caused by the signal being reflected off objects such as buildings, or being
refracted through the atmosphere differently from the main signal.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 358, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also

JD700B Series User’s Guide 387

Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the incremental step for the PN offset, complete the following steps:
a Press the PN Increment soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
3 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 216 Multipath profile measurement with EV-DO OTA signal analyzer

Code domain power

Channels with high correlation factors are determined to be active channels and are indicated as such on
the display. Once the channels are decoded, the analyzer determines the power of each channel relative to
the total signal power.

This measurement helps to verify that each code channel is operating at its proper level and helps to identify
problems throughout the transmitter design from the coding to the RF section. System imperfections, such
as the non-linearity of amplifiers, will present themselves as an undesired distribution of power in the code
domain.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in “Configuring test parameters” on page 358, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

388 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the Pseudo-Noise (PN) offset, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the PN Offset soft key between Auto and Manual.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys to set manually.
c Press the Enter soft key.
3 To set the incremental step for the PN offset, complete the following steps:
a Press the PN Increment soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 To set the threshold between Auto and Manual, complete the following steps:
a Press the Threshold soft key. Its default setting is -27 dB.
b Enter a value between -50 and zero by using the numeric keys to change the value in the
Manual mode.
c Press the Enter soft key.
5 Toggle the MAC soft key and select the MAC Walsh code option: 64 or 128.
6 Press the Detect Mode soft key, and then select the detection mode option: Auto, QPSK, 8PSK,
16 QAM, or 64 QAM.
7 To set the threshold for pilot dominance, complete the following steps:
a Press the Pilot Dominance > soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
NOTE
Recommended value is 10. Color of the Pilot Dominance indicator on the screen bases
on this setting.

8 To set the threshold for multipath power, complete the following steps:
a Press the Multipath Power < soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
NOTE
Recommended value is one. Color of the multipath power indicator on the screen bases
on this setting.

9 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 389

Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 217 Code domain power measurement with EV-DO OTA signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication.

Route map
The JD700B Series provides the Route Map function that allows you to collect data of points in an indoor or
outdoor environment and track the received signals and coverage of RF transmitters by plotting data real
time directly on top of a loaded floor plan or a map.

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 If required, connect a GPS receiver to your JD700B series for outdoor mapping.
Indoor mapping does not necessarily need a GPS antenna.
2 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 358.
3 To load your map file, complete the following steps:
a Plug in your USB drive that has a floor map or .mcf file type created in JDMapCreator. If
the JDMapCreator application on your computer is connected to the instrument via USB or
LAN, you can send a map file with a single layer to the instrument directly by using the
Send to EQP menu in JDMapCreator.
NOTE
The JDMapCreator converts and resizes any scanned floor plan or layout to fit onto your
instrument’s display. JDMapCreator 1.2.0 or later can save a multiple-layered map,
providing x1, x2, and x4 views, as a sizable map file so that you can zoom in and out
after loading it.
b Press SAVE/LOAD hot key, and then select Load > Load Map. See “Using load” on page
35 for more information.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
5 Press the Plot Point soft key, and then select the plot point option from the following choices:
– To collect data/plot points automatically as you move around in a vehicle or outside, press
the GPS soft key and then toggle the Screen Mode soft key between Map and Full.

390 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

NOTE
With the Map setting, you can view only the collected points that can be seen within the
boundary of the loaded map. If a point is off the map, the instrument displays an arrow to
indicate the direction of the current location on the map and the distance from the center
to the location at the top of the screen.

With the Full setting, you can view all the collected points of the route without the loaded
map.
– To collect data/plot points manually without a GPS antenna in an indoor environment, press
the Position soft key.
6 Press the Plot Item soft key, and then select the measurement option: Pilot Power or Ec/Io.
7 To set the incremental step for the PN offset, complete the following steps:
a Press the PN Increment soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
8 Toggle the Plot soft key and select Start.
9 Touch directly on the screen or press the ENTER hard key to collect data and plot points on the
loaded map for the Position setting.
NOTE
For the Position setting, you can change the direction of the route with the arrow keys
and the distance with the rotary knob.
10 Toggle the Plot soft key and select Stop to stop plotting.
11 Press the SAVE/LOAD hot key to save the result.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.
NOTE
The instrument does not automatically save the collected data. It is recommended that
you save the result. Otherwise, you will lose all the collected data.

Setting limit
You can set the thresholds for the four different color indicators for Pilot power or Ec/Io.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Select the plot items and set the limits as needed:
To set the limit for Select Set

Pilot Power Pilot Power Excellent, Very Good, Good, Fair, Poor (dBm)

Ec/Io Ec/Io Good, Fair, Poor (dB)

3 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 391

Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 218 Route map measurement with EV-DO OTA signal analyzer

1) Pilot Power

2) Pilot Ec/Io

Controlling a map
If you have loaded a sizable map that was created in JDMapCreator 1.2.0 or later, you can use the Map
Control feature that enables you to zoom into the map and view a specific area of interest in detail.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Map Control soft key. This key is active only when you have loaded a sizable map.
3 Do one of the following:
– To zoom into an area of interest directly, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Zoom to soft key and select Area.
The black rectangle appears on the map.
b Press the Zoom In and Zoom Out soft keys, as you need, to decrease and increase
the selected area.
c Move the rectangle by using the four arrow keys, as you need, to place it in a specific

392 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 11 Using EV-DO Signal Analyzer

area of interest.
d Press the center of the rotary knob to zoom into the selected area. You can also press
the Zoom to soft key again to zoom into the selected area.
– To zoom into the center or zoom out from the center, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Zoom to soft key and select Center.
b Press the Zoom In and Zoom Out soft keys, as you need, to zoom in and zoom out.
c Move the zoomed-in area by using the four arrow keys, as you need.
4 To set the location mode, toggle the Location Mode soft key between Auto and Manual and
select the one you desire.
– Auto: The instrument compares the coordinates of the displayed map with recevied GPS
information. If your current location goes out of the displayed area and enters into the next
zoomed-in section within the base map, the map display changes automatically to the next
section in which your current position is.
– Manual: The map display of the zoomed-in area remains unchanged even if your current
location goes out of the displayed area. You can change the displayed area manually by
using the arrow keys.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 393

 12

Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

This chapter provides instructions for using the TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer function (option 025) with the
TD-SCDMA OTA Analyzer function (option 045). Topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

n Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 395

n Display overview ..................................................................................................................... 396
n Connecting a cable.................................................................................................................. 396
n Selecting measurement mode ................................................................................................ 398
n Configuring test parameters .................................................................................................... 398
n Conducting spectrum measurements ..................................................................................... 402
n Conducting RF measurements ............................................................................................... 404
n Conducting power vs. time measurements ............................................................................. 411
n Conducting modulation measurements................................................................................... 417
n Performing auto measurements .............................................................................................. 424
n Conducting TD-SCDMA OTA measurements ......................................................................... 426
 Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

Introduction
The Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access, also known as TD-SCDMA, is a 3G mobile
telecommunications standard that is pursued by the Chinese Academy of Telecommunications Technology
(CATT) in the People's Republic of China. The TD-SCDMA uses the TDD scheme while the WCDMA uses
the FDD.

This TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer can be used for testing of TD-SCDMA systems, made according to the
following standard documentation.

n 3GPP TS 25.105 Base Station radio transmission and reception (TDD)

n 3GPP TS 25.142 Base Station conformance testing (TDD)
n 3GPP TS 25.222 Multiplexing and channel coding (TDD)
n 3GPP TS 25.223 Spreading and modulation (TDD)

The instrument automatically makes standard defined measurements using the measurement methods and
limits as defined in the standard. The detailed results allow you to analyze TD-SCDMA/HSDPA system
performance. You may alter the measurement parameters for specialized analysis. Pass/Fail testing with
standard defined or user defined upper and lower limits and the Pass/Fail indictor help you to determine
base station performance easily.

This instrument provides the following measurement tools for TD-SCDMA system:

n Spectrum Analysis
n RF Analysis
- Channel Power
- Occupied Bandwidth
- Spectrum Emission Mask
- Adjacent Channel Leakage power Ratio (ACLR)
- Multi-ACLR
- Spurious Emissions
n Power vs. Time:
- Power vs. Time (Slot)
- Power vs. Time (Frame)
- Power vs. Time (Mask)
- Timogram
n Modulation Analysis
- Constellation
- Midamble Power
- Code Power
- Code Error
n Auto Measure
n Over The Air (OTA)
- Sync-DL ID Scanner
- Sync-DL ID vs. Tau
- Sync-DL ID Multipath
- Sync-DL ID Analyzer
- Route Map

JD700B Series User’s Guide 395

Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

Display overview
Figure 219 provides descriptions for each segment of the measurement screen.

Figure 219 TD-SCDMA signal analyzer measurement screen

Connecting a cable
Direct connection
Procedure

1 Connect the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B series and the Power amplifier output
port of BTS.

Figure 220 Direct connection

JD785B/JD745B JD788B/JD748B

396 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

Indirect connection
Procedure

1 Connect the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B series and the monitor (test) port of
BTS.

Figure 221 Indirect connection

JD785B/JD745B JD788B/JD748B

CAUTION
The maximum power for the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port is +25 dBm (0.316 W) for
JD780B series and +20 dBm (0.1 W) for JD740B series. If the level of the input signal to
be measured is greater than this, use a High Power Attenuator to prevent damage
when you directly connect the signal to the instrument or connect the signal from the
coupling port of a directional coupler.

Over the air (OTA)

Procedure

1 Connect an Omni/directional RF antenna to the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B

series.
2 Connect a GPS antenna to the GPS port of the JD700B series.

Figure 222 OTA connection

JD785B/JD745B JD788B/JD748B

JD700B Series User’s Guide 397

Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

CAUTION
If the input signal level to be measured is less than 0 dBm, set 0 dB attenuation or turn on
the preamp to have better dynamic range for the OTA testing.

Selecting measurement mode

Procedure

1 Press the MODE hard key.

2 Press the Signal Analyzer soft key.
3 Select More (1/2) > TD-SCDMA. The Spectrum mode is set by default.
4 Press the MEASURE hot key, and then select the measurement mode option from the following
choices:
– Spectrum
– RF Analysis > Channel Power, Occupied BW, Spectrum Emission Mask, ACLR,
Multi-ACLR, or Spurious Emissions
– Power vs Time > Power vs Time (Slot), Power vs Time (Frame),
Power vs Time (Frame), or Timogram
– Modulation Analysis > Constellation, Midamble Power, Code Power, or Code Error
– Auto Measure
– OTA > Sync-DL ID Scanner, Sync-DL ID vs Tau, Sync-DL ID Multipath,
Sync-DL ID Analyzer, or Route Map

Configuring test parameters

Setting frequency
You can set the frequency with either frequency or channel number. If a frequency to be set matches to the
frequency corresponding to the selected channel standard, the instrument calculates its channel number
and updates the screen with it automatically.

Procedure

To set the center frequency:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
3 Press the Center Frequency soft key.
4 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
5 Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
6 Optional. To define the amount of frequency increment for the rotary knob, complete the following
steps:
a Press the Frequency Step soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.

To set the channel number:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Channel.

398 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

3 To select the standard channel, complete the following steps:

a Press the Channel Std soft key. The standard channel window appears.
See “Appendix C – Band, frequency & channel standard” on page 664 for more information.
b Highlight the band to be measured by using the rotary knob, the arrow keys, or the
Page Up/Page Down soft keys.
c Press the Select soft key or the rotary knob to confirm the selection.
4 Press the Channel Number soft key.
5 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
6 Press the Enter soft key.
The instrument automatically displays the corresponding center frequency value for the selected
channel number.
7 Optional. To define the amount of channel increment for the rotary knob, complete the following
steps:
a Press the Channel Step soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.

NOTE
This frequency setting is not used in the Multi-ACLR and Spurious Emissions modes.

Setting amplitude
Reference level and attenuation
You can set the reference and attenuation levels automatically or manually to optimize the display of the
traces measured, as you desire.

Procedure

To automatically set the reference and attenuation level:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Press the Auto Scale soft key.
Each time you press this key, both of the Y-axis scale and input attenuation level change to be
optimized with some margin.

To set the reference or attenuation level manually:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 To set the maximum reference value on the Y-axis manually, complete the following steps:
a Press the Reference Level soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys or the rotary knob with 10 dB increments.
c Press the unit soft key or the ENTER hard key.
This unit key name changes according to the setting in the Units menu.
NOTE
In the measurements such as Midamble Power, Code Power, and Code Error, you
may need to select the reference option between Relative and Absolute before setting
the reference level.

3 To set the attenuation option, select one from the following choices:
– To set the input attenuator’s level automatically, select Attenuation > Auto.
NOTE
It is recommended that you set the Attenuation to Auto in most situations so that the
level of the input attenuator can be set automatically according to your input signal level.
– To set the input attenuation manually up to 55 dB for JD780B series or 50 dB for JD740B
series to optimize S/N, complete the following steps:

JD700B Series User’s Guide 399

Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

a Select Attenuation > Manual.

b Press the Attenuation Value soft key to set the level.
c Enter a value in fives by using the numeric keys.
d Press the dB soft key or the ENTER hard key.
– To couple the input attenuator’s level with your reference level setting, select Attenuation >
Couple.
As you increase the reference setting, the attenuation level also increases acoordingly.

Optional. To change the scale unit:

1 Select More (1/2) > Units.
2 Select the unit of the display scale: dBm, dBV, dBmV, dBµV, V, or W.
The scale unit on the screen changes accordingly.
NOTE
This Units menu is available in the Spectrum and RF Analysis modes.

Scale per division

You can use the Scale/Div feature available for the spectrum and RF analysis. It represents the value of one
division on the horizontal scale. The default setting is 10 dB per division and the maximum value can be set
up to 20 dB.

Procedure

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Select More (1/2) > Scale/Div.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 20 by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.

Pre-amplifier
You can turn the internal pre-amplifier on to correct and compensate for the gain of the preamp so that
amplitude readings show the value at the input connector.

Procedure

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Toggle the Preamp soft key and select On or Off as needed.

NOTE
You can turn the Preamp on when the input attenuation range is from 0 dB to 10 dB. If
the attenuation value is manually set to greater than 10 dB, the instrument will
automatically turn off the pre-amplifier to display low-level signal properly on the chart.

External offset
You can turn the External Offset on and manually set the external offset value. An offset consists of a cable
loss and a user offset and the measurement result shows the value reflecting both offset values. When the
external offset value is set at 40 dB in the Spectrum mode, the measurement result compensates 40 dB at
both the Spectrum Analyzer and Signal Analyzer modes.

400 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

Procedure

To set the external offset:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On.
3 Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.

To turn the external offset off:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Toggle the External Offset soft key and select Off.

Setting average
You can set the number of measurements to be averaged for the trace presentation in the spectrum and RF
analysis. A maximum of 100 times of averaging can be set. When the averaging reaches to your setting, a
new measurement value replaces the measurement value in sequence from the earliest.

Procedure

1 Press the BW/AVG hard key.

2 Press the Average soft key.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 100 as needed by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the Enter soft key.

Setting sweep mode

The default setting is Continue to sweep continuously for most on-going measurements. If you want to hold
the measurement or get a single sweep, you can change the sweep mode.

Procedure

To select the single sweep mode:

1 Press the SWEEP hot key.
2 Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Single. You can also use the HOLD hot key.
The letter HOLD in red appears and the sweeping is paused.
3 Optional. Press the Sweep Once soft key to get a new measurement.

To return to the continuous sweep mode:

1 Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Continue. You can also use the HOLD hot key.
The letter HOLD in red disappears and the sweeping resumes.

Setting trigger source

You can set the trigger source option for your measurements.

Procedure

1 Press the TRIGGER hot key.

2 Select the trigger source option from the choices: Internal, External, and GPS.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 401

Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

Setting external clock

To enhance the reliability of modulation analysis measurements the JD700B series must be synchronized
with a base station. When an external clock is not supplied, the instrument works with its built-in internal
high-accuracy time base and some measurement results may exhibit inaccurate values. Therefore, it is
highly recommended that you use the same reference clock as the signal source. You can use the
TRIGGER hot key to set the external clock.

Figure 223 Connection ports for external reference clock

Procedure

1 Connect an external reference or a GPS antenna to the JD700B series.

2 Press the SYSTEM hot key.
3 Press the Freq Reference soft key, and then select the reference option: Internal, External 10
MHz, External 13 MHz, External 15 MHz, or GPS.

Table 18 External reference indicators

Type Indicator Description

Internal (green) The green INT icon indicates that the instrument uses the built-in
internal time base.

External (green) The green EXT icon indicates that an external reference is connected
and locked and that the instrument uses the same reference clock as
the signal source.

External (red) The red EXT icon indicates that an external reference is connect but not
locked.

GPS (green) The green GPS antenna icon indicates that a GPS antenna is
connected and locked.

GPS (yellow) The yellow GPS antenna icon indicates that a GPS antenna is
connected and locking is in progress.

GPS (grey) The grey GPS antenna icon indicates that a GPS antenna is not
connected, failed, or unable to be locked.

Conducting spectrum measurements

Setting measure setup
After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 398, you can
continue your measurement.

402 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Slot Number soft key, and then select the time slot number to be displayed: TS0, TS1,
TS2, TS3, TS4, TS5, or TS6.
3 Optional. To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.
NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

Your measurement result is displayed on the screen as like the following example, Figure 224.

Figure 224 Spectrum measurement screen with TD-SCDMA signal analyzer

Setting trace
You can display up to six traces on the measurement chart simultaneously.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Select Trace soft key, and then select the trace number: T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, or T6.
The legend shape of the selected trace changes from square to round to indicate that the trace is
the active one now.
3 Do one of the following:
To Select Trace Legend

Clear current data and display with new Clear Write W

measurements

Display the input signal’s maximum response only Max Hold M

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

Display the input signal’s minimum response only Min Hold m

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

JD700B Series User’s Guide 403

Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

Capture the selected trace and compare traces Capture C

Load a saved trace More (1/2) > Load L

Hide the displayed trace Trace View > Off F

Remove all the traces and initialize the trace More (1/2) > Trace
settings Clear All

NOTE
For the Max Hold and Min Hold, your instrument compares newly acquired data with the
active trace and displays larger maximum values or smaller minimum values on the
screen. You can set it to Unlimited to hold and view maximum or minimum data or
specify a certain amount of time up to 60 seconds by using numeric keys or rotary knob.
4 Optional. Select More (1/2) > Trace Info, and then select the trace number to view the trace’s
parameter setting information stored at the time of the measurement or None to hide the
information display.
5 Optional. If you have the two traces T1 and T2, you can perform trace math. To view the power
difference between the traces, press the T1 – T2 -> T5 or T2 – T1 -> T6 soft key.
The result is overlaid on the screen along with the second Y-axis.

Conducting RF measurements
Channel power
The Channel Power measurement determines the average power of an RF signal burst at or above a
specified threshold value.

The purpose of the Channel Power measurement is to determine the power delivered to the antenna system
on the RF channel under test. The instrument acquires a TD-SCDMA signal in the time domain. The average
power level above the threshold is then computed and displayed.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 398, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Slot Number soft key, and then select the time slot number to be displayed: TS0, TS1,
TS2, TS3, TS4, TS5, or TS6.
3 Optional. To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.
NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

404 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 225 Channel power measurement with TD-SCDMA signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 411 for more
information.

Occupied bandwidth
The Occupied Bandwidth measures the spectrum shape of the carrier. It is defined as the bandwidth, which
includes 99% of the transmitted power among total transmitted power.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 398, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Slot Number soft key, and then select the time slot number to be displayed: TS0, TS1,
TS2, TS3, TS4, TS5, or TS6.
3 Optional. To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.
NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 405

Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 226 Occupied bandwidth measurement with TD-SCDMA signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 411 for more
information.

Spectrum emission mask (SEM)

The Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurement required by 3GPP specifications encompasses different
power limits and different measurement bandwidths (resolution bandwidths) at various frequency offsets. It
may be expressed as a ratio of power spectral densities between the carrier and the specified offset
frequency band. It provides useful figures-of-merit for the spectral re-growth and emissions produced by
components and circuit blocks, without the rigor of performing a full SEM measurement.

The SEM measures spurious signal levels in up to five pairs of offset or region frequencies and relates them
to the carrier power.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 398, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Slot Number soft key, and then select the time slot number to be displayed: TS0, TS1,
TS2, TS3, TS4, TS5, or TS6.
3 To select the mask type according to the output power of the base station, complete the following
steps:
a Press the Mask Type soft key.
b Select the mask type option: - 26 dBm, 26 – 34 dBm, or 34 dBm –.
4 Optional. To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.

406 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.
NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

Measurement example
Figure 227 SEM measurement with TD-SCDMA signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 411 for more
information.

ACLR
The Adjacent Channel Leakage power Ratio (ACLR) measures the amount of interference or power in an
adjacent frequency channel according to the standards.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 398, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Slot Number soft key, and then select the time slot number to be displayed: TS0, TS1,
TS2, TS3, TS4, TS5, or TS6.
3 Optional. To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.
NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 407

Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 228 ACLR measurement with TD-SCDMA signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 411 for more
information.

Multi-ACLR
The Multi-ACLR measurement is used to perform multi-channel ACLR measurements with as many
channels as possible. It helps you to measure ACLR in multi-channel transmitting Base Station environment.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 398, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the frequency, do one of the following:
– To set the center frequency, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
b Press the Lowest Frequency soft key to set the starting center frequency.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
e Press the Highest Frequency soft key to set the stopping center frequency.
f Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
g Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
– To set the channel number, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Unit soft key and select Channel.
b To select the standard channel, press the Channel Std soft key and then select the

408 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

band to be measured.
c Press the Lowest Channel soft key to set the starting channel.
d Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
e Press the Enter soft key.
f Press the Highest Channel soft key to set the stopping channel.
g Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
h Press the Enter soft key.

Measurement example
Figure 229 Multi-ACLR measurement with TD-SCDMA signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 411 for more
information.

Spurious emissions
Out-of-band emissions are unwanted emissions immediately outside the channel bandwidth resulting from
the modulation process and non-linearity in the transmitter but excluding spurious emissions. The Spurious
Emissions measurement is to identify and determine the power level of out-of-band spurious emission within
the necessary channel bandwidth and modulated signal measured at the RF port of the Base Station.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 398, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set up the range table and parameters, press the Range Table soft key and then complete
the following steps:
a Press the Range soft key, and then select the range number between 1 and 20 to add

JD700B Series User’s Guide 409

Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

as a new or change the existing settings.

b Do the following as desired:
– Select Start Frequency, and then specify the start frequency for the selected range.
– Select Stop Frequency, and then specify the stop frequency for the selected range.
– Select Start Limit, and then specify the lower limit for Pass/Fail indication.
– Select Stop Limit, and then specify the upper limit for Pass/Fail indication.
– Select More (1/2) > Attenuation, and then specify an value in the multiple of five.
– Select More (1/2) > RBW, and then specify a RBW value.
– Select More (1/2) > VBW, and then specify a VBW value.
c Press the PREV hard key.
d Toggle the Range soft key and select On to display the selected range in the result table or
Off to hide it from the table.
3 Toggle the Measure Type soft key between Examine and Full to select the measurement type.
NOTE
The Examine mode displays only the selected range while the Full mode lets the
instrument automatically changes the selected range from one another.

4 To set the number of measurements to be averaged, complete the following steps:

a Press the Average soft key.
b Enter a value between 1 and 100, and then press the Enter soft key.
5 To move the highlighted bar in the result table to other range, complete the following steps:
a Press the Range soft key in the Measure Setup menu bar.
b Enter a value between 1 and 20, and then press the Enter soft key.

Measurement example
Figure 230 Spurious emissions measurement with TD-SCDMA signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 411 for more
information.

410 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

Setting limit for RF tests

By default, test limits specified in the standard are set for you. You can change thresholds if you desire.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the RF Test Limits soft key.
3 Select the test item(s) and set the limit(s) depending on your selected measurement mode:
To set the limit for Select Set

Channel power Channel Power High Limit, Low Limit

Occupied bandwidth Occupied BW High Limit

Spectrum emission mask Spectrum Emission Mask (On/Off only)

ACLR ACLR (On/Off only)

Multi-ACLR Multi-ACLR (On/Off only)

Spurious emissions Spurious Emissions (On/Off only)

4 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Conducting power vs. time measurements

The Power vs. Time (P vs T) measurement analyzes the amplitude profile and timing of the burst signal and
provides a time mask for the signal. It measures the mean transmit power during the “useful part” of TD-
SCDMA bursts and verifies that the power ramp fits within the defined mask. TD-SCDMA is a Time Division
Multiple Access (TDMA) scheme with seven time slots, or bursts, per RF channel and by using the “Multi-
Slot” function, up to seven slots in a frame can be viewed at one time.

Power vs. time (slot)

The Power vs. Time (Slot) in TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer measures the modulation envelope in the time
domain, showing the signal rise and fall shape of TD-SCDMA signal.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 398, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Slot Number soft key, and then select the time slot number to be displayed: TS0, TS1,
TS2, TS3, TS4, TS5, or TS6.
3 Press the Spread Factor soft key, and then select the spread factor option: DL Auto for auto
detection of downlink, UL Auto for auto detection of uplink, SF1, SF2, SF4, SF8, or SF16
4 To set the number of maximum users, complete the following steps:

JD700B Series User’s Guide 411

Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

a Press the Max Users soft key.

b Enter a value up to 16 by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
5 Optional. To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.
NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

6 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select how to determine scrambling estimation, toggle the Scramble soft key and select
Spec or Full.
NOTE
The Spec searches “Sync Sequence Number” from 0 to 31 based on the TD-SCDMA
specification and determines “Scrambling Code Number” by using the sync sequence
number, while the Full does from 0 to 127 fully.

– To select how to determine the Midamble spread factor estimation either in full or maximum
power search, toggle the Mid SF Map soft key and select Max or Spec.
NOTE
The Max determines the spread factor of the Midamble by using the maximum power of
the received Midamble, while the Spec searches “Default Midamble Allocation” based on
the TD-SCDMA specification.
– To select the detect mode, press the Detect Mode soft key and then select the option:
Auto, QPSK/8PSK, QPSK, 8PSK, 16 QAM, or 64 QAM.

Measurement example
Figure 231 Power vs. time (slot) measurement with TD-SCDMA signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for power vs. time tests” on page 417 for
more information.

412 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

Power vs. time (frame)

The Power vs. Time (Frame) measures the modulation envelope in the time domain, showing the power of
each time slot of the TD-SCDMA signal.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 398, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Slot Number soft key, and then select the time slot number to be displayed: TS0, TS1,
TS2, TS3, TS4, TS5, or TS6.
3 Press the Spread Factor soft key, and then select the spread factor option: DL Auto for auto
detection of downlink, UL Auto for auto detection of uplink, SF1, SF2, SF4, SF8, or SF16
4 To set the number of maximum users, complete the following steps:
a Press the Max Users soft key.
b Enter a value up to 16 by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
5 Optional. To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.
NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.
6 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select how to determine scrambling estimation, toggle the Scramble soft key and select
Spec or Full.
NOTE
The Spec searches “Sync Sequence Number” from 0 to 31 based on the TD-SCDMA
specification and determines “Scrambling Code Number” by using the sync sequence
number, while the Full does from 0 to 127 fully.
– To select how to determine the Midamble spread factor estimation either in full or maximum
power search, toggle the Mid SF Map soft key and select Max or Spec.
NOTE
The Max determines the spread factor of the Midamble by using the maximum power of
the received Midamble, while the Spec searches “Default Midamble Allocation” based on
the TD-SCDMA specification.
– To select the detect mode, press the Detect Mode soft key and then select the option:
Auto, QPSK/8PSK, QPSK, 8PSK, 16 QAM, or 64 QAM.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 413

Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 232 Power vs. time (frame) measurement with TD-SCDMA signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for power vs. time tests” on page 417 for
more information. The On/Off Ratio is not used in the power vs. time (frame) tests.

Power vs. time (mask)

Setting measure setup
After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 398, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Slot Number soft key, and then select the time slot number to be displayed: TS0, TS1,
TS2, TS3, TS4, TS5, or TS6.
3 Press the Spread Factor soft key, and then select the spread factor option: DL Auto for auto
detection of downlink, UL Auto for auto detection of uplink, SF1, SF2, SF4, SF8, or SF16
4 To set the number of maximum users, complete the following steps:
a Press the Max Users soft key.
b Enter a value up to 16 by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
5 Optional. To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.
NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.
6 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select how to determine scrambling estimation, toggle the Scramble soft key and select
Spec or Full.

414 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

NOTE
The Spec searches “Sync Sequence Number” from 0 to 31 based on the TD-SCDMA
specification and determines “Scrambling Code Number” by using the sync sequence
number, while the Full does from 0 to 127 fully.
– To select how to determine the Midamble spread factor estimation either in full or maximum
power search, toggle the Mid SF Map soft key and select Max or Spec.
NOTE
The Max determines the spread factor of the Midamble by using the maximum power of
the received Midamble, while the Spec searches “Default Midamble Allocation” based on
the TD-SCDMA specification.
– To select the detect mode, press the Detect Mode soft key and then select the option:
Auto, QPSK/8PSK, QPSK, 8PSK, 16 QAM, or 64 QAM.

Measurement example
Figure 233 Power vs. time (mask) measurement with TD-SCDMA signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for power vs. time tests” on page 417 for
more information. The DwPTS Power and UpPTS Power are not used in the power vs.
time (mask) tests.

Timogram
Setting measure setup
After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 398, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Spread Factor soft key, and then select the spread factor option: DL Auto for auto
detection of downlink, UL Auto for auto detection of uplink, SF1, SF2, SF4, SF8, or SF16
3 To set the number of maximum users, complete the following steps:

JD700B Series User’s Guide 415

Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

a Press the Max Users soft key.

b Enter a value up to 16 by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 To set the time interval, complete the following steps:
a Press the Time Interval soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
5 To place the time cursor to analyze your measurements, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Time Cursor soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the time cursor.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
NOTE
When the time cursor is enabled, the measurement is put on hold and information about
the time cursor is displayed.

6 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.
NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

– To select how to determine scrambling estimation, toggle the Scramble soft key and select
Spec or Full.

NOTE
The Spec searches “Sync Sequence Number” from 0 to 31 based on the TD-SCDMA
specification and determines “Scrambling Code Number” by using the sync sequence
number, while the Full does from 0 to 127 fully.

– To select how to determine the Midamble spread factor estimation either in full or maximum
power search, toggle the Mid SF Map soft key and select Max or Spec.

NOTE
The Max determines the spread factor of the Midamble by using the maximum power of
the received Midamble, while the Spec searches “Default Midamble Allocation” based on
the TD-SCDMA specification.

– To select the detect mode, press the Detect Mode soft key and then select the option:
Auto, QPSK/8PSK, QPSK, 8PSK, 16 QAM, or 64 QAM.

416 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 234 Timogram with TD-SCDMA signal analyzer

Setting limit for power vs. time tests

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the PvsT Test Limits soft key.
3 Select the test item(s) and set the limit(s) depending on your selected measurement mode:
To set the limit for Select Set

Slot power Slot Power High Limit, Low Limit

Downlink pilot signal power DwPTS Power High Limit, Low Limit

Uplink pilot signal power UpPTS Power High Limit, Low Limit

Power between on and off On/Off Ratio High Limit, Low Limit
portions of the downlink slots

4 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Conducting modulation measurements

TD-SCDMA receivers rely on the frequency or phase quality of the QPSK or 8PSK signal in order to achieve
the expected carrier to noise performance. A transmitter with high frequency or phase error is often still able
to support phone calls during a functional test. It displays the frequency errors numerically and graphically,
showing the binary representation of the demodulated data bits of the received signal using Constellation,
Midamble Power, Code Power, and Code Error screens.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 417

Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

Constellation
The Constellation is used to observe some aspects of modulation accuracy and can reveal certain fault
mechanisms such as I/Q amplitude imbalance or quadrature imbalance. It displays constellation diagram by
modulation types.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 398, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Toggle the Scramble soft key and select Auto or Manual to set the scramble code automatically
or manually.
3 Press the Slot Number soft key, and then select the time slot number to be displayed: TS0, TS1,
TS2, TS3, TS4, TS5, or TS6.
4 Press the Spread Factor soft key, and then select the spread factor option: DL Auto for auto
detection of downlink, UL Auto for auto detection of uplink, SF1, SF2, SF4, SF8, or SF16
5 To set the number of maximum users, complete the following steps:
a Press the Max Users soft key.
b Enter a value up to 16 by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
6 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.
NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

– To select how to determine scrambling estimation, toggle the Scramble soft key and select
Spec or Full.
NOTE
The Spec searches “Sync Sequence Number” from 0 to 31 based on the TD-SCDMA
specification and determines “Scrambling Code Number” by using the sync sequence
number, while the Full does from 0 to 127 fully.

– To select how to determine the Midamble spread factor estimation either in full or maximum
power search, toggle the Mid SF Map soft key and select Max or Spec.
NOTE
The Max determines the spread factor of the Midamble by using the maximum power of
the received Midamble, while the Spec searches “Default Midamble Allocation” based on
the TD-SCDMA specification.

– To select the detect mode, press the Detect Mode soft key and then select the option:
Auto, QPSK/8PSK, QPSK, 8PSK, 16 QAM, or 64 QAM.
– To set the relative threshold, complete the following steps:
a Press the Threshold soft key. Its default setting is -27 dB.
b Enter a value between -50 and zero by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.

418 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 235 Constellation measurement with TD-SCDMA signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for modulation tests” on page 423 for
more information. The Max Inactive is not used in the Constellation mode.

Midamble power
Setting measure setup
After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 398, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Toggle the Scramble soft key and select Auto or Manual to set the scramble code automatically
or manually.
3 Press the Slot Number soft key, and then select the time slot number to be displayed: TS0, TS1,
TS2, TS3, TS4, TS5, or TS6.
4 Press the Spread Factor soft key, and then select the spread factor option: DL Auto for auto
detection of downlink, UL Auto for auto detection of uplink, SF1, SF2, SF4, SF8, or SF16
5 To set the number of maximum users, complete the following steps:
a Press the Max Users soft key.
b Enter a value up to 16 by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 419

Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

– To select how to determine scrambling estimation, toggle the Scramble soft key and select
Spec or Full.
NOTE
The Spec searches “Sync Sequence Number” from 0 to 31 based on the TD-SCDMA
specification and determines “Scrambling Code Number” by using the sync sequence
number, while the Full does from 0 to 127 fully.

– To select how to determine the Midamble spread factor estimation either in full or maximum
power search, toggle the Mid SF Map soft key and select Max or Spec.
NOTE
The Max determines the spread factor of the Midamble by using the maximum power of
the received Midamble, while the Spec searches “Default Midamble Allocation” based on
the TD-SCDMA specification.

– To select the detect mode, press the Detect Mode soft key and then select the option:
Auto, QPSK/8PSK, QPSK, 8PSK, 16 QAM, or 64 QAM.
– To set the relative threshold, complete the following steps:
a Press the Threshold soft key. Its default setting is -27 dB.
b Enter a value between -50 and zero by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.

Measurement example
Figure 236 Midamble measurement with TD-SCDMA signal analyzer

Code power
Setting measure setup
After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 398, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

420 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Toggle the Scramble soft key and select Auto or Manual to set the scramble code automatically
or manually.
3 Press the Slot Number soft key, and then select the time slot number to be displayed: TS0, TS1,
TS2, TS3, TS4, TS5, or TS6.
4 Press the Spread Factor soft key, and then select the spread factor option: DL Auto for auto
detection of downlink, UL Auto for auto detection of uplink, SF1, SF2, SF4, SF8, or SF16
5 To set the number of maximum users, complete the following steps:
a Press the Max Users soft key.
b Enter a value up to 16 by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.
NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

– To select how to determine scrambling estimation, toggle the Scramble soft key and select
Spec or Full.
NOTE
The Spec searches “Sync Sequence Number” from 0 to 31 based on the TD-SCDMA
specification and determines “Scrambling Code Number” by using the sync sequence
number, while the Full does from 0 to 127 fully.

– To select how to determine the Midamble spread factor estimation either in full or maximum
power search, toggle the Mid SF Map soft key and select Max or Spec.
NOTE
The Max determines the spread factor of the Midamble by using the maximum power of
the received Midamble, while the Spec searches “Default Midamble Allocation” based on
the TD-SCDMA specification.

– To select the detect mode, press the Detect Mode soft key and then select the option:
Auto, QPSK/8PSK, QPSK, 8PSK, 16 QAM, or 64 QAM.
– To set the relative threshold, complete the following steps:
a Press the Threshold soft key. Its default setting is -27 dB.
b Enter a value between -50 and zero by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 421

Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 237 Code power measurement with TD-SCDMA signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication for the Max Inactive. See “Setting limit for modulation tests”
on page 423 for more information.

Code error
Setting measure setup
After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 398, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Toggle the Scramble soft key and select Auto or Manual to set the scramble code automatically
or manually.
3 Press the Slot Number soft key, and then select the time slot number to be displayed: TS0, TS1,
TS2, TS3, TS4, TS5, or TS6.
4 Press the Spread Factor soft key, and then select the spread factor option: DL Auto for auto
detection of downlink, UL Auto for auto detection of uplink, SF1, SF2, SF4, SF8, or SF16
5 To set the number of maximum users, complete the following steps:
a Press the Max Users soft key.
b Enter a value up to 16 by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.

422 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.
– To select how to determine scrambling estimation, toggle the Scramble soft key and select
Spec or Full.
NOTE
The Spec searches “Sync Sequence Number” from 0 to 31 based on the TD-SCDMA
specification and determines “Scrambling Code Number” by using the sync sequence
number, while the Full does from 0 to 127 fully.
– To select how to determine the Midamble spread factor estimation either in full or maximum
power search, toggle the Mid SF Map soft key and select Max or Spec.
NOTE
The Max determines the spread factor of the Midamble by using the maximum power of
the received Midamble, while the Spec searches “Default Midamble Allocation” based on
the TD-SCDMA specification.
– To select the detect mode, press the Detect Mode soft key and then select the option:
Auto, QPSK/8PSK, QPSK, 8PSK, 16 QAM, or 64 QAM.
– To set the relative threshold, complete the following steps:
a Press the Threshold soft key. Its default setting is -27 dB.
b Enter a value between -50 and zero by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.

Measurement example
Figure 238 Code error measurement with TD-SCDMA signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication for the Max Inactive. See “Setting limit for modulation tests”
on page 423 for more information.

Setting limit for modulation tests

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 423

Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

2 Press the Modulation Test Limits soft key.

3 Select the test item(s) and set the limit(s) depending on your selected measurement mode:
To set the limit for Select Set

Frequency error Frequency Error High Limit, Low Limit

Error vector magnitude rms EVM RMS High Limit

Peak code domain error PCDE High Limit

Highest level among inactive channels Max Inactive High Limit

4 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Performing auto measurements

The Auto Measure function of the JD700B series allows a complete signal profiling covering RF
characterization and modulation quality parameters of up to 10 different carriers, particularly useful on an
overlay architecture where base stations are transmitting in different frequencies.

The Auto Measure can be easily executed either by selecting a menu in the instrument or by running a
programmed scenario in the PC-based application so that the instrument automatically configure and
perform tests on every aspect of all the carriers.

Setting limit
You can set test limits for test item(s) in the auto measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the RF Test Limits soft key, and then enable test limits as desired.
3 Press the PvsT Test Limits soft key, and then enable test limits as desired.
4 Press the Modulation Test Limits soft key, and then enable test limits as desired.
5 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
6 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 398, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

424 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

2 Toggle the Configuration soft key and select the configuration option:
– Current: Lets the instrument use current frequency (single carrier) and determine pass or
fail based on the instrument s limit settings in Auto Measure.
– Scenario: Runs a test with a programmed scenario in JDViewer.
The Scenario menu becomes activated.
3 To load a scenario, press the Scenario soft key, and then select a scenario file to load.
4 Toggle the Test Time soft key and select the test time option:
– Now: Lets the instrument run a test only once.
– Schedule: Lets the instrument repeat tests as defined in the Set Timing.
The Set Timing menu becomes activated.
5 To define a schedule for an auto measurement, complete the following steps:
a Press the Set Timing soft key.
b Press the Start Time (HH:MM) soft key.
c Enter the time in the HH:MM format, and then press the Enter soft key.
d Press the Stop Time (HH:MM) soft key.
e Enter the time in the HH:MM format, and then press the Enter soft key.
f Press the Time Interval soft key.
g Enter the amount of time in minutes, and then press the Enter soft key.
6 Press the Settings soft key, and then set the following:
a Press the Slot Number soft key, and then select the time slot number to be displayed: TS0,
TS1, TS2, TS3, TS4, TS5, or TS6.
b Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the dB soft key.
7 To save your settings and results, go to SAVE/LOAD > Save and then perform functions as you
desire. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.
8 Press the Run Test soft key to start to run a test.
The Auto Measure Results window appears at the end of the test.
9 To stop running the test, press the Abort soft key.
10 To change the view on the screen during the test, press the Display and then select the view
option from the following choices:
– Screen: You can view each measurement screen as the test progresses.
– Results: You can view a measurement result table as the test progresses.
– Settings: You can view a measurement setting table as the test progresses.

Setting display
After completion of the auto measurement, the screen menu changes to Trace/Display so that you can view
the results in different forms.

Procedure

1 Toggle the Display soft key and select the display option:
– Result: You can view the result table.
The Display Result menu becomes activated.
– Settings: You can view the measurement settings for the auto measurement.
2 Toggle the Display Result soft key and select the display result option:
– Full: You can view detailed measurement readings with the pass/fail indication.
– Quick: You can view only the Pass/Fail results.
3 To view the measurement results for a different carrier, press the View Carrier soft key and then
select the carrier number to view.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 425

Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

Conducting TD-SCDMA OTA measurements

Sync-DL ID scanner
Setting measure setup
After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 398, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Toggle the Sync-DL ID soft key and select Auto or Manual to set the Sync Downlink ID
automatically or manually.
3 Optional. To select the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Miscellaneous soft key.
b Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Press the µs soft key.
NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

4 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 239 Sync-DL ID scanner measurement with TD-SCDMA OTA signal analyzer

Sync-DL ID vs. Tau

Setting measure setup
After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 398, you can
continue your measurement.

426 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Toggle the Sync-DL ID soft key and select Auto or Manual to set the Sync Downlink ID
automatically or manually.
3 Optional. To select the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Miscellaneous soft key.
b Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Press the µs soft key.
NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

4 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 240 Sync-DL ID vs. Tau measurement with TD-SCDMA OTA signal analyzer

Sync-DL ID multipath
Setting measure setup
After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 398, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Toggle the Sync-DL ID soft key and select Auto or Manual to set the Sync Downlink ID
automatically or manually.
3 Optional. To select the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Miscellaneous soft key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 427

Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

b Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Press the µs soft key.
NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

4 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 241 Sync-DL ID multipath measurement with TD-SCDMA OTA signal analyzer

Sync-DL ID analyzer
Setting measure setup
After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 398, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Toggle the Sync-DL ID soft key and select Auto or Manual to set the Sync Downlink ID
automatically or manually.
3 Optional. To select the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Miscellaneous soft key.
b Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Press the µs soft key.
NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

4 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

428 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

Setting limit for Sync-DL ID analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 To set the limit for rms of the error vector magnitude, complete the following steps:
a Press the EVM RMS soft key.
b Toggle the Test Limits soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the limit.
c Press the High Limit soft key, and then enter a value for the upper threshold.
d Press the Enter soft key.
3 To set the limit for frequency error, complete the following steps:
a Press the Frequency Error soft key.
b Toggle the Test Limits soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the limit.
c Press the High Limit soft key, and then enter a value for the upper threshold.
d Press the ppm soft key.
e Press the Low Limit soft key, and then enter a value for the lower threshold.
f Press the ppm soft key.
4 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 242 Sync-DL ID analyzer measurement with TD-SCDMA OTA signal analyzer

Route map
The JD700B Series provides the Route Map function that allows you to collect data of points in an indoor or
outdoor environment and track the received signals and coverage of RF transmitters by plotting data real
time directly on top of a loaded floor plan or a map.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 429

Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 If required, connect a GPS receiver to your JD700B series for outdoor mapping.
Indoor mapping does not necessarily need a GPS antenna.
2 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 398.
3 To load your map file, complete the following steps:
a Plug in your USB drive that has a floor map or .mcf file type created in JDMapCreator. If
the JDMapCreator application on your computer is connected to the instrument via USB or
LAN, you can send a map file with a single layer to the instrument directly by using the
Send to EQP menu in JDMapCreator.
NOTE
The JDMapCreator converts and resizes any scanned floor plan or layout to fit onto your
instrument’s display. JDMapCreator 1.2.0 or later can save a multiple-layered map,
providing x1, x2, and x4 views, as a sizable map file so that you can zoom in and out
after loading it.
b Press SAVE/LOAD hot key, and then select Load > Load Map. See “Using load” on page
35 for more information.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
5 Press the Plot Point soft key, and then select the plot point option from the following choices:
– To collect data/plot points automatically as you move around in a vehicle or outside, press
the GPS soft key and then toggle the Screen Mode soft key between Map and Full.
NOTE
With the Map setting, you can view only the collected points that can be seen within the
boundary of the loaded map. If a point is off the map, the instrument displays an arrow to
indicate the direction of the current location on the map and the distance from the center
to the location at the top of the screen.

With the Full setting, you can view all the collected points of the route without the loaded
map.
– To collect data/plot points manually without a GPS antenna in an indoor environment, press
the Position soft key.
6 Toggle the Plot soft key and select Start to start plotting.
7 Touch directly on the screen or press the ENTER hard key to collect data and plot points on the
loaded map for the Position setting.
NOTE
For the Position setting, you can change the direction of the route with the arrow keys
and the distance with the rotary knob.
8 Toggle the Plot soft key and select Stop to stop plotting.
9 Press the SAVE/LOAD hot key to save the result.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.
NOTE
The instrument does not automatically save the collected data. It is recommended that
you save the result. Otherwise, you will lose all the collected data.

Setting limit for route map

You can set the thresholds for each test item.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Excellent soft key to set its threshold.
3 Enter a value, and then press the Enter soft key. You can also use the rotary knob.

430 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

4 Press the Very Good soft key to set its threshold.

5 Enter a value, and then press the Enter soft key. You can also use the rotary knob.
6 Press the Good soft key to set its threshold.
7 Enter a value, and then press the Enter soft key. You can also use the rotary knob.
8 Press the Fair soft key to set its threshold.
9 Enter a value, and then press the Enter soft key. You can also use the rotary knob.
10 Press the Poor soft key to set its threshold.
11 Enter a value, and then press the Enter soft key. You can also use the rotary knob.
12 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 243 Route map measurement with TD-SCDMA OTA signal analyzer

1) Map view

2) Full view

JD700B Series User’s Guide 431

Chapter 12 Using TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer

Controlling a map
If you have loaded a sizable map that was created in JDMapCreator 1.2.0 or later, you can use the Map
Control feature that enables you to zoom into the map and view a specific area of interest in detail.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Map Control soft key. This key is active only when you have loaded a sizable map.
3 Do one of the following:
– To zoom into an area of interest directly, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Zoom to soft key and select Area.
The black rectangle appears on the map.
b Press the Zoom In and Zoom Out soft keys, as you need, to decrease and increase
the selected area.
c Move the rectangle by using the four arrow keys, as you need, to place it in a specific
area of interest.
d Press the center of the rotary knob to zoom into the selected area. You can also press
the Zoom to soft key again to zoom into the selected area.
– To zoom into the center or zoom out from the center, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Zoom to soft key and select Center.
b Press the Zoom In and Zoom Out soft keys, as you need, to zoom in and zoom out.
c Move the zoomed-in area by using the four arrow keys, as you need.
4 To set the location mode, toggle the Location Mode soft key between Auto and Manual and
select the one you desire.
– Auto: The instrument compares the coordinates of the displayed map with recevied GPS
information. If your current location goes out of the displayed area and enters into the next
zoomed-in section within the base map, the map display changes automatically to the next
section in which your current position is.
– Manual: The map display of the zoomed-in area remains unchanged even if your current
location goes out of the displayed area. You can change the displayed area manually by
using the arrow keys.

432 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 13

Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal

Analyzer
This chapter provides instructions for using the Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer function (option 026) with the
Mobile WiMAX OTA Analyzer function (option 046). Topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

n Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 434

n Display overview ..................................................................................................................... 434
n Connecting a cable.................................................................................................................. 435
n Selecting measurement mode ................................................................................................ 437
n Configuring test parameters .................................................................................................... 437
n Conducting spectrum measurements ..................................................................................... 441
n Conducting RF measurements ............................................................................................... 443
n Conducting power vs. time (frame) measurements ................................................................ 449
n Conducting modulation measurements................................................................................... 451
n Performing auto measurements .............................................................................................. 458
n Performing power statistics CCDF measurements ................................................................. 459
n Conducting Mobile WiMAX OTA measurements..................................................................... 460
Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

Introduction
The Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer performs power and spectrum measurements as well as modulation
analysis to test the proper transmitter performance of Mobile WiMAX systems. It performs conformance
testing according to the following standards providing a simple Pass/Fail indication on each test.

n IEEE 802.16e-2005
n WiBro (Korean Mobile WiMAX OFDMA Service)

This instrument provides the following measurement tools for Mobile WiMAX system:

n Spectrum Analysis
n RF Analysis
- Channel Power
- Occupied Bandwidth
- Spectrum Emission Mask
- Spurious Emissions
n Power vs. Time (Frame)
n Modulation Analysis
- Constellation
- Spectral Flatness
- EVM vs. Subcarrier
- EVM vs. Symbol
n Auto Measure
n Power Statistics CCDF
n Over The Air (OTA)
- Preamble Scanner
- Multipath Profile
- Preamble Power Trend
- Route Map

Display overview
Figure 244 provides descriptions for each segment of the measurement screen.

434 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

Figure 244 Mobile WiMAX signal analyzer measurement screen

Connecting a cable
Direct connection
Procedure

1 Connect the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B series and the Power amplifier output
port of BTS.

Figure 245 Direct connection

JD785B/JD745B JD788B/JD748B

Indirect connection
Procedure

1 Connect the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B series and the monitor (test) port of
BTS.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 435

Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

Figure 246 Indirect connection

JD785B/JD745B JD788B/JD748B

CAUTION
The maximum power for the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port is +25 dBm (0.316 W) for
JD780B series and +20 dBm (0.1 W) for JD740B series. If the level of the input signal to
be measured is greater than this, use a High Power Attenuator to prevent damage
when you directly connect the signal to the instrument or connect the signal from the
coupling port of a directional coupler.

Over the air (OTA)

Procedure

1 Connect an Omni/directional RF antenna to the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B

series.
2 Connect a GPS antenna to the GPS port of the JD700B series.

Figure 247 OTA connection

JD785B/JD745B JD788B/JD748B

CAUTION
If the input signal level to be measured is less than 0 dBm, set 0 dB attenuation or turn on
the preamp to have better dynamic range for the OTA testing.

436 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

Selecting measurement mode

Procedure

1 Press the MODE hard key.

2 Press the Signal Analyzer soft key.
3 Select More (1/2) > Mobile WiMAX. The Spectrum mode is set by default.
4 Press the MEASURE hot key, and then select the measurement mode option from the following
choices:
– Spectrum
– RF Analysis > Channel Power, Occupied BW, Spectrum Emission Mask, or
Spurious Emissions
– Power vs Time (Frame)
– Modulation Analysis > Constellation, Spectral Flatness, EVM vs Subcarrier, or
EVM vs. Symbol
– Auto Measure
– Power Statistics CCDF
– OTA > Preamble Scanner, Multipath Profile, Preamble Power Trend, or Route Map

Configuring test parameters

Setting frequency
You can set the frequency with either frequency or channel number. If a frequency to be set matches to the
frequency corresponding to the selected channel standard, the instrument calculates its channel number
and updates the screen with it automatically.

Procedure

To set the center frequency:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
3 Press the Center Frequency soft key.
4 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
5 Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
6 Optional. To define the amount of frequency increment for the rotary knob, complete the following
steps:
a Press the Frequency Step soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.

To set the channel number:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Channel.
3 To select the standard channel, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Std soft key. The standard channel window appears.
See “Appendix C – Band, frequency & channel standard” on page 664 for more information.
b Highlight the band to be measured by using the rotary knob, the arrow keys, or the Page
Up/Page Down soft keys.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 437

Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

c Press the Select soft key or the rotary knob to confirm the selection.
4 Press the Channel Number soft key.
5 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
6 Press the Enter soft key.
The instrument automatically displays the corresponding center frequency value for the selected
channel number.
7 Optional. To define the amount of channel increment for the rotary knob, complete the following
steps:
a Press the Channel Step soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.

NOTE
This frequency setting is not used in the Spurious Emissions mode.

Setting amplitude
Reference level and attenuation
You can set the reference and attenuation levels automatically or manually to optimize the display of the
traces measured, as you desire.

Procedure

To automatically set the reference and attenuation level:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Press the Auto Scale soft key.
Each time you press this key, both of the Y-axis scale and input attenuation level change to be
optimized with some margin.

To set the reference or attenuation level manually:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 To set the maximum reference value on the Y-axis manually, complete the following steps:
a Press the Reference Level soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys or the rotary knob with 10 dB increments.
c Press the unit soft key or the ENTER hard key.
This unit key name changes according to the setting in the Units menu.
NOTE
In the measurements such as Midamble Power, Code Power, and Code Error, you
may need to select the reference option between Relative and Absolute before setting
the reference level.
3 To set the attenuation option, select one from the following choices:
– To set the input attenuator’s level automatically, select Attenuation > Auto.
NOTE
It is recommended that you set the Attenuation to Auto in most situations so that the
level of the input attenuator can be set automatically according to your input signal level.
– To set the input attenuation manually up to 55 dB for JD780B series or 50 dB for JD740B
series to optimize S/N, complete the following steps:
a Select Attenuation > Manual.
b Press the Attenuation Value soft key to set the level.
c Enter a value in fives by using the numeric keys.
d Press the dB soft key or the ENTER hard key.
– To couple the input attenuator’s level with your reference level setting, select Attenuation >
Couple.

438 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

As you increase the reference setting, the attenuation level also increases acoordingly.

Optional. To change the scale unit:

1 Select More (1/2) > Units.
2 Select the unit of the display scale: dBm, dBV, dBmV, dBµV, V, or W.
The scale unit on the screen changes accordingly.
NOTE
This Units menu is available in the Spectrum and RF Analysis modes.

Scale per division

You can use the Scale/Div feature available for the spectrum and RF analysis. It represents the value of one
division on the horizontal scale. The default setting is 10 dB per division and the maximum value can be set
up to 20 dB.

Procedure

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Select More (1/2) > Scale/Div.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 20 by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.

Pre-amplifier
You can turn the internal pre-amplifier on to correct and compensate for the gain of the preamp so that
amplitude readings show the value at the input connector.

Procedure

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Toggle the Preamp soft key and select On or Off as needed.

NOTE
You can turn the Preamp on when the input attenuation range is from 0 dB to 10 dB. If
the attenuation value is manually set to greater than 10 dB, the instrument will
automatically turn off the pre-amplifier to display low-level signal properly on the chart.

External offset
You can turn the External Offset on and manually set the external offset value. An offset consists of a cable
loss and a user offset and the measurement result shows the value reflecting both offset values. When the
external offset value is set at 40 dB in the Spectrum mode, the measurement result compensates 40 dB at
both the Spectrum Analyzer and Signal Analyzer modes.

Procedure

To set the external offset:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On.
3 Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 439

Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

To turn the external offset off:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Toggle the External Offset soft key and select Off.

Setting average
You can set the number of measurements to be averaged for the trace presentation. A maximum of 100
times of averaging can be set. When the averaging reaches to your setting, a new measurement value
replaces the measurement value in sequence from the earliest.

Procedure

1 Press the BW/AVG hard key.

2 Press the Average soft key.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 100 as needed by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the Enter soft key.

Setting sweep mode

The default setting is Continue to sweep continuously for most on-going measurements. If you want to hold
the measurement or get a single sweep, you can change the sweep mode.

Procedure

To select the single sweep mode:

1 Press the SWEEP hot key.
2 Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Single. You can also use the HOLD hot key.
The letter HOLD in red appears and the sweeping is paused.
3 Optional. Press the Sweep Once soft key to get a new measurement.

To return to the continuous sweep mode:

1 Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Continue. You can also use the HOLD hot key.
The letter HOLD in red disappears and the sweeping resumes.

Setting trigger source

You can set the trigger source option for your measurements.

Procedure

1 Press the TRIGGER hot key.

2 Select the trigger source option from the choices: Internal, External, and GPS.

Setting external clock

To enhance the reliability of modulation analysis measurements the JD700B series must be synchronized
with a base station. When an external clock is not supplied, the instrument works with its built-in internal
high-accuracy time base and some measurement results may exhibit inaccurate values. Therefore, it is
highly recommended that you use the same reference clock as the signal source. You can use the
TRIGGER hot key to set the external clock.

440 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

Figure 248 Connection ports for external reference clock

Procedure

1 Connect an external reference or a GPS antenna to the JD700B series.

2 Press the SYSTEM hot key.
3 Press the Freq Reference soft key, and then select the reference option: Internal, External 10
MHz, External 13 MHz, External 15 MHz, or GPS.

Table 19 External reference indicators

Type Indicator Description

Internal (green) The green INT icon indicates that the instrument uses the built-in
internal time base.

External (green) The green EXT icon indicates that an external reference is connected
and locked and that the instrument uses the same reference clock as
the signal source.

External (red) The red EXT icon indicates that an external reference is connect but not
locked.

GPS (green) The green GPS antenna icon indicates that a GPS antenna is
connected and locked.

GPS (yellow) The yellow GPS antenna icon indicates that a GPS antenna is
connected and locking is in progress.

GPS (grey) The grey GPS antenna icon indicates that a GPS antenna is not
connected, failed, or unable to be locked.

Conducting spectrum measurements

Setting measure setup
After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 437, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the System Config soft key, and then do the following:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key, and then select the nominal channel bandwidth to be
measured from the following choices:
– 7 MHz (8/7): Sets the channel bandwidth to 7 MHz with sampling factor 8/7. In

JD700B Series User’s Guide 441

Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

conjunction with nominal channel bandwidth

– 8.75 MHz (8/7): Sets the channel bandwidth to 8.75 MHz with sampling factor 8/7
– 10 MHz (28/25): Sets the channel bandwidth to 10 MHz with sampling factor 28/25
b Toggle the Frame Length soft key and select 5 ms or 10 ms.
c Press the TTG (RTG) soft key to set the transmit/receive transition gap between the last
sample of the downlink burst and the first sample of the subsequent uplink burst.
d Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
e Press the CP Ratio soft key, and then select the cyclic prefix ratio option: 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, or
1/32.
f Press the DL Symbols soft key to set the number of downlink symbols.
g Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
h Press the UL Symbols soft key to set the number of uplink symbols.
i Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
3 Optional. To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.

NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

Your measurement result is displayed on the screen as like the following example, Figure 249.

Figure 249 Spectrum measurement screen with Mobile WiMAX signal analyzer

Setting trace
You can display up to six traces on the measurement chart simultaneously.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Select Trace soft key, and then select the trace number: T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, or T6.
The legend shape of the selected trace changes from square to round to indicate that the trace is
the active one now.
3 Do one of the following:

442 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

To Select Trace Legend

Clear current data and display with new Clear Write W

measurements

Display the input signal’s maximum response only Max Hold M

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

Display the input signal’s minimum response only Min Hold m

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

Capture the selected trace and compare traces Capture C

Load a saved trace More (1/2) > Load L

Hide the displayed trace Trace View > Off F

Remove all the traces and initialize the trace More (1/2) > Trace
settings Clear All

NOTE
For the Max Hold and Min Hold, your instrument compares newly acquired data with the
active trace and displays larger maximum values or smaller minimum values on the
screen. You can set it to Unlimited to hold and view maximum or minimum data or
specify a certain amount of time up to 60 seconds by using numeric keys or rotary knob.
4 Optional. Select More (1/2) > Trace Info, and then select the trace number to view the trace’s
parameter setting information stored at the time of the measurement or None to hide the
information display.
5 Optional. If you have the two traces T1 and T2, you can perform trace math. To view the power
difference between the traces, press the T1 – T2 -> T5 or T2 – T1 -> T6 soft key.
The result is overlaid on the screen along with the second Y-axis.

Conducting RF measurements
Channel power
The Channel Power measurement is a common test used in the wireless industry to measure the total
transmitted power of a radio within a defined frequency channel. It acquires a number of points representing
the input signal in the time domain, transforms this information into the frequency domain using Fast Fourier
Transform (FFT), and then calculates the channel power. The effective resolution bandwidth of the frequency
domain trace is proportional to the number of points acquired for the FFT.

The channel power measurement identifies the total RF power, power spectral density (PSD) and peak to
average ratio (PAR) of the signal in the Mobile WiMAX channel bandwidth.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 437, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the System Config soft key, and then do the following:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key, and then select the nominal channel bandwidth to be
measured from the following choices:
– 7 MHz (8/7): Sets the channel bandwidth to 7 MHz with sampling factor 8/7. In

JD700B Series User’s Guide 443

Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

conjunction with nominal channel bandwidth

– 8.75 MHz (8/7): Sets the channel bandwidth to 8.75 MHz with sampling factor 8/7
– 10 MHz (28/25): Sets the channel bandwidth to 10 MHz with sampling factor 28/25
b Toggle the Frame Length soft key and select 5 ms or 10 ms.
c Press the TTG (RTG) soft key to set the transmit/receive transition gap between the last
sample of the downlink burst and the first sample of the subsequent uplink burst.
d Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
e Press the CP Ratio soft key, and then select the cyclic prefix ratio option: 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, or
1/32.
f Press the DL Symbols soft key to set the number of downlink symbols.
g Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
h Press the UL Symbols soft key to set the number of uplink symbols.
i Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
3 Optional. To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.
NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.
4 To set the start/stop symbols, complete the following steps:
a Press the Start Symbol soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
c Press the Stop Symbol soft key.
d Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.

Measurement example
Figure 250 Channel power measurement with Mobile WiMAX signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 449 for more
information.

444 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

Occupied bandwidth
The Occupied Bandwidth measures the spectrum shape of the carrier. It is defined as the bandwidth, which
includes 99% of the transmitted power among total transmitted power.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 437, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the System Config soft key, and then do the following:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key, and then select the nominal channel bandwidth to be
measured from the following choices:
– 7 MHz (8/7): Sets the channel bandwidth to 7 MHz with sampling factor 8/7. In
conjunction with nominal channel bandwidth
– 8.75 MHz (8/7): Sets the channel bandwidth to 8.75 MHz with sampling factor 8/7
– 10 MHz (28/25): Sets the channel bandwidth to 10 MHz with sampling factor 28/25
b Toggle the Frame Length soft key and select 5 ms or 10 ms.
c Press the TTG (RTG) soft key to set the transmit/receive transition gap between the last
sample of the downlink burst and the first sample of the subsequent uplink burst.
d Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
e Press the CP Ratio soft key, and then select the cyclic prefix ratio option: 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, or
1/32.
f Press the DL Symbols soft key to set the number of downlink symbols.
g Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
h Press the UL Symbols soft key to set the number of uplink symbols.
i Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
3 Optional. To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.
NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.
4 To set the start/stop symbols, complete the following steps:
a Press the Start Symbol soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
c Press the Stop Symbol soft key.
d Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 445

Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 251 Occupied bandwidth measurement with Mobile WiMAX signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 449 for more
information.

Spectrum emission mask (SEM)

The Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurement compares the total power level within the defined carrier
bandwidth and the given offset channels according to the standards.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 437, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the System Config soft key, and then do the following:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key, and then select the nominal channel bandwidth to be
measured from the following choices:
– 7 MHz (8/7): Sets the channel bandwidth to 7 MHz with sampling factor 8/7. In
conjunction with nominal channel bandwidth
– 8.75 MHz (8/7): Sets the channel bandwidth to 8.75 MHz with sampling factor 8/7
– 10 MHz (28/25): Sets the channel bandwidth to 10 MHz with sampling factor 28/25
b Toggle the Frame Length soft key and select 5 ms or 10 ms.
c Press the TTG (RTG) soft key to set the transmit/receive transition gap between the last
sample of the downlink burst and the first sample of the subsequent uplink burst.
d Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
e Press the CP Ratio soft key, and then select the cyclic prefix ratio option: 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, or
1/32.
f Press the DL Symbols soft key to set the number of downlink symbols.

446 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

g Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
h Press the UL Symbols soft key to set the number of uplink symbols.
i Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
3 Optional. To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.
NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.
4 To set the start/stop symbols, complete the following steps:
a Press the Start Symbol soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
c Press the Stop Symbol soft key.
d Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.

Measurement example
Figure 252 SEM measurement with Mobile WiMAX signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 449 for more
information.

Spurious emissions
Out-of-band emissions are unwanted emissions immediately outside the channel bandwidth resulting from
the modulation process and non-linearity in the transmitter but excluding spurious emissions. The Spurious
Emissions measurement is to identify and determine the power level of out-of-band spurious emission within
the necessary channel bandwidth and modulated signal measured at the RF port of the Base Station.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 437, you can
continue your measurement.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 447

Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set up the range table and parameters, press the Range Table soft key and then complete
the following steps:
a Press the Range soft key, and then select the range number between 1 and 20 to add
as a new or change the existing settings.
b Do the following as desired:
– Select Start Frequency, and then specify the start frequency for the selected range.
– Select Stop Frequency, and then specify the stop frequency for the selected range.
– Select Start Limit, and then specify the lower limit for Pass/Fail indication.
– Select Stop Limit, and then specify the upper limit for Pass/Fail indication.
– Select More (1/2) > Attenuation, and then specify an value in the multiple of five.
– Select More (1/2) > RBW, and then specify a RBW value.
– Select More (1/2) > VBW, and then specify a VBW value.
c Press the PREV hard key.
d Toggle the Range soft key and select On to display the selected range in the result table or
Off to hide it from the table.
3 Toggle the Measure Type soft key between Examine and Full to select the measurement type.
NOTE
The Examine mode displays only the selected range while the Full mode lets the
instrument automatically changes the selected range from one another.

4 To set the number of measurements to be averaged, complete the following steps:

a Press the Average soft key.
b Enter a value between 1 and 100, and then press the Enter soft key.
5 To move the highlighted bar in the result table to other range, complete the following steps:
a Press the Range soft key in the Measure Setup menu bar.
b Enter a value between 1 and 20, and then press the Enter soft key.

Measurement example
Figure 253 Spurious emissions measurement with Mobile WiMAX signal analyzer

448 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RF tests” on page 449 for more
information.

Setting limit for RF tests

By default, test limits specified in the standard are set for you. You can change thresholds if you desire.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the RF Test Limits soft key.
3 Select the test item(s) and set the limit(s) depending on your selected measurement mode:
To set the limit for Select Set

Channel power Channel Power High Limit, Low Limit

Occupied bandwidth Occupied BW High Limit

Spectrum emission mask Spectrum Emission Mask (On/Off only)

Spurious emissions Spurious Emissions (On/Off only)

4 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Conducting power vs. time (frame) measurements

The Power vs. Time (Frame) measures the modulation envelope in the time domain, showing the power of
each time slot in a Mobile WiMAX signal.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 437, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the System Config soft key, and then do the following:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key, and then select the nominal channel bandwidth to be
measured from the following choices:
– 7 MHz (8/7): Sets the channel bandwidth to 7 MHz with sampling factor 8/7. In
conjunction with nominal channel bandwidth
– 8.75 MHz (8/7): Sets the channel bandwidth to 8.75 MHz with sampling factor 8/7
– 10 MHz (28/25): Sets the channel bandwidth to 10 MHz with sampling factor 28/25
b Toggle the Frame Length soft key and select 5 ms or 10 ms.
c Press the TTG (RTG) soft key to set the transmit/receive transition gap between the last
sample of the downlink burst and the first sample of the subsequent uplink burst.
d Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 449

Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

e Press the CP Ratio soft key, and then select the cyclic prefix ratio option: 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, or
1/32.
f Press the DL Symbols soft key to set the number of downlink symbols.
g Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
h Press the UL Symbols soft key to set the number of uplink symbols.
i Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
3 To set the start/stop symbols, complete the following steps:
a Press the Start Symbol soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
c Press the Stop Symbol soft key.
d Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
4 Toggle the Preamble Index soft key and select the preamble search method: Auto or Manual.
5 Toggle the Search Type soft key and select Full or Window.
6 Toggle the Video Filter soft key and select On or Off to enable or disable the video filter.
7 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.
NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

– To select the detect mode, press the Detect Mode soft key and then select the option:
Auto, QPSK, 16 QAM, or 64 QAM.

Setting limit for power vs. time tests

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the PvsT Test Limits soft key.
3 Select the test item(s) and set the limit(s):
To set the limit for Select Set

Preamble power Preamble Power High Limit, Low Limit

Downlink burst power DL Burst Power High Limit, Low Limit

Uplink burst power UL Burst Power High Limit, Low Limit

Frame average power Frame Average Power High Limit, Low Limit

Time offset Time Offset High Limit, Low Limit

I/Q origin offset IQ Origin Offset High Limit

4 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

450 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 254 Power vs. time (frame) measurement with Mobile WiMAX signal analyzer

Conducting modulation measurements

Constellation
The Constellation is used to observe some aspects of modulation accuracy and can reveal certain fault
mechanisms such as I/Q amplitude imbalance or quadrature imbalance. It displays constellation diagram by
modulation types.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 437, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the System Config soft key, and then do the following:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key, and then select the nominal channel bandwidth to be
measured from the following choices:
– 7 MHz (8/7): Sets the channel bandwidth to 7 MHz with sampling factor 8/7. In
conjunction with nominal channel bandwidth
– 8.75 MHz (8/7): Sets the channel bandwidth to 8.75 MHz with sampling factor 8/7
– 10 MHz (28/25): Sets the channel bandwidth to 10 MHz with sampling factor 28/25
b Toggle the Frame Length soft key and select 5 ms or 10 ms.
c Press the TTG (RTG) soft key to set the transmit/receive transition gap between the last
sample of the downlink burst and the first sample of the subsequent uplink burst.
d Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
e Press the CP Ratio soft key, and then select the cyclic prefix ratio option: 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, or

JD700B Series User’s Guide 451

Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

1/32.
f Press the DL Symbols soft key to set the number of downlink symbols.
g Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
h Press the UL Symbols soft key to set the number of uplink symbols.
i Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
3 To set the start/stop symbols, complete the following steps:
a Press the Start/Stop Symbol soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
4 Toggle the Preamble Index soft key and select the preamble search method: Auto or Manual.
5 Toggle the Search Type soft key and select Full or Window.
6 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select the detect mode, press the Detect Mode soft key and then select the option:
Auto, QPSK, 16 QAM, or 64 QAM.
– To select the downlink zone, press the DL Zone soft key and then select the permutation
zone option: Auto, PUSC for partial usage of subcarrier channels, FUSC for full usage of
subcarrier channels, or AMC2X3 for adaptive modulation and coding.
NOTE
The permutation zone that is a number of contiguous OFDMA symbols in downlink that
use the same permutation. The DL subframe may contain more than one permutation
zone. The maximum number of DL zone is 8 in one DL subframe.
– To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.
NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

Measurement example
Figure 255 Constellation measurement with Mobile WiMAX signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for modulation tests” on page 457 for
more information. The Spectral Flatness is not used in the Constellation mode.

452 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

Spectral flatness
The Spectral Flatness is used to measure the flatness energy of the constellation according to the WiMAX
specification IEEE 802.16e.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 437, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the System Config soft key, and then do the following:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key, and then select the nominal channel bandwidth to be
measured from the following choices:
– 7 MHz (8/7): Sets the channel bandwidth to 7 MHz with sampling factor 8/7. In
conjunction with nominal channel bandwidth
– 8.75 MHz (8/7): Sets the channel bandwidth to 8.75 MHz with sampling factor 8/7
– 10 MHz (28/25): Sets the channel bandwidth to 10 MHz with sampling factor 28/25
b Toggle the Frame Length soft key and select 5 ms or 10 ms.
c Press the TTG (RTG) soft key to set the transmit/receive transition gap between the last
sample of the downlink burst and the first sample of the subsequent uplink burst.
d Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
e Press the CP Ratio soft key, and then select the cyclic prefix ratio option: 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, or
1/32.
f Press the DL Symbols soft key to set the number of downlink symbols.
g Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
h Press the UL Symbols soft key to set the number of uplink symbols.
i Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
3 To set the start/stop symbols, complete the following steps:
a Press the Start Symbol soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
c Press the Stop Symbol soft key.
d Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
4 Toggle the Preamble Index soft key and select the preamble search method: Auto or Manual.
5 Toggle the Search Type soft key and select Full or Window.
6 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select the detect mode, press the Detect Mode soft key and then select the option:
Auto, QPSK, 16 QAM, or 64 QAM.
– To select the downlink zone, press the DL Zone soft key and then select the permutation
zone option: Auto, PUSC for partial usage of subcarrier channels, FUSC for full usage of
subcarrier channels, or AMC2X3 for adaptive modulation and coding.
NOTE
The permutation zone, which is a number of contiguous OFDMA, symbols in downlink
that use the same permutation. The DL subframe may contain more than one
permutation zone. The maximum number of DL zone is 8 in one DL subframe.
– To set the delay, complete the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 453

Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

Measurement example
Figure 256 Spectral flatness measurement with Mobile WiMAX signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication for the Spectral Flatness. See “Setting limit for modulation
tests” on page 457 for more information.

EVM vs. subcarrier

The EVM vs Subcarrier shows the error vector magnitude representing the average constellation error of
WIMAX OFDMA subcarriers.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 437, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the System Config soft key, and then do the following:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key, and then select the nominal channel bandwidth to be
measured from the following choices:
– 7 MHz (8/7): Sets the channel bandwidth to 7 MHz with sampling factor 8/7. In
conjunction with nominal channel bandwidth
– 8.75 MHz (8/7): Sets the channel bandwidth to 8.75 MHz with sampling factor 8/7
– 10 MHz (28/25): Sets the channel bandwidth to 10 MHz with sampling factor 28/25
b Toggle the Frame Length soft key and select 5 ms or 10 ms.

454 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

c Press the TTG (RTG) soft key to set the transmit/receive transition gap between the last
sample of the downlink burst and the first sample of the subsequent uplink burst.
d Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
e Press the CP Ratio soft key, and then select the cyclic prefix ratio option: 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, or
1/32.
f Press the DL Symbols soft key to set the number of downlink symbols.
g Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
h Press the UL Symbols soft key to set the number of uplink symbols.
i Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
3 To set the start/stop symbols, complete the following steps:
a Press the Start/Stop Symbol soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
4 Toggle the Preamble Index soft key and select the preamble search method: Auto or Manual.
5 Toggle the Search Type soft key and select Full or Window.
6 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select the detect mode, press the Detect Mode soft key and then select the option:
Auto, QPSK, 16 QAM, or 64 QAM.
– To select the downlink zone, press the DL Zone soft key and then select the permutation
zone option: Auto, PUSC for partial usage of subcarrier channels, FUSC for full usage of
subcarrier channels, or AMC2X3 for adaptive modulation and coding.
NOTE
The permutation zone, which is a number of contiguous OFDMA, symbols in downlink
that use the same permutation. The DL subframe may contain more than one
permutation zone. The maximum number of DL zone is 8 in one DL subframe.

– To set the delay, complete the following steps:

a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.
NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

Measurement example
Figure 257 EVM vs. subcarrier measurement with Mobile WiMAX signal analyzer

JD700B Series User’s Guide 455

Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for modulation tests” on page 457 for
more information. The Spectral Flatness and Frequency Error are not used in the EVM
vs. Subcarrier mode.

EVM vs. symbol

The EVM vs Symbol is used to show the error vector magnitude representing the average constellation error
of WiMAX OFDMA symbols.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 437, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the System Config soft key, and then do the following:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key, and then select the nominal channel bandwidth to be
measured from the following choices:
– 7 MHz (8/7): Sets the channel bandwidth to 7 MHz with sampling factor 8/7. In
conjunction with nominal channel bandwidth
– 8.75 MHz (8/7): Sets the channel bandwidth to 8.75 MHz with sampling factor 8/7
– 10 MHz (28/25): Sets the channel bandwidth to 10 MHz with sampling factor 28/25
b Toggle the Frame Length soft key and select 5 ms or 10 ms.
c Press the TTG (RTG) soft key to set the transmit/receive transition gap between the last
sample of the downlink burst and the first sample of the subsequent uplink burst.
d Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
e Press the CP Ratio soft key, and then select the cyclic prefix ratio option: 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, or
1/32.
f Press the DL Symbols soft key to set the number of downlink symbols.
g Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
h Press the UL Symbols soft key to set the number of uplink symbols.
i Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
3 To set the start/stop symbols, complete the following steps:
a Press the Start/Stop Symbol soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
4 Toggle the Preamble Index soft key and select the preamble search method: Auto or Manual.
5 Toggle the Search Type soft key and select Full or Window.
6 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To select the detect mode, press the Detect Mode soft key and then select the option:
Auto, QPSK, 16 QAM, or 64 QAM.
– To select the downlink zone, press the DL Zone soft key and then select the permutation
zone option: Auto, PUSC for partial usage of subcarrier channels, FUSC for full usage of
subcarrier channels, or AMC2X3 for adaptive modulation and coding.
NOTE
The permutation zone, which is a number of contiguous OFDMA, symbols in downlink
that use the same permutation. The DL subframe may contain more than one
permutation zone. The maximum number of DL zone is 8 in one DL subframe.

456 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

– To set the delay, complete the following steps:

a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.
NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

Measurement example
Figure 258 EVM vs. symbol measurement with Mobile WiMAX signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for modulation tests” on page 457 for
more information. The Spectral Flatness and Frequency Error are not used in the EVM
vs. Subcarrier mode.

Setting limit for modulation tests

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Modulation Test Limits soft key to set the limits.
3 Select the test item(s) and set the limit(s) depending on your selected measurement mode:
To set the limit for Select Set

Spectral flatness Spectral Flatness On/Off

Frequency error Frequency Error High Limit, Low Limit

RMS for RCE RCE RMS High Limit

Peak for RCE RCE Peak High Limit

RMS for error vector magnitude EVM RMS High Limit

Peak for error vector magnitude EVM Peak High Limit

JD700B Series User’s Guide 457

Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

4 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Performing auto measurements

The Auto Measure function of the JD700B series allows a complete signal profiling covering RF
characterization and modulation quality parameters of up to 10 different carriers, particularly useful on an
overlay architecture where base stations are transmitting in different frequencies.

The Auto Measure can be easily executed either by selecting a menu in the instrument or by running a
programmed scenario in the PC-based application so that the instrument automatically configure and
perform tests on every aspect of all the carriers.

Setting limit
You can set test limits for test item(s) in the auto measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the RF Test Limits soft key, and then enable test limits as desired.
3 Press the PvsT Test Limits soft key, and then enable test limits as desired.
4 Press the Modulation Test Limits soft key, and then enable test limits as desired.
5 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
6 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 437, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Toggle the Configuration soft key and select the configuration option:
– Current: Lets the instrument use current frequency (single carrier) and determine pass or
fail based on the instrument s limit settings in Auto Measure.
– Scenario: Runs a test with a programmed scenario in JDViewer.
The Scenario menu becomes activated.
3 To load a scenario, press the Scenario soft key, and then select a scenario file to load.
4 Toggle the Test Time soft key and select the test time option:
– Now: Lets the instrument run a test only once.
– Schedule: Lets the instrument repeat tests as defined in the Set Timing.
The Set Timing menu becomes activated.

458 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

5 To define a schedule for an auto measurement, complete the following steps:

a Press the Set Timing soft key.
b Press the Start Time (HH:MM) soft key.
c Enter the time in the HH:MM format, and then press the Enter soft key.
d Press the Stop Time (HH:MM) soft key.
e Enter the time in the HH:MM format, and then press the Enter soft key.
f Press the Time Interval soft key.
g Enter the amount of time in minutes, and then press the Enter soft key.
6 Press the Settings soft key, and then set the following:
a Press the Start Symbol soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
c Press the Stop Symbol soft key.
d Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
e Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On or Off.
f Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the dB soft key.
7 To save your settings and results, go to SAVE/LOAD > Save and then perform functions as you
desire. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.
8 Press the Run Test soft key to start to run a test.
The Auto Measure Results window appears at the end of the test.
9 To stop running the test, press the Abort soft key.
10 To change the view on the screen during the test, press the Display and then select the view
option from the following choices:
– Screen: You can view each measurement screen as the test progresses.
– Results: You can view a measurement result table as the test progresses.
– Settings: You can view a measurement setting table as the test progresses.

Setting display
After completion of the auto measurement, the screen menu changes to Trace/Display so that you can view
the results in different forms.

Procedure

1 Toggle the Display soft key and select the display option:
– Result: You can view the result table.
The Display Result menu becomes activated.
– Settings: You can view the measurement settings for the auto measurement.
2 Toggle the Display Result soft key and select the display result option:
– Full: You can view detailed measurement readings with the pass/fail indication.
– Quick: You can view only the Pass/Fail results.
3 To view the measurement results for a different carrier, press the View Carrier soft key and then
select the carrier number to view.

Performing power statistics CCDF measurements

The Power Statistics Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function (CCDF) measurement characterizes
the power statistics of the input signal. It provides PAR (Peak to Average power Ratio) versus different
probabilities.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 459

Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 437, you can
continue your measurement. The measurement settings can be saved and recalled as a file. You can also
use JDViewer, PC application software to configure a measure setup, save as a file, and load the file on to
the instrument.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the CCDF Length soft key to set the length of the CCDF.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 100 by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
4 Press the Enter soft key.

Measurement example
Figure 259 CCDF measurement with Mobile WiMAX signal analyzer

Conducting Mobile WiMAX OTA measurements

This Over The Air (OTA) measurement has preamble scanner, multipath profile, and preamble power trend
screens. Preamble scanner displays six preambles and relative powers to inform neighbor cells existence.
The multipath profile graph helps the user to determine testing area's RF environmental condition. The
preamble power trend shows power variations of selected preamble over time along with relative power
trend for strongest preamble.

Preamble scanner
The OTA Preamble Scanner displays the six strongest preambles to inform neighbor cells existence of
testing area. Preamble Index, Relative Power, Cell ID, and Sector ID are listed in for each preamble signal
with Time Offset in us. Positioning information, latitude, and longitude will be displayed if a GPS antenna is
supplied and locked to the GPS satellites on the bottom of the screen.

460 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 437, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the System Config soft key, and then do the following:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key, and then select the nominal channel bandwidth to be
measured from the following choices:
– 7 MHz (8/7): Sets the channel bandwidth to 7 MHz with sampling factor 8/7. In
conjunction with nominal channel bandwidth
– 8.75 MHz (8/7): Sets the channel bandwidth to 8.75 MHz with sampling factor 8/7
– 10 MHz (28/25): Sets the channel bandwidth to 10 MHz with sampling factor 28/25
b Toggle the Frame Length soft key and select 5 ms or 10 ms.
c Press the TTG (RTG) soft key to set the transmit/receive transition gap between the last
sample of the downlink burst and the first sample of the subsequent uplink burst.
d Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
e Press the CP Ratio soft key, and then select the cyclic prefix ratio option: 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, or
1/32.
f Press the DL Symbols soft key to set the number of downlink symbols.
g Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
h Press the UL Symbols soft key to set the number of uplink symbols.
i Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
3 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.
NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

4 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 461

Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 260 Preamble scanner measurement with Mobile WiMAX OTA signal analyzer

Multipath profile
The Multipath Profile enables the user to determine RF environmental conditions of testing area. It indicates
the multipath power with time delay in us up to six.

The multipath profile is the result of portions of the original broadcast signal arriving at the receiving antenna
out of phase. This can be caused by the signal being reflected off objects such as buildings, or being
refracted through the atmosphere differently from the main signal.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 437, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the System Config soft key, and then do the following:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key, and then select the nominal channel bandwidth to be
measured from the following choices:
– 7 MHz (8/7): Sets the channel bandwidth to 7 MHz with sampling factor 8/7. In
conjunction with nominal channel bandwidth
– 8.75 MHz (8/7): Sets the channel bandwidth to 8.75 MHz with sampling factor 8/7
– 10 MHz (28/25): Sets the channel bandwidth to 10 MHz with sampling factor 28/25
b Toggle the Frame Length soft key and select 5 ms or 10 ms.
c Press the TTG (RTG) soft key to set the transmit/receive transition gap between the last
sample of the downlink burst and the first sample of the subsequent uplink burst.
d Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
e Press the CP Ratio soft key, and then select the cyclic prefix ratio option: 1/4, 1/8, 1/16,
or 1/32.
f Press the DL Symbols soft key to set the number of downlink symbols.

462 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

g Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
h Press the UL Symbols soft key to set the number of uplink symbols.
i Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
3 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.
NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

4 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 261 Multipath profile measurement with Mobile WiMAX OTA signal analyzer

Preamble power trend

The Preamble Power Trend shows power variations of a strongest preamble signal over time along with the
relative power trend compare to total preamble power. Searching preamble index can be set auto to detect
strongest or manual to search specific preamble. Positioning information, latitude, and longitude will be
displayed if a GPS antenna is supplied and locked to the GPS satellites on the bottom of the screen.

Setting measure setup

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 437, you can
continue your measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the System Config soft key, and then do the following:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key, and then select the nominal channel bandwidth to be
measured from the following choices:

JD700B Series User’s Guide 463

Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

– 7 MHz (8/7): Sets the channel bandwidth to 7 MHz with sampling factor 8/7. In
conjunction with nominal channel bandwidth
– 8.75 MHz (8/7): Sets the channel bandwidth to 8.75 MHz with sampling factor 8/7
– 10 MHz (28/25): Sets the channel bandwidth to 10 MHz with sampling factor 28/25
b Toggle the Frame Length soft key and select 5 ms or 10 ms.
c Press the TTG (RTG) soft key to set the transmit/receive transition gap between the last
sample of the downlink burst and the first sample of the subsequent uplink burst.
d Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
e Press the CP Ratio soft key, and then select the cyclic prefix ratio option: 1/4, 1/8, 1/16,
or 1/32.
f Press the DL Symbols soft key to set the number of downlink symbols.
g Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
h Press the UL Symbols soft key to set the number of uplink symbols.
i Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
3 Toggle the Preamble Index soft key and select the preamble search method: Auto or Manual.
4 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following steps:
a Press the Delay soft key to set the amount of delay in µs.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the µs soft key.
NOTE
The Delay setting is used only when there is a time offset in the signals to be measured.

5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 262 Preamble power trend with Mobile WiMAX OTA signal analyzer

Route map
The JD700B Series provides the Route Map function that allows you to collect data of points in an indoor or
outdoor environment and track the received signals and coverage of RF transmitters by plotting data real
time directly on top of a loaded floor plan or a map.

464 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 If required, connect a GPS receiver to your JD700B series for outdoor mapping.
Indoor mapping does not necessarily need a GPS antenna.
2 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 437.
3 To load your map file, complete the following steps:
a Plug in your USB drive that has a floor map or .mcf file type created in JDMapCreator. If
the JDMapCreator application on your computer is connected to the instrument via USB or
LAN, you can send a map file with a single layer to the instrument directly by using the
Send to EQP menu in JDMapCreator.
NOTE
The JDMapCreator converts and resizes any scanned floor plan or layout to fit onto your
instrument’s display. JDMapCreator 1.2.0 or later can save a multiple-layered map,
providing x1, x2, and x4 views, as a sizable map file so that you can zoom in and out
after loading it.
b Press SAVE/LOAD hot key, and then select Load > Load Map. See “Using load” on page
35 for more information.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
5 Press the Plot Point soft key, and then select the plot point option from the following choices:
– To collect data/plot points automatically as you move around in a vehicle or outside, press
the GPS soft key and then toggle the Screen Mode soft key between Map and Full.
NOTE
With the Map setting, you can view only the collected points that can be seen within the
boundary of the loaded map. If a point is off the map, the instrument displays an arrow to
indicate the direction of the current location on the map and the distance from the center
to the location at the top of the screen.

With the Full setting, you can view all the collected points of the route without the loaded
map.
– To collect data/plot points manually without a GPS antenna in an indoor environment, press
the Position soft key.
6 Toggle the Plot soft key and select Start to start plotting.
7 Touch directly on the screen or press the ENTER hard key to collect data and plot points on the
loaded map for the Position setting.
NOTE
For the Position setting, you can change the direction of the route with the arrow keys
and the distance with the rotary knob.
8 Toggle the Plot soft key and select Stop to stop plotting.
9 Press the SAVE/LOAD hot key to save the result.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.
NOTE
The instrument does not automatically save the collected data. It is recommended that
you save the result. Otherwise, you will lose all the collected data.

Setting limit for route map

You can set the thresholds for each test item.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Excellent soft key to set its threshold.
3 Enter a value, and then press the Enter soft key. You can also use the rotary knob.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 465

Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

4 Press the Very Good soft key to set its threshold.

5 Enter a value, and then press the Enter soft key. You can also use the rotary knob.
6 Press the Good soft key to set its threshold.
7 Enter a value, and then press the Enter soft key. You can also use the rotary knob.
8 Press the Fair soft key to set its threshold.
9 Enter a value, and then press the Enter soft key. You can also use the rotary knob.
10 Press the Poor soft key to set its threshold.
11 Enter a value, and then press the Enter soft key. You can also use the rotary knob.
12 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 263 Route map measurement with Mobile WiMAX OTA signal analyzer

Controlling a map
If you have loaded a sizable map that was created in JDMapCreator 1.2.0 or later, you can use the Map
Control feature that enables you to zoom into the map and view a specific area of interest in detail.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Map Control soft key. This key is active only when you have loaded a sizable map.
3 Do one of the following:
– To zoom into an area of interest directly, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Zoom to soft key and select Area.
The black rectangle appears on the map.
b Press the Zoom In and Zoom Out soft keys, as you need, to decrease and increase
the selected area.
c Move the rectangle by using the four arrow keys, as you need, to place it in a specific
area of interest.
d Press the center of the rotary knob to zoom into the selected area. You can also press
the Zoom to soft key again to zoom into the selected area.
– To zoom into the center or zoom out from the center, complete the following steps:

466 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 13 Using Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer

a Toggle the Zoom to soft key and select Center.

b Press the Zoom In and Zoom Out soft keys, as you need, to zoom in and zoom out.
c Move the zoomed-in area by using the four arrow keys, as you need.
4 To set the location mode, toggle the Location Mode soft key between Auto and Manual and
select the one you desire.
– Auto: The instrument compares the coordinates of the displayed map with recevied GPS
information. If your current location goes out of the displayed area and enters into the next
zoomed-in section within the base map, the map display changes automatically to the next
section in which your current position is.
– Manual: The map display of the zoomed-in area remains unchanged even if your current
location goes out of the displayed area. You can change the displayed area manually by
using the arrow keys.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 467

 14

Chapter 14 Using Cable and Antenna

Analyzer
This chapter provides instructions for using the Cable and Antenna Analyzer function, which is available for
the JD785B/JD745B Base Station Analyzer and the JD786B/JD746B RF Analyzer. Topics discussed in this
chapter are as follows:

n Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 469

n Display overview ..................................................................................................................... 469
n Selecting measurement mode ................................................................................................ 470
n Configuring test parameters .................................................................................................... 470
n Performing calibration ............................................................................................................. 472
n Connecting a cable.................................................................................................................. 477
n Performing reflection measurements ...................................................................................... 480
n Performing DTF measurements .............................................................................................. 481
n Performing reflection-DTF measurements .............................................................................. 483
n Performing cable loss (1 port) measurements ........................................................................ 485
n Performing 1-port phase measurements................................................................................. 487
n Performing Smith chart measurements................................................................................... 488
n Performing 2-port vector measurements................................................................................. 489
n Performing 2-port scalar measurements ................................................................................. 490
n Analyzing measurements ........................................................................................................ 492
 Chapter 14 Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer

Introduction
The Cable and Antenna Analyzer is a diagnostic tool needed to accurately detect operational problems by
performing cable and antenna measurements to verify the base station’s infrastructure, including feed lines,
connectors, antennas, cables, jumpers, amplifiers, and filters. The JD785B/JD745B Base Station Analyzer
and the JD786B/JD746B RF Analyzer have all of the measurement functions necessary to verify cable and
antenna systems from Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) to power measurements. In addition, the
JD785B/JD745B and the JD786B/JD746B make distance-to-fault measurements to pinpoint a faulty location
accurately.

To get maximum power into a load it is required that the load impedance match the generator impedance.
Any difference in impedance or mismatching would not produce maximum power transfer. An impedance
mismatch at the antenna system produces a reflective ‘traveling wave’, which goes in the opposite direction
from the incident wave. As the two traveling waves cross each other in opposite direction, it is produce an
interference pattern called a "standing wave". VSWR is the ratio between the power sent forward to the
cable and/or antenna and the amount of power that is reflected back to the transmitter.

Some of the consequences of having a high VSWR condition in cellular services include dropped calls, poor
reception, and an overall unacceptable performance in the cell (or section of cell) covered by the base
station antenna. Therefore, the VSWR of the antenna system including the feed line is one of the most
critical factors in the service and maintenance of the RF transmitter systems.

This Cable and Antenna Analyzer function performs following measurements:

n Reflection: VSWR and Return Loss

n Distance to Fault (DTF): VSWR and Return Loss
n Reflection-DTF (dual measurement)
n 2 Port Measurements: Vector and Scalar (Optional)
n Cable Loss (1 Port)
n 1 Port Phase
n Smith Chart

Display overview
Figure 264 provides descriptions for each segment of the measurement screen.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 469

Chapter 14 Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer

Figure 264 Reflection measurement screen

Selecting measurement mode

Procedure

1 Press the MODE hard key.

2 Press the Cable & Antenna Analyzer soft key. The Reflection (VSWR) mode is selected by
default.
3 To change the mode, press the MEASURE hot key and then select the measurement mode:
– Reflection (Return Loss)
– DTF (VSWR)
– DTF (Return Loss)
– Reflection-DTF
– Cable Loss (1 Port)
– 1 Port Phase, Smith Chart
– 2 Port Measurement (Vector/Scalar)

Configuring test parameters

Setting frequency
You can set frequencies manually using the Start Frequency/Stop Frequency or Center Frequency/Span.
You can also select from the band list stored in the instrument. It is recommended to set the frequency to a
value that covers the normal range of the measurement with enough margins.

470 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 14 Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer

Procedure

To set the start and stop frequencies:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Press the Start Frequency soft key.
3 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob or the arrow keys.
4 Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
5 Press the Stop Frequency soft key.
6 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob or the arrow keys.
7 Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.

To set the center frequency and span:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Press the Center Frequency soft key.
3 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob or the arrow keys.
4 Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
5 Press the Span soft key.
6 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob or the arrow keys.
7 Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.

To select the band from the band list:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Press the Band List soft key, and then select Standard Band or Custom Band.
The band list window appears.
3 Select a frequency band from the list, and then press the Select soft key.
The start and stop frequency information on the screen changes according to your choice.

Setting distance
In the DTF measurement mode, you need to set the start and stop distances. The maximum measurable
distance is displayed on the left side of the screen depending on the frequency setting. You can set any
distance within the maximum measurable distance. Optimum resolution is achieved when the user setting
distance is the same as the maximum measurable distance

Procedure

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.

2 Press the Start Distance soft key.
3 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob or the arrow keys.
4 Select the Enter soft key.
5 Press the Stop Frequency soft key.
6 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob or the arrow keys.
7 Select the Enter soft key.

Adjusting scale
You can adjust the Y-axis scale to optimize the display of measurement trace(s). Adjusting scale does not
affect the calibration state.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 471

Chapter 14 Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Do one of the following choices:
– Press the Auto Scale to optimize the display of the measured trace by letting the
instrument set the minimum and maximum values for the Y-axis automatically.
Each time this key is pressed, the top and bottom scales are set to the minimum and
maximum values with margin on the Y-axis of the chart.
– Press the Full Scale to restore the insturment’s default amplitude range for the Y-scale
automatically.
– To set the minimum and maximum values for the Y-axis manually, complete the following
steps:
a Press the Maximum (Top) soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
d Press the Minimum (Top) soft key.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
f Press the Enter soft key.

NOTE
This setting is not used in the Smith Chart measurement mode.

Setting sweep mode

The default setting is Continue to sweep continuously for most on-going measurements. If you want to hold
the measurement or get a single sweep, you can change the sweep mode.

Procedure

To select the single sweep mode:

1 Press the SWEEP hot key.
2 Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Single. You can also use the HOLD hot key.
The letter HOLD in red appears and the sweeping is paused.
3 Optional. Press the Sweep Once soft key to get a new measurement.

To return to the continuous sweep mode:

1 Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Continue. You can also use the HOLD hot key.
The letter HOLD in red disappears and the sweeping resumes.

Performing calibration
To get reliable and accurate measurement results, you must perform a calibration on your instrument after
setting frequencies and prior to making a measurement. To perform the calibration, you need to have the
following ready:

n Calibration accessories (optional)

n Mechanical Y-Cal kit or electronic EZ-Cal kit
n Phase-stabilized test cable

472 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 14 Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer

1-port calibration
Measurement modes that need the 1-port calibration are Reflection, DTF, Cable Loss, 1 Port Phase, and
Smith Chart.

It is recommended that you perform an O-S-L calibration right at the Reflection/RF Out port of the instrument
without using an extension cable in order to minimize a measurement error. If using an extension cable is
inevitable, you need to use a phase stable cable and perform the O-S-L calibration at the open end of the
extension cable.

NOTE
If the O-S-L calibration is done at the end of the port extension cable for DTF
measurement, the length of the port extension cable is compensated automatically and is
not included in the distance to the point of discontinuity.

Bending or moving the extension cable while making a measurement may cause errors in
the measurement.

O-S-L calibration using mechanical Y-Cal kit

Figure 265 illustrates the connection when a port extension cable is used for calibration.

Figure 265 1-port calibration connection with mechanical Y-Cal kit

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Calibrate soft key.
The on-screen instruction for the calibration appears.
3 Connect the OPEN connector of the CAL Kit directly to the Reflection/RF Out port or at the end
of the connected extension cable.
4 Press the Continue soft key to start calibration.
The calibration progress bar appears.
5 Connect the SHORT connector of the CAL Kit directly to the Reflection/RF Out port or at the
end of the connected extension cable.
6 Press the Continue soft key to continue calibration.
The calibration progress bar appears.
7 Connect the LOAD connector of the CAL Kit directly to the Reflection/RF Out port or at the end
of the connected extension cable.
8 Press the Continue soft key to continue calibration.
The calibration progress bar appears.
After completion, the calibration status on the screen changes to ON.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 473

Chapter 14 Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer

O-S-L calibration using electronic EZ-Cal kit

The e-Calibration is an Open-Short-Load calibration using the electronic EZ-Cal kit, which lets you perform
the O-S-L calibration easy and fast with only one connection of the kit to the instrument.

The O-S-L calibration must be performed after setting the frequencies and connecting an extension cable as
like any mechanical calibration. Figure 266 illustrates the connection when a port extension cable is used
for calibration.

Figure 266 1-port calibration connection with electronic EZ-Cal kit

Procedure

1 Connect an extension cable, if necessary, to the Reflection/RF Out port of the instrument.
2 Connect your EZ-Cal to the other open end of the extension cable or to your instrument's
Reflection/RF Out port directly.
3 Connect the USB cable to the side of the EZ-Cal and then to the USB Host port to power the
e-calibration kit.
The instrument detects the EZ-Cal automatically and displays the EZ-Cal icon.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
5 Press the Calibrate soft key.
The on-screen instruction appears. to guide you through the e-calibration.
6 Press the Continue soft key to continue calibration.
The calibration progress bar appears.
After completion, the calibration status on the screen changes to ON (E).

Quick calibration in DTF

The Quick calibration that is available only in the DTF measurement mode is useful when you want to
measure the cable length only, without having to perform a full O-S-L calibration with a mechanical
Y-Cal kit.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Calibrate soft key.
3 Connect the OPEN connector of your mechanical Y-Cal kit directly to the Reflection/RF Out port
or at the end of the connected extension cable.
4 Press the Quick Cal. soft key to start the quick calibration.
The calibration status on the screen appears.
After completion, the calibration status on the screen changes to ON (Q).

474 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 14 Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer

2-port calibration
Measurement modes that need the 2-port calibration are 2 Port Vector and Scalar measurements and 2 Port
Phase. You must perform 2-port calibration before making a measurement.

O-S-L-Thru calibration using mechanical Y-Cal kit for vector measurements

Figure 267 illustrates the connection using the Y-Cal kit for calibration in Vector measurements.

Figure 267 2-port calibration connection with Y-Cal in vector measurements

1)

2)

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Calibrate soft key.
The on-screen instruction for the calibration appears.
3 Connect the OPEN connector of the CAL Kit directly to the Reflection/RF Out port or at the end
of the connected test cable as illustrated in Figure 267-1.
4 Press the Continue soft key to start calibration.
The calibration progress bar appears.
5 Connect the SHORT connector of the CAL Kit directly to the Reflection/RF Out port or at the
end of the connected test cable.
6 Press the Continue soft key to continue calibration.
The calibration progress bar appears.
7 Connect the LOAD connector of the CAL Kit directly to the Reflection/RF Out port or at the end
of the connected test cable.
8 Press the Continue soft key to continue calibration.
The calibration progress bar appears.
9 Connect the Reflection/RF Out port and the RF In port for the Cable and Antenna Analyzer with
the test cable and the proper adapter as illustrated in Figure 267-2.
10 Press the Continue soft key to continue calibration.
The calibration progress bar appears.
After completion, the calibration status on the screen changes to ON.

O-S-L-Thru calibration using electronic EZ-Cal kit for vector measurements

Figure 268 illustrates the connection using the EZ-Cal kit for calibration in Vector measurements.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 475

Chapter 14 Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer

Figure 268 2-port calibration connection with EZ-Cal in vector measurements

1)

2)

Procedure

1 Connect an extension cable, if necessary, to the Reflection/RF Out port of the instrument.
2 Connect your EZ-Cal to the other open end of the extension cable or to your instrument's
Reflection/RF Out port directly.
3 Connect the USB cable to the side of the EZ-Cal and then to the USB Host port to power the
e-calibration kit as illustrated in Figure 268-1.
The instrument detects the EZ-Cal automatically and displays the EZ-Cal icon.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
5 Press the Calibrate soft key.
The on-screen instruction appears to guide you through the e-calibration.
6 Connect the Reflection/RF Out port and the RF In port for the Cable and Antenna Analyzer with
the test cable and the proper adapter as illustrated in Figure 268-2.
7 Press the Continue soft key to continue calibration.
The calibration progress bar appears.
After completion, the calibration status on the screen changes to ON.

Scalar measurement
Figure 269 illustrates the connection for calibration in Scalar measurements.

Figure 269 2-port calibration connection in Scalar measurements

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Calibrate soft key.
The on-screen instruction for the calibration appears.
3 Connect the Cable and Antenna Analyzer Reflection/RF Out port and the Spectrum Analyzer
RF In port with a test cable as illustrated in Figure 269.
4 Press the Continue soft key to continue calibration.
The calibration progress bar appears.
After completion, the calibration status on the screen changes to ON.

476 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 14 Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer

Calibration status indicators

The instrument displays calibration status that is an important indicator to get reliable and accurate
measurement results from CAA testing. The calibration status includes ON, ON (E), ON (I), ON (Q),
OFF (T), and OFF.

Table 20 Calibration status indicators

Indicator(s) Description

ON Indicates that a mechanical O-S-L calibration is performed using a Y-Cal kit and the
instrument is ready to make a measurement.

ON (E) Indicates that an electronic O-S-L calibration or e-calibration is performed using Viavi’s
EZ-Cal kit and the instrument is ready to make a measurement.

ON (I) Indicates that the frequency setting is changed within the frequency range registered
for the O-S-L calibration and so the calibration is still valid. When the calibration status
changes from ON to ON (I), re-calibration is not necessarily required.

ON (Q) Indicates that quick calibration (Quick Cal) is performed. It is useful only if cable length
measurement is needed.

OFF (T) Indicates that the temperature registered during the calibration is changed by ±10°C or
greater. It is recommended that you perform a new O-S-L calibration to obtain accurate
measurement results. When the temperature comes back within the registered range,
the status may be changed to ON.

OFF Indicates that the frequency setting is changed off the frequency range registered for
the calibration. The calibration is no longer valid.

Connecting a cable
Connecting a cable for reflection, DTF, 1-port phase, and Smith
Chart measurements

Figure 270 Connection for reflection measurement

JD700B Series User’s Guide 477

Chapter 14 Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer

Procedure

1 Connect the one end of the port extension cable to the Cable and Antenna Analyzer
Reflection/RF Out port of the instrument.
2 Connect the other end of the port extension cable to an antenna or feed line as illustrated in
Figure 270. Measurement result is displayed on the screen.

NOTE
After calibration, do not change the connection of the port extension cable or the
frequency setting. It may cause a measurement error.

Changing any frequency settings will automatically turn the calibration status to OFF on
the display screen, which requires re-calibration to proceed next measurement.

CAUTION
The maximum input power for the Cable and Antenna Analyzer Reflection/RF Out port
is +25 dBm. Do not connect this port directly to the output port of the system to prevent
degraded performance or malfunctioning.

WARNING
Do not attempt to connect the instrument to the antenna when there is a risk of lightning.
Electric shock may cause malfunction of or damage to the instrument.

Connecting a cable for cable loss (1 port) measurements

Procedure

1 Connect the one end of the cable under test to the Cable and Antenna Analyzer Reflection/RF
Out port of the instrument.
2 Connect the SHORT standard of the Cal Kit to the other end of the cable under test as illustrated
in Figure 271. Measurement result is displayed on the screen.

Figure 271 Connection for cable loss (1 port) measurement

Connecting a cable for 2-port vector measurements

Procedure

1 Connect the one end of the Thru test cable to the Cable and Antenna Analyzer Reflection/RF Out
port of the instrument and the other end of the cable to DUT.
2 Connect the DUT to the Cable and Antenna Analyzer RF In port of the instrument as illustrated
in Figure 272. Measurement result is displayed on the screen.

478 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 14 Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer

Figure 272 Connection for 2-port vector measurement

CAUTION
The maximum input power for the Cable and Antenna Analyzer RF In port is +25 dBm.
However, a proper level of input to the Cable and Antenna Analyzer RF In port is
0 dBm. When the input power is expected to be greater than 0 dBm, you must adjust the
output power for the RF Out.

Connecting a cable for 2-port scalar measurements

Procedure

1 Connect the one end of the Thru test cable to the Cable and Antenna Analyzer Reflection/RF Out
port of the instrument and the other end of the cable to DUT.
2 Connect the DUT to the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the instrument as illustrated in
Figure 273. Measurement result is displayed on the screen.

Figure 273 Connection for 2-port scalar measurement

CAUTION
The maximum input power for the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port is +25 dBm for JD780B
series and +20 dBm for JD740B series.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 479

Chapter 14 Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer

Performing reflection measurements

The Reflection measurement can be used to characterize cable and antenna system to ensure transmission
line impedance performance and signal reflection characteristics of cell-site across a specific frequency
range in voltage standing-wave ration (VSWR) or return loss.

Making a measurement
Procedure

1 Make a proper cable connection as described in “Connecting a cable for reflection, DTF, 1-port
phase, and Smith Chart measurements” on page 477.
2 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
3 Press the Data Points soft key to change the resolution of your measurement, and then select
the data point option: 126, 251, 501, 1001, and 2001. Changing the data point does not affect
current calibration.
NOTE
The larger number you choose, the higher resolution you get and the longer the
instrument takes to sweep and display results. Selecting the data point larger than what
you need for a measurement will result in unnecessarily long sweep time. It is
recommended that you select high resolution data points only for an instance of
measuring wide frequency bands or requiring precise measurement data.

4 Optional. To turn the bias tee on, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Bias Tee soft key and select On.
b Enter a value between 12 and 32 with 0.1 V step, and then press the V soft key.
NOTE
The instrument’s built-in bias tee function (option 002) supplies 12-32 VDC bias to active
devices through the RF In port, eliminating the need of an external power supply.

5 Optional. To select the output power, toggle the Output Power soft key between 0 dBm and
-30 dBm.
NOTE
When an amplifier’s reflection is measured, it is recommended that you change this
output power level to -30 dBm and then re-calibrate. Changing to -30 dBm may result in
reduced measurement dynamic range.

6 Optional. To turn the interference rejection on, toggle the Interference Rej soft key between
On and Off to enable or disable the feature.
NOTE
It is recommended that you use this feature only when you suspect interfering signals in
the area as turning this on slows down the measurement.

480 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 14 Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 274 Reflection measurement in return loss scale

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for cable and antenna analyzer” on page
493 for more information.

NOTE
You can go to MEASURE SETUP > Zoom to view your measurements in detail with the
user-definable zoom zones. See “Setting zoom zones” on page 492 for more information.

Performing DTF measurements

The Distance-To-Fault (DTF) measurement can be used to accurately identify fault locations in the cell-site
transmission (cable and feed line) system, indicating signal discontinuities in VSWR or return loss over
distance in meter or foot. This measurement precisely pinpoints the location of such things as damaged or
degraded antennas, connectors, amplifiers, filters, and duplexers.

Making a measurement
Procedure

1 Make a proper cable connection as described in “Connecting a cable for reflection, DTF, 1-port
phase, and Smith Chart measurements” on page 477.
2 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
3 Press the Data Points soft key to change the resolution of your measurement, and then select
the data point option: 126, 251, 501, 1001, and 2001. Changing the data point does not affect
current calibration.
NOTE
The larger number you choose, the higher resolution you get and the longer the
instrument takes to sweep and display results. Selecting the data point larger than what
you need for a measurement will result in unnecessarily long sweep time. It is
recommended that you select high resolution data points only for an instance of
measuring wide frequency bands or requiring precise measurement data.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 481

Chapter 14 Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer

4 Press the DTF Settings soft key, and then do the following:
– To select a cable from the list, complete the following steps:
a Press the Cable List soft key, and then select Standard Cable or Custom Cable.
The cable list window appears.
b Select a cable by using the rotary knob or the Page Up/Page Down soft keys.
c Press the Select soft key.
d Optional. In the standard cable list window, press the Add to Custom soft key to add
the selected cable to the custom list.
– To define a new cable, complete the following steps:
a Press the Prop Velocity soft key to define the cable’s relative propagation delay.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.
d Press the Cable Loss soft key to define the cable’s cable loss.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
f Press the Enter soft key.
NOTE
The propagation velocity affects the calculation of the distance and the cable loss does
the peak level of the discontinuity in a DTF measurement.

– Toggle the Metrics soft key and select the unit option for the X-axis: Meter or Foot.
– Press the Windowing soft key, and then select the video filtering option: Rectangular,
Blackman, Nominal Side Lobe, Low Side Lobe, or Minimum Side Lobe.
5 Optional. To turn the bias tee on, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Bias Tee soft key and select On.
b Enter a value between 12 and 32 with 0.1 V step, and then press the V soft key.
NOTE
The instrument’s built-in bias tee function (option 002) supplies 12-32 VDC bias to active
devices through the RF In port, eliminating the need of an external power supply.

6 Optional. To select the output power, toggle the Output Power soft key between 0 dBm and
-30 dBm.
NOTE
When an amplifier’s reflection is measured, it is recommended that you change this
output power level to -30 dBm and then re-calibrate. Changing to -30 dBm may result in
reduced measurement dynamic range.

7 Optional. To turn the interference rejection on, toggle the Interference Rej soft key between
On and Off to enable or disable the feature.
NOTE
It is recommended that you use this feature only when you suspect interfering signals in
the area as turning this on slows down the measurement.

482 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 14 Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer

Measurement example
Figure 275 DTF measurement

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for cable and antenna analyzer” on page
493 for more information.

Figure 276 DTF measurement with the alternate sweep on

NOTE
You can go to MEASURE SETUP > Alternate Sweep Settings to scale down a specific
sub-band. See “Setting alternate sweep” on page 493 for more information.

Performing reflection-DTF measurements

You can view two measurement results simultaneously on the screen as you configure each measurement

JD700B Series User’s Guide 483

Chapter 14 Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer

setting.

Making a measurement
Procedure

1 Make a proper cable connection as described in “Connecting a cable for reflection, DTF, 1-port
phase, and Smith Chart measurements” on page 477.
2 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
3 Toggle the Active Window soft key between Top and Bottom and select the window to be
active for setting.
4 Press the Dual Config soft key, and then select the dual configuration option:
– To select the measurement mode for the top window, press the Top soft key, and then
select Reflection (VSWR) or Reflection (Return Loss).
– To select the measurement mode for the bottom window, press the Bottom soft key, and
then select DTF (VSWR) or DTF (Return Loss).
– To configure DTF settings for the bottom window, select Bottom > DTF Settings.
See “Performing DTF measurements” on page 481 for more information.
– To set the alternate sweep settings for the bottom window, select Bottom > Alternate
Sweep Settings. See “Setting alternate sweep” on page 493 for more information.

NOTE
See “Performing reflection measurements” and “Performing DTF measurements” for
more information on how to set other measurement setup parameters for the Reflection-
DTF measurement.

Measurement example
Figure 277 Reflection-DTF dual measurement

1) Alternate sweep off:

484 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 14 Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer

2) Alternate sweep on:

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for cable and antenna analyzer” on page
493 for more information.

Performing cable loss (1 port) measurements

The Cable Loss (1 Port) measurement quantifies signal loss through a cable or other device over a defined
frequency range by range by connecting one end of the cable to the instrument measurement port and
terminating the other end of the cable with a short, or leaving it open altogether. This measurement can be
particularly useful in measuring the loss of feed line connected to the antenna.

Making a measurement
Procedure

1 Make a proper cable connection as described in “Connecting a cable for cable loss (1 port)
measurements” on page 478.
2 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
3 Press the Data Points soft key to change the resolution of your measurement, and then select
the data point option: 126, 251, 501, 1001, and 2001. Changing the data point does not affect
current calibration.
NOTE
The larger number you choose, the higher resolution you get and the longer the
instrument takes to sweep and display results. Selecting the data point larger than what
you need for a measurement will result in unnecessarily long sweep time. It is
recommended that you select high resolution data points only for an instance of
measuring wide frequency bands or requiring precise measurement data.

4 Optional. To turn the bias tee on, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Bias Tee soft key and select On.
b Enter a value between 12 and 32 with 0.1 V step, and then press the V soft key.
NOTE
The instrument’s built-in bias tee function (option 002) supplies 12-32 VDC bias to active
devices through the RF In port, eliminating the need of an external power supply.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 485

Chapter 14 Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer

NOTE
See “Performing reflection measurements” for more information on how to set other
measurement setup parameters for the Cable Loss (1 Port) measurement.

Measurement example
Figure 278 Cable loss (1 port) measurement

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for cable and antenna analyzer” on page
493 for more information.

Figure 279 Cable loss (1 port) measurement with the zone enabled

NOTE
You can go to MEASURE SETUP > Zoom to view your measurements in detail with the
user-definable zoom zones. See “Setting zoom zones” on page 492 for more information.

486 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 14 Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer

Performing 1-port phase measurements

The 1-port Phase measurement is used to measure S11 phase to tune antennas and to phase-match cables.

Making a measurement
Procedure

1 Make a proper cable connection as described in “Connecting a cable for reflection, DTF, 1-port
phase, and Smith Chart measurements” on page 477.
2 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
3 Press the Data Points soft key to change the resolution of your measurement, and then select
the data point option: 126, 251, 501, 1001, and 2001. Changing the data point does not affect
current calibration.
NOTE
The larger number you choose, the higher resolution you get and the longer the
instrument takes to sweep and display results. Selecting the data point larger than what
you need for a measurement will result in unnecessarily long sweep time. It is
recommended that you select high resolution data points only for an instance of
measuring wide frequency bands or requiring precise measurement data.

4 Optional. To turn the bias tee on, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Bias Tee soft key and select On.
b Enter a value between 12 and 32 with 0.1 V step, and then press the V soft key.
NOTE
The instrument’s built-in bias tee function (option 002) supplies 12-32 VDC bias to active
devices through the RF In port, eliminating the need of an external power supply.

NOTE
See “Performing reflection measurements” on page 480 for more information on how to
set other measurement setup parameters for the Cable Loss (1 Port) measurement.

Measurement example
Figure 280 Cable loss (1 port) measurement

JD700B Series User’s Guide 487

Chapter 14 Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer

Figure 281 Cable loss (1 port) measurement with zoom

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for cable and antenna analyzer” on page
493 for more information.

NOTE
You can go to MEASURE SETUP > Zoom to view your measurements in detail with the
user-definable zoom zones. See “Setting zoom zones” on page 492 for more information.

Performing Smith chart measurements

The Smith Chart measurement is used to measure DUTs’ impedance and phase to properly tune RF devices.
Smith chart also displays impedance-matching characteristics in cable and antenna systems or filter and
duplexer devices.

Making a measurement
Procedure

1 Make a proper cable connection as described in “Connecting a cable for reflection, DTF, 1-port
phase, and Smith Chart measurements” on page 477.
2 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
3 Press the Data Points soft key to change the resolution of your measurement, and then select
the data point option: 126, 251, 501, 1001, and 2001. Changing the data point does not affect
current calibration.
NOTE
The larger number you choose, the higher resolution you get and the longer the
instrument takes to sweep and display results. Selecting the data point larger than what
you need for a measurement will result in unnecessarily long sweep time. It is
recommended that you select high resolution data points only for an instance of
measuring wide frequency bands or requiring precise measurement data.

4 Optional. To turn the bias tee on, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Bias Tee soft key and select On.
b Enter a value between 12 and 32 with 0.1 V step, and then press the V soft key.

488 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 14 Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer

NOTE
The instrument’s built-in bias tee function (option 002) supplies 12-32 VDC bias to active
devices through the RF In port, eliminating the need of an external power supply.

NOTE
See “Performing reflection measurements” on page 480 for more information on how to
set other measurement setup parameters for the Smith Chart measurement.

Measurement example
Figure 282 Smith chart measurement

Performing 2-port vector measurements

The Vector measurement is used to perform faster and more accurate measurement with around 80 dB
dynamic range. It also provides antenna isolation measurement. You can determine DUT’s S21 phase
characteristic by selecting the measurement display type as Phase.

Making a measurement
Procedure

1 Make a proper cable connection as described in “Connecting a cable for 2-port vector
measurements” on page 478.
2 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
3 Press the Data Points soft key to change the resolution of your measurement, and then select
the data point option: 126, 251, 501, 1001, and 2001. Changing the data point does not affect
current calibration.
NOTE
The larger number you choose, the higher resolution you get and the longer the
instrument takes to sweep and display results. Selecting the data point larger than what
you need for a measurement will result in unnecessarily long sweep time. It is
recommended that you select high resolution data points only for an instance of
measuring wide frequency bands or requiring precise measurement data.

4 Toggle the Display soft key and select Magnitude to view measurements in dB or Phase in

JD700B Series User’s Guide 489

Chapter 14 Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer

degree.
5 Optional. To turn the bias tee on, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Bias Tee soft key and select On.
b Enter a value between 12 and 32 with 0.1 V step, and then press the V soft key.
NOTE
The instrument’s built-in bias tee function (option 002) supplies 12-32 VDC bias to active
devices through the RF In port, eliminating the need of an external power supply.

6 Optional. To set the level of the output power to be inserted, complete the following steps:
a Press the Output Power soft key.
b Enter the following value by rotating the knob or using the numeric keys:
– 0 dBm: To test a passive RF device’s loss such as a cable or a filter.
– -30 dBm: To test an active RF device’s gain such as an amplifier with JD740B series.
– -50 – -30 dBm: To test an active RF device’s gain such as an amplifier with JD780B
series. You need to enter a value with an increment of 5 dBm.

NOTE
Changing the output power to a value between -50 dBm and -30 dBm may result in
reduced measurement dynamic range and re-calibration is required.
.

7 Optional. To set the number of measurements to be averaged, press the Average soft key and
then adjust the number between one and five by using the rotary knob.
8 Optional. To turn the interference rejection on, toggle the Interference Rej soft key between
On and Off to enable or disable the feature.
NOTE
It is recommended that you use this feature only when you suspect interfering signals in
the area as turning this on slows down the measurement.

Measurement example
Figure 283 2-port vector measurement

Performing 2-port scalar measurements

The Scalar measurement enables full characterization of DUT with dynamics over 100 dB.

490 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 14 Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer

Making a measurement
Procedure

1 Make a proper cable connection as described in “Connecting a cable for 2-port scalar
measurements” on page 479.
2 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
3 Press the Data Points soft key to change the resolution of your measurement, and then select
the data point option: 126, 251, 501, 1001, and 2001. Changing the data point does not affect
current calibration.

NOTE
The larger number you choose, the higher resolution you get and the longer the
instrument takes to sweep and display results. Selecting the data point larger than what
you need for a measurement will result in unnecessarily long sweep time. It is
recommended that you select high resolution data points only for an instance of
measuring wide frequency bands or requiring precise measurement data.

4 Optional. To set the level of the output power to be inserted, complete the following steps:
a Press the Output Power soft key.
b Enter the following value by rotating the knob or using the numeric keys:
– 0 dBm: To test a passive RF device’s loss such as a cable or a filter.
– -30 dBm: To test an active RF device’s gain such as an amplifier with JD740B series.
– -50 – -30 dBm: To test an active RF device’s gain such as an amplifier with JD780B
series. You need to enter a value with an increment of 5 dBm.

NOTE
Changing the output power to a value between -50 dBm and -30 dBm may result in
reduced measurement dynamic range and re-calibration is required.

Measurement example
Figure 284 2-port scalar measurement

JD700B Series User’s Guide 491

Chapter 14 Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer

Analyzing measurements
Setting trace and display
You can display up to six traces on the measurement chart simultaneously.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Select Trace soft key, and then select the trace number: T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, or T6.
The legend shape of the selected trace changes from square to round to indicate that the trace is
the active one now.
3 Do one of the following:
To Select Trace Legend

Clear current data and display with new Clear Write W

measurements

Capture the selected trace and compare traces Capture C

Load a saved trace Load L

Hide the selected trace Trace View > Off F

Remove all the traces and initialize the trace Trace Clear All
settings

4 Optional. If you have at least two traces (T1 and T2), you can perform trace math:
a Press the Trace Math soft key.
b Press the T1 – T2 -> T5 or T2 – T1 -> T6 soft key.

NOTE
The trace to be loaded must be in the same measurement mode and has the same
frequency setting as the current measurement.

Setting zoom zones

You can define up to three zoom-in zones so that you can view uplink and downlink frequencies in detail on
a single measurement window for compliance verification.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Zoom soft key.
3 To view a zoom zone in a separate chart, complete the following steps:
a Press the Zoom soft key, and then select the zone number to zoom in: Zone 1, Zone 2,
or Zone 3.
b Toggle the Zoom soft key and select On.
The zoom-in chart for the selected zone appears under the measurement result.
4 To define a zone range, complete the following steps:
a Press the Zone [1|2|3] soft key.
b Toggle the Zone [1|2|3] soft key between On and Off to view or dismiss the zone.
c Press the Start Frequency soft key.
d Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
e Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
f Press the Stop Frequency soft key.

492 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 14 Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer

g Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
h Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
5 To clear all the zones, press the Clear All soft key.

Setting alternate sweep

You can use the Alternate Sweep in DTF measurements to scale down a specific sub-band without a need
of an additional calibration.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Alternate Sweep Settings soft key.
3 Toggle the Alternate Sweep soft key and select On or Off to enable or disable the alternate
sweep feature.
4 To set the start and stop distances for the alternate sweep, complete the following steps:
a Press the Start Distance soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob or the arrow
keys.
c Select the Enter soft key.
d Press the Stop Frequency soft key.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob or the arrow
keys.
f Select the Enter soft key.
5 To set the start and stop frequencies for the alternate sweep, complete the following steps:
a Press the Alternate Start Frequency soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob or the arrow
keys.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
d Press the Alternate Stop Frequency soft key.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob or the arrow
keys.
f Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
6 To set the center and span frequencies for the alternate sweep, complete the following steps:
a Press the Alternate Center Frequency soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob or the arrow
keys.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
d Press the Alternate Span Frequency soft key.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob or the arrow
keys.
f Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.

Setting limit for cable and antenna analyzer

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Multi Segment Line soft key for Pass/Fail indication.
3 Toggle the Limit soft key between Upper and Lower to select the one to be displayed.
4 Set the number of segments for the selected upper or lower limit line, up to 50 segments.
a Press the # of Line soft key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 493

Chapter 14 Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer

b Enter a value between 1 and 50 by using the numeric keys.

c Press the Enter soft key.
5 Press the Autoset soft key to let the instrument set the limit for each segment and display the line.
6 Optional. To move the limit line, complete the following steps:
a Select Limit Up/Down or Limit Left/Right.
b Turn the rotary knob to move the line as desired. You can also manually enter a value.
7 Optional. To edit the segment properties, complete the following steps:
a Press the Edit Limit soft key.
b Press the Move soft key and then turn the rotary knob to select the segment to edit.
c Select the menu option, from the following choices:
– To hide the line for the selected segment, toggle the Line soft key and select Off.
– To add a new point, press the Add Point soft key.
– To delete the selected point, press the Delete Point soft key.
– To change the position, press the Frequency or Amplitude soft key, and then turn the
rotary knob to change the value as desired.
8 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

494 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 15

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

This chapter provides instructions for using the RFoCPRI function that requires Optical Hardware (option
008), RFoCPRI Interference Analyzer (options 060 – 065), RFoCPRI LTE-FDD Signal Generator (option
081), RFoCPRI LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer (option 091), and RFoCPRI LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer (option
092). Topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

n Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 496

n Display overview ..................................................................................................................... 497
n Selecting measurement mode ................................................................................................ 497
n Performing layer 2 monitoring ................................................................................................. 498
n Performing layer 2 term testing ............................................................................................... 500
n Performing interference analysis ............................................................................................. 503
n Performing PIM detection (single and multiple carriers) ......................................................... 520
n Performing LTE-FDD downlink signal analysis ....................................................................... 525
n Performing LTE-TDD downlink signal analysis ....................................................................... 552
n Using signal generator ............................................................................................................ 576
Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Introduction
Cell sites today have a distributed architecture of the radio that consists of the radio equipment control (REC)
or base band unit (BBU) installed at the bottom of the tower and the radio equipment (RE) or remote radio
head (RRH) installed at the top of the tower. These two elements communicate with each other via the
Common Public Radio Interference (CPRI) protocol over fiber links.

This distributed architecture provides the benefit of replacing coax-based feeders with fiber- based feeders,
significantly reducing the problems of signal loss and reflections. However, since all the RF interfaces reside
on the RRH, any RF maintenance or troubleshooting requires climbing to the top of the tower to access the
RRH, increasing operational cost and unnecessary safety issues.

JD700B series analyzers provide the option of RFoCPRI that allows you to perform RF maintenance and
troubleshooting activities on the ground via the fiber interfaces at the BBU, significantly reducing
maintenance time and operational expenses. Thanks to the RFoCPRI technology, you can verify the CPRI
control signals and extracts the IQ data transmitted between the BBU and RRH to monitor and analyze the
uplink interferences and the downlink signals.

The RFoCPRI testing provides following measurements and analysis:

n Layer 2 monitoring of link maintenance alarms and optical power

o Loss of Signal (LOS) – Code violation or low optical power
o Loss of Frame (LOF) – Frame synchronization or alignment
o Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) – Any error including LOS and LOF
o SAP Defect Indication (SDI) – Link not to be used for service access points
o Optical Rx and Tx power levels
n Layer 2 terminate testing
n Interference analysis
o Spectrum (Single and Dual)
o Spectrogram (Single and Dual)
o Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI)
o Spectrum replayer
n PIM detection of single or multiple carrier(s)
n LTE-FDD downlink signal analysis over CPRI
o Spectrum
o RF analysis – Channel Power and Occupied Bandwidth
o Power vs. Time (Frame)
o Modulation analysis – Constellation, Data Channel, Control Channel, Subframe, Frame,
Time Alignment Error, and Data Allocation Map
o Power Statistics CCDF
n LTE-TDD downlink signal analysis over CPRI
o Spectrum
o RF analysis – Channel Power and Occupied Bandwidth
o Power vs. Time (Frame)
o Modulation analysis – Constellation, Data Channel, Control Channel, Subframe,
Time Alignment Error, and Data Allocation Map
o Power Statistics CCDF

496 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Display overview
Figure 285 provides descriptions for each segment of the measurement screen.

Figure 285 RFoCPRI analysis screen

Selecting measurement mode

Procedure

1 Press the MODE hard key.

2 Press the RFoFiber soft key.
3 Press the RFoCPRI soft key. The Layer 2 Monitoring mode is set by default.
4 Press the MEASURE hot key, and then select the measurement mode option from the following
choices:
– Layer 2 Monitoring
– Layer 2 Term
– Interference Analyzer > Spectrum, Spectrogram, RSSI, Spectrum Replayer,
Dual Spectrum, or Dual Spectrogram
– PIM Detection > PIM Detection Single Carrier, PIM Detection Multiple Carriers, or
Calculated PIM
– Signal Analyzer > LTE-FDD > Spectrum, RF Analysis, P vs T (Frame),
Modulation Analysis, or Power Statistics CCDF
– Signal Analyzer > LTE-TDD > Spectrum, RF Analysis, P vs T (Frame),
Modulation Analysis, or Power Statistics CCDF

JD700B Series User’s Guide 497

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Performing layer 2 monitoring

The in-service Layer 2 Monitoring is used to monitor link maintenance alarms of the physical layer (Layer 1)
that is delivered on the L1 in-band protocol, which resides on the layer 2 of CPRI. It also verifies proper
optical power level of the received signal.

Connecting cables
The monitoring mode lets you perform in-service testing by using coupler(s) or nTap(s). You can connect
cables with a tap or without a tap as illustrated in Figure 286. If you have connected cables directly from
RRH and BBU without using the nTap, you must turn on the through mode (Thru) in the CPRI parameter
settings.

A SFP/SFP+ transceiver that is connected to your JD700B series must be compatible with your DUT and
you must have your module information such as line rate, wavelength, and mode (MM or SM) handy.

Figure 286 Connection diagram for Layer-2 monitoring mode

With nTap (both Thru On/Off): Without nTap (Thru On only):

Selecting measurement mode

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key.

2 Select Layer 2 Monitoring.

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key

2 To set the CPRI line bit rate of the fronthaul under test, complete the following steps:
a Press the Link Rate soft key.
b Select the CPRI link rate option from the choices: 614.4 Mbps, 1228.8 Mbps,
2457.6 Mbps, 3072.0 Mbps, 4915.2 Mbps, 6144.0 Mbps, and 9830.4 Mbps.
NOTE
It is important that you set the link rate correctly to avoid any misleading LOS and LOF
alarms displayed on the screen.

498 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Setting Rx optic limit

A RRH has a finite dynamic range for input optic power and it can cause an abnormal behavior of the RRH if
the optical power is weaker than certain level. To differentiate intermittent low optic power issues from any
RSSI, interference and signal quality issues, it is important for you to monitor the input optic power level
during the monitoring of the spectrum and the signal quality. Using this Rx optic limit feature, you can set
lower and upper limits and monitor the Rx optic level with Pass/Fail indication in green and red colors.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Rx Optic Level soft key.
3 Set a threshold for High Limit and Low Limit.
4 To enable the Rx optic limit, toggle the Test Limits soft key and select On.
If the optic power level falls out of the specified thresholds, the color of the power reading or
indicator turns red.
5 To disable the Rx optic limit, toggle the Test Limits soft key and select Off.

Conducting layer 2 monitoring

After you have configured test parameters, you can monitor the alarms of the Layer 1 as you desire.

Procedure

1 Monitor the following alarm indicators and the optical signal level. Green dots indicate no
occurrence of an alarm while red ones mean occurrence(s).
– LOS: Loss of Signal (code violation or low optical power)
– LOF: Loss of Frame (frame synchronization or alignment)
– RAI: Remote Alarm Indication (any errors including LOS and LOF)
– SDI: SAP Defect Indication (link not to be used for serivce access points)
– Optic Rx Level: If the optical signal level is lower than the threshold, the CPRI link may not
work properly and the RRH may not be in service mode.
2 Optional. You can use the Save Logging Data soft key to record the event logging in .csv file
format. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.
3 To clear the previous event history and start a new monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot
key and then the Clear History soft key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 499

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Measurement example
Figure 287 CPRI layer 2 monitoring

Performing layer 2 term testing

The out-of-service Layer 2 Term is to test CPRI fronthaul in the terminated state and it is used to monitor link
maintenance alarms of the physical layer (Layer 1) that is delivered on the L1 in-band protocol, which
resides on the layer 2 of CPRI. It also monitors the received optical power level.

In addition, CellAdvisor JD700B series can emulate the Base Band Unit (BBU) to start up the Remote Radio
Head (RRH). Once the RRH enters the operation state, JD700B series can generate an alarm or error and
send it to the RRH so that you can verify the optical cabling and proper RRH operation at the ground.

Selecting measurement mode

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key.

2 Select Layer 2 Term.

Connecting cables
The terminate mode allows you to do out-of-service testing. You can connect cables with a tap or without a
tap as illustrated in Figure 288.

A SFP/SFP+ transceiver that is connected to your JD700B series must be compatible with your DUT and
you must have your module information such as line rate, wavelength, and mode (MM or SM) handy.

500 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Figure 288 Connection diagram for Layer-2 term testing mode

With nTap: Without nTap:

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the CPRI line bit rate of the fronthaul under test, complete the following steps:
a Press the Link Rate soft key.
b Select the CPRI link rate option from the choices: 614.4 Mbps, 1228.8 Mbps,
2457.6 Mbps, 3072.0 Mbps, 4915.2 Mbps, 6144.0 Mbps, and 9830.4 Mbps.
NOTE
It is important that you set the link rate correctly to avoid any misleading LOS and LOF
alarms displayed on the screen.

Setting Rx optic limit

A RRH has a finite dynamic range for input optic power and it can cause an abnormal behavior of the RRH if
the optical power is weaker than certain level. To differentiate intermittent low optic power issues from any
RSSI, interference and signal quality issues, it is important for you to monitor the input optic power level
during the monitoring of the spectrum and the signal quality. Using this Rx optic limit feature, you can set
lower and upper limits and monitor the Rx optic level with Pass/Fail indication in green and red colors.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Rx Optic Level soft key.
3 Set a threshold for High Limit and Low Limit.
4 To enable the Rx optic limit, toggle the Test Limits soft key and select On.
If the optic power level falls out of the specified thresholds, the color of the power reading or
indicator turns red.
5 To disable the Rx optic limit, toggle the Test Limits soft key and select Off.

Conducting layer 2 term test

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 501

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

2 Toggle the Laser soft key and select On to activate the transmission.
3 To configure BBU emulation parameters, select More (1/2) > BBU Emulation and then do one of
the following:
– To negotiate with RRH to support the start-up process, toggle the Start-up Sequence soft
key and select Normal.
– To force the RRH to configure the predefined parameters, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Start-up Sequence soft key and select Bypass.
Setting it to Bypass activates additional soft keys.
b Press the Protocol Version soft key.
c Enter a value between one and 10 by using the rotary knob. You can also use the
numeric keys and then press the Enter soft key.
d Press the HDLC Rate soft key.
e Select the High level Data Link Control (HDLC) rate option from the choices:
No HDLC, 240, 480, 960, 1920, and 2400.
f Toggle the Eth Channel soft key between Enable and Disable.
Enabling the Ethernet Channel activates the Eth Subchannel Number menu.
g Press the Eth Subchannel Number soft key.
h Enter a value between 20 and 63 by using the rotary knob. You can also use the
numeric keys and then press the Enter soft key. You can also use the rotary knob.
4 Press the PREV hard key twice to return the Measure Setup menu bar.
5 To insert an alarm signal, complete the following steps:
a Press the Alarm/Error soft key.
b Press the Alarm Type soft key.
c Select the alarm type option from the choices: R-LOS, R-LOF, RAI, and SDI.
d Toggle the Alarm Insertion soft key and select On to start to insert the selected alarm.
e To stop inserting the alarm, toggle the Alarm Insertion soft key and select Off.
6 To insert a code error signal, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Error Type soft key between Code and K30.7 and select Code.
b Toggle the Insert Type soft key between Single and Rate, and then select the insert type
option you want.
– Single: It inserts an error once and then turns off the error insertion.
– Rate: It inserts an error according to the set error rate in the Error Rate menu.
c If you have selected Rate in step b, press the Error Rate and then select the error rate
option from the choices: 1E-3, 1E-4, 1E-5, 1E-6, 1E-7, 1E-8, and 1E-9.
d Toggle the Error Insertion soft key and select On to start to insert the error.
e To stop inserting the error, toggle the Error Insertion soft key and select Off.
7 To insert a K30.7 error signal, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Error Type soft key between Code and K30.7 and select K30.7.
b Toggle the Error Insertion soft key and select On to insert the error.
The K30.7 error signal is one time insertion. This setting changes back to Off after insertion.
8 Check the real time results on the screen.
9 Optional. You can use the Save Logging Data soft key to record the event logging in .csv file
format. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.
10 To clear the previous event history and start a new testing, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key
and then the Clear History soft key.

502 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Measurement example
Figure 289 CPRI layer 2 term test

Performing interference analysis

After checking that the link connection is good with no errors and alarms, you can proceed to the
interference analysis activities including spectrum, spectrogram, RSSI, spectrum replayer, dual spectrum,
and dual spectrogram. You can also monitor current and history CPRI alarm status for LOS and LOF
displayed on the interference measurement screen.

Connecting cables
You can connect cables with a tap or without a tap as illustrated in Figure 290. If you have connected cables
directly from RRH and BBU without using the nTap, you must turn on the through mode (Thru) in the CPRI
parameter settings.

A SFP/SFP+ transceiver that is connected to your JD700B series must be compatible with your DUT and
you must have your module information such as line rate, wavelength, and mode (MM or SM) handy.

Figure 290 Connection diagram for interference analysis

With nTap (both Thru On/Off): Without nTap (Thru On only):

JD700B Series User’s Guide 503

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Selecting measurement mode

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key.

2 Press the Interference Analyzer soft key.
3 Select the interference measurement mode from the following choices:
– Spectrum
– Spectrogram
– RSSI
– Spectrum Replayer
– Dual Spectrum
– Dual Spectrogram

Configuring test parameters

Configuration of test parameters described in this section is used in the Interference Analyzer mode
including spectrum measurements, spectrogram, RSSI, dual spectrum, and dual spectrogram.

Setting frequency
You can set the frequency with either frequency or channel number. If a frequency to be set matches to the
frequency corresponding to the selected channel standard, the instrument calculates its channel number
and updates the screen with it automatically.

Procedure

To set the frequency with center frequency:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
3 Press the Center Frequency soft key.
4 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
5 Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
6 Optional. To define the amount of increment for rotary operation, complete the following steps:
a Press the Frequency Step soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.

To set the frequency with channel number:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Channel.
3 To select the standard channel, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Std soft key. The standard channel window appears.
See “Appendix C – Band, frequency & channel standard” on page 664 for more information.
b Highlight the band to be measured by using the rotary knob, the arrow keys, or the
Page Up/Page Down soft keys.
c Press the Select soft key or the rotary knob to confirm the selection.
4 Toggle the Link soft key to select the scanning direction and select Fwd (forward) or Rev
(reverse).

504 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

5 Press the Channel Number soft key.

6 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
7 Press the Enter soft key.
The instrument automatically displays the corresponding center frequency value for the selected
channel number.
8 Optional. To define the amount of increment for rotary operation, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Step soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.

Setting reference level

You can set the reference level automatically or manually to optimize the display of the traces measured, as
you desire.

Procedure

To automatically set the reference level:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Press the Auto Scale soft key.
Each time you press this key, the Y-axis scale changes to be optimized with some margin.

To set the reference level manually:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 To set the maximum reference value on the Y-axis manually, complete the following steps:
a Press the Reference Level soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys or the rotary knob with 10 dB increments.
c Press the unit soft key or the ENTER hard key.
This unit key name changes according to the setting in the Units menu.

Optional. To change the scale unit:

1 Select More (1/2) > Units.
2 Select the unit of the display scale: dBm, dBV, dBmV, dBµV, V, or W.
The scale unit on the screen changes accordingly.

Setting scale per division

You can use the Scale/Div feature to change the scale per division, representing the value of one division
on the horizontal scale. The default setting is 10 dB per division and the maximum value can be set up to
20 dB.

Procedure

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Select More (1/2) > Scale/Div.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 20 by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.

Setting external offset

You can turn the External Offset on and manually set the external offset value. An offset consists of a cable
loss and a user offset, and the measurement result shows the value reflecting both offset values. When the

JD700B Series User’s Guide 505

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

external offset value is set at 40 dB, the measurement result compensates 40 dB.

Procedure

To set the external offset:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On.
3 Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.

To turn the external offset off:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Toggle the External Offset soft key and select Off.

Enabling auto leveling

It is normal that you see higher level of RSSI in CPRI spectrum than you have seen in RF spectrum because
the digital signal has a different gain level from RF’s. If you use the Auto Leveling feature and enter the
Noise Figure (NF) for the system to be tested, the instrument calculates an offset that compensates the
digital gain of RRH and applies it to the spectrum automatically to displace the level of spectrum to a known
RSSI power even though its accuracy cannot be guranteed. Offset calculation for Auto Leveling is based on
the following:

Auto Level offset = (Noise Floor of RFoCPRI) – (Ideal Noise Floor of RRH), where (Idea Noise Floor) =
N.F (RRH) + Thermal Noise + 10log (RBW)

Procedure

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Press the Auto Leveling soft key.
A calculated level of offset without NF is applied as the external offset and the user input field is
activated for entry of the noise figure value.
3 Enter a noise figure value by using the numeric keys.
NOTE
Having the noise figure factored in the offset calculation for Auto Leveling will enable you
to view the CPRI spectrum closer to what you can view in the RF spectrum, but if you do
not know the noise figure, you can skip this noise figure setting.
4 Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.
New external offset value appears in the External Offset menu box.

506 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Figure 291 Before enabling Auto Leveling

Figure 292 After enabling Auto Leveling

Setting RBW
You can set the RBW and VBW in the Spectrum, Spectrogram, and RSSI modes. The RBW range is limited
as per the bandwidth of the signal under test.

Procedure

1 Press the BW/AVG hard key.

2 Press the RBW soft key to set the resolution bandwidth.
3 Enter a value in 1-3 sequence by using the numeric keys, and then select kHz soft key.
You can also use the rotary knob.
– For signal bandwidths 1.4 MHz and 3 MHz: RBW from 1 kHz to 30 kHz
– For signal bandwidths 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz: RBW from 1 kHz to 100 kHz
4 Press the VBW soft key to set the video bandwidth.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 507

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

5 Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then select the unit option from the choices:
MHz, kHz, and Hz. You can also use the rotary knob.

Setting average
You can set the number of measurements to be averaged for the trace presentation in the Spectrum,
Spectrogram, and RSSI modes. A maximum of 100 times of averaging can be set. When the averaging
reaches to your setting, a new measurement value replaces the measurement value in sequence from the
earliest.

Procedure

1 Press the BW/AVG hard key.

2 Press the Average soft key.
3 Enter a value between one and 100 as needed by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the Enter soft key.

Setting sweep mode

The default setting is Continue to sweep continuously for most on-going measurements. If you want to hold
the measurement or get a single sweep, you can change the sweep mode. This setting is used in the
Spectrum, Spectrogram, and RSSI modes.

Procedure

To select the single sweep mode:

1 Press the SWEEP hot key.
2 Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Single. You can also use the HOLD hot key.
The letter HOLD in red appears and the sweeping is paused.
3 Optional. Press the Sweep Once soft key to get a new measurement.

To return to the continuous sweep mode:

1 Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Continue. You can also use the HOLD hot key.
The letter HOLD in red disappears and the sweeping resumes.

Setting trace
You can display up to six traces on the measurement chart simultaneously.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Select Trace soft key, and then select the trace number: T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, or T6.
The legend shape of the selected trace changes from square to round to indicate that the trace is
the active one now.
3 Do one of the following:
To Select Trace Legend

Clear current data and display with new Clear Write W

measurements

Display the input signal’s maximum response only Max Hold M

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

508 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Display the input signal’s minimum response only Min Hold m

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

Capture the selected trace and compare traces Capture C

Load a saved trace More (1/2) > Load L

Hide the displayed trace Trace View > Off F

Remove all the traces and initialize the trace More (1/2) > Trace
settings Clear All

NOTE
For the Max Hold and Min Hold, your instrument compares newly acquired data with the
active trace and displays larger maximum values or smaller minimum values on the
screen. You can set it to Unlimited to hold and view maximum or minimum data or
specify a certain amount of time up to 60 seconds by using numeric keys or rotary knob.
4 To select the detection option, select More (1/2) > Detectors, and then do one of the following:

To display Select

Random noise better than the peak without missing signals Normal

The highest value in each data point Peak

The root mean squared average power across the spectrum RMS

The lowest value in each data point Negative Peak

The center value in each data point Sample

5 Optional. Select More (1/2) > Trace Info, and then select the trace number to view the trace’s
parameter setting information stored at the time of the measurement or None to hide the
information display.
6 Optional. If you have the two traces T1 and T2, you can perform trace math. To view the power
difference between the traces, press the T1 – T2 -> T5 or T2 – T1 -> T6 soft key.
The result is overlaid on the screen along with the second Y-axis.

NOTE
To be able to load a trace, the trace to be overlaid must be saved in the same
measurement mode and frequency setting as the current measurement.

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the bandwidth of the downlink signal, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz,
15 MHz, and 20 MHz.
The RBW range changes based on this bandwidth setting.
Required number of AxC containers varies depending on the selected bandwidth.
3 To use the pre-configured settings for a NEM, complete the following steps:
a Press the NEM soft key.
b Select an NEM from the following choices:
– None (no pre-configuration)
– Ericsson > Ericsson (UL) and Ericsson (DL)
– Alcatel-Lucent (UL/DL)
– Samsung (UL/DL)

JD700B Series User’s Guide 509

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

– Huawei > Huawei (UL) and Huawei (DL)

– ZTE (UL/DL)
NOTE
If you have selected a NEM, the instrument sets the Map Postion and other releated
settings automatically based on the selected NEM and you cannot edit the map position
setting. The pre-configured information may be subject to changes at any times by NEMs.
4 To set the CPRI line bit rate of the fronthaul under test, complete the following steps:
a Press the Link Rate soft key.
b Select the CPRI link rate option from the choices: 614.4 Mbps, 1228.8 Mbps,
2457.6 Mbps, 3072.0 Mbps, 4915.2 Mbps, 6144.0 Mbps, and 9830.4 Mbps.
NOTE
It is important that you set the link rate correctly to avoid any misleading LOS and LOF
alarms displayed on the screen.

5 To configure CPRI parameters including loop on/off, number of AxC groups, IQ sample width,
mapping method, Tx clock type, port type, and map position, complete the steps described in the
“Configuring CPRI parameters” on page 510.
6 Optional. To use the RF signal generator function, see “Using RF source in RFoCPRI testing”
on page 576.
7 Optional. To use the CPRI signal generator function, see “Using CPRI source” on page 577.

Configuring CPRI parameters

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the CPRI Parameters soft key.
3 To turn on the through mode if you have not used a tap, toggle the Thru soft key and select On.
To turn it off, select Off.
4 To set the antenna per carrier group, complete the following steps:
a Press the AxC Group soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.
NOTE
Maximum number of the AxC Group is determined by the factors of link rate, sample
width, oversampling, and signal bandwidth.
5 To set the I and Q sample widths, complete the following steps:
a Press the IQ Sample Width soft key
b Enter a value between four and 20 by using the rotary knob. You can also use the numeric
keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
NOTE
According to the CPRI specification, the IQ sample width shall be between 4 and 20 bits
for I and Q in the uplink and between 8 and 20 bits in the downlink.
6 To set the mapping method, complete the following steps:
a Press the Mapping Method soft key.
b Select the mapping method option from the choices: 1and 3.
– Mapping Method 1: IQ sample based for packed position. An RRH of GSM, UMTS,
and LTE supports this mapping method.
– Mapping Method 3: Backward compatible with the mapping method 1 for flexible
position. An RRH of GSM, UMS, and LTE supports this mapping method.
7 Toggle the Port Type soft key and select Slave (default).
8 Press the Tx Clock soft key, and then select Recovered (default).
9 To set the first bit position of each AxC Container in the IQ data block of a basic frame, complete

510 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

the following steps:

a Press the Map Position soft key.
b Select the AxC Container number you want to set from the choices: AxC 0, AxC 1, AxC 2,
AxC 3, AxC 4, AxC 5, AxC 6, and AxC 7. Not all of these are activated depending on your
bandwidth setting.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Press the Enter soft key.
NOTE
The Antenna-Carrier (AxC) is the amount of digital baseband (IQ) U-plane data
necessary for either reception or transmission of one carrier at one independent antenna
element. The number of required AxC Container for a basic frame are two AxCs for 5
MHz, four AxCs for 10 MHz, and eight AxCs for 20 MHz.
Following is an example of test configuration for a DUT.

For this test configuration, IQ allocation will be like this in the CPRI basic frame.

Conducting spectrum measurement

After setting test parameters as described in “Configuring test parameters” on page 504, you can perform
spectrum measurements with an audible indicator. You can also turn on the interference ID.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the sound indicator, complete the following steps:
a Press the Sound Indicator soft key.
b Select the alarm reference option from the choices: Marker and Line.
– Marker: Sets the active marker position as the alarm reference.
– Line: Lets the limit line as the alarm reference.
c Press the Limit Line soft key to set a threshold for an alarm.
d Enter a value, and then press the dBm soft key.
e Toggle the Sound soft key and select On to enable to sound or Off to turn it off.
f Optional. To adjust the volume for alarm sound, press the Volume soft key, and then turn
the rotary knob clockwise or counter clockwise.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 511

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

NOTE
The Sound Indicator is used to identify interfering signals with alarm sound. It is
especially useful for locating interferer sources with a directional antenna.
3 To set the interference ID, complete the following steps:
a Press the Interference ID soft key.
b Press the Threshold soft key.
c Enter a value, and then press the dBm soft key.
d Toggle the Interference ID soft key and select On to turn on Interference ID or Off to turn
it off.
NOTE
The Interference ID automatically classifies interfering signals over a designated
spectrum and displays a list of possible signal types corresponding to the selected signal.
4 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of CPRI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.
If you have saved logging data, you can play them in the Spectrum Replayer mode.

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the display line, multi-
segment line, and channel limit. See “Setting limit for interference analysis” on page 519
for more information.

Figure 293 RFoCPRI spectrum measurement

512 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Figure 294 RFoCPRI spectrum analysis on LTE Uplink 10 MHz, antenna 1

Figure 295 RFoCPRI spectrum analysis on LTE Uplink 10 MHz, antenna 2

Conducting dual spectrum measurement

The Dual Spectrum feature lets you observe two spectrums for different map positions on the same link
simultaneously.

After setting test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 504, you can
perform dual spectrum measurements with an audible indicator. You can also turn on the interference ID.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Toggle the Active Window soft key and select [Top|Bottom].
3 To change the AxC group and map position settings for the window you have selected, complete
the following steps:

JD700B Series User’s Guide 513

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

a Press the CPRI Parameters soft key.

b Press the AxC Group soft key.
c Enter a value between one and 24, and then press the Enter soft key.
d Press the Map Position soft key, and then select the AxC Container number you want to
set from the choices: AxC 0, AxC 1, AxC 2, AxC 3, AxC 4, AxC 5, AxC 6, and AxC 7.
e Enter a value, and then press the Enter soft key.
NOTE
The AxC Group and Map Position settings for the top and bottom windows work
independently each other while all other parameter settings change concurrently. If you
have selected one of the NEMs, you cannot change the Map Position setting.
4 To set the sound indicator, complete the following steps:
a Press the Sound Indicator soft key.
b Select the alarm reference option from the choices: Marker and Line.
– Marker: Sets the active marker position as the alarm reference.
– Line: Lets the limit line as the alarm reference. Selecting this option activates the Limit
Line soft key.
c Press the Limit Line soft key to set a threshold for an alarm.
d Enter a value, and then press the dBm soft key.
e Toggle the Sound soft key and select On to enable to sound or Off to turn it off.
f Optional. To adjust the volume for alarm sound, press the Volume soft key, and then turn
the rotary knob clockwise or counter clockwise.
NOTE
The Sound Indicator is used to identify interfering signals with alarm sound. It is
especially useful for locating interferer sources with a directional antenna.
5 To set the interference ID, complete the following steps:
a Press the Interference ID soft key.
b Press the Threshold soft key.
c Enter a value, and then press the dBm soft key.
d Toggle the Interference ID soft key and select On to turn on Interference ID or Off to turn
it off.
NOTE
The Interference ID automatically classifies interfering signals over a designated
spectrum and displays a list of possible signal types corresponding to the selected signal.
6 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of CPRI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
7 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.
If you have saved logging data, you can play them in the Spectrum Replayer mode.

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the display line, multi-
segment line, and channel limit. See “Setting limit for interference analysis” on page 519
for more information.

514 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Figure 296 RFoCPRI dual spectrum analysis

Conducting spectrogram
The Spectrogram is particularly useful when attempting to identify periodic or intermittent signals as it
captures spectrum activity over time and uses various colors to differentiate spectrum power levels. When
the directional antenna is used to receive the signal, you will see a change in the amplitude of the tracked
signal as you change the direction of the antenna and see a change in the Spectrogram colors. The source
of the signal is located in the direction that results in the highest signal strength.

After setting test parameters as described in “Configuring test parameters” on page 504, you can perform
spectrogram measurements.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the amount of time between each trace measurement:
a Press the Time Interval soft key.
b Enter a value, and then press the Sec soft key.
3 To set the time cursor on a specific trace position, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Time Cursor soft key and select On.
b Turn the rotary knob to move the time cursor. You can also enter a value and then press the
Enter soft key.
c To turn the time cursor off, select Off.

NOTE
Enabling the time cursor puts the measurement on hold and you can make post-
processing analysis for each measurement over time using the time cursor.

4 To start a new measurement, press the Reset/Restart soft key.

5 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of CPRI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
6 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

The spectrogram shows a vertical line on the chart when the marker is enabled on the screen.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 515

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Figure 297 RFoCPRI interference measurement in spectrogram

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the display line, multi-
segment line, and channel limit. See “Setting limit for interference analysis” on page 519
for more information.

Conducting dual spectrogram

The Dual Spectrogram feature lets you observe two spectrograms for different map positions on the same
link simultaneously.

After setting test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 504, you can
perform dual spectrogram measurements.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the More (1/2) soft key.
3 Toggle the Active Window soft key and select [Left|Right].
4 To change the AxC group and map position settings for the window you have selected, complete
the following steps:
a Press the CPRI Parameters soft key.
b Press the AxC Group soft key.
c Enter a value between one and 24, and then press the Enter soft key.
d Press the Map Position soft key, and then select the AxC Container number you want to
set from the choices: AxC 0, AxC 1, AxC 2, AxC 3, AxC 4, AxC 5, AxC 6, and AxC 7.
e Enter a value, and then press the Enter soft key.
NOTE
The AxC Group and Map Position settings for the top and bottom windows work
independently each other while all other parameter settings change concurrently.
5 To set the amount of time between each trace measurement, complete the following steps:
a Press the Time Interval soft key.
b Enter a value, and the press the Sec soft key.
6 To set the time cursor on a specific trace position, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Time Cursor soft key and select On.

516 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

b Turn the rotary knob to move the time cursor. You can also enter a value and then press the
Enter soft key.
NOTE
Enabling the time cursor puts the measurement on hold and you can make post-
processing analysis for each measurement over time using the time cursor.

7 To start a new measurement, press the Reset/Restart soft key.

8 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of CPRI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
9 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Figure 298 RFoCPRI dual spectrogram analysis

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the display line, multi-
segment line, and channel limit. See “Setting limit for interference analysis” on page 519
for more information.

Conducting RSSI
The Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) is a multi-signal tracking metric that is particularly useful for
measuring power-level variations over time. The RSSI measurement lets you assign power limit line for
audible alarms and increase alarm counters every time a signal exceeds a defined limit line. For long-term
analysis, the spectrogram and RSSI measurements can be automatically saved into an external USB
memory. Post-analysis can be performed with JDViewer application software.

After configuring test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 504, you can
continue to proceed to the spectrogram measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set up the alarm parameters, complete the following steps:
a Press the Alarm soft key.
b Press the Alarm at soft key, and then select the marker number you want to set.
c Press the Limit Line soft key to set a threshold for the alarm.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 517

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

d Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
e Press the dBm soft key.
f Toggle the Alarm soft key between On and Off to turn the alarm feature on or off.
NOTE
You must set the marker(s) first by using the MARKER hard key as these features use
the marker position to sound an alarm. See “Using marker” on page 53 for more
information.
g Optional. Press the Volume soft key and adjust the volume.
3 Press the PREV hard key to return to the Measure Setup screen bar.
4 To start a new measurement, press the Reset/Restart soft key.
5 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of CPRI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
6 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Figure 299 RFoCPRI interference measurement in RSSI

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the display line, multi-
segment line, and channel limit. See “Setting limit for interference analysis” on page 519
for more information.

Performing spectrum replayer

The Spectrum Replayer lets you retrieve and replay recorded spectrum analyzer traces in interference
analysis mode. These traces can be played back in the spectrogram or RSSI. You can configure the limit line
to create failure points when signals exceed it. The failure points are clearly displayed on the trace timeline
for quick access during playback.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key.

2 Press the Spectrum Replayer soft key.
The file manager window appears.
3 Select a file to be loaded, and then press the Load soft key.
The Measure Setup screen menus appear.

518 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

4 Toggle the Replay Direction soft key between FWD and REV to change play direction to forward
or reverse.
5 Press the Replay Speed soft key, and then select the speed option: X1, X2, X3, and X4.
6 Press the Play soft key to start playing.
7 Press the Pause soft key to pause or stop playing data.
8 To move to a particular failure position directly and play from there, complete the following steps:
a Press the Jump to Fail Index soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
9 Optional. Toggle the Time Cursor soft key between On and Off to display or dismiss the time
cursor on the screen. This key becomes activated when you play logged data in the Spectrogram
mode.

NOTE
If you connected a USB drive, do not remove it while playing to prevent freezing the USB
port, which will require you to restart the instrument to get a USB drive recognized again.

Figure 300 RFoCPRI spectrum replay

Setting display
You can select the display option to view data in a different mode.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Select the display option from the choices: Spectrum, Spectrogram, and RSSI.

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the display line, multi-
segment line, and channel limit. See “Setting limit for interference analysis” on page 519
for more information.

Setting limit for interference analysis

You can set threshold(s) and display either a single segment line or multi-segment line to analyze the result
better.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 519

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Setting a single limit line

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Display Line soft key for a reference line.
3 Enter a value, and then press the dBm unit soft key.
4 Toggle the Display Line soft key between On and Off to display and hide the reference line.
The straight line appears across the screen to be used as a visual reference only.

Setting a multi-segment limit line

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Multi Segment Line soft key for Pass/Fail indication.
3 Toggle the Limit soft key between Upper and Lower to select the one to be displayed.
4 Set the number of segments for the selected upper or lower limit line, up to 50 segments.
a Press the # of Line soft key.
b Enter a value between 1 and 50 by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
5 Press the Autoset soft key to let the instrument set the limit for each segment and display the line.
6 To move the limit line, complete the following steps:
a Select Limit Up/Down or Limit Left/Right.
b Turn the rotary knob to move the line as desired. You can also manually enter a value.
7 To edit the segment properties, complete the following steps:
a Press the Edit Limit soft key.
b Press the Move soft key and then turn the rotary knob to select the segment to edit.
c Select the menu option, from the following choices:
– To hide the line for the selected segment, toggle the Line soft key and select Off.
– To add a new point, press the Add Point soft key.
– To delete the selected point, press the Delete Point soft key.
– To change the position, press the Frequency or Amplitude soft key, and then turn the
rotary knob to change the value as desired.
8 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Performing PIM detection (single and multiple carriers)

The Passive Intermodulation (PIM) Detection allows you to detect Uplink PIM across the full spectrum for
any technology. When PIM is detected, the normal repair mode is to replace the offending cable and what
you need to do is replacing the whole cable irrespective of the location of the fault.

Connecting cables
You can connect cables with a tap or without a tap as illustrated in Figure 301. If you have connected cables
directly from RRH and BBU without using the nTap, you must turn on the through mode (Thru) in the CPRI
parameter settings.

520 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

A SFP/SFP+ transceiver that is connected to your JD700B series must be compatible with your DUT and
you must have your module information such as line rate, wavelength, and mode (MM or SM) handy.

Figure 301 Connection diagram for PIM detection

With nTap (both Thru On/Off): Without nTap (Thru On only):

Selecting measurement mode

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key.

2 Press the PIM Detection soft key.
3 Select the PIM detection mode from the following choices:
– PIM Detection Single Carrier
– PIM Detection Multiple Carriers
– Calculated PIM

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the bandwidth of the downlink signal, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz,
15 MHz, and 20 MHz.
The RBW range changes based on this bandwidth setting.
Required number of AxC containers varies depending on the selected bandwidth.
3 To use the pre-configured settings for a NEM, complete the following steps:
a Press the NEM soft key.
b Select an NEM from the following choices:
– None (no pre-configuration)
– Ericsson > Ericsson (UL) and Ericsson (DL)
– Alcatel-Lucent (UL/DL)
– Samsung (UL/DL)
– Huawei > Huawei (UL) and Huawei (DL)
– ZTE (UL/DL)

JD700B Series User’s Guide 521

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

NOTE
If you have selected a NEM, the instrument sets the Map Postion and other releated
settings automatically based on the selected NEM and you cannot edit the map position
setting. The pre-configured information may be subject to changes at any times by NEMs.
4 To set the CPRI line bit rate of the fronthaul under test, complete the following steps:
a Press the Link Rate soft key.
b Select the CPRI link rate option from the choices: 614.4 Mbps, 1228.8 Mbps,
2457.6 Mbps, 3072.0 Mbps, 4915.2 Mbps, 6144.0 Mbps, and 9830.4 Mbps.
NOTE
It is important that you set the link rate correctly to avoid any misleading LOS and LOF
alarms displayed on the screen.

5 To configure CPRI parameters including loop on/off, number of AxC groups, IQ sample width,
mapping method, Tx clock type, port type, and map position, complete the steps described in the
“Configuring CPRI parameters” on page 522.
6 Optional. To use the RF signal generator function, see “Using RF source in RFoCPRI testing”
on page 576.
7 Optional. To use the CPRI signal generator function, see “Using CPRI source” on page 577.

Configuring CPRI parameters

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the CPRI Parameters soft key.
3 To turn on the through mode if you have not used a tap, toggle the Thru soft key and select On.
To turn it off, select Off.
4 To set the antenna per carrier group, complete the following steps:
a Press the AxC Group soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.
NOTE
Maximum number of the AxC Group is determined by the factors of link rate, sample
width, oversampling, and signal bandwidth.
5 To set the I and Q sample widths, complete the following steps:
a Press the IQ Sample Width soft key
b Enter a value between four and 20 by using the rotary knob. You can also use the numeric
keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
NOTE
According to the CPRI specification, the IQ sample width shall be between 4 and 20 bits
for I and Q in the uplink and between 8 and 20 bits in the downlink.
6 To set the mapping method, complete the following steps:
a Press the Mapping Method soft key.
b Select the mapping method option from the choices: 1and 3.
– Mapping Method 1: IQ sample based for packed position. An RRH of GSM, UMTS,
and LTE supports this mapping method.
– Mapping Method 3: Backward compatible with the mapping method 1 for flexible
position. An RRH of GSM, UMS, and LTE supports this mapping method.
7 Toggle the Port Type soft key and select Slave (default).
8 Press the Tx Clock soft key, and then select Recovered (default).
9 To set the first bit position of each AxC Container in the IQ data block of a basic frame, complete
the following steps:
a Press the Map Position soft key.
b Select the AxC Container number you want to set from the choices: AxC 0, AxC 1, AxC 2,

522 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

AxC 3, AxC 4, AxC 5, AxC 6, and AxC 7. Not all of these are activated depending on your
bandwidth setting.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Press the Enter soft key.
NOTE
The Antenna-Carrier (AxC) is the amount of digital baseband (IQ) U-plane data
necessary for either reception or transmission of one carrier at one independent antenna
element. The number of required AxC Container for a basic frame are two AxCs for 5
MHz, four AxCs for 10 MHz, and eight AxCs for 20 MHz.

Following is an example of test configuration for a DUT.

For this test configuration, IQ allocation will be like this in the CPRI basic frame.

Calculating possible PIM

The Calculated PIM is used when you want to check any possible existence of PIM before the actual
measurement. The instrument displays possible PIM in red color.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Calculated PIM soft key.
3 Toggle the Radio Config soft key between Single and Multi and select the mode you want to use.
– Single: Sets the frequency of Radio 1.
– Multi: Sets the frequency of Radio 1 and Radio 2.
4 Do one of the following:
– To set the frequency and span, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Mode soft key between Freq and Band and select Freq.
b Press the Radio [1]2] Frequency soft key.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
d Select the unit option from the choices: GHz, MHz, kHz, and Hz.
e Press the Radio [1|2] Span soft key.
f Enter a value by using the numeric keys.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 523

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

g Select the unit option from the choices: GHz, MHz, kHz, and Hz.
– To set the radio band, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Mode soft key between Freq and Band and select Band.
b Press the Radio [1]2] Band soft key.
c Highlight the radio band to select by using the rotary knob.
d Press the Select soft key.

Detecting PIM (single and multiple carriers)

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Connect cables as instructed on the screen.

NOTE
Make sure that the Tx of RRH is connected to the Rx port of SFP/SFP+ installed in your
CellAdvisor.

3 Do one of the following:

– To set the uplink center frequency and span to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Unit soft key between Freq and Channel and select Freq.
b Press the Uplink Center Frequency soft key.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Select the unit from the choices: GHz, MHz, kHz, and Hz.
– To set the channel number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Unit soft key between Freq and Channel and select Channel.
b Press the Channel Std soft key, and then highlight a desired band.
c Press the Select soft key.
d Press the Channel Number soft key.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
The instrument automatically displays the corresponding center frequency value for the
selected channel number.
4 Press the Continue soft key, and then follow the instructions on the screen.
5 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of CPRI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.

524 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Measurement example
Figure 302 PIM detection of single radio

Performing LTE-FDD downlink signal analysis

If your JD700B series has the option 091 RFoCPRI LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer installed with a license, you
can performs power and spectrum measurements as well as modulation analysis to test the proper
transmitter performance of FDD LTE systems over CPRI.

This instrument provides the following measurement tools for FDD LTE system over CPRI:

n Spectrum Analysis
n RF Analysis
- Channel Power
- Occupied Bandwidth
n Power vs. Time (Frame)
n Modulation Analysis
- Constellation
- Data Channel
- Control Channel
- Subframe
- Frame
- Time Alignment Error
- Data Allocation Map
n Power Statistics CCDF

Connecting cables
You can connect cables with a tap or without a tap as illustrated in Figure 303. If you have connected cables

JD700B Series User’s Guide 525

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

directly from RRH and BBU without using the nTap, you must turn on the through mode (Thru) in the CPRI
parameter settings.

A SFP/SFP+ transceiver that is connected to your JD700B series must be compatible with your DUT and
you must have your module information such as line rate, wavelength, and mode (MM or SM) handy.

Figure 303 Connection diagram for downlink signal analysis

With nTap (both Thru On/Off): Without nTap (Thru On only):

Selecting measurement mode

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-FDD.
3 Select the downlink signal analysis mode from the following choices:
– Spectrum
– RF Analysis > Channel Power or Occupied BW
– Power vs Time (Frame)
– Modulation Analysis > Constellation, Data Channel, Control Channel, Subframe,
Frame, Time Alignement Error, or Data Allocation Map
– Power Statistics CCDF

Configuring test parameters

Setting frequency
You can set the frequency with either frequency or channel number. If a frequency to be set matches to the
frequency corresponding to the selected channel standard, the instrument calculates its channel number
and updates the screen with it automatically.

Procedure

To set the center frequency:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
3 Press the Center Frequency soft key.
4 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
5 Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
6 Optional. To define the amount of frequency increment for the rotary knob, complete the following

526 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

steps:
a Press the Frequency Step soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.

To set the channel number:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Channel.
NOTE
Selecting Channel sets the standard channel to Band Global automatically so that you
can set the Channel Number without choosing a standard channel band from the list.
3 Press the Channel Number soft key.
4 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
5 Press the Enter soft key.
The instrument automatically displays the corresponding center frequency value for the selected
channel number.
6 Optional. To define the amount of channel increment for the rotary knob, complete the following
steps:
a Press the Channel Step soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.

Setting amplitude
You can set the reference automatically or manually to optimize the display of the trace, as you desire.

Procedure

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Do the following:
– To optimize the Y-axis scale automatically, press the Auto Scale soft key.
– To set the maximum reference value on the Y-axis manually, complete the following steps:
a Press the Reference Level soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys or the rotary knob with 10 dB increments.
c Press the unit soft key or the ENTER hard key.
NOTE
In the measurements such as Control Channel, Subframe, and Frame, you can select
the reference option between Relative and Absolute instead.
3 To set an external offset, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.
NOTE
The instrument displays a measurement result with the set value reflected. For example,
if you set it to 40 dB, the measurement result compensates 40 dB.
4 To change the setting of the scale per division, complete the following steps:
a Select More (1/2) > Scale/Div.
b Enter a value between 1 and 20 by using the numeric keys.
c Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.
5 To change the scale unit, select More (1/2) > Units, and then select the display unit option from
the choices: dBm, dBV, dBmV, dBµV, V, and W.
The scale unit on the screen changes accordingly.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 527

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

NOTE
The Scale/Div and Units menus are available in the Spectrum and RF Analysis modes.

Setting average
In the spectrum and RF analysis, you can set the number of measurements to be averaged for the trace
presentation. A maximum of 100 times of averaging can be set. When the averaging reaches to your setting,
a new measurement value replaces the measurement value in sequence from the earliest.

Procedure

1 Press the BW/AVG hard key.

2 Press the Average soft key.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 100 as needed by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the Enter soft key.

Setting sweep mode

The default setting is Continue to sweep continuously for most on-going measurements. If you want to hold
the measurement or get a single sweep, you can change the sweep mode.

Procedure

1 Press the SWEEP hot key.

2 Do the following:
– To select the single sweep mode, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Single. You can also use the HOLD hot
key.
The letter HOLD in red appears and the sweeping is paused.
b To get a new measurement Press the Sweep Once soft key.
– To return to the continuous sweep mode, toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select
Continue. You can also use the HOLD hot key.
The letter HOLD in red disappears and the sweeping resumes.

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the bandwidth of the downlink signal, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz.
The RBW range changes based on this bandwidth setting.
Required number of AxC containers varies depending on the selected bandwidth.
3 To use the pre-configured settings for a NEM, complete the following steps:
a Press the NEM soft key.
b Select an NEM from the following choices:
– None (no pre-configuration)
– Ericsson > Ericsson (UL) and Ericsson (DL)
– Alcatel-Lucent (UL/DL)

528 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

– Samsung (UL/DL)
– Huawei > Huawei (UL) and Huawei (DL)
– ZTE (UL/DL)
NOTE
If you have selected a NEM, the instrument sets the Map Postion and other releated
settings automatically based on the selected NEM and you cannot edit the map position
setting. The pre-configured information may be subject to changes at any times by NEMs.
4 To set the CPRI line bit rate of the fronthaul under test, complete the following steps:
a Press the Link Rate soft key.
b Select the CPRI link rate option from the choices: 614.4 Mbps, 1228.8 Mbps,
2457.6 Mbps, 3072.0 Mbps, 4915.2 Mbps, 6144.0 Mbps, and 9830.4 Mbps.
NOTE
It is important that you set the link rate correctly to avoid any misleading LOS and LOF
alarms displayed on the screen.
5 To configure CPRI parameters including loop on/off, number of AxC groups, IQ sample width,
mapping method, Tx clock type, port type, and map position, complete the steps described in the
“Configuring CPRI parameters” on page 529.
6 Optional. To use the RF signal generator function, see “Using RF source in RFoCPRI testing”
on page 576.
7 Optional. To use the CPRI signal generator function, see “Using CPRI source” on page 577.

Configuring CPRI parameters

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the CPRI Parameters soft key.
3 To turn on the through mode if you have not used a tap, toggle the Thru soft key and select On.
To turn it off, select Off.
4 To set the antenna per carrier group, complete the following steps:
a Press the AxC Group soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.
NOTE
Maximum number of the AxC Group is determined by the factors of link rate, sample
width, oversampling, and signal bandwidth.
5 To set the I and Q sample widths, complete the following steps:
a Press the IQ Sample Width soft key
b Enter a value between four and 20 by using the rotary knob. You can also use the numeric
keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
NOTE
According to the CPRI specification, the IQ sample width shall be between 4 and 20 bits
for I and Q in the uplink and between 8 and 20 bits in the downlink.
6 To set the mapping method, complete the following steps:
a Press the Mapping Method soft key.
b Select the mapping method option from the choices: 1and 3.
– Mapping Method 1: IQ sample based for packed position. An RRH of GSM, UMTS,
and LTE supports this mapping method.
– Mapping Method 3: Backward compatible with the mapping method 1 for flexible
position. An RRH of GSM, UMS, and LTE supports this mapping method.
7 Toggle the Port Type soft key and select Slave (default).
8 Press the Tx Clock soft key, and then select Recovered (default).
9 To set the first bit position of each AxC Container in the IQ data block of a basic frame, complete

JD700B Series User’s Guide 529

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

the following steps:

a Press the Map Position soft key.
b Select the AxC Container number you want to set from the choices: AxC 0, AxC 1, AxC 2,
AxC 3, AxC 4, AxC 5, AxC 6, and AxC 7. Not all of these are activated depending on your
bandwidth setting.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Press the Enter soft key.
NOTE
The Antenna-Carrier (AxC) is the amount of digital baseband (IQ) U-plane data
necessary for either reception or transmission of one carrier at one independent antenna
element. The number of required AxC Container for a basic frame are two AxCs for 5
MHz, four AxCs for 10 MHz, and eight AxCs for 20 MHz.

Following is an example of test configuration for a DUT.

For this test configuration, IQ allocation will be like this in the CPRI basic frame.

Viewing decoded MIB and SIB1/2 information

In LTE system, the System Information (SI) that is carried over transport channel BCH or by DL-SCH
consists of two parts: static part called MIB (Master Information Block) and dynamic part called SIBs
(System Information Blocks). MIB contains important information such as system bandwidth, System Frame
Number (SFN), PHICH configuration while SIBs contain other useful information including transit power,
number of antenna, and SIB scheduling information for UE to read to access a cell.

JD700B series decodes MIB, the first of SIB (SIB1), and the second of SIB (SIB2) and provides you with
decoded information of several parameters. If you are not familiar with matching the system information
between IQ spectrum and RF spectrum, this feature enables you to identify the uplink carrier frequency and
bandwidth so that you can map AxC container to the RF carrier by combining the decoded information with
other system parameters obtained by RFoCPRI signal analysis. As not all LTE frames have transmitted SIB,
it may take time for the instrument to capture frames with the system information and decode MIB and
SIB1/2.

530 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Procedure

1 Make sure that you have set the frequency to “Band Global” for the technology.
2 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.
3 Press the MIB & SIB1/2 Information soft key.
The MIB and SIB1/2 Information window appears with the following parameters:
– SFN: System Frame Number.
– p-Max: Maximum allowed UL transmit power of the cell
– systemInfoValueTag: It indicates if a change has occurred in the SI messages. UEs may
use this, e.g. upon return from out of coverage, to verify if the previously stored SI
messages are still valid.
– Freqinfo-ul-CarrierFreq: Uplink channel number
– Freqinfo-ul-Bandwidth: Uplink bandwidth
– timeAlignmentTimerCommon: It is used to control how long the UE should consider to be
time aligned in uplink. The value is in subframes.
NOTE
Some or entire parameters may not be available depending on the system configuration
or the NEM of the system. Also, this feature may not work for Ericsson RRHs.

Figure 304 Decoded MIB & SIB1/2 information in RFoCPRI LTE-FDD signal analyzer

Conducting spectrum measurement

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-FDD > Spectrum.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 526.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key, and then set the following parameters:
– Measurement setups as described in the “Setting measure setup” on page 528
– CPRI parameters as described in the “Configuring CPRI parameters” on page 529
5 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 531

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

6 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of CPRI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
7 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting trace
You can display up to six traces on the measurement chart simultaneously.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Select Trace soft key, and then select the trace number: T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, or T6.
The legend shape of the selected trace changes from square to round to indicate that the trace is
the active one now.
3 Do one of the following:
To Select Trace Legend

Clear current data and display with new Clear Write W

measurements

Display the input signal’s maximum response only Max Hold M

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

Display the input signal’s minimum response only Min Hold m

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

Capture the selected trace and compare traces Capture C

Load a saved trace More (1/2) > Load L

Hide the displayed trace Trace View > Off F

Remove all the traces and initialize the trace More (1/2) > Trace
settings Clear All

NOTE
For the Max Hold and Min Hold, your instrument compares newly acquired data with the
active trace and displays larger maximum values or smaller minimum values on the
screen. You can set it to Unlimited to hold and view maximum or minimum data or
specify a certain amount of time up to 60 seconds by using numeric keys or rotary knob.
4 Optional. Select More (1/2) > Trace Info, and then select the trace number to view the trace’s
parameter setting information stored at the time of the measurement or None to hide the
information display.
5 Optional. If you have the two traces T1 and T2, you can perform trace math. To view the power
difference between the traces, press the T1 – T2 -> T5 or T2 – T1 -> T6 soft key.
The result is overlaid on the screen along with the second Y-axis.

532 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Measurement example
Figure 305 Spectrum measurement with RFoCPRI LTE-FDD signal analyzer

Conducting channel power measurement

The Channel Power measurement is a common test used in the wireless industry to measure the total
transmitted power of a radio within a defined frequency channel. It acquires a number of points representing
the input signal in the time domain, transforms this information into the frequency domain using Fast Fourier
Transform (FFT), and then calculates the channel power. The effective resolution bandwidth of the frequency
domain trace is proportional to the number of points acquired for the FFT.

The channel power measurement identifies the total RF power and power spectral density (PSD) of the
signal in the LTE channel bandwidth.

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-FDD > RF Analysis > Channel Power.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 526.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key, and then set the following parameters:
– Measurement setups as described in the “Setting measure setup” on page 528
– CPRI parameters as described in the “Configuring CPRI parameters” on page 529
5 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
6 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of CPRI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
7 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 533

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Measurement example
Figure 306 Channel power measurement with RFoCPRI LTE-FDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RFoCPRI signal analysis” on page
551 for more information.

Occupied bandwidth
The Occupied Bandwidth measures the spectrum shape of the carrier. It is defined as the bandwidth, which
includes 99% of the transmitted power among total transmitted power.

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-FDD > RF Analysis > Occupied BW.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 526.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key, and then set the following parameters:
– Measurement setups as described in the “Setting measure setup” on page 528
– CPRI parameters as described in the “Configuring CPRI parameters” on page 529
5 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
6 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of CPRI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
7 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

534 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Measurement example
Figure 307 Occupied bandwidth measurement with RFoCPRI LTE-FDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RFoCPRI signal analysis” on page
551 for more information.

Conducting power vs. time (frame) measurement

The Power vs. Time (Frame) measures the modulation envelope in the time domain, showing the power of
each time slot in an LTE signal.

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-FDD > P vs T (Frame).
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 526.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key, and then set the following parameters:
– Measurement setups as described in the “Setting measure setup” on page 528
– CPRI parameters as described in the “Configuring CPRI parameters” on page 529
5 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization.
7 Depending on your selected NEM, you may need to turn on or off the inversion of the I and Q
order by toggling the IQ Invert soft key and selecting On or Off.
8 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:

JD700B Series User’s Guide 535

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

– To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft
key and select the option: Auto, 0, and 1.
– To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or
Extended. See “Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details
by different bandwidth.
9 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
10 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of CPRI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
11 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 308 Power vs. time (frame) measurement with RFoCPRI LTE-FDD signal analyzer

Conducting constellation measurement

The Constellation is used to observe some aspects of modulation accuracy and can reveal certain fault
mechanisms such as I/Q amplitude imbalance or quadrature imbalance. It displays constellation diagram by
modulation types.

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-FDD > Modulation Analysis > Constellation.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 526.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key, and then set the following parameters:
– Measurement setups as described in the “Setting measure setup” on page 528
– CPRI parameters as described in the “Configuring CPRI parameters” on page 529
5 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.

536 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

NOTE
For MBMS testing, this subframe number must be neither 0 nor 5 as these subframes 0
and 5 are not available for MBMS and it must be set to the MBMS transmitted channel’s
subframe number.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization.
7 Depending on your selected NEM, you may need to turn on or off the inversion of the I and Q
order by toggling the IQ Invert soft key and selecting On or Off.
8 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then set other miscellaneous setups as
described in the following section.
9 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
10 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of CPRI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
11 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting other miscellaneous setups

Procedure

1 To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft key
and select the option: Auto, 0, and 1.
2 To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or Extended. See
“Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details by different
bandwidth.
3 To turn on or off the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature, toggle the MBMS
soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the Subframe No with
the same PMCH subframe number. If this setting is on, either PMCH or PDSCH appears on the
screen depending on the detected channel.
4 To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically or
manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
5 To select the PDSCH modulation type, press the PDSCH Modulation Type soft key and then
select the option from the choices: Auto, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, E-TM3.3, E-TM3.2,
E-TM3.1, E-TM2, E-TM1.2, and E-TM1.1.
NOTE
If two or more modulation types are used in a frame, select Auto. If the PDSCH uses the
same modulation type in a frame or in a subframe, select a specific modulation type to
get more accurate EVM.
6 To set the threshold for PDSCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDSCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
7 To enable or disable the PDSCH precoding, toggle the PDSCH Precoding soft key and select
On or Off.
8 To set the Control Format Indicator, toggle the CFI soft key and select Auto or Manual:
– Auto: Lets the instrument set the number of OFDM symbols used for transmitting PDCCHs
in a subframe.
– Manual: Sets the number of OFDM symbols manually.
9 To select the number of PHICH groups (Ng), press the PHICH Ng soft key and then select the
option from the choices: 1/6, 1/2, 1, 2, E-1/6, E-1/2, E-1, or E-2.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 537

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Measurement example
Figure 309 Constellation measurement with RFoCPRI LTE-FDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RFoCPRI signal analysis” on page
551 for more information.

Conducting data channel measurement

The Data Channel measures the constellation for the specified resource block as well as the modulation
accuracy of each PDSCH at the specified subframe.

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-FDD > Modulation Analysis > Data Channel.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 526.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key, and then set the following parameters:
– Measurement setups as described in the “Setting measure setup” on page 528
– CPRI parameters as described in the “Configuring CPRI parameters” on page 529
5 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
NOTE
For MBMS testing, this subframe number must be neither 0 nor 5 as these subframes 0
and 5 are not available for MBMS and it must be set to the MBMS transmitted channel’s
subframe number.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the

538 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

synchronization.
7 To enable or disable the event hold feature, toggle the Event Hold soft key and then select On or
Off.
When enabled, the display line for the PDSCH threshold appears.
When an event occurs, the measurement is put on hold until you press the HOLD hot key.
8 Depending on your selected NEM, you may need to turn on or off the inversion of the I and Q
order by toggling the IQ Invert soft key and selecting On or Off.
9 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then set other miscellaneous setups as
described in the following section.
10 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
11 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of CPRI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
12 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting other miscellaneous setups

Procedure

1 To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft key
and select the option: Auto, 0, and 1.
2 To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or Extended. See
“Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details by different
bandwidth.
3 To turn on or off the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature, toggle the MBMS
soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the Subframe No with
the same PMCH subframe number. If this setting is on, either PMCH or PDSCH appears on the
screen depending on the detected channel.
4 To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically or
manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
5 To select the PDSCH modulation type, press the PDSCH Modulation Type soft key and then
select the option from the choices: Auto, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, E-TM3.3, E-TM3.2,
E-TM3.1, E-TM2, E-TM1.2, and E-TM1.1.
NOTE
If two or more modulation types are used in a frame, select Auto. If the PDSCH uses the
same modulation type in a frame or in a subframe, select a specific modulation type to
get more accurate EVM.
6 To set the threshold for PDSCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDSCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
7 To enable or disable the PDSCH precoding, toggle the PDSCH Precoding soft key and select
On or Off.
8 To set the Control Format Indicator, toggle the CFI soft key and select Auto or Manual:
– Auto: Lets the instrument set the number of OFDM symbols used for transmitting PDCCHs
in a subframe.
– Manual: Sets the number of OFDM symbols manually.
9 To select the number of PHICH groups (Ng), press the PHICH Ng soft key and then select the
option from the choices: 1/6, 1/2, 1, 2, E-1/6, E-1/2, E-1, or E-2.

Using marker
You can use the MARKER hard key to place a marker on a resource block and display the IQ diagram for
the selected resource block.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 539

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Procedure

1 Press the MARKER hard key.

2 Press the RB Number soft key to select the resource block to be marked.
3 Enter the resource block number by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the Enter soft key.
The marker appears on the selected resource block.
5 Toggle the Marker View soft key between On and Off to display or hide the result of the selected
resource block.

Measurement example
Figure 310 Data channel measurement with RFoCPRI LTE-FDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RFoCPRI signal analysis” on page
551 for more information.

Conducting control channel measurement

The Control Channel measures the constellation for the specified control channel as well as modulation
accuracy of the control channel at the specified subframe.

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-FDD > Modulation Analysis > Control Channel.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 526.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key, and then set the following parameters:
– Measurement setups as described in the “Setting measure setup” on page 528
– CPRI parameters as described in the “Configuring CPRI parameters” on page 529

540 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

5 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:

a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
NOTE
For MBMS testing, this subframe number must be neither 0 nor 5 as these subframes 0
and 5 are not available for MBMS and it must be set to the MBMS transmitted channel’s
subframe number.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization.
7 Toggle the EVM Detection Mode soft key and select Single or Combine as desired:
– Single: Testing on one single antenna connected to your JD700B series with a cable.
– Combine: Testing on multiple antennas connected to your JD700B series with a 2x1
combiner or an antenna.
8 Depending on your selected NEM, you may need to turn on or off the inversion of the I and Q
order by toggling the IQ Invert soft key and selecting On or Off.
9 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then set other miscellaneous setups as
described in the following section.
10 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
11 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of CPRI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
12 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting other miscellaneous setups

Procedure

1 To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft key
and select the option: Auto, 0, and 1.
2 To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or Extended. See
“Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details by different
bandwidth.
3 To turn on or off the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature, toggle the MBMS
soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the Subframe No with
the same PMCH subframe number. If this setting is on, either PMCH or PDSCH appears on the
screen depending on the detected channel.
4 To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically or
manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
5 To set the threshold for PDCCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDCCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 Toggle the PDCCH Mode soft key and select REG or Avg.
– REG: Calculates EVM based on Resource Element Group
– Avg: Calculates EVM after adding all the PDCCH signals from one subframe.
7 To set the Control Format Indicator, toggle the CFI soft key and select Auto or Manual:
– Auto: Lets the instrument set the number of OFDM symbols used for transmitting PDCCHs
in a subframe.
– Manual: Sets the number of OFDM symbols manually.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 541

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

8 To select the number of PHICH groups (Ng), press the PHICH Ng soft key and then select the
option from the choices: 1/6, 1/2, 1, 2, E-1/6, E-1/2, E-1, or E-2.

Using marker
You can use the MARKER hard key to place a marker on a control channel and display the IQ diagram for
the selected channel.

Procedure

1 Press the MARKER hard key.

2 Press the Channel soft key to select a channel to be displayed in the IQ diagram.
The channel P-SS is selected by default.
3 Press the up/down arrow keys or turn the rotary knob to highlight a channel in the channel
summary table, and then press the center of the rotary knob.
4 Toggle the Marker View soft key between On and Off to display or hide the result of the selected
channel.

Measurement example
Figure 311 Control channel measurement with RFoCPRI LTE-FDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RFoCPRI signal analysis” on page
551 for more information.

Conducting subframe measurement

The Subframe measures the modulation accuracy of all the data and control channels at the specified
subframe (1 ms).

542 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-FDD > Modulation Analysis > Subframe.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 526.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key, and then set the following parameters:
– Measurement setups as described in the “Setting measure setup” on page 528
– CPRI parameters as described in the “Configuring CPRI parameters” on page 529
5 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
NOTE
For MBMS testing, this subframe number must be neither 0 nor 5 as these subframes 0
and 5 are not available for MBMS and it must be set to the MBMS transmitted channel’s
subframe number.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization.
7 Toggle the EVM Detection Mode soft key and select Single or Combine as desired:
– Single: Testing on one single antenna connected to your JD700B series with a cable.
– Combine: Testing on multiple antennas connected to your JD700B series with a 2x1
combiner or an antenna.
8 Depending on your selected NEM, you may need to turn on or off the inversion of the I and Q
order by toggling the IQ Invert soft key and selecting On or Off.
9 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then set other miscellaneous setups as
described in the following section.
10 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
11 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of CPRI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
12 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting other miscellaneous setups

Procedure

1 To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft key
and select the option: Auto, 0, and 1.
2 To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or Extended. See
“Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details by different
bandwidth.
3 To turn on or off the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature, toggle the MBMS
soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the Subframe No with
the same PMCH subframe number. If this setting is on, either PMCH or PDSCH appears on the
screen depending on the detected channel.
4 To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically or
manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
5 To select the PDSCH modulation type, press the PDSCH Modulation Type soft key and then
select the option from the choices: Auto, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, E-TM3.3, E-TM3.2,

JD700B Series User’s Guide 543

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

E-TM3.1, E-TM2, E-TM1.2, and E-TM1.1.

NOTE
If two or more modulation types are used in a frame, select Auto. If the PDSCH uses the
same modulation type in a frame or in a subframe, select a specific modulation type to
get more accurate EVM.
6 To set the threshold for PDSCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDSCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
7 To set the threshold for PDCCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDCCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
8 Toggle the PDCCH Mode soft key and select REG or Avg.
– REG: Calculates EVM based on Resource Element Group
– Avg: Calculates EVM after adding all the PDCCH signals from one subframe.
9 To enable or disable the PDSCH precoding, toggle the PDSCH Precoding soft key and select
On or Off.
10 To set the Control Format Indicator, toggle the CFI soft key and select Auto or Manual:
– Auto: Lets the instrument set the number of OFDM symbols used for transmitting PDCCHs
in a subframe.
– Manual: Sets the number of OFDM symbols manually.
11 To select the number of PHICH groups (Ng), press the PHICH Ng soft key and then select the
option from the choices: 1/6, 1/2, 1, 2, E-1/6, E-1/2, E-1, or E-2.

Setting display
You can use the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key to view the RE and RS power at a specific symbol.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Toggle the Chart soft key between On and Off to display or hide the chart.
If this setting is on, the MARKER hard key is activated.

Using marker
If you turn the Chart view on, you can use the MARKER hard key to place the marker at a specific symbol.

Procedure

1 Press the MARKER hard key.

2 Toggle the Marker View soft key between On and Off to display or hide the marker on the chart.
3 Press the Symbol soft key to select the symbol number, to which the marker is placed.
4 Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
5 Press the Enter soft key.

544 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Measurement example
Figure 312 Subframe measurement (regular view) with RFoCPRI LTE-FDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RFoCPRI signal analysis” on page
551 for more information.

Conducting frame measurement

The Frame measures the modulation accuracy of all the data and control channels at the frame
(10 ms).

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-FDD > Modulation Analysis > Frame.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 526.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key, and then set the following parameters:
– Measurement setups as described in the “Setting measure setup” on page 528
– CPRI parameters as described in the “Configuring CPRI parameters” on page 529
5 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization.
6 Toggle the EVM Detection Mode soft key and select Single or Combine as desired:
– Single: Testing on one single antenna connected to your JD700B series with a cable.
– Combine: Testing on multiple antennas connected to your JD700B series with a 2x1
combiner or an antenna.
7 Depending on your selected NEM, you may need to turn on or off the inversion of the I and Q
order by toggling the IQ Invert soft key and selecting On or Off.
8 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then set other miscellaneous setups as

JD700B Series User’s Guide 545

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

described in the following section.

9 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
10 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of CPRI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
11 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting other miscellaneous setups

Procedure

1 To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft key
and select the option: Auto, 0, and 1.
2 To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or Extended. See
“Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details by different
bandwidth.
3 To turn on or off the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature, toggle the MBMS
soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the Subframe No with
the same PMCH subframe number. If this setting is on, either PMCH or PDSCH appears on the
screen depending on the detected channel.
4 To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically or
manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
5 To select the PDSCH modulation type, press the PDSCH Modulation Type soft key and then
select the option from the choices: Auto, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, E-TM3.3, E-TM3.2,
E-TM3.1, E-TM2, E-TM1.2, and E-TM1.1.
NOTE
If two or more modulation types are used in a frame, select Auto. If the PDSCH uses the
same modulation type in a frame or in a subframe, select a specific modulation type to
get more accurate EVM.
6 To set the threshold for PDSCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDSCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
7 To set the threshold for PDCCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDCCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
8 Toggle the PDCCH Mode soft key and select REG or Avg.
– REG: Calculates EVM based on Resource Element Group
– Avg: Calculates EVM after adding all the PDCCH signals from one subframe.
9 To enable or disable the PDSCH precoding, toggle the PDSCH Precoding soft key and select
On or Off.
10 To set the Control Format Indicator, toggle the CFI soft key and select Auto or Manual:
– Auto: Lets the instrument set the number of OFDM symbols used for transmitting PDCCHs
in a subframe.
– Manual: Sets the number of OFDM symbols manually.
11 To select the number of PHICH groups (Ng), press the PHICH Ng soft key and then select the
option from the choices: 1/6, 1/2, 1, 2, E-1/6, E-1/2, E-1, or E-2.

546 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Measurement example
Figure 313 Frame measurement with RFoCPRI LTE-FDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RFoCPRI signal analysis” on page
551 for more information.

Conducting time alignment error measurement

In eNode-B supporting Tx Diversity transmission, signals are transmitted from two or more antennas. These
signals shall be aligned. The time alignment error in Tx diversity is specified as the delay between the
signals from two antennas at the antenna ports.

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-FDD > Modulation Analysis > Time Alignment Error.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 526.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key, and then set the following parameters:
– Measurement setups as described in the “Setting measure setup” on page 528
– CPRI parameters as described in the “Configuring CPRI parameters” on page 529
5 Toggle the Antenna Config soft key and select Ant0 or Ant1 as needed.
6 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization.
7 Depending on your selected NEM, you may need to turn on or off the inversion of the I and Q
order by toggling the IQ Invert soft key and selecting On or Off.
8 Optional. To select the cyclic prefix, complete the following steps:
a Press the Miscellaneous soft key.
b Toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or Extended. See “Appendix E –

JD700B Series User’s Guide 547

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details by different bandwidth.
9 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
10 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of CPRI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
11 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 314 Time alignment error measurement with RFoCPRI LTE-FDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RFoCPRI signal analysis” on page
551 for more information.

Conducting data allocation map measurement

The Data Allocation Map function represents data allocation as a frame.

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-FDD > Modulation Analysis > Data Allocation Map.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 526.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key, and then set the following parameters:
– Measurement setups as described in the “Setting measure setup” on page 528
– CPRI parameters as described in the “Configuring CPRI parameters” on page 529
5 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.

548 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

NOTE
For MBMS testing, this subframe number must be neither 0 nor 5 as these subframes 0
and 5 are not available for MBMS and it must be set to the MBMS transmitted channel’s
subframe number.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization.
7 To set the threshold for PDSCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDSCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
8 Depending on your selected NEM, you may need to turn on or off the inversion of the I and Q
order by toggling the IQ Invert soft key and selecting On or Off.
9 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then set other miscellaneous setups as
described in the following section.
10 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
11 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of CPRI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
12 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting other miscellaneous setups

Procedure

1 To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft key
and select the option: Auto, 0, and 1.
2 To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or Extended. See
“Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details by different
bandwidth.
3 To turn on or off the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature, toggle the MBMS
soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the Subframe No with
the same PMCH subframe number. If this setting is on, either PMCH or PDSCH appears on the
screen depending on the detected channel.
4 To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically or
manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.

Setting display
You can use the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key to change the display mode to PDSCH, PMCH, or both.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Display Channel soft key.
3 Select the display mode from the choice: PDSCH, PMCH, and Both.

Using marker
You can use the MARKER hard key to place the marker at a specific resource block and subframe.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 549

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Procedure

1 Press the MARKER hard key.

2 Toggle the Marker View soft key between On and Off to display or hide the marker on the chart.
3 To select the resource block number, complete the following steps:
a Press the RB Number soft key.
b Enter the resource block number to select by using the numeric keys. You can also use the
rotary knob to move the marker side by side.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 To select the subframe block number, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter the subframe number to select by using the numeric keys. You can also use the
rotary knob to move the marker up and down.
c Press the Enter soft key.

Measurement example
Figure 315 Data allocation map measurement with RFoCPRI LTE-FDD signal analyzer

Performing power statistics CCDF measurement

The Power Statistics Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function (CCDF) measurement characterizes
the power statistics of the input signal. It provides PAR (Peak to Average power Ratio) versus different
probabilities.

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-FDD > Power Statistics CCDF.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 526.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key, and then set the following parameters:

550 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

– Measurement setups as described in the “Setting measure setup” on page 528

– CPRI parameters as described in the “Configuring CPRI parameters” on page 529
5 To set the length of the CCDF, complete the following steps:
a Press the CCDF Length soft key.
b Enter a value between 1 and 100 by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary
knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
7 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of CPRI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
8 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 316 CCDF measurement with RFoCPRI LTE-FDD signal analyzer

Setting limit for RFoCPRI signal analysis

By default, test limits specified in the standard are set for you. You can change thresholds if you desire.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 To set a limit for RF analysis tests, press the RF Test Limits soft key and then set limits as
needed, depending on where you are in the measurement mode.

To set the limit for Select Set

Channel power Channel Power High Limit, Low Limit

Occupied bandwidth Occupied BW High Limit

3 To set a limit for modulation tests, press the Modulation Test Limits soft key and then set limits
as needed, depending on where you are in the measurement mode.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 551

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

To set the limit for Select Set

Frequency error Frequency Error High Limit, Low Limit

PDSCH error vector EVM > PDSCH EVM High Limit (QPSK)
magnitude if MBMS is off High Limit (16 QAM)
High Limit (64 QAM)

PMCH error vector magnitude EVM > PMCH EVM High Limit (QPSK)
if MBMS is on and a PMCH is High Limit (16 QAM)
detected High Limit (64 QAM)

RMS for data error vector EVM > Data EVM RMS High Limit
magnitude

Peak for data error vector EVM> Data EVM Peak High Limit
magnitude

RS error vector magnitude EVM > RS EVM High Limit

P-SS error vector magnitude EVM > P-SS EVM High Limit

S-SS error vector magnitude EVM > S-SS EVM High Limit

Downlink RS power Power > DL RS Power High Limit, Low Limit

P-SS power Power > P-SS Power High Limit, Low Limit

S-SS power Power > S-SS Power High Limit, Low Limit

PBCH power Power > PBCH Power High Limit, Low Limit

Subframe power Power > Subframe Power High Limit, Low Limit

OFDM symbol power Power > OFDM Symbol Power High Limit, Low Limit

Frame average power Power > Frame Avg Power High Limit, Low Limit

Time alignment error for MIMO Time Alignment Error > MIMO High Limit

Time error Time Error High Limit, Low Limit

I-Q origin offset IQ Origin Offset High Limit

4 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Performing LTE-TDD downlink signal analysis

If your JD700B series has the option 092 RFoCPRI LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer installed with a license, you
can performs power and spectrum measurements as well as modulation analysis to test the proper
transmitter performance of TDD LTE systems over CPRI.

This instrument provides the following measurement tools for TDD LTE system over CPRI:

n Spectrum Analysis
n RF Analysis
- Channel Power
- Occupied Bandwidth
n Power vs. Time (Frame)

552 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

n Modulation Analysis
- Constellation
- Data Channel
- Control Channel
- Subframe
- Time Alignment Error
- Data Allocation Map
n Power Statistics CCDF

Connecting cables
You can connect cables with a tap or without a tap as illustrated in Figure 317. If you have connected cables
directly from RRH and BBU without using the nTap, you must turn on the through mode (Thru) in the CPRI
parameter settings.

A SFP/SFP+ transceiver that is connected to your JD700B series must be compatible with your DUT and
you must have your module information such as line rate, wavelength, and mode (MM or SM) handy.

Figure 317 Connection diagram for downlink signal analysis

With nTap (both Thru On/Off): Without nTap (Thru On only):

Selecting measurement mode

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-TDD.
3 Select the downlink signal analysis mode from the following choices:
– Spectrum
– RF Analysis > Channel Power or Occupied BW
– Power vs Time (Frame)
– Modulation Analysis > Constellation, Data Channel, Control Channel, Subframe,
Time Alignement Error, or Data Allocation Map
– Power Statistics CCDF

JD700B Series User’s Guide 553

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Configuring test parameters

Setting frequency
You can set the frequency with either frequency or channel number. If a frequency to be set matches to the
frequency corresponding to the selected channel standard, the instrument calculates its channel number
and updates the screen with it automatically.

Procedure

To set the center frequency:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
3 Press the Center Frequency soft key.
4 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
5 Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
6 Optional. To define the amount of frequency increment for the rotary knob, complete the following
steps:
a Press the Frequency Step soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.

To set the channel number:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Channel.
NOTE
Selecting Channel sets the standard channel to Band Global automatically so that you
can set the Channel Number without choosing a standard channel band from the list.
3 Press the Channel Number soft key.
4 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
5 Press the Enter soft key.
The instrument automatically displays the corresponding center frequency value for the selected
channel number.
6 Optional. To define the amount of channel increment for the rotary knob, complete the following
steps:
a Press the Channel Step soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.

Setting amplitude
You can set the reference automatically or manually to optimize the display of the trace, as you desire.

Procedure

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Do the following:
– To optimize the Y-axis scale automatically, press the Auto Scale soft key.
– To set the maximum reference value on the Y-axis manually, complete the following steps:
a Press the Reference Level soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys or the rotary knob with 10 dB increments.
c Press the unit soft key or the ENTER hard key.

554 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

NOTE
In the measurements such as Control Channel, Subframe, and Frame, you can select
the reference option between Relative and Absolute instead.
3 To set an external offset, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.
NOTE
The instrument displays a measurement result with the set value reflected. For example,
if you set it to 40 dB, the measurement result compensates 40 dB.
4 To change the setting of the scale per division, complete the following steps:
a Select More (1/2) > Scale/Div.
b Enter a value between 1 and 20 by using the numeric keys.
c Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.
5 To change the scale unit, select More (1/2) > Units, and then select the display unit option from
the choices: dBm, dBV, dBmV, dBµV, V, and W.
The scale unit on the screen changes accordingly.

NOTE
The Scale/Div and Units menus are available in the Spectrum and RF Analysis modes.

Setting average
In the spectrum and RF analysis, you can set the number of measurements to be averaged for the trace
presentation. A maximum of 100 times of averaging can be set. When the averaging reaches to your setting,
a new measurement value replaces the measurement value in sequence from the earliest.

Procedure

1 Press the BW/AVG hard key.

2 Press the Average soft key.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 100 as needed by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the Enter soft key.

Setting sweep mode

The default setting is Continue to sweep continuously for most on-going measurements. If you want to hold
the measurement or get a single sweep, you can change the sweep mode.

Procedure

1 Press the SWEEP hot key.

2 Do the following:
– To select the single sweep mode, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Single. You can also use the HOLD hot
key.
The letter HOLD in red appears and the sweeping is paused.
b To get a new measurement Press the Sweep Once soft key.
– To return to the continuous sweep mode, toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select
Continue. You can also use the HOLD hot key.
The letter HOLD in red disappears and the sweeping resumes.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 555

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the bandwidth of the downlink signal, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz.
The RBW range changes based on this bandwidth setting.
Required number of AxC containers varies depending on the selected bandwidth.
3 To use the pre-configured settings for a NEM, complete the following steps:
c Press the NEM soft key.
d Select an NEM from the following choices:
– None (no pre-configuration)
– Ericsson > Ericsson (UL) and Ericsson (DL)
– Alcatel-Lucent (UL/DL)
– Samsung (UL/DL)
– Huawei > Huawei (UL) and Huawei (DL)
– ZTE (UL/DL)
NOTE
If you have selected a NEM, the instrument sets the Map Postion and other releated
settings automatically based on the selected NEM and you cannot edit the map position
setting. The pre-configured information may be subject to changes at any times by NEMs.
4 To set the CPRI line bit rate of the fronthaul under test, complete the following steps:
a Press the Link Rate soft key.
b Select the CPRI link rate option from the choices: 614.4 Mbps, 1228.8 Mbps,
2457.6 Mbps, 3072.0 Mbps, 4915.2 Mbps, 6144.0 Mbps, and 9830.4 Mbps.
NOTE
It is important that you set the link rate correctly to avoid any misleading LOS and LOF
alarms displayed on the screen.
5 To configure CPRI parameters including loop on/off, number of AxC groups, IQ sample width,
mapping method, Tx clock type, port type, and map position, complete the steps described in the
“Configuring CPRI parameters” on page 529.
6 Optional. To use the RF signal generator function, see “Using RF source in RFoCPRI testing”
on page 576.
7 Optional. To use the CPRI signal generator function, see “Using CPRI source” on page 577.

Configuring CPRI parameters

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the CPRI Parameters soft key.
3 To turn on the through mode if you have not used a tap, toggle the Thru soft key and select On.
To turn it off, select Off.
4 To set the antenna per carrier group, complete the following steps:
a Press the AxC Group soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.
NOTE
Maximum number of the AxC Group is determined by the factors of link rate, sample
width, oversampling, and signal bandwidth.

556 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

5 To set the I and Q sample widths, complete the following steps:

a Press the IQ Sample Width soft key
b Enter a value between four and 20 by using the rotary knob. You can also use the numeric
keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
NOTE
According to the CPRI specification, the IQ sample width shall be between 4 and 20 bits
for I and Q in the uplink and between 8 and 20 bits in the downlink.
6 To set the mapping method, complete the following steps:
a Press the Mapping Method soft key.
b Select the mapping method option from the choices: 1and 3.
– Mapping Method 1: IQ sample based for packed position. An RRH of GSM, UMTS,
and LTE supports this mapping method.
– Mapping Method 3: Backward compatible with the mapping method 1 for flexible
position. An RRH of GSM, UMS, and LTE supports this mapping method.
7 Toggle the Port Type soft key and select Slave (default).
8 Press the Tx Clock soft key, and then select Recovered (default).
9 To set the first bit position of each AxC Container in the IQ data block of a basic frame, complete
the following steps:
a Press the Map Position soft key.
b Select the AxC Container number you want to set from the choices: AxC 0, AxC 1, AxC 2,
AxC 3, AxC 4, AxC 5, AxC 6, and AxC 7. Not all of these are activated depending on your
bandwidth setting.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Press the Enter soft key.
NOTE
The Antenna-Carrier (AxC) is the amount of digital baseband (IQ) U-plane data
necessary for either reception or transmission of one carrier at one independent antenna
element. The number of required AxC Container for a basic frame are two AxCs for 5
MHz, four AxCs for 10 MHz, and eight AxCs for 20 MHz.

Following is an example of test configuration for a DUT.

For this test configuration, IQ allocation will be like this in the CPRI basic frame.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 557

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Conducting spectrum measurement

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-TDD > Spectrum.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 526.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key, and then set the following parameters:
– Measurement setups as described in the “Setting measure setup” on page 528
– CPRI parameters as described in the “Configuring CPRI parameters” on page 529
5 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
6 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of CPRI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
7 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting trace
You can display up to six traces on the measurement chart simultaneously.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Select Trace soft key, and then select the trace number: T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, or T6.
The legend shape of the selected trace changes from square to round to indicate that the trace is
the active one now.
3 Do one of the following:
To Select Trace Legend

Clear current data and display with new Clear Write W

measurements

Display the input signal’s maximum response only Max Hold M

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

Display the input signal’s minimum response only Min Hold m

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

Capture the selected trace and compare traces Capture C

Load a saved trace More (1/2) > Load L

Hide the displayed trace Trace View > Off F

Remove all the traces and initialize the trace More (1/2) > Trace
settings Clear All

NOTE
For the Max Hold and Min Hold, your instrument compares newly acquired data with the
active trace and displays larger maximum values or smaller minimum values on the
screen. You can set it to Unlimited to hold and view maximum or minimum data or
specify a certain amount of time up to 60 seconds by using numeric keys or rotary knob.
4 Optional. Select More (1/2) > Trace Info, and then select the trace number to view the trace’s
parameter setting information stored at the time of the measurement or None to hide the
information display.
5 Optional. If you have the two traces T1 and T2, you can perform trace math. To view the power
difference between the traces, press the T1 – T2 -> T5 or T2 – T1 -> T6 soft key.

558 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

The result is overlaid on the screen along with the second Y-axis.

Measurement example
Figure 318 Spectrum measurement with RFoCPRI LTE-TDD signal analyzer

Conducting channel power measurement

The Channel Power measurement is a common test used in the wireless industry to measure the total
transmitted power of a radio within a defined frequency channel. It acquires a number of points representing
the input signal in the time domain, transforms this information into the frequency domain using Fast Fourier
Transform (FFT), and then calculates the channel power. The effective resolution bandwidth of the frequency
domain trace is proportional to the number of points acquired for the FFT.

The channel power measurement identifies the total RF power and power spectral density (PSD) of the
signal in the LTE channel bandwidth.

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-TDD > RF Analysis > Channel Power.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 526.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key, and then set the following parameters:
– Measurement setups as described in the “Setting measure setup” on page 528
– CPRI parameters as described in the “Configuring CPRI parameters” on page 529
5 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
6 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of CPRI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
7 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 559

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Measurement example
Figure 319 Channel power measurement with RFoCPRI LTE-TDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RFoCPRI signal analysis” on page
551 for more information.

Occupied bandwidth
The Occupied Bandwidth measures the spectrum shape of the carrier. It is defined as the bandwidth, which
includes 99% of the transmitted power among total transmitted power.

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-TDD > RF Analysis > Occupied BW.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 526.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key, and then set the following parameters:
– Measurement setups as described in the “Setting measure setup” on page 528
– CPRI parameters as described in the “Configuring CPRI parameters” on page 529
5 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
6 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of CPRI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
7 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

560 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Measurement example
Figure 320 Occupied bandwidth measurement with RFoCPRI LTE-TDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RFoCPRI signal analysis” on page
551 for more information.

Conducting power vs. time (frame) measurement

The Power vs. Time (Frame) measures the modulation envelope in the time domain, showing the power of
each time slot in an LTE signal.

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-TDD > P vs T (Frame).
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 526.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key, and then set the following parameters:
– Measurement setups as described in the “Setting measure setup” on page 528
– CPRI parameters as described in the “Configuring CPRI parameters” on page 529
5 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization.
7 Depending on your selected NEM, you may need to turn on or off the inversion of the I and Q
order by toggling the IQ Invert soft key and selecting On or Off.
8 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:

JD700B Series User’s Guide 561

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

– To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft
key and select the option: Auto, 0, and 1.
– To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or
Extended. See “Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details
by different bandwidth.
9 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
10 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of CPRI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
11 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 321 Power vs. time (frame) measurement with RFoCPRI LTE-TDD signal analyzer

Conducting constellation measurement

The Constellation is used to observe some aspects of modulation accuracy and can reveal certain fault
mechanisms such as I/Q amplitude imbalance or quadrature imbalance. It displays constellation diagram by
modulation types.

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-TDD > Modulation Analysis > Constellation.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 526.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key, and then set the following parameters:
– Measurement setups as described in the “Setting measure setup” on page 528
– CPRI parameters as described in the “Configuring CPRI parameters” on page 529
5 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.

562 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

NOTE
For MBMS testing, this subframe number must be neither 0 nor 5 as these subframes 0
and 5 are not available for MBMS and it must be set to the MBMS transmitted channel’s
subframe number.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization.
7 Depending on your selected NEM, you may need to turn on or off the inversion of the I and Q
order by toggling the IQ Invert soft key and selecting On or Off.
8 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then set other miscellaneous setups as
described in the following section.
9 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
10 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of CPRI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
11 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting other miscellaneous setups

Procedure

1 To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft key
and select the option: Auto, 0, and 1.
2 To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or Extended. See
“Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details by different
bandwidth.
3 To turn on or off the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature, toggle the MBMS
soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the Subframe No with
the same PMCH subframe number. If this setting is on, either PMCH or PDSCH appears on the
screen depending on the detected channel.
4 To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically or
manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
5 To select the PDSCH modulation type, press the PDSCH Modulation Type soft key and then
select the option from the choices: Auto, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, E-TM3.3, E-TM3.2,
E-TM3.1, E-TM2, E-TM1.2, and E-TM1.1.
NOTE
If two or more modulation types are used in a frame, select Auto. If the PDSCH uses the
same modulation type in a frame or in a subframe, select a specific modulation type to
get more accurate EVM.
6 To set the threshold for PDSCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDSCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
7 To enable or disable the PDSCH precoding, toggle the PDSCH Precoding soft key and select
On or Off.
8 To set the Control Format Indicator, toggle the CFI soft key and select Auto or Manual:
– Auto: Lets the instrument set the number of OFDM symbols used for transmitting PDCCHs
in a subframe.
– Manual: Sets the number of OFDM symbols manually.
9 To select the number of PHICH groups (Ng), press the PHICH Ng soft key and then select the
option from the choices: 1/6, 1/2, 1, 2, E-1/6, E-1/2, E-1, or E-2.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 563

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Measurement example
Figure 322 Constellation measurement with RFoCPRI LTE-TDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RFoCPRI signal analysis” on page
551 for more information.

Conducting data channel measurement

The Data Channel measures the constellation for the specified resource block as well as the modulation
accuracy of each PDSCH at the specified subframe.

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-TDD > Modulation Analysis > Data Channel.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 526.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key, and then set the following parameters:
– Measurement setups as described in the “Setting measure setup” on page 528
– CPRI parameters as described in the “Configuring CPRI parameters” on page 529
5 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
NOTE
For MBMS testing, this subframe number must be neither 0 nor 5 as these subframes 0
and 5 are not available for MBMS and it must be set to the MBMS transmitted channel’s
subframe number.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the

564 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

synchronization.
7 To enable or disable the event hold feature, toggle the Event Hold soft key and then select On or
Off.
When enabled, the display line for the PDSCH threshold appears.
When an event occurs, the measurement is put on hold until you press the HOLD hot key.
8 Depending on your selected NEM, you may need to turn on or off the inversion of the I and Q
order by toggling the IQ Invert soft key and selecting On or Off.
9 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then set other miscellaneous setups as
described in the following section.
10 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
11 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of CPRI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
12 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting other miscellaneous setups

Procedure

1 To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft key
and select the option: Auto, 0, and 1.
2 To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or Extended. See
“Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details by different
bandwidth.
3 To turn on or off the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature, toggle the MBMS
soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the Subframe No with
the same PMCH subframe number. If this setting is on, either PMCH or PDSCH appears on the
screen depending on the detected channel.
4 To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically or
manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
5 To select the PDSCH modulation type, press the PDSCH Modulation Type soft key and then
select the option from the choices: Auto, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, E-TM3.3, E-TM3.2,
E-TM3.1, E-TM2, E-TM1.2, and E-TM1.1.
NOTE
If two or more modulation types are used in a frame, select Auto. If the PDSCH uses the
same modulation type in a frame or in a subframe, select a specific modulation type to
get more accurate EVM.
6 To set the threshold for PDSCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDSCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
7 To enable or disable the PDSCH precoding, toggle the PDSCH Precoding soft key and select
On or Off.
8 To set the Control Format Indicator, toggle the CFI soft key and select Auto or Manual:
– Auto: Lets the instrument set the number of OFDM symbols used for transmitting PDCCHs
in a subframe.
– Manual: Sets the number of OFDM symbols manually.
9 To select the number of PHICH groups (Ng), press the PHICH Ng soft key and then select the
option from the choices: 1/6, 1/2, 1, 2, E-1/6, E-1/2, E-1, or E-2.

Using marker
You can use the MARKER hard key to place a marker on a resource block and display the IQ diagram for
the selected resource block.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 565

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Procedure

1 Press the MARKER hard key.

2 Press the RB Number soft key to select the resource block to be marked.
3 Enter the resource block number by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the Enter soft key.
The marker appears on the selected resource block.
5 Toggle the Marker View soft key between On and Off to display or hide the result of the selected
resource block.

Measurement example
Figure 323 Data channel measurement with RFoCPRI LTE-FDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RFoCPRI signal analysis” on page
551 for more information.

Conducting control channel measurement

The Control Channel measures the constellation for the specified control channel as well as modulation
accuracy of the control channel at the specified subframe.

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-TDD > Modulation Analysis > Control Channel.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 526.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key, and then set the following parameters:
– Measurement setups as described in the “Setting measure setup” on page 528
– CPRI parameters as described in the “Configuring CPRI parameters” on page 529

566 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

5 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:

a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
NOTE
For MBMS testing, this subframe number must be neither 0 nor 5 as these subframes 0
and 5 are not available for MBMS and it must be set to the MBMS transmitted channel’s
subframe number.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization.
7 Toggle the EVM Detection Mode soft key and select Single or Combine as desired:
– Single: Testing on one single antenna connected to your JD700B series with a cable.
– Combine: Testing on multiple antennas connected to your JD700B series with a 2x1
combiner or an antenna.
8 Depending on your selected NEM, you may need to turn on or off the inversion of the I and Q
order by toggling the IQ Invert soft key and selecting On or Off.
9 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then set other miscellaneous setups as
described in the following section.
10 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
11 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of CPRI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
12 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting other miscellaneous setups

Procedure

1 To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft key
and select the option: Auto, 0, and 1.
2 To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or Extended. See
“Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details by different
bandwidth.
3 To turn on or off the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature, toggle the MBMS
soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the Subframe No with
the same PMCH subframe number. If this setting is on, either PMCH or PDSCH appears on the
screen depending on the detected channel.
4 To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically or
manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
5 To set the threshold for PDCCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDCCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 Toggle the PDCCH Mode soft key and select REG or Avg.
– REG: Calculates EVM based on Resource Element Group
– Avg: Calculates EVM after adding all the PDCCH signals from one subframe.
7 To set the Control Format Indicator, toggle the CFI soft key and select Auto or Manual:
– Auto: Lets the instrument set the number of OFDM symbols used for transmitting PDCCHs
in a subframe.
– Manual: Sets the number of OFDM symbols manually.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 567

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

8 To select the number of PHICH groups (Ng), press the PHICH Ng soft key and then select the
option from the choices: 1/6, 1/2, 1, 2, E-1/6, E-1/2, E-1, or E-2.

Using marker
You can use the MARKER hard key to place a marker on a control channel and display the IQ diagram for
the selected channel.

Procedure

1 Press the MARKER hard key.

2 Press the Channel soft key to select a channel to be displayed in the IQ diagram.
The channel P-SS is selected by default.
3 Press the up/down arrow keys or turn the rotary knob to highlight a channel in the channel
summary table, and then press the center of the rotary knob.
4 Toggle the Marker View soft key between On and Off to display or hide the result of the selected
channel.

Measurement example
Figure 324 Control channel measurement with RFoCPRI LTE-TDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RFoCPRI signal analysis” on page
551 for more information.

Conducting subframe measurement

The Subframe measures the modulation accuracy of all the data and control channels at the specified
subframe (1 ms).

568 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-TDD > Modulation Analysis > Subframe.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 526.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key, and then set the following parameters:
– Measurement setups as described in the “Setting measure setup” on page 528
– CPRI parameters as described in the “Configuring CPRI parameters” on page 529
5 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
NOTE
For MBMS testing, this subframe number must be neither 0 nor 5 as these subframes 0
and 5 are not available for MBMS and it must be set to the MBMS transmitted channel’s
subframe number.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization.
7 Toggle the EVM Detection Mode soft key and select Single or Combine as desired:
– Single: Testing on one single antenna connected to your JD700B series with a cable.
– Combine: Testing on multiple antennas connected to your JD700B series with a 2x1
combiner or an antenna.
8 Depending on your selected NEM, you may need to turn on or off the inversion of the I and Q
order by toggling the IQ Invert soft key and selecting On or Off.
9 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then set other miscellaneous setups as
described in the following section.
10 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
11 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of CPRI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
12 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting other miscellaneous setups

Procedure

1 To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft key
and select the option: Auto, 0, and 1.
2 To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or Extended. See
“Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details by different
bandwidth.
3 To turn on or off the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature, toggle the MBMS
soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the Subframe No with
the same PMCH subframe number. If this setting is on, either PMCH or PDSCH appears on the
screen depending on the detected channel.
4 To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically or
manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
5 To select the PDSCH modulation type, press the PDSCH Modulation Type soft key and then
select the option from the choices: Auto, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, E-TM3.3, E-TM3.2,

JD700B Series User’s Guide 569

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

E-TM3.1, E-TM2, E-TM1.2, and E-TM1.1.

NOTE
If two or more modulation types are used in a frame, select Auto. If the PDSCH uses the
same modulation type in a frame or in a subframe, select a specific modulation type to
get more accurate EVM.
6 To set the threshold for PDSCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDSCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
7 To set the threshold for PDCCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDCCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
8 Toggle the PDCCH Mode soft key and select REG or Avg.
– REG: Calculates EVM based on Resource Element Group
– Avg: Calculates EVM after adding all the PDCCH signals from one subframe.
9 To enable or disable the PDSCH precoding, toggle the PDSCH Precoding soft key and select
On or Off.
10 To set the Control Format Indicator, toggle the CFI soft key and select Auto or Manual:
– Auto: Lets the instrument set the number of OFDM symbols used for transmitting PDCCHs
in a subframe.
– Manual: Sets the number of OFDM symbols manually.
11 To select the number of PHICH groups (Ng), press the PHICH Ng soft key and then select the
option from the choices: 1/6, 1/2, 1, 2, E-1/6, E-1/2, E-1, or E-2.

Setting display
You can use the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key to view the RE and RS power at a specific symbol.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Toggle the Chart soft key between On and Off to display or hide the chart.
If this setting is on, the MARKER hard key is activated.

Using marker
If you turn the Chart view on, you can use the MARKER hard key to place the marker at a specific symbol.

Procedure

1 Press the MARKER hard key.

2 Toggle the Marker View soft key between On and Off to display or hide the marker on the chart.
3 Press the Symbol soft key to select the symbol number, to which the marker is placed.
4 Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
5 Press the Enter soft key.

570 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Measurement example
Figure 325 Subframe measurement (regular view) with RFoCPRI LTE-TDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RFoCPRI signal analysis” on page
551 for more information.

Conducting time alignment error measurement

In eNode-B supporting Tx Diversity transmission, signals are transmitted from two or more antennas. These
signals shall be aligned. The time alignment error in Tx diversity is specified as the delay between the
signals from two antennas at the antenna ports.

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-TDD > Modulation Analysis > Time Alignment Error.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 526.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key, and then set the following parameters:
– Measurement setups as described in the “Setting measure setup” on page 528
– CPRI parameters as described in the “Configuring CPRI parameters” on page 529
5 Toggle the Antenna Config soft key and select Ant0 or Ant1 as needed.
6 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization.
7 Depending on your selected NEM, you may need to turn on or off the inversion of the I and Q
order by toggling the IQ Invert soft key and selecting On or Off.
8 Optional. To select the cyclic prefix, complete the following steps:
a Press the Miscellaneous soft key.
b Toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or Extended. See “Appendix E –

JD700B Series User’s Guide 571

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details by different bandwidth.
9 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
10 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of CPRI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
11 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 326 Time alignment error measurement with RFoCPRI LTE-TDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RFoCPRI signal analysis” on page
551 for more information.

Conducting data allocation map measurement

The Data Allocation Map function represents data allocation as a frame.

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-TDD > Modulation Analysis > Data Allocation Map.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 526.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key, and then set the following parameters:
– Measurement setups as described in the “Setting measure setup” on page 528
– CPRI parameters as described in the “Configuring CPRI parameters” on page 529
5 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.

572 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

NOTE
For MBMS testing, this subframe number must be neither 0 nor 5 as these subframes 0
and 5 are not available for MBMS and it must be set to the MBMS transmitted channel’s
subframe number.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization.
7 To set the threshold for PDSCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDSCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
8 Depending on your selected NEM, you may need to turn on or off the inversion of the I and Q
order by toggling the IQ Invert soft key and selecting On or Off.
9 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then set other miscellaneous setups as
described in the following section.
10 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
11 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of CPRI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
12 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting other miscellaneous setups

Procedure

1 To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft key
and select the option: Auto, 0, and 1.
2 To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or Extended. See
“Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details by different
bandwidth.
3 To turn on or off the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature, toggle the MBMS
soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the Subframe No with
the same PMCH subframe number. If this setting is on, either PMCH or PDSCH appears on the
screen depending on the detected channel.
4 To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically or
manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.

Setting display
You can use the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key to change the display mode to PDSCH, PMCH, or both.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Display Channel soft key.
3 Select the display mode from the choice: PDSCH, PMCH, and Both.

Using marker
You can use the MARKER hard key to place the marker at a specific resource block and subframe.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 573

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

Procedure

1 Press the MARKER hard key.

2 Toggle the Marker View soft key between On and Off to display or hide the marker on the chart.
3 To select the resource block number, complete the following steps:
a Press the RB Number soft key.
b Enter the resource block number to select by using the numeric keys. You can also use the
rotary knob to move the marker side by side.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 To select the subframe block number, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter the subframe number to select by using the numeric keys. You can also use the
rotary knob to move the marker up and down.
c Press the Enter soft key.

Measurement example
Figure 327 Data allocation map measurement with RFoCPRI LTE-TDD signal analyzer

Performing power statistics CCDF measurement

The Power Statistics Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function (CCDF) measurement characterizes
the power statistics of the input signal. It provides PAR (Peak to Average power Ratio) versus different
probabilities.

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-TDD > Power Statistics CCDF.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 526.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key, and then set the following parameters:

574 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

– Measurement setups as described in the “Setting measure setup” on page 528

– CPRI parameters as described in the “Configuring CPRI parameters” on page 529
5 To set the length of the CCDF, complete the following steps:
a Press the CCDF Length soft key.
b Enter a value between 1 and 100 by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary
knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
7 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of CPRI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
8 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 328 CCDF measurement with RFoCPRI LTE-TDD signal analyzer

Setting limit for RFoCPRI signal analysis

By default, test limits specified in the standard are set for you. You can change thresholds if you desire.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 To set a limit for RF analysis tests, press the RF Test Limits soft key and then set limits as
needed, depending on where you are in the measurement mode.

To set the limit for Select Set

Channel power Channel Power High Limit, Low Limit

Occupied bandwidth Occupied BW High Limit

3 To set a limit for modulation tests, press the Modulation Test Limits soft key and then set limits
as needed, depending on where you are in the measurement mode.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 575

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

To set the limit for Select Set

Frequency error Frequency Error High Limit, Low Limit

PDSCH error vector EVM > PDSCH EVM High Limit (QPSK)
magnitude if MBMS is off High Limit (16 QAM)
High Limit (64 QAM)

PMCH error vector magnitude EVM > PMCH EVM High Limit (QPSK)
if MBMS is on and a PMCH is High Limit (16 QAM)
detected High Limit (64 QAM)

RMS for data error vector EVM > Data EVM RMS High Limit
magnitude

Peak for data error vector EVM> Data EVM Peak High Limit
magnitude

RS error vector magnitude EVM > RS EVM High Limit

P-SS error vector magnitude EVM > P-SS EVM High Limit

S-SS error vector magnitude EVM > S-SS EVM High Limit

Downlink RS power Power > DL RS Power High Limit, Low Limit

P-SS power Power > P-SS Power High Limit, Low Limit

S-SS power Power > S-SS Power High Limit, Low Limit

PBCH power Power > PBCH Power High Limit, Low Limit

Subframe power Power > Subframe Power High Limit, Low Limit

OFDM symbol power Power > OFDM Symbol Power High Limit, Low Limit

Frame average power Power > Frame Avg Power High Limit, Low Limit

Time alignment error for MIMO Time Alignment Error > MIMO High Limit

Time error Time Error High Limit, Low Limit

I-Q origin offset IQ Origin Offset High Limit

4 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Using signal generator

If your JD700B series has the signal generator options installed with a license, you can use this RF Source
or CPRI Source, or both.

Using RF source in RFoCPRI testing

You can use the RF Source feature to calibrate the uplink noise floor at a given point, check the uplink gain
and dynamic range, and verify that current AxC configuration including map positioning is correct.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

576 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

2 Press the Source soft key. Depending on your selection of measurement mode, you may need
to select More (1/2) > Source.
3 Press the RF Source soft key.
4 To set the frequency of the CW signal to be injected, complete the following steps:
a Press the Frequency soft key.
b Enter a value within the frequency range of your instrument.
– JD740B series: 25 MHz to 4 GHz
– JD780B series: 5 MHz to 6 GHz
NOTE
The frequency of the CW signal must be in the uplink band of the RRH under test.

c Select the unit option from the choices: GHz, MHz, kHz, and Hz.
5 To set the output level of the CW signal to be injected, complete following steps:
a Press the Power Level soft key.
b Enter a value within the output range for the frequency you have set in step 4.
– JD740B series: -80 dBm to -30 dBm, 0 dBm
– JD780B series: -60 dBm to 10 dBm
c Press the unit soft key.
6 To start to inject the set signal, toggle the RF Source soft key and select On.
7 To stop injecting the signal, toggle the RF Source soft key and select Off.

Using CPRI source

You can use the CPRI Source feature to generate six types of E-UTRA Test Model waveforms in RFoCPRI
testing: E-TM1.1, E-TM1.2, E-TM2, E-TM3.1, E-TM3.2, and E-TM3.3.

Procedure

1 Make the Tx of a SFP/SFP+ module looped back to the Rx of the same module.
NOTE
When two SFP/SFP+ modules are installed in both Port 1 and Port 2, the CPRI source
always works via the Port 1, which is the primary port. If you want to use the Port 2 for
this CPRI signal generation, make sure to eject the module from the Port 1.
2 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
3 To set the Tx Clock and Port Type settings correctly, complete the following steps:
a Press the CPRI Parameters soft key.
b Press the Tx Clock soft key and then select Internal.
c Toggle the Port Type soft key and then select Master.
d Press the PREV hard key to return to the Measure Setup main menu.
4 Press the Source soft key. Depending on your selection of measurement mode, you may need
to select More (1/2) > Source.
5 Press the CPRI Source soft key.
6 To adjust the gain of the waveform to be transmitted in order to prevent an overrun or underrun of
the RRH, complete the following steps:
a Press the Gain soft key.
b Enter a value between -50.00 dB and 0.00 dB.
c Press the dB soft key or the ENTER hard key.
7 To select an E-TM waveform to be generated, complete the following steps:
a Press the Waveforms soft key.
The Waveform list dialog box appears.
b Select one of the continuous waves from the E-TM list for your selected NEM. Supported
bandwidths are 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 577

Chapter 15 Performing RFoCPRI Testing

c Tap the Apply button on the screen or press the ENTER hard key.
8 To start to inject the selected E-TM signal, toggle the CPRI Source soft key and select On.
9 To stop injecting the signal, toggle the CPRI Source soft key and select Off.

578 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 16

Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

This chapter provides instructions for using the RFoOBSAI function that requires Optical Hardware (option
008), RFoOBSAI Interference Analyzer (options 070 – 073), and RFoOBSAI LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer
(option 096). Topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

n Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 580

n Display overview ..................................................................................................................... 580
n Selecting measurement mode ................................................................................................ 581
n Performing layer 2 monitoring ................................................................................................. 581
n Performing layer 2 term testing ............................................................................................... 584
n Performing interference analysis ............................................................................................. 587
n Performing PIM detection (single and multiple carriers) ......................................................... 599
n Performing LTE-FDD downlink signal analysis ....................................................................... 602
n Using signal generator ............................................................................................................ 627
Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

Introduction
Cell sites today have a distributed architecture of the radio that consists of the baseband (BB) module or
baseband unit (BBU) installed at the bottom of the tower and the remote RF unit (RRU) or remote radio
head (RRH) installed at the top of the tower. These two elements interface with each other for data transfer
over fiber links via the Reference Point 3 (RP3) protocol, which is specified by Open Base Station
Architecture Initiative (OBSAI).

This distributed architecture provides the benefit of replacing coax-based feeders with fiber- based feeders,
significantly reducing the problems of signal loss and reflections. However, since all the RF modules reside
on the RRU, any RF maintenance or troubleshooting requires climbing to the top of the tower to access the
RRU, increasing operational cost and unnecessary safety issues.

JD700B series analyzers provide the option of RFoOBSAI that allows you to perform RF maintenance and
troubleshooting activities on the ground via the fiber interfaces at the BB module, significantly reducing
maintenance time and operational expenses. Thanks to the RFoOBSAI technology, you can verify the
OBSAI RP3 protocol and extracts the RP3 messages transmitted between the BBU and RRU to monitor and
analyze the uplink interferences and the downlink signals.

The RFoOBSAI testing provides following measurements and analysis:

n Layer 2 monitoring of link maintenance errors and optical power

o Loss of Signal (LOS)
o Loss of Frame (LOF) – Frame synchronization or alignment
o Optical Rx and Tx power levels
o Line Code Violation
o Rx K30.7 words
o RP3 address/message counts
n Layer 2 terminate testing
n Interference analysis
o Spectrum
o Spectrogram
o Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI)
o Spectrum replayer
n PIM detection of single or multiple carrier(s)
n LTE-FDD downlink signal analysis over OBSAI
o Spectrum
o RF analysis – Channel Power and Occupied Bandwidth
o Power vs. Time (Frame)
o Modulation analysis – Constellation, Data Channel, Control Channel, Subframe, Frame,
Time Alignment Error, and Data Allocation Map
o Power Statistics CCDF

Display overview
Figure 329 provides descriptions for each segment of the measurement screen.

580 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

Figure 329 RFoOBSAI analysis screen

Selecting measurement mode

Procedure

1 Press the MODE hard key.

2 Press the RFoFiber soft key.
3 Press the RFoOBSAI soft key. The Layer 2 Monitoring mode is set by default.
4 Press the MEASURE hot key, and then select the measurement mode option from the following
choices:
– Layer 2 Monitoring
– Layer 2 Term
– Interference Analyzer > Spectrum, Spectrogram, RSSI, or Spectrum Replayer
– PIM Detection > PIM Detection Single Carrier, PIM Detection Multiple Carriers, or
Calculated PIM
– Signal Analyzer > LTE-FDD > Spectrum, RF Analysis, P vs T (Frame),
Modulation Analysis, or Power Statistics CCDF

Performing layer 2 monitoring

The in-service Layer 2 Monitoring is used to monitor link maintenance errors of the physical layer (Layer 1)
of the RP3 bus protocol. It also verifies proper optical power levels of the received and transmitted signals.

Connecting cables
The monitoring mode lets you perform in-service testing by using coupler(s) or nTap(s). You can connect
cables with a tap or without a tap as illustrated in Figure 330. If you have connected cables directly from

JD700B Series User’s Guide 581

Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

RRU and BBU without using the nTap, you must turn on the through mode (Thru) in the Measure Setup
menu.

A SFP/SFP+ transceiver that is connected to your JD700B series must be compatible with your DUT and
you must have your module information such as line rate, wavelength, and mode (MM or SM) handy.

Figure 330 Connection diagram for Layer-2 monitoring mode

With nTap (both Thru On/Off): Without nTap (Thru On only):

Selecting measurement mode

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key.

2 Select Layer 2 Monitoring.

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Link Rate soft key to set the line rate of the OBSAI RP3 interface between the BB and
the RRU.
3 Select the RP3 line rate option from the choices: 768 Mbps, 1536 Mbps, 3072 Mbps, and
6144 Mbps.

NOTE
It is important that you set the link rate correctly to avoid any misleading LOS and LOF
alarms displayed on the screen.

If you select 6144 Mbps, the Scrambler Seed soft key becomes active in the OBSAI
Parameters menu so that you can specify a seed value to avoid false byte alignment.
4 To turn on the through mode if you have not used a tap, toggle the Thru soft key and select On.
To turn it off, select Off.

Setting Rx optic limit

A RRH has a finite dynamic range for input optic power and it can cause an abnormal behavior of the RRH if
the optical power is weaker than certain level. To differentiate intermittent low optic power issues from any
RSSI, interference and signal quality issues, it is important for you to monitor the input optic power level
during the monitoring of the spectrum and the signal quality. Using this Rx optic limit feature, you can set

582 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

lower and upper limits and monitor the Rx optic level with Pass/Fail indication in green and red colors.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Rx Optic Level soft key.
3 Set a threshold for High Limit and Low Limit.
4 To enable the Rx optic limit, toggle the Test Limits soft key and select On.
If the optic power level falls out of the specified thresholds, the color of the power reading or
indicator turns red.
5 To disable the Rx optic limit, toggle the Test Limits soft key and select Off.

Conducting layer 2 monitoring

After you have set the test parameters, you can monitor errors in OBSAI L2 signals.

Procedure

1 Monitor the following error indicators and the optical signal level. Test results in green indicate no
detection of errors and red ones represent occurrence(s) of errors.
– LOS: Loss of Signal (code violation or low optical power)
– LOF: Loss of Frame (frame synchronization or alignment)
– Optic Rx Level: If the optical signal level is lower than the threshold, the OBSAI RP3 link
may not work properly and the RRU may not be in service mode.
– Code Violations: Number of occurrence of invalid line codes
– Rx K30.7 Words: Number of counts of K30.7 character, which indicates an error in the byte
– RP3 Address: Rx RP3 addresses in the received messages
– Message Counts: Number of counts of received messages addressed to the same RP3
address specified in the Measure Setup > OBSAI Parameters > Rx RP3 Address
NOTE
If you have selected the link rate 6144 Mbps, displayed RP3 addresses may include
invalid or erroneous addresses.
2 Optional. You can use the Save Logging Data soft key to record the event logging in .csv file
format. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.
3 To clear the previous event history and start a new monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot
key and then the Clear History soft key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 583

Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

Measurement example
Figure 331 OBSAI RP3 layer 2 monitoring

Performing layer 2 term testing

The out-of-service Layer 2 Term is to test the OBSAI RP3 fronthaul in the terminated state and it is used to
monitor link maintenance errors of the physical layer (Layer 1) of the RP3 bus protocol. It also verifies proper
optical power levels of received and transmitted signals.

Connecting cables
The terminate mode allows you to do out-of-service testing. You can connect cables with a tap or without a
tap as illustrated in Figure 332.

A SFP/SFP+ transceiver that is connected to your JD700B series must be compatible with your DUT and
you must have your module information such as line rate, wavelength, and mode (MM or SM) handy.

Figure 332 Connection diagram for Layer-2 term testing mode

With nTap: Without nTap:

584 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

Selecting measurement mode

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key.

2 Select Layer 2 Term.

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key

2 Press the Link Rate soft key to set the line rate of the OBSAI RP3 interface between the BB and
the RRU.
3 Select the RP3 line rate option from the choices: 768 Mbps, 1536 Mbps, 3072 Mbps, and
6144 Mbps.

NOTE
It is important that you set the link rate correctly to avoid any misleading LOS and LOF
alarms displayed on the screen.

If you select 6144 Mbps, the Scrambler Seed soft key becomes active in the OBSAI
Parameters menu so that you can specify a scrambler seed.
4 Make sure to turn off the through mode by toggling the Thru soft key and selecting Off.
5 Press the OBSAI Parameters soft key to select the port type and the clock reference.
6 Toggle the Port Type soft key and select Master.
7 Press the Tx Clock soft key, and then select Internal for transmission clock reference.

Setting Rx optic limit

A RRH has a finite dynamic range for input optic power and it can cause an abnormal behavior of the RRH if
the optical power is weaker than certain level. To differentiate intermittent low optic power issues from any
RSSI, interference and signal quality issues, it is important for you to monitor the input optic power level
during the monitoring of the spectrum and the signal quality. Using this Rx optic limit feature, you can set
lower and upper limits and monitor the Rx optic level with Pass/Fail indication in green and red colors.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Rx Optic Level soft key.
3 Set a threshold for High Limit and Low Limit.
4 To enable the Rx optic limit, toggle the Test Limits soft key and select On.
If the optic power level falls out of the specified thresholds, the color of the power reading or
indicator turns red.
5 To disable the Rx optic limit, toggle the Test Limits soft key and select Off.

Conducting layer 2 term test

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the More (1/2) soft key to go to the Alarm/Error and Laser menus.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 585

Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

3 Toggle the Laser soft key and select On to activate the transmission.
4 To insert a code error, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Error Type soft key between Code and K30.7 and select Code.
b Toggle the Insert Type soft key between Single and Rate and select the insert type option
you want.
– Single: It inserts an error once and then turns off the error insertion.
– Rate: It inserts an error according to the set error rate in the Error Rate menu.
c If you have selected Rate in step b, press the Error Rate and then select the error rate
option from the choices: 1E-3, 1E-4, 1E-5, 1E-6, 1E-7, 1E-8, and 1E-9.
d Toggle the Error Insertion soft key and select On to start to insert the specified error.
e To stop inserting the error, toggle the Error Insertion soft key and select Off.
5 To insert a K30.7 error signal, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Error Type soft key between Code and K30.7 and select K30.7.
b Toggle the Error Insertion soft key and select On to insert the specified error.
The K30.7 error signal is one time insertion. This setting changes back to Off after insertion.
6 Check the real time results on the screen.
– LOS: Loss of Signal (code violation or low optical power)
– LOF: Loss of Frame (frame synchronization or alignment)
– Optic Rx Level: If the optical signal level is lower than the threshold, the OBSAI RP3 link
may not work properly and the RRU may not be in service mode.
– Optic Tx Level: If the optical signal level is lower than the threshold, the OBSAI RP3 link
may not work properly and the BB may not be in service mode.
– Word Sync Loss Events: Number of occurrence of word sync losses
– Code Violations: Number of occurrence of invalid line codes
– Rx K30.7 Words: Number of counts of K30.7 character, which indicates an error in the byte
– Frame Sync Loss Events: Number of detected frame sync losses
7 Optional. You can use the Save Logging Data soft key to record the event logging in .csv file
format. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.
8 To clear the previous event history and start a new testing, press the PREV hard key and then
press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.

586 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

Measurement example
Figure 333 OBSAI layer 2 term test

Performing interference analysis

After checking that the link connection is good with no errors, you can proceed to the interference analysis
activities including spectrum, spectrogram, RSSI, and spectrum replayer. You can also monitor current and
history OBSAI alarm status for LOS and LOF displayed on the interference measurement screen.

Connecting cables
You can connect cables with a tap or without a tap as illustrated in Figure 334. If you have connected cables
directly from RRH and BBU without using the nTap, you must turn on the through mode (Thru) in the
Measure Setup menu.

A SFP/SFP+ transceiver that is connected to your JD700B series must be compatible with your DUT and
you must have your module information such as line rate, wavelength, and mode (MM or SM) handy.

Figure 334 Connection diagram for interference analysis

With nTap (both Thru On/Off): Without nTap (Thru On only):

JD700B Series User’s Guide 587

Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

Selecting measurement mode

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key.

2 Press the Interference Analyzer soft key.
3 Select the interference measurement mode from the following choices:
– Spectrum
– Spectrogram
– RSSI
– Spectrum Replayer

Configuring test parameters

Configuration of test parameters described in this section is used in the Interference Analyzer mode
including spectrum measurements, spectrogram, and RSSI.

Setting frequency
You can set the frequency with either frequency or channel number. If a frequency to be set matches to the
frequency corresponding to the selected channel standard, the instrument calculates its channel number
and updates the screen with it automatically.

Procedure

To set the frequency with center frequency:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
3 Press the Center Frequency soft key.
4 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
5 Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
6 Optional. To define the amount of increment for rotary operation, complete the following steps:
a Press the Frequency Step soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.

To set the frequency with channel number:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Channel.
3 To select the standard channel, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Std soft key. The standard channel window appears.
See “Appendix C – Band, frequency & channel standard” on page 664 for more information.
b Highlight the band to be measured by using the rotary knob, the arrow keys, or the
Page Up/Page Down soft keys.
c Press the Select soft key or the rotary knob to confirm the selection.
4 Toggle the Link soft key to select the scanning direction and select Fwd (forward) or Rev
(reverse).
5 Press the Channel Number soft key.
6 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
7 Press the Enter soft key.
The instrument automatically displays the corresponding center frequency value for the selected
channel number.

588 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

8 Optional. To define the amount of increment for rotary operation, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Step soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.

Setting reference level

You can set the reference level automatically or manually to optimize the display of the traces measured, as
you desire.

Procedure

To automatically set the reference level:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Press the Auto Scale soft key.
Each time you press this key, the Y-axis scale changes to be optimized with some margin.

To set the reference level manually:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 To set the maximum reference value on the Y-axis manually, complete the following steps:
a Press the Reference Level soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys or the rotary knob with 10 dB increments.
c Press the unit soft key or the ENTER hard key.
This unit key name changes according to the setting in the Units menu.

Optional. To change the scale unit:

1 Select More (1/2) > Units.
2 Select the unit of the display scale: dBm, dBV, dBmV, dBµV, V, or W.
The scale unit on the screen changes accordingly.

Setting scale per division

You can use the Scale/Div feature to change the scale per division, representing the value of one division
on the horizontal scale. The default setting is 10 dB per division and the maximum value can be set up to
20 dB.

Procedure

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Select More (1/2) > Scale/Div.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 20 by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.

Setting external offset

You can turn the External Offset on and manually set the external offset value. An offset consists of a cable
loss and a user offset, and the measurement result shows the value reflecting both offset values. When the
external offset value is set at 40 dB, the measurement result compensates 40 dB.

Procedure

To set the external offset:

JD700B Series User’s Guide 589

Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On.
3 Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.

To turn the external offset off:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Toggle the External Offset soft key and select Off.

Enabling auto leveling

It is normal that you see higher level of RSSI in OBSAI spectrum than you have seen in RF spectrum
because the digital signal has a different gain level from RF’s. If you use the Auto Leveling feature and enter
the Noise Figure (NF) for the system to be tested, the instrument calculates an offset that compensates the
digital gain of RRH and applies it to the spectrum automatically to displace the level of spectrum to a known
RSSI power even though its accuracy cannot be guranteed. Offset calculation for Auto Leveling is based on
the following:

Auto Level offset = (Noise Floor of RFoOBSAI) – (Ideal Noise Floor of RRH), where (Idea Noise Floor) =
N.F (RRH) + Thermal Noise + 10log (RBW)

Procedure

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Press the Auto Leveling soft key.
A calculated level of offset without NF is applied as the external offset and the user input field is
activated for entry of the noise figure value.
3 Enter a noise figure value by using the numeric keys.
NOTE
Having the noise figure factored in the offset calculation for Auto Leveling will enable you
to view the OBSAI spectrum closer to what you can view in the RF spectrum, but if you
do not know the noise figure, you can skip this noise figure setting.
4 Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.
New external offset value appears in the External Offset menu box.

Setting RBW
You can set the RBW and VBW in the Spectrum, Spectrogram, and RSSI modes. The RBW range is limited
as per the bandwidth of the signal under test.

Procedure

1 Press the BW/AVG hard key.

2 Press the RBW soft key to set the resolution bandwidth.
3 Enter a value in 1-3 sequence by using the numeric keys, and then select kHz soft key.
You can also use the rotary knob.
– For signal bandwidths 1.4 MHz and 3 MHz: RBW from 1 kHz to 30 kHz
– For signal bandwidths 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz: RBW from 1 kHz to 100 kHz
4 Press the VBW soft key to set the video bandwidth.
5 Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then select the unit option from the choices:
MHz, kHz, and Hz. You can also use the rotary knob.

590 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

Setting average
You can set the number of measurements to be averaged for the trace presentation in the Spectrum,
Spectrogram, and RSSI modes. A maximum of 100 times of averaging can be set. When the averaging
reaches to your setting, a new measurement value replaces the measurement value in sequence from the
earliest.

Procedure

1 Press the BW/AVG hard key.

2 Press the Average soft key.
3 Enter a value between one and 100 as needed by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the Enter soft key.

Setting sweep mode

The default setting is Continue to sweep continuously for most on-going measurements. If you want to hold
the measurement or get a single sweep, you can change the sweep mode. This setting is used in the
Spectrum, Spectrogram, and RSSI modes.

Procedure

To select the single sweep mode:

1 Press the SWEEP hot key.
2 Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Single. You can also use the HOLD hot key.
The letter HOLD in red appears and the sweeping is paused.
3 Optional. Press the Sweep Once soft key to get a new measurement.

To return to the continuous sweep mode:

1 Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Continue. You can also use the HOLD hot key.
The letter HOLD in red disappears and the sweeping resumes.

Setting trace
You can display up to six traces on the measurement chart simultaneously.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Select Trace soft key, and then select the trace number: T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, or T6.
The legend shape of the selected trace changes from square to round to indicate that the trace is
the active one now.
3 Do one of the following:
To Select Trace Legend

Clear current data and display with new Clear Write W

measurements

Display the input signal’s maximum response only Max Hold M

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

Display the input signal’s minimum response only Min Hold m

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

Capture the selected trace and compare traces Capture C

JD700B Series User’s Guide 591

Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

Load a saved trace More (1/2) > Load L

Hide the displayed trace Trace View > Off F

Remove all the traces and initialize the trace More (1/2) > Trace
settings Clear All

NOTE
For the Max Hold and Min Hold, your instrument compares newly acquired data with the
active trace and displays larger maximum values or smaller minimum values on the
screen. You can set it to Unlimited to hold and view maximum or minimum data or
specify a certain amount of time up to 60 seconds by using numeric keys or rotary knob.
4 To select the detection option, select More (1/2) > Detectors, and then do one of the following:

To display Select

Random noise better than the peak without missing signals Normal

The highest value in each data point Peak

The root mean squared average power across the spectrum RMS

The lowest value in each data point Negative Peak

The center value in each data point Sample

5 Optional. Select More (1/2) > Trace Info, and then select the trace number to view the trace’s
parameter setting information stored at the time of the measurement or None to hide the
information display.
6 Optional. If you have the two traces T1 and T2, you can perform trace math. To view the power
difference between the traces, press the T1 – T2 -> T5 or T2 – T1 -> T6 soft key.
The result is overlaid on the screen along with the second Y-axis.

NOTE
To be able to load a trace, the trace to be overlaid must be saved in the same
measurement mode and frequency setting as the current measurement.

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key

2 Press the Link Rate soft key to set the line rate of the OBSAI RP3 interface between the BB and
the RRU.
3 Select the RP3 line rate option from the choices: 768 Mbps, 1536 Mbps, 3072 Mbps, and
6144 Mbps.

NOTE
It is important that you set the link rate correctly to avoid any misleading LOS and LOF
alarms displayed on the screen.

If you select 6144 Mbps, the Scrambler Seed soft key becomes active in the OBSAI
Parameters menu so that you can specify a scrambler seed.
4 To turn on the through mode if you have not used a tap, toggle the Thru soft key and select On.
To turn it off, select Off.
5 Press the OBSAI Parameters soft key, and then do the following:
– To specify Rx RP3 Type and RP3 Address of the received message for link rates
768 Mbps, 1536 Mbps, and 3072 Mbps, complete the following steps:
a Select More (1/2) > Rx Address List.
The Rx Address List box appears. JD700B series lists all Rx messages detected by the
instrument with RP3 Address and RP3 Type values.

592 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

b From the list, select the message to monitor.

c Tap the Apply button.
The instrument automatically sets the RP3 Address and RP3 Type with the selected
values.
NOTE
You can also manually specify the RP3 Address and RP3 Type for the received message
using the Rx RP3 Type and Rx RP3 Address soft keys.
d If you have selected a WCDMA/FDD message, toggle the WCDMA Link soft key and
select the link direction between FWD for forward (downlink) and REV for reverse
(uplink).
– To specify Rx RP3 Type and RP3 Address of the received message for link rate 6144 Mbps,
complete the following steps:
a Select More (1/2) > Rx Address Valid List.
The Rx Address List box appears. Unlike the Rx Address List, the Rx Address Valid
List feature shows only the messages that contain scrambling code seed values.
b From the list, select the message to monitor.
c Tap the Apply button.
The instrument automatically sets the RP3 Address, RP3 Type, and Scrambler Seed
with the selected values.
NOTE
You can also manually specify the RP3 Address, RP3 Type, and Scrambler Seed for the
received message using the Rx RP3 Type, Rx RP3 Address, and Scrambler Seed soft
keys.
d If you have selected a WCDMA/FDD message, toggle the WCDMA Link soft key and
select the link direction between FWD for forward (downlink) and REV for reverse
(uplink).
– To set the port type and transmission clock reference, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Port Type soft key and select Slave (default).
b Press the Tx Clock soft key, and then select Recovered (default).
6 Press the Bandwidth soft key, and then specify the bandwidth depending on the RP3 type of the
received signal.
– WCDMA/FDD REV (uplink): 5 MHz
– WCDMA/FDD FWD (downlink): 3 MHz
– LTE: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz
The RBW range changes based on this bandwidth setting.
7 Optional. To use the RF signal generator function, see “Using RF source in RFoOBSAI testing”
on page 627.

Conducting spectrum measurement

After setting test parameters as described in “Configuring test parameters” on page 588, you can perform
spectrum measurements with an audible indicator. You can also turn on the interference ID.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the sound indicator, complete the following steps:
a Press the Sound Indicator soft key.
b Select the alarm reference option from the choices: Marker and Line.
– Marker: Sets the active marker position as the alarm reference.
– Line: Lets the limit line as the alarm reference.
c Press the Limit Line soft key to set a threshold for an alarm.
d Enter a value, and then press the dBm soft key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 593

Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

e Toggle the Sound soft key and select On to enable to sound or Off to turn it off.
f Optional. To adjust the volume for alarm sound, press the Volume soft key, and then turn
the rotary knob clockwise or counter clockwise.
NOTE
The Sound Indicator is used to identify interfering signals with alarm sound. It is
especially useful for locating interferer sources with a directional antenna.
3 To set the interference ID, complete the following steps:
a Press the Interference ID soft key.
b Press the Threshold soft key.
c Enter a value, and then press the dBm soft key.
d Toggle the Interference ID soft key and select On to turn on Interference ID or Off to turn
it off.
NOTE
The Interference ID automatically classifies interfering signals over a designated
spectrum and displays a list of possible signal types corresponding to the selected signal.
4 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of OBSAI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.
If you have saved logging data, you can play them in the Spectrum Replayer mode.

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the display line, multi-
segment line, and channel limit. See “Setting limit for interference analysis” on page 598
for more information.

Figure 335 RFoOBSAI spectrum measurement

Conducting spectrogram
The Spectrogram is particularly useful when attempting to identify periodic or intermittent signals as it
captures spectrum activity over time and uses various colors to differentiate spectrum power levels. When
the directional antenna is used to receive the signal, you will see a change in the amplitude of the tracked
signal as you change the direction of the antenna and see a change in the Spectrogram colors. The source
of the signal is located in the direction that results in the highest signal strength.

After setting test parameters as described in “Configuring test parameters” on page 588, you can perform

594 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

spectrogram measurements.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set the amount of time between each trace measurement:
a Press the Time Interval soft key.
b Enter a value, and then press the Sec soft key.
3 To set the time cursor on a specific trace position, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Time Cursor soft key and select On.
b Turn the rotary knob to move the time cursor. You can also enter a value and then press the
Enter soft key.
c To turn the time cursor off, select Off.
NOTE
Enabling the time cursor puts the measurement on hold and you can make post-
processing analysis for each measurement over time using the time cursor.
4 To start a new measurement, press the Reset/Restart soft key.
5 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of OBSAI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
6 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

The spectrogram shows a vertical line on the chart when the marker is enabled on the screen.

Figure 336 RFoOBSAI interference measurement in spectrogram

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the display line, multi-
segment line, and channel limit. See “Setting limit for interference analysis” on page 598
for more information.

Conducting RSSI
The Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) is a multi-signal tracking metric that is particularly useful for
measuring power-level variations over time. The RSSI measurement lets you assign power limit line for
audible alarms and increase alarm counters every time a signal exceeds a defined limit line. For long-term

JD700B Series User’s Guide 595

Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

analysis, the spectrogram and RSSI measurements can be automatically saved into an external USB
memory. Post-analysis can be performed with JDViewer application software.

After configuring test parameters as described in “Configuring test parameters” on page 588, you can
continue to proceed to the spectrogram measurement.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To set up the alarm parameters, complete the following steps:
a Press the Alarm soft key.
b Press the Alarm at soft key, and then select the marker number you want to set.
c Press the Limit Line soft key to set a threshold for the alarm.
d Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
e Press the dBm soft key.
f Toggle the Alarm soft key between On and Off to turn the alarm feature on or off.
NOTE
You must set the marker(s) first by using the MARKER hard key as these features use
the marker position to sound an alarm. See “Using marker” on page 53 for more
information.
g Optional. Press the Volume soft key and adjust the volume.
3 Press the PREV hard key to return to the Measure Setup screen bar.
4 To start a new measurement, press the Reset/Restart soft key.
5 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of OBSAI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
6 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Figure 337 RFoOBSAI interference measurement in RSSI

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the display line, multi-
segment line, and channel limit. See “Setting limit for interference analysis” on page 598
for more information.

596 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

Performing spectrum replayer

The Spectrum Replayer lets you retrieve and replay recorded spectrum analyzer traces in interference
analysis mode. These traces can be played back in the spectrogram or RSSI. You can configure the limit line
to create failure points when signals exceed it. The failure points are clearly displayed on the trace timeline
for quick access during playback.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key.

2 Press the Spectrum Replayer soft key.
The file manager window appears.
3 Select a file to be loaded, and then press the Load soft key.
The Measure Setup screen menus appear.
4 Toggle the Replay Direction soft key between FWD and REV to change play direction to forward
or reverse.
5 Press the Replay Speed soft key, and then select the speed option: X1, X2, X3, and X4.
6 Press the Play soft key to start playing.
7 Press the Pause soft key to pause or stop playing data.
8 To move to a particular failure position directly and play from there, complete the following steps:
a Press the Jump to Fail Index soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
9 Optional. Toggle the Time Cursor soft key between On and Off to display or dismiss the time
cursor on the screen. This key becomes activated when you play logged data in the Spectrogram
mode.

NOTE
If you connected a USB drive, do not remove it while playing to prevent freezing the USB
port, which will require you to restart the instrument to get a USB drive recognized again.

Figure 338 RFoOBSAI spectrum replay

Setting display
You can select the display option to view data in a different mode.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 597

Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Select the display option from the choices: Spectrum, Spectrogram, and RSSI.

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the display line, multi-
segment line, and channel limit. See “Setting limit for interference analysis” on page 598
for more information.

Setting limit for interference analysis

You can set threshold(s) and display either a single segment line or multi-segment line to analyze the result
better.

Setting a single limit line

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Display Line soft key for a reference line.
3 Enter a value, and then press the dBm unit soft key.
4 Toggle the Display Line soft key between On and Off to display and hide the reference line.
The straight line appears across the screen to be used as a visual reference only.

Setting a multi-segment limit line

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 Press the Multi Segment Line soft key for Pass/Fail indication.
3 Toggle the Limit soft key between Upper and Lower to select the one to be displayed.
4 Set the number of segments for the selected upper or lower limit line, up to 50 segments.
a Press the # of Line soft key.
b Enter a value between 1 and 50 by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
5 Press the Autoset soft key to let the instrument set the limit for each segment and display the line.
6 To move the limit line, complete the following steps:
a Select Limit Up/Down or Limit Left/Right.
b Turn the rotary knob to move the line as desired. You can also manually enter a value.
7 To edit the segment properties, complete the following steps:
a Press the Edit Limit soft key.
b Press the Move soft key and then turn the rotary knob to select the segment to edit.
c Select the menu option, from the following choices:
– To hide the line for the selected segment, toggle the Line soft key and select Off.
– To add a new point, press the Add Point soft key.
– To delete the selected point, press the Delete Point soft key.
– To change the position, press the Frequency or Amplitude soft key, and then turn the
rotary knob to change the value as desired.
8 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

598 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

Performing PIM detection (single and multiple carriers)

The Passive Intermodulation (PIM) Detection allows you to detect Uplink PIM across the full spectrum for
any technology. When PIM is detected, the normal repair mode is to replace the offending cable and what
you need to do is replacing the whole cable irrespective of the location of the fault.

Connecting cables
You can connect cables with a tap or without a tap as illustrated in Figure 339. If you have connected cables
directly from RRH and BBU without using the nTap, you must turn on the through mode (Thru) in the
Measure Setup menu.

A SFP/SFP+ transceiver that is connected to your JD700B series must be compatible with your DUT and
you must have your module information such as line rate, wavelength, and mode (MM or SM) handy.

Figure 339 Connection diagram for PIM detection

With nTap (both Thru On/Off): Without nTap (Thru On only):

Selecting measurement mode

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key.

2 Press the PIM Detection soft key.
3 Select the PIM detection mode from the following choices:
– PIM Detection Single Carrier
– PIM Detection Multiple Carriers
– Calculated PIM

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Link Rate soft key to set the line rate of the OBSAI RP3 interface between the BB and
the RRU.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 599

Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

3 Select the RP3 line rate option from the choices: 768 Mbps, 1536 Mbps, 3072 Mbps, and
6144 Mbps.

NOTE
It is important that you set the link rate correctly to avoid any misleading LOS and LOF
alarms displayed on the screen.

If you select 6144 Mbps, the Scrambler Seed soft key becomes active in the OBSAI
Parameters menu so that you can specify a scrambler seed.
4 To turn on the through mode if you have not used a tap, toggle the Thru soft key and select On.
To turn it off, select Off.
5 Press the OBSAI Parameters soft key, and then do the following:
– To specify Rx RP3 Type and RP3 Address of the received message for link rates
768 Mbps, 1536 Mbps, and 3072 Mbps, complete the following steps:
a Select More (1/2) > Rx Address List.
The Rx Address List box appears. JD700B series lists all Rx messages detected by the
instrument with RP3 Address and RP3 Type values.
b From the list, select the message to monitor.
c Tap the Apply button.
The instrument automatically sets the RP3 Address and RP3 Type with the selected
values.
NOTE
You can also manually specify the RP3 Address and RP3 Type for the received message
using the Rx RP3 Type and Rx RP3 Address soft keys.
d If you have selected a WCDMA/FDD message, toggle the WCDMA Link soft key and
select the link direction between FWD for forward (downlink) and REV for reverse
(uplink).
– To specify Rx RP3 Type and RP3 Address of the received message for link rate 6144 Mbps,
complete the following steps:
a Select More (1/2) > Rx Address Valid List.
The Rx Address List box appears. Unlike the Rx Address List, the Rx Address Valid
List feature shows only the messages that contain scrambling code seed values.
b From the list, select the message to monitor.
c Tap the Apply button.
The instrument automatically sets the RP3 Address, RP3 Type, and Scrambler Seed
with the selected values.
NOTE
You can also manually specify the RP3 Address, RP3 Type, and Scrambler Seed for the
received message using the Rx RP3 Type, Rx RP3 Address, and Scrambler Seed soft
keys.
d If you have selected a WCDMA/FDD message, toggle the WCDMA Link soft key and
select the link direction between FWD for forward (downlink) and REV for reverse
(uplink).
– To set the port type and transmission clock reference, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Port Type soft key and select Slave (default).
b Press the Tx Clock soft key, and then select Recovered (default).
6 Press the Bandwidth soft key, and then specify the bandwidth depending on the RP3 type of the
received signal.
– WCDMA/FDD REV (uplink): 5 MHz
– WCDMA/FDD FWD (downlink): 3 MHz
– LTE: 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz
The RBW range changes based on this bandwidth setting.
7 Optional. To use the RF signal generator function, see “Using RF source in RFoOBSAI testing”
on page 627.

600 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

Calculating possible PIM

The Calculated PIM is used when you want to check any possible existence of PIM before the actual
measurement. The instrument displays possible PIM in red color.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Calculated PIM soft key.
3 Toggle the Radio Config soft key between Single and Multi and select the mode you want to
use.
– Single: Sets the frequency of Radio 1.
– Multi: Sets the frequency of Radio 1 and Radio 2.
4 Do one of the following:
– To set the frequency and span, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Mode soft key between Freq and Band and select Freq.
b Press the Radio [1]2] Frequency soft key.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
d Select the unit option from the choices: GHz, MHz, kHz, and Hz.
e Press the Radio [1|2] Span soft key.
f Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
g Select the unit option from the choices: GHz, MHz, kHz, and Hz.
– To set the radio band, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Mode soft key between Freq and Band and select Band.
b Press the Radio [1]2] Band soft key.
c Highlight the radio band to select by using the rotary knob.
d Press the Select soft key.

Detecting PIM (single and multiple carriers)

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Connect cables as instructed on the screen.

NOTE
Make sure that the Tx of RRH is connected to the Rx port of SFP/SFP+ installed in your
CellAdvisor.

3 Do one of the following:

– To set the uplink center frequency and span to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Unit soft key between Freq and Channel and select Freq.
b Press the Uplink Center Frequency soft key.
c Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
d Select the unit from the choices: GHz, MHz, kHz, and Hz.
– To set the channel number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Unit soft key between Freq and Channel and select Channel.
b Press the Channel Std soft key, and then highlight a desired band.
c Press the Select soft key.
d Press the Channel Number soft key.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys, and then press the Enter soft key.
The instrument automatically displays the corresponding center frequency value for the
selected channel number.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 601

Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

4 Press the Continue soft key, and then follow the instructions on the screen.
5 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of OBSAI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.

Measurement example
Figure 340 PIM detection of single radio

Performing LTE-FDD downlink signal analysis

If your JD700B series has the option 096 RFoOBSAI LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer installed with a license, you
can performs power and spectrum measurements as well as modulation analysis to test the proper
transmitter performance of FDD LTE systems over OBSAI.

This instrument provides the following measurement tools for FDD LTE system over OBSAI:

n Spectrum Analysis
n RF Analysis
- Channel Power
- Occupied Bandwidth
n Power vs. Time (Frame)
n Modulation Analysis
- Constellation
- Data Channel
- Control Channel
- Subframe
- Frame
- Time Alignment Error
- Data Allocation Map
n Power Statistics CCDF

602 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

Connecting cables
You can connect cables with a tap or without a tap as illustrated in Figure 341. If you have connected cables
directly from RRH and BBU without using the nTap, you must turn on the through mode (Thru) in the
Measure Setup menu.

A SFP/SFP+ transceiver that is connected to your JD700B series must be compatible with your DUT and
you must have your module information such as line rate, wavelength, and mode (MM or SM) handy.

Figure 341 Connection diagram for downlink signal analysis

With nTap (both Thru On/Off): Without nTap (Thru On only):

Selecting measurement mode

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-FDD.
3 Select the downlink signal analysis mode from the following choices:
– Spectrum
– RF Analysis > Channel Power or Occupied BW
– Power vs Time (Frame)
– Modulation Analysis > Constellation, Data Channel, Control Channel, Subframe,
Frame, Time Alignement Error, or Data Allocation Map
– Power Statistics CCDF

Configuring test parameters

Setting frequency
You can set the frequency with either frequency or channel number. If a frequency to be set matches to the
frequency corresponding to the selected channel standard, the instrument calculates its channel number
and updates the screen with it automatically.

Procedure

To set the center frequency:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 603

Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.

3 Press the Center Frequency soft key.
4 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
5 Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
6 Optional. To define the amount of frequency increment for the rotary knob, complete the following
steps:
a Press the Frequency Step soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.

To set the channel number:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Channel.
NOTE
Selecting Channel sets the standard channel to Band Global automatically so that you
can set the Channel Number without choosing a standard channel band from the list.
3 Press the Channel Number soft key.
4 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
5 Press the Enter soft key.
The instrument automatically displays the corresponding center frequency value for the selected
channel number.
6 Optional. To define the amount of channel increment for the rotary knob, complete the following
steps:
a Press the Channel Step soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.

Setting amplitude
You can set the reference automatically or manually to optimize the display of the trace, as you desire.

Procedure

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Do the following:
– To optimize the Y-axis scale automatically, press the Auto Scale soft key.
– To set the maximum reference value on the Y-axis manually, complete the following steps:
a Press the Reference Level soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys or the rotary knob with 10 dB increments.
c Press the unit soft key or the ENTER hard key.
NOTE
In the measurements such as Control Channel, Subframe, and Frame, you can select
the reference option between Relative and Absolute instead.
3 To set an external offset, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.
NOTE
The instrument displays a measurement result with the set value reflected. For example,
if you set it to 40 dB, the measurement result compensates 40 dB.
4 To change the setting of the scale per division, complete the following steps:
a Select More (1/2) > Scale/Div.
b Enter a value between 1 and 20 by using the numeric keys.

604 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

c Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.

5 To change the scale unit, select More (1/2) > Units, and then select the display unit option from
the choices: dBm, dBV, dBmV, dBµV, V, and W.
The scale unit on the screen changes accordingly.
NOTE
The Scale/Div and Units menus are available in the Spectrum and RF Analysis modes.

Setting average
In the spectrum and RF analysis, you can set the number of measurements to be averaged for the trace
presentation. A maximum of 100 times of averaging can be set. When the averaging reaches to your setting,
a new measurement value replaces the measurement value in sequence from the earliest.

Procedure

1 Press the BW/AVG hard key.

2 Press the Average soft key.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 100 as needed by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the Enter soft key.

Setting sweep mode

The default setting is Continue to sweep continuously for most on-going measurements. If you want to hold
the measurement or get a single sweep, you can change the sweep mode.

Procedure

1 Press the SWEEP hot key.

2 Do the following:
– To select the single sweep mode, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Single. You can also use the HOLD hot
key.
The letter HOLD in red appears and the sweeping is paused.
b To get a new measurement Press the Sweep Once soft key.
– To return to the continuous sweep mode, toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select
Continue. You can also use the HOLD hot key.
The letter HOLD in red disappears and the sweeping resumes.

Setting measure setup

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key

2 Press the Link Rate soft key to set the line rate of the OBSAI RP3 interface between the BB and
the RRU.
3 Select the RP3 line rate option from the choices: 768 Mbps, 1536 Mbps, 3072 Mbps, and
6144 Mbps.

NOTE
It is important that you set the link rate correctly to avoid any misleading LOS and LOF
alarms displayed on the screen.

If you select 6144 Mbps, the Scrambler Seed soft key becomes active in the OBSAI

JD700B Series User’s Guide 605

Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

Parameters menu so that you can specify a scrambler seed.

4 To turn on the through mode if you have not used a tap, toggle the Thru soft key and select On.
To turn it off, select Off.
5 Press the OBSAI Parameters soft key, and then do the following:
– To specify Rx RP3 Type and RP3 Address of the received message for link rates
768 Mbps, 1536 Mbps, and 3072 Mbps, complete the following steps:
a Select More (1/2) > Rx Address List.
The Rx Address List box appears. JD700B series lists all Rx messages detected by the
instrument with RP3 Address and RP3 Type values.
b From the list, select the message to monitor.
c Tap the Apply button.
The instrument automatically sets the RP3 Address and RP3 Type with the selected
values.
NOTE
You can also manually specify the RP3 Address and RP3 Type for the received message
using the Rx RP3 Type and Rx RP3 Address soft keys.
d If you have selected a WCDMA/FDD message, toggle the WCDMA Link soft key and
select the link direction between FWD for forward (downlink) and REV for reverse
(uplink).
– To specify Rx RP3 Type and RP3 Address of the received message for link rate 6144 Mbps,
complete the following steps:
a Select More (1/2) > Rx Address Valid List.
The Rx Address List box appears. Unlike the Rx Address List, the Rx Address Valid
List feature shows only the messages that contain scrambling code seed values.
b From the list, select the message to monitor.
c Tap the Apply button.
The instrument automatically sets the RP3 Address, RP3 Type, and Scrambler Seed
with the selected values.
NOTE
You can also manually specify the RP3 Address, RP3 Type, and Scrambler Seed for the
received message using the Rx RP3 Type, Rx RP3 Address, and Scrambler Seed soft
keys.
d If you have selected a WCDMA/FDD message, toggle the WCDMA Link soft key and
select the link direction between FWD for forward (downlink) and REV for reverse
(uplink).
– To set the port type and transmission clock reference, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Port Type soft key and select Slave (default).
b Press the Tx Clock soft key, and then select Recovered (default).
6 To set the bandwidth of the downlink signal, complete the following steps:
a Press the Bandwidth soft key.
b Select the bandwidth option from the choices: 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz.
The RBW range changes based on this bandwidth setting.
7 Optional. To use the RF signal generator function, see “Using RF source in RFoOBSAI testing”
on page 627.

Conducting spectrum measurement

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-FDD > Spectrum.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 603.

606 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and set the measurement setups as described in the
“Setting measure setup” on page 605.
5 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
6 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of OBSAI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
7 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting trace
You can display up to six traces on the measurement chart simultaneously.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Select Trace soft key, and then select the trace number: T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, or T6.
The legend shape of the selected trace changes from square to round to indicate that the trace is
the active one now.
3 Do one of the following:
To Select Trace Legend

Clear current data and display with new Clear Write W

measurements

Display the input signal’s maximum response only Max Hold M

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

Display the input signal’s minimum response only Min Hold m

(unlimited or for a certain amount of time)

Capture the selected trace and compare traces Capture C

Load a saved trace More (1/2) > Load L

Hide the displayed trace Trace View > Off F

Remove all the traces and initialize the trace More (1/2) > Trace
settings Clear All

NOTE
For the Max Hold and Min Hold, your instrument compares newly acquired data with the
active trace and displays larger maximum values or smaller minimum values on the
screen. You can set it to Unlimited to hold and view maximum or minimum data or
specify a certain amount of time up to 60 seconds by using numeric keys or rotary knob.
4 Optional. Select More (1/2) > Trace Info, and then select the trace number to view the trace’s
parameter setting information stored at the time of the measurement or None to hide the
information display.
5 Optional. If you have the two traces T1 and T2, you can perform trace math. To view the power
difference between the traces, press the T1 – T2 -> T5 or T2 – T1 -> T6 soft key.
The result is overlaid on the screen along with the second Y-axis.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 607

Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

Measurement example
Figure 342 Spectrum measurement with RFoOBSAI LTE-FDD signal analyzer

Conducting channel power measurement

The Channel Power measurement is a common test used in the wireless industry to measure the total
transmitted power of a radio within a defined frequency channel. It acquires a number of points representing
the input signal in the time domain, transforms this information into the frequency domain using Fast Fourier
Transform (FFT), and then calculates the channel power. The effective resolution bandwidth of the frequency
domain trace is proportional to the number of points acquired for the FFT.

The channel power measurement identifies the total RF power and power spectral density (PSD) of the
signal in the LTE channel bandwidth.

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-FDD > RF Analysis > Channel Power.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 603.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and set the measurement setups as described in the
“Setting measure setup” on page 605.
5 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
6 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of OBSAI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
7 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

608 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

Measurement example
Figure 343 Channel power measurement with RFoOBSAI LTE-FDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RFoOBSAI signal analysis” on page
626 for more information.

Occupied bandwidth
The Occupied Bandwidth measures the spectrum shape of the carrier. It is defined as the bandwidth, which
includes 99% of the transmitted power among total transmitted power.

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-FDD > RF Analysis > Occupied BW.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 603.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and set the measurement setups as described in the
“Setting measure setup” on page 605.
5 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
6 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of OBSAI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
7 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 609

Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

Measurement example
Figure 344 Occupied bandwidth measurement with RFoOBSAI LTE-FDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RFoOBSAI signal analysis” on page
626 for more information.

Conducting power vs. time (frame) measurement

The Power vs. Time (Frame) measures the modulation envelope in the time domain, showing the power of
each time slot in an LTE signal.

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-FDD > P vs T (Frame).
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 603.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and set the measurement setups as described in the
“Setting measure setup” on page 605.
5 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization.
7 Depending on your selected NEM, you may need to turn on or off the inversion of the I and Q
order by toggling the IQ Invert soft key and selecting On or Off.
8 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then do the following as needed:
– To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft

610 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

key and select the option: Auto, 0, and 1.

– To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or
Extended. See “Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details
by different bandwidth.
9 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
10 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of OBSAI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
11 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 345 Power vs. time (frame) measurement with RFoOBSAI LTE-FDD signal analyzer

Conducting constellation measurement

The Constellation is used to observe some aspects of modulation accuracy and can reveal certain fault
mechanisms such as I/Q amplitude imbalance or quadrature imbalance. It displays constellation diagram by
modulation types.

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-FDD > Modulation Analysis > Constellation.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 603.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and set the measurement setups as described in the
“Setting measure setup” on page 605.
5 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
NOTE
For MBMS testing, this subframe number must be neither 0 nor 5 as these subframes 0
and 5 are not available for MBMS and it must be set to the MBMS transmitted channel’s

JD700B Series User’s Guide 611

Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

subframe number.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization.
7 Depending on your selected NEM, you may need to turn on or off the inversion of the I and Q
order by toggling the IQ Invert soft key and selecting On or Off.
8 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then set other miscellaneous setups as
described in the following section.
9 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
10 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of OBSAI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
11 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting other miscellaneous setups

Procedure

1 To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft key
and select the option: Auto, 0, and 1.
2 To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or Extended. See
“Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details by different
bandwidth.
3 To turn on or off the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature, toggle the MBMS
soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the Subframe No with
the same PMCH subframe number. If this setting is on, either PMCH or PDSCH appears on the
screen depending on the detected channel.
4 To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically or
manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
5 To select the PDSCH modulation type, press the PDSCH Modulation Type soft key and then
select the option from the choices: Auto, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, E-TM3.3, E-TM3.2,
E-TM3.1, E-TM2, E-TM1.2, and E-TM1.1.
NOTE
If two or more modulation types are used in a frame, select Auto. If the PDSCH uses the
same modulation type in a frame or in a subframe, select a specific modulation type to
get more accurate EVM.
6 To set the threshold for PDSCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDSCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
7 To enable or disable the PDSCH precoding, toggle the PDSCH Precoding soft key and select
On or Off.
8 To set the Control Format Indicator, toggle the CFI soft key and select Auto or Manual:
– Auto: Lets the instrument set the number of OFDM symbols used for transmitting PDCCHs
in a subframe.
– Manual: Sets the number of OFDM symbols manually.
9 To select the number of PHICH groups (Ng), press the PHICH Ng soft key and then select the
option from the choices: 1/6, 1/2, 1, 2, E-1/6, E-1/2, E-1, or E-2.

612 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

Measurement example
Figure 346 Constellation measurement with RFoOBSAI LTE-FDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RFoOBSAI signal analysis” on page
626 for more information.

Conducting data channel measurement

The Data Channel measures the constellation for the specified resource block as well as the modulation
accuracy of each PDSCH at the specified subframe.

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-FDD > Modulation Analysis > Data Channel.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 603.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and set the measurement setups as described in the
“Setting measure setup” on page 605.
5 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
NOTE
For MBMS testing, this subframe number must be neither 0 nor 5 as these subframes 0
and 5 are not available for MBMS and it must be set to the MBMS transmitted channel’s
subframe number.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization.
7 To enable or disable the event hold feature, toggle the Event Hold soft key and then select On or

JD700B Series User’s Guide 613

Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

Off.
When enabled, the display line for the PDSCH threshold appears.
When an event occurs, the measurement is put on hold until you press the HOLD hot key.
8 Depending on your selected NEM, you may need to turn on or off the inversion of the I and Q
order by toggling the IQ Invert soft key and selecting On or Off.
9 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then set other miscellaneous setups as
described in the following section.
10 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
11 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of OBSAI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
12 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting other miscellaneous setups

Procedure

1 To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft key
and select the option: Auto, 0, and 1.
2 To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or Extended. See
“Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details by different
bandwidth.
3 To turn on or off the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature, toggle the MBMS
soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the Subframe No with
the same PMCH subframe number. If this setting is on, either PMCH or PDSCH appears on the
screen depending on the detected channel.
4 To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically or
manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
5 To select the PDSCH modulation type, press the PDSCH Modulation Type soft key and then
select the option from the choices: Auto, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, E-TM3.3, E-TM3.2,
E-TM3.1, E-TM2, E-TM1.2, and E-TM1.1.
NOTE
If two or more modulation types are used in a frame, select Auto. If the PDSCH uses the
same modulation type in a frame or in a subframe, select a specific modulation type to
get more accurate EVM.
6 To set the threshold for PDSCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDSCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
7 To enable or disable the PDSCH precoding, toggle the PDSCH Precoding soft key and select
On or Off.
8 To set the Control Format Indicator, toggle the CFI soft key and select Auto or Manual:
– Auto: Lets the instrument set the number of OFDM symbols used for transmitting PDCCHs
in a subframe.
– Manual: Sets the number of OFDM symbols manually.
9 To select the number of PHICH groups (Ng), press the PHICH Ng soft key and then select the
option from the choices: 1/6, 1/2, 1, 2, E-1/6, E-1/2, E-1, or E-2.

Using marker
You can use the MARKER hard key to place a marker on a resource block and display the IQ diagram for
the selected resource block.

614 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

Procedure

1 Press the MARKER hard key.

2 Press the RB Number soft key to select the resource block to be marked.
3 Enter the resource block number by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the Enter soft key.
The marker appears on the selected resource block.
5 Toggle the Marker View soft key between On and Off to display or hide the result of the selected
resource block.

Measurement example
Figure 347 Data channel measurement with RFoOBSAI LTE-FDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RFoOBSAI signal analysis” on page
626 for more information.

Conducting control channel measurement

The Control Channel measures the constellation for the specified control channel as well as modulation
accuracy of the control channel at the specified subframe.

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-FDD > Modulation Analysis > Control Channel.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 603.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and set the measurement setups as described in the
“Setting measure setup” on page 605.
5 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 615

Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
NOTE
For MBMS testing, this subframe number must be neither 0 nor 5 as these subframes 0
and 5 are not available for MBMS and it must be set to the MBMS transmitted channel’s
subframe number.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization.
7 Toggle the EVM Detection Mode soft key and select Single or Combine as desired:
– Single: Testing on one single antenna connected to your JD700B series with a cable.
– Combine: Testing on multiple antennas connected to your JD700B series with a 2x1
combiner or an antenna.
8 Depending on your selected NEM, you may need to turn on or off the inversion of the I and Q
order by toggling the IQ Invert soft key and selecting On or Off.
9 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then set other miscellaneous setups as
described in the following section.
10 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
11 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of OBSAI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
12 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting other miscellaneous setups

Procedure

1 To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft key
and select the option: Auto, 0, and 1.
2 To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or Extended. See
“Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details by different
bandwidth.
3 To turn on or off the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature, toggle the MBMS
soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the Subframe No with
the same PMCH subframe number. If this setting is on, either PMCH or PDSCH appears on the
screen depending on the detected channel.
4 To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically or
manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
5 To set the threshold for PDCCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDCCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 Toggle the PDCCH Mode soft key and select REG or Avg.
– REG: Calculates EVM based on Resource Element Group
– Avg: Calculates EVM after adding all the PDCCH signals from one subframe.
7 To set the Control Format Indicator, toggle the CFI soft key and select Auto or Manual:
– Auto: Lets the instrument set the number of OFDM symbols used for transmitting PDCCHs
in a subframe.
– Manual: Sets the number of OFDM symbols manually.
8 To select the number of PHICH groups (Ng), press the PHICH Ng soft key and then select the
option from the choices: 1/6, 1/2, 1, 2, E-1/6, E-1/2, E-1, or E-2.

616 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

Using marker
You can use the MARKER hard key to place a marker on a control channel and display the IQ diagram for
the selected channel.

Procedure

1 Press the MARKER hard key.

2 Press the Channel soft key to select a channel to be displayed in the IQ diagram.
The channel P-SS is selected by default.
3 Press the up/down arrow keys or turn the rotary knob to highlight a channel in the channel
summary table, and then press the center of the rotary knob.
4 Toggle the Marker View soft key between On and Off to display or hide the result of the selected
channel.

Measurement example
Figure 348 Control channel measurement with RFoOBSAI LTE-FDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RFoOBSAI signal analysis” on page
626 for more information.

Conducting subframe measurement

The Subframe measures the modulation accuracy of all the data and control channels at the specified
subframe (1 ms).

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 617

Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-FDD > Modulation Analysis > Subframe.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 603.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and set the measurement setups as described in the
“Setting measure setup” on page 605.
5 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
NOTE
For MBMS testing, this subframe number must be neither 0 nor 5 as these subframes 0
and 5 are not available for MBMS and it must be set to the MBMS transmitted channel’s
subframe number.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization.
7 Toggle the EVM Detection Mode soft key and select Single or Combine as desired:
– Single: Testing on one single antenna connected to your JD700B series with a cable.
– Combine: Testing on multiple antennas connected to your JD700B series with a 2x1
combiner or an antenna.
8 Depending on your selected NEM, you may need to turn on or off the inversion of the I and Q
order by toggling the IQ Invert soft key and selecting On or Off.
9 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then set other miscellaneous setups as
described in the following section.
10 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
11 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of OBSAI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
12 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting other miscellaneous setups

Procedure

1 To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft key
and select the option: Auto, 0, and 1.
2 To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or Extended. See
“Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details by different
bandwidth.
3 To turn on or off the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature, toggle the MBMS
soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the Subframe No with
the same PMCH subframe number. If this setting is on, either PMCH or PDSCH appears on the
screen depending on the detected channel.
4 To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically or
manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
5 To select the PDSCH modulation type, press the PDSCH Modulation Type soft key and then
select the option from the choices: Auto, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, E-TM3.3, E-TM3.2,
E-TM3.1, E-TM2, E-TM1.2, and E-TM1.1.
NOTE
If two or more modulation types are used in a frame, select Auto. If the PDSCH uses the
same modulation type in a frame or in a subframe, select a specific modulation type to
get more accurate EVM.
6 To set the threshold for PDSCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDSCH Threshold soft key.

618 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.

c Press the Enter soft key.
7 To set the threshold for PDCCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDCCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
8 Toggle the PDCCH Mode soft key and select REG or Avg.
– REG: Calculates EVM based on Resource Element Group
– Avg: Calculates EVM after adding all the PDCCH signals from one subframe.
9 To enable or disable the PDSCH precoding, toggle the PDSCH Precoding soft key and select
On or Off.
10 To set the Control Format Indicator, toggle the CFI soft key and select Auto or Manual:
– Auto: Lets the instrument set the number of OFDM symbols used for transmitting PDCCHs
in a subframe.
– Manual: Sets the number of OFDM symbols manually.
11 To select the number of PHICH groups (Ng), press the PHICH Ng soft key and then select the
option from the choices: 1/6, 1/2, 1, 2, E-1/6, E-1/2, E-1, or E-2.

Setting display
You can use the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key to view the RE and RS power at a specific symbol.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Toggle the Chart soft key between On and Off to display or hide the chart.
If this setting is on, the MARKER hard key is activated.

Using marker
If you turn the Chart view on, you can use the MARKER hard key to place the marker at a specific symbol.

Procedure

1 Press the MARKER hard key.

2 Toggle the Marker View soft key between On and Off to display or hide the marker on the chart.
3 Press the Symbol soft key to select the symbol number, to which the marker is placed.
4 Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
5 Press the Enter soft key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 619

Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

Measurement example
Figure 349 Subframe measurement with RFoOBSAI LTE-FDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RFoOBSAI signal analysis” on page
626 for more information.

Conducting frame measurement

The Frame measures the modulation accuracy of all the data and control channels at the frame
(10 ms).

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-FDD > Modulation Analysis > Frame.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 603.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and set the measurement setups as described in the
“Setting measure setup” on page 605.
5 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization.
6 Toggle the EVM Detection Mode soft key and select Single or Combine as desired:
– Single: Testing on one single antenna connected to your JD700B series with a cable.
– Combine: Testing on multiple antennas connected to your JD700B series with a 2x1
combiner or an antenna.
7 Depending on your selected NEM, you may need to turn on or off the inversion of the I and Q
order by toggling the IQ Invert soft key and selecting On or Off.
8 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then set other miscellaneous setups as
described in the following section.
9 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.

620 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

10 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of OBSAI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
11 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting other miscellaneous setups

Procedure

1 To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft key
and select the option: Auto, 0, and 1.
2 To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or Extended. See
“Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details by different
bandwidth.
3 To turn on or off the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature, toggle the MBMS
soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the Subframe No with
the same PMCH subframe number. If this setting is on, either PMCH or PDSCH appears on the
screen depending on the detected channel.
4 To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically or
manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.
5 To select the PDSCH modulation type, press the PDSCH Modulation Type soft key and then
select the option from the choices: Auto, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, E-TM3.3, E-TM3.2,
E-TM3.1, E-TM2, E-TM1.2, and E-TM1.1.
NOTE
If two or more modulation types are used in a frame, select Auto. If the PDSCH uses the
same modulation type in a frame or in a subframe, select a specific modulation type to
get more accurate EVM.
6 To set the threshold for PDSCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDSCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
7 To set the threshold for PDCCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDCCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
8 Toggle the PDCCH Mode soft key and select REG or Avg.
– REG: Calculates EVM based on Resource Element Group
– Avg: Calculates EVM after adding all the PDCCH signals from one subframe.
9 To enable or disable the PDSCH precoding, toggle the PDSCH Precoding soft key and select
On or Off.
10 To set the Control Format Indicator, toggle the CFI soft key and select Auto or Manual:
– Auto: Lets the instrument set the number of OFDM symbols used for transmitting PDCCHs
in a subframe.
– Manual: Sets the number of OFDM symbols manually.
11 To select the number of PHICH groups (Ng), press the PHICH Ng soft key and then select the
option from the choices: 1/6, 1/2, 1, 2, E-1/6, E-1/2, E-1, or E-2.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 621

Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

Measurement example
Figure 350 Frame measurement with RFoOBSAI LTE-FDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RFoOBSAI signal analysis” on page
626 for more information.

Conducting time alignment error measurement

In eNode-B supporting Tx Diversity transmission, signals are transmitted from two or more antennas. These
signals shall be aligned. The time alignment error in Tx diversity is specified as the delay between the
signals from two antennas at the antenna ports.

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-FDD > Modulation Analysis > Time Alignment Error.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 603.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and set the measurement setups as described in the
“Setting measure setup” on page 605.
5 Toggle the Antenna Config soft key and select Ant0 or Ant1 as needed.
6 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization.
7 Depending on your selected NEM, you may need to turn on or off the inversion of the I and Q
order by toggling the IQ Invert soft key and selecting On or Off.
8 Optional. To select the cyclic prefix, complete the following steps:
d Press the Miscellaneous soft key.
e Toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or Extended. See “Appendix E –
Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details by different bandwidth.
9 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.

622 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

10 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of OBSAI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
11 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 351 Time alignment error measurement with RFoOBSAI LTE-FDD signal analyzer

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the user-definable
limit and Pass/Fail indication. See “Setting limit for RFoOBSAI signal analysis” on page
626 for more information.

Conducting data allocation map measurement

The Data Allocation Map function represents data allocation as a frame.

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-FDD > Modulation Analysis > Data Allocation Map.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 603.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and set the measurement setups as described in the
“Setting measure setup” on page 605.
5 To select the subframe number to be measured, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
NOTE
For MBMS testing, this subframe number must be neither 0 nor 5 as these subframes 0
and 5 are not available for MBMS and it must be set to the MBMS transmitted channel’s
subframe number.
c Press the Enter soft key.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 623

Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

6 Toggle the Cell ID soft key and select Auto or Manual as desired:
– Auto: Lets the instrument detect the Cell ID for the LTE signal automatically.
– Manual: Sets a specific Cell ID for the LTE signal manually in order to speed up the
synchronization.
7 To set the threshold for PDSCH, complete the following steps:
a Press the PDSCH Threshold soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
8 Depending on your selected NEM, you may need to turn on or off the inversion of the I and Q
order by toggling the IQ Invert soft key and selecting On or Off.
9 Optional. Press the Miscellaneous soft key, and then set other miscellaneous setups as
described in the following section.
10 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
11 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of OBSAI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
12 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Setting other miscellaneous setups

Procedure

1 To assign a antenna port number automatically or manually, press the Antenna Port soft key
and select the option: Auto, 0, and 1.
2 To select the cyclic prefix, toggle the Cyclic Prefix soft key and select Normal or Extended. See
“Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table” on page 668 for OFDM parameter details by different
bandwidth.
3 To turn on or off the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) feature, toggle the MBMS
soft key and select On or Off. For proper MBMS testing, you need to set the Subframe No with
the same PMCH subframe number. If this setting is on, either PMCH or PDSCH appears on the
screen depending on the detected channel.
4 To set the Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) detection automatically or
manually for MBMS testing, toggle the MBSFN soft key and select Auto or Manual. An
automatically detected or manually entered MBSFN ID appears on the screen.

Setting display
You can use the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key to change the display mode to PDSCH, PMCH, or both.

Procedure

1 Press the TRACE/DISPLAY hard key.

2 Press the Display Channel soft key.
3 Select the display mode from the choice: PDSCH, PMCH, and Both.

Using marker
You can use the MARKER hard key to place the marker at a specific resource block and subframe.

Procedure

1 Press the MARKER hard key.

624 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

2 Toggle the Marker View soft key between On and Off to display or hide the marker on the chart.
3 To select the resource block number, complete the following steps:
a Press the RB Number soft key.
b Enter the resource block number to select by using the numeric keys. You can also use the
rotary knob to move the marker side by side.
c Press the Enter soft key.
4 To select the subframe block number, complete the following steps:
a Press the Subframe No soft key.
b Enter the subframe number to select by using the numeric keys. You can also use the
rotary knob to move the marker up and down.
c Press the Enter soft key.

Measurement example
Figure 352 Data allocation map measurement with RFoOBSAI LTE-FDD signal analyzer

Performing power statistics CCDF measurement

The Power Statistics Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function (CCDF) measurement characterizes
the power statistics of the input signal. It provides PAR (Peak to Average power Ratio) versus different
probabilities.

Making a measurement

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key to select the measurement mode.

2 Select Signal Analyzer > LTE-FDD > Power Statistics CCDF.
3 Configure test parameters as described in the “Configuring test parameters” on page 603.
4 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and set the measurement setups as described in the
“Setting measure setup” on page 605.
5 To set the length of the CCDF, complete the following steps:
a Press the CCDF Length soft key.
b Enter a value between 1 and 100 by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary
knob.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 625

Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

c Press the Enter soft key.

6 Check your measurement result displayed on the screen.
7 To clear current (C) and history (H) status of OBSAI alarm on LOS and LOF and start a new
monitoring, press the MEASURE SETUP hot key and then the Clear History soft key.
8 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 353 CCDF measurement with RFoOBSAI LTE-FDD signal analyzer

Setting limit for RFoOBSAI signal analysis

By default, test limits specified in the standard are set for you. You can change thresholds if you desire.

Procedure

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.

2 To set a limit for RF analysis tests, press the RF Test Limits soft key and then set limits as
needed, depending on where you are in the measurement mode.
To set the limit for Select Set

Channel power Channel Power High Limit, Low Limit

Occupied bandwidth Occupied BW High Limit

3 To set a limit for modulation tests, press the Modulation Test Limits soft key and then set limits
as needed, depending on where you are in the measurement mode.

To set the limit for Select Set

Frequency error Frequency Error High Limit, Low Limit

PDSCH error vector EVM > PDSCH EVM High Limit (QPSK)
magnitude if MBMS is off High Limit (16 QAM)
High Limit (64 QAM)

PMCH error vector magnitude EVM > PMCH EVM High Limit (QPSK)
if MBMS is on and a PMCH is High Limit (16 QAM)

626 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

detected High Limit (64 QAM)

RMS for data error vector EVM > Data EVM RMS High Limit
magnitude

Peak for data error vector EVM> Data EVM Peak High Limit
magnitude

RS error vector magnitude EVM > RS EVM High Limit

P-SS error vector magnitude EVM > P-SS EVM High Limit

S-SS error vector magnitude EVM > S-SS EVM High Limit

Downlink RS power Power > DL RS Power High Limit, Low Limit

P-SS power Power > P-SS Power High Limit, Low Limit

S-SS power Power > S-SS Power High Limit, Low Limit

PBCH power Power > PBCH Power High Limit, Low Limit

Subframe power Power > Subframe Power High Limit, Low Limit

OFDM symbol power Power > OFDM Symbol Power High Limit, Low Limit

Frame average power Power > Frame Avg Power High Limit, Low Limit

Time alignment error for MIMO Time Alignment Error > MIMO High Limit

Time error Time Error High Limit, Low Limit

I-Q origin offset IQ Origin Offset High Limit

4 Optional. You can enable alarm sound that goes off if the measurement falls outside of the limit.
Toggle the Beep soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the beep sound.
5 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select Limit to save the limit settings.
See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Using signal generator

If your JD700B series has the signal generator options installed with a license, you can use this RF Source.

Using RF source in RFoOBSAI testing

You can use the RF Source feature to calibrate the uplink noise floor at a given point, check the uplink gain
and dynamic range, and verify the current RP3 link.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Source soft key. Depending on your selection of measurement mode, you may need
to select More (1/2) > Source.
3 Press the RF Source soft key.
4 To set the frequency of the CW signal to be injected, complete the following steps:
a Press the Frequency soft key.
b Enter a value within the frequency range of your instrument.
– JD740B series: 25 MHz to 4 GHz
– JD780B series: 5 MHz to 6 GHz

JD700B Series User’s Guide 627

Chapter 16 Performing RFoOBSAI Testing

NOTE
The frequency of the CW signal must be in the uplink band of the RRH under test.

c Select the unit option from the choices: GHz, MHz, kHz, and Hz.
5 To set the output level of the CW signal to be injected, complete following steps:
a Press the Power Level soft key.
b Enter a value within the output range for the frequency you have set in step 4.
– JD740B series: -80 dBm to -30 dBm, 0 dBm
– JD780B series: -60 dBm to 10 dBm
c Press the unit soft key.
6 To start to inject the set signal, toggle the RF Source soft key and select On.
7 To stop injecting the signal, toggle the RF Source soft key and select Off.

628 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 17

Chapter 17 Using Channel Scanner

This chapter provides instructions for using the Channel Scanner function (option 012). Topics discussed in
this chapter are as follows:

n Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 630

n Display overview ..................................................................................................................... 630
n Connecting a cable.................................................................................................................. 630
n Selecting measurement mode ................................................................................................ 632
n Configuring test parameters .................................................................................................... 632
n Making channel scanner measurements ................................................................................ 635
n Making frequency scanner measurements ............................................................................. 636
n Making custom scanner measurements ................................................................................. 637
n Analyzing measurements ........................................................................................................ 639
Chapter 17 Using Channel Scanner

Introduction
A Channel Scanner is a radio receiver that can automatically tune or scan two or more discrete frequencies
and multi-channels, indicating when it finds a signal on one of them and then continuing scanning when that
frequency goes silent.

You can measure up to 20 channels with this channel scanner. Using existing format-based or custom
parameters, you will be able to easily verify improper multi-channel power levels.

n Channel Scanner
n Frequency Scanner
n Custom Scanner (Channel or Frequency)

Display overview
Figure 354 provides descriptions for each segment of the measurement screen.

Figure 354 Channel scanner screen

Connecting a cable
Direct connection
Procedure

1 Connect the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B series and the Power amplifier output

630 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 17 Using Channel Scanner

port of BTS.

Figure 355 Direct connection

JD785B/JD786B/JD745B/JD746B JD788B/JD748B

Indirect connection
Procedure

1 Connect the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B series and the monitor (test) port of
BTS.

Figure 356 Indirect connection

JD785B/JD786B/JD745B/JD746B JD788B/JD748B

CAUTION
The maximum power for the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port is +25 dBm (0.316 W) for
JD780B series and +20 dBm (0.1 W) for JD740B series. If the level of the input signal to
be measured is greater than this, use a High Power Attenuator to prevent damage
when you directly connect the signal to the instrument or connect the signal from the
coupling port of a directional coupler.

Over the air (OTA)

Procedure

1 Connect an Omni/directional RF antenna to the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B

series.
2 Connect a GPS antenna to the GPS port of the JD700B series.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 631

Chapter 17 Using Channel Scanner

Figure 357 OTA connection

JD785B/JD786B/JD745B/JD746B JD788B/JD748B

CAUTION
If the input signal level to be measured is less than 0 dBm, set 0 dB attenuation or turn on
the preamp to have better dynamic range for the OTA testing.

Selecting measurement mode

Procedure

1 Press the MODE hard key.

2 Press the Channel Scanner soft key. The Channel Scanner mode is selected by default.
3 To change the measurement mode, press the MEASURE hot key and then select the
measurement mode:
– Channel Scanner
– Frequency Scanner
– Custom Scanner

Configuring test parameters

Setting frequency
You need to set the channel or frequency to be scanned depending on the scanner mode: channel scanner,
frequency scanner, and custom scanner. Refer to each scanner mode for how to set the channel or
frequency.

Setting amplitude
Reference level and attenuation
You can set the reference and attenuation levels automatically or manually to optimize the display of the
traces measured, as you desire.

632 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 17 Using Channel Scanner

Procedure

To automatically set the reference and attenuation level:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Press the Auto Scale soft key.
Each time you press this key, both of the Y-axis scale and input attenuation level change to be
optimized with some margin.

To set the reference or attenuation level manually:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 To set the maximum reference value on the Y-axis manually, complete the following steps:
a Press the Reference Level soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys or the rotary knob with 10 dB increments.
c Press the unit soft key or the ENTER hard key.
This unit key name changes according to the setting in the Units menu.
3 To set the attenuation option, select one from the following choices:
– To set the input attenuator’s level automatically, select Attenuation > Auto.
NOTE
It is recommended that you set the Attenuation to Auto in most situations so that the
level of the input attenuator can be set automatically according to your input signal level.

– To set the input attenuation manually up to 55 dB for JD780B series or 50 dB for JD740B
series to optimize S/N, complete the following steps:
a Select Attenuation > Manual.
b Press the Attenuation Value soft key to set the level.
c Enter a value in fives by using the numeric keys.
d Press the dB soft key or the ENTER hard key.
– To couple the input attenuator’s level with your reference level setting, select Attenuation >
Couple.
As you increase the reference setting, the attenuation level also increases acoordingly.

Optional. To change the scale unit:

1 Select More (1/2) > Units.
2 Select the unit of the display scale: dBm, dBV, dBmV, dBµV, V, or W.
The scale unit on the screen changes accordingly.

Pre-amplifier
You can turn the internal pre-amplifier on to correct and compensate for the gain of the preamp so that
amplitude readings show the value at the input connector.

Procedure

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Toggle the Preamp soft key and select On or Off as needed.

NOTE
You can turn the Preamp on when the input attenuation range is from 0 dB to 10 dB. If
the attenuation value is manually set to greater than 10 dB, the instrument will
automatically turn off the pre-amplifier to display low-level signal properly on the chart.

External offset
You can turn the External Offset on and manually set the external offset value. An offset consists of a cable
loss and a user offset and the measurement result shows the value reflecting both offset values. When the

JD700B Series User’s Guide 633

Chapter 17 Using Channel Scanner

external offset value is set at 40 dB in the Spectrum mode, the measurement result compensates 40 dB at
both the Spectrum Analyzer and Signal Analyzer modes.

Procedure

To set the external offset:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On.
3 Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the dB soft key to complete the entry.

To turn the external offset off:

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
2 Toggle the External Offset soft key and select Off.

Setting average
You can set the number of measurements to be averaged for the trace presentation. A maximum of 100
times of averaging can be set. When the averaging reaches to your setting, a new measurement value
replaces the measurement value in sequence from the earliest.

Procedure

1 Press the BW/AVG hard key.

2 Press the Average soft key.
3 Enter a value between 1 and 100 as needed by using the numeric keys.
4 Press the Enter soft key.

Setting sweep mode

The default setting is Continue to sweep continuously for most on-going measurements. If you want to hold
the measurement or get a single sweep, you can change the sweep mode.

Procedure

To select the single sweep mode:

1 Press the SWEEP hot key.
2 Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Single. You can also use the HOLD hot key.
The letter HOLD in red appears and the sweeping is paused.
3 Optional. Press the Sweep Once soft key to get a new measurement.

To return to the continuous sweep mode:

1 Toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Continue. You can also use the HOLD hot key.
The letter HOLD in red disappears and the sweeping resumes.

NOTE
Selecting Sweep Mode > Fast may reduce the measurement accuracy, but you can use
this fast sweep mode to identify the existence of interfering signals.

634 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 17 Using Channel Scanner

Making channel scanner measurements

Setting channel
You need to set the channel to be scanned.

Procedure

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.

2 To select the standard channel, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Std soft key. The standard channel window appears.
See “Appendix C – Band, frequency & channel standard” on page 664 for more information.
b Highlight the band to be measured by using the rotary knob, the arrow keys, or the
Page Up/Page Down soft keys.
c Press the Select soft key or the rotary knob to confirm the selection.
3 Toggle the Link soft key to select the scanning direction and select Fwd (forward) or Rev
(reverse).
4 To set the starting channel, complete the following steps:
a Press the Start Channel soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.
5 To set the amount of channel increment in scanning channels, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Step soft key.
b Enter a value by suing the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 To set the integration bandwidth, complete the following steps:
a Press the Integration Bandwidth soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
7 To set the number of channels to be displayed in the measurement table, complete the following
steps:
a Press the # of Channels soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.

Measurement example
Test results can be saved as a .csv file format so that you can work on it in any spreadsheet software.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 635

Chapter 17 Using Channel Scanner

Figure 358 Channel scanner measurement

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the display line and
channel limit. See “Setting limit for channel scanner” on page 639 for more information.

Making frequency scanner measurements

Setting frequency
You need to set the frequency to be scanned.

Procedure

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.

2 To set the starting center frequency, complete the following steps:
a Press the Start Frequency soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
3 To set the amount of frequency increment in scanning channels, complete the following steps:
a Press the Frequency Step soft key.
b Enter a value by suing the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
4 To set the integration bandwidth, complete the following steps:
a Press the Integration Bandwidth soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
5 To set the number of frequencies to be displayed in the measurement table, complete the
following steps:
a Press the # of Frequency soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.

636 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 17 Using Channel Scanner

Measurement example
Figure 359 Frequency scanner measurement

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the display line and
channel limit. See “Setting limit for channel scanner” on page 639 for more information.

Making custom scanner measurements

Setting channel/frequency
You can customize channels or frequencies to be scanned as you desire.

Procedure

To set the channels to be scanned:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Channel.
3 To select the standard channel, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Std soft key. The standard channel window appears.
See “Appendix C – Band, frequency & channel standard” on page 664 for more information.
b Highlight the band to be measured by using the rotary knob, the arrow keys, or the
Page Up/Page Down soft keys.
c Press the Select soft key or the rotary knob to confirm the selection.
4 Toggle the Link soft key to select the scanning direction and select Fwd (forward) or Rev
(reverse).
5 Press the Index soft key, and then enter an index number by turning the rotary knob or using the
numeric keys.
6 To set the channel number for the selected index, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Number soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the Enter soft key.
The instrument displays a corresponding center frequency for the channel number.
7 To set the integration bandwidth for the selected index, complete the following steps:

JD700B Series User’s Guide 637

Chapter 17 Using Channel Scanner

a Press the Integration Bandwidth soft key.

b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
8 To add more channels to be scanned, repeat steps 5-7.
9 Press the ESC hard key to dismiss the channel list window and view the scanning result.

To set the frequencies to be scanned:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
3 Press the Index soft key, and then enter an index number by turning the rotary knob or using the
numeric keys.
4 To set the center frequency for the selected index, complete the following steps:
a Press the Center Frequency soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
5 To set the integration bandwidth for the selected index, complete the following steps:
a Press the Integration Bandwidth soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
6 To add more channels to be scanned, repeat steps 3-5.
7 Press the ESC hard key to dismiss the channel list window and view the scanning result.

Measurement example
Figure 360 Custom scanner measurement

NOTE
You can use the LIMIT hot key to analyze your measurements with the display line and
channel limit. See “Setting limit for channel scanner” on page 639 for more information.

638 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 17 Using Channel Scanner

Analyzing measurements
Setting limit for channel scanner
Procedure

To use the display line:

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.
2 Press the Display Line soft key to set a threshold for the limit line and Pass/Fail indication.
3 Enter a value, and then press the dBm unit soft key.
4 Toggle the Display Line soft key between On and Off to display or dismiss the limit line.

To use the channel limit:

1 Press the LIMIT hot key.
2 Press the Channel Limit soft key to set the limits for each channel index.
3 Press the Index soft key, and then select the channel/frequency index number by turning the
rotary knob or using the numeric keys.
4 Toggle the Limit soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the Pass/Fail indication.
5 Set the upper threshold:
a Press the High Limit soft key.
b Enter a value for the upper limit.
c Press the dBm unit soft key.
6 Set the lower threshold:
a Press the Low Limit soft key.
b Enter a value for the lower limit.
c Press the dBm unit soft key.
7 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 639

 18

Chapter 18 Using Power Meter

This chapter provides instructions for using the RF Power Meter function and the Optical Power Meter
function. Topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

n Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 641

n Display overview ..................................................................................................................... 641
n Performing internal RF power measurements ........................................................................ 641
n Performing external RF power measurements ....................................................................... 646
n Performing optical power measurements................................................................................ 649
 Chapter 18 Using Power Meter

Introduction
The Power Meter of the JD700B series uses power measurement based on spectrum measurement results
to provide an accurate power measurement result unlike a general spectrum analyzer, of which power
accuracy may be degraded if the span is set too wide.

The power meter also provides Pass/Fail indication with user-defined lower and upper limits.

The Power Meter function provides following measurements:

n Internal RF Power Measurement
n External RF Power Measurement
n Optical Power Measurement

Display overview
Figure 361 provides descriptions for each segment of the measurement screen.

Figure 361 Power measurement screen

Performing internal RF power measurements

The internal power measurement of the JD700B series collects powers from the raw data of spectrum
analyzer in the optimal span and integrates the powers up to the specified user span, which results in an
accurate power measurement, independent of the span setting.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 641

Chapter 18 Using Power Meter

Connecting a cable
Direct connection

Procedure

1 Connect the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B series and the Power amplifier output
port of BTS as shown in Figure 362.

Figure 362 Direct connection

JD785B/JD786B/JD745B/JD746B JD788B/JD748B

Indirect connection

Procedure

1 Connect the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port of the JD700B series and the monitor (test) port of
BTS as shown in Figure 363.

Figure 363 Indirect connection

JD785B/JD786B/JD745B/JD746B JD788B/JD748B

CAUTION
The maximum power for the Spectrum Analyzer RF In port is +25 dBm (0.316 W) for
JD780B series and +20 dBm (0.1 W) for JD740B series. If the level of the input signal to
be measured is greater than this, use a High Power Attenuator to prevent damage
when you directly connect the signal to the instrument or connect the signal from the
coupling port of a directional coupler.

Selecting measurement mode

Procedure

1 Press the MODE hard key.

642 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 18 Using Power Meter

2 Select More (1/2) > Power Meter > Internal RF Power Meter.

Setting frequency
You need to set the frequency range to be measured with either the center frequency/span or the start/stop
frequencies. You can also set the frequency with the channel number and span.

Procedure

To set the center frequency and span:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
3 Press the Center Frequency soft key.
4 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob or the arrow keys.
5 Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
6 Press the Span soft key, and then do one of the following:
– To set the span manually, select Span, enter a value, and then select the unit.
– To set the span automatically, select Full Span, Zero Span, or Last Span as needed.
NOTE
The Zero Span option is available only in the Spectrum mode. If you have selected Zero
Span, select TRIGGER > Free Run, External, GPS, Video, or Display Position.

To set the start and stop frequencies:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Freq.
3 Press the Start Frequency soft key.
4 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob or the arrow keys.
5 Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.
6 Press the Stop Frequency soft key.
7 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob or the arrow keys.
8 Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.

To set the channel number and span:

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.
2 Toggle the Unit soft key and select Channel.
3 To select the standard channel, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Std soft key. The standard channel window appears.
See “Appendix C – Band, frequency & channel standard” on page 664 for more information.
b Highlight the band to be measured by using the rotary knob, the arrow keys, or the
Page Up/Page Down soft keys.
c Press the Select soft key or the rotary knob to confirm the selection.
4 Toggle the Link soft key to select the sweep direction and select Fwd (forward) or Rev (reverse).
5 To set the channel number, complete the following steps:
a Press the Channel Number soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key or ENTER hard key to complete the entry.
The instrument automatically displays the corresponding center frequency value for the
selected channel number.
6 To set the span, complete the following steps:
a Press the Span soft key.
b Select the span option, from the following choices:
– To set the span manually, select Span, enter a value, and then select the unit.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 643

Chapter 18 Using Power Meter

– To set the span automatically, select Full Span, Zero Span, or Last Span as needed.
NOTE
The Zero Span option is available only in the Spectrum mode. If you have selected Zero
Span, select TRIGGER > Free Run, External, GPS, Video, or Display Position.

Optional. To define the amount of frequency increment for the rotary knob:
1 Press the Frequency Step soft key, if the Freq is selected.
2 Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
3 Press the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.

Optional. To define the amount of channel increment for the rotary knob:
1 Press the Channel Step soft key, if the Channel is selected.
2 Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
3 Press the Enter soft key.

Setting amplitude
Procedure

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Toggle the Display soft key and select the display method: Relative or Absolute.
3 If the Relative is selected, press the Set Reference soft key to set the current value as the
reference.
4 To specify the display range, complete the following steps:
a Press the Display Maximum soft key to set the maximum value for the power meter.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the dBm soft key.
d Press the Display Minimum soft key to set the minimum value for the power meter.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
f Press the dBm soft key.
5 Optional. To enable the external offset, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On.
b Enter a value between 0 and 60 by using the numeric keys.
c Press the dB soft key.

Setting sweep mode

The default setting of the sweep mode is Continue. If you want to hold the measurement, you can change
the sweep mode.

Procedure

1 Press the SWEEP hot key.

2 To select the single sweep mode, toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Single. You can
also use the HOLD hot key.
The letter HOLD in red appears and the sweeping is paused.
3 To return to the continuous sweep mode, toggle the Sweep Mode soft key and select Continue.
You can also use the HOLD hot key.
The letter HOLD in red disappears and the sweeping resumes.

644 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 18 Using Power Meter

Making a measurement
Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Resolution soft key, and then select the resolution option from the following choices:
– 0: Displays the reading with no decimal place
– 1: Displays the reading with one decimal place
– 2 : Displays the reading with two decimal places
3 To set the resolution bandwidth, complete the following steps:
a Press the RBW soft key.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys.
c Press the unit: MHz, kHz, or Hz.
4 Press the Accuracy Mode soft key, and then select the accuracy mode option:
Low, Middle, and High.
5 To specify the number of measurements to be averaged, complete the following steps:
a Press the Average soft key.
b Enter a value between 1 and 100 by using the numeric keys.
c Press the Enter soft key.
6 To set a threshold and view the results with Pass/Fail indication, complete the following steps:
a Press the LIMIT hot key.
b Toggle the Limit soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the Pass/Fail indication.
c Press the High Limit soft key, and then enter a threshold value.
d Press the dBm unit soft key.
e Press the Low Limit soft key, and then enter a threshold value.
f Press the dBm unit soft key.
7 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
Figure 364 Internal power measurement

JD700B Series User’s Guide 645

Chapter 18 Using Power Meter

Performing external RF power measurements

This instrument performs radio output power measurement with the use of optional external power sens
ors including JD730 series power sensors. It serves as the highly accurate RF power meter and gives wider
range of power measurement.

Connecting a cable
There are two types of power sensors. Directional power sensors are used in in-service power measurement.
Terminating power sensors are used in out-of-service power measurement.

Table 21 External power sensor type

Part No. Description Frequency Range Power Range

JD731B Directional Power Sensor 300-3800 MHz Average: +21.76 to +51.76 dBm
(0.15 to 150 W)
Peak: +36.02 to +56.02 dBm
(4 to 400 W)

JD732B Terminating Power Sensor 20-3800 MHz Average: -30 to +20 dBm

JD733A Directional Power Sensor 150-3500 MHz Average/Peak: +20 to +47 dBm
(0.1 to 50 W)

JD734B Terminating Power Sensor 20-3800 MHz Peak: -30 to +20 dBm

JD736B Terminating Power Sensor 20-3800 MHz Average/Peak: -30 to +20 dBm

Terminating power sensor connection

Procedure

1 Connect an external power sensor to the USB Host port of the JD700B series and to the RF
output port of BTS.
The JD700B series automatically detects and initializes the power sensor connected to the
instrument. Connecting an external power sensor is mandatory.

Table 22 Terminating power sensor connection

JD785B/JD786B/JD745B/JD746B JD788B/JD748B

Directional power sensor connection

Procedure

1 Connect an external power sensor to the USB Host port of the JD700B series and to the RF
output port of BTS as shown in Figure 365.

646 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 18 Using Power Meter

The JD700B series automatically detects and initializes the power sensor connected to the
instrument. Connecting an external power sensor is mandatory.

Figure 365 Directional power sensor connection

JD785B/JD786B/JD745B/JD746B JD788B/JD748B

Selecting measurement mode

Procedure

1 Press the MODE hard key.

2 Select More (1/2) > Power Meter > External RF Power Meter.

Setting frequency
You need to set the frequency to be measured depending on your connected external power sensor.

Procedure

1 Press the FREQ/DIST hard key.

2 Press the Frequency soft key.
3 Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
4 Select the unit: GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz.

Setting amplitude
Procedure

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Toggle the Display soft key and select the display method: Relative or Absolute.
3 If the Relative is selected, press the Set Reference soft key to set the current value as the
reference.
4 To specify the display range, complete the following steps:
a Press the Display Maximum soft key to set the maximum value for the power meter.
b Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.
c Press the dBm soft key.
d Press the Display Minimum soft key to set the minimum value for the power meter.
e Enter a value by using the numeric keys. You can also use the rotary knob.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 647

Chapter 18 Using Power Meter

f Press the dBm soft key.

5 Optional. To enable the external offset, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the External Offset soft key and select On.
b Enter a value between 0 and 60 by using the numeric keys.
c Press the dB soft key.

Making a measurement
Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE hot key.

2 Depending your connected power sensor, do one of the following:
– For JD736B, select the power range option: Average Power, Peak Power, or Pulse Power.
– For JD734B, select Peak Power.
– For JD732B, select Average Power.
– For JD731B, select the power range option: Forward Avg Power, Reverse Avg Power,
Forward Peak Power, Pulse Power, or VSWR.
– For JD733A, select the power range option: Forward Avg Power, Reverse Avg Power,
Forward Peak Power, or VSWR.
3 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.
4 Press the Resolution soft key, and then select the resolution option from the following choices:
– 0: Displays the reading with no zero decimal place
– 1: Displays the reading with one decimal place
– 2: Displays the reading with two decimal places
5 To set a threshold and view the results with Pass/Fail indication, complete the following steps:
a Press the LIMIT hot key.
b Toggle the Limit soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the Pass/Fail indication.
c Press the High Limit soft key, and then enter a threshold value.
d Press the dBm unit soft key.
e Press the Low Limit soft key, and then enter a threshold value.
f Press the dBm unit soft key.
6 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

Measurement example
You can measure and understand a trend of a system output in operation where output power constantly
varies depending on the amount of calls being processed by the BTS or Repeater. In addition, the Log graph
benefits you to easily examine the discontinuance of output power caused by the transmission problems or
defective connection.

648 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 18 Using Power Meter

Figure 366 External power measurement of pulse power

Performing optical power measurements

The optical power measurement is available in conjunction with MP-series power sensor, which measures
optical power via a USB connection.

Connecting a power meter

Connecting an external optical power meter is mandatory for power measurements in the Optical Power
Meter mode. There are two optical power meters (sensors) those can be connected to the instrument via
USB. See “JD700B Series Common Options” on page 682 for the optional power meters.

Procedure

1 Connect a MP-series optical power sensor to the USB Host port of the JD700B series as shown
in Figure 367.
The OPS indicator appears in the system status bar.
2 Connect the optical cable from the output port of BTS to the power meter.

Figure 367 Optical power sensor connection

JD785B/JD786B/JD745B/JD746B JD788B/JD748B

JD700B Series User’s Guide 649

Chapter 18 Using Power Meter

Selecting measurement mode

Procedure

1 Press the MODE hard key.

2 Select More (1/2) > Power Meter > Optical Power Meter.
The Optical Power Meter screen appears.

Setting measurement parameters

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 To select your desired wavelength for testing, do one of the following:
– To let your instrument detect the wavelength automatically, toggle the Wavelength soft key
and select Auto.
– To select a wavelength from the wavelength list, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Wavelength soft key and select Manual.
b Press the Stdwave soft key.
The wavelength list box appears.
c Select the wavelength you want from the list, and then tap the Apply button.
3 Optional. To edit the wavelength list, complete the following steps:
a Press the Stored Wavelength soft key.
The Stored Wavelength dialog box appears.
b Do the following:
– To add a new wavelength, enter a value between 780 and 1650 in the input box,
and then tap the Add button.
– To edit an existing wavelength, highlight a wavelength in the list, enter a new value
between 780 and 1650 in the input box, and then tap the Edit button.
– To delete an existing wavelength from the list, highlight a wavelength in the list, and
then tap the Delete button.
c Tap the Apply button to save your changes.

Making a power measurement

Procedure

1 After setting the parameters, read the absolute measurement value in dBm on the screen.
Figure 368 is an example of the measurement screen. To view a relative power, see “Reading a
relative power” on page 651.
2 To view the result in mW, complete the following steps:
a Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.
b Press the Units soft key, and then select mW.
3 To set a threshold and view the result with Pass/Fail indication, complete the following steps:
a Press the LIMIT hot key.
b Toggle the Threshold soft key between On and Off to enable or disable the Pass/Fail
indication.
c Press the Threshold soft key, and then enter a value.
d Press the dBm unit soft key.
e Toggle the Alarm soft key between On and Off to enable or disable alarming.
4 Optional. Go to SAVE/LOAD > Save, and then select the save option from the choices available
for your measurement mode. See “Using save” on page 33 for more information.

650 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 18 Using Power Meter

Figure 368 optical power measurement

NOTE
If the Wavelength is set to Auto, it displays “Auto” for the modulation frequency. It it is set
to Manual, the instrument displays a detected modulation frequency.

Reading a relative power

To view a relative power in dB, you can set a reference value automatically or manually.

Procedure

1 Press the AMP/SCALE hard key.

2 Toggle the Display soft key and select Relative.
3 Do one of the following:
– To let the instrument set the last measurement as a reference, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Relative Reference soft key and select Last.
b Press the Reference Last soft key.
NOTE
To set or release reference, you can also press and hold the physical round button on the
connected MP-series power meter for a few seconds until you hear a beep.
– To set the reference manually, complete the following steps:
a Toggle the Relative Reference soft key and select Manual.
b Press the Reference Manual soft key.
c Enter a value manually as you desire, and then press the Enter soft key.

Holding a measurement
Procedure

1 To hold the measurement, press the HOLD hard key.

Measurement is paused and the text “Hold” appears.
2 To resume the measurement, press the HOLD hard key again.
Measurement is resumed and the text “Hold” disappears.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 651

 19

Chapter 19 Performing Fiber Inspection

This chapter provides instructions for using the fiber testing function with a P5000i fiberscope. Topics
discussed in this chapter are as follows:

n Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 653

n Display overview ..................................................................................................................... 653
n Connecting a fiber microscope ................................................................................................ 653
n Selecting measurement mode ................................................................................................ 654
n Configuring test parameters .................................................................................................... 654
n Performing fiber inspection...................................................................................................... 655
 Chapter 19 Performing Fiber Inspection

Introduction
Inspection of fiber optic connections is essential for the optimal performance and longevity of fiber optic
connectivity. Throughout their lives, fiber connectors must be inspected, analyzed, and cleaned to maintain
an acceptable level of functionality. The JD700B series makes it fast and easy to troubleshoot and certify
that every connection at a cell site is optimized for a lifetime of performance.

The JD700B series supports the handheld fiber microscope P5000i that can capture video images from the
sensor and analyzes the images for fiber end face defects and contamination with reliable PASS/FAIL
results to guarantee the performance of your optical connections.

Display overview
Figure 369 provides descriptions for each segment of the measurement screen.

Figure 369 Fiber inspection screen

Connecting a fiber microscope

Connecting an optional fiber microscope P5000i is mandatory for fiber inspection and analysis. See
“JD700B Series Common Options” on page 682 for available options.

Procedure

1 Connect your fiber microscope P5000i to the USB Host port of the JD700B series.
The instrument detects the connected microscope automatically and displays the icon.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 653

Chapter 19 Performing Fiber Inspection

Selecting measurement mode

Procedure

1 Press the MODE hard key.

2 Select More (1/2) > Fiber Inspection.

Configuring test parameters

Selecting profile and tip
You can select analysis profiles and inspection tips from the list.

Procedure

1 Press the MEASURE SETUP hot key.

2 Press the Profile & Tip soft key.
The profile and tip pane appears.
3 To select one of the pre-configured analysis profiles that match the PASS/FAIL criteria in the IEC
visual inspection standard, complete the following steps:
a Tap the drop-down list button for the Profile.
b Select the profile that you want to use, from the following choices:
– MM (IEC-61300-3-35)
– Ribbon, MM (IEC-61300-3-35)
– Ribbon, SM APC (IEC-61300-3-35)
– SM APC (IEC-61300-3-35)
– SM PC (IEC-61300-3-35)
– SM UPC (IEC-61300-3-35)

NOTE
All of the profiles are factory set and cannot be edited or removed.

4 To select the inspection tip (optical settings) that you want to use, complete the following steps:
a Tap the drop-down list button for the Tip.
b Select one of the tips available to your selected profile, from the following choices:
– Standard Tips (with BAP1) and Simplex Long Reach (-L) Tips
– Ribbon Tips and Ribbon Tips – Long Reach

NOTE
This setting allows you to select the best optical settings for the type of inspection tip
that is attached to your microscope probe.

5 Tap the Apply button or press the Apply soft key to save and return to the previous state.

Setting preferences
You can set your preferences of auto center and QuickCapture button function. The QuickCapture button is
the small grey round button on the side of the microscope.

654 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 19 Performing Fiber Inspection

Procedure

1 To set the function of the QuickCapture button on the side of the P5000i, toggle the Test Button
soft key and select the option from the following choices:
– Test: Sets the capture button to function as Test. Pressing the Quickcapture button
analyzes fiber image as like the Test soft key on your JD700B series.
– Freeze: Sets the capture button to function as Freeze. Pressing the Quickcapture button
captures fiber image as like the Freeze soft key on your JD700B series.
2 To turn the auto center feature on or off, toggle the Auto Center soft key between On and Off
and select the option you want to set. Default setting is On. It automatically displays the center of
the fiber when viewing at high magnification.

Performing fiber inspection

Capturing fiber image
Procedure

1 Connect the fiber to be inspected to the tip of your microscope P5000i.

The live image of the fiber is displayed on the screen.
See the user manual of your fiber microscope for details on using the P5000i.
2 Focus the image by rotating the Focus Control on the P5000i until the image is in focus.
3 Toggle the Magnification soft key between Low and High and select the option you want to use.
You can also press the Magnification Control button on either side of the P5000i.
4 Press the Freeze soft key to capture the properly focused image.
The text “Capturing…” appears. See Figure 370 for an example of captured image.
5 Optional. To save the captured image as a file (.png), complete the following steps:
a Tap the Save PNG soft key. The Save window appears with the on-screen key.
b Type a file name in the File Name field.
c Select a folder where you want to save the file, if desired.
d Press the Save soft key.
6 Press the Live soft key to return to the live image screen or press the Quit soft key to exit.

Figure 370 Captured fiber image

JD700B Series User’s Guide 655

Chapter 19 Performing Fiber Inspection

Testing a fiber
Procedure

1 Connect the fiber to be inspected to the tip of your microscope P5000i.

The live image of the fiber is displayed on the screen.
See the user manual of your fiber microscope for details on using the P5000i.
2 Focus the image by rotating the Focus Control on the P5000i until the image is in focus.
3 Toggle the Magnification soft key between Low and High and select the option you want to use.
You can also press the Magnification Control button on either side of the P5000i.
4 Press the Test soft key to start fiber analysis.
The text “Analyzing…” appears. See Figure 371 for an example of fiber analysis results.
5 Once the test is completed, check the result displayed on the screen with the following
information:
– Image overlay of the zone locations, defects, and scratches
– PASS or FAIL result
– Specific test result for each zone
6 To show or hide image overlays, press the Overlay soft key.
Each time this key is pressed, the selection changes.
7 Optional. To save the fiber inspection result with specific details as a report (.pdf), complete the
following steps:
a Tap the Save PDF soft key.
The Save window appears with the on-screen key.
b Type a file name in the File Name field.
c Select a folder where you want to save the file, if desired.
d Press the Save soft key.
The information input window appears.
e Type in information as required.
f Tap the Apply button or press the Apply soft key to save and return to the previous state.
See Figure 372 for an example of generated report.
8 Press the Live soft key to return to the live image screen or press the Quit soft key to exit the
fiber inspection.

Figure 371 Analyzed fiber image and fiber inspection result

656 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Chapter 19 Performing Fiber Inspection

Figure 372 Fiber inspection report

JD700B Series User’s Guide 657

Appendix
Topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

n Appendix A – Product general information .............................................................................. 659

n Appendix B – Cable list ........................................................................................................... 663
n Appendix C – Band, frequency & channel standard ............................................................... 664
n Appendix D – VSWR-Return loss conversion table ................................................................ 667
n Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table .............................................................................................. 668
n Appendix F – Motorola CDMA/EV-DO LMF ............................................................................ 669
n Appendix G – Bluetooth connection ........................................................................................ 671
n Appendix H – Device driver installation................................................................................... 674
n Appendix I – Ordering information .......................................................................................... 675
n Appendix J – RoHS information .............................................................................................. 684
n Appendix K – On-screen keyboard ......................................................................................... 686
n Appendix L – Supported map display parameters .................................................................. 689
 Appendix

Appendix A – Product general information

JD780B series
JD785B/JD786B JD788B Supplemental Information
Inputs and Outputs
RF In Spectrum Analyzer
Connector Type-N female Type-N female
Impedance 50 Ω 50 Ω Nominal
Damage Level >+33 dBm, ±50 V DC >+33 dBm, ±50 V DC Nominal

Reflection/RF Out Cable and Antenna Analyzer

Connector Type-N female Type-N female
Impedance 50 Ω 50 Ω Nominal
Damage Level >+40 dBm, ±50 V DC >+40 dBm, ±50 V DC Nominal

RF In Cable and Antenna Analyzer

Connector Type-N female N/A
Impedance 50 Ω N/A Nominal
Damage Level >+25 dBm, ±50 V DC N/A Nominal

External Trigger, GPS

Connector SMA female SMA female
Impedance 50 Ω 50 Ω Nominal

External Ref
Connector SMA female SMA female
Impedance 50 Ω 50 Ω Nominal
Input Frequency 10, 13, 15 MHz 10, 13, 15 MHz
Input Range -5 to +5 dBm -5 to +5 dBm

USB
USB Host Type A, 1 port Type A, 1 port
USB Client Type B, 1 port Type B, 1 port

LAN RJ45, 10/100 Base-T RJ45, 10/100 Base-T

SFP/SFP+ MSA compliant MSA compliant In optical hardware option

Audio Jack 3.5 mm headphone 3.5 mm headphone

jack jack

External Power 5.5 mm barrel 5.5 mm barrel

connector connector

Speaker Built-in speaker Built-in speaker

Display
Type Resistive touch Resistive touch
screen screen
Size 8” 8” LCD backlight, transflective LCD
with anti-glare coating
Resolution 800 x 600 800 x 600

JD700B Series User’s Guide 659

Appendix

JD785B/JD786B JD788B Supplemental Information

Power
External DC Input 18 V DC 18 V DC
Power Consumption 42 W 42 W 54 W maximum when charging
battery

Battery
10.8 V, 7800 mA-h 10.8 V, 7800 mA-h Lithium Ion
Operating Time > 3 hours (Typical) > 3 hours (Typical) In balance mode
Charge Time 2.5 hours (80 %) 2.5 hours (80 %) In case of a fully discharged
5 hours (100 %) 5 hours (100 %) battery
Storage Temperature 0 to 25°C 0 to 25°C The battery pack should be
(32 to 77°F) (32 to 77°F) stored in an environment with
low humidity. Extended
exposure to temperature above
45°C could degrade battery
performance and life.

Data Storage
Internal Maximum 500 MB Maximum 500 MB
External Limited to the size of Limited to the size of Supports USB 2.0 compatible
USB flash drive USB flash drive memory devices

Environmental
Operating Temperature
AC Power 0 to 40°C 0 to 40°C With no derating
(32 to 104°F) (32 to 104°F)
Battery 0 to 40°C 0 to 40°C At charging
(32 to 104°F) (32 to 104°F)
-10 to 55 °C -10 to 55 °C At discharging
(14 to 131 °F) (14 to 131 °F)
Maximum Humidity 95% RH 95% RH Non-condensing
Shock and Vibration MIL-PRF-28800F Class 2 MIL-PRF-28800F Class 2
Storage Temperature -30 to 71°C -30 to 71°C With the battery pack removed
(-22 to 160°F) (-22 to 160°F)

EMC
EN 61326-1:2013 EN 61326-1:2013 Complies with European EMC
CISPR11:2009 Class A CISPR11:2009 Class A
Safety
EN 61010-1:2010 EN 61010-1:2010 Complies with European LVD
UL 61010-1:2012 & UL 61010-4:2012 & Complies with TUV NRTL
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. CAN/CSA C22.2 No.
61010-1-12 61010-1-12
Size and Weight (Standard Configuration)
Weight <4.6 kg (10.1 lb.) <4.2 kg (9.3 lb.) With battery

Size 295 x 195 x 82 (mm) 295 x 195 x 82 (mm) Approximately (W x H x D)

11.6 x 7.7 x 3.2 (Inch) 11.6 x 7.7 x 3.2 (Inch)

Warranty
2 years 2 years

Calibration Cycle
1 year 1 year

660 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Appendix

JD740B series
JD745B/JD746B JD748B Supplemental Information
Inputs and Outputs
RF In Spectrum Analyzer
Connector Type-N female Type-N female
Impedance 50 Ω 50 Ω Nominal
Damage Level >+40 dBm, ±50 V DC >+40 dBm, ±50 V DC Nominal

Reflection/RF Out Cable and Antenna Analyzer

Connector Type-N female Type-N female
Impedance 50 Ω 50 Ω Nominal
Damage Level >+37 dBm, ±50 V DC >+37 dBm, ±50 V DC Nominal

RF In Cable and Antenna Analyzer

Connector Type-N female N/A
Impedance 50 Ω N/A Nominal
Damage Level >+25 dBm, ±50 V DC N/A Nominal

External Trigger, GPS

Connector SMA female SMA female
Impedance 50 Ω 50 Ω Nominal

External Ref
Connector SMA female SMA female
Impedance 50 Ω 50 Ω Nominal
Input Frequency 10, 13, 15 MHz 10, 13, 15 MHz
Input Range -5 to +5 dBm -5 to +5 dBm

USB
USB Host Type A, 1 port Type A, 1 port
USB Client Type B, 1 port Type B, 1 port

LAN RJ45, 10/100 Base-T RJ45, 10/100 Base-T

SFP/SFP+ MSA compliant MSA compliant In optical hardware option

Audio Jack 3.5 mm headphone 3.5 mm headphone

jack jack

External Power 5.5 mm barrel 5.5 mm barrel

connector connector

Speaker Built-in speaker Built-in speaker

Display
Type Resistive touch Resistive touch
screen screen
Size 8” 8” LCD backlight, transflective LCD
with anti-glare coating
Resolution 800 x 600 800 x 600

JD700B Series User’s Guide 661

Appendix

JD745B/JD746B JD748B Supplemental Information

Power
External DC Input 18 V DC 18 V DC
Power Consumption 42 W 42 W 54 W maximum when charging
battery

Battery
10.8 V, 7800 mA-h 10.8 V, 7800 mA-h Lithium Ion
Operating Time > 3 hours (Typical) > 3 hours (Typical) In balance mode
Charge Time 2.5 hours (80 %) 2.5 hours (80 %) In case of a fully discharged
5 hours (100 %) 5 hours (100 %) battery
Storage Temperature 0 to 25°C 0 to 25°C The battery pack should be
(32 to 77°F) (32 to 77°F) stored in an environment with
low humidity. Extended
exposure to temperature above
45°C could degrade battery
performance and life.

Data Storage
Internal Maximum 500 MB Maximum 500 MB
External Limited to the size of Limited to the size of Supports USB 2.0 compatible
USB flash drive USB flash drive memory devices

Environmental
Operating Temperature
AC Power 0 to 40°C 0 to 40°C With no derating
(32 to 104°F) (32 to 104°F)
Battery 0 to 40°C 0 to 40°C At charging
(32 to 104°F) (32 to 104°F)
-10 to 55 °C -10 to 55 °C At discharging
(14 to 131 °F) (14 to 131 °F)
Maximum Humidity 95% RH 95% RH Non-condensing
Shock and Vibration MIL-PRF-28800F Class 2 MIL-PRF-28800F Class 2
Storage Temperature -30 to 71°C -30 to 71°C With the battery pack removed
(-22 to 160°F) (-22 to 160°F)

EMC
IEC/EN 61326-1:2013 IEC/EN 61326-1:2013 Complies with European EMC
CISPR11:2009 Class A CISPR11:2009 Class A
Safety
EN 61010-1:2010 EN 61010-1:2010 Complies with European LVD
UL 61010-1:2012 & UL 61010-4:2012 & Complies with TUV NRTL
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. CAN/CSA C22.2 No.
61010-1-12 61010-1-12

Size and Weight (Standard Configuration)

Weight <4.17 kg (9.19 lb.) <3.77 kg (8.31 lb.) With battery

Size 295 x 195 x 82 (mm) 295 x 195 x 82 (mm) Approximately (W x H x D)

11.6 x 7.7 x 3.2 (Inch) 11.6 x 7.7 x 3.2 (Inch)

Warranty
2 years 2 years

Calibration Cycle
1 year 1 year

662 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Appendix

Appendix B – Cable list

Relative Propagation Nominal Attenuation dB/m
Cable Type
Velocity (V¦) @ 1000 MHz
FSJ1-50A 0.84 0.197
FSJ250 0.83 0.134
FSJ4-50B 0.81 0.119
HCC 12-50J 0.915 0.092
HCC 158-50J 0.95 0.023
HCC 300-50J 0.96 0.014
HCC 312-50J 0.96 0.013
HCC 78-50J 0.915 0.042
HF 4-1/8” Cu2Y 0.97 0.01
HF 5” Cu2Y 0.96 0.007
HF 6-1/8”Cu2Y 0.97 0.006
HJ4.5-50 0.92 0.054
HJ4-50 0.914 0.087
HJ5-50 0.916 0.042
HJ7-50A 0.921 0.023
LDF12-50 0.88 0.022
LDF4-50A 0.88 0.077
LDF5-50A 0.89 0.043
LDF6-50 0.89 0.032
LDFF7-50A 0.88 0.027
LMR100 0.8 0.792
LMR1200 0.88 0.044
LMR1700 0.89 0.033
LMR200 0.83 0.344
LMR240 0.84 0.262
LMR400 0.85 0.135
LMR500 0.86 0.109
LMR600 0.87 0.087
LMR900 0.87 0.056
RG142 0.69 0.443
RG17, 17A 0.659 0.18
RG174 0.66 0.984
RG178B 0.69 1.509
RG187, 188 0.69 1.017
RG213/U 0.66 0.292
RG214 0.659 0.292
RG223 0.659 0.165
RG55, 55A, 55B 0.659 0.541
RG58, 58B 0.659 1.574
RG58A, 58C 0.659 0.787
RG8, 8A, 10, 10A 0.659 0.262
RG9, 9A 0.659 0.289
HFSC-12D(1/2") 0.81 0.112
HFC-12D(1/2") 0.88 0.072
HFC-22D(7/8") 0.88 0.041
HFC-33D(1_1/4") 0.88 0.0294
HFC-42D(1_5/8") 0.87 0.0243
RFCX-12D(1/2") 0.88 0.088
RFCX-22D(7/8") 0.88 0.049
RFCX-33D(1_1/4") 0.88 0.038
RFCX-42D(1_5/8") 0.87 0.028
RFCL-22D(7/8") 0.88 0.044
RFCL-33D(1_1/4") 0.88 0.034
RFCL-42D(1_5/8") 0.87 0.0315

JD700B Series User’s Guide 663

Appendix

Appendix C – Band, frequency & channel standard

Uplink Downlink
Standard Start Freq Stop Freq Start Freq Stop Freq
Valid Channels Valid Channels
(MHz) (MHz) (MHz) (MHz)
GSM
GSM 450 450.40 457.60 259≤n≤293 460.40 467.60 259≤n≤293
GSM 480 478.80 486.00 306≤n≤340 488.80 496.00 306≤n≤340
GSM 850 824.00 849.00 128≤n≤251 869.00 894.00 128≤n≤251
P-GSM 900 890.00 915.00 1≤n≤124 935.00 960.00 1≤n≤124
0≤n≤124 0≤n≤124
E-GSM 900 880.00 915.00 925.00 960.00
975≤n≤1023 975≤n≤1023
0≤n≤124 0≤n≤124
R-GSM 900 876.00 915.00 921.00 960.00
955≤n≤1023 955≤n≤1023
R-GSM 900 (China) 885.00 889.00 999≤n≤1019 930.00 934.00 999≤n≤1019
DCS 1800 1710.00 1785.00 512≤n≤885 1805.00 1880.00 512≤n≤885
PCS 1900 1850.00 1910.00 512≤n≤810 1930.00 1990.00 512≤n≤810
CDMA
1≤n≤799 1≤n≤799
Band 0 (800) 824.00 849.00 869.00 894.00
991≤n≤1023 991≤n≤1023
Band 1 (NA PCS) 1850.00 1910.00 0≤n≤1199 1930.00 1990.00 0≤n≤1199
0≤n≤1000 0≤n≤1000
Band 2 (TACS) 872.0125 914.9875 917.0125 959.9875
1329≤n≤2047 1329≤n≤2047
1≤n≤799 1≤n≤799
801≤n≤1039 801≤n≤1039
Band 3 (JTACS) 887.0125 924.9875 832.0125 869.9875
1041≤n≤1199 1041≤n≤1199
1201≤n≤1600 1201≤n≤1600
Band 4 (KR PCS) 1750.00 1780.00 0≤n≤599 1840.00 1870.00 0≤n≤599
1≤n≤300 1≤n≤300
539≤n≤871 539≤n≤871
Band 5 (450) 411.675 483.480 421.6750 493.4800
1039≤n≤1473 1039≤n≤1473
1792≤n≤2016 1792≤n≤2016
Band 6 (2100) 1920.00 1980.00 0≤n≤1199 2100.00 2170.00 0≤n≤1199
Band 7 (700) 776.00 794.00 0≤n≤359 746.00 764.00 0≤n≤359
Band 8 (1800) 1710.00 1784.95 0≤n≤1499 1805.00 1879.95 0≤n≤1499
Band 9 (900) 880.00 914.95 0≤n≤699 925.00 959.95 0≤n≤699
0≤n≤719 0≤n≤719
Band 10 (2nd 800) 806.000 900.975 851.000 939.975
720≤n≤919 720≤n≤919
WCDMA
Band Global
Band 1 (2100-General) 1920.0 1980.0 9612≤n≤9888 2110.0 2170.0 10562≤n≤10838
Band 2 (1900-General) 9262≤n≤9538 9662≤n≤9938
1850.0 1910.0 1930.0 1990.0
Band 2 (1900-Additional) 12≤n≤287 412≤n≤687
Band 3 (1800-General) 1710.0 1780.0 937≤n≤1288 1805.0 1880.0 1162≤n≤1513
Band 4 (1700-General) 1312≤n≤1513 1537≤n≤1738
1710.0 1775.0 2110.0 2155.0
Band 4 (1700-Additional) 1662≤n≤1862 1887≤n≤2087
Band 5 (850-General) 4132≤n≤4233 4357≤n≤4458
824.0 849.0 869.0 894.0
Band 5 (850-Additional) 782≤n≤862 1007≤n≤1087
Band 6 (800-General) 4162≤n≤4188 4387≤n≤4413
830.0 840.0 875.0 885.0
Band 6 (800-Additional) 812≤n≤837 1037≤n≤1062
Band 7 (2600-General) 2012≤n≤2338 2237≤n≤2563
2500.0 2570.0 2620.0 2690.0
Band 7 (2600-Additional) 2362≤n≤2687 2587≤n≤2912
Band 8 (900-General) 880.0 915.0 2712≤n≤2863 925.0 960.0 2937≤n≤3088
Band 9 (1700-General) 1749.9 1784.9 8762≤n≤8912 1844.9 1879.9 9237≤n≤9387
Band 10 (1700-General) 2887≤n≤3163 3112≤n≤3388
1710.0 1770.0 2110.0 2170.0
Band 10 (1700-Additional) 3187≤n≤3462 3412≤n≤3687
Band 11 (1500-General) 1427.9 1447.9 3487≤n≤3562 1475.9 1495.9 3712≤n≤3787
Band 12 (700-General) 3617≤n≤3678 3842≤n≤3903
699.0 716.0 729.0 746.0
Band 12 (700-Additional) 3707≤n≤3767 3932≤n≤3992
Band 13 (700-General) 3792≤n≤3818 4017≤n≤4043
777.0 787.0 746.0 756.0
Band 13 (700-Additional) 3842≤n≤3867 4067≤n≤4092
Band 14 (700-General) 3892≤n≤3918 4117≤n≤4143
788.0 798.0 758.0 768.0
Band 14 (700-Additional) 3942≤n≤3967 4167≤n≤4192
Band 19 (800-General) 312≤n≤363 712≤n≤763
830.0 845.0 875.0 890.0
Band 19 (800-Additional) 387≤n≤437 787≤n≤837
Band 20 (800-General) 832.0 862.0 4287≤n≤4413 791.0 821.0 4512≤n≤4638
Band 21 (1500-General) 1447.9 1462.9 462≤n≤512 1495.9 1510.9 862≤n≤912

664 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Appendix

Band 22 (3500-General) 3410.0 3490.0 4437≤n≤4813 3510.0 3590.0 4662≤n≤5038

Band 25 (1900-General) 4887≤n≤5188 5112≤n≤5413
1850.0 1915.0 1930.0 1995.0
Band 25 (1900-Additional) 5212≤n≤5512 5437≤n≤5737
Band 26 (800-General) 5537≤n≤5688 5762≤n≤5913
814.0 849.0 859.0 894.0
Band 26 (800-Additional) 5712≤n≤5862 5937≤n≤6087
LTE-FDD
Band Global
Band 1 (2100) 1920.0 1980.0 18000≤n≤18599 2110.0 2170.0 0≤n≤599
Band 2 (1900) 1850.0 1910.0 18600≤n≤19199 1930.0 1990.0 600≤n≤1199
Band 3 (1800) 1710.0 1785.0 19200≤n≤19949 1805.0 1880.0 1200≤n≤1949
Band 4 (1700) 1710.0 1755.0 19950≤n≤20399 2110.0 2155.0 1950≤n≤2399
Band 5 (850) 824.0 849.0 20400≤n≤20649 869.0 894.0 2400≤n≤2649
Band 7 (2600) 2500.0 2570.0 20750≤n≤21449 2620.0 2690.0 2750≤n≤3449
Band 8 (900) 880.0 915.0 21450≤n≤21799 925.0 960.0 3450≤n≤3799
Band 9 (1700) 1749.9 1784.9 21800≤n≤22149 1844.9 1879.9 3800≤n≤4149
Band 10 (1700) 1710.0 1770.0 22150≤n≤22749 2110.0 2170.0 4150≤n≤4749
Band 11 (1500) 1427.9 1447.9 22750≤n≤22949 1475.9 1495.9 4750≤n≤4949
Band 12 (700) 699.0 716.0 23010≤n≤23179 729.0 746.0 5010≤n≤5179
Band 13 (700) 777.0 787.0 23180≤n≤23279 746.0 756.0 5180≤n≤5279
Band 14 (700) 788.0 798.0 23280≤n≤23379 758.0 768.0 5280≤n≤5379
Band 17 (700) 704.0 716.0 23730≤n≤23849 734.0 746.0 5730≤n≤5849
Band 18 (800) 815.0 830.0 23850≤n≤23999 860.0 875.0 5850≤n≤5999
Band 19 (800) 830.0 845.0 24000≤n≤24149 875.0 890.0 6000≤n≤6149
Band 20 (800) 832.0 862.0 24150≤n≤24449 791.0 821.0 6150≤n≤6449
Band 21 (1500) 1447.9 1462.9 24450≤n≤24599 1495.9 1510.9 6450≤n≤6599
Band 22 (3500) 3410.0 3490.0 24600≤n≤25399 3510.0 3590.0 6600≤n≤7399
Band 23 (2100) 2000.0 2020.0 25500≤n≤25699 2180.0 2200.0 7500≤n≤7699
Band 24 (1500) 1626.5 1660.5 25700≤n≤26039 1525.0 1559.0 7700≤n≤8039
Band 25 (1900) 1850.0 1915.0 26040≤n≤26689 1930.0 1995.0 8040≤n≤8689
Band 26 (800) 814.0 849.0 26690≤n≤27039 859.0 894.0 8690≤n≤9039
LTE-TDD
Band Global
Band 33 (1900) 1900.0 1920.0 36000≤n≤36199
Band 34 (2100) 2010.0 2025.0 36200≤n≤36349
Band 35 (1850) 1850.0 1910.0 36350≤n≤36949
Band 36 (1930) 1930.0 1990.0 36950≤n≤37549
Band 37 (1910) 1910.0 1930.0 37550≤n≤37749
Band 38 (2570) 2570.0 2620.0 37750≤n≤38249
Band 39 (1880) 1880.0 1920.0 38250≤n≤38649
Band 40 (2300) 2300.0 2400.0 38650≤n≤39649
Band 41 (2496) 2496.0 2690.0 39650≤n≤41589
Band 42 (3400) 3400.0 3600.0 41590≤n≤43589
Band 43 (3600) 3600.0 3800.0 43590≤n≤45589
TD-SCDMA
FBN 0 1785.0 1805.0 0≤n≤92
FBN 1 1900.0 1920.0 0≤n≤92
FBN 2 1920.0 1980.0 0≤n≤255
FBN 3 1920.0 1980.0 0≤n≤36
FBN 4 1980.0 2010.0 0≤n≤142
FBN 5 2010.0 2025.0 0≤n≤67
FBN 6 2100.0 2170.0 0≤n≤255
FBN 7 2100.0 2170.0 0≤n≤36
FBN 8 2170.0 2220.0 0≤n≤242
WiMAX
ProfR1 (1.25 2150) 2150.625 2159.375 0≤n≤7
ProfR2 (1.25 2305) 2305.625 2320.625 0≤n≤12
ProfR3 (1.25 2361) 2361.875 2375.625 13≤n≤24
ProfR4 (1.25 2500) 2500.625 2688.125 0≤n≤150
ProfR5 (1.25 3400) 3400.625 3700.625 0≤n≤240
ProfR6 (3.5 2598) 2524.750 2591.250 0≤n≤38 2598.750 2665.250 0≤n≤38
ProfR7 (3.5 3461) 3411.750 3443.250 0≤n≤18 3461.750 3493.250 0≤n≤18
ProfR8 (3.5 3551) 3501.750 3598.000 0≤n≤55 3551.750 3648.000 0≤n≤55
ProfR9 (3.5 3651) 3601.750 3698.000 0≤n≤55 3651.750 3748.000 0≤n≤55
ProfR10 (3.5 3751) 3701.750 3798.000 0≤n≤55 3751.750 3848.000 0≤n≤55
ProfR11 (7 2600) 2526.500 2589.500 0≤n≤36 2600.50 2663.50 0≤n≤36
ProfR12 (7 3463) 2413.500 3441.500 0≤n≤16 3463.50 3491.50 0≤n≤16
ProfR13 (7 3553) 3503.500 3596.250 0≤n≤53 3553.50 3646.25 0≤n≤53
ProfR14 (7 3653) 3603.500 3696.250 0≤n≤53 3653.50 3746.25 0≤n≤53
ProfR15 (7 3753) 3703.500 3796.250 0≤n≤53 3753.50 3846.25 0≤n≤53

JD700B Series User’s Guide 665

Appendix

ProfR26 (10 5275) 5275.000 5335.000 55≤n≤67

ProfR27 (10 5740) 5740.000 5830.000 148≤n≤166
ProfR28 (10 5735) 5735.000 5845.000 147≤n≤169
ProfR29 (8.75 2304) 2304.375 2395.625 0≤n≤730

666 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Appendix

Appendix D – VSWR-Return loss conversion table

This information is for the Cable and Antenna Analyzer mode of the JD785B/JD745B Base Station Analyzer
and the JD786B/JD746B RF Analyzer.

n Return Loss=20log10(VSWR+1/VSWR-1) (dB)

R.L./20 R.L./20
n VSWR=(10 +1/10 -1)

VSWR Return Trans. Volt. Power Power VSWR Return Trans. Volt. Power Power
Loss Loss Refl Trans Refl Loss Loss Refl Trans Refl
(dB) (dB) Coeff (%) (%) (dB) (dB) Coeff (%) (%)
1.00 -- 0.000 0.00 100.0 0.0 1.64 12.3 0.263 0.24 94.1 5.9
1.01 46.1 0.000 0.00 100.0 0.0 1.66 12.1 0.276 0.25 93.8 6.2
1.02 40.1 0.000 0.01 100.0 0.0 1.68 11.9 0.289 0.25 93.6 6.4
1.03 36.6 0.001 0.01 100.0 0.0 1.70 11.7 0.302 0.26 93.3 6.7
1.04 34.2 0.002 0.02 100.0 0.0 1.72 11.5 0.315 0.26 93.0 7.0
1.05 32.3 0.003 0.02 99.9 0.1 1.74 11.4 0.329 0.27 92.7 7.3
1.06 30.7 0.004 0.03 99.9 0.1 1.76 11.2 0.342 0.28 92.4 7.6
1.07 29.4 0.005 0.03 99.9 0.1 1.78 11.0 0.356 0.28 92.1 7.9
1.08 28.3 0.006 0.04 99.9 0.1 1.80 10.9 0.370 0.29 91.8 8.2
1.09 27.3 0.008 0.04 99.8 0.2 1.82 10.7 0.384 0.29 91.5 8.5
1.10 26.4 0.010 0.05 99.8 0.2 1.84 10.6 0.398 0.30 91.3 8.7
1.11 25.7 0.012 0.05 99.7 0.3 1.86 10.4 0.412 0.30 91.0 9.0
1.12 24.9 0.014 0.06 99.7 0.3 1.88 10.3 0.426 0.31 90.7 9.3
1.13 24.3 0.016 0.06 99.6 0.4 1.90 10.2 0.440 0.31 90.4 9.6
1.14 23.7 0.019 0.07 99.6 0.4 1.92 10.0 0.454 0.32 90.1 9.9
1.15 23.1 0.021 0.07 99.5 0.5 1.94 9.9 0.468 0.32 89.8 10.2
1.16 22.6 0.024 0.07 99.5 0.5 1.96 9.8 0.483 0.32 89.5 10.5
1.17 22.1 0.027 0.08 99.4 0.6 1.98 9.7 0.497 0.33 89.2 10.8
1.18 21.7 0.030 0.08 99.3 0.7 2.00 9.5 0.512 0.33 88.9 11.1
1.19 21.2 0.033 0.09 99.2 0.8 2.50 7.4 0.881 0.43 81.6 18.4
1.20 20.8 0.036 0.09 99.2 0.8 3.00 6.0 1.249 0.50 75.0 25.0
1.21 20.4 0.039 0.10 99.1 0.9 3.50 5.1 1.603 0.56 69.1 30.9
1.22 20.1 0.043 0.10 99.0 1.0 4.00 4.4 1.938 0.60 64.0 36.0
1.23 19.7 0.046 0.10 98.9 1.1 4.50 3.9 2.255 0.64 59.5 40.5
1.24 19.4 0.050 0.11 98.9 1.1 5.00 3.5 2.553 0.67 55.6 44.4
1.25 19.1 0.054 0.11 98.8 1.2 5.50 3.2 2.834 0.69 52.1 47.9
1.26 18.8 0.058 0.12 98.7 1.3 6.00 2.9 3.100 0.71 49.0 51.0
1.27 18.5 0.062 0.12 98.6 1.4 6.50 2.7 3.351 0.73 46.2 53.8
1.28 18.2 0.066 0.12 98.5 1.5 7.00 2.5 3.590 0.75 43.7 56.3
1.29 17.9 0.070 0.13 98.4 1.6 7.50 2.3 3.817 0.76 41.5 58.5
1.30 17.7 0.075 0.13 98.3 1.7 8.00 2.2 4.033 0.78 39.5 60.5
1.32 17.2 0.083 0.14 98.1 1.9 8.50 2.1 4.240 0.79 37.7 62.3
1.34 16.8 0.093 0.15 97.9 2.1 9.00 1.9 4.437 0.80 36.0 64.0
1.36 16.3 0.102 0.15 97.7 2.3 9.50 1.8 4.626 0.81 34.5 65.5
1.38 15.9 0.112 0.16 97.5 2.5 10.00 1.7 4.807 0.82 33.1 66.9
1.40 15.8 0.122 0.17 97.2 2.8 11.00 1.6 5.149 0.83 30.6 69.4
1.42 15.2 0.133 0.17 97.0 3.0 12.00 1.5 5.466 0.85 28.4 71.6
1.44 14.9 0.144 0.18 96.7 3.3 13.00 1.3 5.762 0.86 26.5 73.5
1.46 14.6 0.155 0.19 96.5 3.5 14.00 1.2 6.040 0.87 24.9 75.1
1.48 14.3 0.166 0.19 96.3 3.7 15.00 1.2 6.301 0.88 23.4 76.6
1.50 14.0 0.177 0.20 96.0 4.0 16.00 1.1 6.547 0.88 22.1 77.9
1.52 13.7 0.189 0.21 95.7 4.3 17.00 1.0 6.780 0.89 21.0 79.0
1.54 13.4 0.201 0.21 95.5 4.5 18.00 1.0 7.002 0.89 19.9 80.1
1.56 13.2 0.213 0.22 95.2 4.8 19.00 0.9 7.212 0.90 19.0 81.0
1.58 13.0 0.225 0.22 94.9 5.1 20.00 0.9 7.413 0.90 18.1 81.9
1.60 12.7 0.238 0.23 94.7 5.3 25.00 0.7 8.299 0.92 14.8 85.2
1.62 12.5 0.250 0.24 94.4 5.6 30.00 0.6 9.035 0.94 12.5 87.5

JD700B Series User’s Guide 667

Appendix

Appendix E – Cyclic prefix table

This information is for the LTE – FDD Signal Analyzer mode and the LTE – TDD Signal Analyzer mode of the
JD785B/JD745B Base Station Analyzer and the JD788B/JD748B Signal Analyzer. Following table shows
OFDM parameter details by different bandwidth.

Cyclic Prefix Length

Bandwidth Configuration (Downlink)
TS µs
160 for l =0 5.208
Normal CP ∆f=15 kHz
144 for l =1,2,..,6 4.6875
20 MHz
∆f=15 kHz 512 for l =0,1,…,5 16.667
Extended CP
∆f=7.5 kHz 1024 for l =0,1,2 33.333
120 for l =0 5.208
Normal CP ∆f=15 kHz
108 for l =1,2,..,6 4.6875
15 MHz
∆f=15 kHz 384 for l =0,1,…,5 16.667
Extended CP
∆f=7.5 kHz 768 for l =0,1,2 33.333
80 for l =0 5.208
Normal CP ∆f=15 kHz
72 for l =1,2,..,6 4.6875
10 MHz
∆f=15 kHz 256 for l =0,1,…,5 16.667
Extended CP
∆f=7.5 kHz 512 for l =0,1,2 33.333
40 for l =0 5.208
Normal CP ∆f=15 kHz
36 for l =1,2,..,6 4.6875
5 MHz
∆f=15 kHz 128 for l =0,1,…,5 16.667
Extended CP
∆f=7.5 kHz 248 for l =0,1,2 33.333
20 for l =0 5.208
Normal CP ∆f=15 kHz
18 for l =1,2,..,6 4.6875
3 MHz
∆f=15 kHz 64 for l =0,1,…,5 16.667
Extended CP
∆f=7.5 kHz 128 for l =0,1,2 33.333
10 for l =0 5.208
Normal CP ∆f=15 kHz
9 for l =1,2,..,6 4.6875
1.4 MHz
∆f=15 kHz 32 for l =0,1,…,5 16.667
Extended CP
∆f=7.5 kHz 64 for l =0,1,2 33.333

668 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Appendix

Appendix F – Motorola CDMA/EV-DO LMF

Motorola’s CDMA/EV-DO base stations (BTS) are optimized with the assistance of Local Maintenance
Facility (LMF), a Motorola’s software tool that interfaces with the cell site and the instrument. The
optimization process identifies the accumulated loss (or gain) for all receiving and transmitting paths at the
cell site and stores that value in the system’s database.

Using JD700B series LMF interface

An emulation interface to LMF has been implemented in Viavi’s base station analyzer (JD785B/
JD745B) in order to perform BTS optimization procedures. The scope of this emulation is to do maintenance
tests of TX Calibration and TX Audit required in routine maintenance practices with or without the use of an
external power sensor. Using the external power sensor, you can get highly accurate measurement results.

Setting up for a LMF test

Procedure

1 To connect your instrument both with BTS and PC, do one of the following:
– Internal power sensor: Connect the Motorola CDMA/EV-DO BTS with the Spectrum
Analyzer RF In 50 Ω port of JD785B/JD745B and connect the WinLMF running PC with
JD785B/JD745B via a hub as illustrated in the Figure 373.
– External power sensor: Connect an external power sensor to the USB Host port of JD785B/
JD745B and to the BTS and connect the WinLMF running PC with JD785B/JD745B via a
hub as illustrated in the Figure 374.

Figure 373 Using internal power sensor

JD700B Series User’s Guide 669

Appendix

Figure 374 Using external power sensor

Performing a LMF test

Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

2 To set the IP address, complete the following steps:
a Select System Configuration > Ethernet Config > IPv4.
b Toggle the Mode soft key and select Static.
c Press the Field > IP Address soft key.
d Set the IP address as “192.167.10.1”.
3 Select Remote Interface > LAN > LMF.
4 To set up the LMF settings, complete the following steps:
a Press the LMF Settings soft key.
b Select the power measurement and BTS option from the following choices:
– External PM 800 MHz Band for external measurement on cellular basestation
– External PM 1900 MHz Band for external meausrement on PCS basestation
– Internal PM 800 MHz Band for internal measurement on celluar basestation
– Internal PM 1900 MHz Band for internal measurement on PCS basestation
5 To select the measurement mode, complete the following steps:
a Press the MODE hard key.
b Press the Power Meter soft key.
c Select Internal RF Power Meter or External RF Power Meter depending on your LMF
settings. The measurement result is displayed on the screen.

670 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Appendix

Appendix G – Bluetooth connection

JD700B series’ Bluetooth mode is used for communication between the instrument and your computer with
JDRemote or a storage device in order to use the following services if needed.

n Bluetooth Personal Area Network (PAN) profile service for JDRemote.

n Bluetooth File Transfer Profile (FTP) or Object Push Profile (OPP) service for file transfer from the
instrument to a Bluetooth storage device.

The Bluetooth Connectivity option includes a pair of Bluetooth USB Parani-UD100 Adapters and 5 dBi
Dipole Antennas as well as the BlueSoleil application software.

Installing and setting up Bluetooth software

The BlueSoleil application must be installed in your computer prior to making a Bluetooth connection. After
installing the software, you must disable DHCP Server option in order to use the PAN service properly.

Procedure

1 Insert the provided CD-ROM into your computer and install the software as instructed.
The BlueSoleil Space shortcut icon appears on the desktop.

NOTE
For more information on installation, refer to the Quick Start Guide or the User Guide
provided with the adapter.

2 Double-click the BlueSoleil Space shortcut icon on your computer desktop to launch the
application.
The BlueSoleil program window appears.
3 Right-click the My Device icon (the orange ball) in the center of the window, and then click
Properties > Services tab.
The My Device Properties window appears.
4 Select the Bluetooth Personal Area Network from the list, and then click the Properties button.
The Bluetooth Personal Area Network Properties window appears.
5 Click the Options tab, and then uncheck the Enable DHCP Server option.

NOTE
You must uncheck it to disable this option as the Enable DHCP Server option is checked
by default.

6 Click the OK button.

The Bluetooth Personal Area Network Properties window dismisses.
7 Click the OK button.
The My Device Properties window dismisses.

Making Bluetooth connection

The JD700B series detects a connected Parani-UD100 USB Bluetooth Adapter automatically.

Procedure

1 Connect the 5 dBi Dipole Antenna to the Parani-UD100 Bluetooth USB Adapter: one for the
computer and the other for JD700B series.
2 Plug in the Bluetooth adapters to the USB port of the computer and the instrument.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 671

Appendix

The instrument detects the connected adapter and turns the Bluetooth mode on automatically.
The Bluetooth icon appears in the status bar at the top of the instrument screen.
3 Double-click the BlueSoleil Space icon on the computer desktop to launch the application if not
opened already.
The BlueSoleil program window appears.
4 Double-click the My Device icon (orange ball) in the center of the application window to search
the JD700B series.
You can view an added icon around the orange ball labeled with the detected JD700B series’ BD
address or model and serial numbers.
5 Right-click the device icon for the JD700B series, and then click the Pair.
The Bluetooth Passkey window appears.
6 Enter 0000 in the Passkey box, and then click the OK button.
The word “Paired” appears on the window. The instrument also turns the Bluetooth Mode on
automatically and displays the paired device and service information on the screen.
7 Double-click the device icon for the JD700B series to search services.
8 Right-click the icon for the JD700B series, and then select either the Connect Bluetooth
Personal Area Network or the Connect Bluetooth File Transfer.

NOTE
Select one of these services as needed. If the Connect Bluetooth Personal Area Network
is selected, a fixed IP address (192.168.10.10) is assigned for JD700B series and this
address must be typed into the TCP/IP setting on JDViewer or JDRemote. See “Setting
up communication in application” on page 672 for more information.

Setting up communication in application

If the Connect Bluetooth Personal Area Network service is selected on BlueSoleil, you need to configure
communication setting on the application JDViewer or JDRemote by entering the fixed IP address for the
instrument.

JDViewer setup

Procedure

1 Launch the JDViewer application.

2 Go to Settings > Communication.
The Settings dialog box appears.
3 Click the drop-down list in the Instrument pane, and then select the instrument series to be
communicated.
4 In the Connection Method pane, select the TCP/IP, and then enter 192.168.10.10 without dots.
5 Click OK to finish the communication setup.
6 Go to Load > Connect to make a connection between the instrument and JDViewer.
JD700B series and JDViewer become ready for communication.

JDRemote setup

Procedure

1 Launch the JDRemote application.

The Select Model dialog box appears.
2 Select the 740A/B, 780A/B Series, and then click the OK button.
3 Right-click on the JDRemote window, and then click the Communication.
The Communication dialog box appears.
4 Select the TCP/IP, and then enter 192.168.10.10 without dots.
5 Click OK to finish the communication setup.

672 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Appendix

6 Right-click on the JDRemote window, and then click the Connect.

This enables communication between the instrument and JDRemote.
7 Right-click on the JDRemote window, and then click the Start.
JD700B series and JDRemote become ready for communication.
8 Optional. To adjust the image quality, complete the following steps:
a Right-click on the JDRemote.
b Click the Quality.
c Select the image quality option among High, Medium, or Low.
You can improve refresh rate, if experiencing low-quality signal, by adjusting the image
quality in JDRemote.

Turning Bluetooth mode on/off manually

JD700B series turns the Bluetooth Mode on automatically if connected. You can also turn it on and off
manually.

Procedure

1 Press the SYSTEM hot key.

2 Press the > Remote Interface > Bluetooth soft key.
The Bluetooth screen appears with the device information.
3 Toggle the Bluetooth soft key between On and Off to turn it on and off.
Connecting or disconnecting the adapter also turns the mode on or off automatically.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 673

Appendix

Appendix H – Device driver installation

JD700B series can be controlled from the application software JDViewer or JDRemote installed on your
computer. You must install driver software for the instrument on to the computer if USB Client connection is
used for communication.

Procedure

1 Go to Control Panel > System > Device Manager.

The Device Manager window appears.
2 Right-click the Unknown Device under the Other Devices, and then click the Update Driver
Software.
The Update Driver Software – Unknown Device window appears as shown in Figure 375 below.
3 Select the Browse my computer for driver software, and then click the Browse button to
search for the location where the driver software is.
The Browse For Folder window appears.
4 Search for the JDRemote folder, and then select the driver folder for the installed OS.
For example, OSDisk (C:) > Program Files (x86) > JDRemote > Driver > Win7 > 64bit.
5 Click the OK button.
The Browse For Folder window dismisses.
6 Click the Next button to start installation.
If the Windows Security window appears, select the Install this driver software anyway.
Installing driver software starts.
7 Click the Close button at the end of the installation.

Figure 375 Device manager screen

674 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Appendix

Appendix I – Ordering information

JD785B Base Station Analyzer
JD785B
9 kHz to 8 GHz Spectrum Analyzer
1
5 MHz to 6 GHz Cable and Antenna Analyzer
10 MHz to 8 GHz RF Power Meter Internal mode

Options
NOTE: Upgrade options for the JD785B use the designation JD785BU before the respective last three-digit option number.
2
JD785B001 2-Port Transmission Measurements
JD785B002 Bias Tee (Requires option 01)
JD785B003 High Power CW Signal Generator
3
JD785B008 Optical Hardware
JD785B010 GPS Receiver and Antenna
4, 5
JD785B011 Interference Analyzer
JD785B012 Channel Scanner
JD785B013 Bluetooth Connectivity
JD785B014 LTE-FDD RAN Performance Indicator
JD785B015 LTE-TDD RAN Performance Indicator
JD785B016 Wi-Fi Connectivity
JD785B020 cdmaOne/cdma2000 Signal Analyzer
JD785B021 EV-DO Signal Analyzer (Requires option 20)
JD785B022 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer
JD785B023 WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer
JD785B025 TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer
JD785B026 Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer
JD785B028 LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer
JD785B029 LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer
JD785B030 LTE Advanced-FDD Signal Analyzer (Requires option 28)
JD785B031 LTE Advanced-TDD Signal Analyzer (Requires option 29)
5
JD785B040 cdmaOne/cdma2000 OTA Analyzer (Requires option 10)
5
JD785B041 EV-DO OTA Analyzer (Requires option 10)
5
JD785B042 GSM/GPRS/EDGE OTA Analyzer (Requires option 10)
5
JD785B043 WCDMA/HSPA+ OTA Analyzer (Requires option 10)
5
JD785B045 TD-SCDMA OTA Analyzer (Requires option 10)
5
JD785B046 Mobile WiMAX OTA Analyzer (Requires option 10)
5
JD785B048 LTE-FDD OTA Analyzer (Requires option 10)
5
JD785B049 LTE-TDD OTA Analyzer (Requires option 10)
6
JD785B060 RFoCPRI 614M & 1.2G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD785B061 RFoCPRI 2.4G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD785B062 RFoCPRI 3.1G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD785B063 RFoCPRI 4.9G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD785B064 RFoCPRI 6.1G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD785B065 RFoCPRI 9.8G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD785B070 RFoOBSAI 768M Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD785B071 RFoOBSAI 1.5G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD785B072 RFoOBSAI 3.1G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD785B073 RFoOBSAI 6.1G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD785B081 RFoCPRI LTE-FDD Signal Generator (Requires options 08, 60-65)
6
JD785B091 RFoCPRI LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer (Requires options 08, 60-65)
6
JD785B092 RFoCPRI LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer (Requires options 08, 60-65)
6
JD785B096 RFoOBSAI LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer (Requires options 08, 70-73)
JD785B200 Calibration Service for Asia, North America
JD785B201 Calibration Service for Latin America, EMEA
JD785B250 Warranty extension of 1 year for Asia, North America

JD700B Series User’s Guide 675

Appendix

JD785B251 Warranty extension of 1 year for Latin America, EMEA

Standard Accessories
7
JD70050326 AC/DC Power Adapter for JD700B Series
7
G710550335 Cross LAN Cable (1.5 m)
7
GC73050515 USB A to B Cable (1.8 m)
7
GC72450518 > 1 G Byte USB Memory
7
G710550325 Rechargeable Lithium Ion Battery
7
G710550323 Automotive Cigarette Lighter 12 V DC Adapter
7
G710550316 Stylus Pen
JD700B361 JD700B Series User’s Guide and Application Software – CD
1
Requires calibration kit
2
Requires dual port calibration kit
3
Requires RFoCPRI or RFoOBSAI options
4
Highly recommended adding JD785B010
5
Highly recommended adding G70005035x and/or G70005036x
6
Requires proper SFP/SFP+ transceiver and optical tap.
7
Standard accessories can be purchased separately.

JD786B RF Analyzer
JD786B
9 kHz to 8 GHz Spectrum Analyzer
1
5 MHz to 6 GHz Cable and Antenna Analyzer
10 MHz to 8 GHz RF Power Meter Internal mode

Options
NOTE: Upgrade options for the JD786B use the designation JD786BU before the respective last three-digit option number.
2
JD786B001 2-Port Transmission Measurements
JD786B002 Bias Tee (Requires option 01)
JD786B003 High Power CW Signal Generator
3
JD786B008 Optical Hardware
JD786B010 GPS Receiver and Antenna
4,5
JD786B011 Interference Analyzer
JD786B012 Channel Scanner
JD786B013 Bluetooth Connectivity
JD786B016 Wi-Fi Connectivity
6
JD786B060 RFoCPRI 614M & 1.2G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD786B061 RFoCPRI 2.4G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD786B062 RFoCPRI 3.1G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD786B063 RFoCPRI 4.9G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD786B064 RFoCPRI 6.1G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD786B065 RFoCPRI 9.8G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD786B070 RFoOBSAI 768M Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD786B071 RFoOBSAI 1.5G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD786B072 RFoOBSAI 3.1G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD786B073 RFoOBSAI 6.1G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD786B081 RFoCPRI LTE-FDD Signal Generator (Requires options 08, 60-65)
JD786B200 Calibration Service for Asia, North America
JD786B201 Calibration Service for Latin America, EMEA
JD786B250 Warranty extension of 1 year for Asia, North America
JD786B251 Warranty extension of 1 year for Latin America, EMEA

Standard Accessories
7
JD70050326 AC/DC Power Adapter for JD700B Series
7
G710550335 Cross LAN Cable (1.5 m)
7
GC73050515 USB A to B Cable (1.8 m)

676 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Appendix

7
GC72450518 > 1 G Byte USB Memory
7
G710550325 Rechargeable Lithium Ion Battery
7
G710550323 Automotive Cigarette Lighter 12 V DC Adapter
7
G710550316 Stylus Pen
JD700B361 JD700B Series User’s Guide and Application Software – CD
1
Requires calibration kit
2
Requires dual port calibration kit
3
Requires RFoCPRI or RFoOBSAI options
4
Highly recommended adding JD786B010
5
Highly recommended adding G70005035x and/or G70005036x
6
Requires proper SFP/SFP+ transceiver and optical tap
7
Standard accessories can be purchased separately.

JD788B Signal Analyzer

JD788B
9 kHz to 8 GHz Spectrum Analyzer
10 MHz to 8 GHz RF Power Meter Internal mode

Options
NOTE: Upgrade options for the JD788B use the designation JD788BU before the respective last three-digit option number.
1
JD788B001 2-Port Transmission Measurements (Requires option 07)
JD788B003 High Power CW Signal Generator (Requires option 07)
JD788B007 Signal Generator Hardware
2
JD788B008 Optical Hardware
JD788B009 20 MHz Demodulation Hardware
JD788B010 GPS Receiver and Antenna
3,4
JD788B011 Interference Analyzer
JD788B012 Channel Scanner
JD788B013 Bluetooth Connectivity
JD788B014 LTE-FDD RAN Performance Indicator
JD788B015 LTE-TDD RAN Performance Indicator
JD786B016 Wi-Fi Connectivity
JD788B020 cdmaOne/cdma2000 Signal Analyzer (Requires option 09)
JD788B021 EV-DO Signal Analyzer (Requires options 09 and 20)
JD788B022 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer (Requires option 09)
JD788B023 WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer (Requires option 09)
JD788B025 TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer (Requires option 09)
JD788B026 Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer (Requires option 09)
JD788B028 LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer (Requires option 09)
JD788B029 LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer (Requires option 09)
JD788B030 LTE Advanced-FDD Signal Analyzer (Requires options 09 and 28)
JD788B031 LTE Advanced-TDD Signal Analyzer (Requires options 09 and 29)
4
JD788B040 cdmaOne/cdma2000 OTA Analyzer (Requires options 09 and 10)
4
JD788B041 EV-DO OTA Analyzer (Requires options 09 and 10)
4
JD788B042 GSM/GPRS/EDGE OTA Analyzer (Requires options 09 and 10)
4
JD788B043 WCDMA/HSPA+ OTA Analyzer (Requires options 09 and 10)
4
JD788B045 TD-SCDMA OTA Analyzer (Requires options 09 and 10)
4
JD788B046 Mobile WiMAX OTA Analyzer (Requires options 09 and 10)
4
JD788B048 LTE-FDD OTA Analyzer (Requires options 09 and 10)
4
JD788B049 LTE-TDD OTA Analyzer (Requires options 09 and 10)
5
JD788B060 RFoCPRI 614M & 1.2G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
5
JD788B061 RFoCPRI 2.4G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
5
JD788B062 RFoCPRI 3.1G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
5
JD788B063 RFoCPRI 4.9G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
5
JD788B064 RFoCPRI 6.1G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
5
JD788B065 RFoCPRI 9.8G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)

JD700B Series User’s Guide 677

Appendix

5
JD788B070 RFoOBSAI 768M Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
5
JD788B071 RFoOBSAI 1.5G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
5
JD788B072 RFoOBSAI 3.1G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
5
JD788B073 RFoOBSAI 6.1G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
5
JD788B081 RFoCPRI LTE-FDD Signal Generator (Requires options 08, 60-65)
5
JD788B091 RFoCPRI LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer (Requires options 08, 60-65)
5
JD788B092 RFoCPRI LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer (Requires options 08, 60-65)
5
JD788B096 RFoOBSAI LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer (Requires options 08, 70-73)
JD788B200 Calibration Service for Asia, North America
JD788B201 Calibration Service for Latin America, EMEA
JD788B250 Warranty extension of 1 year for Asia, North America
JD788B251 Warranty extension of 1 year for Latin America, EMEA

Standard Accessories
6
JD70050326 AC/DC Power Adapter for JD700B Series
6
G710550335 Cross LAN Cable (1.5 m)
6
GC73050515 USB A to B Cable (1.8 m)
6
GC72450518 > 1 G Byte USB Memory
6
G710550325 Rechargeable Lithium Ion Battery
6
G710550323 Automotive Cigarette Lighter 12 V DC Adapter
6
G710550316 Stylus Pen
JD700B361 JD700B Series User’s Guide and Application Software – CD
1
Requires dual port calibration kit
2
Requires RFoCPRI or RFoOBSAI options
3
Highly recommended adding JD788B010
4
Highly recommended adding G70005035x and/or G70005036x
5
Requires proper SFP/SFP+ transceiver and optical pad
6
Standard accessories can be purchased separately.

JD745B Base Station Analyzer

JD745B
100 kHz to 4 GHz Spectrum Analyzer
1
5 MHz to 4 GHz Cable and Antenna Analyzer
10 MHz to 4 GHz RF Power Meter Internal mode

Options
NOTE: Upgrade options for the JD745B use the designation JD745BU before the respective last three-digit option number.
2
JD745B001 2-Port Transmission Measurements
JD745B002 Bias Tee (Requires option 01)
JD745B003 CW Signal Generator
3
JD745B008 Optical Hardware
JD745B010 GPS Receiver and Antenna
4, 5
JD745B011 Interference Analyzer
JD745B012 Channel Scanner
JD745B013 Bluetooth Connectivity
JD745B014 LTE-FDD RAN Performance Indicator
JD745B015 LTE-TDD RAN Performance Indicator
JD745B016 Wi-Fi Connectivity
JD745B020 cdmaOne/cdma2000 Signal Analyzer
JD745B021 EV-DO Signal Analyzer (Requires option 20)
JD745B022 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer
JD745B023 WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer
JD745B025 TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer
JD745B026 Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer
JD745B028 LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer
JD745B029 LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer

678 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Appendix

JD745B030 LTE Advanced-FDD Signal Analyzer (Requires option 28)

JD745B031 LTE Advanced-TDD Signal Analyzer (Requires option 29)
5
JD745B040 cdmaOne/cdma2000 OTA Analyzer (Requires option 10)
5
JD745B041 EV-DO OTA Analyzer (Requires option 10)
5
JD745B042 GSM/GPRS/EDGE OTA Analyzer (Requires option 10)
5
JD745B043 WCDMA/HSPA+ OTA Analyzer (Requires option 10)
5
JD745B045 TD-SCDMA OTA Analyzer (Requires option 10)
5
JD745B046 Mobile WiMAX OTA Analyzer (Requires option 10)
5
JD745B048 LTE-FDD OTA Analyzer (Requires option 10)
5
JD745B049 LTE-TDD OTA Analyzer (Requires option 10)
6
JD745B060 RFoCPRI 614M & 1.2G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD745B061 RFoCPRI 2.4G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD745B062 RFoCPRI 3.1G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD745B063 RFoCPRI 4.9G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD745B064 RFoCPRI 6.1G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD745B065 RFoCPRI 9.8G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD745B070 RFoOBSAI 768M Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD745B071 RFoOBSAI 1.5G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD745B072 RFoOBSAI 3.1G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD745B073 RFoOBSAI 6.1G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD745B081 RFoCPRI LTE-FDD Signal Generator (Requires options 08, 60-65)
6
JD745B091 RFoCPRI LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer (Requires options 08, 60-65)
6
JD745B092 RFoCPRI LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer (Requires options 08, 60-65)
6
JD745B096 RFoOBSAI LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer (Requires options 08, 70-73)
JD745B200 Calibration Service for Asia, North America
JD745B201 Calibration Service for Latin America, EMEA
JD745B250 Warranty extension of 1 year for Asia, North America
JD745B251 Warranty extension of 1 year for Latin America, EMEA

Standard Accessories
7
JD70050326 AC/DC Power Adapter for JD700B Series
7
G710550335 Cross LAN Cable (1.5 m)
7
GC73050515 USB A to B Cable (1.8 m)
7
GC72450518 > 1 G Byte USB Memory
7
G710550325 Rechargeable Lithium Ion Battery
7
G710550323 Automotive Cigarette Lighter 12 V DC Adapter
7
G710550316 Stylus Pen
JD700B361 JD700B Series User’s Guide and Application Software – CD
1
Requires calibration kit
2
Requires dual port calibration kit
3
Requires RFoCPRI or RFoOBSAI options
4
Highly recommended adding JD745B010
5
Highly recommended adding G70005035x and/or G70005036x
6
Requires proper SFP/SFP+ transceiver and optical tap.
7
Standard accessories can be purchased separately.

JD746B RF Analyzer
JD746B
100 kHz to 4 GHz Spectrum Analyzer
1
5 MHz to 4 GHz Cable and Antenna Analyzer
10 MHz to 4 GHz RF Power Meter Internal mode

Options
NOTE: Upgrade options for the JD746B use the designation JD746BU before the respective last three-digit option number.
2
JD746B001 2-Port Transmission Measurements
JD746B002 Bias Tee (Requires option 01)

JD700B Series User’s Guide 679

Appendix

JD746B003 CW Signal Generator

3
JD746B008 Optical Hardware
JD746B010 GPS Receiver and Antenna
4,5
JD746B011 Interference Analyzer
JD746B012 Channel Scanner
JD746B013 Bluetooth Connectivity
JD746B016 Wi-Fi Connectivity
6
JD746B060 RFoCPRI 614M & 1.2G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD746B061 RFoCPRI 2.4G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD746B062 RFoCPRI 3.1G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD746B063 RFoCPRI 4.9G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD746B064 RFoCPRI 6.1G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD746B065 RFoCPRI 9.8G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD746B070 RFoOBSAI 768M Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD746B071 RFoOBSAI 1.5G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD746B072 RFoOBSAI 3.1G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD746B073 RFoOBSAI 6.1G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
6
JD746B081 RFoCPRI LTE-FDD Signal Generator (Requires options 08, 60-65)
JD746B200 Calibration Service for Asia, North America
JD746B201 Calibration Service for Latin America, EMEA
JD746B250 Warranty extension of 1 year for Asia, North America
JD746B251 Warranty extension of 1 year for Latin America, EMEA

Standard Accessories
7
JD70050326 AC/DC Power Adapter for JD700B Series
7
G710550335 Cross LAN Cable (1.5 m)
7
GC73050515 USB A to B Cable (1.8 m)
7
GC72450518 > 1 G Byte USB Memory
7
G710550325 Rechargeable Lithium Ion Battery
7
G710550323 Automotive Cigarette Lighter 12 V DC Adapter
7
G710550316 Stylus Pen
JD700B361 JD700B Series User’s Guide and Application Software – CD
1
Requires calibration kit
2
Requires dual port calibration kit
3
Requires RFoCPRI or RFoOBSAI options
4
Highly recommended adding JD746B010
5
Highly recommended adding G70005035x and/or G70005036x
6
Requires proper SFP/SFP+ transceiver and optical tap
7
Standard accessories can be purchased separately.

JD748B Signal Analyzer

JD748B
100 kHz to 4 GHz Spectrum Analyzer
10 MHz to 4 GHz RF Power Meter Internal mode

Options
NOTE: Upgrade options for the JD748B use the designation JD748BU before the respective last three-digit option
number.
1
JD748B001 2-Port Transmission Measurements (Requires option 07)
JD748B003 CW Signal Generator (Requires option 07)
JD748B007 Signal Generator Hardware
2
JD748B008 Optical Hardware
JD748B009 20 MHz Demodulation Hardware
JD748B010 GPS Receiver and Antenna
3,4
JD748B011 Interference Analyzer
JD748B012 Channel Scanner

680 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Appendix

JD748B013 Bluetooth Connectivity

JD748B014 LTE-FDD RAN Performance Indicator
JD748B015 LTE-TDD RAN Performance Indicator
JD748B016 Wi-Fi Connectivity
JD748B020 cdmaOne/cdma2000 Signal Analyzer (Requires option 09)
JD748B021 EV-DO Signal Analyzer (Requires options 09 and 20)
JD748B022 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Signal Analyzer (Requires option 09)
JD748B023 WCDMA/HSPA+ Signal Analyzer (Requires option 09)
JD748B025 TD-SCDMA Signal Analyzer (Requires option 09)
JD748B026 Mobile WiMAX Signal Analyzer (Requires option 09)
JD748B028 LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer (Requires option 09)
JD748B029 LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer (Requires option 09)
JD748B030 LTE Advanced-FDD Signal Analyzer (Requires options 09 and 28)
JD748B031 LTE Advanced-TDD Signal Analyzer (Requires options 09 and 29)
4
JD748B040 cdmaOne/cdma2000 OTA Analyzer (Requires options 09 and 10)
4
JD748B041 EV-DO OTA Analyzer (Requires options 09 and 10)
4
JD748B042 GSM/GPRS/EDGE OTA Analyzer (Requires options 09 and 10)
4
JD748B043 WCDMA/HSPA+ OTA Analyzer (Requires options 09 and 10)
4
JD748B045 TD-SCDMA OTA Analyzer (Requires options 09 and 10)
4
JD748B046 Mobile WiMAX OTA Analyzer (Requires options 09 and 10)
4
JD748B048 LTE-FDD OTA Analyzer (Requires options 09 and 10)
4
JD748B049 LTE-TDD OTA Analyzer (Requires options 09 and 10)
5
JD748B060 RFoCPRI 614M & 1.2G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
5
JD748B061 RFoCPRI 2.4G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
5
JD748B062 RFoCPRI 3.1G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
5
JD748B063 RFoCPRI 4.9G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
5
JD748B064 RFoCPRI 6.1G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
5
JD748B065 RFoCPRI 9.8G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
5
JD748B070 RFoOBSAI 768M Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
5
JD748B071 RFoOBSAI 1.5G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
5
JD748B072 RFoOBSAI 3.1G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
5
JD748B073 RFoOBSAI 6.1G Interference Analyzer (Requires option 08)
5
JD748B081 RFoCPRI LTE-FDD Signal Generator (Requires options 08, 60-65)
5
JD748B091 RFoCPRI LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer (Requires options 08, 60-65)
6
JD748B092 RFoCPRI LTE-TDD Signal Analyzer (Requires options 08, 60-65)
6
JD748B096 RFoOBSAI LTE-FDD Signal Analyzer (Requires options 08, 70-73)
JD748B200 Calibration Service for Asia, North America
JD748B201 Calibration Service for Latin America, EMEA
JD748B250 Warranty extension of 1 year for Asia, North America
JD748B251 Warranty extension of 1 year for Latin America, EMEA

Standard Accessories
6
JD70050326 AC/DC Power Adapter for JD700B Series
6
G710550335 Cross LAN Cable (1.5 m)
6
GC73050515 USB A to B Cable (1.8 m)
6
GC72450518 > 1 G Byte USB Memory
6
G710550325 Rechargeable Lithium Ion Battery
6
G710550323 Automotive Cigarette Lighter 12 V DC Adapter
6
G710550316 Stylus Pen
JD700B361 JD700B Series User’s Guide and Application Software – CD
1
Requires dual port calibration kit
2
Requires RFoCPRI or RFoOBSAI options
3
Highly recommended adding JD748B010
4
Highly recommended adding G70005035x and/or G70005036x
5
Requires proper SFP/SFP+ transceiver and optical pad
6
Standard accessories can be purchased separately.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 681

Appendix

JD700B Series Common Options

Optional RF Power Sensors
JD731B Directional Power Sensor, Peak and Average power 300 to 3800 MHz
JD732B Terminating Power Sensor, Average Power 20 to 3800 MHz
JD733A Directional Power Sensor, Peak and Average power 150 to 3500 MHz
JD734B Terminating Power Sensor, Peak power 20 to 3800 MHz
JD736B Terminating Power Sensor, Dual (Average/Peak) power 20 to 3800 MHz

Optional Optical Power Meters

MP-60A USB Optical Power Meter, with software, 2.5 mm and 1.25 mm interfaces,
30" USB extender, carrying pouch
MP-80A USB Optical Power Meter-High Power, with software, 2.5 mm and 1.25 mm interfaces, 30"
USB extender, carrying pouch

Optional Calibration Kits

JD78050509 Y-Calibration Kit Type-N(m), DC to 6 GHz, 50 Ω
JD78050510 Y-Calibration Kit DIN(m), DC to 6 GHz, 50 Ω
JD78050507 Dual Port Calibration Kit, Type-N(m) 6 GHz
JD78050508 Dual Port Calibration Kit, DIN(m) 6 GHz
TM
JD70050509 Electronic Calibration Kit (EZ-Cal ), Type-N(m), DC to 6 GHz, 50 Ω

Optional Fiber Microscope Kits

FBP-SD101 FBP-P5000i Digital Probe, FiberChekPRO SW, Case, and 4 Tips
FBP-MTS-101 FBP-P5000i Digital Probe, FiberChekPRO SW, Case, and 7 Tips
FIT-SD103 FBP-P5000i Digital Probe, MP-60A USB Power Meter, FiberChekPRO SW, Case, Tips and
Adapters
FIT-SD103-C FBP-P5000i Digital Probe, MP-60A USB Power Meter, FiberChekPRO SW, Case, Tips and
Adapters
FIT-SD113 FBP-P5000i Digital Probe, MP-80A USB Power Meter, FiberChekPRO SW, Case, Tips and
Adapters

Optional RF Cables
G710050530 RF Cable DC to 8 GHz Type-N(m) to Type-N(m), 1.0 m
G710050531 RF Cable DC to 8 GHz Type-N(m) to Type-N(f), 1.5 m
G710050532 RF Cable DC to 8 GHz Type-N(m) to Type-N(f), 3.0 m
G710050533 RF Cable DC to 18 GHz Type-N(m) to SMA(m), 1.5 m
G710050534 RF Cable DC to 18 GHz Type-N(m) to QMA(m), 1.5 m
G710050535 RF Cable DC to 18 GHz Type-N(m) to SMB(m),1.5 m
G710050536 RF Cable DC to 6 GHz Type-N(m) to DIN(f), 1.5 m
G710050537 RF Cable DC to 4 GHz Type-N(m) to 1.0/2.3 (m), 1.5 m
G700050540 Phase-Stable RF Cable w Grip DC to 6 GHz Type-N(m) to Type-N(f), 1.5 m
G700050541 Phase-Stable RF Cable w Grip DC to 6 GHz Type-N(m) to DIN(f), 1.5 m

Optional Optic Cables

G700050401 SM/LC T-Jumper and 1.5 m fiber cable
G700050402 MM/LC T-Jumper and 1.5 m fiber cable

Optional RF Omni Antennas

G700050353 RF Omni Antenna Type-N(m), 806 MHz to 896 MHz
G700050354 RF Omni Antenna Type-N(m), 870 MHz to 960 MHz
G700050355 RF Omni Antenna Type-N(m), 1.71 GHz to 2.17 GHz

682 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Appendix

G700050356 RF Omni Antenna Type-N(m), 720 MHz to 800 MHz

G700050357 RF Omni Antenna Type-N(m), 2.3 GHz to 2.7 GHz

Optional RF Directional Antennas

G700050363 RF Yagi Antenna Type-N(f), 1.75 GHz to 2.39 GHz, 9.8 dBd
G700050364 RF Yagi Antenna Type-N(f), 806 MHz to 896 MHz, 10.2 dBd
G700050365 RF Yagi Antenna Type-N(f), 866 MHz to 960 MHz, 10.2 dBd
G700050366 RF Log-periodic Antenna SMA(f), 700 MHz to 4 GHz, 1.85 dBd

Optional RF Adapters
G700050571 Adapter Type-N(m) to DIN(f), DC to 7.5 GHz, 50 Ω
G700050572 Adapter DIN(m) to DIN(m), DC to 7.5 GHz, 50 Ω
G700050573 Adapter Type-N(m) to SMA(f) DC to 18 GHz, 50 Ω
G700050574 Adapter Type-N(m) to BNC(f), DC to 4 GHz, 50 Ω
G700050575 Adapter Type-N(f) to Type-N(f), DC to 18 GHz, 50 Ω
G700050576 Adapter Type-N(m) to DIN(m), DC to7.5 GHz, 50 Ω
G700050577 Adapter Type-N(f) to DIN(f), DC to 7.5 GHz, 50 Ω
G700050578 Adapter Type-N(f) to DIN(m), DC to 7.5 GHz, 50 Ω
G700050579 Adapter DIN(f) to DIN(f), DC to 7.5 GHz, 50 Ω
G700050580 Adapter Type-N(m) to Type-N(m), DC to 11 GHz, 50 Ω
G700050581 Adapter N(m) to QMA(f), DC to 6.0 GHz, 50 Ω
G700050582 Adapter N(m) to QMA(m), DC to 6.0 GHz, 50 Ω
G700050583 Adapter N(m) to 4.1/9.5 MINI DIN (f), DC to 6.0 GHz, 50 Ω
G700050584 Adapter N(m) to 4.1/9.5 MINI DIN (m), DC to 6.0 GHz, 50 Ω

StrataSync Subscription
SS-CA-BSA-AM-01 StrataSync for CellAdvisor BSA - Asset Management-1 Yr.
SS-CA-BSA-TDM-01 StrataSync for CellAdvisor BSA - Test Data Management-1 Yr.
SS-CA-RFA-AM-01 StrataSync for CellAdvisor RFA - Asset Management-1 Yr.
SS-CA-RFA-TDM-01 StrataSync for CellAdvisor RFA - Test Data Management-1 Yr.
SS-CA-SA-AM-01 StrataSync for CellAdvisor SA - Asset Management-1 Yr.
SS-CA-SA-TDM-01 StrataSync for CellAdvisor SA - Test Data Management-1 Yr.

Optional Miscellaneous
G710050581 Attenuator 40 dB, 100 W, DC to 4 GHz (Unidirectional)
G710050585 RF Directional Coupler, 700 to 4000 MHz, 30 dB, 50 W
1
Input/Output; Type-N(m) to Type-N(f), Tap Off; Type-N(f)
1
G710050586 RF combiner, 700 to 4000 MHz, Type-N(f) to Type-N(m)
2
G710050587 4x1 RF combiner, 700 to 4000 MHz, Type-N(f) to Type-N(m)
JD74050341 Soft carrying case
JD71050342 Hard Carrying Case
JD70050342 Hard Carrying Case with wheels
JD70050343 CellAdvisor Backpack Carrying Case
JD70050006 USB Bluetooth Dongle and 5 dBi Dipole Antenna
3
JD70050007 AntennaAdvisor Handle
JD71050351 GPS Antenna for JD740 and JD780 Series
G710550324 External Battery Charger
JD700B362 JD700B Series User’s Guide – Printed Version
1
Highly recommended for LTE testing
2
Highly recommended for LTE Advanced testing
3
Requires G700050366 RF Log-Periodic Antenna

JD700B Series User’s Guide 683

Appendix

Appendix J – RoHS information

This appendix describes the RoHS (Restriction of Hazardous Substances) information, which is a mandatory
requirement from China. The RoHS directive consists in the restriction on the use of certain hazardous substances in
electrical or electronic equipment sold or used in the European Union, after July 1, 2006. These substances are: lead,
mercury, cadmium, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls, and polybrominated diphenyl ethers.

JD780B series

684 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Appendix

JD740B series

JD700B Series User’s Guide 685

Appendix

Appendix K – On-screen keyboard

You can use the on-screen keyboard to type in texts, file names, and folder names.

Adding or deleting letters

Procedure

1 Tap keys on the on-screen keyboard. As you type, each letter is displayed in the name field. If
you want to change the letter case between uppercase and lowercase, tap the Caps key.
2 To delete a letter, tap the Back key on the keyboard or press the backspace key on the keypad.
3 To move the cursor along the name field, tap the < or > key, turn the rotary knob, or touch in
between letters in the name field.
4 To delete all the letters displayed in the name field, tap the Clear key on the on-screen keyboard.

Figure 376 On-screen keyboard

Editing or adding a custom keyword

You can edit and delete a keyword or add a new one, as you desire.
Procedure

1 Tap the Edit Keywords bar on the on-screen keyboard.

The edit keywords keyboard appears.
2 To edit a keyword, select the keyword box and then change the letters.
3 To delete a keyword, select the keyword box and then tap the Clear key.
4 To add a keyword, select a blank keyword box and then type in a keyword.
5 Tap the Save key on the keyboard to save and continue saving.

686 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Appendix

Figure 377 Edit keywords keyboard

Appending a keyword
You can append a factory-stored or custom-defined keyword, as you want.

Procedure

1 Tap the Append Keywords bar on the on-screen keyboard.

The append keywords window appears.
2 To append a keyword, complete the following steps:
a Select the keyword tag button to view available keywords for the tag.
b Select one keyword, from the following choices for each keyword tag:

Keyword tag Keyword (tag value)

Site-ID* SiteA, SiteB, and SiteC
Sector* Alpha, Beta, and Gamma
Technology* GSM900, WCDMA850, and LTE180
Test Type* RL, VSWR, DTF-RL, DTF-VSWR, and CL
Termination* Open, Load, and Antenna
Custom Any keywords you have added

c To delete the keyword you have added to the keyword field, tap the Delete button.
d To clear the keyword field, tap the Clear button.
3 Optional. You can edit any of the custom keyword tags or tag values by tapping the Edit Tags
Values or Edit Tags button, but not the factory keyword tags marked with the asterisk (*).

NOTE
You must keep the keywords marked with the asterisk (*) intact as the StrataSync
server uses them when transferring data.

4 Select the Separator option from the choices: hyphen [-], underscore [_], and None.
5 Select the As a filename option between On and Off. If you select Off, the keyword will not be
placed in a file name, but in the trace/PNG file information.
6 Tap the Save and Exit button to save and exit or the Keyboard button to return to the keyboard.

JD700B Series User’s Guide 687

Appendix

Figure 378 Append keywords window

688 JD700B Series User’s Guide

 Appendix

Appendix L – Supported map display parameters

Your CellAdvisor instrument provides the RAN Performance Indicator feature in the LTE signal analyzer
mode. Setting map display parameters that your instrument supports is important to have test results as you
desire as the instrument supports RANAdvisor’s map display parameters with limitations. Following table will
help you select parameters properly by showing what are supported.

Parameter Parameter Name Support Parameter Parameter Name Support

Category Category
LTE Cell Cell Name LTE N1 RSRP Rx(1) (dBm)
Info Cell Identity Serving N1 RSRP (dBm)
Parameters Physical Cell ID and N1 RSRQ (dB)
Tracking Area Code Neighbor N2 PCI
Parameters
MCC N2 RSRP Rx(0) (dBm)
(continued)
MNC N2 RSRP Rx(1) (dBm)
DL E-ARFCN N2 RSRP (dBm)
UL E-ARFCN N2 RSRQ (dB)
DL Bandwidth N3 PCI
UL Bandwidth N3 RSRP Rx(0) (dBm)
Band Indicator N3 RSRP Rx(1) (dBm)
Allowed Access N3 RSRP (dBm)
RLC Tx Throughput YES N3 RSRQ (dB)
RLC Rx Throughput YES N4 PCI
MAC Tx Throughput YES N4 RSRP Rx(0) (dBm)
MAX Rx Throughput YES N4 RSRP Rx(1) (dBm)
LTE Mode N4 RSRP (dBm)
LTE TDD SF Assignment N4 RSRQ (dB)
LTE TDD Special SF N5 PCI
Patterns
CQI CW0 YES N5 RSRP Rx(0) (dBm)
CQI CW1 YES N5 RSRP Rx(1) (dBm)
LTE ML1 RSSI RX (0) (dBm) YES N5 RSRP (dBm)
Serving Cell RSSI RX (1) (dBm) YES N5 RSRQ (dB)
Measurement RSSI (dBm) YES N6 PCI
RSRP Rx(0) (dBm) YES N6 RSRP Rx(0) (dBm)
RSRP Rx(0) (dBm) YES N6 RSRP Rx(1) (dBm)
RSRP (dBm) YES N6 RSRP (dBm)
RSRQ Rx(0) (dBm) YES LTE Demod PDSCH RNTI ID
RSRQ RX(1) (dBm) YES Config PDSCH RNTI Type
RSRQ (dB) YES Parameters eNodeB Tx Antennas
SINR Rx(0) (dB) YES eNodeB Rx Antennas
SINR Rx(1) (dB) YES Transmission Mode
PUSCH Tx (dBm) YES Spatial Rank
PUCCH Tx (dBm) YES RB Alloc for Slot 0 (%)
SRS Tx (dBm) YES RB Alloc for Slot 1 (%)
LTE Serving E-ARFCN YES Freq Selective PMI
Serving and Serving Physical Cell-ID YES PMI Index
Neighbor Serving RSRP (dBm) YES Stream 0 TBS (bits)
Parameters Serving RSRQ (dB) YES Stream 0 Modulation YES
Detected Cells PCI Traffic to Pilot Block Ratio
Neighbor Cell Count Stream 1 TBS (bits)
N1 PCI Stream 1 Modulation
N1 RSRP Rx(0) (dBm) PB

JD700B Series User’s Guide 689

Document No. 22079955
Rev. 6.0, October 2015
English

Viavi Solutions
North America: 1.844.GO VIAVI / 1.844.468.4284
Latin America: +52 55 5543 6644
EMEA: +49 7121 862273
APAC: +1 512 201 6534
All Other Regions: viavisolutions.com/contacts